2016 Ssang Yong Rexton Y295 Owner Manual

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Descriptions Capacity Specifications

Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Total Quartz INEO ECS 5W30, SK ZIC SY
D20DTR/D22DTR ≒ 6.0ℓ
5W30 or Approved by MB Sheet 229.51 SAE 5W/30)
Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 or MB Sheet
Engine Oil D27DT/D27DTP ≒ 8.5ℓ 229.3 or MB Sheet 229.31 for DSL/GSL ENG without CDPF) (Approved by MB Sheet
229.31 for DSL ENG with CDPF)
Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 SAE 10W40 or
G32D ≒ 9.0ℓ
MB Sheet 229.3 SAE 5W40 or MB Sheet 229.51 SAE 5W30, SN/GF-5 SAE 5W20)
D20DTR/D22DTR 8.5ℓ Ssangyong genuine coolant
Engine Coolant D27DT/D27DTP 11.0 ~ 11.5ℓ Anti-Freeze SYC-1025, Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
G32D 11.5 ~ 12.0ℓ ORGANIC ACID TYPE, COLOR:BLUE
Automatic Transmission 5A/T ≒ 8.0ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (Shell ATF 134 or Fuchs ATF 134)
Fluid 7A/T ≒ 9.0ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF 134 FE)
2WD ≒ 3.4ℓ
5M/T Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II)
Manual Transmission Fluid 4WD ≒ 3.6ℓ
6M/T ≒ 2.2ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (SAE 75W 85)
AWD ≒ 1.1ℓ
Transfer Case Fluid TOD ≒ 1.4ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
Part Time ≒ 1.4ℓ
Non IOP ≒ 1.4ℓ, ≒ 1.5ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
Front
IOP ≒ 0.78ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (Shell synthetic fuel efficient GL 75W/90)
Rigid ≒ 2.2ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
Axle Oil
D20DTR/
Rear ≒ 1.5ℓ
IRS D27DT(P) Ssangyong genuine oil (Shell synthetic fuel efficient GL 75W/90)
D22DTR ≒ 1.6ℓ
Brake / Clutch Fluid As required Ssangyong genuine oil (DOT4)
Ssangyong genuine oil (S-PSF-3)
Power Steering Fluid ≒ 1.1ℓ
* TOTAL FLUIDE DA (Extreme cold condition only)
D22DTR: Diesel 2.2 (EU6), D20DTR: Diesel 2.0 (EU5), D27DTP: Diesel 2.7 Power-Up, D27DT: Diesel 2.7, G32D: Gasoline
Warning
yy Use only Ssangyong recommended fluids and lubricants.
yy Do not mix any different types or brands of oils or fluids. This may cause damages.
yy Keep the specified levels when adding or replacing the fluids.
GETtheMANUALS.org
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOREWORD
This manual has been prepared to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
Rexton W and to provide important safety information. We urge you to read it carefully and follow
the recommendations to help assure the most enjoyable, safe, and trouble-free operation of your ve-
hicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best and is
interested in your complete satisfaction.
We would like to take this opportunity to thank you for choosing Rexton W and assure you of our
continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction.
This manual should be considered as a permanent part of your vehicle, and must remain with the ve-
hicle at the time of resale.
PYEONGTAEK, KOREA
GETtheMANUALS.org
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Opening and closing the doors with Switch panel on driver’s door trim..... 4-24
00 General Information
ignition key..................................... 2-7 Outside rearview mirror control switch
Dimensions.......................................... 0-2
Battery replacement for rekes key....... 2-8 . ................................................... 4-25
Vehicle identification............................ 0-7
Immobilizer system............................ 2-10 Remote audio controls & gear shift
Switches and devices.......................... 0-8 button (A/T) on steering wheel..... 4-26
Theft deterrent system...................... 2-12
Engine compartment........................... 0-9 Steering wheel heating switch /
Important notice................................. 0-14 heated glass switch..................... 4-28
03 Opening and Closing
Protection of the environment........... 0-15 Hazard warning flasher switch.......... 4-29
Opening and closing devices.............. 3-2
Certification....................................... 0-16 ESP OFF switch*............................... 4-30
Doors................................................... 3-4
HDC (Hill Descent Control) switch*... 4-32
Windows.............................................. 3-7
01 Safety Precautions PAS (Parking Aid System) OFF switch*
Sunroof*.............................................. 3-9
Checks before starting a journey......... 1-2 . ................................................... 4-34
Engine hood...................................... 3-12
Safety instructions............................... 1-7 Switches in center console................ 4-35
Fuel filler door.................................... 3-13
Starting the engine and driving the 4-Wheel drive system*...................... 4-36
Roof rack........................................... 3-16
vehicle.......................................... 1-17 Switches in overhead console, room
Tailgate and tailgate window............. 3-17
Vehicle care....................................... 1-20 lamp switch.................................. 4-40
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F)
04 Interior Switches 05 Instrument Cluster
. ................................................... 1-30
Precautions regarding unauthorized Switches and devices.......................... 4-2
Instrument cluster (DIESEL)................ 5-2
modification & alteration.............. 1-33 Light switch.......................................... 4-4
Instrument cluster (G32D)................... 5-4
Direct injection type diesel engine..... 1-36 Wiper and washer............................... 4-8
Indication of tire pressure
Rain sensing wiper*............................. 4-9 (TPMS equipped vehicle)*........... 5-10
02 Ignition Key & Wiper and washer switch.................. 4-10
Tire pressure monitoring system
Remote Control Key Cruise control switch* (D22DTR)...... 4-12 (TPMS)*....................................... 5-11
Remote control key and ignition key... 2-2 Cruise control switch* (D20DTR, Warning lights and indicators............ 5-17
Functions of ignition key ..................... 2-5 D27DT(P), G32D)........................ 4-18
GETtheMANUALS.org
06 Transmission and Brake 08 Seat Belt and Air Bag 10 Convenience Devices
Shift lever in manual transmission Seat belt and air bag........................... 8-2 Storage compartments and convenient
(6-speed)....................................... 6-2 Seat belt.............................................. 8-4 devices......................................... 10-2
Shift lever in manual transmission How to fasten the three point seat Adjustable steering wheel and horn
(5-speed)....................................... 6-3 belt................................................. 8-5 . ................................................... 10-4
Gear selector lever in automatic How to fasten the seat belts in Inside rearview mirror........................ 10-5
transmission*................................. 6-7 second row seat............................. 8-6 Front storage compartment/cigarette
Driving tips for automatic How to fasten the seat belt (3-point) lighter........................................... 10-6
transmission................................... 6-9 in second row seat......................... 8-7 Center console.................................. 10-7
Gear selector lever positions............. 6-11 Child restraints and pregnant woman Power outlet...................................... 10-8
Winter (W) / Standard mode (S)........ 6-19 . ..................................................... 8-9 Glove box/courtesy lamp................... 10-9
Safety mode (automatic transmission) Warnings for seat belt........................ 8-17 Rear cup holder/jack storage/
. ................................................... 6-20 Air bag*.............................................. 8-19 DVD changer*/navigation unit*
Parking aid system (PAS)*................ 6-21 Airbag non-inflation conditions.......... 8-23 storage....................................... 10-10
Warnings for air bag.......................... 8-27 Seatback pocket/map pocket.......... 10-11
Rearview camera system*................. 6-25
Sun visors........................................ 10-12
Front view camera system*............... 6-26
09 V
entilation, Heating, Front room lamps/sunglasses
Brake system..................................... 6-27
Air Conditioning and storage....................................... 10-13
Parking brake operation.................... 6-32
Air Purification System Center and rear room lamps/assist
grip............................................. 10-14
Heater/air conditioner system.............. 9-2
07 Seats Storage box in luggage compartment/
Warnings and cautions........................ 9-4
Devices related to seat........................ 7-2 luggage net................................ 10-15
Automatic heater / air conditioner........ 9-5
Driver’s seat........................................ 7-5 Rear heated glass/removable
Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)......... 9-11 ashtray....................................... 10-17
Passenger’s seat............................... 7-10
Second row seat................................ 7-11 Defogging and defrosting.................. 9-12 Roof rack*........................................ 10-18
Third row seat.................................... 7-13 Replacing air conditioner filter........... 9-13 Digital clock..................................... 10-19
Seat heating/ventilation function*...... 7-15 AQS (air quality system).................... 9-15 Audio system*................................. 10-20
GETtheMANUALS.org
Smart audio*.................................... 10-21 Tire.................................................. 12-33
12 Service and Maintenance
SD card slot, terminal for connecting Wiper blade replacement................ 12-37
Daily check list................................... 12-2
external device and port*........... 10-22 Do-it-yourself operation................... 12-38
Locations in engine compartment..... 12-3
Bluetooth hands-free system........... 10-24 Scheduled maintenance services (EU)
Engine oil........................................... 12-8
- diesel engine (D22DTR).......... 12-39
Engine coolant................................. 12-11
11 In Case of Emergency Scheduled maintenance services (GEN)
Air cleaner....................................... 12-13 - diesel engine (D22DTR).......... 12-42
Starting the engine with jumper
Power steering fluid......................... 12-15 Scheduled maintenance services (EU)
cables.......................................... 11-2
Fuel filter and priming pump (without - diesel engine (D20DTR).......... 12-45
Cautions when a tire is flat................ 11-4
additional water separator)........ 12-16 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN)
Warning triangle*............................... 11-5
Fuel filter and water separator* (with - diesel engine (D20DTR).......... 12-48
OVM tools.......................................... 11-6 additional water separator)........ 12-17 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN)
Removing the spare tire.................... 11-7 Fuel filter (D20DTR, D22DTR)........ 12-20 - diesel engine (D27DT/D27DTP)
Changing a spare tire........................ 11-8 Fuel filter.......................................... 12-22 . ................................................. 12-51
Cautions when changing the tire..... 11-13 Gasoline engine.............................. 12-22 Scheduled maintenance services
How to use service kit* (emergency Drive belt (for gasoline) / (gasoline engine)....................... 12-54
puncture repair kit)..................... 11-14 brake pedal & clutch pedal........ 12-23
When the engine is overheating...... 11-20 Parking brake / catalytic converter 13 Lamp
Water separator warning light and . ................................................. 12-24
engine check warning light........ 11-22 Bulb specifications and functional
Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)..... 12-25 check........................................... 13-2
Shift lever lock release and safety Transfercase fluid............................ 12-26
mode reset................................. 11-23 Hid headlamp*................................... 13-3
Washer fluid..................................... 12-27 Location of exterior lamps................. 13-4
Towing a disabled vehicle................ 11-24
Battery............................................. 12-28 Interior lamp...................................... 13-9
Emergency towing........................... 11-25
Spark plugs..................................... 12-30
Trailer towing................................... 11-27
Gasoline engine.............................. 12-30 14 Index
Accident or fire................................ 11-32
Fuse and relay box.......................... 12-31
Emission reduction device............... 11-33
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Dimensions.......................................................0-2
3
Vehicle identification.........................................0-7
Switches and devices.......................................0-8 4
Engine compartment.........................................0-9
5
Important notice..............................................0-14
Protection of the environment.........................0-15 6
Certification.....................................................0-16 7
General
8
Information
9
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dimensions Unit: mm
1 Top View Front View
4
1,900
7
Side View Rear View
8
10
11
12
2,835
13 4,755
14
0-2 General Information

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (I) * ( ): Optional, [ ]: 2WD, < >: DPF
D20DTR: Diesel 2.0, D27DT: Diesel 2.7, D27DTP: Diesel 2.7 Power-Up, G32D: Gasoline
Descriptions D22DTR D20DTR D27DT D27DTP G32D
Overall length (mm) 4,755 ← ← ← ←

Overall width (mm) 1,900 ← ← ← ←
Overall height (mm) 1,840 ← ← ← ←
Gross vehicle weight (kg) 2,710 [2,650] ← 2,740 ← ←
1,995 (2,090) 1,985 (2,053)
A/T 2,033 (2,098) 2,008 (2,080) 2,021 (2,095)
General [1,954 (2,048)] [1,925 (1,993)]
Curb vehicle weight (kg)
1,984 (2,069) 1,960 (2,020) _ _
M/T 2,007 (2,072)
[1,917 (2,003)] [1,901 (1,960)]
Fuel Diesel ← ← ← Gasoline
Fuel tank capacity (ℓ) 78 ← ← ← ←
Minimum turning radius 5.5m ← ← ← ←
Numbers of cylinders/ 5 / 18:1
4 / 15.5:1 4 / 16.5:1 5 / 17.5:1 6 / 10:1
Compression ratio (EURO IV 17.5:1)
Total displacement (cc) 2,157 1,998 2,696 ← 3,199
Camshaft arrangement DOHC ← ← ← ←
165 PS / 4,000 186 PS / 4,000
220 PS / 6,100
A/T <155 PS / rpm <161 PS / rpm <180 PS
rpm
Max. power 178 PS / 4,000 rpm 3,400 ~ 4,000 4,000 rpm> /4,000 rpm>
Engine
rpm> 165 PS / _ _
M/T
4,000 rpm
340 Nm / 1,800 402 Nm / 1,600 312 Nm / 4,600
A/T <360 Nm /
400 Nm / ~ 3,250 rpm ~ 3,000 rpm rpm
Max. torque 1,500 ~ 2,800
1,400 ~ 2,800 rpm 340 Nm / 1,800 _ _
M/T rpm>
~ 3,250 rpm
Idle speed 700 ± 50 rpm 780 ± 50 rpm 750 ± 20 rpm ← 700 ± 50 rpm
0-3
GETtheMANUALS.org General Information
Specifications (II) *( ): Optional
Water- cooled /
Cooling system ← ← ← ←
forced circulation
Coolant capacity (ℓ) 8.5 ← 11.0 ~ 11.5 ← 11.5 ~ 12.0
Gear pump,
Engine Lubrication type ← ← ← ←
forced circulation
Max. oil capacity (ℓ) (when shipping) 6.0 ← 9.2 ← 9.8
Turbocharger, _
Turbocharger and cooling type ← ← ←
air-cooled
Semi- Remote
_ _
Operating type control, floor change ← ←
type
_ _
1st 4.489 ← 4.315
_ _
2nd 2.337 ← 2.475
Manual
_ _
Transmission 3rd 1.350 ← 1.536
_ _
Gear ratio 4th 1.000 ← 1.000
5th 0.784 ← 0.807 _ _
_ _ _
6th 0.679 ←
_ _
Reverse 4.253 ← 3.919

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (III) *( ): Optional
Model Electronic, 5-speed ← ← ← ←

Operating type Floor change type ← ← ← ←
1st 4.377 3.595 ← ← 3.951
2nd 2.859 2.186 ← ← 2.423
3rd 1.921 1.405 ← ← 1.486
4th 1.368 1.000 ← ← 1.000
Automatic
Transmission 5th 1.000 0.831 ← ← 0.833
Gear ratio 6th 0.820 - - - -
7th 0.728 - - - -
Reverse
3.416 3.167 ← ← 3.147
1st
Reverse
2.231 1.926 ← ← 1.930
2nd
Part-time Part-time
Model Part-time ← AWD
(TOD) (AWD)
_ Planetary gear
Type Planetary gear type ← ←
Transfer Case type
_
High (4H) 1.000 : 1 ← ← 1.000 : 1
Gear ratio _ 2.483 : 1
Low (4L) 2.483 : 1 ← ←
(AWD: _)
_ _
Operating type Hydraulic type ← ←
Clutch (M/T) Dry single _ _
Disc type ← ←
diaphragm type
Type Rack and pinion ← ← ← ←
Power
Inner 38.2° ← ← ← ←
Steering Steering angle
Outer 34.1° ← ← ← ←
0-5
Specifications (IV) *( ): Optional
Drive shaft type Ball joint type ← ← ← ←

Front Axle Build-up type
Axle housing type Build-up type ← ← IOP type
(IOP type)
Semi-floating
Drive shaft type Semi-floating type ← type (Ball joint ← ←
Rear Axle type)
Build-up type
Axle housing type ← ← ← ←
(IRS type)
Master cylinder type Tandem type ← ← ← ←
Vacuum assisted
Booster type ← ← ← ←
booster type
Front
Brake Disc type ← ← ← ←
wheels
Brake type
Rear
Disc type ← ← ← ←
wheels
Parking brake Cable type ← ← ← ←
Double - wishbone +
Front suspension ← ← ← ←
coil spring
Suspension 5-link + coil spring 5-link + coil
5-link + coil
Rear suspension (Multi-link + Coil ← spring (Multi-link ←
spring
spring) + Coil spring)
R-134a / 720 ± 30g
Air Conditioner Refrigerant (capacity) (R-134a / 1050 ± ← ← ← ←
30g)
Battery type / Capacity (V-AH) MF / 12 - 90 ← ← ← ←
Electrical Starter capacity (V-kW) 12 - 2.3 ← 12 - 2.2 ← 12 - 1.8
Alternator capacity (V-A) 12-120 ← 12-140 ← 12-115

GETtheMANUALS.org
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
1. Engine Number 2. Vin Label 3. Chassis Number
Gasoline Engine: The engine The chassis number is stamped

number is stamped on the lower on the frame behind the front
area of cylinder block in exhaust right tire.
manifold side.
4. Certification Label
D22DTR D20DTR D27DT D27DTP

Diesel Engine (D22DTR, D20DTR, D27DT, D27DTP): The engine number is stamped on The certification label is located
the lower area of cylinder block behind the Intake manifold. on the driver’s door sill.
0-7
SWITCHES AND DEVICES
Room lamp switch
Sunroof switch*
Light switch
Wiper and washer switch
Remote control switch
on steering wheel
Rear fog Center switch

light switch*
Door lock/
unlock switch
HLLD* Auto cruise*
Driver seat heating/ventilation switch*
4-wheel drive switch*
Passenger seat heating/ventilation switch*
Seat position memory switch*
USB port & Aux jack (USB & HDMI port)*
Window control switch
Door lock/unlock switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
diesel engine (d22dtR)
Brake and clutch

fluid reservoir Front washer
fluid reservoir
Fuel filter
Coolant surge Power steering

tank fluid reservoir
Engine oil cap Relay and
fuse box
Engine oil
dipstick
Air cleaner Battery
0-9
Relay and
fuse box
Brake and clutch
fluid reservoir
Front washer
fluid reservoir
Power steering Fuel filter

Coolant surge
Engine oil cap fluid reservoir
tank
Engine oil
dipstick
Air cleaner
Battery

GETtheMANUALS.org
diesel Engine (d27dt, d27dtP)
Without Additional Water Separator
Front washer 1 2
Coolant surge tank fluid reservoir
Engine oil cap
Engine oil dipstick 1. Priming pump

2. Fuel filter
Relay and
fuse box
Air cleaner
Battery
Power steering
fluid reservoir
0-11
diesel engine (d27dt, d27dtP)
With Additional Water Separator
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir

(for manual transmission)
Coolant surge tank
Engine oil Engine oil cap

dipstick
Relay
and
fuse box
Air cleaner Power steering
fluid reservoir
Battery
1. Priming pump 3
2. Fuel filter
2
3. Water separator
4. Front washer fluid reservoir
1

GETtheMANUALS.org
gasoline engine (G32D)

Coolant surge tank Front washer
fluid reservoir
Engine oil cap

Engine oil dipstick
Relay and
fuse box
Air cleaner
Battery
Power steering
fluid reservoir
0-13
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Please read this manual and follow the instructions carefully. All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual
are based on the latest product information available at the
Signal words such as “WARNING”, “CAUTION” and “NOTE”
time of publication.
have special meanings.
Ssangyong reserves the right to change specifications or de-
WARNING sign at any time without notice and without incurring any obli-
gation whatsoever.
Warning
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not This vehicle may not comply with the standards or regulations
avoided, could result in death or serious injury. of other countries. Before attempting to register this vehicle in
any other country, check all applicable regulations and make
CAUTION any necessary modifications.
Caution
This manual describes options and trim levels available at the
time of printing, and therefore, some of the items covered may
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
not apply to your vehicle. If any doubt exists about any of the
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or property dam-
age. options or trim levels, please do not hesitate to contact your
Ssangyong Distributor for information on the latest specifica-
tions.
This must absolutely be observed for safety precau-
tions. * : This asterisk in this manual signifies that an item of equip-
ment is not included in all vehicles (model variants, engine
options, models specific to one country, optional equipment,
NOTE etc.).
Note We would like to point out that non Ssangyong Genuine parts
NOTE indicates information to assist maintenance and instruc- and accessories have not been examined and approved by
tions. Ssangyong, and in spite of continuous market product moni-
toring, we cannot certify the suitability nor the safety of such
For product design changes products whether they are installed or intended for fitment in
For a highest level of safety and quality, we are innovating our vehicles
our vehicles. Ssangyong is not liable for any damage caused
through our continual research and development efforts. As a result, by the use of non Ssangyong Genuine parts and accessories.
the specifications are subject to change for the purpose of improve-
ment without any notice and you may find material in this manual that
does not apply to your specific vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
CAUTIONS FOR ENVIRONMENT
You can contribute to the protection of the environment by fol-
Ssangyong Motor Company is pursuing environmental friendly
lowing the below rules.
policies and initiatives. This is the way we can save the natural
resources and humankind can live harmoniously with nature.
You also can contribute to the protection of the environment Driving Conditions
while driving your Ssangyong vehicle. � Drive off the vehicle slowly.
The fuel consumption and engine speed, transmission, brake � Avoid short trip.
and wear of the tires are subject to the following factors:
� Keep the specified tire inflation pressure.
� Driving conditions
� Unload the unnecessary goods from luggage compartment.
� Driving habits
� Always check the fuel economy.
� Have the maintenance service regularly.
� Visit Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center for maintenance service.
Driving Habits
� Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the en-
gine.
� Keep the safe distance with vehicle ahead.
� Avoid abrupt and frequent acceleration.
� Shift the gear at proper time and do not overrun the engine
in each gear.
� Turn off the engine when you stop the vehicle for a long
time.
0-15
CERTIFICATION
1. Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Hereby, SsangYong, declares that the in-vehicle mounted radio systems are in compliance
CE EU
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC
Model: TSSSG4G5 and TSSRE4Db
FCC ID: OYGTSSRE4DB
ORD. No: 14778/DFRS19614/F-50
This device complies with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
FCC (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and AMERICA
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
LOGO
Certificate in the user manual due to product size

CU TR CIS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Model: TSSRE4Db
The device passed all the conformity assesment procedures to CU TR.
EAC mark in the user manual due to product size.

GETtheMANUALS.org
2. FOB/FOLDING
FCC ID: DEO-MT-FLIP01
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
FCC (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may AMERICA
Warning
LOGO
TR CIS
0-17
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
C
hecks before starting a journey......................1-2
3
S
afety instructions.............................................1-7
S
tarting the engine and driving the vehicle....1-17 4
V
ehicle care.....................................................1-20
5
C
aring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F).......1-30
1
P
recautions regarding unauthorized 6
modification & alteration.................................1-33
7
D
irect injection type diesel engine..................1-36 Safety
8
Precautions
9
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY
1 Check The Vehicle Outside Inside Of Engine Compartment
2 vr
vr
MAX
3 MIN MAX
vr vr
MIN
vr
4
Engine oil Coolant

5
6
MAX vr vr
MIN
7 MAX
MIN
Brake/clutch fluid Power steering fluid

8
yy Make sure to carry out the daily inspections before starting yy Check the engine oil and other fluid/oil levels in the engine
9 off your vehicle. compartment.
yy Check the tire inflation and wear.Clean the windshield and
10 rear glasses, side mirrors, and room mirror.
yy Make sure that the engine hood and tailgate are properly closed.
11 yy Make sure that there are no obstacles in the danger area
around the vehicle.
12 yy Make sure that there is not any trace of leak around the vehicle.
 For details, refer to chapter 12 “Service and maintenance”.
13
14
1-2 Safety Precautions

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check The Tires
yy Using wheel and tire other than the specified sizes could
cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehicle
control, resulting in a serious accident.
yy The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may
cause abnormal operation of the steering wheel, increased
fuel consumption, increase braking distance, vibration, im-
proper operation of ABS/ESP, or uneven tire wear. It may
also damage to the powertrain of the vehicle.
yy Use only the same tires from same tire manufacturer for all
the wheels. Otherwise, the powertrain may be damaged.
yy Check the conditions and pressure of the temporary (spare)
tire as needed and always keep it available. The temporary
tire should be replaced with a regular tire as soon as pos-
sible.
yy Check the tire inflation and wear everyday and replace if
necessary.
yy Be sure to keep the specified tire inflation pressure. Note
What is “Standing Wave”?
yy Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the
During driving, the rotating tire repeats deformation and restoring
spare wheel, before any long journey. When driving the ve-
movement in its tread portion. However, when a tire with insufficient
hicle with insufficient tire inflation pressure, the tire could be inflation pressure rolls on the road with high speed, a wave-like
blown out, because of standing wave symptom, resulting in deformation occurs in the radial direction near and behind the tire
severe injury and death. tread portion. This wavy deformation is called “ standing wave”. If
this symptom lasts for an extended period of time, the tire could be
blown out in a short period of time.
Safety Precautions 1-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check The Vehicle Inside
yy Do not put anything under driver’s seat.
Caution
yy Do not leave empty bottles or cans near or under the driver’s seat.
If it hinders the brake or accelerator pedal operation, it may cause
an unexpected accident.
yy Only use a floor mat with the correct size for your vehicle. And,
make sure not to move the mat while driving. If it hinders the brake
or accelerator pedal operation, it may cause an unexpected ac-
cident.
yy Do not wear the uncomfortable shoes such as high hills or slip-
pers when driving.
yy Adjust the driver’s seat, headrest and steering wheel for

comfortable driving.
y Adjust the outside and inside rear view mirrors.
y
Caution
Do not attempt to adjust the driver’s seat, headrest, rear view mir-
rors, or steering wheel while driving. Adjustments should be done
before driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Black-Face
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
Standard
READY
yy Check that all appropriate warning lights, indicators and yy Check the operations of the clutch pedal, accelerator pedal,
gauges (fuel, vehicle speed, engine rpm) are operating and brake pedal.
when turning the ignition key to the “ON” position.
Caution
Release the parking brake and check that the Brake warning light on
the instrument cluster is turned off.
Warning
When releasing the parking brake, firmly press the brake pedal so
that the vehicle is completely stationary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy Fasten the seat belts and be sure that all other occupants yy Keep the safety precautions for seat belt (refer to chapter 8).
have fastened theirs properly. yy Objects placed in the rear seat or luggage room must not
yy Do not drive with a twisted or tangled seat belt. exceed the height of the seat. It may fall down during the
hard braking and could result in an unexpected accident.
yy Slide the latch plate of the seat belt into the buckle until you
yy Make sure that there are no person or obstacles in the dan-
hear a “click”. gerous area around the vehicle.
yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when releasing the park-
Caution
ing brake.
Do not recline the seatback with the seat belt fastened. You could
slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or
death.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Infant, Child, Old Person No Alcohol Drugs!
yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle yy Avoid driving for an extended period of time. Driving con-
with the doors locked. They can move the vehicle unexpect- tinuously without rest makes you prone to dozing off and
edly. They can be suffocated in especially hot weather. thus causes an accident. For your safety, take a rest every
yy To prevent children from interfering with your driving by ac- 2 hours.
cidental movements or misusing of devices, children should yy Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs is prohibited.
sit in the rear seat. It impairs judgment, making driving highly risky. Drunk driv-
yy Do not let children, infants, old people, or a pregnant ing is also a legal offense.
woman sit in the front passenger seat with the airbag. The yy Driving after taking medicine can be more dangerous than
degree of shock of the airbag’s expansion can be fatal or the drunk driving depending on the medicine you took.
inflict serious injuries to such passengers. An infant or small Therefore do not drive the car after taking medicine.
child should always be restrained in a proper infant or child
restraint in rear seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Sleeping In Your Vehicle Do Not Drive with Tailgate Or
yy Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In par- Doors Open
ticular, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine running yy Do not run the engine with the tailgate open to avoid ex-
and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffo- haust gas entering into passenger compartment.
cate to death.
yy If you drive your vehicle with the tailgate open, loose ob-
yy Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts jects inside the vehicle may cause an accident.
you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts.
yy Driving the vehicle with the doors open puts the passenger
yy While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift at risk of being thrown out, which can cause serious injury.
lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident. While
sleeping in the car with the engine running, you may ac- yy Always drive the vehicle with the doors and tailgate locked.
cidentally step on the accelerator, thereby overheating the Opening a door during driving, especially by children, may
engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire. cause a serious accident.
Cabin Ventilation
yy Volatile organic compounds, or VOCs, can be emitted from
the materials in the cabin of the vehicle parked for a long
time in direct sunlight. Therefore, to prevent the driver and
passengers from being exposed to these harmful chemicals
and keep the comfortable indoor environment, open all win-
dows of the vehicle which is parked under the sun prior to
entering.
yy Prolonged driving without proper ventilation can cause
headaches and dizziness. Set the air source selection
switch to the fresh air intake mode for as long as possible or
open the windows periodically while driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do Not Stick Any Part Of Your Body Power Window
Out Of The Window Or Sunroof
Do not stick any part of your body out of the window and sun- yy When you operate the rear windows from the driver’s seat
roof while the car is running or while you are maneuvering to while a child sits in the rear, make sure that no body part of
park. the child is between the window and the window frame.
You might be hurt by the passing vehicles or other unseen ob- yy When carrying children in the rear seat, press the rear door
stacles. window lock switch to make the rear door switches inopera-
tive.
yy Make sure that all passengers have their body parts such
as hands inside the vehicle.
yy When closing the windows, be aware of safety conditions
before operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check For Any Passing Vehicle Stopping And Parking The Vehicle
When Getting Off yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle
with the doors locked. They can move the vehicle unexpect-
edly. They can be suffocated in especially hot weather.
yy When parking the vehicle on a hilly road, apply the parking
brake and chock the blocks under the wheels. And, place
the gear shift lever in “R” (when parked downhill) or “1”
(when parked uphill) for vehicles with the manual transmis-
sion or place the gear shift lever in “P” for vehicles with the
automatic transmission.
yy If possible, do not stop and park the vehicle on the steep
road.
yy If possible, do not park the vehicle in a humid area or en-
closed area.
yy Do not park in places where hay, foliage, paper, rags, oil, or
other easily inflammable materials are kept. While driving or
after immediately driving, the muffler and exhaust pipe are
hot; inflammable materials near the vehicle might cause a
When getting off, check the rear and side of the car for pass- fire.
ing vehicles or pedestrians.
yy When running the engine while stopping, keep enough dis-
Vehicles or motorcycles coming from the rear, if unchecked, tance from the wall to avoid a fire and discoloration of ve-
might stumble on you when you open the door. hicle.
yy Apply the parking brake when you park the vehicle.
yy Do not use “P” position as a parking brake. Securely apply
the parking brake when you park the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warming Up The Engine Prohibition Of Sudden Accelerat-
yy Do not drive without warming up the engine. Driving imme- ing, Braking And Starting
diately after starting the engine may decrease the engine’s Do not accelerate, start and brake the vehicle suddenly. Oth-
life expectancy. Warm up the engine before moving your erwise, it may increase fuel consumption and cause risk of a
vehicle. car accident. Accelerate or decelerate softly.
yy Do not warm up the engine excessively. Warm up the en-
gine just until the coolant temperature gauge begins to
move. Do Not Turn The Steering Wheel
yy Excessive engine warming increases the fuel consumption Abruptly
and air pollution. An optimized warming up time is approx. 2
Abrupt operation of steering wheel makes the vehicle unstable
minutes.
and may cause an accident.
yy Do not warm up in an airtight space. Exhaust fume may re-
sult in toxicities.
 Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up period. Do Not Run The Engine In An En-
closed Area
Do Not Stop The Engine While Driv- Leaving the engine running in an enclosed place with no air
ventilation, might result in death from carbon monoxide poi-
ing soning.
Do not stop the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the
steering wheel heavier, the brake performance lower and, con-
sequently, gets extremely dangerous. Do not use a cellular phone or
watch DMB including DVD while
driving
Using your cellular phone or watching DMB (including DVD)
while driving will distract yourself and may cause an accident.
If necessary, pull over your vehicle safely to use your cellular
phone.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Passing The Intersection Or Engine Brake
Railway Crossing When driving down a long slope, use the engine brake effect
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the ve- by downshifting the transmission in steps according to the
hicle to check the safety and drive through as fast as you can driving conditions while using the service brake. An excessive
while using low speed gear and without shifting the gear. If the operation of the service brake could result in a “Fade” or “Vapor
engine is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway Lock” effect.
crossing, get someone to help you and move the car to a safe
place quickly. Fade?
Reduction or loss in braking force due to loss of friction be-
tween the brake pads and discs, caused by heat build-up
Hazardous Materials through repeated or prolonged brake application.
Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the
Vapor Lock?
console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode
and cause a fire. When the brake is excessively applied on a downhill, some
bubbles can be formed in brake cylinder or in brake lines.
Because of these bubbles, hydraulic braking pressure can-
Extinguisher not be transferred to braking units of the vehicle despite the
For safety, we strongly recommend that you have an extin- fully depressed brake pedal.
guisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be
familiar with how to use it.
System Protection (Delayed Ac-
celeration)
Do not depress the brake pedal while driving with the acceler-
ator pedal depressed. Otherwise, the response from accelera-
tor pedal may be delayed. This symptom is the safety function
to protect the vehicle’s powertrain system. This symptom can
be eliminated if you depress and release the accelerator pedal
once with the brake pedal not depressed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Being Careful With Accessories Always Using Ssangyong Genuine
Do not attach accessories or other unnecessary things to your Parts
car’s windows as they might interfere with your driving. At- yy You can maintain the safety and performance of your car by
tached accessories can work as a convex lens and cause a using only specified parts or Ssangyong genuine parts.
fire or cause an accident.
yy You can distinguish specified parts by their part numbers
and hologram.
Being Careful While Checking
Coolant
To avoid being scalded, do not remove the engine coolant res-
ervoir cap when the engine is hot .
Warning
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the en-
gine and the radiator are hot. The cooling system may
spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious
injuries.
Part numbers Hologram
Caution
yy The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non-
Ssangyong genuine parts.
yy You can distinguish an authentic Ssangyong genuine part by its
hologram.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving On A Snowy Or Icy Road Driving On A Sandy Or Muddy Road
yy Shift to the lowest possible gear and drive slowly. yy Keep your speed steady as low as possible.
yy Since your braking distance is longer than usual, allow a yy While driving, be careful not to accelerate or stop too quick-
longer following distance. ly because you might get stuck in sand or mud.
yy If you accelerate or brake too fast, your vehicle will slide yy If your vehicle gets stuck in sand or mud, insert a rock or a
and you might get in an accident, so drive with caution. piece of wood under the stuck wheel, lightly apply the accel-
When braking, use the engine brake; apply your brakes only erator pedal and gently shift back and forth between the re-
after you have slowed down considerably. verse and forward gear to allow inertia to get your vehicle out.
yy When going down a slippery downhill, use the engine brake
and drive slowly. Caution
When your vehicle is stuck in sand or mud and you step on the accel-
Caution erator pedal excessively in order to get out of there, the tire slip may oc-
cur which results in the damage of the transmission and corresponding
When traveling on a snowy or icy road, use snow tires for safer
drive system. In that case, get another vehicle to tow you if possible.
driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving On Unpaved And Mountain Going Through Water
Roads yy If water gets into the electric system or engine, it might
yy Before driving, check road conditions such as if the road cause irreparable damage to your vehicle. Please refrain
suddenly ends, or if there is enough space for a U-turn in from underwater driving.
the middle of the road. yy If going through water is unavoidable, choose a shallow
yy It’s easy to slide in a road covered with much sand or with spot where the exhaust outlet wouldn’t get submerged in
much dry dirt. Keep your speed low and steady. water and proceed slowly at a steady speed.
yy There is a danger of driving off the mountain road, so stay yy Before going through water, get out of your vehicle and
alert. check the bottom of the river. Do not go through water if the
bottom is sandy or covered with big rocks.
yy When coasting downhill, do not change gears; go down
slowly by applying the engine brake. yy If several vehicles are going through water together, the
first vehicle might burrow into the bottom, so be careful and
cross in a different place if possible.
Warning
In high mountain area  Important things to remember when going through
The operation stability of diesel engine is not guaranteed in high water
mountainous area over 2,500 meters. The short trip such as passing
yy If the engine stops while you are going through water, do
through tunnel in this area is acceptable. However, do not keep driv-
not try to restart. Get your vehicle towed.
ing there for a long time. If you drive your vehicle in very high altitude
for long time, the engine could be damaged. The engine power, yy Be particularly careful not to allow water to enter into the
climbing ability and emission are subject to the altitude. engine through the air cleaner.
yy Never change gears while going through water.
Warning
If water gets into the brake system, the effectiveness of the brakes
decreases. After going through water, move slowly and gently ap-
plying the brakes several times so that frictional heat dries the brake
pads and discs. Check if the brakes work properly before continuing
driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
 Checking your vehicle after going through water Freeway Driving
yy Check the front, rear, right and left sides, transaxle, axle
yy Before getting on a freeway, listen to the weather forecast,
hubs, propeller shaft, oil and fluid levels, and underbody; if
prepare thoroughly and check the fuel level, brake system,
you discover problems, get your vehicle checked immedi-
cooling system, and tires.
ately.
yy Always respect the speed limit and refrain from speeding.
yy Check all lamps and other electrical devices. If necessary,
replace damaged components and get your vehicle checked. yy Allow for a safe following distance, avoid sudden steering
movements.
yy Check for damages to the vehicle body and underbody; if
you discover problems, get your vehicle checked immedi- yy When it rains or snows and the weather conditions are ad-
ately. verse, double the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle running in front of you. And reduce your speed by
yy If the vehicle body is very dirty, wash your car to protect it.
half.
Driving On Hill Roads Caution

Do not idle the engine for a long time; it wastes fuel and causes
Position the gearshift lever in accordance with the road condi- environmental pollution.
tions. yy Drive at a slow speed for the first 2 km if possible.
yy Do not load your vehicle with unnecessary stuff.
Warning yy Refrain from quick accelerating and abrupt braking, travel at a
yy If you suddenly use the engine brake on an icy or slippery road, the steady speed.
vehicle might slide and get in an accident. Use the engine brakes yy When you park or stop for a long time, turn the engine off.
after fully reducing your vehicle speed. yy Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
yy If you repeatedly apply your brakes on a long downgrade, they yy Keep your vehicle in the best possible condition by periodically
may overheat, their effectiveness decreases and an accident checking it and perform maintenance.
might occur. When on a long downgrade, use the engine brake
together with your brakes.
Caution
If you suddenly apply the engine brake while traveling at a high
speed, the engine may get damaged. Slow down the vehicle speed
and then downshift the gear.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the Engine and Driving the Vehicle
ENGINE STARTING
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. * Gasoline engine equipped vehicle
2. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to
dangerous area around the vehicle. “START” position and hold it there without depressing the
accelerator pedal until the engine starts (a maximum of 10
Caution seconds), then release the key.
yy The engine in automatic transmission equipped vehicle can be * Diesel engine equipped vehicle
started only when the gear selector lever is at the “P” or “N”
position. The engine in manual transmission equipped vehicle can Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the
be started only when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. “ON” position. As soon as the glow indicator ( ) goes
yy Do not turn the ignition key to the “START” position while the out, turn it to “START” position and hold it there without
engine is running. It could result in serious start motor damage. depressing the accelerator pedal until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.
3. * Automatic transmission equipped vehicle
Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position and de- CAUTION
press the brake pedal. If the engine fails to start, turn the key back to “LOCK” position
* Manual transmission equipped vehicle and wait for 10 seconds. Then try again before any attempt to start
the engine.
Move the gear shift lever to the Neutral position and fully
depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal. 5. Warm up the engine properly according to the ambient tem-
perature.
Warning
Depress the brake pedal when the gear shift lever is at the “P”
(A/T) or “Neutral”(M/T) position. Never depress the accelerator
pedal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING OFF STOPPING THE ENGINE
1. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the 1. Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
dangerous area around the vehicle.
2. Release the parking brake. Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position.
3. * Automatic transmission equipped vehicle * Manual transmission equipped vehicle
Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into the “D” or Move the gear shift lever to the Neutral position.
“R” position. Make sure that the position indicator of “D”
or “R” comes on. Slowly release the brake pedal to begin 3. * REKES system equipped vehicle
moving. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position.
* Manual transmission equipped vehicle 4. Apply the parking brake.
Keep the brake pedal and clutch pedal depressed and shift 5. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder.
into the “1” or “R” position. Release the brake pedal and
gradually depress the accelerator pedal while slowly releas- Note
ing the clutch to begin moving. Diesel engine learning mode: The learning mode of the fuel injector
is performed while the vehicle is driven or stationary to maintain the
optimized engine condition. Weak noise and vibration of the engine
may be accompanied by this mode. But, it is normal operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Starting the vehicle in the winter months or operating the A/C in yy If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud or sand, depressing
the summer months increases the engine rpm. Drivers must be the accelerator pedal harder only makes the tires slip more which
careful when driving at this time because the vehicle can move in turn causes damage to the transmission. If this happens, tow
faster than normal. the vehicle away or take other actions as appropriate.
yy Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle, including installa- yy Always contact the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
tion of an electronic device such as after-market remote starting Authorized Service Center for adding and changing transmission
system, could seriously affect its performance and safety and may fluid. A non-genuine fluid can cause various problems including
lead to a serious injury or death. malfunction and performance deterioration of the transmission,
yy Using a mobile telephone or two-way radio requires careful and those damages are not covered by the warranty.
considerations. The electronic control system of the vehicle is yy The application of tint film, especially metallic film, may interfere
subject to possible errors due to electronic interference caused with radio signals. Low visible light transmission (VLT) of the film
by improper use of these devices, and the electromagnetic waves can lead to malfunction in the headlamp. Also, make sure that no
can be harmful to the human body. liquid solution for application of tint film flows into the electronic
yy When leaving the vehicle unattended, always turn off the engine components of the vehicle to prevent error or malfunction.
to prevent unexpected rolling away. yy The tinted glass with very low VLT and enhanced solar control
yy Always apply the parking brake with the brake pedal depressed characteristics reduces visibility through the glass significantly,
when the vehicle is stopped. especially at night or in the rain, thereby causing unforeseen
yy Do not store personal belongs and valuables inside the vehicle. safety problems.
When leaving the vehicle unattended, always make sure all the yy The interior materials of the new vehicle within a year or use can
doors including the tailgate are closed and locked. emit volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Therefore, always open
yy Improper alignment of vibration dampers for the exhaust system all the windows for sufficient ventilation before entering. Those
(rubber hanger bracket) may result in serious vibration problems. chemicals can cause headaches and dizziness especially in
When reinstalling the exhaust system after undercoating, check the cabin of the vehicle parked for a long time in direct sunlight.
the alignment of the dampers. Therefore, to prevent the driver and passengers from being ex-
posed to these harmful chemicals and keep the comfortable indoor
yy Always check the accelerator and brake pedals with your right foot
environment, set the air source selection switch to the fresh air
before starting the vehicle. Even an experienced driver can ac-
intake mode for as long as possible or open the windows periodi-
cidentally hit the wrong pedal if he/she drives different vehicles.
cally while driving.
yy Power unit of the vehicle operates independently of the braking
system of the vehicle, so just calmly depress the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle when it moves unintentionally due to the driver
error including pedal misapplication or a malfunction.

GETtheMANUALS.org
VEHICLE CARE
BREAK-in Period Cleaning Agents
Follow the manufacturer’s advice whenever cleaning agents
or other chemicals are used for the inside or the outside of the
vehicle. Some cleaners may be poisonous or flammable, and
improper use may cause personal injury or damage. When
cleaning the inside or outside of the vehicle, do not use volatile
cleaning solvents such as: acetone, lacquer thinners, enamel
reducers, nail polish removers; or cleaning materials such as
laundry soaps, bleaches or reducing agents, except as noted
in the fabric cleaning advice on stain removal. Never use car-
bon tetrachloride, petrol, benzene, or naphtha for any clean-
ing purpose. Open all vehicle doors for ventilation when any
cleaning agents or other chemicals are used in the interior.
There are no particular break-in rules for your new vehicle. Overexposure to some vapors may result in a health problem
However, following a few simple precautions for the first 1000 km which is more likely to occur in small, unventilated spaces. To
can add to good future performance, fuel economy and long avoid possible permanent discoloration of light colored seats,
life of your vehicle. do not let materials with non-fast colors come in contact with
yy Allow the engine to warm up after starting. seat trim materials until these materials are totally dry. This
yy Avoid harsh operations such as abrupt starts, sudden ac- includes certain types of casual clothing, such as colored den-
celeration and prolonged high speed driving. ims, corduroys, leathers and suedes; also, decorative paper,
yy Do not race the engine. etc.
yy Do not maintain a single speed for long period of time. Vary-
ing engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
yy Avoid overload when climbing.
yy Check the engine oil level more frequently until 5000 km of
driving and add the oil if necessary.
yy Do not tow a trailer during the first 1,000 km of operation.
yy During the first 1000 km of towing a trailer, do not drive the
vehicle over 80 km/h or do not drive off the vehicle with full
acceleration. Otherwise, engine or its components could be
damaged due to overload.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Vehicle Washing Caution
To avoid corrosion, wash your vehicle as soon as possible yy Be careful not to damage the air spoiler when cleaning the vehicle
after driving on a coastal road (salted road), on a road where in an automatic car wash.
the snow removal chemicals (calcium chloride etc.) has been yy Wash your car by hand or using an automatic car washing ma-
spreaded, in the area where the atmospheric fallout/industrial chine. Avoid using a high pressure cleaner as much as possible
pollutants are exist, or on a muddy or dusty road. Also, imme- to maintain and manage the car performance. The high water
diately wash your vehicle when things such as tree sap or bird pressure can cause painted surface damage of the panels or mal-
droppings get on the painted surface. function of the sensors on the bumper. In case where using a high
pressure cleaner is unavoidable, pay attention to the conditions
Do not wash your vehicle under direct sunlight. Always wash of your car by allowing enough space between a high-pressure
your vehicle in the shade. If your vehicle has been parked un- water gun and your vehicle.
der direct sunlight for a long period, let it cool sufficiently be- yy If the engine compartment is cleaned with water (or high-pressure
fore washing. car washing), the water may go into the electrical circuits or air
ducts located on the engine compartment, which causes the ve-
How To Wash: hicle not to maneuver properly.
yy Rinse the vehicle throughly with cool water to remove dust yy After washing the vehicle, check whether the brake is affected
by water by testing the brake operation while driving the vehicle
and loose dirt.
at low speed.
yy Clean the vehicle throughly using a mild soap or detergent
mixed with clean and lukewarm water. Start at the top and
work your way down.
yy Check whether the vehicle is smeared with tree sap, coal Bumper Washing
tar or other foreign materials. Rinse them off while paying yy Remove the dirt or dust first with water and a sponge.
particular attention not to damage the painted surface.
yy If the bumper is contaminated by engine oil or any lubri-
yy Remove the moisture using a soft cloth. If you detect any cants, wipe it off using mild soapy water.
stone chips or scratches in the painted surface, to prevent
corrosion, touch them up immediately. Caution
yy You should allow enough space between a high-pressure Do not use abrasive wax and strong cleaning materials such as steel
water gun and your vehicle when washing the car with a wool which will scratch the vehicle body and bumper.
high pressure cleaner. When the water gun is too close to
the vehicle body, the high pressure of the water gun can
cause painted surface damage of the panels or malfunction
of the sensors on the bumper.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Care And Cleaning Of The Interior
Caution
yy Use only the mild detergent or cleaning agent with a small amount
of alcohol when cleaning the leather product (steering wheel, seats
etc.). Strong acid/alkali detergent or the cleaning agent with plenty
of alcohol may cause the discoloration and peeling of surface.
yy The Leather Seat Maintenance is necessary on Quarter basis with
dedicated Leather Milk or Cream in order to feed the Leather and
avoid any cracks on the seats and conserving the original look
and comfort of the seat.
Warning
To prevent from burning and electric shock, turn off the interior lights
before cleaning the vehicle interior.
With the use of modern trim materials, it is very important that Seat Belt Care
you use proper cleaning techniques and cleaners. Failing to do yy Keep belts clean and dry.
this on the first cleaning may result in water spots, spot rings,
or setting of stains or soils. All of which are more difficult to re- yy Clean seat belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
move in a second cleaning. yy Do not bleach or dye belts since this may severely weaken
Dust and loose dirt that are accumulated on interior fabrics them.
should be frequently removed with a vacuum cleaner or soft
bristle brush. Wipe vinyl or leather trim regularly with a clean
damp cloth. Normal trim soils, spots or stains can be cleaned
with cleaners.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Glass Surfaces Care And Cleaning Of The Exterior
Glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis. The use Exterior Finish
of a glass cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will re-
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of col-
move normal tobacco smoke and dust films.
or, gloss retention, and durability.
Never use abrasive cleaners on any vehicle glass, as they may
cause scratches. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of Washing your Vehicle
the rear window, any electric demister element may be dam-
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
aged. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since
clean by frequent washing.
they may have to be scraped off later.
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm or cold water.
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle under direct sun-
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield wash- light. Do not use a strong soap or chemical detergent.
er, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax or another All cleaning agents should be washed promptly from the sur-
material may be on the blade or windshield, clean the outside face and not allowed to dry on the finish.
of the windshield with cleaning powder or an equivalent non Ssangyong vehicles are designed to operate under normal en-
abrasive cleaner. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form vironmental conditions and to withstand the natural elements.
when rinsing with water. However, unusual conditions, such as high pressure car wash-
ers, may cause water to enter the inside of your vehicle.
Caution
yy Be careful not to damage the heated wire. Polishing and Waxing
yy Do not install the additional tinting film other than factory setting Periodic polishing and waxing is recommended to remove
on the windshield and rear glass. Otherwise, it may affect the surface residue from your paint finish. Approved products are
operation of heated wire in the glasses. supplied through your Ssangyong Distributor.
yy The vehicle with the rain sensor and the auto light sensor on wind-
shield should be handled carefully. If the sensor installation area is
dirty or corrupted by agent, the sensor may not work properly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Corrosion Protection
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Your car was designed to resist corrosion. When it was built,
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their special and protective finishes were used on most parts of
luster. your car to help maintain a good appearance, strength and
reliable operation. Some parts which normally are not visible
Special care should be taken when cleaning the aluminum (such as certain parts located in the engine compartment and
trim. To avoid damaging the protective trim, never use auto- the underbody of the vehicle) are such that surface rust will
motive or chrome polish, steam, or caustic soap to clean the not affect their reliability. Therefore, corrosion protection is not
aluminum trim. A coating of wax is recommended for all bright needed or used on these parts.
metal parts.
Sheet Metal Damage
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels, Alloy Wheels, and
If your car is damaged and requires body panel repair or re-
Wheel Covers placement, make sure the body repair shop applies proper
yy Do not use abrasive cleaners, polishes, solvents, wire anticorrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced so that
brushes or cleaning brushes for cleaning, as they could corrosion protection is restored. (Also refer to “Finish Damage”
damage the finish. on the next page).
yy Use neutral detergents for cleaning the wheel, as acid or
alkaline detergents could damage the wheel cover. Foreign Material Deposits
yy Clean the wheels after driving on a coastal road to prevent Calcium chloride and other salts, deicing agents, road oil and
the wheel from being corroded. tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chim-
neys and other foreign materials may damage vehicle finishes
Caution if left on painted surface. Prompt washing may not completely
remove all of these deposits. Other cleaners may be needed.
Never clean the aluminum wheel or alloy wheel with acidic or
alkalic detergents. Otherwise, wheel’s protective finish could be
When using chemical cleaners, be sure they are safe for use
damaged. on painted surfaces.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Finish Damage
Caution
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish yy When the engine is washed, fuel, grease or oil residues are
should be repaired promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly washed off. Therefore you should use only a filling station or a
and may develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips and Ssangyong Distributor who has oil separator equipment in the
scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials. Larger car wash bay.
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your Distributor’s yy Used engine oil, brake fluid, transmission fluid, antifreeze, bat-
body and paint shop. teries, and tires should be disposed by using the local authorized
waste disposal facilities, or have them disposed of by the vendor
Underbody Maintenance who is under a statutory obligation to do so when you replace
them.
Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust yy None of these items should be placed in the household recycling
control can accumulate on the underbody. If these materials bins or poured into the sewage system.
are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on yy Everyone should be concerned about environmental protection.
underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and yy Help by doing your share.
the exhaust system even though they have been provided with yy When a strong multi-purpose, acid, or alkaline detergent is used to
corrosion protection. At least every spring, flush these materi- clean up the surface of the painted body, side mirrors, windshield,
als from the underbody with plain water. Take care to clean plastic moldings or leather, changes, fading of colors or rusting
any area where mud and other debris can accumulate. can happen.
Sediment packed in closed areas of the frame should be loos- yy When the windshield is cleaned with an oil-contained or waxed
towel, strange sounds and vibrations may occur on the windshield
ened before being flushed. If desired, your Ssangyong Dis-
surface when the wipers are operating. Also, decreased visibility,
tributor can do this service for you. reflection at night, or poor removal of water on the windshield
may happen. Do not clean the windshield with an oil-contained
or waxed towel.
yy An abrasive detergent may damage the painted surface of your
vehicle, including the bumper. Do not buff or polish your vehicle
with an abrasive detergent.
yy An acid or alkaline detergent may damage the painted surface of
the aluminum or alloyed wheels.
yy When chemical products are used to clean up the interior, the
chemical products may change some colors or distort the shape
of some interior parts.
yy When cleaning up interior parts, do not use chemical products
such as acetone, enamel or bleach.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Ignition Key/Remote Control Key Turbocharger System
yy Never use any duplicated key not provided by Ssangyong. Insufficient oil supply to the bearing assembly in turbocharger
It may cause a fire due to an overload in the electric circuit. may cause the turbocharger to seize. Therefore, the following
yy If you lose your keys, you have to replace the whole key set cares are necessary to prevent the seizure.
to prevent from theft. yy Use only the specified engine oil and observe inspection
yy Avoid shock to the transmitter in the remote control key and and replacement intervals.
do not get it wet. yy Operate the engine over the idling speed only after normal
yy Only use the batteries with the same specifications to re- engine oil pressure has been established. Forcing the tur-
place the discharged battery. Do not reverse the polarity. bocharger to operate before the bearings are adequately
lubricated creates unnecessary friction.
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at
idle speed (Avoid acceleration or driving off the vehicle).
System Safety Mode yy Do not stop the engine immediately after coming back from
When the vehicle has a system error, the vehicle operates in high load driving (such as high speed driving or driving on
safety mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and to long slope). Let the engine run for approx. 1 minutes at idle
prevent the system from being damaged. In this mode, the en- speed to cool it down.
gine driving force may be decreased or the engine may stall. yy After changing the engine oil and oil filter, start the engine
When this happens, have the system checked at a Ssangyong and let it run for approx. 1 minutes at idle speed (Avoid ac-
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. celeration or driving off the vehicle).
yy Do not rev the engine at high speed without air cleaner ele-
ment when checking the engine.
Turbocharger?
The turbocharger consists of two turbo elements, a turbine
and a compressor, both of which are driven from the main
center shaft. The turbine rotates between 50000 ~ 160000
revolutions per minute and uses the energy of the exhaust
gas to drive the compressor. The compressor, in turn, draws
in fresh air which it supplies to the cylinders in the form of
compressed air.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel Recommendation
Commercially available high-quality fuels are suitable. Fuel Do not Use Methanol
quality has a decisive influence on the power output, driveabil-
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used
ity and life of the engine. The additives contained in the fuel
in your Rexton W. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle perfor-
play an important role in this connection. You should therefore
mance and damage components of the fuel system.
use only high-quality fuels.
Diesel Engine Note
Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher. The warranty policy will not cover damage of the fuel system and
any performance problems that are caused by the use of methanol
or fuel containing methanol.
Gasoline Engine
Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-ignition
Operation in Foreign Countries
(detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for resultant
damage. If you are going to drive your Rexton W in another country, be
sure to:
Caution yy Observe all regulations regarding registration and insur-
For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex. ance.
Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer.
yy Check that a suitable fuel is available.
Caution Vehicle Fueling from Drums or Storage Containers

Engine and exhaust system will be damaged. For safety reasons (particularly when using noncommercial
yy Do not use leaded fuel to the vehicle for unleaded fuel. fueling systems) fuel containers, pumps and hoses must be
yy Use the fuel with specified or higher Research Octane Number properly earthed.
recommended for your country by Ssangyong.
Static electricity build up can occur under certain atmospheric
It is not covered by warranty.
and fuel flow conditions if unearthed hoses, particularly plas-
tic, are fitted to the fuel dispensing pump.
It is therefore recommended that earthed pumps with integrally
earthed hoses be used, and that storage containers be prop-
erly earthed during all noncommercial fueling operations.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Using biodiesel fuel and low Water Separator Warning Light
quality fuel (Diesel)
The fuel system of the common rail direct injection engine is When the water in the fuel filter exceeds
precisely machined component. Using low quality fuel and ex- a certain level, this warning light and an
cessive biodiesel fuel could result in a serious damage to the alarming sound are activated. In addition,
engine due to the water, impurities or suspended particles in the driving force of the vehicle decreas-
fuel. es.
Using fuel mixed with too much biodiesel fuel can cause fuel Water separating interval: whenever changing the engine oil
filter clogging, power loss, engine idling problem, engine stall,
difficulty with starting the engine in cold weather as well as Warning
damage to the engine and the fuel system, due to the naturally
yy If the water separator warning light comes on, have the system
produced suspended particles. checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
Currently, the Ssangyong vehicle is designed so that only the vice Center.
mixed fuel of biodiesel and diesel with mixing ratio within the yy The fuel system in the engine may suffer serious damage if you
specified range can be used for safety. If any product in which keep driving while the warning light is on.
the biodiesel fuel is exceeds the total amount of fuel is used
or the aftermarket biodiesel fuel is added to the regular fuel, it
can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle and this is not covered
by warranty.
Engine Check Indicator
What is “Bio-diesel”?
The Engine check indicator on the instru-
The bio-diesel fuel is made by reacting vegetable oil extract- ment cluster comes on when the fuel or
ed from beans, rapeseed, rice bran, etc. with alcohol. This major electronic systems of the engine
can be solely used or used mixed with the diesel fuel for the are not working properly. As a result,
diesel engine as its physical and chemical characteristics the engine’s power output may decrease
are similar to those of the diesel fuel. This is considered to or the engine may stall. If this happens,
be alternative energy to the diesel fuel nowadays. please visit the nearest Ssangyong
dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air Bag Using Ssangyong Dealer or
yy The airbags must never be impacted by hand or with tools. Ssangyong Authorized Service
yy The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt. Center
Make sure that you and your passengers always fasten the
Have the vehicle serviced at Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
seat belts properly even if the air bags are installed in the
Authorized Service Center. The customer warranty may be
vehicle.
void for any concerns with in your vehicle if the vehicle is ser-
yy Do not place any objects on the air bag inflation location. viced by a third party or another service center.
You may be injured by those objects during deployment.
yy The air bag system should be inspected 10 years after in-
stallation regardless of its appearance and other conditions.
yy Repairs to the air bag system should be done only by a Genuine Parts
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen- Always use only Ssangyong genuine parts for replacement.
ter. Ssangyong is not liable for any damage caused by the use of
yy Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not at- non-Ssangyong genuine parts and accessories.
tempt to modify any air bag components including the steer-
ing wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness.
yy Never install a child restraint in the front seat. The children
sitting in the restraint could be seriously injured by the air
bag in a collision.
yy The deployed air bag unit should be removed from the ve-
hicle and replaced with a new one.
yy When the air bag is deployed, the relevant components will
be very hot, so do not touch them until they have cooled
down.
yy A person who is smaller than 140 cm should sit in the rear
seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caring for Your Vehicle Under 0°C (32°F)
Caring For Your Vehicle Under 0°C Engine Oil
(32°F) When the vehicle is shipped, the engine is filled with four-sea-
son engine oil.
During the winter, undesirable road conditions frequently hap-
pen. Therefore, appropriate preparations for emergencies Tires
should occur.
Snow tires are more desirable on an icy or snow-covered road.
Before driving in suburban or rural areas, or on a snowing day,
Have snow tires installed on your vehicle before driving on
have bags of sand, snow chains, a shovel, gloves, and old
such a road.
clothes in your vehicle.
Coolant Caution
Before it gets cold, check the coolant level. yy When snow tires are installed, drive your vehicle at a lower speed
than normal.
The conventional coolant is the 50:50 mixture of water and an-
yy Install snow chains correctly. Otherwise, the chains may damage
tifreeze.
the wheelhouses or the body of your vehicle.
If only water has been added into the coolant reservoir, the en-
gine and the cooling system of your vehicle may seriously be
damaged when the water freezes as it gets below the freezing Air Conditioner
point. When the air conditioner has not been used for an extended
period of time, internal moving components may become
Caution seized because the lubricating system has not worked for a
yy When the vehicle is shipped, the cooling system is filled with a prolonged amount of time. As a result, the refrigerant may leak
four-season coolant. or rusting may happen to the system. Malfunction of the air
yy Before adding or refilling coolant, ensure that the coolant is a 50:50 conditioner may result.
mixture of water and antifreeze. To maintain its optimal operating condition, it is recommended
yy Use only Ssangyong genuine coolant. that the air conditioner be turned on for approximately 5 to 10
minutes every week throughout all seasons.
Washer Fluid
Use a genuine washer fluid that does not freeze on a cold day. Caution
When non-recommended washer liquid is used, the liquid may Do not remove the refrigerant in winter, even though you do not use
form an ice. This will damage the wiper motor and hinder your the air conditioner.
safe driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the Engine and Driving in Parking in Winter
Winter When the parking brake is applied in cold weather, ice may
form on the brake system and cause some difficulty moving
Starting the Engine in Winter
the vehicle. When parking on a hill, first, apply the parking
During winter, the engine experiences increased resistance brake. Put the shift lever into the “1” or “R” position (Manual
from the powertrain; the battery and the starter have a de- Transmission) or into the “P” position (Automatic Transmis-
creased capacity. Therefore, start the engine in an appropriate sion). Put a chock under a tire and release the parking brake.
way.
After starting the engine, allow time to warm it up before driv- Warning
ing the vehicle. Warming up the engine will increase its life When ice forms on the parking brake system, an attempt to move
expectancy and help you drive safely. the vehicle without removing the ice may damage your vehicle. Wait
until the ice melts away and gently move your vehicle.
Caution
yy The glow plugs of the diesel engine should sufficiently be warmed
up before the engine starts.
yy Change the engine oil and fuel filter according to the specified ser-
vice intervals. Contaminated engine oil will decrease its viscosity
and clog the fuel filter and oil filter, causing a difficulty of engine
start at low temperature.
yy Do not add any additives other than the genuine fuel for better
startability at owner’s disposal. The additive may decrease the
lubricating ability of the internal fuel system; the additive may
have a different flashing point. This will damage the fuel system
or produce an excessive exhaust fume.
Driving in Winter
Maintain at least twice as long of a normal driving distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. When stop-
ping, shift into a lower gear to use the engine brake.
Avoid speeding, abrupt acceleration, sudden braking, or dras-
tic maneuvering of the steering wheel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Other Maintenance
After driving on a calcium chloride (salt) spayed road, wash the Diesel Fuel in Winter
bottom of your vehicle as soon as possible to avoid any rust.
On an extremely cold day, paraffin, one of the chemicals in
When parking on a snow-covered road, the brake system may diesel fuel, may separate from the diesel fuel. This separation
begin to have some ice on it. The ice will decrease your ve- makes starting the engine difficult. During the winter season,
hicle’s braking ability. If this happens, drive at a low speed and Kerosene is added to diesel in some markets to prevent the
use the brake frequently to remove the ice. After regaining the paraffin separation and secure stable flow of the fuel through
braking ability, drive your vehicle at a normal speed. the fuel filter. The amount of added Kerosene into diesel can
vary by location and their average winter temperatures. There-
Warning fore, to ensure an easy start on a cold day, park your vehicle
yy When there is ice on the wiper blades, turning on the wiper switch inside of a garage. If possible, fill up the fuel tank after each
may put an extra burden on the wiper motor and damage it. Avoid driving to prevent ice from forming inside of the fuel system.
using the wipers when ice is on the blades.
yy When driving on a snow-covered road, a large amount of snow Caution
may build up under each wheelhouse. This buildup prevents the
steering wheel from moving freely. Therefore, remove the snow yy Change engine oil and the fuel filter as scheduled. Contaminated
buildup frequently. engine oil will lose its viscosity, clog the fuel filter and oil filter and
cause difficulties starting the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION
Do not modify this vehicle.

If unauthorized notifications are made on the vehicle, In particular, modifying your vehicle by fitting LPG
the company is not liable for repairing the modified might bring serious damage to the vehicle’s perfor-
parts even during the term of warranty. Other part mance and durability. Not only the engine but also
problems caused by modification are also not cov- the transmission and wheel alignment are excluded
ered. from the warranty.
The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number If you install a wheel dust cover on the tires to enhance
of precision parts that have passed through countless ex- the beauty of tire parts, the heat caused by friction in
periments and tests. These parts are deeply and system- braking might bring serious problems in performance,
atically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or causing Vapor Lock and Fade phenomena.
altered without authorization, said parts may be damaged
from the decrease in performance or overloading, which
can then cause critical damage to the vehicle and human Do not modify the car’s audio system and install
life. other additional electronic devices such as wireless
communication equipment, rear view camera, LCD
TV, and remote starting device.
Do not modify without authorization the driving gear
system, including the engine, just to upgrade the ve- This vehicle’s electronic system contains electronic cir-
hicle’s performance and beauty. cuits and fuses for the installation of standard electric
and electronic devices. If you add new devices or circuits
yy Unauthorized modification of the engine or parts for using the several existing devices and circuits at a time,
the exhaust is prohibited. electric and electronic devices can be damaged from
overloading and may ignite. In addition, when you do drill-
Changing without authorization the preset value in the
ing work in installing devices such as an antenna may
fuel supply system and inlet, exhaust and electric sys-
expose the vehicle to rusting.
tems, and changing or adding unauthorized parts is illegal
and may cause serious problem with the vehicle’s durabil-
ity.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do not use the nonstandard tires, wheels, and other Do not equip the vehicle with bumper guards sold in
related parts. the market.
Installing nonstandard tires such as tires with greater Installing bumper guard or other guard bars that are be-
width than prescribed can wear out the power delivery ing sold in the market may cause problems in parking
system or friction-damage related parts. In addition, other and stopping due to the extended length of vehicle, and
problems such as increase of fuel consumption and brak- increase in fuel cost due to additional vehicle weight, and
ing distance, vehicle’s shudder, and decrease of steering rusting may occur in the holes for equipping the guards.
power can all degrade the vehicle’s performance. The And because of the absence of shock absorber in the
speedometer and odometer can also become inaccurate. bumper guard, even accidents during low-speed driving
The vehicle with automatic transmission may have the will be much serious compared with the damage that un-
shock in changing the speed. modified cars might sustain.
Do not use duplicate key Do not modify or replace the vehicle flooring or the
A duplicate key might cause malfunction to the ignition seats at your discretion.
key cylinder and deter the ignition motor to return to the yy When replacing the interior flooring of vehicle with
original state. If so, electronic circuitry can be damaged laminated paper
and may ignite from the ignition motor’s continuing rota- To improve the comfort of cushion and to facilitate the
tion. cleaning of the vehicle, some drivers replace the flooring
with laminated paper after removing the seats. However,
Do not equip the sunroof or color glasses at your dis- this may cause damage to the various electronic system
cretion. control units and wiring. This also may hinder the function
of the seat rail that enables for the seat to move forward
If you install a sunroof by cutting the vehicle’s roof, rust
and backward. In this case, the locking system to fix the
and leakage may occur in the cut part. Installing color
location of seats may malfunction, which might lead to
glasses to block ultraviolet rays and better appearance
a serious accident if the loose seats tilt forward or back-
may cause leakage and other many problems.
ward during an uphill climb or downhill descent.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy When exchanging the seats with new ones or equip- Do not install products that may decrease the driving
ping separate seat covers. resistance such as sticker, molding, air dam, or wind-
There are several types of seat covers according to role proofing products.
and function although with the same vehicle type. Replac- The sticker’s adhesives may damage the coated surface
ing the seats with new ones may alter the wiring system of the vehicle. If parts of the car are drilled to attach mold-
or over-use the wires because a seat has various electric ing and other functional parts, the area near the holes will
connections and wiring diagram. As mentioned earlier, rust and other unfamiliar sound may occur while driving.
this may damage the wiring and related equipment or Especially if the attached parts are not fixed well, it may
cause fire due to the overloading on the rated capacity. damage the vehicle or even cause a fatal accident.
In addition, replacing the seat cover may damage the
electronic equipment caused by cut or pressured wire. In using audio in the vehicle, do not use illegally cop-
Such a situation may also cause ventilation problems, ied CD and DVD, which violates relevant laws. Such
fire, or noise. discs can also cause malfunction of the audio head
unit and changer. In addition, such discs may also
Do not equip with a separate accessory or assistant not play properly.
device on the vehicle operational device. When installing the vehicle with unauthorized parts or
Making the selection lever longer or equipping with an ac- modifying it in ways including the cases mentioned previ-
celerator pedal and brake pedal pad may make the driver ously, please keep in mind that the changed parts and
prone to make a mistake while driving. related problems with changed auto parts shall not be
covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (i)
Direct Injection (DI) Type Diesel Engine Warning for Using Low Quality Fuel or Bio Fuel
Compared to Indirect Injection (IDI) Type Diesel Engine The fuel system in a DI engine equipped vehicle has many
that uses a mechanical fuel injection system, a Direct In- precisely machined components. Using low quality fuel
jection (DI) Type Diesel Engine controls the amount of in- could result in serious damage to the engine due to the wa-
jected fuel and the fuel injection timing electronically. This ter or impurities in the fuel.
advanced engine enhances the output power and reduces Never use the low quality fuel.
the noxious exhaust gas (CO, HC, NOx....). Because the
Direct Injection Diesel Engine is operated by high pressure Diesel Engine
(max.), any removal, modification or service of the engine Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher.
may contaminate the inside of the system and cause the
system to malfunction. In that case, the malfunction and Gasoline Engine
any related systems are not under warranty of this com- Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-ignition
pany. (detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for resultant
damage.
Caution
For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (iI)
System Safety Mode When flashing (for vehicles equipped with CDPF)
When the vehicle has a system error, the vehicle operates When a particular amount of particulates is collected in the
in safety mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and Catalyst Diesel Particulate Filter (CDPF), these particu-
to prevent the system from being damaged. In this mode, lates are automatically combusted (regeneration process).
the engine driving force may be decreased or the engine However, this regeneration may not be performed due to
may stall. When this happens, have the system checked several operating conditions. And in this case, the engine
at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service CHECK indicator flashes. This flashing function is to inform
Center. the driver to take action for the proper regeneration of the
filter.
Supplementary Heating Device If the engine CHECK indicator flashes, drive the vehicle at
over 80 km/h for 15 ~ 20 minutes to regenerate the CDPF.
PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient)
When the amount of particulates is lowered down to a cer-
This supplementary heater is an electrical air heating type tain limit, the engine CHECK indicator goes off.
and installed on the heater outlet port. This device im-
proves the heating effect by increasing the temperature of Catalyst diesel particulate filter (CDPF)
flowing air into the passenger room. The CDPF is a compound word for Diesel Oxidation Cata-
lyst (DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which are
Engine Check Indicator exhaust gas after-treatment devices.
The engine check indicator on the instrument cluster

comes on when the fuel or major electronic systems of the
engine are not working properly. As a result, the engine’s
power output may decrease or the engine may stall. If this
happens, please visit the nearest Ssangyong dealer or au-
thorized service operator.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (IiI)
Water Separator Warning Priming Pump Operating 1. When completely consumed the
Light Conditions fuel
2. After draining the water from the
D22DTR/D20DTR fuel filter
Can be performed when 3. After replacing the fuel filter
engine oil is changed
- If this happens, pump fuel until the
fuel filter is fully filled. Then, start
the engine.
When the water level inside of the
Warning
water drain in the fuel filter exceeds a
certain level, this warning light and an yy When engine check warning light
alarming sound are activated. In addi- comes on, immediately stop driving
and have the engine system checked
tion, the driving force of the vehicle de-
at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
creases. If this happens, immediately Authorized Service Center.
drain the water from the fuel filter. D27DT(P)
yy Drain the water from fuel filter & water
separator immediately after the water
separator warning light comes on.
yy The fuel system in the engine may
get seriously damaged if you keep
driving while the warning light is on.
Priming Pump

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
R
emote control key and ignition key.................2-2
3
F
unctions of ignition key ..................................2-5
O
pening and closing the doors with 4
ignition key........................................................2-7
5
B
attery replacement for rekes key....................2-8
Immobilizer system.........................................2-10
2
6
Theft deterrent system....................................2-12
7
Ignition Key &
8
Remote Control Key
9
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOTE CONTROL KEY AND IGNITION KEY
1
Door Lock Button
2 Lock (briefly press)
yy If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tailgate are
3 locked and the theft deterrent mode is activated.
yy When the theft deterrent mode is activated, the hazard
4 warning flashers blink twice.
Type A
5 Caution
yy To arm the theft deterrent mode, the ignition key should be re-
6 moved from the ignition switch, all doors including the tailgate and
the engine hood should be closed completely.
yy To prevent from being stolen, after locking the doors and tailgate
7 Type B using the remote control key, check the doors and tailgate have
been securely locked.
8
9 Door Unlock Panic Button
Unlock (briefly press) Panic Function (press and hold)

10
yy If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tailgate are yy If you are in your vehicle and feel threatened while the igni-
unlocked and the theft deterrent mode is deactivated. tion key is inserted into the key switch, you may activate the
11 yy When the deterrent mode is deactivated, hazard warning alarm to call attention. If you press this button, the warning
flashers blink once. siren will sound for approx. 27 seconds.
12 y If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking
y yy The panic function will stop when any of the buttons on the
the doors with remote control key in theft deterrent mode, remote control key is pressed.
13 all doors will be automatically locked again (change to theft
deterrent mode) Note
The alarm sounds only when the ignition key is inserted into the key
14 switch hole (EU).
2-2 Ignition Key & Remote Control Key

GETtheMANUALS.org
When a Remote Control Key is Lost
When one of remote control keys is lost and a new remote
control key is purchased, bring the other old key to the nearest
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center
and have it recoded. Otherwise, the old key will not work.
To prevent from being stolen by the lost key, Immediately take
a recoding for new key when you lost a key.
To use the mechanical key:
Press the button. The mechanical key is automatically folded Caution
up. If you lose your key, you have to replace the whole key set to prevent
from theft.
To stow the mechanical key:
Press the button and push it into its slot.
Room Lamp ON
Caution
If the room lamp switch in overhead console is in DOOR posi-
The key can be broken when folding not to press button.
tion, the front room lamp comes on for 30 seconds when you
press the unlock button on the remote control key. The lamps
immediately go off when the remote lock button is pressed.
Ignition Key & Remote Control Key 2-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Under the following conditions, the remote control key does not yy Under the following conditions, the remote control key may not
operate. work due to another radio wave. In these cases, open the doors
- When the key is in the ignition switch using key and key hole in door.
- When you are too far from your vehicle (over 10 m) - In the place near police office, government office, broadcasting
station, military base, transmitting tower, airport, and port
- When the battery in remote control key is discharged
- When you have the radio or mobile phone with the remote control
- When your vehicle is behind other vehicles or obstacles key
- In very cold weather - When another remote control key is using near your vehicle
yy The remote control key could be damaged easily by moisture and
heat. Be sure to keep away from them.
yy Operating range could be changed depending on the surrounding
Certification for FOB/Folding
conditions. It is recommended to use the remote control key in 10 Logo
m from your vehicle.
yy Under the following conditions, the remote control key may not
work due to another radio wave. In these cases, open the doors
using key and key hole in door.
- In the place near police office, government office, broadcasting
- W hen you have the radio or mobile phone with the remote Note
control key
The logos are depicted in the certificate manual because of the
- When another remote control key is using near your vehicle product size.
yy If your remote control key is not working properly, have the system
checked by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center. FCC ID: DEO-MT-FLIP01
yy Opening the tailgate will not trigger the theft deterrent alarm even
in theft deterrent mode. Caution
yy Operating range could be changed depending on the surrounding yy Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which
conditions. It is recommended to use the remote control key in 10 are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
m from your vehicle. could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
yy This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received. Including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUNCTIONS OF IGNITION KEY
ACC Position ON Position

yy The steering wheel is unlocked and yy The engine runs and all electrical
electrical accessories are operative. accessories can be used.
yy The ignition key cannot be removed. yy The steering wheel is unlocked.
START Position
Turn the ignition key to this posi-
LOCK Position tion to start the engine. The engine
yy The ignition key can only will crank until you release the key;
be inserted or removed. then it automatically returns to “ON”
yy The steering wheel can be position.
locked.
From ACC to LOCK Position

Turn the key to LOCK position from ACC
position while pushing the key inward.
Unlocking the Steering Wheel Key Hole Illumination Key Reminder

To unlock the steering wheel, insert the The illumination lamp comes on when The buzzer will sound if the driver’s door
key and gently turn it to the ACC or ON opening the door. This lamp goes out is opened while the key is left in the igni-
position while slightly moving the steer- about 10 seconds after closing the door. tion switch (ACC or LOCK position).
ing wheel right and left.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN STARTING THE ENGINE
yy To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and gently turn it to yy Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds at a time. (The
the “ACC” position while slightly moving the steering wheel right starter may be damaged.)
and left. yy To prevent any damage to the starter, put the ignition switch to
yy The engine in a manual transmission equipped vehicle can only be the “LOCK” position and wait for at least 10 seconds before
started when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. restarting the engine.
yy Diesel engine equipped vehicle: Turn the ignition key to the “ON” yy Never turn the key to the “LOCK” position or remove the ignition
position and wait until the glow indicator goes out. After then, turn key from the ignition switch while driving. The steering wheel will
the ignition key to the “START” position and hold it until the be locked and you may end up with serious injuries.
engine starts. But do not hold the ignition key at the “START” yy Never use any duplicated key not provided from Ssangyong.
position for more than 10 seconds.
yy The duplicated key might not turn back to the “ON” position. It
yy The engine in an automatic transmission equipped vehicle can be may cause a fire due to an overload in the electric circuit. In ad-
started only when the gear selector lever is at the “P” or “N” dition, the engine with the immobilizer system cannot be started
position. with the duplicated key.
yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when starting the engine. yy For a vehicle with automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
yy If the engine fails to start, turn the key back to the “LOCK” posi- with the gear selector lever in “P” position. Otherwise, the vehicle
tion and wait for 10 seconds. Then try again before any attempt can roll away unexpectedly causing a serious accident.
to start the engine. yy Do not operate ignition switch or other switches while driving. You
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at idle will not be able to control the steering wheel or the vehicle and
speed. Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up pe- could be seriously or even fatally injured.
riod. yy Do not stack luggage or other cargo around the driver seat. Any
yy A warning buzzer sounds when opening the driver’s door with the such objects could interfere with your control of the vehicle and
key positioned at the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. can cause harm.
yy Do not leave the key at the “ACC” or “ON” position when engine
is not running. Otherwise, the battery could run down.
yy Never depress the accelerator pedal while starting.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS WITH IGNITION KEY
Caution
When you unlock the door with the ignition key after the door is
locked with the remote control (the theft deterrent mode), a warn-
ing buzzer sounds. Stop the buzzer by pressing any button on the
remote control key.
Automatic Door Locking

All doors will be automatically locked when you drive over 30
km/h while the doors are unlocked.
Automatic Door Unlocking

yy All doors will be automatically unlocked when the engine is
switched off.
yy Even though all doors are locked, they will be automatically
unlocked when the driver’s door is opened.
Unlocking the door and the tailgate
yy In the event of air bag deployment resulting from a vehicle
Locking the door and the tailgate impact, all doors will be automatically unlocked.
To Lock the Door: Warning

Turn the key to the lock position (toward rear of the vehicle) When damage is done on a door or the body frame by an impact from
from driver’s door. All doors and the tailgate will be locked. an accident, the automatic door unlocking system may not work.
To Unlock the Door:

Turn the key to the unlock position (toward front of the vehicle)
from driver’s door. All doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
To Open the Door:

Pull out the door handle lever.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY REPLACEMENT FOR REKES KEY
Type A
When the operational distance noticeably decreases or the 222 Remove the rear cover from the REKES key and replace
remote control does not work occasionally, replace the battery the battery with new one.
with a new one.
The internal circuit of remote control key is vulnerable to static
electricity. If you are not familiar with replacing the battery,
replace it at Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
vice Center.
Battery
Replacing Procedures: Type A
111 Unscrew the screw from the rear cover of the REKES key
with a flat-blade screwdriver.
Rear cover
333 Use only specified battery (CR2032). Make sure that the
battery is installed in correct direction.
444 Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.
Caution
yy Use only the specified battery. Otherwise, the remote control key
may not work properly.
yy Make sure that the battery is installed in correct direction.
yy Dispose the used battery in accordance with local regulations.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Type B
When the operational distance noticeably decreases or the 222 Pry off the cover by using a small flat screwdriver.
remote control does not work occasionally, replace the battery 333 Remove the battery and insert a new one (CR2032).
with a new one.
vice Center.
Replacing Procedures : Type B

111 Unscrew two screws from the rear cover.
Caution

GETtheMANUALS.org
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Immobilizer System provides an additional theft deterrent to the vehicle in which it is installed and prevents it from being started
by unauthorized persons. The transponder integrated in the key and the engine control unit have the same code. When the ignition
key with the integrated transponder is turned to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the crypto code of the key
and, if correct, allows your vehicle to start the engine.
Immobilizer Indicator
Black-Face
If this indicator blinks, it may indicate that
there is something wrong in the immobi-
lizer system. Have the system checked by
TRIP A
ODO B
a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
rized Service Center.
km
READY
Note
Standard The time needed for communication between the immobilizer key
and ECU can vary. If it is very short, the immobilizer indicator does
not come on.
Caution
READY
yy In addition, any remote engine starter cannot be installed to the

vehicle equipped with the immobilizer system. So never install any
Immobilizer Key remote engine starter.
When the ignition key with the integrated transponder is turned yy The immobilizer system should be inspected, replaced, serviced,
to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the or coded by only qualified service personnel in a Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
crypto code of the key and, if correct, allows your vehicle to yy When an old code should be replaced or another key is added,
start the engine. please observe the process personally.
yy If you fail to start the engine due to the reason (ex, key chain) other
Caution than key itself, remove the key from the ignition switch and wait for
around 10 seconds. And, try to start the engine again.
yy Avoid impact to the transponder inside of the key. The transponder
could be damaged.
yy With a damaged transponder, the engine cannot be started. Warning
yy Do not install any metal object near the ignition switch and on the In any case, the immobilizer system cannot be removed from the
remote control key. Otherwise, they may disturb the signal be- vehicle. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other device
tween ignition switch and remote control key and result in engine to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle
starting problem. inoperable.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine Does Not Start Due To When the Transponder is Damaged
Communication Error When the transponder is damaged, you must replace it with a
new one and register a new code on the engine control unit at
If there is a communication error in immobilizer system, you a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
cannot start engine. In this case, the immobilizer indicator in Otherwise, the engine cannot be started.
meter cluster blinks.
In the following cases, you may be unable to start the vehicle
with the immobilizer. When You Lost The Key
yy When two or more immobilizer keys come into contact with When you lost the key, the encrypted code should be removed
(each) other(s). from the Engine Control Unit to avoid any vehicle theft. Please
yy When the key is close to any device sending or receiving contact a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
electromagnetic fields or waves. Center.
yy When the key is close to any electronic or electric devices
such as lighting equipment, security keys or security cards.
yy When the key is close to a magnetic or metal object or a
battery.
yy When you start the engine before completing the pre-glow
process.
Caution
yy If you fail to start the engine due to the communication error or
early start before completion of pre-glow, clear the reason and wait
for around 10 seconds. And, try to start the engine again.
yy If the indicator remains blinking, have the immobilizer system
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
vice Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
The theft deterrent system is activated when locking the doors Alarm
using the remote control key. When somebody tries to open
the door, tailgate or engine hood with any other way other than If somebody tries to open the door, the tailgate or the hood
using remote control key, the hazard flashers blink and the si- without using the remote control key, the alarm will be acti-
ren sounds. vated.
yy When one of the doors or the tailgate is opened with the
ignition key while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm
Arming the Theft Deterrent will be activated.
System yy The engine hood or the tailgate is opened from the outside
yy When all doors are locked with the remote control key, the while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm will be acti-
anti-theft mode will be activated. vated.
yy If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking yy When the alarm is activated, the buzzer sounds and the
the doors with remote control key in theft deterrent mode, hazard flashers will blink for 27 seconds.
all doors will be automatically locked again (back to theft yy To stop the alarm:
deterrent mode). - Press Unlock or Lock button on the remote control key.
yy When the theft deterrent system is armed, the hazard flash- - Turn the ignition key to ON position
ers blink twice. However, if you press this button once again
- Open the door with the mechanical key
in 4 seconds, the hazard flashers blink twice and the buzzer
sounds once.
yy If you lock the doors using key hole in door, doors will be Disarming the Theft Deterrent
locked but the theft deterrent mode will not be armed. Mode
yy Unlock the door by using the remote control key.
Caution
To arm the theft deterrent system, the ignition key should be removed yy To deactivate the theft deterrent mode at the alarming
from the ignition switch, all doors including the tailgate and the engine stage, unlock the door by using the remote control key.
hood should be closed completely. When the deterrent mode is disarmed, the hazard flashers
blink once.
yy To stop alarm, insert the ignition key into key switch and
turn it to “ON” position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Opening and closing devices............................3-2
3
Doors.................................................................3-4
Windows............................................................3-7 4
Sunroof*............................................................3-9
5
Engine hood....................................................3-12
3
Fuel filler door.................................................3-13 6
Roof rack.........................................................3-16 7
Tailgate and tailgate window...........................3-17 Opening and
8
Closing
9
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING AND CLOSING DEVICES
1 Sunroof Switch Fuel Filler Door
6
Door Opening Lever
7
10
Engine Hood Safety Latch Lever Radiator Grille
11 Type A
12
13 Type B
14
3-2 Opening and Closing

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver’s Door Windows Switch, Door Lock/Unlock Knob Tailgate/Window Opening
Door Opening Lever Lever
Tailgate
opening lever
Tailgate window
opening lever
Fuel Filler Door

Release Lever, Engine
Hood Opening Lever Child Safety Door Lock
Fuel filler door Rear Door
release lever
Lock
Engine hood Unlock

opening lever
Opening and Closing 3-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
DOORS
Door Lock/Unlock Knob

All doors will be locked/un-
Unlock locked when moving the knob
to the respective lock/unlock
direction (only available at
Lock driver’s and front passenger’s
door).
Note
yy The passenger’s door lock/unlock knob and lever have the same
functions with those of the driver’s door.
yy The door lock/unlock knob on the rear right or rear left door can only
lock or unlock its respective door.
yy The door is unlocked again even when locking the door with the
Child Safety Door Lock door lock/unlock knob while the door is open.
Child safety door lock helps
prevent from an accidental
door open, especially when
Lock
children are in the vehicle.
When the child-safe lever is in
the “ LOCK” position, the
Unlock
rear door can be opened only
from the outside.
Warning
Children in rear seats can open rear doors. Move the child-safe
lever to the “ LOCK” position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver’s side
Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Passenger’s side
Door opening When the door lock/unlock switch is pressed
lever while all doors including the tailgate are
locked, all doors will be unlocked. When the
switch is pressed again, all doors will be
locked.
This switch is not available when any of
doors are not fully closed and the vehicle is
in theft deterrent mode.
Door lock/unlock
Door lock/unlock switch switch
Door Opening Lever
Pull the door opening lever to open the door.
Automatic Door Unlocking Automatic Door Locking

When the airbag deploys while all doors are automatically All doors will be automatically locked when you drive over 30
locked by the Automatic Door Locking System, the doors will km/h while the doors are unlocked.
automatically be unlocked.
Caution
Warning When you drive at 50 km/h or a higher speed and try to unlock all
doors with the door lock/unlock knob or switch, all doors are auto-
When a door or body frame is damaged by an impact from an ac-
matically locked again.
cident, the automatic door unlocking system may not work.
Room Lamp Coupled Operation

Note The room lamps are synchronized with the room lamp switch.
When any door is open, all doors can not be locked by using the door The front room lamp comes on when opening a front door. The
lock knob, the door lock/unlock switch, or the remote control. center room lamp comes on when opening a rear door. The
rear room lamp comes on when opening the tailgate. The front
room lamp dims down and goes out when closing the front
door. The center (rear) room lamp goes out immediately when
closing the door (tailgate).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Caution
yy Close the door properly. Otherwise it can be re-opened. Do not apply excessive force to any door and door handle. It can
yy If you do not pay attention to closing or opening a door, your cause them to break.
fingers may be caught between the door and the vehicle body
by accident.
yy When you exit your vehicle, look for other vehicles, motorcycles,
bicycles, or pedestrians before opening the door. Other people
can be injured by the doors suddenly flung open.
yy Make sure that all the doors are firmly closed before driving. It
is extremely dangerous if any door is opened while the car is
moving.
yy Do not leave children or animals unattended in parked vehicles.
The temperature in the vehicle gets too high or too low according
to the outside temperatures, and a child or an animal could die or
be seriously injured from suffocation.
yy The drive door may be opened by pulling the inside door handle
even if the doors are locked, depending upon the model. Do not
open the door while driving, as it can be fatal. Failure to do so can
result in an accident.
yy Lock the all doors using the central door lock switch on the driver
side before starting off the vehicle. In particular, do not forget to
lock the doors when driving with children. It is very dangerous if
any door is opened unintentionally during driving.
yy A child can be severely injured or killed by opening a door while
the vehicle is moving. Use the child protection door lock system
for your child to prevent him/her from opening a door.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINDOWS
Driver’S Door Window Switch
 When opening the window
� When the front of the switch is lightly pressed, the window
will be lowered while the switch is pressed.
� When pressed to its end, the window will open automatical-
ly until it is fully open. If you want to stop the window while
automatic lowering, lightly press the switch again or pull the
Central Door Lock/ Passenger’s Door
switch up.
Unlock Switch Window Switch
 When closing the window
� When you lightly pull the switch up, the window will move up
only while the switch is being operated.
� When pulling the switch up to its end, the window will be
fully closed (auto-up operation (If equipped)). If you want to
stop the auto-up function, pull up or gently press the switch
again. Rear Left
Window Switch
Window Lock Switch

Rear Right
If the window lock switch is pressed down, only driver’s win- Window Switch
dow is operative. Passenger’s and rear windows cannot be
operated by their switches.
Warning Caution
When carrying children in the rear seat, press the window lock When closing the passenger’s and rear windows from driver’s seat,
switch to make the rear window switches inoperative. Do not allow be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body
children to play with the power window switch and rear door window can be trapped by the window.
switches.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Anti-Trap System for Driver’S Win- Front Passenger’s and Rear Window Switch
dow
Passenger’s seat
The anti-trap system enables the driver’s window to automati-
cally reverse when something is caught in the window as it is
closing. When the sensor detects an obstacle, the window will
Door Lock/Unlock
be lowered immediately.
Switch
Caution
yy The anti-trap system is operated only when the driver’s window is
moving up automatically by the “AUTO” switch.
yy The anti-trap system does not operate where the space between
the top of the glass and window frame is very close.
Window switch
yy If the window is stuck in very cold weather, anti safety function may
work. In this case, fully close the window by switch.
To move windows up or down,

Time Lag of Window Operation Rear seat
pull up or press the corre-
The power window can be operated for 30 seconds even after sponding switch for the win-
the ignition key is turned to another position. However, this dow.
function stops immediately when a front door is opened.
Warning
yy Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing can
be trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers) in the window.
yy Make sure that passengers do not stick out their hands or heads
from the vehicle while driving.
yy Do now allow children to play with any switch, door lever or the
gear shift lever.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SUNROOF* * For your safety, never operate the sunroof when the vehicle is moving.
The sun-roof cover opens and closes manually.
Sunroof Sliding Operation

 Open: 2-Step Opening
The sunroof automatically opens if the sunroof open/close
switch is pushed shortly. However, this operation has two Sliding Open/Tilt Down
steps; if you push the switch to its first stop, the sunroof opens
up to 5 cm ahead of end frame. If you push it again, the sun-
roof opens completely. When the switch is operated while the
sunroof is moving, the sunroof stops sliding. (Manual sliding
open: The sunroof is opened only while the sunroof switch is
pressed)
 Close
The sunroof automatically closes completely if the sunroof Sliding Close/Tilt Up
open/close switch is pulled down shortly when the sunroof is
open. To stop it during its operation, operate the switch to any
direction. (Manual sliding close: The sunroof is closed only Caution
while the sunroof switch is pressed)
yy Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is
in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the sunroof
repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery.
Sunroof Tilting Operation Operate the sunroof while the engine is running.
yy When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the switch.
 Tilt Up If you keep the switch operating, it could cause a malfunction.
The sunroof is tilted up if the sunroof open/close switch is Especially in the winter, never operate the sunroof if moving areas
pulled down when the sunroof is closed. are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced.
yy When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close
 Tilt Down the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or, the
interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows.
The sunroof is tilted down if the sunroof open/close switch is
pushed when the sunroof is tiled up.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Anti-Pinch Function Wind Buffeting
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the auto- When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open
closing sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your
the sunroof when an object is trapped. ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter.
This happens because of an influx in air through the window
Caution or sunroof and its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by
yy This safety function is available for the sliding sunroof close. opening the window or sunroof.
yy The Anti-Pinch Function is deactivated just before the sunroof
closes.
yy Opening the sunroof or driving with the sunroof open after a car Battery Discharge or Power
wash or rain may lead to water entering
Failure while Operating Sunroof
yy Do not pull on the blind or apply excessive force on it. The blind
may be damaged. If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery
yy Close the sunroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts or power failure, you need to re-calibrate the starting point
or particles entered can cause operating problems. of the sunroof. In addition, the following cases need the re-
yy If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo calibration.
is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the panorama sunroof.
If you are required to operate the sunroof, carefully check that the
yy The sunroof does not completely close or open by operat-
roof rack system does not interfere with the sunroof and it is safe ing the switch once.
to open the sunroof. yy The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does not
stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof.
Warning yy The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open
yy When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before or tilt up.
operation. Parts of the body can be trapped. yy Operation of the sunroof switch does not do anything or
yy Do not stick any part of your body out of the sunroof. work properly.
yy Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of
his/her body out of the sunroof opening while driving. There is a
risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly.
yy Before operating the sunroof, make sure that no head, hand,
finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of
personal injury or even death.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Re-calibrating the Sunroof Start-
ing Point
yy Close the sunroof completely by using the sunroof open/
close switch (sliding close).
yy When the sunroof stops while the sunroof is par tially
opened, completely tilt it up using the sunroof open/close
switch.
Note
When the sunroof is completely opened with the sunroof switch
and the switch is operated to the “OPEN” direction for more than 5
seconds, the sunroof cannot completely be either closed or opened
by operating the switch once. The sunroof will be moving only when
the switch is being operated. When this happens, re-calibrate the
beginning point of the sunroof to reactivate the one touch button.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE HOOD
1. To open the engine hood, pull the release
knob located on the lower left side of the
steering wheel to unlatch the engine hood.
2. Slightly lift up the engine hood and raise up
the safety latch lever with your fingers. Then,
completely lift up the engine hood.
Warning
yy When you open the hood while the engine is running, extra caution
is needed to avoid any injuries by the moving parts in the engine
compartment.
yy Before driving, try to pull up the front edge of the hood to check
that the hood is securely latched.
yy When it is windy, extra caution is needed to prevent personal in-
jury. Wind might be able to lift up the hood and the prop rod may
be disengaged from its slot. This may result in an unexpected
closing of the hood.
yy Before closing the engine hood, ensure that none of your body
parts are trapped.
yy Before opening the engine hood, turn the engine OFF in flat terrain
and move the gear selector lever to the “P” (Park) position with the
parking brake pedal applied.
Caution
yy Open the engine hood with the engine turned OFF, unless other-
wise specified. If working with the engine running is necessary, yy Before closing the engine hood, ensure that all the caps are in
make sure that loose clothing such as ties, handkerchiefs, scarves, place.
or sleeves do not contact with the radiator fan. Failure to do so yy Before closing the engine hood, ensure that nothing left in engine
can result in severe personal injury and damage to the vehicle. compartment.
Remove any watch, necklaces, rings and bracelets. yy Keep head clearance in work at hood open position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILLER DOOR
111 Open the fuel filler door by pulling the
release lever ( ) located on the lower left
side of the steering wheel.
222 Open the fuel filler cap ( ) by turning it

OPEN counterclockwise.
333 After refueling, tighten the fuel filler cap by
turning it clockwise until you hear clicking
CLOSE sounds. Then close the fuel filler lid ( )
properly until it latches.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Caution
yy In hot weather, there could be a difference between the pressure yy Fuel damages paintwork. If fuel spills onto paintwork, immediately
in the fuel reservoir and the atmospheric pressure. To remove the wash the affected area with cold water.
cap, turn it one turn and wait until the “hissing” sound is not heard yy The fuel filler door may not open in cold weather. Gently tap the
to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. fuel filler door to open.
Then remove the cap. yy When you need to replace the fuel filler cap, use only the
yy Contact a metalic part to remove the static electricity from your Ssangyong genuine part.
body before opening the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, you may get
burnt due to a discharging spark from the static electricity.
yy Do not get in the vehicle during refueling. It may generate the static
electricity on your body, resulting in a fire.
yy If you must use a portable container for refueling in emergency
situation, put the container on the ground other than on vehicle
or in cabin. Otherwise, it may cause a fire due to the static elec-
tricity.
yy Always stop the engine before refueling.
yy Use only the designated fuel and low sulfur diesel. Otherwise,
engine could be seriously damaged.
yy Keep open flames and smoking materials away from the vehicle.
yy If you use inappropriate grade fuel or put improper fuel additives
into the fuel tank, the engine and catalytic converter may seriously
be damaged.
yy Aviod using a mobile phone at gas station. The current or elec-
tromagnetic from the phone can cause a fire with the vaporized
fuel.
yy If a fire breaks out, immediately escape from the gas station and
get help from a fire station.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline Engine
Warning
Fuel with too low octane number can cause pre-ignition yy Do not re-enter the vehicle while adding fuel. Never do anything
(detonation). Ssangyong cannot be held liable for resultant which creates static electricity in or around the gas station. The
damage. vaporized fuel may be ignited by the static and this spontaneous
combustion causes the fuel to explode. If you are required to
Warning re-enter and exit the vehicle, discharge any static electricity by
touching any metal part which is a safe distance away from the
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. fuel filler with your bare hands.
It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries. yy If you use a portable container, Place the container on the ground
When refueling, before refueling. Putting the container on or inside the vehicle
yy Switch off engine. can create static electricity which ignites fuel vapor. Keep the
yy No smoking. container on the ground from the start of fuel filling to the end
yy No naked flame. of fuel filling.
yy No sparking material. yy Never use a cellular phone near a gas station. The electromag-
netic (RF) waves or electronic impulses emitted by the phone
might trigger fire of vaporized fuel. If you must use a cellular
phone, use it in a place away from the gas station.
Caution yy In case of fire during the fuel refilling, stay away from your vehicle
yy For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex. for safety and immediately call the manager of the gas station
Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer. and fire station.
yy Gasoline damages paintwork. If gasoline spills onto paintwork,
wash with cold water immediately.
Caution
Engine and exhaust system will be damaged.
yy Do not use leaded fuel to the vehicle for unleaded fuel.
yy Use the fuel with specified or higher Research Octane Number
recommended for your country by Ssangyong. Otherwise, it is
not covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Roof rack
Caution
yy In case the sunroof is equipped, do not position roof rack loads
that could interfere with opening of the sunroof.
yy The following specification is maximum weight when loading cargo
or luggage.
Roof rack: 45 kg (100 lbs.) evenly distributed
yy Loading cargo or luggage above specification on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear
or the sides of your vehicle.
yy To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check
frequently to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still
securely fastened.
yy Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
yy Loading cargo or luggage over specification on the roof rack may
damage stability of your vehicle.
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can load things on top of
your vehicle.
When loading, stowage on the vehicle should not damage the
vehicle as well as not interfere with the sunroof operation (for
sunroof equipped vehicle).
Use any auxiliary equipment for loading, such as a carrier,
considering the vehicle condition and safety.
Note
It is recommended to put cloth or cushions between stowage and
roof to protect them.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE AND TAILGATE WINDOW
Opening the Tailgate Window
Unlock
Lock
To unlock the tailgate window, unlock the

tailgate and pull the left lever up. Open the
tailgate window by pulling up the outer win-
dow grip.
Tailgate
opening lever
Opening the Tailgate
Tailgate window
opening lever
To open the tailgate, unlock the tailgate and

pull the tailgate opening lever up.
To close the tailgate, lower it by holding the
inside handle to a certain level first, then
close it.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning CAUTIONS WHEN OPENING/
yy Before closing the tailgate, ensure that none of your body parts
are trapped. Also, because the tailgate is heavy, it might unexpect-
CLOSING DOORS
edly fall down and close. To prevent any injury, close the tailgate
with caution. yy Do not allow children to play with any switch, door le-
yy The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are ver and the gear shift.
near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.
yy Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no re-
yy Before operating the power windows, doors, tailgate
straints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or and fuel filler door, make sure that nothing can be
sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained. trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers).
yy If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous exhaust yy Make sure that the doors, tailgate and fuel filler door
fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to
are completely closed before driving.
vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep
the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air yy When a child is on rear seat, use the child safety
comes into the vehicle. functions to avoid any unwanted and dangerous
yy No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment opening of doors.
of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event of a crash. yy Parts of the human body can be trapped in the win-
yy Exhaust gases are poisonous. Do not run the engine with the dow or sunroof and can be struck by passing objects.
tailgate or tailgate window open to avoid exhaust gas in the cabin. Do not stick hands, heads or anything else out of the
Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is in motion, openings.
resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel with the tailgate
or tailgate window open.
Caution
yy Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is in mo-
tion, resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel with the
tailgate open.
yy Make sure that you close the tailgate before driving. Possible dam-
age may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached objects
if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.
yy Remove any obstacles to interrupt closing the tailgate securely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S
witches and devices.......................................4-2
3
L
ight switch.......................................................4-4
W
iper and washer.............................................4-8
4
R
ain sensing wiper*..........................................4-9
W
iper and washer switch................................4-10
5
C
ruise control switch* (D22DTR)....................4-12
C
ruise control switch* (D20DTR, D27DT(P), 4
6
G32D)..............................................................4-18
S
witch panel on driver’s door trim..................4-24 7
O
utside rearview mirror control switch...........4-25
R
emote audio controls & gear shift button
Interior Switches
8
(A/T) on steering wheel...................................4-26
S
teering wheel heating switch / heated 9
glass switch.....................................................4-28
H
azard warning flasher switch........................4-29 10
SP OFF switch*............................................4-30
E
H
DC (Hill Descent Control) switch*................4-32 11
P
AS (Parking Aid System) OFF switch*.........4-34
S
witches in center console.............................4-35 12
4
-Wheel drive system*....................................4-36
S
witches in overhead console, 13
room lamp switch............................................4-40
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
Room lamp switch
2
Sunroof switch*
3
5
Light switch
6 Wiper and washer switch
Remote control switch
7 on steering wheel
8 Rear fog Center switch

light switch*
9 Door lock/
unlock switch
10 HLLD* Auto cruise*
Driver seat heating/ventilation switch*
4-wheel drive switch*
Passenger seat heating/ventilation switch*
11
12 Window control switch
USB port & Aux jack (USB & HDMI port)*
13 Door lock/unlock switch
14
4-2 Interior Switches

GETtheMANUALS.org
Steering wheel Tailgate and outside rearview ESP OFF switch* PAS OFF switch
heating switch mirror heated glass switch
Windshield heated glass Hazard switch HDC switch*

switch
Interior Switches 4-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
LIGHT SWITCH
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL)*:

Light Switch DRL Regulation Region Only
Front fog light EXT INT
HEAD- FOG
CONDITION TAIL HEAD- DRL
switch LAMP LAMP
LAMP LAMP
KEY OFF X X X X X
TAIL LAMP OFF X X X X X
ACC
TAIL LAMP ON O O X X X
TAIL LAMP OFF O X X X O
Light switch TAIL LAMP ON O O X X O

IGN HEADLAMP ON O O O X X
ON FOG LAMP ON O X X O X
You can turn the lights on
TAIL LAMP ON +
and of f (headlamps, tail FOG LAMP ON
O O X O X
lamps, license plate lamp,
turn signal lamps, fog Caution Note
lights) with this switch. Turn on the headlamps when passing through the DRL OFF: When the parking brake is applied with the
dark area such as tunnel. vehicle stopped, the DRL and tail lamp are turned off.
High mounted stop

lamp
Headlamp License plate lamp
high beam
Tail lamp
Headlamp Turn signal
low beam lamp Stop lamp
Position lamp Stop lamp or
rear fog light*
Front fog light
Turn signal lamp
Turn signal lamp Back-up lamp

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC Light*
AUTO
The auto light and rain sensor senses the ambient illumination inten-
sity to determine the timing for turning the headlamps and tail lamps
on or off automatically when the light switch is set to “AUTO”.
Caution
yy Do not clean the area where the auto-light and rain sensor in
installed with detergent or wax. Automatic Light & Rain Sensor*
yy On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual
mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending This senses the ambient illumination intensity to determine the
on the climate, season, or circumstances. timing for turning the headlamps and tail lamps on or off auto-
yy Any aftermarket tanning film or spray may cause the lighting matically when the light switch is set to “AUTO” (integrated
system to malfunction. with rain sensor).
yy Ssangyong recommends you to use this device restrictively around
only a sunrise or sunset. Caution
yy Usually turn the headlamps or tail lights on or off manually. Do not shake and impact the sensor. It may not work properly. On
yy Turn on the headlamps manually when passing through a dark uneven road, Auto Light may work improperly due to impacts and
area such as a tunnel. vibrations from the ground.
yy On a gloomy day, do not rely on this automatic function. But turn
the head or tail lights on or off manually.
yy When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and Note
head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phe- In AUTO position (Light switch and Wiper switch), the head lamps are
nomenon recognizing the automatic setting. turned on when the wipers are started to operate by rain sensing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Battery Saver (Automatically turns off the lights)
Headlight Leveling Switch
yy To avoid discharging the battery, if the tail lamps are on after the ignition
key is removed, a buzzer will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s
door is opened. The tail lamps will automatically turn off when the door is
closed. (With the light switch on, if the ignition key is removed and all doors
are closed, the tail lamps are off due to the battery saver function. However,
if you open a door and turn the light switch to the “OFF” position and then
to the “ON” position, the tail lamps will stay on after the door is closed.)
yy To turn the tail lamps on again, insert the ignition key into the ignition
switch. Or, turn the light switch to the “OFF” position and then to the “ON”
position. With the low beam switched on, adjust
the aiming angle of headlights to suit
the vehicle load.
yy To lower the aiming angle, rotate
the switch downward.
yy To raise the aiming angle, rotate the
switch upward.
Note
LIGHT SWITCH According to load condition, adjust the
aiming angle of headlights.
(Headlamps ON) AUTO (Automatic light ON)
Head-, side-marker, tail, license plate, front Head- and tail lamps automatically turn on
fog (with front fog light switch ON), and or off based upon the intensity of the sun-
instrument cluster lamps come on. light analyzed by the automatic light sensor.
(Tail lamps ON) OFF (Lights OFF)

Side-marker, tail, license plate, front fog All lights are off.
(with front fog light switch ON), and in-
strument cluster lamps come on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Right Turn Signal Switch
Headlamp High Beam
To turn on the headlamp high beam, Note
push the lever towards the instru- While the turn signal lamp is turned on, the turn
ment cluster with the headlamp low signal indicator in the instrument cluster blinks.
beam on. The headlamp high beam
indicator ( ) in the instrument
cluster comes on when the head- Front Fog Light Switch
lamp high beam is turned on. To turn on the fog lights, turn this switch to ON position
while the tail lamps or headlamps are turned on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL): DRL

Regulation Region Only
For vehicles equipped with the DRL, the tail lights
automatically turn on when turning the starter key
from ACC to ON.
Passing Left Turn Signal Switch

Regardless of the position of the light
switch, if you hold the lever toward the
steering wheel, the headlights are on
high beam during the hold. The high
beam indicator also illuminates on the Rear Fog Light Switch*
instrument cluster during the hold.
To turn on the rear fog light, push the rear fog light
switch while the front fog light switch is turned on. To
Warning
turn it off, push the switch again. The rear fog lights
Driving with high beam headlamps dis- are automatically turned off when turning off the light
turbs the approaching vehicle’s visibility
for safe driving. Use the high beam head-
switch or the front fog light switch. Therefore, to turn on
lamp only during very dark situations the rear fog lights, push the rear fog light switch again
when it is very hard to see the road. after turning on the light switch and the front fog light
switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WIPER AND WASHER
Rear Wiper
Wiper and Washer Switch
Front Wiper
Washer Nozzle
Washer Fluid Reservoir Wiper Blade

Frequently check the washer fluid level and add the specified product as needed. If the windshield cannot be cleaned prop-
In winter, use only the specified washer liquid for winter season. erly due to worn wiper blades, replace
them with new ones. Refer to “Service
Caution and Maintenance” section in this manual.
yy If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will freeze Front Wiper Rear Wiper
during the winter and damage the washer fluid reser-
voir and motor. Use only the specified washer fluid. 500mm 350mm
yy Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the engine or body
paint of your vehicle during replenishment
Warning
The washer fluid includes the flammable materials to
prevent freezing. It could cause a fire when directly
contacted with flames. When checking the washer fluid,
avoid the flames near the washer fluid reservoir.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rain Sensing Wiper*
When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, this sensor detects the amount
of rain, turns on the wiper, and controls the intermittent wiper intervals.
Wiper AUTO Position
Rain and Auto Light Sensor
AUTO
It controls the wiping speed by de-

tecting the amount of rain drops.
Caution Note
yy If you use only the wipers when the glass is dry, this could scratch yy When the light switche is in the “AUTO” position, head lights come
the glass and wear the wiper blades prematurely. Use the wiper on if the rain sensor detects any rain.
with the washer when the glass is dry. yy The speed of the wipers becomes a little faster when it is dark
yy Turn the wiper switch to the “OFF” position before any car wash enough to turn on the automatic lights.
to avoid unwanted operation of the wipers. yy When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will auto-
yy When it does not rain, turn the wiper switch into the “OFF” posi- matically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF”
tion. to the “AUTO” position. But the wiper will not operate again to
prevent any damage to the window even though the wiper switch
Warning is turned from the “OFF” position to the “AUTO” position.
When you clean the windshield over the sensor with damp clothes,
the wiper may operate suddenly. It could cause serious injury. Make
sure to place the wiper switch and ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-
tion when not in use.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Front Wiper Switch

MIST
If you move the wiper switch to “MIST” position
and release it, the windshield wipers operate one
wiping cycle. The wipers will operate continuously
if the switch is held in this position.
OFF
Wipers are not in operation.
AUTO
Operates automatically according to the
vehicle speed and amount of rainfall.
LO
Continuous wipe, slow operation Front Automatic Wiping Speed
Control Switch
HI
The interval of wiping speed can be adjusted by turning the
Continuous wipe, fast operation control knob upward or downward when the windshield wiper
switch is in AUTO position.
Fast: Fast interval
Slow: Slow interval

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR Wiper Switch Front Auto Washer Switch
When you press this switch with the front wiper
switch in “OFF” position, washer fluid will be sprayed
and the wiper will automatically operate 4 times.
When the switch is fully turned, washer fluid will Then, the fluid will be sprayed again and the wiper
be sprayed onto the rear window glass and the will automatically operate 3 times.
wiper will also operate. When the switch is re-
leased, it will return to the Rear Wiper Operation
mode and only the wiper will keep operating.
Rear wiper operation
OFF
Rear wiper is not in operation.
When the switch is fully turned, washer fluid Windshield Washer Operation
will be sprayed onto the rear window glass and In the “OFF” position, pull the lever toward you to spray washer
the wiper will also operate. When the switch is fluid on the windshield and to operate the wipers 1~3 cycles.
released, it will return to the “OFF” position and Pull the lever briefly (for less than 0.6 seconds): One wiping
turn off the wiper and washer. cycle with washer spray
Pull and hold the lever for more than 0.6 seconds: Three wip-
ing cycles with washer spray
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release
the lever.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH* (D22DTR)
Cruise Control Auto cruise ready light READY
When the cruise control ON/OFF switch is pressed, READY

indicator light appears on the instrument cluster. (Cruise con-
trol is now ready to operate)
Auto cruise control indicator light AUTO

CRUISE
With the READY indicator appeared on the instrument clus-

ter, if you push the cruise control setting switch up or down,
READY indicator turns off and AUTO CRUISE indicator will
turn on (Min. vehicle speed is 36 km/h for operation).
Indicator light Traffic Conditions for Using Cruise Control

AUTO Use the cruise control system only when the traffic is not
READY CRUISE jammed, driving on motorways or highways where there is no
sudden change in the driving condition due to traffic lights, pe-
destrian, etc.
The cruise control is an automatic speed control system that
maintains a desired driving speed without using the accelera-
Caution
tor pedal. READY or AUTO CRUISE indicator will come on in
the instrument cluster depending on the operation of the cruise Improper use of the cruise control could be dangerous.
control switch. yy Do not use on winding roads.
yy Do not use in heavy traffic.
The vehicle speed must be greater than 36 km/h to engage the
yy Do not use on slippery, wet roads.
cruise control. This feature is especially useful for motorway
This could result in a loss of control, collision, and/or personal
driving.
injuries.
Caution
The cruise control system is a supplementary system, which helps Note
the driver to drive the vehicle at a desired speed without using the The described speed value may vary slightly depending on the road
accelerator pedal under the traffic condition where the vehicle-to- conditions.
vehicle distance meets the legal requirement.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cruise control (Setting the speed)
3. Maintaining the vehicle speed in the specified range, set the
desired speed by pushing the switch up in SET+ direction
(move the lever to position ). Remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal slowly.
4. Take your fingers off the cruise control switch.
5. Now the vehicle is cruised with the set speed (the speed
set at the moment when the cruise control starts operating)
Cruise control without depressing the accelerator pedal.
setting switch
6. To reset the speed during cruise control operation, slowly
press the accelerator pedal down until the desired speed is
reached, and repeat the step 3.
7. Refer to the following contents for operation details depend-
ing on vehicle conditions.
Caution
1. Press the cruise control ON/OFF switch. (READY indicator Never use the cruise control system until you get used to it.
comes on) Improper use or not fully aware of this function could result in collision
and/or personal injuries.
2. In order to activate the cruise control system, depress the
accelerator pedal until the vehicle speed reaches to the
proper range.
- Cruise control speed range: between 40 km/h and 140
km/h
- For vehicles with manual transaxle, the cruise control will
be available only when the gear shift lever position is in
3rd or higher.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Accelerating with the cruise control system
While the cruise control system is not in operation
Following steps will describe how to set the speed by accelerat-
ing and start the cruise control while the cruise control system is
not running.
1. Press the cruise control ON/OFF switch. (READY indicator
appears in the instrument cluster)
Cruise control
2. Depress the accelerator pedal over 36 km/h to set the cruise
setting switch control speed.
3. When the vehicle speed exceeds this value, push up or down
the cruise control switch in SET+ or SET- direction, respec-
tively to set the desired speed. Once the desired speed is
reached, release the accelerator pedal slowly.
4. If the cruise control switch is pushed and held up in SET+
direction the vehicle set speed will continue to increase until
the switch is released.
While the cruise control system is in operation 5. Take your finger off the cruise control switch.
1. To increase the set speed during cruise control operation,
push the cruise control switch up in SET+ direction until Increasing the set speed while the cruise control
reached to the desired speed without depressing accelera- system is in operation
tor pedal. If you want the fine increase of the control speed during the
Continue pushing the switch up until the desired speed is cruise control system operation, follow the steps below.
reached. 1. The speed will increase by approx. 1 km/h each time the
2. Remove your finger from the control switch once the de- cruise control switch is tapped up in SET+ direction (within 0.5
sired speed is reached. second).
2. If you want to increase the control speed by 10 km/h while
driving with cruise control running, tap the control switch up
in SET+ direction 10 times.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Decelerating with the cruise control system
Decreasing the set speed while the cruise control
system is in operation
If you want the fine decrease of the set speed during the cruise
control system operation, follow the steps below.
1. The speed will decrease by approx. 1.0 km/h each time the
cruise control switch is tapped down in SET- direction (within
Cruise control 0.5 second).
setting switch 2. If you want to decrease the set speed by 10 km/h while driv-
ing with cruise control running, tap the control switch down
in SET- direction 10 times.
While the cruise control system is in operation

1. To decrease the control speed during cruise control opera-
tion, push the cruise control switch down in SET- direction
until reached to the desired speed without pressing brake
pedal.
Continue pushing the switch down until the desired speed is
reached. Be informed that the cruise control system will be
deactivated when the vehicle speed gets lower than approx.
34 km/h.
2. Remove your finger from the control switch once the de-
sired speed is reached.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Resuming the set speed (RESUME)
Cruise control Cruise control

setting switch setting switch
If the auto cruise stopping conditions are met during the acti- If any of the following conditions is met while cruise control is
vation of the auto cruise, the function of the cruise control is operating, it is cancelled. (READY indicator stays on)
deactivated. But the last set speed memorized in the ECU will
be resumed when the RES button is pressed. Auto cruise stopping conditions (CANCEL)
The speed should be 40 km/h and the brake or accelerator
yy The brake pedal is depressed or ESP is activated.
pedal should not be depressed. (Deactivation by cruise control
OFF switch will not restore the previous set speed.) yy Drive the vehicle at less than 38 km/h.
yy Parking brake is applied while driving.
yy Depress the clutch pedal to change the gear (M/T).
yy ON/OFF switch operation (once) during auto cruise activa-
tion (ON/OFF switch operation in auto cruise ready mode
deactivates cruise control)

GETtheMANUALS.org
According to the vehicle conditions, the cruise
Caution
control will be cancelled when: yy Abnormal changes of the gear selector lever can damage the
1. The brake pedal is depressed or ESP is activated. engine. Do not move the gear shift lever to Neutral while driving at
2. The speed is decelerated below 34 (38) km/h. the set speed. Automatic transaxle damage may result.
yy The speed that has been set may not be maintained on uphill or
3. Parking brake is applied while driving. downhill slopes.
4. Clutch pedal is depressed to shift (M/T only). yy The speed may drop to less than the set speed on a steep uphill
5. The speed increases or decreases drastically. grade. The accelerator must be used if you want to maintain that
speed.
- when driving at more than 50 km/h above the set speed yy The speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep
- when driving for longer than 1 minute at more than 25 downhill grade. When the speed increases too much, turn off the
km/h above the set speed cruise control.
yy Always keep the safe stopping distance and depress the brake
- when driving at less than 70 km/h below the set speed
pedal when necessary.
- when driving for more than 3 minutes at less than 65 km/
h below the set speed
6. The cruise control switch malfunction occurs Using the Cruise Control on Hills
7. The brake switch malfunction or disconnection occurs How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the
speed, load, and the steepness of the hill.
If the cruise control is cancelled without normal conditions de-
When going up steep hills, you may have to depress the accel-
scribed above, or an intermittent malfunction occurs, stop the
erator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you
engine and remove the key. The system will reset and is back
may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed
on when restarting the engine.
down.
Caution Applying the brake takes you out of the cruise control.
When not using the cruise control, press the cruise control ON/OFF
switch and then the READY indicator light will go off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH* (D20DTR, D27DT(P), G32D)
Cruise Control
Traffic Conditions for Using Cruise Control
Use the cruise control system only when the traffic is not
AUTO jammed, driving on motorways or highways where there is no
CRUISE destrian, etc.
Caution
Improper use of the cruise control could be dangerous.
yy Do not use on winding roads.
injuries.
The cruise control is an automatic speed control system that Note

The described speed value may vary slightly depending on the road
tor pedal. conditions.
driving.
Caution
The cruise control system is a supplementary system, which helps
the driver to drive the vehicle at a desired speed without using the
accelerator pedal under the traffic condition where the vehicle-to-

GETtheMANUALS.org
Setting a Desired Speed
1. To operate the cruise control, accelerate to the desired
TYPE A speed, which must be more than 36 km/h (24 MPH) and
less than 150 km/h (90 MPH).
2. When the desired speed is reached, push up the ACCEL
switch of the cruise control lever or push down the DECEL
switch for 1 second per one switching and then release the
TYPE B 3. Now, the vehicle is cruised by this system with the set
speed.
4. And you can set to other vehicle speeds again with above
steps after an accelerator pedal intervention during the
cruise control running.
Caution
Never use the cruise control system until you get used to it.
Improper use or not fully aware of this function could result in collision
Manual transmission equipped vehicle:

The cruise control is only available when the 3rd or higher
speed gear is engaged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Accelerating with the Cruise Control System
yy While the cruise control system is not running
1. Accelerate using the accelerator pedal over 36 km/h.

2. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever and
hold it.
3. And then release the accelerator pedal slowly.
TYPE A 4. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever.
yy Tap-up while the cruise control system is running
1. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever less

than 0.5 second per one switching while the cruise control
TYPE B system is running. This is a tap-up switching.
2. When you operate a tap-up switching, the vehicle is acceler-
ated by 1.3 km/h over the previous set speed.
yy While the cruise control system is running
3. If you want to accelerate to 13 km/h, operate the tap-up
1. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever and switching ten times without accelerating with the cruise con-
hold it until the desired speed is reached without an accel- trol system.
erator pedal intervention.
2. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Decelerating with the Cruise Control System
yy When the cruise control system is not running
TYPE A
1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control lever and
hold it.
3. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever. But
the cruise control system cannot maintain the cruise function
at less than 36 km/h.
TYPE B
yy Tap-down while the cruise control system is running
1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control lever less
system is running. This is a tap-down switching.
2. When you operate a tap-down switching, the vehicle is de-
yy While the cruise control system is running celerated by 1.3 km/h below the previous set speed.
3. If you want to decelerate to 13 km/h, operate the tap-down
1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control lever and switching ten times without the brake pedal intervention.
hold it until the desired speed is reached without a brake
pedal intervention. But the cruise control system cannot
maintain the cruise function at less than 34 km/h.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Recovery of Set Speed (RESUME) Normal Cancellation of the Cruise Control
TYPE A TYPE A
TYPE B TYPE B
Even if the cruise control is cancelled, the previous set cruise The cruise control system will be canceled when one or more
speed can be recovered by pulling up the cruise control lever items of the following conditions are applied;
when the current vehicle speed is over 38 km/h without an ac- 1. When the brake pedal is depressed.
celeration intervention. But if you turn off the ignition switch, 2. When the cruising speed is decreased less than 38 km/h.
the memorized set speed is cleared and you cannot recover
3. When the OFF switch is operated by pulling the cruise con-
the previous set speed. trol lever (Type A) or by pushing the ON-OFF switch of the
cruise control lever (Type B).
Caution
4. When ESP is activated.
The resume position should only be used if the driver is fully aware
of this speed and wishes to resume this particular speed. 5. When applying the parking brake while driving.
6. When using the clutch in order to shift (M/T only).
And the cruise control system can be operated again in driving
state.
Caution
Keep the main cruise control switch in the neutral position when not
using the cruise control.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Abnormal Cancellation of the Cruise Control Using the Cruise Control on Hills
1. When the rapid deceleration is applied without braking. How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the
2. When the rapid acceleration is applied without acceleration speed, load, and the steepness of the hill.
pedal intervention. When going up steep hills, you may have to depress the accel-
3. When the cruise control lever is failed. erator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you
4. When the brake switch and the brake light switch input sig-
down.
nal are implausible.
Applying the brake takes you out of the cruise control.
And the cruise control system cannot be operated again in
driving state. In this case, you should stop the vehicle, and
turn off the ignition switch and then turn it on again. After you
do that, you can use the cruise control system again. But if the
cruise control system isn’t recovered, you should contact a
Ssangyong Dealer for diagnosis of the cruise control system.
Caution
yy Abnormal changes of the gear selector lever can damage the
engine. Do not move the gear shift lever to Neutral while driving at
the set speed. Automatic transmission damage may result.
downhill slopes.
yy The speed may drop to less than the set speed on a steep uphill
grade. The accelerator must be used if you want to maintain that
speed.
yy The speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep
downhill grade. When the speed increases too much, turn off the
cruise control.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SWITCH PANEL ON DRIVER’S DOOR TRIM
Easy Access Button (Driver’s Seat)*

This system is designed to provide a driver
sufficient space to access and exit (driver’s
door moves rearward automatically).
Position Memory Setting Button (SET)*
Position Memory Cancellation Button (STOP)*

Position Memory
Button (1, 2, 3)*
Central Door Lock/Unlock

Switch
When the door lock/unlock
switch is pressed while all doors
including the tailgate are locked, Outside Rearview Mirror Folding
all doors will be unlocked. When Switch
the switch is pressed again, all
To fold the outside rearview mirrors,
doors will be locked. press the switch. To unfold the mir-
rors, press again
Outside Rearview Mirror Control Switch
Window Lock Switch
Window Switch Adjust the outside rearview mirror position by
If the window lock switch is pressed down, only pushing the appropriate edge of this switch
dirver’s window is operative. Passenger’s and rear after selecting the desired outside mirror.
windows cannot be operated by their switches.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Outside Rearview Mirror Control

1. Select the driver side mirror (L) or the passenger side
mirror (R) with the mirror selection switch.
2. Adjust the outside rearview mirror by pushing the ap-
propriate edge of the switch.
Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Switch

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, press the
switch. To unfold the mirrors, press again.
Mirror Selection Switch

▶ “L”: Driver side mirror
▶ “R”: Passenger side mirror
Warning
Do not put any tinting film on the door glasses of the front seats.
Otherwise, your visibility will decrease.
Caution
yy You can fold and unfold the mirrors within 30 seconds after the
ignition is turned to OFF. However, this function is overridden when
any of front doors is opened with the ignition switch OFF.
yy Do not fold or unfold the outside rearview mirrors manually. It may Aiming Switch
cause a malfunction of the mirror folding system. Adjust the selected mirror up, down, left,
yy If you directly spray high-pressured water to the electric remote- or right by pressing the corresponding
controlled outside mirrors, this may cause some malfunctions in edges of the switch to get a desired view.
the mirror system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS & GEAR SHIFT BUTTON (A/T) ON STEERING WHEEL
Type A Bluetooth Handsfree
Phone switch using Bluetooth handsfree for
mobile phone use
Note Cruise control ON/OFF

For more detailed information on audio and Pressing this switch turns on the READY
bluetooth handsfree system, refer to Audio indicator in the warning box. In this state,
Operating Manual provided separately. cruise control system is ready to operate.
SEEK
<
SEEK yy Pressing this switch during cruise con-

<
trol operation deactivates it.

yy in CD(DVD) player mode
- briefly press: Next/Previous track FRT Camera*
- press and hold:Moving in same track
yy in radio mode When this switch is pressed, front view of
- briefly press: Manual search, the vehicle is displayed on the front monitor.
move to selected channel
- press and hold: Auto search
RES*
+ VOL When this switch is pressed during cruise
VOL - control operation, the vehicle speed is
returned to the speed before the deacti-
Increases/decreases volume
vation of cruise control function.
MUTE(POWER) SET -
SET +
yy Pressing this switch briefly with
yy Cruise control system is acti- yy Resume the speed set before
the audio system off turns the sys-
vated by pressing this switch cancellation with the READY
tem on. Press and hold this switch
w it h R E A DY indic ato r O N . indicator ON. (for gasoline only)
to turn off the audio system again.
MODE (Vehicle speed should be 36 yy Decrease the speed set to the
yy Pressing this switch once with the km/h or higher) cruise control system.
audio system on turns off all sound Audio mode changes when yy Increase the speed set to the
outputs. To resume the audio out- the switch is pressed. cruise control system. Note
put, press the switch again.
Refer to Chapter 4, Cruise control
switch for detailed information.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Type B
MODE POWER
yy To change the audio mode, To turn the audio system ON/

press this switch briefly. O FF, p r e s s t h e “ P OW ER ”
Radio → USB → BT Audio switch under the left side of
→ AUX the steering wheel.
yy To change the Radio band,
press and hold this switch.
AM → FM1 → FM2
+ VOL
- SEEK
>
VOL SEEK
>
Increases/decreases volume yy in CD(DVD) player mode
- briefly press:
Next/Previous track
- press and hold:
Moving in same track
yy in radio mode
- briefly press:
Manual search, move
to selected channel
MUTE Bluetooth Switch
- press and hold:
Stops audio output from the To receive a call in Bluetooth Auto search
audio system. To resume the mode, press this switch.
audio output, press the button To reject a call, press and
again. hold this switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
STEERING WHEEL HEATING SWITCH / HEATED GLASS SWITCH
Indicator Indicator
Steering Wheel Heating Windshield Heated Glass Switch Tailgate and Outside Rearview Mirror
Switch yy Press this switch to turn on the windshield Heated Glass Switch
To heat the steering wheel, heated glass. It will operate for about 12 yy Press this switch to turn on the tailgate and
press this switch. To stop the minutes. outside rearview mirror heated glasses. It
heating, press it again. The yy Press the switch again to stop the operation. will operate for about 12 minutes.
indicator on the instrument yy Use this to prevent the windshield wiper yy Press the switch again to stop the operation.
cluster comes on when heating blades from being frozen.
and goes off when turning off. yy This switch is designed to defrost or defog the
y The heated glass will operate for about 6
y tailgate glass and outside rearview mirrors.
Caution
minutes when the switch is pressed again
within 12 minutes after completion of its yy The heated glass will operate for about 6
yy Do not install the supplemental
first operation cycle. minutes when the switch is pressed again
steering device. It may cause within 12 minutes after completion of its
to damage the heated wire yy The indicator in the switch comes on when
first operation cycle.
inside the steering wheel. in use.
yy Take care not to damage the yy The indicator in the switch comes on when
grip surface of the steering in use.
wheel with a sharp object. Outside Tailgate
The built-in heater could be rearview mirror heated
damaged. heated glass glass
yy When cleaning the steering
wheel, do not use organic sol-
vents such as thinner, alcohol
or gasoline. These solvents can Windshield
damage the heater and the sur- heated glass
face of the steering wheel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch Warning

yy To turn on the hazard warning flashers, push the hazard Do not leave the flashers on for an extended period of time. Battery
warning flasher switch. could be discharged.
yy Use the hazard warning flasher to warn other drivers when
you stop or park under emergency conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ESP OFF SWITCH*
ESP OFF Switch ESP OFF Indicator

If you press the ESP OFF switch, ESP function is deactivated On: When ESP is deactivated by pressing
and the ESP OFF indicator in the instrument cluster comes on. ESP OFF switch
To resume the ESP function, press this switch again. At this
time, ESP OFF indicator goes out.
ESP Indicator/Warning Lamp

ESP (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM)
Blinking: When ESP is operating
SYSTEM
On: When ESP system is defective.
The Electronic Vehicle Stability Control Program (ESP) is
When ESP is activated, this indicator blinks. a supplementary driving safety system when your vehicle
is unstably moving in a certain situation, such as during a
If this indicator stays on (ESP warning lamp), immediately
sharp corner. The ESP applies brakes on a certain wheel(s)
have the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
or controls the engine torque to compensate vehicle stabil-
Authorized Service Center.
ity. These actions help your vehicle avoid dangerous situ-
ations. The ESP functions automatically, working only in
Note very unstable conditions; it does not operate under normal
When you hit the brake while driving at more than 50 km/h or when driving conditions. If the ESP is operating, the ESP warning
ESP is in operation, the hazard warning flasher will blink for ap- lamp will blink on the instrument cluster.
prox. 10 seconds to inform the emergency situation to the vehicles
around.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Stopping ESP Function With ESP OFF Switch ARP (Active Rollover Protection) Function
If the driving wheels are slipping on snowy or icy roads, the This function is a part of the ESP system. When your vehicle
engine rpm may not increase even when you depress the ac- moves in an extremely unstable manner, this function helps
celerator pedal, and accordingly, you may not be able to move the vehicle maintain normal stability.
your vehicle. In this case, stop the ESP function by pressing
the ESP OFF switch. When the ESP OFF switch is pressed, Caution
the ESP function stops and the vehicle is driven independently The ARP system more powerfully controls the engine and each wheel
from the sensor outputs. than the ESP function. When the ARP is applied, a sudden decrease
Driving Impression when ESP is Working of vehicle speed or powerful braking force can make steering your
vehicle a little difficult.
When ESP is applied in a certain situation (the indicator blinks
and a warning buzzer sounds), such as during a sharp turn,
you may feel that ESP controls each wheel and different levels Caution
of needed braking force are applied to wheels. You may hear yy If ESP indicator comes on after engine starting, ESP related sys-
some noise or feel some vibrations from the brake pedal or tem is defective. Make sure to check the vehicle at the nearest
other systems. They are caused by pressure changes in rele- Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
vant system. You may also notice the engine output decreases yy The ESP system does not operate during reverse driving.
even when the accelerator pedal is being depressed. yy The ESP system is activated when the vehicle is unstable to cor-
rect the vehicle stability. When the ESP indicator is blinking, reduce
Vehicles equipped with ESP system have more the speed and pay extra attention to the road.
yy The ESP system is only a supplementary device for the vehicle.
auxiliary functions to reinforce the driving safety, When the vehicle exceeds its physical limits, it cannot be con-
other than major functions below. trolled. Do not rely on the system. Keep driving safely.
yy When ESP is applied, you may feel some noise or vibration from
BAS (Brake Assist System) Function the brake pedal or other relevant systems. They are caused by
A certain driver such as a female driver, aged driver, or a pressure changes in the relevant systems.
driver with a disability is unable to depress the brake pedal yy Do not drive off the vehicle immediately after starting the engine.
as hard as necessary. When the ESP system recognizes any The ESP system needs approx. 2 seconds to perform self-
emergency situations requiring hard braking, it automatically diagnosis. If the system could not complete the self-diagnosis,
the ESP system cannot be activated even when the vehicle is in
delivers an extra high braking pressure to the wheels.
unstable conditions.
HDC (Hill Descent Control) Function yy Do not press the ESP OFF switch when the ESP system is in
operation. Stopping the ESP function on the slippery road may
When traveling down steep grades, this function allows you cause a serious accident. To deactivate the ESP function, press
to travel at a low speed without any depression of the brake the ESP OFF switch only on a long straight road.
pedal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC (HILL DESCENT CONTROL) SWITCH*
HDC Switch HDC?

When this button is pressed once, HDC is ready for use. The
green HDC indicator on the instrument cluster comes on. When HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling
the button is pressed again, HDC is deactivated and the indicator down steep grades, this function allows you to travel at
goes off. a low speed without any depression of the brake pedal.
This convenient function is for only driving down steep
grades. Therefore do not use this function for anything
HDC Indicator other than driving down steep hills.
Green light on: HDC is ready for use
(by pressing the HDC switch).
Green light blinking: HDC is being applied.
Red light on: the HDC system is overheated
or malfunctioning.
When HDC is applied, the green HDC indicator blinks.

When the red HDC indicator is on, the HDC system is overheated
or malfunctioning.
When the red HDC indicator is on, the HDC function does not
work.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC Operational Conditions Depressing the Accelerator or Brake Pedal while HDC
1. The HDC switch should be on (The green indicator on is Being Applied
the instrument cluster comes on). If you depress the accelerator or brake pedal, the HDC function im-
2. A certain steep grade. mediately stops and there will be more driving or braking force ac-
3. The vehicle speed is 2 ~ 50 km/h (7 km/h for M/T). cordingly.
4. The automatic gear shift lever is in the “D” or “R” or “N” Warning
position. In case of the manual transmission, the gear
When driving down an extremely dangerous steep grade, HDC will still
shift is in the forwarding “1” or “Reverse” or “Neutral”
work even if the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed.
position.
5. The accelerator or brake pedal is not depressed. Operation of HDC
6. ESP (Electronic Stability Program, including BAS) is If the conditions for activating the HDC are met, HDC is activated
not activated. and the green HDC indicator blinks on the instrument cluster. The
HDC is deactivated when the vehicle speed is below 5 km/h or
Deactivation Conditions of HDC above 70 km/h or the gradient of the slope becomes gentle while it
1. The HDC switch is off (The green indicator on the in- is in operation. It is normal that strong vibrations and noise occur
strument cluster is off too). from the brake system when the HDC is in operation.
2. Less than required steep grade.
Warning
3. Vehicle’s speed is out of the operational ranges.
yy HDC is designed for driving on off-road steep grades.
4. The automatic gear shift lever is in or passes through yy Unnecessary usage of HDC can cause malfunctions in the brake system
the “N” position. Or the manual transmission shift lever or ESP. Do not use HDC when driving on normal roads.
is engaged in or passes through the neutral position. yy If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC may be
5. The accelerator or brake pedal is depressed. applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed bump. There-
fore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal roads.
6. ESP (including BAS) is applied.
yy If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is overheated or malfunctioning.
7. Because of extended operation of HDC, the system is If the indicator is on even after the system has cooled down enough, have
overheated (The red HDC indicator illuminates). the nearest authorized dealer or service center check the system.
yy It is normal to have strong vibrations and noise from the brake system
when HDC is applied.
yy In case of a manual transmission vehicle, the gear shift is in the forward-
ing “1” or “Reverse” position. If HDC is attempted in the “2” position, the
engine may turn off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PAS (Parking Aid System) OFF SWITCH*
Operation of Front Parking Aid System
PAS OFF Switch

This switch turns on and off the front parking aid Lamp OFF Lamp ON
sensors when the gear shift lever is in “D” posi- Gear
tion. If the sensors are OFF, the indicator on the Position
(The front parking aid sensors (The front parking aid sensors
switch is ON. are operable.) are not operable.)
Front Parking Aid Sensor
D
Installed on both sides of front bumper
Note
Regardless of the switch operation, the front parking
aid sensors do not work when the gear shift lever is
in “P” or “N” position or the vehicle speed is 10 km/h
or more.
aid sensor works in R position

GETtheMANUALS.org
SWITCHES IN CENTER CONSOLE
Passenger’s Seat Heating/

Ventilation switch*
Rotate the seat heating/ventila-
tion switch from ‘0’ (OFF) to the
desired position (1~3).
USB Port and HDMI Jack

Driver’s Seat Heating/
Ventilation switch* Use them when you want to hear the music in
USB memory stick or an external audio device
Rotate the seat heat-
through with the speakers in your vehicle.
ing/ventilation switch
from ‘0’ (OFF) to the
desired position (1~3).
Cigarette Lighter Gear Shift Button

To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in all (Tip switch)
the way down. When it becomes heated, it You can manually shift
automatically pops out and is ready for use. up or down by pushing
or pulling this button at
M position.
Transmission Mode Switch

You can select ‘Winter’ or
‘Standard’ mode with this
switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4-Wheel Drive SYSTEM*
4-Wheel Drive System DRIVING MODE

Transfer case which allows you, in the case of part-time four 2H : 2-Wheel Drive
wheel drive, to switch between two-wheel drive and four-
This is rear wheel drive with high
wheel drive. Compared with two-wheel drive vehicles, this
speed. Use this position for nor-
system provides more stable driving conditions. This sys-
mal driving. This position gives
tem ensures a more stable drive on wet or slippery roads.
greater fuel economy, quieter
In case the greater traction is needed, you can shift into 4
ride and least drive train wear.
Wheel Drive Low (4L).
Types of Four-Wheel Drive System

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)* 4H : 4-Wheel Drive, High
AWD stands for the full-time 4WD system. Use this position on wet or slip-
AWD reduces wheel slipage and provides greater driver pery roads such as sandy, mud-
control over the vehicle. AWD automatically splits the torque dy or snow covered roads.
between the front (40%) and rear (60%) wheels. This system
controls the vehicle traction force along with the ESP system.
Torque On-Demand (TOD)*
TOD, which is based on the Four-Wheel Drive, enables the
control unit to adjust the proportion of the torque between
the front and rear wheels according to driving conditions. 4L : 4-Wheel Drive, Low
Use this position for maximum
traction.
Part-Time 4-Wheel Drive
Normally, the vehicle is driving in 2WD mode. But if needed,
it can be changed into 4WD High (4H), and 4WD Low (4L) by
pressing the switch. This is equipped with the control unit that
supports the mode transfer. In 4WD mode, the system splits
the torque between the front (50%) and rear (50%) wheels.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4-Wheel Drive Switch Driving Mode Change
Select a proper driving

Part-Time mode according to the
2H ⇔ 4H
road conditions.
It is recommended to shift under a speed of 70 km while the
vehicle is being driven.
yy When shifting the driving mode to “4H”, this

indicator comes on.
TOD yy This indic ator blinks dur ing the mo de
change from “4L” to “4H”. After completion
of the mode change to 4H, the indicator
comes on.
2H, 4H ⇔ 4L
yy Automatic Transmission Equipped Vehicle

Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the gear
selector lever into the “N” position. Turn the switch to the
desired position while depressing the brake pedal.
yy Manual Transmission Equipped Vehicle
Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the shift
lever into the “Neutral” position. Turn the switch to the
desired position while depressing the clutch pedal.
Note yy When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this

yy The vehicle equipped with TOD system does not have the 2H indicator blinks until the shifting operation
(2-wheel drive) function because it automatically controls the driv- is completed. After completion of the mode
ing force at front and rear wheels. change to 4L, the indicator comes on.
yy The vehicle with AWD system does not have the 4WD switch
because it is driven in full-time 4WD mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING LIGHTS/INDICATORS AND CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
4WD HIGH Indicator CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
yy When shifting the driving mode from “2H”
to “4H”, this indicator comes on. yy There could be mechanical noises and shocks during mode
changes. However, these are normal conditions due to the mode
yy When shifting the driving mode from “4L” changing operations.
to “4H”, this indicator blinks until the shift- yy Use only the 2H mode on a normal paved surface. Do not drive
ing operation is completed. After comple- your vehicle in the “4H” or “4L” position on paved road surfaces.
tion of the mode change to 4H, the indica- Doing so will result in damages to the drive train.
tor comes on. yy Driving in a 4 wheel mode on a normal paved surface will cause
unwanted noises, premature wear of tires, or increased fuel con-
4WD LOW Indicator sumption.
yy To shift from “4L” into another mode or vice versa, stop the vehicle
When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this and depress the brake pedal before any shift.
indicator blinks until the shifting operation yy If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system
is completed. After completion of the mode checked by the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
change to 4L, the indicator comes on. rized Service Center.
yy When cornering a curved road in a 4-wheel drive mode (4L or
4WD CHECK Warning Indicator 4H), there could be some mechanical shocks and resistances in
vehicle’s drive train. These are normal conditions due to internal
If this warning light comes on while driv- resistance in the drive train when the 4-wheel drive mode is prop-
ing, have t he 4W D system c he c ked by erly working. To avoid damages to the drive train, do not drive your
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized vehicle at an excessively high speed on a sharply curved road.
yy This helps to make the mode changes easily.
Service Center.
yy In case of TOD, cornering a curve in 4L mode may cause shock. It
is operated normally, because it is caused by non-allowable speed
Tight Cornering difference between front and rear wheels to achieve maximum
traction in 4L mode.
Cornering a curve in 4WD mode (4L or 4H) may shake up the yy Drive the vehicle at the speed of 80 km/h or less when driving in
vehicle or cause skidding. Such phenomena indicate that the 4H mode (P/Time).
four-wheel drive is operated normally, because they can be yy We hope you will use 4L mode when high traction is required.
caused by the resistance of the internal power system according yy Drive the vehicle in 2H mode when the spare tire is fitted. When
to the difference of rotation between the front and rear wheels. driving in 4H mode, it will damage the drive system.
Please avoid excessive and tight cornering in four-wheel drive yy Be sure to use the same size and type tires of the same manufac-
turer on all wheels so that the vehicle characteristics can be main-
mode to prevent the power train from being damaged. tained safely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Headlight Leveling Switch*
Description of switch
Position 0: One person on driver’s seat
Two persons on front seat (One driver and one
co-driver)
Position 1: For 7seats: All seats are occupied.
Position 2: For 7seats: All seats are occupied. Plus weight in
loading compartment (270kg for 5-link, 115kg for
IRS)
Position 3: For 7seats: One person on driver’s seat. Plus
weight in loading compartment (168kg for 5-link,
547kg for IRS)
547kg for IRS) - 2WD M/T only
With the low beam switched on, adjust the aiming angle of The loading includes luggage and the 3rd seat area.
headlights to suit the vehicle load.
yy To lower the aiming angle, rotate the switch counter-clock-
wise.
yy To raise the aiming angle, rotate the switch clockwise.
Note
According to load condition, adjust the aiming angle of headlights.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SWITCHES IN OVERHEAD CONSOLE, ROOM LAMP SWITCH
Front Door Coupled Room Lamp Switch

If you open a door when this switch is pressed the
room lamp comes on. When you close the door,
the room lamp is dimmed out.
Spot Lamp Switch (Driver’s) Spot Lamp Switch (Passenger’s)

The front room lamp (driver’s) turns The front room lamp (passenger’s) turns
on when pressing in this switch. on when pressing in this switch.
Sunroof Switch
The sunroof is opened/closed by pulling up/
down the sunroof open/close switch. For de-
tails, refer to “Sunroof” section in this manual.
Center and Rear Room Lamp Switch
OFF position: The lamp does not come on. Caution
ON ON position: The lamp stays on. yy If your vehicle is left unattended while the
DOOR () DOOR position (●): The lamp comes on spot or center room lamp switch is turned
OFF when the door is opened. The lamp goes on, the battery may be discharged.
out when closing the opened door. yy If a door is opened for an extended period
of time when the door switch is pressed in,
the battery may be discharged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Instrument cluster (DIESEL).............................5-2
3
Instrument cluster (G32D)................................5-4
Indication of tire pressure 4
(TPMS equipped vehicle)*..............................5-10
5
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*..... 5-11
5
Warning lights and indicators..........................5-17 6
7
Instrument Cluster
8
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (diesel)
1 Black FACE type*
2
6 TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
8
111Light indicator 1111ABS warning light 2222Auto cruise Ready indicator
9 222Hazard indicator 1111HDC indicator 2222Auto cruise indicator
333Left turn signal indicator 1111Engine check warning light 2222Brake warning light
10 444Right turn signal indicator 1111 Engine oil pressure warning light 3333Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat)
555High beam indicator 1111Battery charge warning light 3333Air bag warning light
11 666Tachometer 1111Auto shift indicator 3333Door ajar warning light
777 Speedometer 2222Odometer/ Trip odometer 3333Trip switch
888Fuel gauge 2222Global warning light 3333Tire pressure warning indicator
12
999Engine coolant temperature gauge 2222Low fuel level warning light 33334WD LOW indicator
1111Front fog light indicator 2222Engine overheat warning light 33334WD HIGH indicator
13
1111Winter mode indicator 2222SSPS warning light 33334WD CHECK warning light
1111Over speed warning light (GCC only) 2222ESP OFF indicator 3333Water separator warning light
14 1111Immobilizer indicator 2222ESP indicator/warning light 3333Glow indicator
5-2 Instrument Cluster

GETtheMANUALS.org
Standard type
READY
111Light indicator 1111HDC indicator 2222Brake warning light

222Left turn signal indicator 1111Engine check warning light 2222Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat)
333Right turn signal indicator 1111Engine oil pressure warning light 2222Air bag warning light
444High beam indicator 1111 Battery charge warning light 3333Door ajar warning light
555Tachometer 1111Auto shift indicator 3333Trip switch
666Speedometer 1111Odometer/ Trip odometer 33334WD LOW indicator
777 Fuel gauge 2222Low fuel level warning light 33334WD HIGH indicator
888Engine coolant temperature gauge 2222Engine overheat warning light 33334WD CHECK warning light
999Front fog light indicator 2222SSPS warning light 3333Water separator warning light
1111Winter mode indicator 2222ESP OFF indicator 3333Glow indicator
1111Over speed warning light (GCC only) 2222ESP indicator/warning light
1111Immobilizer indicator 2222Auto cruise Ready indicator
1111ABS warning light 2222Auto cruise indicator
Instrument Cluster 5-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (g32d)
Black FACE type*
111Light indicator 1111Immobilizer indicator 2222ESP indicator/warning light

222Hazard indicator 1111ABS warning light 2222Auto cruise indicator
333Left turn signal indicator 1111HDC indicator 2222Brake warning light
444Right turn signal indicator 1111Engine check warning light 2222Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat)
555High beam indicator 1111 Engine oil pressure warning light 2222Air bag warning light
666Tachometer 1111Battery charge warning light 3333Door ajar warning light
777 Speedometer 1111Auto shift indicator 3333Trip switch
888Fuel gauge 2222Odometer/ Trip odometer 33334WD LOW indicator
999Engine coolant temperature gauge 2222Low fuel level warning light 33334WD HIGH indicator
1111Front fog light indicator 2222Engine overheat warning light 33334WD CHECK warning light
1111Winter mode indicator 2222SSPS warning light
1111Over speed warning light (GCC only) 2222ESP OFF indicator

GETtheMANUALS.org
Standard type


GETtheMANUALS.org
Tachometer Speedometer
Diesel Gasoline Type A Type B
RED ZONE RED ZONE
TRIP A
ODO B km
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in kilometers per
minute. Multiply 1,000 to the current number, then it will be the hour (km/h) or mile per hour (mph).
current number of engine revolutions.
Warning
Warning Excessive speed can damage engine.
Do not let engine reach excessive speed, indicated by the pointer
being in the red zone.
Note
Speedometer-KPH (MPH) Speedometer-MPH (KPH)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel gauge Coolant temperature gauge
This gauge indicates the level of fuel remaining in the fuel The temperature gauge indicates the temperature of the en-
tank. Fill up the fuel tank before the needle reaches “E”. gine coolant.
Caution
The engine can overheat.
yy If the pointer reaches the red zone, stop the vehicle.
yy Allow engine to cool.
If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may
seriously damage the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LCD Display
Auto Shift Indicator
This indicator shows the gear selector lever position and
currently selected gear.
Gear selector lever position
(P, R, N, D, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1) - 5A/T
(P, R, N, D, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1) - 7A/T
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
Gear Shift Indicator (6 M/T only)

Trip Switch
This indicator indicates the proper gear shifting time.

EX)
Shift-up to 3rd gear (currently 2nd gear or lower)
Shift-down to 3rd gear (currently 4th gear or higher)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Odometer and Trip Odometer Display
Each time the TRIP/RESET switch on the center panel is
pressed lightly, the indicators are changed. To reset the trip
meter, press and hold the switch.
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY Trip Illumination control

Unit: 0~999999km mode
Trip Switch
Adjusting The Instrument Cluster Illumination

(Black-face Type) Trip A Trip B
To adjust the illumination of instrument cluster, press the trip Unit: 0.0~999.9km Unit: 0 ~ 9999km
until “ILL” appears on the LCD display. Then, press and hold
the trip switch for more than 3 seconds to get into the cluster
illumination adjusting mode. In this mode, press the trip switch
until you get the desired illumination level (ILL6 to ILL1).

GETtheMANUALS.org
INDICATION OF TIRE PRESSURE (TPMS EQUIPPED VEHICLE)*
You can check the tire pressure for each wheel through LCD
display (in “ODO” display mode) as shown in the figure
Caution
The tire pressure cannot be displayed when the vehicle is in station-
ary immediately after engine starting. It can be displayed few minutes
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
after driving off the vehicle.
Trip Switch
Press the trip switch for Wait for more than 10 seconds
more than 1 second or press the trip switch for more
than one second
Tire pressure for
front wheels
Briefly press Briefly press
Tire pressure for rear

wheels

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)*
What’s TPMS?
As an additional safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates an
abnormal tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated or over-inflated.
Trip switch:
Displaying tire pressure
for each tire
TPMS
ECU
Wheel module Wheel module TRIP A

ODO B km
READY
TPMS ECU rec eives the signals for tire pres sure and
temperature from each tire module, and displays the tire
pressure on the instrument cluster.
Tire pressure display

Proper tire pressure: 32 psi (unit: psi)
The tire pressure should be checked when there is nobody
Tire monitoring display
inside the vehicle and the tires are cold (approx. 18°C).
If a specific tire indicator il-
luminates in yellow or blinks,
the tire inflation pressure
may be abnormal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Indication of Tire Pressure
Trip Switch
When you press the trip switch for more
than one second in ODO mode, LCD display
shows the tire pressure for front wheels.
To see the tire pressure for rear wheels,
briefly press the trip switch again.
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
Tire Pressure
TPMS start to recognize the tire pressures in 10 minutes of continuous driving (over 30 km/h)
after starting the engine. If the system is not ready yet, LCD display shows “--”.
Tire pressure for front wheels Tire pressure for rear wheels
Briefly press the trip switch
Front left Front right Rear left Rear right
Caution
yy If your vehicle was in stationary for more than 20 minutes after starting the engine, the tire pressure cannot be
displayed on LCD display. To reset the TPMS, drive (over 30 km/h) your vehicle for more than 10 minutes.
yy The tire pressure on LCD display may vary according to the external factors such as driving condition and,
number of passengers.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tire Pressure Warning Indicator
Normal Under-pressure
Tire pressure warning indicator is When a tire is significantly under-
Green indicator ON Yellow indicator ON
ON in green for 15 seconds inflated, the symbol for the affect-
ed tire is ON in yellow. At this mo-
ment, the tire pressure warning
light on instrument cluster comes
on simultaneously.
If this happens, stop your vehicle
at a safe place and check the tire
and its pressure.
Over-pressure Imbalanced pressure

When a tire is significantly over- When the tire pressure between
Yellow indicator blinks Yellow indicator blinks in turn
inflated, the symbol for the af- left wheel and right wheel is im-
fected tire blinks in yellow. balanced, both symbols blink in
If this happens, stop your vehicle turn.
and its pressure. Caution
yy The tire pressure between front
wheel and rear wheel cannot be
checked for their balance.
yy In this case, the pressure dif-
ference between left wheel and
right wheel exceeds 4 psi.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOBAL WARNING LIGHT* When Changing a Tire
Changing Tire Locations
The TPMS automatically resets new location of tires after
continuous driving (over 30 km/h) for more than 20 minutes.
Caution
yy The global warning light may come on when you change the loca-
TRIP A
ODO B km tion of tires and tire pressure sensor.
yy The resetting time for new location of tires varied according to the
READY
driving conditions.
yy Do not use any waterproof products on the tire with a tire pressure
monitoring system. It can damage the tire pressure monitoring
sensors.
As an additional safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Warning
that illuminates an abnormal tire pressure telltale when one
yy If you have injected sealant into one of your tire for repairing, drive
or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated or over-
the vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center within a
inflated. driving distance of 200 km at a speed of 80 km/h or slower and
replace the repaired tire with a new one.
Warning yy When replacing the sealant injected tire, the TPMS sensors should
yy If the global warning light blinks when engine starts (IGN ON), be checked for appearance and abnormality at a Ssangyong Au-
the TPMS is not working. This prevents the TPMS from warning thorized Service Center.
to driver for abnormal tire conditions. To reset the TPMS, restart
the engine and drive (over 30 km/h) your vehicle for more than 10
minutes. If the global warning light still stays on, have the system
Center.
yy When the tire pressure warning light is illuminated, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If this happens, have the
tire inflation pressure checked by nearest service center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Spare Tire Is Used
Caution
The spare tire is not equipped with a TPMS module on its yy If the TPMS sensor is covered by some foreign materials such as
wheel. Thus, if a spare tire is installed, the TPMS warning snow or mud, the TPMS may not communicate with the TPMS unit.
lamp comes on and the TPMS does not operate. This may cause an abnormal operation of TPMS.
yy If the snow chains are installed on the wheel, the TPMS may not
Caution work properly.
When the vehicle is driven with the deflated tire placed in the cargo yy If the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cable or radio
area after the spare tire is installed, the tire pressure monitoring transmitter which can interfere with normal operation of TPMS, the
system can detect the pressure of the deflated tire and display “low TPMS may not work properly.
tire pressure” message or turn on the global warning light. yy If you use the tire without TPMS sensor, the TPMS warning light
comes on and the TPMS does not operate.
yy Do not use any tire sealant if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS.
When Low Tire Pressure Detected The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure sensors.
yy The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage
yy The global warning light ( ) and the low pressure tire po- caused by external factors such as a nail on the road. If you feel
sition indicator on the instrument cluster come on when a any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelera-
significantly under-inflated tire is detected. If this occurs, tor and slowly move to a safe position off the road.
slow down and have your vehicle checked and serviced at yy Unauthorized modification or alteration of the vehicle that may
a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. affect the performance of TPMS is not permissible.
yy If you drive continuously without replacing a inflated tire yy Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the TPMS components
with a new one, the operating performance of the vehicle, may interfere with the system’s operation and may cause the
TPMS malfunctions.
breaking force and tire life will be adversely affected and
yy Make sure not to damage the tire pressure sensor while chang-
fuel economy will decrease.
ing a tire.
yy If you cannot take the vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized yy Use only genuine TPMS specific tire with tire pressure sensor.
Service Center, check and follow the instructions for the yy After changing a tire or TPMS sensor, check the tire pressure and
service kit (emergency puncture repair kit). adjust the pressure to the specified value (32 psi) if necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Adjust the tire pressure when the tire is cold. Cold tire is defined as yy Never attempt to adjust or modify any components of the tire pres-
the tire of the vehicle that has not been driven for at least 3 hours, sure monitoring system. The system may not work properly.
in shaded area or driven less than 1.6 km. yy The tire pressure monitoring sensors should be installed on each
yy Even if you have adjusted the tire pressure, the low tire pressure wheel to detect which tire has low pressure. The tire pressure
warning lamp can be turned ON in the cold weather. This is be- monitoring sensor installed to a position on other than the wheels
cause the tire pressure falls below the low pressure limit for low can turn on the tire pressure warning lamp.
temperature effects, and is not cause for concern. yy Make sure that the tire pressure monitoring sensors are not lost
Check the tires and adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. or damaged when replacing tires.
yy If you need to drive when the temperature falls down or rises up
rapidly, check the tire pressure before driving and adjust it to the
Warning
recommended pressure, if necessary.
yy All tires of the vehicle including the spare tire should be checked yy Driving with low tire pressure for an extended time can result in
for proper pressure periodically. tire overheating and burst failure. It may also decrease the tire life,
braking force, fuel economy and stability of the vehicle. Consult
yy The tire pressure monitoring system may pick up electrical distur-
with the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
bances around the police stations, radio stations, military facilities,
Service Center for the recommended tire pressure.
towers, etc. At this time, the tire pressure warning lamp can be
turned on after flashing for a certain time. y Sudden tire damage due to external factors will not be detected
immediately. If the vehicle is unstable, immediately release the
yy Also, the tire pressure warning lamp can be turned on after blinking
accelerator pedal, move the vehicle to the safe place and check
when an after-market equipment, including a laptop, cellular phone
the vehicle.
charger, audio/navigation system, remote starting system, or wire-
less communication device, is used or installed to the vehicle. y Do not carry out any modification or alteration disrupting the opera-
tion of the tire pressure monitoring system.
yy If another vehicle with a properly functioning tire pressure moni-
toring system drives near your vehicle, your tire pressure warning y The wheels on the market have no tire pressure monitoring sensor.
lamp may not be turned on temporarily even when the tire pressure Always use a genuine wheel with tire pressure monitoring sensor
monitoring sensor is malfunctioning. for your safety.
sensor.
yy The tire pressure monitoring system cannot detect a sudden failure
of tires due to nails, metal debris, etc. on the roads.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATORS
LIGHT INDICATOR HAZARD INDICATOR TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the tail This indicator blinks when the hazard This indicator blinks when the turn sig-
lamp or headlamp is switched on. warning flashers are switched on. nal switch is turned on.
Both indicators blink when the hazard
warning switch is turned on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR FRONT FOG LIGHT INDI- Winter Mode Indica-
CATOR tor
This indicator comes on when the high This indicator comes on when the front The indicator comes on when the Win-
beam headlamp is switched on. fog light is switched on. ter mode (W) switch near the gear se-
lector lever is pressed.
Warning Use this mode to drive off smoothly on
Driving with high beam headlamp disturbs an icy and slippery road.
the approaching vehicle’s visibility. For safe
driving, use the high beam headlamp only
when it is very hard to see the road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL INDI- Immobilizer Indicator ABS WARNING LIGHT
CATOR*
AUTO
CRUISE
This indicator comes on when the cruise This indicator comes on when the igni- This warning light comes on when the
control system is switched on. tion key is communicating with the en- ignition switch is turned to “ON” and
gine control unit (during engine starting) should go off in a few seconds.
for 0.5 seconds.
The time needed for communication be- Warning
tween the immobilizer key and ECU can yy If this light stays on after starting the en-
vary. When the time is very short, the gine or comes on while driving, have the
immobilizer indicator does not come on. system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
Auto cruise Ready In this case, the ABS function is not
Caution
indicator* available, but the conventional brake
If this indicator blinks, it may indicate that system is properly working.
there is something wrong in the immobilizer yy ABS is a device that prevents wheels
system. Have the system checked by a from locking during braking to allow
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- steering. However, the ABS system does
rized Service Center. not shorten the stopping distance.
Caution
This indicator comes on when the cruise
ABS system performs self diagnosis by
control ON/OFF switch is turned on. transferring hydraulic pressure to the brake
READY indicator will go off when press- units for few seconds after starting the
ing the cruise control ON/OFF switch engine. This may cause some noise and
once more. vibrations. This means ABS is properly
functioning.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC Indicator ENGINE CHECK WARNING LIGHT
When the HDC switch is pressed once, Light ON Light Blinking

HDC is ready for use. The green HDC This warning light comes on when the This warning light is blinking when the
indic ato r in t he inst r um ent c luster ignition switch is turned on and it goes CDPF (Emission collecting filter) is con-
comes on. When the button is pressed off when the engine is started. taminated with carbon. If this warning
again, HDC is deactivated and the indi- light is blinking, drive your vehicle over
cator goes off. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, some of the engine control com- 50 km/h of vehicle speed for more than
When HDC is applied, the green HDC ponents including sensors and devices 15 minutes (max. 20 minutes) to per-
indicator blinks. are defective. form the recycling in CDPF system. If
When the red HDC indicator is on, the the recycling process is completed, the
HDC system is overheated or malfunc- WARNING warning light goes out.
tioning. For more information, refer to When this warning light comes on, the ve-
Chapter 4, HDC Switch. hicle operates in safety mode to maintain
minimum driving conditions and to prevent
Caution the system from being damaged. In this
If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC mode, the engine driving force may be de-
is overheated or malfunctioning. If the creased or the engine may stall. When this
indicator is on even after the system has happens, have the system checked at the
cooled down enough, have the nearest nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
authorized dealer or service center check Authorized Service Center.
the system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE BATTERY CHARGE
WARNING LIGHT WARNING LIGHT
This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the
oil pressure drops because of low en- ignition switch is turned on and it goes
gine oil level. off when the engine is started.
If this light turns on while driving, safely If this light doesn’t go off after engine
pull over and stop the vehicle to check starting or comes on while driving, it
the engine oil level. Add engine oil, if means there is a malfunction in the sys-
necessary, to maintain the proper oil tem. Have the charging system checked
level. by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Continuous driving with this light on may Authorized Service Center.
lead to engine failure.
Caution
Caution Continued driving with the battery charge
If this light does not go off after engine warning light illuminated will lead to a sud-
starting or comes on while driving, it means den stop of vehicle, causing an accident
there is a malfunction in the system. Run- and serious injury.
ning the engine with this warning light on
can cause serious damage to the engine.
Have the lubricating system checked by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-

GETtheMANUALS.org
TPMS (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM) INDICATOR AND WARNING LIGHT*
Global Warning Light* Tire Pressure Indicator*
This warning light comes on when the This indicator illuminates in green when
ignition switch is turned to “ON” and the ignition switch is turned to “ON” and
should go off in a few seconds. should go off in 15 seconds. If a specific
When the tire pressure warning light is tire indicator illuminates in yellow or
illuminated, one or more of your tires is blinks, the tire inflation pressure may be
significantly under-inflated. Immediately abnormal or the tire inflation pressure
reduce the vehicle speed, avoid hard sensor is defective. If this happens,
cornering and anticipate increased have the system checked by Ssangyong
stopping distances. If this happens, Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
have the tire inflation pressure checked Center.
by nearest service center. If necessary,
locate the under-inflated tire by using Warning
the tire pressure indicator and replace yy Significantly low tire pressure makes
the under-inflated tire with spare tire. the vehicle unstable and may increase
the braking distances. Always keep the
If this light stays on after starting the en- proper tire pressure.
gine or comes on while driving, have the yy Continued driving on low pressure
system checked by Ssangyong Dealer tires may cause the tires to overheat
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen- and fail.
ter.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARN- ENGINE OVERHEAT SSPS WARNING LIGHT
ING LIGHT WARNING LIGHT
This warning light indicates that the fuel This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the
level in the tank is getting exhausted. ignition switch is turned on and goes off SSPS system is defective. When this
The illuminating point of this warning when the engine is started. warning light comes on, the steerability
light varies according to the driving con- When the engine coolant temperature becomes heavier.
ditions such as driving angle and road is abnormally hot, the engine overheat
conditions. If this warning light comes warning light blinks and a warning buzz-
What is SSPS?
on while driving, immediately refuel the er sounds. When this happens, stop the Speed Sensing Power Steering (SSPS)
tank. However, it is recommended that vehicle in a safe place and let the en- is the device that provides good driv-
fuel should be added before this warn- gine cool down. For more information, ing condition and steering stability by
ing light will come on. refer to Chapter 11 “When the engine is making the steerability heavier in high-
overheating.” speed driving, and lighter in stop or low-
Caution speed driving.
While driving on steep hills or rough roads, Caution
this warning light may come on if the re- Caution
If you keep driving the vehicle with the
maining fuel level is low.
warning light and buzzer on, the engine If the SSPS warning light comes on or when
could be damaged and lead to a fire. you feel the steering wheel heavy, have the
After completely cooling down, have the SSPS system checked by Ssangyong
system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. Operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ESP OFF INDICATOR ESP INDICATOR/WARNING BRAKE WARNING LIGHT
LIGHT
This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to “ON” and ignition switch is turned to “ON” and ignition switch is turned to “ON” and
should go off in a few seconds. should go off in a few seconds. should go off in a few seconds.
This indicator comes on when pressing This indicator blinks when the ESP sys- This warning light comes on when the
the ESP OFF switch to deactivate the tem is operating. parking brake is applied and/or the
ESP function. If this warning light comes on while brake fluid level is lower than a speci-
For detailed information for ESP (Elec- driving, have the system checked by fied level.
tronic Stability Program) system, refer to Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
Chapter 4. thorized Service Center. Caution
If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds
For detailed information for ESP (Elec-
(over 10 km/h) while the parking brake is
tronic Stability Program) system, refer to applied, the parking brake warning light
Chapter 4. comes on and a warning buzzer sounds. If
it occurs, immediately stop the vehicle and
release the parking brake.
Warning
Driving the vehicle with the brake fluid warn-
ing light on is dangerous.
If the parking brake light stays on, you must
immediately have your vehicle checked
and serviced by Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
EBD WARNING LIGHT SEAT BELT REMINDER AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT
If the ABS warning light and the brake This warning light blinks and the warn- When the ignition is switched on, this
warning light come on simultaneously, ing buzzer sounds for 6 seconds when war ning li ght illuminate s and t hen
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” should go off, to confirm that the air bag
tion)system is defective. In this case, position unless the driver’s seat belt is is operational.
ABS system also cannot be activated. securely fastened. This reminding op- If it does not come on, or if it does not go
If this happens, have the system checked eration stops when the driver fastens off, or if it flashes or illuminates continu-
by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au- the seat belt even during its operation ously while driving, it means that there is
thorized Service Center. period. a malfunction in the system. Have the air
When the vehicle speed exceeds 10 bag system checked without delay by a
Warning km/h without fastened driver’s seat belt, Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
When the EBD system is not functioning, this indicator comes on and the alarm rized Service Center.
the vehicle could be unstable during hard sounds.
braking. Therefore, you must pay particular Note
attention to the driving conditions while this For more detailed information, refer to the
warning light is on. “Seat Belt and Air Bag” section.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DOOR AJAR WARNING 4WD INDICATORs
LIGHT 4WD Low Indicator
When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this indicator blinks un-
til the shifting operation is completed. After completion of the
mode change to 4L, the indicator comes on.
This light comes on when a door or the

tailgate is either opened or not closed 4WD High Indicator
securely.
When shifting the driving mode from “4L” to “4H”, this indicator
Warning blinks until the shifting operation is completed. After comple-
Before driving, check that the door ajar tion of the mode change to 4H, the indicator comes on.
warning light is off. When a door is not
completely closed, it may accidentally open
while driving.
4WD Check Warning Light

This warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to “ON” and should go out if the system is normal. If the
“4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.
Warning
yy If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system
checked.
yy Do not drive your vehicle over 80 km/h in 4H mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOW INDICATOR Water Separator over speed Warning
Warning Light Light(gcc ONly)
When the ignition switch is turned to When the water inside the water sepa- The warning light flashes with repeated
“ON”, this indicator comes on and stays rator in the fuel filter exceeds a certain (5 times) buzzer sound when the vehicle
for a short time or may go off right away. level, this warning light comes on and a speed exceeds 120 km/h.
When the glow plugs are sufficiently buzzer sounds. Also, the driving force If the warning light flashes, slow down
heated, the light will go out. In the vehi- of the vehicle decreases. If this warning for your own safety.
cle equipped with a direct injection type light comes on while driving, have the
engine, this indicator may come on very system checked by Ssangyong Dealer
shortly or may not even come on. or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
ter.
Caution
When the glow indicator comes on while Caution
driving or the engine cannot be started yy The fuel system in the engine may get
properly, have the glow plug system seriously damaged if you keep driving
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or while the warning light is on. Prompt
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. correction should be necessary.
yy Using low quality fuel could result in
serious damage to the engine due to the
water or impurities in fuel. Never use low
quality fuel.
yy If the amount of water in the fuel filter
exceeds the specified level, the warning
lamp comes on, a chime sounds or the
engine power decreases.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S
hift lever in manual transmission (6-speed)
3
..........................................................................6-2
S
hift lever in manual transmission (5-speed) 4
..........................................................................6-3
G
ear selector lever in automatic transmission* 5
..........................................................................6-7 6
6
Driving tips for automatic transmission.............6-9
Gear selector lever positions.......................... 6-11 7
Winter (W) / Standard mode (S).....................6-19 Transmission and
8
Safety mode (automatic transmission)...........6-20
Brake
Parking aid system (PAS)*..............................6-21 9
Rearview camera system*..............................6-25
10
Front view camera system*............................6-26
Brake system..................................................6-27 11
Parking brake operation..................................6-32
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
SHIFT LEVER IN MANUAL Transmission (6-speed)
1 The manual transmission in your vehicle has 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. To
change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal. Then, move the gearshift lever into a desire R 1 3 5
2 gear. After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
3rd Gear
3 For low- or mid-speed driving.
1st Gear When upshifting from 2nd gear to 3rd gear,
4 Position for driving off and high traction particular caution should be taken not to inad- 2 4 6
force. Depress the clutch pedal to its travel vertently press the gear shift lever sideways
5 end and move the shift lever to “1”. Then, in such a manner that 5th gear is engaged.
slowly release the clutch pedal while gently
depressing the accelerator pedal to drive
6
off.
5th Gear
7 Position for high speed driving on a
Reverse Gear
highway. When downshifting from 5th
Position for reverse driving. gear to 4th gear, particular caution
8
should be taken not to inadvertently
press the gear shift lever sideways in
9 such a manner that 2nd gear is en-
gaged.
10
6th Gear
11 Neutral Position
Position for very high speed driving on
Position for engine start, a highway.
12 vehicle stop, and parking
4th Gear
13
Position for normal and high speed
2nd Gear driving
14
Position for low speed driving
6-2 Transmission and Brake

GETtheMANUALS.org
The manual transmission in your vehicle has 5 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal.
Then, move the gearshift lever into a desire gear. After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
5th Gear
Position for very high speed driving on a
highway
3rd Gear Be careful to avoid any unwanted shift
For low- or mid-speed driving. Be careful to from the 5th gear into the 2nd gear, rather
avoid any unwanted shift from the 2nd gear than the 4th gear.
into the 5th gear, rather than the 3rd gear.
5th
3rd
1st Gear 1st Reverse Gear
Position for driving off and high traction Position for reverse driving
force Reverse
Depress the clutch pedal to its deepest 4th
point and move the shift lever to “1”. Neutral 4th Gear
2nd
Then, slowly release the clutch pedal
while gently depressing the accelerator
driving
pedal to drive off.
Neutral Position
Position for engine start, vehicle stop, 2nd Gear
and parking
6-3
GETtheMANUALS.orgTransmission and Brake
Caution
yy To start the engine in manual transmission equipped vehicle, you must fully depress the clutch
pedal.
yy You should stop your vehicle and fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift into the reverse
position.
yy If the clutch pedal is frequently half-depressed, the clutch disc will be easily worn out. Use only
as needed.
yy Do not put your foot on the clutch pedal if not shifting gears.
yy When shifting from a higher gear into a lower gear, ensure that the RPM gauge pointer does not go
into the red zone on the gauge. Especially, when shifting from the 5th to the 4th gear, moving the
gear shift lever to the left too much may result in shifting into the 2nd gear. This will cause a sudden
increase of the engine speed and may damage the engine and the transmission.
yy When the temperature of the transmission oil is very low on a cold day, you may have some difficulty
for shifting gears. This is a normal phenomenon.
yy When you have difficulty for shifting into the 1st or reserve gear, put the gear shift lever into the
neural position and release the clutch pedal. Then, depress the pedal again and shift into the
intended gear.
yy While your vehicle is moving, do not put your hand on the shift lever except to shift gears. Other-
wise, the gear may be disengaged from the transmission and the internal transmission components
may be damaged.
yy Do not shift into the second next higher gear from a lower gear. Also, while the engine is rotating
fast, do not shift into a lower gear.
yy When using the half clutch mode, there is no need to abruptly depress the accelerator pedal be-
cause the engine power increases. When the accelerator pedal is continuously depressed in half
clutch mode, the internal components can be worn or damaged. Frequent use of half clutch mode
is not recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Shifting to R (Reverse) - 6 speed Gear Position When Parking
m/t ONly Always apply the parking brake fully and shut the engine off
This manual transmission is designed with a detent to differen- after parking. Shift the transmission into 1st gear when the ve-
tiate “1st” and “R (reverse)” gear position. To shift into “R” gear hicle is parked on a level ground or uphill grade, and shift into
position, you must shift past “1” gear position and the detent in “R” on a downhill grade.
order to get into the “R” gear gate.
yy “R” gear gate is located to the left side of the “1st” gear gate.
yy After the vehicle is stoped, push the gear shift lever to the Using the Clutch
left side of the “1st” gear past the detent then push the gear
The clutch pedal should be depressed all the way to its travel
shift lever upward.
end before shifting. The clutch pedal should be fully released
Caution
while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while
driving. This can cause unnecessary wear in clutch system.
yy If you try to shift to the “1st” gear position too quickly, it is possible
Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
to shift to “R (Reverse)” instead of “1st” gear.
yy When the gear shift into “R” position is completed, the “R” indica-
tor should be appeared on the instrument cluster and a warning
chime should be heard. If the warning chime does not sound when
you shift to R (Reverse) position, have the system checked at Parking Brake Operation When
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as possible.
Driving Uphill
When driving on a steep uphill, it is safer to use the parking
brake as follows: Apply the parking brake, follow steps (Vehicle
Downshifting with M/T: steps 1 - 3, and release the parking brake when the
When you need to slow down in heavy traffic or while driving vehicle starts to move.
up steep hills, downshift the gear to release the load to the
engine. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives
better acceleration when you need to increase the vehicle
speed again. When the vehicle is driving down steep hills,
downshifting provides a safe speed and prolongs the life span
of brake system.
6-5
DRIVING TIPS FOR NORMAL STARTING
OFF OR STARTING OFF ON UPHILL
111 Depress the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, start the
engine and move the shift lever to the 1st gear (reverse
gear in reversing) position.
222 If the clutch pedal is released slightly with the brake pedal
depressed, the engine rpm increases. (The increase in en-
gine rpm varies depending on the road inclination).
Release the clutch pedal slightly Increase in engine rpm
333 The vehicle starts to move smoothly if you depress the ac-
celerator pedal while releasing the brake pedal after check-
ing that the engine rpm is raising.
444 Release the clutch pedal completely after the vehicle starts
off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GEAR SELECTOR LEVER IN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION*
Gear Position Tip Switch in “M” Position

yy P : Parking (Manual Gear Shift)
yy R : Reverse The gear can be shifted by moving this switch
to forward and rearward when the gear selec-
yy N : Neutral tor lever is in “M” position.
yy D : Driving
Mode Switch
yy W : Winter mode
yy S : Standard mode Shift Lock Release Button when
Use the standard mode in normal locked in the “P” position
driving conditions.
If you cannot move the selector lever from the
“P” or “N” position, try to move the lever while
pushing down here with a sharp object such
as a ballpoint pen. For your safety, turn off the
engine and depress the brake pedal before
the attempt.
Selection of Manual / To shift into any other positions from the
Automatic Shift Function “P” position after stopping the vehicle,
yy D : Automatic shift according to the driving condition you have to depress the brake pedal
with the ignition switch “ON”
yy M : Manual shift
6-7
Starting and Driving Off
Caution
1. Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P” yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
and the brake pedal is depressed. For your safety, avoid shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged.
starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so. Especially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until
the “D” shift indicator comes on for several seconds with the brake
2. Check whether or not the engine speed is in a normal op- pedal depressed.
erating range (below 1,000 rpm). Keep the brake pedal de- yy When driving on a downhill, never shift the selector lever to “N”. If
pressed and shift into “D” or “R”. you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engagement
can damage the driving train.
3. Depress the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and
yy HDC is designed for driving down a steep hill. When HDC is ap-
move the gear selector lever to “D” position. Wait for a while plied, do not shift to “N”. Otherwise, HDC will be deactivated.
several seconds before driving off with the brake pedal de- yy Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever in
pressed. both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine with the
4. To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress selector lever in “P”.
the accelerator pedal gradually. yy As a safety function, the gear selector lever cannot be moved into
the “P” or “R” position when the vehicle speed about 8 km/h.
Warning yy Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving.
yy For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving
the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped.
yy Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear selec-
tor lever.
yy If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal securely.
yy When starting the engine with the accelerator depressed, your
vehicle may abruptly move and cause an accident.
yy When the parking brake is released while the engine is running at
a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move. Therefore, wait until
the engine speed becomes stable.
yy To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into
“P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion.
yy When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift from a
higher to a lower gear can severely damage the vehicle. In addi-
tion, your vehicle may lose its stability and be at a high risk.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING TIPS FOR AUTOMATIC Transmission
Starting and Driving Off Warning
1. Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P” yy For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving
and the brake pedal is depressed. For your safety, avoid the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped.
starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so. yy Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear se-
lector lever.
2. Check whether or not the engine speed is in a normal op-
erating range (below 1000 rpm). Keep the brake pedal de-
yy When starting the engine with the accelerator pedal depressed,
pressed and shift into “D” or “R”. your vehicle may abruptly move and cause an accident.
3. Depress the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and yy When the parking brake is released while the engine is running at
move the gear selector lever to “D” position. Wait for a a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move. Therefore, wait until
while several seconds before driving off with the brake ped- the engine speed becomes stable.
al depressed. yy To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into
4. To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion.
the accelerator pedal gradually. yy When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift from a
Caution
yy A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly
yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine after from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine rpm
shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Es- becomes stable.
pecially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
“D” shift indicator comes on with the brake pedal depressed. shifting into “D”. Otherwise, the transmission will be damaged.
yy When driving on a downhill, never shift the selector lever to “N”. If Especially, when you start off on a hill after stopping and parking
you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engage- the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on
ment can damage the drive train. with the brake pedal depressed.
yy Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever in yy Do not move the gear selector lever into “N” position while the
both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine with HDC (Hill Descent Control) system is operating. Doing so stops
the operation of HDC system.
the selector lever in “P”.
yy Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving.
6-9
Creep Phenomenon Engine Brake
Without any depression of the accelerator pedal, your ve- When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle
hicle can move slowly if the selector lever is in any position is in motion, the engine speed decreases. This decreased
other than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You engine speed creates an extra braking force. On a downhill,
can control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the engaging a lower gear can generate a slower engine speed
brake in heavy traffic or narrow areas. and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using this
engine brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed without
Caution excessively using the brake system. The lower gear, the
yy On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the oppo- higher braking force.
site direction of the intended direction in spite of the creep effect.
When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal. Caution
yy Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long
Kickdown Function slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or
the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force.
If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator
yy Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear
pedal to its travel end. Then, a lower gear will be automati-
selector lever is in the “N” position.
cally engaged. This is called the Kickdown function.
yy Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires
may slip.
Caution
yy Do not use the kickdown function while driving on slippery or Automatic gear shift timing
sharply curved roads.
yy If you use the kickdown function too frequently, the durability and The shift timing of the A/T varies with external circum-
fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse. stances, such as road conditions (level surface, hills), posi-
tion of gear selector lever, vehicle speed, accelerator pedal
depression amount. This is a normal condition to improve
the economy of your driving and vehicle performance with
smooth and balanced gear-changing.
Caution
When moving the gear selector lever with force applied to the drive
system due to, for example, stopping or parking on a hill, shift shock
or noise may occur. This is a part of normal operation of parking
mechanism in the A/T.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GEAR SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS
P: Park Position
P: Park position Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or
R: Reverse position stay in a location for an extended length of time.
N: Neutral position To shift into any other position, depress the brake pedal.
D: Drive position Warning
M: Manual shift yy Never shift into “P” when the vehicle is moving, or the transmission
will be damaged.
yy Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into “P”.
yy To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch
must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should be depressed.
Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever from “P” without
the two procedures may damage the selector lever.
6-11
R: Reverse position
Warning
R yy Please note that the vehicle may slowly move rearward when the
selector lever is at “R”.
Caution
As a safety function, the gear selector lever cannot be moved into
“P” or “R” when the vehicle speed is about 8 km/h.
yy Use this position to reverse the vehicle.

To shift into “R” from “P” or “N”, completely stop the ve-
hicle and depress the brake pedal. When the shift lever is
in “R”, and parking aid system will be activated (optional (If
equipped)).

GETtheMANUALS.org
N: Neutral position
Warning
yy Warm up the engine for approx.3 minutes when the ambient tem-
N perature is below -15°C. Otherwise, the gear selector lever may

not be moved smoothly (N→R). It is designed for protecting the
vehicle and is not a fault.
yy Never shift into “N” from the “D” position or vice versa when the
vehicle is moving, or the transmission will be damaged.
yy If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral posi-
tion, depress the brake pedal firmly.
yy Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the
vehicle is in motion.
yy Never leave a child or pet alone in the vehicle when stopping
and parking the vehicle with the ignition ON and the shift lever in
neutral “N” position. Move the shift lever to the park “P” position
or turn the ignition off in order to prevent the safety accident due
to an unintentional operation.
No power is transferred in this position.
At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the
wheels and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However,
for safety, apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
To shift into “D” or “R” position from “N” position after stopping
the vehicle, you have to depress the brake pedal with the igni-
tion switch “ON”.
6-13
D: Drive position
Warning
yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
D shifting into “D”, or the transmission will be damaged. Especially,

when you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle,
wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake
pedal depressed.
yy Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill
according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake
pedal.
Caution
Please note that the vehicle may slowly move forward on level ground
when the selector lever is in “D”.
Warning
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmis- yy If you touch the selector lever unexpectedly while driving, the
sion is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 5th(6th) gears shiftable gear may be changed. It can make the vehicle unstable.
according to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal. Be careful not to touch the selector lever while driving (especially
during the winter season).
yy Do not downshift abruptly (3, 2, or 1) when the vehicle speed is
high (D or 4). You could lose control and hit people or objects
(especially on a slippery road).
yy If low-range maximum speeds are exceeded when the selector
lever is in low gears, the transmission can be damaged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
M: MANUAL SHIFT
Warning
If the gear selector lever is moved to the “M” position accidentally
M during driving, the currently engaged gear may be shifted to another

gear which endangers driving safety. Be careful not to touch the
selector lever while driving (especially in winter season).
Caution
Upshifting should be done properly according to the road conditions,
taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.
If the gear selector lever is in this position, you can shift gear
manually using the tip switch on the lever.
6-15
SHIFT LEVER LOCK RELEASE
Shift Lock Function

This system locks the gear selector lever in the automatic
transmission according to the driving status and condi-
tions to prevent driver from making operational mistakes,
to protect the system, and to provide good driving stability.
Shift lever lock

Shift Lever Lock in “P” or “N” position release
To shift from “P”, the ignition switch must be turned to ON and
the brake pedal must be depressed.
If you cannot shift out of “P”, check the followings:
- The ignition key is in “ON”.
- The brake pedal is d epressed.
If you cannot shift out of “P” with the ignition
Prohibition of Gear Shift from “N” to “R” While switch in ON, and the brake pedal depressed:
Driving 1. Apply the parking brake firmly and turn the ignition off.
To maintain the vehicle stability and protect the drive train of 2. Depress the brake pedal and push down the shift lock re-
the vehicle, the gear shifting from “N” to “R” is not available lease lever with a stick such as a pen. Then, shift the lever
when the vehicle speed about 8 km/h. to other position.
Warning
If this happens, have your vehicle repaired by the nearest Ssangyong
dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as pos-
sible.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Manual Gear Shift by tip switch
Manual Gear Selection Use of Engine Brake
Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the tip switch after To use the engine brake, change into the manual gear shift
moving the gear selector lever from “D” to “M” position. mode first, then operate the tip switch to next lower shiftable
gear.
Selecting “M”:
Caution
Manual gear shift yy Operate the tip switch only once. If you keep pressing the button,
the gear may be shifted through several steps in a series.
yy Abruptly using the engine brake may make driving unstable. Do
not use the engine brake abruptly especially when driving on roads
covered with snow or ice.
Tip Switch in Gear Selector Lever

If the gear selector level is moved to “M” position while driving,
the gear is shifted down to the next lower gear.
Note Shift up
yy To prevent shift shock and to protect the system, in some cases,
the current gear may not be shifted to the lower gear even if the
gear selector lever is moved to “M” position.
yy If you move the gear selector lever into M position (manual mode) Shift down
while the vehicle is stopping, you can shift to the lower gear and
the 2nd gear start is possible on snowy or rainy road.
6-17
GEAR POSITION DISPLAY ON INSTRU- Manual Gear Shift Position
MENT CLUSTER
yy 1st gear position
Use on a rugged road, mountain path and
steep hill. Engine braking effect on steep hill
is available.
yy 2nd gear position
Use on a long and gentle slope. Engine brak-
ing effect is available.
yy 3rd gear position

TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
yy 4th gear position Warning

Use on a long and gentle slope. yy Do not downshift abruptly (3rd, 2nd or 1st) when the vehicle is
driven at high speed (D or 4th), or vehicle may be severely dam-
aged. Also, the vehicle may slip, resulting in an accident (especially
yy 5th gear position on a slippery road).
lever is in low gears, the transmission could be damaged.
yy 6th gear position Caution

yy If you press and hold the tip switch, the gear may be shifted
through several steps in series.
yy Please note that the gear may be upshifted if you fully depress the
accelerator pedal while driving with 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear.
yy 7th gear position
yy If you apply excessive force to the tip switch, the gear may not
be shifted into other gears to protect the vehicle system. Soft and
smooth operation is recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINTER (W) / standard mode (s)
Winter Mode
In this mode, the vehicle can start off from the 2nd gear Mode Switch
(forward and reverse). Use this mode in the event of start-
ing-off on slippery roads.
Winter Mode (W)

yy To select the winter mode, press “W” on the mode switch.
The “WINTER” indicator in the instrument cluster comes on.
yy In this mode, the vehicle can start from the 2nd gear (for-
ward and reverse). Use this mode in the event of starting- Use the standard mode in
off on slippery roads. normal driving conditions and
use the winter mode on slip-
Standard Mode (S) pery roads.
yy Use the standard mode in normal driving conditions.
How to Start Off the Vehicle with 2nd

Forward/Reverse Gear
1. Press the “W” portion of the mode switch to select the win-
ter mode.
2. Place the selector lever to “D” and check if the shift lever
indicator shows “D”.
3. You can now start off the vehicle with the 2nd forward gear.
4. Place the selector lever to the “R” position to start off the
vehicle with the 2nd reverse gear.
Caution
Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill ac-
cording to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake pedal.
6-19
SAFETY MODE (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
Symptoms Resetting the safety mode when

When the transmission has an electrical or mechanical fault, the gear is fixed
the transmission operates in the safety mode to maintain mini-
mum driving conditions and to prevent the transmission from How to reset the safety mode
being damaged. 1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to “P”.
When the transmission is defective, the symptoms that can oc- 2. Stop the engine and wait for more than 10 seconds.
cur are as follows:
3. Start the engine.
yy Heavy shock when moving the selector lever
yy Decreased driving force while driving at high speed Symptoms after resetting the safety mode
yy Fixed gear position during driving (cannot accelerate yy If the vehicle operates normally after resetting, the prob-
the vehicle) lems are corrected.
yy If gear is fixed at the 2nd forward gear in the “D” position or
Caution the 2nd reverse gear in “R”. Have the system checked by a
yy If you find any symptoms caused by mechanical or electrical de- Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
fects in the transmission, stop the vehicle immediately and reset ter.
the safety mode.
yy If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the 2nd forward
gear in “D” or 2nd reverse gear in “R”) still exists, have the system
checked by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.
yy If the mechanical or electrical problem still exists, have the system
Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING AID SYSTEM (PAS)*
The parking aid system is a supplementary device which detects the distance to any obstacle with front and rear sensors and warns
the driver with alarm sounds, when the vehicle is moving forward or backward. The alarm interval becomes shorter as the obstacle
approaches.
Front Sensors Rear Sensors
yy For detecting front obstacles yy For detecting rear obstacles

yy Two sensors yy Four sensors
yy Operation: in gear position “D” and “R” yy Operation: in gear position “R” only
Operating Conditions
Front Corner Sensor
When pushing the PAS OFF switch, the lamp goes off and the
front corner sensor function operates. The front corner sensor
only operates when the gear selector lever is in “R”, “N”, or “D”
position. But the function does not work when the gear selec-
tor lever is in “P” position or the vehicle speed is 10 Km/h or
more, with or without the PAS OFF switch operation.
6-21
Precautions for Parking Aid System
Caution
yy The alarm may not sound according to the forward or re-
The parking aid system is only the supplementary system to help
versing speeds, the shape of the obstacle. your parking. Always pay attention to your surroundings with your
yy The parking aid system may not work properly if the bum- own eyes while reversing.
per height or the sensor fitting condition is changed or any yy The system can detect only its sensing scope. And the system
commercial accessory (other than a device installed at the can not detect the center area between sensors, objects lower
factory) is mounted within the sensing area. than the sensors or narrow objects, etc. So, always be careful for
these cases while parking.
yy When the sensor is frozen or blocked by snow and water,
yy The alarm does not sound if the distance between the sensor
you may assume that the sensors are defective. If this hap- and obstacle is 30 cm or less. However, if the sensor detects the
pens, check the sensors and remove them with a soft mate- obvious obstacle, the alarm may sound.
rial. yy Do not rely on the front corner sensors when parking. Always park
yy To prevent damage to the sensor surface, avoid hard pres- while checking the left and right spaces.
sure and contact with hard or sharp materials. yy If the buzzer sounds abnormally or sounds for over 3 seconds
when placing the gear selector lever to “R” position, the parking
aid system is defective. Have the system checked at Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service center.
Warning
An accident or damage of the car caused by the defective parking
aid system is not covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Alarm Interval
In gear position “D” Activated PAS sensors Distance to
Alarm interval
obstacle
over 60cm No alarm
40cm ~ 60cm approx. 0.7 sec
30cm ~ 40cm Alarm stays on
In gear position “D”, only the front sensors are operable.
In gear position “R” Activated PAS sensors Distance to

Alarm interval
obstacle
over 120cm No alarm
80cm ~ 120cm approx. 2 sec
In gear position “R”, the front and rear sensors are operable.
6-23
CAUTION
You should continue to utilize the mirrors or turn- The alarm interval becomes faster as your vehicle ap-
ing your head. When reversing, adhere to the proaches the obstacle.
common precautions.
 Certain obstacles that sensors cannot detect
yy The parking aid system is a supplementary system
to help your parking. It is not intended to replace yy Thin and narrow objects, such as wires, ropes, or chains
the driver’s attentiveness. yy Cotton, sponge, clothes, snow that absorb ultrasonic waves.
yy Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or us- yy Obstacles lower than the bumper: Drainage or puddle
ing a high-pressure water gun while washing. The  Sensor Cannot Detect
sensors could be damaged.
yy When the sensing portion is frozen.
yy Normally, when you select the “R” position with the
yy When the sensing portion is covered by rain, water drops,
ignition “ON”, the alarm sounds “beep” once.
snow or mud.
In the parking lot as shown in the figure, the upper  Weak Sensing Scopes
portion of the vehicle can be hit before the sensor op-
yy When they are partially covered by snow or mud.
eration, so check with the outside rearview mirrors or
by turning your head during parking. yy When the ambient temperature is too high or too low.
 Not defective but improperly working
yy When driving on rough roads, gravel roads, hills, or grass.
yy When the bumper height is changed due to a heavy load.
yy When receiving other ultrasonic signals (metal sounds or air
braking noises from heavy commercial vehicles).
yy When a high-power radio is turned on.
yy When there is heavy rainfall or water drops
yy The front corner sensors may not work properly if the rear
sensor is faulty.
yy When the sensor is hindered by improperly fitted accessories.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rearview camera system*
The rearview camera system is a supplementary function for
safe driving to display the condition behind the vehicle while
the gear selector lever in R position.
Rearview monitor
Gear selector lever in R
The monitor shows the view behind the vehicle when the gear
selector lever is in R position.
Rearview monitor Rearview camera

Cautions for using rearview camera system
yy Rear Detection Cameras use wide-angle lens to acquire

a wider view, so there may be differences between the
actual distance and the distance that appears on the
screen. For safety, make sure to check the rear, right
and left sides of the car yourself.
yy Only the volume and incoming call features will operate
when operating the rear detection camera.
yy The rearview camera does not show the entire area be- The rearview monitor is ap-
hind the vehicle.
plied depending on the vehicle
yy Keep the camera lens clean using a camera lens clean-
specifications.
er so that the lens is free of foreign matter.
6-25
Front view camera system*
The front view camera system is an auxiliary safety device which displays the front
view image of the vehicle on the front monitor, with an easy operation of a switch.
 How to use
yy When the driver presses the front view camera ON/OFF
switch with the shift lever in P, N, D or M position, the front
monitor displays the front view image of the vehicle.
Monitor display yy If the driver moves the shift lever to the R position, the front
monitor displays the rear view image by linked operation
with the rear view camera.
yy If the driver presses the front view camera ON/OFF switch
Front view again with the front view of the vehicle displayed on the
camera switch front monitor, the monitor displays the previously displayed
image.
 Deactivation conditions
yy Vehicle driven at 20 km/h or higher: Front monitor displays
Front view camera the previously displayed image.
yy Front view camera switch OFF: Front monitor displays the
previously displayed image.
yy IGN OFF
 Inactivation conditions
yy Shift lever in R position
Caution
yy The distance to objects displayed on the front monitor may look
different from the actual distance. Therefore always check the
front, left and right spaces
yy Clean the camera lens with a lens cleaner or equivalent frequently
so that it is free from dust and dirt particles.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake SYSTEM
Warning Light and Indicator Related to Brake
ABS warning Brake warning EBD warning HDC indicator ESP warning ESP OFF
light light light light indicator
Brake pedal
Paking brake lever
6-27
Brake Pedal (Foot Brake)
The brake pedal (foot brake) is designed to decrease the ve- Nothing Under Driver’s Seat
hicle speed and stop the vehicle. Do not excessively apply the
brake pedal while going down a long hill. The brake system Do not leave empty bottles or
will overheat causing the vapor lock or fade phenomenon thus cans near or under the driver’s
losing braking force. Use the foot brake along with the engine seat. If it hinders the brake or
braking effects by selecting lower gears. accelerator pedal operation, it
may cause an unexpected ac-
Caution cident.
Avoid abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires may
slip.
Engine brake?
A system that allows for the slowing of a vehicle that is in- Brake Disc
dependent of the conventional braking systems. A driver
would normally down-shift to slow the driver’s descent of a Check the brake discs at every 10000 km of driving, and re-
hill, using engine compression. The engine brake increases place if necessary.
the effectiveness of this regarding force. When the brake disc is badly worn, you may hear a squeak-
ing sound from the brake system. If this happens, replace the
Fade? brake discs as a set (left and right) as soon as possible.
tween brake pads and discs. Caution
The life span of brake disc depends on the driving habits.
Vapor Lock?
When the brake system is overheated, the fluid in the brake
lines will boil and form bubbles. Only the bubbles will be
compressed when the brake pedal is depressed. So the When the Foot Brake Is Not Working
brakes cannot work properly due to loss of braking force. When the foot brake is not working, decelerate the vehicle
speed by using the engine braking effect, then stop the vehicle
by applying the parking brake slowly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ABS(Anti-Lock Brake System)
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)? Warning
When braking suddenly or braking on slippery roads, the yy ABS is designed to secure more safety and increase the control
vehicle keeps moving forward but the wheels are locking of steering wheel during emergency braking situation. The braking
and not rotating. If these happen, your vehicle may lose sta- distance for vehicles equipped with an ABS may be longer than
for those without it on uneven, gravel, rough or snow-covered
bility or rotate resulting in an accident. ABS helps to main-
roads.
tain directional stability and control of the vehicle.
yy While driving on these roads, reduce the vehicle speed and main-
tain a safe distance from a proceding car.
yy To get the maximum benefit from ABS in an emergency situation,
ABS Warning Light
do not pump the brake pedal.
This warning light comes on when the igni- yy Even a vehicle equipped with ABS has a risk of skidding sideways.
tion switch is turned to “ON” and should go Therefore, always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead
off in a few seconds. and drive at low speed on slippery surfaces.
Warning
If this light stays on after starting the engine or comes on while driv- Caution
ing, have the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong yy ABS system performs self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pres-
Authorized Service Center. In this case, the ABS function is not avail- sure to the brake units for few seconds after starting the engine.
able, but the conventional brake system is properly working. This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ABS is
properly functioning.
yy When the ABS is operating, you may feel pulsations from the brake
pedal along with noise. This is normal and indicates that the ABS
is functioning properly.
6-29
EBD (Electronic Brake-Force Dis- ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
tribution)
ESP SYSTEM?
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)? The ESP system is an electronic vehicle stability control
and safe driving system and driving safety supplementary
When the brake pedal is applied, it controls the braking pres-
system that helps to avoid dangerous situations by con-
sure electronically to effectively distribute the braking forces
trolling the brakes on the wheels or the engine torque to
to the front wheels and rear wheels. EBD operates when the
compensate vehicle stability when it is extremely unstable
speed differences between the fastest front wheel and the rear
under conditions such as sharp cornering.
wheel are over 1 km/h. If ABS is engaged, it does not operate.
ESP Indicator/Warning Light

EBD Warning Light*
ON
This warning light comes on when ESP
system is defective.
Blinking
This indicator blinks when the ESP system
is operating.
If the ABS warning light and the brake warning light come on
simultaneously, EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) sys- Warning
tem is defective. For your safety, reduce the vehicle speed when the indicator is blink-
ing or you are driving on a slippery or curved road.
Caution
If the EBD warning light stays on, have the system checked at the
Caution
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
yy ESP system performs self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pres-
sure to the brake units for few seconds after starting the engine.
This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ESP is
yy When the ESP is operating, you may feel pulsations from the brake
pedal along with noise. This is normal and indicates that the ESP

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC (Hill Descent Control)*
ESP OFF Indicator HDC (Hill Descent Control)?
This indicator comes on when pressing HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling down
the ESP OFF switch to deactivate the ESP steep grades, this function allows you to travel at a low speed
function. without depressing the brake pedal. This convenient function
When the wheels are slipping on a snow- is only for driving down steep grades. Therefore do not use
covered or iced road, you can stop ESP this function for anything other than driving down steep hills.
function by pressing ESP OFF switch. This
may help to drive off the vehicle.
HDC Indicator
Green light on: HDC is ready for use (by
pressing the HDC switch).
Red light on: the HDC system is over-
heated or malfunctioning.
Caution
If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC may
be applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed bump.
Therefore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal roads.
HDC Operation
If the conditions for activating the HDC are met, HDC is acti-
vated and the green HDC indicator blinks on the instrument
cluster. The HDC is deactivated when the vehicle speed is
below 5 km/h or above 70 km/h or the gradient of the slope
becomes gentle while it is in operation. It is normal that strong
vibrations and noise occur from the brake system when the
HDC is in operation.
6-31
PARKING BRAKE OPERATION
Parking Brake Lever Brake Warning Light
yy This warning light comes on when the
parking brake is applied and/or the
brake fluid level is lower than a speci-
fied level.
yy If you drive the vehicle without releas-
ing the parking brake, the brake warn-
ing light blinks and the buzzer sounds
to warn the driver when the vehicle
speed exceeds 10 km/h for more than
2 seconds. When this happens, stop
the vehicle immediately and release the
parking brake.
Caution
yy Before driving off, be sure to check that the brake warning light
is turned off.
Parking Brake Operation yy Driving with the parking brake applied could damage the rear brake
system. Before driving, fully release the parking brake.
Park your vehicle at a safe place and pull up the parking brake
lever. Then, the parking brake warning light ( ) comes on. yy If the brake warning light ( ) doesn’t go out after releasing the
parking brake, have the brake system checked by a Ssangyong
Parking Brake Release
yy Place the gear selector lever to “P” or “N” position when applying
Lift up the brake lever a little and press the release button at the parking brake.
the end of the lever. Then, push down the lever. yy The parking brake cable should be checked and adjusted regu-
larly.
yy Do not use “P” position as a parking brake. Securely apply the
parking brake when you park the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Devices related to seat.....................................7-2
3
Driver’s seat......................................................7-5
Passenger’s seat............................................7-10 4
Second row seat............................................. 7-11
5
Third row seat.................................................7-13
7
Seat heating/ventilation function*...................7-15 6
7
Seats
8
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
DEVICES RELATED TO SEAT
1
Second row heating switch
2 Easy Access Switch &
Head Restraint Height
Driver Seat Memory
Adjust Knob
3 Setting Switch
Lumbar Support Lever
Driver Seat
4 Control Switch
Rear Seat
Armrest Driver Seat
5 Heating/Ventila-
tion Switch
6
8 Head Restraint Height

Adjust Knob
Passenger Seat
9 Heating/Ventilation
Switch
10
11
12
13 Seat Folding Lever

Seatback Reclining Lever (Rear Seat)
(Rear Seat) Passenger Seat
14 Control Switch
7-2 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can

result in serious head and neck injuries in case if a colli-
yy All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made
sion. Make sure that the head restraints are in place and
before any driving.
adjusted before driving.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely locked after ad-
justing.
Caution
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for com-
fort while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effec- yy Power seats will be operated even when the ignition
tive when the passenger sits back and straight up in the switch is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to pre-
seat. If the seatback is reclined too much, then the risks vent battery discharge, operate your seats when the
of sliding under the lap belt and getting injured are in- engine is running.
creased. yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simul-
yy Never press the driver’s seat & outside rearview mirror taneously. It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate
position switch while the vehicle is in motion. the electric seat button one by one.
yy Any object that might damage the seat should not be yy When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based sol-
placed on the seat. vents such as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or
they will cause discoloration and dull the surface of the
yy Front seats and rear seats are equipped with heated
seats.
lines. If the following types of persons sit on the heated
seats, they might receive minor burns. Extra caution is yy Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if
needed for them: children, elderly persons, ill persons, the seat comes in contact with other object and cannot
persons with sensitive skin, excessively fatigued per- be adjusted anymore.
sons, persons under the influence of alcohol or sleep- yy If the power seats are not operational, the seats should
inducing medication such as cold medicine or sleeping be checked and fixed before any driving.
pills.
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such
as a blanket, cushion or seat cover.
Seats 7-3
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING
yy Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This yy To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries
can cause unexpected accident. and death, sit in the position so that the distance be-
yy You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the tween the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25
seat when trying to get the small objects (cigarette light- cm, as long as you are comfortable with driving.
ers, coins, credit cards) under the seat or caught be- yy Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between
tween the seat and the center console. Wear protective the seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat
gloves to prevent injury. is potentially flammable when it is released from the con-
yy Never try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. tainer when the seat is moved.
yy Unexpected movement of the seat or seatback can yy Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion re-
cause loss of control. duces the frictional force and could make you slide under
the seat belt. This could result in serious injury or death.
yy Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when
adjusting the seat position. yy Do not insert your hands under the seat or in the path of
the seat movement when adjusting the seat. Your hands
yy Sit upright in the center of the seat and wear the seat belt
or fingers could get trapped between the seat and the
around your hip and pelvic bones.
frame.
yy Do not place any objects in the path of seatback move-
yy Do not ride with the seatback reclined too much. You
ment. Any obstruction in this path prevents the seatback
could slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could
from being locked, causing severe injuries or death dur-
result in severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be pro-
ing a collision.
tected by the seat belt and the belt can strangle you or
yy Always raise the seatback to the proper upright position even cut into your stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in
before driving. your seat by keeping your seatback upright while driving.
yy Never drive the vehicle with the seat folded. In a colli- yy When returning the seatback to the upright position, hold
sion, you will be seriously killed or injured as you lose the the seatback with your one hand and pull the release
protection the seat belt can provide. lever with the other hand. The more the seatback is re-
clined, the greater the restoring force of the seatback is.
If you do not hold the seatback while adjusting the seat-
back, you could be injured by the restoring force.
7-4 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVER’S SEAT
POWER SEAT* Height Adjustment of Head Restraint
To raise the head restraint, pull it up without
pressing the release button. To lower the head
Seat Heater* restraint, press the release button on top of
the seatback and push the head restraint down.
By operating the seat
heater switch, you can Warning
heat the seat cushion 1 Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints
and seatback. can result in serious head and neck injuries in case
of a collision.
Cooling Fan* Caution

There are four Do not apply excessive force to the head restraint
cooling fans during adjustment. It may be damaged.
Forward and Backward Adjustment of Head Restraint

The head restraint can be adjusted forward to
three different positions by pulling the headrest
forward. To adjust the head restraint backward,
pull it fully forward to the farthest position and
Seat Position Control release it. Adjust the head restraint so that it
Switches properly supports the head and neck.
Lumbar Support (Driver’s Seat)

Turn the lever forward to
Warning
increase the amount of lumbar
Do not adjust the driver’s seat when the vehicle is moving. support. To decrease it, turn
Control of the vehicle can be lost.
the lever backward.
Seats 7-5
GETtheMANUALS.org
Seat Slide Adjustment Seatback Reclining Adjustment
Seat Height Adjustment Seat Tilt Adjustment
7-6 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
EASY ACCESS SYSTEM (DRIVER’S SEAT)*
This system is designed to provide the driver sufficient space to access and exit.
Easy Access Button

To operate
To use this function, press the Easy Access button located at
driver’s window switch panel.
To exit: The seat moves rearward and downward when re-
moving the ignition key only while the parking brake warning
light in the instrument cluster is ON or the gear selector lever
is in “P” position before turning off the ignition switch. Howev-
er, the gear position requirement is not applied to the manual
transmission equipped vehicle since it does not have the “P”
position. Therefore, manual transmission equipped vehicle is
only applied parking brake.
To access : The seat moves back to its original position when
turning the ignition key to “ON” position while the gear selector
lever is in “P” position or the parking brake is applied. Howev-
Caution er, the gear position requirement is not applied to the manual
yy The moving distance of the seat is based on when the seat is transmission equipped vehicle since it does not have the “P”
located at its front end. It varies according to the initial position. position. Therefore,manual transmission equipped vehicle is
yy There could be some differences when the seat moves back to only applied parking brake.
its original position. The differences of the passenger weights and
electrical loads can cause the differences in its distance, and this To release
is normal, not defective.
yy Operation of easy access while the parking brake is not securely To release this function, press the Easy Access button again.
applied may cause an accident. Make sure that the gear selector
lever is in “P” position and the parking brake is securely applied.
yy The easy access system may not operate properly when operat-
ing the seat memory switch or any other switches during the easy
access operation.
Seats 7-7
GETtheMANUALS.org
POSITION MEMORY SETTING*
The position memory is available for up to three drivers. Each driver can set his/ her own driver’s seat and outside rearview mirror
positions. The information will individually be stored in the integrated computer. If somebody has moved the seat, the memory posi-
tions can be recalled automatically by pressing the position button.
SET button
Position button
(1, 2, 3)
STOP button
Caution
yy The automatic positioning operation stops when operating any seat
adjusting switch or the outside rearview mirror adjusting switch
during its operation. To erase the memorized seat and outside
To Store the Memory Settings rearview mirror positions, press the “STOP” button.
yy If you do not press any position button within 5 seconds after
1. Position the transmission shift lever to “P” with the ignition
pressing “SET” switch, the memory setting is cancelled.
switch “ON” (for your safety, do not start the engine). In
case of a manual transmission vehicle, you must apply the
parking brake too. To Recall the Memory Settings
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rearview mirrors to the
desired positions. 1. Press and hold one of the position buttons ( ),( ),( )
3. Press the (SET) switch. The indicator on the switch comes you want until the buzzer sounds.
on. 2. The driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors start to move
4. Within 5 seconds, press and hold one of the position but- to the stored positions. If you drive off during this recalling
tons ( ), ( ), ( ) you want to set. When the memory process, this automatic memory setting stops operating.
setting is completed, a buzzer sounds twice. 3. Wait until they stop moving.
4. When the process is completed, a buzzer sounds twice.
7-8 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVER’S SEAT (MANUAL SEAT)
Seatback Reclining Adjustment
Height Adjustment and Tilt
Operation of Head Restraint
Same as that of the power seat
Seat Heater*
Lumbar Support
Same as that of the
power seat To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly and raise
the lever. Then, lean back to the desired angle and release
the lever. After adjusting, make sure the lever is returned to
its original position and the seatback is locked.
Seat Slide Adjustment Seat Height Adjustment
To move the seat forward or backward, pull and hold the seat You can adjust the angle and height of the front or rear sec-
slide lever up and move the seat as desired. Then, release tion of the seat cushion by rotating the adjustment knob on
the lever. the side of the seat clockwise or counterclockwise.
Seats 7-9
GETtheMANUALS.org
PASSENGER’S SEAT
Power Seat* Manual Seat
Head Restraint Head Restraint

Same as that of driver’s seat Same as that of driver’s seat
Seat Heater*
Seat Heater*
Cooling Fan*
Seatback Reclining Seat Slide Seatback Reclining Seat Slide

Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
7-10 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
SECOND ROW SEAT
Head Restraint Adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up with-
out pressing the release button. To lower
the head restraint, press the release but-
1 ton ( ) on top of seatback and push the
head restraint down.
Warning
Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in serious
head and neck injuries in case of a collision.

Pull up the lever and adjust the seatback angle to the desired
position. After adjustment, release the lever and make sure
Seat Heater* that the lever is returned to its original position and the setback
is securely locked.
Armrest Seat Backboard (7-seater)
The middle of the second Release the backboard lock after
row seat is equipped with folding the second and third row
an armrest. seats. Then let the backboard tilt
toward the third row seat. The sec-
ond and third row seats will be flat.
Backboard
Seat Folding Lever Lock Lever
To access to the third row seats easily, make the second row
seat upright. Raise the second row seat while pulling up the
seat folding lever with the second row seatback folded down.
Seats 7-11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Folding the SECOND Row Seat (when ACCESSING TO THIRD ROW SEAT)
1. Position the headrest to the lowest level. 3. Press the upper portion of the seat- 4. Pull up the seat folding lever and
2. Pull up the seatback reclining lever and back until it is engaged with seat make the seat upright.
fold down the seatback. cushion.
5. Fix the folded seat to the front seat 6. Unfold the seat in
with a fixing strap from the case un- the reverse order of
der the floor. folding. Make sure
that the seat is se-
Caution curely locked. If the
yy If the headrest is not adjusted to the seat is not locked,
lowest level, the seat can be reached to the seat may be
the front seat while making it upright. folded forward.
yy After folding the seatback, ensure to
press the upper seatback to set the Warning
seat upright. If the seat is made upright When returning the second row seat to
without fixing the seat, the seat can be its original position, be careful not to hit
damaged by conflicting with the front the feet and leg of the passenger in third
seat. row seat.
7-12 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
THIRD Row Seat
Folding Lever the head restraint, press the release but-
Pull up the folding
lever to fold down the head restraint down.
third row seat.
Warning
Headrest Type
Type A NON HEADREST
Seat Folding Type B MIDDLE HEADREST
(Making a Luggage Compartment) Type C SMALL HEADREST
1. Position the headrest to the lowest level.
2. Pull up the folding loop of the third row seat, and fold the 3. Fold the seatback of the third row seat to make the luggage
seatback forward. compartment.
Seats 7-13
GETtheMANUALS.org
Making a Bed
1. Fold down the third row seats. (refer to “Folding the third
Warning
row seat” section)
yy When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that the
2. Fold down the second row seats. (refer to “Folding the sec- luggage is placed firm enough to avoid being shaken while driv-
ond row seat” section) ing. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or
3. Lock the seatback of second row seats by pressing the up- passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not obstruct
per portion of it. the field of the rearview.
yy Do not sit on the folded seat because the seatbelt and other safety
4. Release the locks on backboard of the second row seat. devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious
5. Make a bed by unfolding the backboard. injury in case of accident.
7-14 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT HEATING/Ventilation function*
Front Seat Heating/Ventilation Switch
Electric fan for ventilated seat yy Turning the seat ventilation
When the seat ventilation switch is op- switch to the position 1, 2
erated, 4 ventilation fans run to reduce or 3 to the left ( ) allows
the discomfort resulted from the con- Driver side Passenger to adjust the fan speed ac-
side cording to its position.
tact with the seat in hot weather.
yy Turning the seat heating
switch to the position 1, 2
or 3 to the right ( ) allows
to adjust the heating power
according to its position.
yy The operation indicator (red lamp for heating and blue lamp for ven-
tilation) comes on while the seat heating and ventilation is activated.
yy If you set the switch to the position 0, the seat heating and ventila-
tion is deactivated.
Note
When you cycle the ignition key to the OFF position and back to the ON
position with the seat heating/ventilation activated, the seat heating and
ventilation will not work. In order to reactivate, you have to turn the switch to
the other positions.
Seat Heating/
Caution
Ventilation yy The ventilated seat is not the cooling/heating seat which blows out cold air from it.
yy The ventilated seat uses the interior air for ventilation. Make sure that it is used together
with the air conditioner.
yy Don’t put your hand in the bottom of the cushion when the ventilated seat is in operation.
Otherwise, the running ventilation fan may cause you to be frightened or injured.
yy The battery can be discharged when the seat heating/ventilation switch and current
consumers are used with IGN ON (engine off).
Seats 7-15
GETtheMANUALS.org
Second row heating switch (for both sides)
Second row seat

Seat Heating
The heating switches for the rear seats are located on the rear
door trims. During heating the seats, the seat heater indicator
comes on.
Caution
The battery can be discharged when the seat heating/ventilation
switch and current consumers are used with IGN ON (engine off).
7-16 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning Warning
yy Do not operate the seat heater for a long time when the passen- yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a
ger is an infant, child, old or handicapped person, person with blanket, cushion or seat cover.
sensitive skin, person under the influence of alcohol, or exces- yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in se-
sively fatigued person. They might receive minor burns. rious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make sure that
yy If your skin is in contact with the heated seat for a long time, you the head restraints are in place and adjusted before driving.
might get low temperature burns. Be careful. yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort while
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective when the
blanket, cushion or seat cover. passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback
yy If the temperature continues to rise, turn the switch off and have is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under the lap belt
the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au- and getting injured are increased.
thorized Service Center.
yy In the case of the driver’s seat, an excessive usage of the heated Caution
seat might make you sleepy and could negatively affect your
safety. yy Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery dis-
yy Do not place anything sharp on the seat. This may cause dam-
charge, operate your seats when the engine is running.
age to the seat heater.
yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simultaneously.
yy All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made before
It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the electric seat
any driving.
button one by one.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjusting.
yy When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents such
yy Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed on as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will cause
the seat. discoloration and dull the surface of the seats.
yy Front seats are equipped with heated lines. If the following yy Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat
types of persons sit on the heated seats, they might receive comes in contact with other object and cannot be adjusted
minor burns. Extra caution is needed for them: children, elderly anymore.
persons, ill persons, persons with sensitive skin, excessively fa-
yy If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be
tigued persons, persons under the influence of alcohol or sleep-
checked and fixed before any driving.
inducing medication such as cold medicine or sleeping pills.
Seats 7-17
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S
eat belt and air bag.........................................8-2
3
S
eat belt............................................................8-4
H
ow to fasten the three point seat belt.............8-5 4
H
ow to fasten the seat belts in second 5
row seat.............................................................8-6
8
H
ow to fasten the seat belt (3-point) in second 6
row seat.............................................................8-7
7
Child restraints and pregnant woman...............8-9
Warnings for seat belt.....................................8-17
Seat Belt and
8
Air bag*............................................................8-19 Air Bag
9
Airbag non-inflation conditions........................8-23
Warnings for air bag........................................8-27 10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT AND AIR BAG
1 To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by all
occupants inside of your vehicle.
2 Front air bag Air Bag Warning Light
Three point
seat belt (Driver’s)
Three point
3 seat belt
4
Side air bag (Driver’s)
5 Three point seat belt
6 Front air bag Seat Belt Reminder

Lap belt or Three
(Passenger’s)
point seat belt
7
Three point Three point seat
8 seat belt belt
9 Three point Side air bag

seat belt (Passenger’s)
10
The Restraint Systems Include: Fastening the seat belt

11
yy Air bags When seat belts are not used or improperly worn, they may not work and can
cause serious injury. In addition, air bags can protect occupants when the oc-
12 yy Seat belts cupants are wearing their seat belts. Air bags may cause injuries to occupants if
yy Seat belt pretensioners (For front seat) they do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
13 As independent systems, their protective
functions complement one another.
14
8-2 Seat Belt and Air Bag

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air Bag
Side air bag Warning
(Driver’s) yy Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not,
the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden
maneuvering of the vehicle.
Side air bag yy Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time.
(Passenger’s) Front air bag yy Seat belts and air bags can significantly minimize possible injury
(Driver’s) to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from
fatal collisions or injury.
yy Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems
Front air bag could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts
(Passenger’s) should be checked and repaired by only a Ssangyong Dealer or
yy An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant
or child restraint.
When a strong frontal impact occurs, the front air bags are
inflated.
Seat Belt and Air Bag 8-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT IN FRONT SEATS
Seat Belt Height Adjustment
Restraint of pregnant women
yy Expectant mothers must position the lap por-

tion of the belt as low as possible below the
rounding of the abdomen to avoid the belt
pushing the fetus when a collision or sudden
braking occurs.
yy Driving while pregnant can be very danger-
ous, so avoid driving if possible. yy To raise the seat belt, slide the seat belt
yy Consult your doctor about seatbelt position height adjuster up.
during pregnancy. yy To lower the seat belt, press the button ( )
and slide it down.
Fastening the Seat Belt Warning

yy Adjust the seat belt height before driving.
yy Shoulder belt should be positioned midway over
the shoulder, never across the neck.
Pretensioner (for Front Seat)

When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt
pretensioners rewind the seat belts immediately to
yy Insert the metal latch plate into the restrain the occupants to their seats. It helps the
buckle until it clicks. effective operation of the seat belts and airbags.
yy To unfasten the seat belt, press the
Warning
button on the buckle.
Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed
again. Have the deployed seat belt pretensioners re-
placed by an authorized dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO FASTEN THE THREE POINT SEAT BELT
1. Pull out the latch plate from the 2. Position the shoulder belt across the 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
retractor. If the seat belt is locked body and the lap belt as low as pos- is securely locked. A slack belt will
when being pulled out, rewind it sible across the hips. Insert the latch greatly reduce the protection af-
completely in the retractor, then pull plate into the buckle until it clicks. forded to the wearer.
it out to the desired length. 3. Adjust the seat belt height as need- 5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the
ed. red button on the buckle.
Caution Warning
Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an Improperly worn seat belts could cause
upright position and wear the seat belt. serious injury or death.
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible
across the hips. Do not put it across
Warning
the waist. In an accident, the belt may
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is apply pressure to your abdomen. This
not twisted. may cause internal injuries.
yy The shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over the shoulder, never across
the neck.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO FASTEN THE SEAT BELTS IN SECOND ROW SEAT
1. Pull out the latch plate at the bight of the seat.
Warning
Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it
across waist. In an accident, the belt may apply pressure to your
abdomen. This may cause serious internal injuries.
To lengthen, hold the metal latch

plate at a right angle to the belt and
pull the belt. To shorten, pull the free
end of the belt away from the latch
plate, then pull the belt clip to take up
the slack.
2. Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the belt
as low as possible across your hips, not across your abdomen.
3. If the belt is too tight or slack on your hips,
readjust the belt.
4. To unfasten the seat belt, press the red but-
ton on the buckle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO FASTEN THE SEAT BELT (3-POINT) IN SECOND ROW SEAT
1. Pull out the latch plate from the 2. Insert the latch plate into the left 3. Position the shoulder belt across the
retractor. If the seat belt is locked buckle until it clicks. body and the lap belt as low as pos-
when being pulled out, rewind it sible across the hips. Insert the latch
completely in the retractor, then pull plate into the buckle until it clicks.
it out to the desired length. 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
is securely locked. A slack belt will
greatly reduce the protection af-
forded to the wearer.
5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the
red button on the buckle.
Warning
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
Improperly worn seat belts could cause serious injury or death.
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it across the waist. In an accident,
the belt may apply pressure to your abdomen. This may cause internal injuries.
yy The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over the shoulder, never across the neck.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR cENTER SEAT BELT (3-point type)*
1. Pull out the smaller latch plate (B) from upper re-
tractor (1).
2. Insert it into the black buckle (2) until it clicks.
3. Pull out the bigger latch plate (A) and position the
seat belt across your shoulder, chest and hips.
4. Insert it into the buckle (3) until it clicks.
Warning
yy Make sure to fasten the seat belt according to the
order as described so that it functions properly.
yy To prevent the seat belt from bumping against the rear
glass, unfasten the seat belt while holding it.
yy This seat belt is designed only for a passenger who
sits on the center seat in the rear seat.
yy Tug on the seat belt to make sure that the latch plate
is securely locked.
yy Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
yy Improper wearing of seat belts increases the chance
of injury or death in case of a collision.
yy Position the seat belt away from your neck and abdo-
men.
Caution
Stow the seat belt into the console when it is not in
use.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Child restraints and Pregnant Woman
Pregnant Women Warning
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts yy Infants and tiny children should always be restrained in an infant
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the or child restraint.
best way to keep the baby safe. yy Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat with front
passenger air bag.
Warning yy A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat can
be seriously injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. Secure
yy Pregnant women should wear 3-point seat belt whenever possible
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
according to the professional recommendations by her doctor.
yy A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear seat
yy Pregnant women should wear the lap portion of the belt across
whenever possible. If installed in the front passenger seat, adjust
the thighs and as snugly and low as possible.
the seat as far back as it will go.
yy When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
Child Restraints yy When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with
the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
When transporting infants or small children, an appropriate yy In a collision an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become
child restraint system should always be used. The child re- a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an
straint system should be appropriate for your child’s weight infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the
and height and properly fit the car’s seat. Accident statistics child, no matter how strong you are.
indicate that children are safer when properly restrained in the yy Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is mov-
rear seat rather than in the front seat. ing.
yy If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer
to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder
Securing Methods of Child Re- belt under an arm or behind their back.
yy Please note that the three point seat belt is designed for a person
straint System who is taller than 140 cm.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in ve-
hicle seats by seat belts or the latch system (ISOFIX seat - if
equipped).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Infant and Child Safety
Child Seat
Children that are too small to use the seat belts must be prop-
erly secured in a child restraint system.
Warning
yy Do not place a child restraint system in the front seat. The infant
or child could be severely injured by an air bag inflation in case
of an accident.
yy Use only the qualified child restraint systems. Follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use of the child restraint
systems.
yy Do not carry your child on your lap while driving. You cannot resist
against the impact pressure in an accident. The child could be
crushed between you and the parts of vehicle.
yy Remember that a child restraint seat left in a concealed vehicle can
cause it to be very hot. Check the seating surface before putting
your child in the child restraint.
yy When your child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle
or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown
forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident.
yy When installing a child restraint, do not let the seat belts come
across the child’s neck.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various Seating Positions
TYPE A TYPE B
Rear-facing child seat Forward-facing child seat Booster seat
2nd seat 2nd seat

Restraint device Front
Mass group row row out Mounting method of vehicle
figure seat
center board
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 month) Rear facing child seat X X U 3-point belt rear-facing
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 year) Rear facing child seat X X U 3-point belt rear-facing
Forward facing child
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 month ~ 4 year) X UF U 3-point belt
seat
II ~ 15 to 25 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat X UF U 3-point belt
III ~ 22 to 36 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat X UF U 3-point belt
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories.
X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Securing by Seat Belt
Rear-facing Child Seat Front-facing Child Seat
Secure the child restraint with a seat belt as shown in the fig- Secure the child restraint with a seat belt as shown in the fig-
ure. ure.
Warning Caution
A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat can When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions pro-
be seriously injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. Secure a vided by the manufacturer.
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ISOFIX system is a standardised method of fitting child seats
SECURING A CHILD RESTRAIN that eliminates the need to use the stadard adult seatbelt to
SYSTEM WITH “ISOFIX” SYSTEM secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more se-
cure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and
How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor quicker installation.
ISOFIX child restrain
Latch anchor
ISOFIX mark
yy The ISOFIX lower latch anchors are located in the left and
Warning
right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations ( )
yy When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system, all unused vehicle
are shown in the illustration.
rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in
yy Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted
latch anchors until it clicks. behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and
taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
yy Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child re- or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts
straint. which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to
the child in the child restraint.
yy There is no ISOFIX lower latch anchor provided for the cen-
yy Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
ter rear seating position.
loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to use the Rear Anchor
Cautions for ISOFIX Seat
yy There are two rear anchors on the floor under the 3rd row
seat. (7-seater) yy The rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure
yy There are two rear anchors on the floor under the 2nd row the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower
seat. (5-seater) latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint
system only with the seatback anchors. The increased
load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, caus-
ing serious injury or death.
yy If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle
and a child is not properly restrained in the child re-
straint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in
a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer for installation.
yy Remove the headrest from the second row seat. yy Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are
yy Place the child restraint on the second row seat. latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear
the “click” sound.
yy Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the rear
anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the yy Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause
webbing of the tether connector. an unexpected personal injury.
yy Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints.
yy The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct rear anchor.
yy Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely in-
stalled. Refer to instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the child restraint.
yy Do not install the child restraint if it hinders the opera-
tions of front seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability
for Various ISOFIX Positions
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Mass group Size Class Fixture Front 2nd seat row 2nd seat row
Passenger center out board
F ISO/L1 X X X
CARRYCOT
G ISO/L2 X X X
GROUP 0 UP TO 10KG E ISO/R1 X X IUF
E ISO/R1 X X IUF
GROUP 0+ UP TO 13KG D ISO/R2 X X IUF
C ISO/R3 X X IUF (LHD only)
D ISO/R2 X X IUF
GROUP I 9 TO 18KG B ISO/F2 X X IUF
B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF
A ISO/F3 X X IUF (LHD only)
NOTE: Key of letters be inserted in the above table
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in attached list.
These ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning For Child Restraint
� Use only the officially approved child restraint.
Ssangyong is not responsible for the personal injury and
property damage due to the defect of child restraint.
� Use only the child restraint with proper type and size
for your baby.
� Use only the child restraint at proper location.
� Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as
below:
GROUP 0: 0 ~ 10KG
GROUP 0+: 0 ~ 13KG
GROUP I: 9 ~ 18KG
GROUP II: 15 ~ 25KG
GROUP III: 22 ~ 36KG
� Group 0 & 0+
Rear facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
� Group I
Forward facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
� Group II & III
Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened
Always follow the installation and use instructions provided
by the manufacturer of the booster seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR SEAT BELT
yy Always put on your shoulder belt over the shoulder and yy Periodically check that the seat belt and its components
across the chest. Do not put the shoulder belt across your work properly. A damaged seat belt can cause serious inju-
neck. ries. Repair or replace the damaged seat belt immediately
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
put it across the waist. In an accident, the belt may apply Center.
pressure to your abdomen. yy The warning light comes on whenever the ignition is
yy Do not wear the shoulder belt under the arm. It increases switched on. The light goes out when the driver’s seat belt
the danger of sliding out of the belt and can cause serious is securely fastened. If the light does not go off after fasten-
injury or even death. The belt may also tighten the chest ing the seat belt, it means that there is a malfunction in the
which is not as strong as the shoulders. This may also re- system. Have the seat belt system checked by a Ssangyong
sult in serious internal injuries. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
yy Do not lock the seat belt with a clip or a clamp. If the seat yy Additional devices or accessories on the seat belt may re-
belt is too loose, it may not protect your body from injury or sult in improper operation. Do not add any adjusting devices
death in an accident. which restrict the seat belt operation.
yy Before driving, all occupants should wear the seat belts. yy Periodically inspect all parts of the belt and have the dam-
Otherwise, occupants could be seriously injured in colli- aged parts replaced. The belt that has been overstretched
sions or sudden maneuvers. In many countries, there are in an accident must be replaced with a new one. Ssangyong
regulations regarding the use of the seat belts. Please ob- recommends replacing all component parts of the seat belt
serve local laws and regulations. after a collision. No replacement is required after a minor
yy Do not buckle up two or more persons with one seat belt. collision if a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center finds that no damage has occurred and
yy Do not wear the seat belt over any hard or breakable ob-
jects in pockets or on clothes. everything is in proper working order. The seat belt compo-
nents that were not used during a collision must also be in-
yy An infant and tiny child must be restrained in a child restraint
spected and replaced if they show signs of damage or faulty
system. Note that the three point seat belt is designed for a
operation.
person who is taller than 140 cm.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy Replace the entire seat belt assembly after a severe impact yy Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of
even if the damage is not obvious. the body, and should be worn low across the front of the
yy Never modify the seat belt. pelvis or the hips, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wear-
yy Always keep the seat belts clean and dry. Care should be ing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area
taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oil must be avoided.
and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Use mild soap yy Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consis-
and water for cleaning. The seat belt must be replaced if web- tent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they
bing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the
yy Adjust the seat properly before wearing the seat belt. protection afforded to the wearer.
yy Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an upright position yy Belts should not be worn with straps twisted.
and wear the seat belt. If the seat belt is positioned too high yy Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it
or fastened too loose, it may not protect your body from an is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on
injury or death in the event of a collision. the occupant’s lap.
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort yy No modifications or additions should be made by the user
while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effective when which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from
the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assem-
seatback is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding un- bly from being adjusted to remove slack.
der the lap belt and getting injured are increased. yy If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly
yy If the latch plate is inserted into a wrong buckle, the belt pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly
may exert pressure on your abdomen instead of your pelvis. pull the belt out of the retractor.
This may cause serious internal injury. yy Never unbuckle the seat belt while traveling. Careless driv-
yy If the seat belt is twisted, there will not be enough contact of ing actions, such as fastening/releasing the seat belt re-
the belt to spread the impact pressure. peatedly, may result in serious injury.
yy Make sure that the latch plate is securely locked. yy Make sure that the seat belt does not go around any solid
yy When pregnant women use the seat belt, consult with a body or fragile objects.
doctor for specific recommendations. yy Keep the buckle clean. Foreign materials caught inside
yy Keep the buckle clean. the buckle can prevent the seat belt latch plate from being
locked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
The air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) can provide additional protection for the driver and
AIR BAG* passenger in the event of a collision.
Driver’s Side Air Bag

The side air bags are integrated into
the side wall (window side) of both
Side Air Bag front seats. The side air bag is de-
signed to inflate only in certain side
(Passenger’s)
collision and protect occupants’ head
and chest.
Driver’s Air Bag

Front Air Bag When a severe frontal impact occurs,
(Passenger’s) sensors will cause the airbag to be
deployed so that driver’s and front
passenger’s head and chest will be
pillowed by the air bag instead of hit-
ting the steering wheel or dashboard.
Air Bag Warning Light

If this lamp does not go out after engine starting
or comes on while driving, it means that there is a
malfunction in the system. Have the air bag system
checked immediately by a Ssangyong Dealer or
Seat Belt Pretensioner (for front seats) Operation of pretensioner Operation of load limiter
When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners When a severe frontal im- After frontal collision, the
rewind the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants pact occurs, seat belt pre- load limiters releases the
to their seats. It helps the effective operation of the seat belts tensioners rewind the seat seat belt to prevent the oc-
and air bags. The load limiter is integrated into each seat belt belts immediately to restrain cupant from being injured
pretensioner. the occupants to their seats. due to belt force.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SRS Air Bag Locations of Air Bag Warning Labels
The Supplemental Restraint System air bag is designed to
Warning
supplement the seat belts and provide the driver and front pas-
senger with protection against head, chest, and other injuries NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by
an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to
in the event of a collision. For maximum protection, seat belts
the Child can occur
should always be worn by all occupants.
Type A (FRT/RR) Type B (FRT/RR)
Warning
yy The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt. Make
sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts properly,
even if air bags are installed in the vehicle.
yy Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the air bag may
not deploy.
yy The driver’s and front passenger’s air bags simultaneously de-
ploy.
yy Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an airbag in front of it.
Caution
yy If you see “SRS” on a certain area, the air bag is contained un-
derneath it. Therefore, do not apply any impact upon it and never
place any accessories or objects on the area. And avoid any direct
contact with the area.
yy As a reminder of possible dangers of the air bag, air bag warn-
ing labels are affixed on the driver’s and front passenger’s sun
visors. Locations of
Locations of side air bag
side air bag warning labels
warning labels

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Air Bags
Air Bag Operation
 The air bag inflates when:
yy In response to a severe frontal impact, the driver’s and front
passenger’s air bags deploy at the same time to supplement
the seat belts to prevent or reduce any personal injuries.
 The air bag can inflate when:
yy Underbody impact from the road surface; impact against
the curb at a very high speed; dropping impact onto the
road surface with a large angle
 The air bag does not inflate when:
yy Rollover, side impact or rear impact
yy If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant.
 The air bag seldom inflates when:
Driver’s Air Bag Passenger’s Air Bag*
yy Oblique impact, rollover
The driver’s air bag is located The front passenger’s air bag yy Weak impact in which the sensor is unable to detect (under
at center of the steering wheel. is located on the dashboard. the inflation requirements)
yy Impact against narrow objects such as a utility pole or a tree
Pretensioner (for Front Seat) yy The vehicle falls into a drainage or a puddle
When front air bags deploy, the seat belt pretensioners simul- yy The front of the vehicle crashes into a high impact point ve-
taneously work too. hicle such as a truck
1st operation: When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt yy Impact on the hood by falling stones
pretensioners rewind the seat belts immediately to restrain the yy The air bag warning lamp is on
occupants to their seats. yy Moderate or severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
2nd operation: After frontal collision, the load limiters releases body’s side structure. In that case, only the side air bags
the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to deploy.
belt force.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SIDE AIR BAG*
Side Air Bag Operation
Side air
bag
yy A moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
body’s side structure.
yy Vehicle rolls onto its side and causes a severe side impact.
yy Frontal collision while vehicle stops or is moving at a low
speed.
yy Rear end collision
Side air bag
yy Oblique impact (diagonal direction)
Warning
yy Frontal impact or rear impact
yy Do not apply any impact on the installation area of impact sensor.
The air bag might deploy. yy Rollover but without a severe impact
yy Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the side air bag yy The air bag warning lamp is on
may not deploy.
yy Do not bang the door. The side air bag might deploy.
yy Driver’s and passenger’s air bags are inflated simultaneously. At
the same time, the pretentioners for seatbelts are also activated. Air Bag Inspection
The side air bags, however, are inflated individually in case of The air bag system should be inspected 10 years from its
side impact.
installation regardless of its appearance and other condi-
tions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Airbag non-inflation conditions
Low Speed Collision Rear Collision
In collisions, the seat belts are sufficient to protect the vehicle Air bags may not inflate in rear collisions, because occupants
occupants and the air bags may not deploy. In some cases, are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case,
deploying air bags in low-speed collisions can cause a sec- the air bags do not provide proper protection.
ondary impact to the occupants (light abrasions, cuts, burns,
etc.), or loss of vehicle control.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Side Collision Angled Collision
Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collision, because In a slant impact or collision, the force delivered will be rela-
occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus front tively weaker than that of frontal collision. So, the air bags may
air bag deployment does not provide proper protection. not inflate.
However, side or curtain air bags(if equipped) may inflate de-
pending on the intensity, vehicle speed and angles of impact.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Riding Rollover
At the moment of an accident, drivers brake heavily with reflex. Air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag
In such heavy braking, the front portion of the vehicle is low- deployment would not provide proper protection to the occu-
ered by the force of the braking and the vehicle can go under pants.
a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not in- However, side air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
flate in this situation because impacts may not be delivered or over by a side impact collision, if the vehicle is equipped with
may be delivered with less intensity. side air bags and/or curtain air bags.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Collision with Narrow Object Secondary Injury Due To Air Bag Deployment
Burn
Abrasion/Bruise
Any injury by broken glasses

(e.g. sunglasses)
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such If the air bag control module detects the impact during an ac-
as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concen- cident, it transmits the signal to deploy the air bag. This signal
trated to one area and the full force of the impact is not deliv- triggers the explosion of the powder, which is included in the
ered to the sensors. air bag module, and the air bag deploys in a very short time to
protect the occupants. When the air bag inflates, there will be
heavy noise, glare and smoke. You could suffer secondary in-
juries caused by inflated air bag such as an abrasion, a bruise,
a burn or injury by broken glasses.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (I)
yy Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not at- yy Do not impact any air bag components including the steering
tempt to modify any air bag components including the steer- wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness by hand or tools.
ing wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness. You may get injured by sudden deployment.
yy Incorrect air bag inspection can be dangerous and cause yy The air bag contains explosive materials, so contact a
injuries. The air bag system must be disposed only by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. when trashing or replacing it.
yy Replace the steering wheel with only Ssangyong genuine yy The air bag components will be very hot after deployment. Do
parts. not touch them.
yy When the engine starts, the air bag warning lamp comes on yy Once the air bag system is triggered, the triggered air bag as-
for a system check. It goes out after 6 seconds when the sys- sembly should be removed from the vehicle and replaced with
tem is normal. If this warning lamp stays on then the system a new one.
may be defective. Have the air bag system checked immedi- yy Do not attach any objects such as a sticker, scent bottle, or
ately by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser- phone holder on the steering wheel pad and to the dash-
vice Center. board.
yy Never let small children or infants sit in the front passenger yy Do not lean against the window or door or do not stretch your
seat or be held in your arms. When the front air bags deploy, arm through the window frame. If the side air bag deploys,
they could be seriously injured or killed. you will be at great risk.
yy The child restraint system should be installed in the rear seat. yy Do not place any objects between the side air bags and occu-
yy The child restraint system must not be placed on the front pants. The object may prevent the air bag from deploying or
seat. The infant or child can severely be injured by an air bag can be shot at you.
inflation in case of an accident. yy Do not bang the door. It may cause malfunction in the curtain
yy The seat belt and air bags are the most effective when you sit air bag(side air bag) or the front air bag.
well back and upright in the seat. yy When mounting a child restraint system in the rear seat with
yy Do not move your seat too close to the steering wheel or the curtain air bag, adjust the child seat securely away from
dashboard. If you lower your head, the air bag can hit your the door as much as possible. Otherwise, there is a great risk
head during inflation and can cause severe injury or even of serious injuries or even death due to an impact of air bag
death. inflation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (II)
yy Hold only the outer rim of the steering so that the air bag can yy You could suffer secondary injuries caused by an inflated air
inflate without any hindrance. bag such as an abrasion, a burn or injuries by broken glass.
yy Do not hold and operate the steering wheel by crossing your Non-toxic gas will come out when the air bag is inflated.
arms. You could get seriously injured when the air bag de- yy If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant and
ploys. the seat belts are enough to protect occupants, the air bags
yy Do not place your face or chest near the steering wheel and do not deploy to prevent any secondary injuries such as cuts,
dashboard. Also, do not allow anyone to place their hands, abrasions, or burns.
leg or face on the dashboard. The air bag cannot work prop- yy Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat pro-
erly. tected by an airbag in front of it.
yy When the air bag inflates, it makes a loud noise and smoke. yy The driver’s and passenger’s air bags inflate during a se-
However, the smoke is a non-toxic nitrogen gas. vere frontal collision, and the side and curtain air bags in-
yy When the air bag deploys, non-toxic gas will come out. This flate during a severe side collision or rollover. Typically, the
gas may cause skin, eyes or nose irritation. Wash it out with air bags are not deployed during a rear collision. In most
cold and clean water and consult your doctor if irritation con- cases, the air bags does not inflate during a mild collision
tinues. or some pole collisions. The air bag cannot protect the
yy The windshield glass may be broken when the passenger’s passenger from the impact created in a rear end collision
air bag deploys. accident.
yy When mounting a child restraint system in the rear seat with yy Do not impact the area where an air bag or impact sensor
the curtain air bag, adjust the child seat securely away from is installed with a hammer or similar hard tool. You could
the door as much as possible. be severely injured by the unexpectedly deployed air bag.
Otherwise, there is a great risk of serious injuries or even The side impact sensor built in the front seat door detects
death due to an impact of air bag inflation. the pressure applied to the door. Therefore, applying im-
pact on the door (e.g. shopping cart, basket ball) can acti-
yy When any repairs are needed for the steering wheel, or
when an accident occurred without the air bag deployment, vate the side air bag. Always make sure that the engine is
have the air bag system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or turned OFF when checking the engine compartment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (III)
yy If the vehicle is submerged in water (carpet is wet, the yy If the driver apply brakes suddenly, a passenger without
water is up to the floor mat, etc.), never start the engine the seat belt fastened can be thrown out from the vehicle
or turn ON the ignition key. As soon as the currents are or too close to the air bag during inflation. The unre-
supplied to the electronic systems, the air bag may deploy strained passenger will be severely injured or killed by the
unexpectedly causing harm to the driver or passengers. inflation of the air bag.
Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Ssangyong Dealer yy No objects, such as cellular phone holder, cup holder,
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center for necessary cassette holder, air freshener bottle, stickers, should be
checks and services. placed/attached over or near on the instrument panel
yy Unauthorized modifications to the genuine parts or use of where the passenger’s air bag is installed. Do not install
after-market accessories, including side steps, other elec- any accessories on the windshield or extra wide mirror on
tronic devices, can adversely affect performance of the air the inside rearview mirror. Any such objects may cause
bag system. harm to the driver and passengers if the vehicle is in a col-
yy Tow the vehicle with the ignition switch in OFF or ACC po- lision severe enough to cause the airbag to deploy.
sition. If a vehicle with side and curtain air bags is tilted to
Secondary Injury Due To Air Bag Deployment
one side, the system can treat it as a rollover and activate
the air bag system. yy If the air bag control module detects the impact during an ac-
cident, it transmits the signal to deploy the air bag. This signal
yy When disassembling an air bag assembly, some integral
triggers the explosion of the powder, which is included in the
parts can be deformed or damaged. If this is the case, the
air bag module, and the air bag deploys in a very short time
damaged/deformed part may not be engaged normally to protect the occupants. When the air bag inflats, there will
and can move out of its position, causing serious malfunc- be heavy noise, glare and smoke. You could suffer second-
tion. ary injuries caused by inflated air bag such as an abrasion, a
yy The passenger’s air bag is larger and stronger than the bruise, a burn or injury by broken glasses.
driver’s air bag. Therefore, the passenger in the front pas-
senger seat should sit in the center of the seat with the
seat belt fastened. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or even death. The front passenger should move the
seat in the rearmost position and sit upright.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Heater/air conditioner system...........................9-2
3
Warnings and cautions.....................................9-4
Automatic heater / air conditioner.....................9-5 4
Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)...................... 9-11 5

Defogging and defrosting................................9-12 9
6
Replacing air conditioner filter........................9-13
AQS (air quality system).................................9-15 7
Ventilation, Heating,
8
Air Conditioning
9
and Air Purification
10
System 11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
HEATER/AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
1
Sun Sensor
2
10
Rear Air Conditioner Switch/Vent* Heater/AC Control Panel
11
12
13
14
9-2 Ventilation, Heating, Air Conditioning and Air Purification System

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Center Vent Front Side Vent
Flow Direction
Control Lever
Flow Volume
Control Dial
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving
the knob horizontally or vertically. the airflow direction control lever on the air outlet.
You can adjust the volume of airflow by moving the air-
flow volume control dial.
Rear Vents in Center Console (Upper) Rear Vents in Center Console (Lower)
Flow Direction
Control Lever
Flow Volume
Control Dial
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving The airglow is delivered through the vents when operat-
the airflow direction control lever on the air outlet. ing A/C and heater.
Ventilation, Heating, Air Conditioning and Air Purification System 9-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
Refrigerant Specification & Capacity
Item Caution
yy If your vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight, open all windows to
Specification R134a
extract heat before turning on the air conditioning (A/C).
Single A/C 720 ± 30g yy Operating the air conditioning (A/C) for a long time while the vehicle
Capacity is parked may cause the engine to overheat.
Dual A/C 1050 ± 30g yy When driving up a long hill for an extended period of time, turn on and
off the air conditioner every 3 to 5 minutes.
yy To prevent battery discharge, do not run the fan for an extended period
Warning of time when the engine is not running.
yy If you sleep while the air conditioner or heater is on, with all yy To maintain the system at its optimum state and to keep the lubrica-
windows closed, you may suffocate to death. tion of the air conditioner compressor and related components, run
yy Continued operation in the recirculation mode may cause the the air conditioner at low speed once a week even during the season
interior to become stuffy and windows to fog. Do not use the than summer.
recirculation mode for a long period of time. yy Do not stop the engine when the air conditioner is operating. It may pro-
yy If exhaust gas comes in, there is danger of carbon monoxide duce an unpleasant odor trapped in the duct. Turn the A/C off and wait
poisoning. Be sure to switch back to fresh air mode after pass- for a few minutes in the fresh air mode before stopping the engine.
ing through an area of smoke or fumes. yy If you start the engine with the air conditioner on, the engine may not
yy Never leave a child or a handicapped person alone in the ve- start easily and the engine idling can be unstable causing the vehicle
hicle with the air conditioner or heater on in hot or cold weather. to vibrate. Be sure to turn off electrical systems such as the fan.
The child or handicapped person can be in serious danger by yy When the air conditioner is not used in periods, odors will come out.
the heat and lack of oxygen. Run the air conditioner for 20 ~ 30 minutes with the windows opened
and you could remove the odors.
yy During the winter when the air conditioner is not used regularly, run the
air conditioner once or twice every month for 5 ~ 10 minutes.
yy If the air conditioner is not used regularly, the lubricant in the A/C
compressor will not circulate causing the A/C to malfunction. Be sure
to turn the air conditioner at low speed.
yy When sharply accelerating the vehicle while the air conditioner is
operating, you may hear a “click” sound from the magnetic clutch in
compressor. This is a normal operation to protect the air conditioner
system (by lowering the excessively high refrigerant pressure).

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC HEATER / AIR CONDITIONER
If the Auto button is pressed, the temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set tem-
perature. By operating the relevant switch of the automatic air conditioner, you may also manually control the air conditioner opera-
tion, air flow direction, fan speed and air source. To turn off the air conditioner and heater, press the “OFF” button. The desired room
temperate can be set up by turning the temperature control switch.
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
111 Temperature display (ambient
temperature, set temperature)
222 Defroster indicator
333 Air flow indicator
444 A/C ON indicator
555 Fan speed indicator
666 Ambient temperature display
777 Auto mode indicator
Air conditioner
switch Air source selection switch / AQS switch
Mode switch Defroster switch
AUTO switch AUTO switch
Temperature Fan speed control button

control button
OFF switch Ambient temperature
display button

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTO OPERATION MODE (AUTO indica- MANUAL OPERATION MODE (AUTO indi-
tor ON) cator OFF)
1. Press the AUTO button. When you use the fan speed control switch, air conditioner
2. AUTO indicator is displayed on the VFD. switch, recirculation switch or mode switch during the auto op-
eration mode, the “AUTO” indicator on the VFD goes out and
the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.
In manual mode, the “AUTO” indicator on display does not
come on and you have to adjust the airflow direction, airflow
AUTO switch volume, and temperature you want.
Note
AUTO indicator ON To resume the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
3. Set the desired room temperature with the temperature

control button.
4. The temperature of the passenger compartment is auto-
matically maintained according to the set temperature.
Temperature
control button
Set temperature

GETtheMANUALS.org
Auto Switch Fan Speed Control Button
When you press the Auto Switch, the “AUTO” indicator is To control the fan speed, press the switch as needed. When
displayed on the VFD and the temperature of the passenger pressing the switch in the Auto mode, the “AUTO” indicator
compartment is automatically maintained according to the set goes out and the system is changed to the manual mode.
temperature. When you press the Auto Switch during manual
operation mode, the system is changed to the auto operation Caution
mode. If the air conditioner switch is turned off, the air conditioner does
not work even when the fan is running. However, the air flows due
to fan operation.
Rear Air Conditioner

Switch*
To operate the rear air condi-
tioner, this switch should be
pressed before turning the rear
air flow control dial.
Temperature Control Button OFF Switch Ambient Temperature Display Button

To adjust the temperature and fan To stop the air conditioner / When you press this button, the “AMB” indicator
speed, press the switch as needed. heater operation, press this appears and the ambient temperature is dis-
switch. played on the VFD for about 5 seconds.
Caution
The actual ambient temperature may not be displayed
correctly due to engine heat or ground heat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air Conditioner Switch Air Source Selection Switch / AQS Switch
When you press this switch, the A /C indicator ( ) To switch over the air conditioner mode to a specific mode
comes on and the air conditioner starts to operate. (air recirculation, fresh air intake, AQS ON or OFF), use this
When you press the switch again, the air conditioner switch. For detailed information of switch functions and AQS
stops operation and the indicator goes out. system, refer to AQS system in this section.
Caution
To change the air source selection mode in auto operation mode,
press the air source selection switch after changing to the manual
operation mode.
Air conditioner
indicator
Air Source Selection and AQS Operation

AQS
AQS automatically adjusts from the fresh
air intake mode to the recirculation mode
when polluted air is detected by the AQS
sensor.
- AQS ON - AQS ON - AQS OFF - AQS OFF
- Fresh air intake - Air recirculation - Air recirculation - Fresh air intake

GETtheMANUALS.org
Defroster Switch
Use this switch for quick defrosting.
When you press this switch, the airflow direction will be
changed to the windshield and door glasses, the air condi-
tioner operates automatically, and outside air comes in.
If you press the switch again during its operation, the indicator
AUTO goes off. When the defrosting is complete, press the
switch to return to normal operations.
A/C ON indicator
Defroster indicator
Automatic Selection of the Fresh or Air Recircula-

tion Mode
1. When the defroster switch ( ) is pressed, outside air
automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed again,
the previous mode will be restored.
2. If the AQS system is operating (AQS indicator ON), AQS
automatically adjusts from the fresh air mode to the recircu-
lation mode when polluted air is detected by the AQS sen-
sor.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode Switch
When you press this switch each time, the air flow mode will be changed to another mode and displayed
as shown in the figure.
When you press this switch in the auto air conditioner operation (“AUTO” indicator ON), the system is
changed to the manual air conditioner mode (“AUTO” indicator OFF).
Vent Defroster and

Floor
Bi-level Floor

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR AIR CONDITIONER* (Dual A/C)
Operation of Rear Air Conditioner
Air Flow Direction

Control Lever (B)
Rear Air Flow

Control Dial (A)
Rear A/C switch
1. Press the rear air conditioner switch.

2. Turn the rear air flow control dial (A) to any position (1 ~ 3)
from “0” position.
3. Adjust the air flow direction with the flow direction control
lever (B).
Caution
yy If the rear air conditioner switch in front control panel is turned
off, the rear air conditioner does not work even when the rear air
flow control dial is operated. However, the air flows due to fan
operation.
yy The rear air conditioner is only for air cooling. It does not include
the air heating function.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEFOGGING AND DEFROSTING
Inside of the Windshield Automatic Heater & Air Conditioner
1. Press the defroster switch.
2. Adjust the fan speed with the fan speed control.
3. To quickly remove the moisture on the glass, set the fan
speed button at a high speed position.
4. To prevent fog from forming on the glass, setting the air
source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode is rec-
ommended.
Defroster switch
Outside of the Windshield
3. To quickly remove the frost on the glass, set the fan speed
button at a high speed position.
4. Set the temperature control switch to a hot position.
Warning Caution
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the windshield yy An extended air conditioner operation in the bi-level mode or
and windows. The fog will block your view through all windows and defrost mode may cause the outside glass to fog due to the high
can create a dangerous situation. To prevent any fog on the glass, temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the
setting the air source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode vehicle. In this case, change the air flow to the fresh air intake
is recommended. mode and set the fan at a low speed.
yy Especially in winter or summer, to avoid glass fogging, remove any
obstacles such as snow or leaves on the air inlets.
Note
When you press this defrost switch, the air conditioner turns on au-
tomatically and the system selects the fresh air intake mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REPLACING AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
Replace the Air Conditioner Filter When
yy Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long unused period.
yy Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.
Caution Caution
yy Do not apply excessive force to the holders when removing the yy Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10,000 km of driving.
glove box. It may cause a deformation of holders and results in a However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions, such
loose installation. as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air conditioner or
yy Replace both air conditioner filters at the same time while paying heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened.
attention to the installing direction. yy When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or heat-
ing capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors.
Replacement of A/C Filter
1. Open the glove box. 2. Remove the glove box from the dash 3. Unscrew the bolts and remove the
panel by moving the glove box hold- air conditioner filter cover.
ers at both sides in the direction of
the arrow.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4. Pull out the first filter. 5. Lift up the second filter and remove it. 6. Install new filter while the protruding
section (arrow) of the filter faces up-
ward.
A/C filter
2 filters as a set

GETtheMANUALS.org
AQS (AIR QUALITY SYSTEM)
AQS System?
AQS automatically adjusts from the fresh air intake mode to
the recirculation mode when polluted air is detected by the
AQS sensor. The air source selection returns back to the
fresh air intake mode if a certain time passes or the polluted
air has disappeared.
In Auto Mode (AUTO indicator ON)

Whenever you press the AQS switch, the AQS switches over
Air Source Selection Switch/ between ON and OFF. When the AQS is turned on, the air
AQS Sensor source selection is changed to air recirculation mode automati-
AQS Switch
cally. It cannot be changed to the fresh air intake mode manu-
ally.
In Manual Mode (AUTO indicator OFF)

Whenever you press the Air source selection switch / AQS
switch, the system is switched to fresh air intake, air recircula-
tion, and AQS ON mode in order.
Indications of AQS Switch

Caution
To change the air source selection mode in
auto operation mode, press the air source
selection switch after changing to the manual
operation mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S torage compartments and convenient mart audio*.................................................10-21
S
devices............................................................10-2 3
SD card slot, terminal for connecting external
A
djustable steering wheel and horn................10-4 device and port*............................................10-22
4
Inside rearview mirror.....................................10-5 Bluetooth hands-free system*......................10-24
F
ront storage compartment/cigarette lighter..10-6 5
C
enter console................................................10-7
P
ower outlet....................................................10-8 6
G
love box/courtesy lamp................................10-9 10 7
R
ear cup holder/jack storage/DVD changer*/
navigation unit* storage................................10-10
8
S
eatback pocket/map pocket....................... 10-11
S
un visors.....................................................10-12
Convenience 9
F
ront room lamps/sunglasses storage.........10-13
C
enter and rear room lamps/assist grip.......10-14
Devices 10
S
torage box in luggage compartment/
luggage net...................................................10-15 11
R
ear heated glass/removable ashtray..........10-17
12
oof rack*.....................................................10-18
R
D
igital clock...................................................10-19 13
udio system*...............................................10-20
A
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS AND CONVENIENT DEVICES
1
Sunglasses box
3 Driver’s sun visor Passenger’s sun visor
4 Inside rearview mirror

(ECM*)
5
6 Power outlet
Digital clock
7
8
Horn
9
10
Glove box
11
Cigarette lighter
12
Power outlet
13 Center console
Passenger’s door map pocket
Driver’s door map pocket
14
10-2 Convenience Devices

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy Driving with any storage box open can cause injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop. Keep all the storage boxes closed while driving.
yy Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire.
yy When vehicle is in motion, liquid may spill out. Spilled liquid can damage the vehicle and cause burns if it is hot. Do not use the cup holder while
vehicle is in motion. Therefore, do not put any cup with hot liquid into the cup holder.
Seatback Seatback
pocket pocket
Center console
Rear cup holder
Rear power
outlet
Convenience Devices 10-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Adjustable steering wheel and horn
Adjustable Steering Wheel

Horn
Press the horn pad on the steering wheel
to sound the horn.
Caution
The sound of the horn can startle pedestri-
ans. Use only when needed.
To adjust the steering wheel, push the

control lever to right, adjust the wheel up
or down to the proper position, release the
control lever to lock the wheel in place.
After adjustment, make sure that the steer-
ing wheel is securely fixed.
Warning
yy Do not adjust the steering wheel while your vehicle is moving. Caution
Otherwise, control of your vehicle can be lost. yy If the temperature of the power steering fluid is low, sometimes
yy Before driving, make sure that the steering wheel is locked. the power steering temporarily delays the vehicle activation.
yy Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving distracts Therefore, start off the vehicle after idling for up to 3 minutes in
a driver which could cause an accident. the winter months (less than -10°C).
yy Avoid turning the steering wheel all the way in either direction yy Take care not to damage the grip surface of the steering wheel
for more than 10 seconds, with the engine started. This may with a sharp object. The built-in heater could be damaged.
cause overload the power steering system and damage it. yy When cleaning the steering wheel, do not use organic solvents
such as thinner, alcohol or gasoline. These solvents can damage
the heater and the surface of the steering wheel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down or side ways
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR to obtain the best rear view.
ECM (Anti-glare auto adjustment function)* Manual Type Inside Rearview Mirror
Anti-glare auto
adjustment switch
Brightness
Indicator detecting
sensor
The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be automati- Manual Day/Night Adjustment
cally adjusted by the light intensity from a vehicle behind you by You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or
pressing the anti-glare auto adjustment switch. While pressing the pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to
switch, its corresponding indicator comes on. Pressing the switch other vehicles behind you.
once more turns off the indicator and deactivates the function.
Caution Caution
Under the following conditions, automatic anti-glare function may not oper- When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust
ate properly. the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing or pulling
yy When the rear vehicle’s headlamp is not beamed directly to the inside it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.
rearview mirror’s sensor.
yy When the rear window has a dark tinted glass. Warning
yy When the gear selector lever is in the R position, automatic anti-glare
function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview. For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.
yy For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
Warning
yy The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not allow it
to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in your eyes, flush
with water and see your doctor.
yy For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front storage compartment/CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Front storage compartment CIGARETTE LIGHTER
There is a storage compartment at the bottom of the front cen- To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in all the way down. When
ter panel which can be used to store any small items. it becomes heated, it automatically pops out and is ready for use.
Caution Warning
The item may fall down or it may obstruct the movement of the selec- yy When the cigarette lighter does not automatically pop up after 30 seconds,
tor lever or gearshift lever so caution should be exercised. there is a danger of overheating. If this happens, pull it out and have the problem
corrected by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
yy Inserting your finger into the cigarette lighter outlet can cause burns or
electric shock.
yy The barrel of the cigarette lighter becomes very hot when it is fully charged.
When touched by or dropped on bare skin, this may cause burns. Dropping
the hot lighter can cause damage to a car seat or even start a fire.
yy Use only the genuine cigarette light in the cigarette lighter shock. To prevent
from electrical damage and fire, never use any other electric device such
as shaver, vacuum cleaner or coffee pot.
Caution
Do not tap the cigarette lighter strongly to clean up. That may damage the coil.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER CONSOLE
CUP HOLDER STORAGE BIN
To use the cup holder, push the outer surface. Push the button and lift the cover lid to open in order to store
Push it in when not in use. small items.
Caution Caution
yy When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, liquid may spill. Do not store any flammables including disposable lighters in the
yy Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode and
holder. cause a fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER OUTLET
Front Power Outlet Rear Power Outlet
upper
lower
Location: One power outlet on the center of instrument panel The rear power outlet is installed at the right side of storage
One power outlet at the left side of passenger foot- box in luggage compartment.
well
Warning
This power outlet supplies power when the ignition key is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position. yy For the extra electrical devices, you must use this power outlet. If
you alter the vehicle’s wire lines and leave the wires to hang freely,
it could cause an accident like a fire.
Caution
yy Abide by the nominal capacity of 12V-120W.
Keep the power outlet cover closed if not in use. Electrical defects
yy Do not put a finger into the outlet. It may cause an electric
can occur if objects other than power outlet plugs or water gets in.
shock.
This will prevent the socket from becoming clogged or short circuit-
ing. yy The battery can be discharged if the power outlet is used exces-
sively when the engine is not running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOVE BOX/COURTESY LAMP
Glove Box COURTESY LAMP
Courtesy lamp
Pull up on the lever to open the glove box. Items can be stored. The courtesy lamp comes on when opening the door and goes
When the tail lights are on and the glove box is open, the glove out when closing it.
box inner lamp comes on.
Caution
yy Driving with the glove box lid open can cause injury in case of
an accident or a sudden stop. Keep glove box lid closed when
driving.
yy Do not store any flammables including a disposable lighter in
the console box or glove box. In hot weather, it may explode and
cause a fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR CUP HOLDER/Jack storage/dvd changer*/navigation unit* storage
dvd changer*/navigation unit*
REAR CUP HOLDER storage
DVD changer/
Navigation unit
storage
The rear cup holder is located at the rear side of center con- The jack storage and the navigation unit/DVD changer storage
sole. are located at the left side of luggage compartment.
To use it, pull the cover down while pulling down the lever.
Close it when not in use.
Caution
yy When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, the liquid may spill.
yy Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup
holder.
yy Do not place any can or bottle under the direct sunlight or in the
hot vehicle as it may burst.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SEATBACK POCKET/MAP POCKET
SEATBACK POCKET MAP POCKET
Map pocket
Storage pocket is installed at the rear side of front seat. Use it The map pocket is located on each front door. Maps, maga-
to put personal belongings. zines, newspapers, and other items can be stored.
Caution
yy A cold/hot beverage placed in the map pocket may be thrown out
causing a burn or an accident while driving.
yy Be careful with the leftover beverage not to be spilled.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS Ticket holder/VANITY MIRROR AND LAMP
Ticket holder
(only for driver’s)
Ticket holder
Vanity Lamp
mirror
Sun visors are installed on the roof trim above the driver’s and The driver’s sun visor has a ticket holder on its back side.
passenger’s seat. Swing the sun visor down or to the left (right), Swing the sun visor down and open the cover to reveal the
if necessary. mirror.
The vanity mirror comes on only when opening the cover.
Caution
Do not operate the sun visor, vanity mirror or ticket holder while driv-
ing. It may cause an unexpected accident.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT ROOM LAMPS/SUNGLASSES STORAGE
Front Room Lamp SUNGLASSES STORAGE
Room lamp switch

Room lamp switch (passenger side)
(driver side)
When the switch is pressed, the appropriate front room lamp is Sunglasses storage is located in the overhead console.
turned on. When pressed it again, the lamp goes out. Press the top side of the cover to open it. To close it, push the
cover up until you hear the “click” sound.
Caution
Do not turn on the room lamp for a long period of time with the engine Caution
stopped. Otherwise, the battery may be discharged.
yy If glasses falls down, it may be damaged. Fix it firmly.
yy The unclosed console can block your rearview. Also, the console
can injure you in an accident or a sudden stop. Therefore, close
the console before driving off your vehicle.
yy Do not store any item that can be deformed in a hot tempera-
ture.
yy Do not store any heavy items inside the console. When it falls out
of the console, occupants may get injuries.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER AND REAR ROOM LAMPS/ASSIST GRIP
CENTER AND REAR ROOM LAMPS ASSIST GRIP
ON
Door
OFF
Coat hook
The room lamps are operated by room lamp switch. Your vehicle has assist grips above the front passenger’s door
If the center room lamp switch is at “Door” position; the center and the rear doors. The coat hook is installed only on the grip
room lamp is turned on when opening a rear door. It goes out above rear left door.
when closing the door.
If the rear room lamp switch is at “Door” position; the rear
room lamp is turned on when opening the tailgate. It goes out
when closing the tailgate.

GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE BOX IN LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT/LUGGAGE NET
STORAGE BOX IN LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT Luggage Net
To use the storage box in luggage compartment, release the Any possibly moving objects during driving can be stored in
lock on the cover and open the cover. the luggage net.
Hook the net up to the luggage compartment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Luggage Cover (Except for 7-Seater)
Note
Store the luggage cover separately to use the luggage room of the
vehicle wide.
Caution
Don’t put anything on the luggage cover.
When Unrolling the Luggage Cover

Pull the handle of the luggage cover at the center, and fix it into
the grooves at left and right sides of quarter trim inner panels.
When Rolling the Luggage Cover

Take the luggage cover out of the grooves by pulling the han-
dle and let go the grasp slightly to roll the luggage cover.
When Removing the Luggage Cover

After tearing off the edge of luggage cover at the back of rear
seat, remove the luggage cover assembly by raising up it from
the fixing holder’s grooves.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR HEATED GLASS/reMOVABLE ASHTRAY
REAR DEFOGGER REMovable Ashtray
Heating grids
The heating grids are installed on the tailgate glass. This portable ashtray can be easily placed on where you want.
Be careful not to damage the heating grids while cleaning the Tab the ash off your cigarette.
inside of the window.
Warning
Caution To avoid danger of fire, do not accumulate inflammable materials,
Do not coat the tailgate window and side windows with any after- such as garbage or cigarette butts, in your ashtray and make sure
market products, especially a metal anti-glare film or a two-tone film. the cigarettes are full extinguished.
When it is used on the windows, the sensitivity of the heating grids
can be deteriorated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ROOF RACK*
Roof rack
Warning
or luggage.
yy Roof rack: 45 kg (100 lbs.) evenly distributed
yy When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear
securely fastened.
your vehicle.
Caution
When loading, stowage on the vehicle should not damage the When loading the cargo on the roof rack over the vehicle equipped
vehicle as well as not interfere with the sunroof operation (for with the sun roof, be careful not to interrupt the sun roof operation.
Note

GETtheMANUALS.org
DIGITAL CLOCK
yy Press the “S” button to adjust the time to the nearest hour.
yy When the time is between 00 and 29 minutes of a certain
hour, the minute indicator will show “00” if this button is
pressed.
hour, the minute indicator will show “00” and one hour will
be added to the hour indicator if this button is pressed.
Note
When disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse, the clock
should be adjusted again.
H (HOUR) : Hour Adjusting Button

M (MINUTE) : Minute Adjusting Button
S (SET) : Setting Button

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUDIO SYSTEM*
System Configuration USB Port and HDMI terminal
Steering wheel audio switch
You can use the audio system, HDMI terminal (AUX jack) and The USB port and HDMI terminal (AUX jack) are provided.
USB port when you want to hear the musics. Use them when you want to hear the music in USB memory
stick or an external audio device through with the speakers in
Note your vehicle.
For detailed information for the audio system, refer to the audio
For detailed information, refer to the audio operation manual
operation manual provided with this manual.
provided with this manual.
Antenna
Caution
Some USB memory sticks and external audio devices may not work
in this audio system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SMART AUDIO*
Cautions for using smart audio*
yy It is available on devices which support HDMI. (Some

Smart audio* devices may not be supported)
yy Some applications may not be supported.
yy The connection of HDMI (such as gender or cable)
Audio remote control may cause image quality degradation.
switches on steering yy When the HDMI cable or gender is disconnected from
wheel the system, noise may occur on the screen.
HDMI terminal yy For some devices, you should supply power to the
and USB port HDMI gender using a USB cable when connecting
HDMI.
yy For some devices, voice output may be limited when
connecting HDMI while Bluetooth is enabled.
Supporting USB / HDMI / Camera, this audio system can be
controlled by using the touch panel and steering switches. yy For safety reasons, only the voice is played without
video during driving. (video played again when vehicle
Note stops)
This owner’s manual describes all audio models. Check the audio
model fitted to the vehicle you have purchased and for detailed
information regarding audio system, refer to the operating manual
provided separately.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SD CARD SLOT, TERMINAL FOR CONNECTING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PORT*
Navigation SD card* HDMI Terminal and USB Port*
(With Navigation System)
SD card
USB Port HDMI Terminal
The slot for inserting the navigation SD card is under the touch You can play the music file stored on the memory stick using a
panel navigation monitor. For more information on this device, USB port or mirroring between the HDMI terminal and applica-
please refer to the operating manual provided separately. tions in the smart devices.
For more information, refer to the operating manual provided
Caution separately.
yy Make sure that the engine is turned off when inserting or remov-
ing the SD Card. Caution
yy If the SD Card is removed while the navigation is in operation, the Some USB memories and smart devices may not be supported.
unit may become defective.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN USING AUDIO SYSTEM
yy An illegal copy of a CD may cause a malfunction in the

Usable Discs
audio head unit and abnormal replay. Use only original
CD. yy CD + MP3 player : Audio CD/MP3 CD
yy Incompatible discs may cause a malfunction in the sys- yy CD player : Audio CD
tem. Use only compatible discs.
yy Do not use the audio/video/navigation system for a long Please refer to the audio manual to check disk compatibility.
time when the engine is not running. The battery could
be discharged.
yy Be careful not to spill water on the unit or to let any for-
eign objects into the system.
yy Do not apply any impacts and pressure to the monitor
screen. The LCD panel or touch screen panel can be
damaged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE SYSTEM*
The Bluetooth hands-free system allows you to make calls
through the vehicle microphone and speakers by connecting
the audio system of the vehicle to your mobile phone. Bluetooth hands-free call switch
Note ► To make a call

For detailed information on how to make a call with Bluetooth hands- Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe
free system and how to use the system, refer to the separate booklet area. Pick up your mobile phone and dial
(Audio Operating Manual). the number you wish to call. After that
press the Bluetooth hands-free call switch
briefly.
►►To accept a call

Bluetooth hands-free Press the Bluetooth hands-free call switch briefly to accept a
microphone call.
Bluetooth hands-free ►►To end a call
call switch
Press and hold the Bluetooth hands-free call switch to end a
call.
►►To redial
Press and hold the Bluetooth hands-free call switch with no
call currently in progress.
Bluetooth hands-free Note
call speaker
You can redial the last call without pressing the numbers on the key-
pad by pressing and holding the Bluetooth hands-free call switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Cautions for using Bluetooth
yy Talking on a mobile phone while driving is banned in many coun- hands-free system
tries. Always observe applicable local laws wherever you drive.
yy Using a mobile phone while driving is extremely dangerous even if
you are using the Bluetooth hands-free system. Make sure to park
yy The hands-free system may not fully support a cer-
or stop the vehicle before using/programming your mobile phone/ tain mobile phone.
Bluetooth hands-free system. yy For some mobile phone models, you should press
the Bluetooth hands-free call switch once or twice
to redial the last call you made. Or you may need to
Caution press CALL/END buttons on the mobile phone, not
yy Pressing the Bluetooth hands-free call switch shortly does not the Bluetooth hands-free call switch to make or end
end a call. a call. Therefore, you should be familiar with your
yy Be careful not to press and hold the Bluetooth hands-free call mobile phone.
switch after the other caller has ended the call. If you press and yy For some mobile phone models, you may need to
hold this switch in this situation, the number of the last call is press the CALL button on the mobile phone if you
redialed.
cannot make or answer a call by pressing the Blu-
yy Not all functions of the Bluetooth hands-free system may be avail-
etooth hands-free call switch.
able or work the same depending on your mobile phone.
yy You may experience howling depending on mobile
phone models.
yy In this case, try to adjust the call volume.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S
tarting the engine with jumper cables........... 11-2
3
C
autions when a tire is flat.............................. 11-4
W
arning triangle*............................................. 11-5 4
O
VM tools....................................................... 11-6
5
R
emoving the spare tire.................................. 11-7
C
hanging a spare tire...................................... 11-8 11
6
C
autions when changing the tire.................. 11-13
7
In Case of
H
ow to use service kit* (emergency puncture
repair kit)....................................................... 11-14
8
W
hen the engine is overheating................... 11-20
W
ater separator warning light and engine
Emergency
9
check warning light....................................... 11-22
S
hift lever lock release and safety mode reset 10
...................................................................... 11-23
T
owing a disabled vehicle............................. 11-24 11
E
mergency towing........................................ 11-25
Trailer towing................................................. 11-27 12
A
ccident or fire.............................................. 11-32
13
E
mission reduction device............................ 11-33
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
STARTING THE ENGINE WITH JUMPER CABLES
1 If the batter is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper cables to start the engine.
3 4
5 Connecting order:
(1) The + terminal of the discharged battery
6 (2) The + terminal of the booster battery
(3) The - terminal of the booster battery
7 (4) Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the body of
the discharged vehicle, such as the engine block or a front
Discharged battery
8 towing hook.
9 3 2
10
1. Prepare a set of jumper cables.
Booster battery
11 2. Place another vehicle that has the same 12 V of power near
to the discharged vehicle.
The positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal.
12 3. Switch off all electrical accessories for the discharged ve-
The minus (–) cable to the minus (–) terminal. hicle.
13 4. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission to the
P position (automatic transmission) or neutral (N) position
(manual transmission).
14
5. Connect the jumper cables.
11-2 In Case of Emergency

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy Connecting the jumper cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery
could result in arcing and possibly a battery explosion. Serious personal injury
or vehicle damage can result.
yy Make sure that the jumper leads are securely connected. Otherwise, an abrupt
disconnection due to vibration during engine starting may cause an electrical
short resulting in severe damage to electric components.
yy A battery generates the gas which is flammable and explosive. This gas could
be exploded due to the spark when connecting the jump cables. Make sure that
the booster battery has the same voltage rate with the discharged battery.
yy While connecting the jumper cables, make sure that the negative (–) and
positive (+) cables never touch each other. Otherwise sparks might cause an
explosion of the battery.
yy Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact
eyes, skin, or painted surfaces. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and contact your doctor.
yy While being transported in an ambulance, gently wipe out the contacted area
with a water-wet cloth or sponge.
Caution
yy When starting your vehicle with jumper cable, turn off the engine of the boost
vehicle and connect the jumper cables
yy Ensure that the jumper cables are clear away fan blades before starting the
engine.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, and let
the engine idle for a few minutes.
7. Attempt to start the engine with the discharged battery.
8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the jumper cables in the
reverse sequence of connection.
In Case of Emergency 11-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN A TIRE IS FLAT
If one of the tires becomes flat while driving, grab the steering
wheel firmly and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Gradually slow down and park your vehicle in a safe place.
Replace the flat tire with a spare tire. For the process, refer to
sections about the spare tire.
Warning Warning
yy Don’t panic! Improper operation of the steering wheel or abrupt yy Stop the engine and set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle
braking may cause a consequential accident on the road. Stop (daytime: 100 m, night time: 200 m - on express way).
your vehicle in a safe place and turn on the hazard flasher and yy Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to the
then apply the parking brake. wheel being changed.
yy Do not drive with a flat tire for even a very short distance. In addi- yy Have all passengers get out of vehicle and move in a safe place.
tion to damages to the rim of the tire, abnormal driving conditions
can cause a very danger situation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING TRIANGLE*
When the vehicle has a serious problem during

driving
1. Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traf-
fic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind your
vehicle (days: 100 m, nights: 200 m) to warn other vehicles.
2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away
from the traffic. When your safety is secured, contact your
Ssangyong dealer for your emergency service.
When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe

Caution
place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle.
yy Set up a warning triangle on a place where it can be very visible
(Daytime: 100 meters behind, Night: 200 meters behind) while paying attention to traffic conditions.
yy On a highway or vehicle-designated road, evacuate yourself to a
safe place after pulling over your vehicle.
yy At night time, set up a blinking emergency triangle behind your
vehicle (over 200 meters) to warn others.
yy On a curved road, provide a emergency hand signal with a warning
light to others at the point over 200 meters behind your vehicle.
yy If your vehicle is operational or the problem is fixed, resume driving
paying extra attention to traffic conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OVM TOOLS
OVM tools box
1. Jack 4. Screwdriver (+ and -)

2. Jack connection 5. Spanner
3. Wheel nut wrench
Caution
You can find a jack, jack extension, wheel nut wrench, and
other OVM tools under the second row seat behind driver’s yy Put out the OVM tools after fixing the upright seat with a strap. Do
not put out the tools without fixing the seat using a strap. In that
seat.
case, the second row seat may fall and cause injury.
yy After using the OVM tools, return them to the original locations.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
Warning
The emergency spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
use it for normal driving. After installing the spare tire on a wheel,
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or a tire-
specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
Caution
yy When reinstalling the spare tire to the carrier, be sure to securely
lock it to the carrier holder.
yy While your vehicle is being raised up with the jack, avoid any im-
pact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured.
1. Insert the connection rod in the hole located in the upper

center of the bumper after opening the tailgate, and then
connect the wheel nut wrench to it.
2. Turn the wheel nut wrench counter-clockwise to lower the
spare tire.
3. When the spare tire is on the ground, remove the tire by
prying off the lift plate.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHANGING A SPARE TiRE
2. Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns by turning them

counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
Warning
yy Do not remove the nuts yet from the wheel. If they are removed, the
wheel could slip off from the vehicle. Then, the body of the vehicle
will fall down on you and you may get seriously injured.
yy Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns.
yy The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.
yy Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to the
wheel being changed.
Caution
When reinstalling the wheel cap, be sure to completely fit it into its
location.
1. Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed.
Warning
The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Replacing a Front Tire When Replacing a Rear Tire
Front jack up point Rear jack up point
3. Place the jack directly under the jack-up points so that the
top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Warning
yy The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible.
yy It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and
that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.
yy No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
yy Jack working load limit 1,300 kg.
<Jack up points>

GETtheMANUALS.org
4. Combine the jack, jack extension and the wheel nut wrench 6. Take the wheel off and place the wheel under the vehicle
as shown in the figure. Raise up the vehicle by rotating the body. This helps to minimize any danger if the jack slip off
combined wrench clockwise until the tire is off from the position.
ground about 3 cm.
5. Remove the wheel nuts by hands while the vehicle is sta-
tionary. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
Warning
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle until the jack is in the proper posi-
tion, and secure both to the vehicle and the ground. It may cause a
personal injury or vehicle damage.

GETtheMANUALS.org
8. Lower the vehicle by rotating the combined wrench coun-
Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with
ter-clockwise until the tire touches the ground. Remove
the sequence as shown in the figure.
the jack.
Warning
While the jack is supporting your vehicle, do not use too much force
to tighten the nuts. Otherwise, the vehicle may slip off and you may
get injured.
9. Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with the sequence

10. When done with mounting the spare tire, place the flat tire
in the luggage room. Store the jack and other emergency
tools in their storages.
7. Then mount the spare tire and temporarily tighten the wheel
nuts until the spare tire wheel is no longer loose.
Warning
By tightening up the spare tire until it is not loose any more, you can
avoid any tilting of the tire on the wheel hub when the tire touches
the ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy With the emergency spare tire, do not drive any faster than
60 km/h.
yy The temporary spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or a
tire-specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
yy Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off or any malfunctioning in the steering and
braking system.
yy This could lead to an accident. Be sure to tighten the wheel nuts
as specified. If the wheel comes off due to a loose wheel nut, you
may have a fatal accident.
yy Using different tires could cause you to lose control while driving.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires from the same manu-
facturer on all wheels.
If over tightened, the wheel nuts could be damaged. Do not
overtighten the wheel nuts by pressing the wheel nut wrench
Caution
by foot or using an assist pipe.
After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 1000 km, re-
tighten the wheel nuts.
- Wheel nut tightening torque: 120 ~ 140 Nm

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN CHANGING THE TiRE
 Before changing the tire yy Securely fix the tire in its carrier. Check to see if the spare
yy Turn on hazard flashers and move off the road to a safe tire is securely locked into the carrier without any loose-
place away from traffic. Park on a firm and level ground. ness. Otherwise, it may make some abnormal noises or
fall out from the carrier on the road while the vehicle is
yy Set up the jack at the specified position. Never get under
moving. This may cause an accident or hit a pedestrian.
the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. While the ve-
hicle is on the jack, never start or run the engine or push yy If this happens, the fallen tire can be a great danger to
the vehicle. other vehicles or people. Check the tightness of the wheel
nuts and tire pressure before driving.
yy Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay in a
place away from traffic. yy The spare tire is designed as an emergency spare only.
Do not exceed 60 km/h speed when the spare tire is in-
 During changing the tire stalled on the vehicle.
yy Do not completely tighten the wheel nuts at a time. Tighten yy Repair or change the flat tire. Stow the emergency tire in
the wheel nuts in the diagonal sequence in 2 or 3 steps. its location properly.
yy Never apply oil or grease to either wheel studs or nuts as yy Make sure to check the tightness and inflation pressure of
it will cause them to overtighten. tires before driving.
yy In the vehicle equipped with TPMS, the TPMS warning
 After changing the tire lamp comes on and TPMS does not work when installing
the emergency tire.
yy Check, repair, and retighten the replaced tire at the near-
est Ssangyong Authorized Service Center or a qualified
tire shop after an emergency change.
Warning
yy Make sure that tighten the wheel nuts again after driving of about 1,000 km when the tires have been replaced.
yy Drive the vehicle at the speed of 60km/h or less (maximum speed 80 km; maximum distance 200 km) when the vehicle is driven with the spare tire.
yy Drive the vehicle in 2H mode when the spare tire is fitted. When driving in 4H mode, it will damage the drive system.
yy Be sure to use the same size and type tires of the same manufacturer on all wheels so that the vehicle characteristics can be maintained safely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO USE SERVICE KIT* (EMERGENCY PUNCTURE REPAIR KIT)
The service kit is located in the storage box in the luggage Note
compartment. While the vehicle with the service kit has no spare tire, the vehicle
with the spare tire has no service kit.
Warning
Working principle of service kit yy Use the service kit only when the hole size on the tread is about 6
If you get a flat tire, you can put the sealant into the tire using a mm or less. If the tire sidewall is torn or the hole size is too large, do
compressor. After short driving, the sealant will be applied on not use the service kit. Tow your vehicle or take it to a Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center and have the vehicle serviced.
the inner surface of the tire evenly and the puncture is sealed
yy If the tire pressure is not increased even when the air is injected
by the sealant so that you can drive the vehicle for a short dis-
using the service kit, stop immediately. And tow your vehicle or
tance. take it to a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have the
vehicle serviced.
yy When driving with the repaired tire using the service kit, make sure
that the vehicle speed does not exceed 80 km/h.
yy If you feel or hear any vibrations, unstable steering, or noises,
stop the vehicle immediately. And tow your vehicle or take it to
a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have the vehicle
serviced.
Evenly applied sealant yy The service kit is for emergency use only. The temporarily sealed
during driving tire must be repaired or replaced as soon as possible. (maximum
driving distance: 100 km)

GETtheMANUALS.org
INFLATING A TIRE
When the tire pressure is low, you can add 3. Securely connect the air hose to the air 5. Connect the power cable for the service
the air to your tire using the service kit ac- valve on the tire. kit to the battery positive and negative
cording to the specified air pressure. 4. Unscrew the protective cap from the air terminals.
1. Take out the service kit from the storage hose and connect the air hose to the 6. Start the engine.
box in the luggage compartment. tire’s air valve.
Warning
2. Take out the air valve and power cable
Caution To avoid a danger of suffocation due to the
from the service kit unit.
The power switch of the service kit should exhaust gas, start the engine in the well
be in OFF position. ventilated area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Repair kit
power switch
7. Start the compressor by pressing the 10. Disconnect the air hose from the
power switch of the service kit. tire.
8. Wait until the pressure reaches to the 11. Install the air valve cap of the tire.
standard pressure (32 psi, 2.2 bar) 12. Turn off the engine and place the ser-
while checking the pressure gauge of vice kit back to the original position.
the service kit.
9. Once the standard pressure is reached,
switch off the service kit.
Caution
To prevent overheating, do not operate the
compressor for more than 10 minutes.
Note
To measure the tire pressure, switch off the
service kit and read the pressure gauge.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REPAIRING FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, repair the tire using a 3. Take out the air valve and power cable 4. Connect the compressor hose ( ) of
service kit as per the following procedures: from the service kit unit. the service kit to the sealant bottle.
1. Take out the service kit from the storage
box in the luggage compartment.
2. Remove the speed limit sticker from
the service kit and affix it on the steer-
ing wheel. Side wall part
⏷⪿ᠧ#⨟#⃋
Caution
yy This is intended to inform the driver of
that the current tire is repaired with a ser-
vice kit and speed limit is required. Never
drive at a speed of 80 km/h or higher. Warning
yy Check the expiration date for the sealant. Check the sidewall of tire prior to repairing
The expiration date is imprinted on the it with the service kit. If it is torn, cracked or
top of the sealant. If the expiration date damaged, contact the Ssangyong Autho-
has passed, discard the sealant and 5. Fix the sealant bottle to the compressor
rized Service Operation for any necessary
prepare for new one, just in case. action without using the service kit.
body securely.
yy Always read the precautions on the con-
tainer before using it.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Repair kit
power switch
6. Remove the air valve cap from the 8. Connect the power cable for the service 10. Start the compressor by pressing the
flat tire. kit to the battery positive and negative power switch of the service kit.
7. Securely connect the air hose from terminals.
the service kit to the air valve on the 9. Start the engine.
flat tire.
Warning

GETtheMANUALS.org
13. Disconnect the connecting hose from
Warning
the repaired tire.
yy Use the service kit only when the hole
14. Install the air valve cap of the tire. size on the tread is about 6 mm or less.
15. Turn off the ignition, remove the If the tire’s sidewall or shoulder is torn or
sealant bottle and air hose from the the hole size is too large, do not use the
service kit and place the service kit to service kit. Tow your vehicle or take it to
the original position. a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center
and have the vehicle serviced.
Caution yy If the tire pressure is not increased
even when the air is injected using the
yy Be careful not to touch the sealant with service kit, stop immediately. And tow
your skin when removing the sealant bot- your vehicle or take it to a Ssangyong
tle. In the case of contact with skin, wash Authorized Service Center and have the
away the sealant with soapy water.
11. Inflate the tire to 32 psi (2.2 bar) while vehicle serviced.
yy Dispose of the used sealant bottle.
checking the pressure gauge of the yy You should drive with the speed below
service kit. yy Check the expiration date for the sealant 80 km/h if using a repaired tire with the
before use. service kit. The maximum distance you
12. Once the standard pressure is yy If the expiration date has passed, discard could drive with the repaired tire may
reached, switch off the service kit. the sealant and prepare for new one. differ depending on the tire condition,
yy The material of the sealant may vary in however do not exceed 100 km.
Caution different products. Using an unapproved yy If steering is unstable or wobbling/noise
To prevent overheating, do not operate the sealant, not our genuine one could result is felt, stop driving and obtain help from
compressor for more than 10 minutes. If in damage of TPMS system sensor. SsangYong service center.
the tire pressure does not increase 26 psi yy The service kit is for emergency use
or higher within 10 minutes, the tire is too 16. Immediately drive the vehicle for only. Bring your vehicle to authorized
damaged to repair using a service kit. about 3 km so that the sealant is ap- SsangYong dealer as soon as possible
plied on the inner surface of the tire to replace the tire treated by sealant with
evenly. new one and check TPMS.
Warning
yy Obtain a new bottle of sealant from the
Never stand next to the sidewall of the 17. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and dealer with returning the used sealant
tire when the compressor is operating. check the tire pressure with the ser- bottle for disposal.
Instead, look at the sidewall of the tire. You vice kit.
may get injured severely in the event of tire
rupture.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE ENGINE IS OVERHEATING
Coolant temperature gauge
Engine overheat warning lamp
When the engine overheats, steam or spray may come out

the engine compartment. Or, the coolant temperature gauge
is closed to “H”. If this happens, the engine overheat warning
lamp comes on and a buzzer will sound. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe place.
Symptoms:
yy The engine overheat warning lamp blinks (Buzzer
sounds)
yy The gauge indicates over the normal range (or in the red
zone),
yy Steam or spray from the engine compartment.
yy Reduced engine output.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When the engine overheats
1. Move off the road to a safe place away from traffic. Park on
Caution
a firm and level ground. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission to the P position (automatic transmission) yy When the engine overheats because of the low coolant level, im-
mediately turn off the engine and let it cool down.
or the neutral position (manual transmission).
yy Opening the reserve tank cap should be performed when the
2. Turn off the air conditioner or heater if used. Open the en- engine is off and has cooled down.
gine hood to ventilate the engine compartment. yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pres-
3. If you see steam under the hood, stop the engine immedi- sure, which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant
ately. reserve tank cap when the engine and the radiator are hot.
yy The engine may be damaged if you add cold water abruptly when
If there is no steam, open the hood and leave the engine
the engine is still hot.
running in idling speed.
yy Use only Ssangyong recommended (antifreeze) coolants.
4. However, if the gauge doesn’t go down to the normal range yy If the problem continues, have the cooling system checked by a
even in idling, stop the engine and cool it down. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If it is too low,
check for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections. Warning
6. Add coolant into the reserve tank if necessary. yy To avoid being scalded, carefully open the engine hood.
7. If necessary, cover the tank cap with a cloth and turn the yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pres-
cap a little to release any pressure. After fully releasing the sure, which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant
pressure, remove the cap and fill up the tank. Then, put the reservoir cap when the engine and the radiator are still hot.
cap back on the tank. yy Extremely careful not to contact to running parts such as drive belt
when the engine is running.
8. If the coolant level is normal, have the cooling system
Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WATER SEPARATOR WARNING LIGHT AND ENGINE CHECK WARNING LIGHT
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
Engine Check Warning Light Water Separator Warning Light

If the light stays on or comes on while driving, When the water level inside the water separa-
some of the engine control components including tor in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level, this
sensors and other devices are defective. Have warning light comes on and a buzzer sounds.
the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or If these conditions occur, immediately drain the
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. water from the fuel filter & the water separator. For the draining
procedures, please refer to “How to drain the water from fuel
Warning filter” section in this manual.
yy The fuel system in the engine may get serious damages if you keep
driving while the warning light is on. Prompt correction should be Caution
necessary. When this warning light comes on, the engine driving force may be
yy Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of the decreased or the engine may stall.
priming pump until it becomes rigid to fill up the fuel pump with
fuel.
Caution
When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level, this warning light comes on and a buzzer sounds. Also, the
driving force of the vehicle decreases. If these conditions occur, immediately drain the water from the fuel filter & the water separator. If the above
conditions are still existing after draining the water, have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SHIFT LEVER LOCK RELEASE AND SAFETY MODE RESET
How to Release the Shift Lever Lock
Symptoms after Resetting of the Safety Mode
yy Decreased driving force while driving at a high speed
yy Fixed gear position during driving
yy If the safety mode is activated, the shift indicator displays
“D”.
If one of these symptoms happens, reset the automatic trans-
mission safe mode.
How to Reset the Safety Mode

1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to the “P” posi-
tion.
2. Stop the engine and wait for over 10 seconds.
1. Apply the parking brake firmly and turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal and push down the shift lock re-
lease lever with a stick such as a pen. Then, shift the lever Warning
to other position. If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the 2nd forward
gear in the “D” position or the 2nd(1st) reverse gear in the “R” posi-
3. Start the engine, release the parking brake, and place the
tion)still exists, have the system check by a Ssangyong Dealer or
selector lever to the “D” position. Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
Warning
yy If the automatic gear selector does not move out of “P”, take the
steps mentioned above and take the vehicle to a Ssangyong
dealer or authorized service center. Have the vehicle checked
and repaired.
yy The brake pedal must be depressed when you try to move the
selector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
yy Flat towing For 2WD vehicles
Warning
It is not allowed to use a tow truck or
yy The 4WD system equipped vehicle
should never be towed with the wheels
keep the rear wheels from moving with
on the ground. This can cause serious the parking brake released for towing,
damage to the transmission or the 4WD as shown in the following figure.
system. Do not tow the vehicle with the rear
yy Towing with front wheels on ground
yy If your vehicle should be towed due to wheels on the ground.
wheel slips in mud or sand, you can use
the towing hooks in your vehicle. How-
ever, if the load to hooks is too heavy,
the towing hook, rope or chain could be
Dolly
broken, resulting in serious personal
yy Towing with rear wheels on ground injury and vehicle damage.
yy To prevent damage to your vehicle, Caution
proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary. When you need a tow-
ing service, contact Ssangyong Dealer
Dolly or Ssangyong Authorized Ser vice
Center.
Towing with tow truck
The best towing method is to lift the
entire vehicle onto the flatbed so that
all wheels are off the ground. If it is
impossible, put the front or rear wheels
on the jig and tow the vehicle using a
dolly, with other wheels off the ground. yy Do not tow with the sling-type equip-
ment or the bumper and lower parts can
For 4WD vehicle be damaged.
Your vehicle must be towed with a yy If the vehicle is towed with the driving
wheels on the ground, the transmission
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equip-
may be damaged.
ment with all the wheels off the ground.
yy Be careful not to damage the bumper
and lower parts during towing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EMERGENCY TOWING
yy When towing your vehicle with the towing rope:

1. Securely tie up the towing rope to the towing hooks. Secure
the rope to both of the towing hooks under the front of the
vehicle as tight as possible.
2. To make the rope conspicuously visible, bind a white col-
ored cloth on the center of the rope.
3. Place the gearshift lever in the neutral position and release
the parking brake.
Within 5 m 4. Switch on the hazard warning flashers of both vehicles.
5. Maintain the towing distance. Apply more force to depress
the brake pedal of the vehicle that will be towed.
6. Set the ignition in the ON position.
7. Total length of the towing and towed vehicle and the towing
rope should be less than 25 meters. And tow the vehicle
within 25 km with 5 km/h of the towing speed. The length of
the rope should be less than 5 m.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of Towing Hooks
Front towing hook Rear towing hook Caution
yy If you cannot use a professional towing service, the driver of the
towed vehicle should stay behind the steering wheel. But, never
use this emergency towing when the electrical system, steering
system, or brake system is not operative.
yy Ensure that only horizontal tension is applied to the front or rear
towing hook.
yy If there are steep hills or sharp turns in your towing path, do not
use this method.
yy Depress the brake pedal stronger than normal condition when the
engine is not running.
yy When your electrical systems operate properly, turn on the haz-
ard warning lamps or turn signal lamps according to the towing
vehicle’s signals.
yy Avoid overloaded towing and do not tow a heavier vehicle than
yours.
Warning yy Position the ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON” so that the steering
wheel is not locked.
yy The towing hook should be used only for temporary and short-
distance recovery or towing in an emergency situation. Avoid using
it all the time. Misusing can have serious consequences.
yy Special cares should be taken when towing. Avoid an abrupt start-
off or reckless driving because it could over-tighten the towing
hook, towing rope or chain with excessive force. To prevent dam-
age, do not take up slack in the towing rope or chain too quickly.
yy If the towing hook is required for towing as the vehicle becomes
stuck in snow, mud or sand or it can’t get out by itself due to poor
traction, make sure no excessive force is applied to the towing
hook. Otherwise, the towing hook, towing rope or chain may be
broken, resulting in an injury or damage to the vehicle. For safe
towing, it is recommended to contact Ssangyong authorized ser-
vice shop or a professional towing company.

GETtheMANUALS.org
trailer Towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger vehicle Trailer Loading
therefore handling, braking, durability and economy will be af-
fected by towing a trailer. To load your trailer properly, you must know how to measure
gross trailer weight and trailer ball weight. Gross trailer weight
Your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of cor-
is the weight of the trailer plus all cargo in it.
rect equipment. Also, you should avoid overloading and other
abusive use. You can measure gross trailer weight by putting the fully load-
ed trailer on a vehicle scale.
The maximum loaded trailer weight you can pull with your
vehicle depends on your intended use and what special equip- Trailer ball weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ment has been installed on it. Before attempting any towing, by the trailer coupler at its normal towing height. This weight
ensure that the correct equipment is fitted to your vehicle. can be measured using a bathroom scale.
Your Ssangyong Dealer will help supply and install towing The weight of your loaded trailer (gross trailer weight) should
equipment to suit your requirement. never exceed the specified values.
The permissible trailer loads are valid for several gradients
from 6.8% to 12.6% according to engine power applied.
Maximum Load Limits (unit: kg) When the trailer has been coupled, the permissible rear axle
load for the fully loaded towing vehicle (including occupants)
Trailer coupling weight must not be exceeded.
Maximum Maximum permissible Maximum
Engine Type
Trailer static vertical load on trailer
the coupling device hitch
D22DTR/ with brake 2,600
129 25
D20DTR without brake 750
with brake 2,300
D27DT
without brake 750
with brake 2,300
D27DTP 117 25
without brake 750
with brake 2,300
G32D
without brake 750

GETtheMANUALS.org
If you want to pull a trailer
Important points:
yy You have to consider a sway control. You can check the
sway control to hitch dealer.
yy If the total driving distance of your new vehicle is under 800
km (500 miles), do not tow a trailer. For the first 800 km (500
miles) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 80 km/h (50
mph) and do not start off your vehicle at full throttle. Other-
wise, your engine and other parts could be damaged due to
heavier loads.
yy Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than
80 km/h).
yy You have to consider the weight of trailer.
yy The permissible trailer ball weight varies according to the
cargo weight on the deck.
yy It has to be limited to the number of passengers by 5 people
including a driver.
Weight of trailer
To keep the vehicle and trailer safely, you must consider many
factors except the maximum load limit.
The vehicle and trailer’s safety depends on how you use your
trailer. Vehicle speed, altitude, load, outside temperature and
frequency of using trailer are all very important. Any special
equipment on your vehicle also affects on your vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Weight of trailer tongue Trailer Brakes
The tongue load of a trailer is also considered very carefully If the trailer brakes are used, you should follow all instructions
because it affects the gross vehicle weight (GVW) of your provided by the manufacturer. Never modify the brake system
vehicle. This weight includes the curb weight of vehicle, any of your vehicle.
luggage in trailer, and the passengers in vehicle. In addition to
that, you must add the trailer tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will carry all the weight. Trailer Lights
The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 4% of total Make sure your trailer is equipped with lights which meet coun-
loaded trailer weight. To check the weights are proper, you try and local requirements.
must weigh the trailer and the tongue separately after load- Always check for the proper operation of all trailer lights before
ing. If the weights are not proper, unload some items from the you start to tow.
trailer.
Caution Tires
yy Never load a trailer with more weight in the rear side than in the
front side. (Recommendation - Front: approx. 60%, Rear: approx.
When towing trailers, be sure your tires are properly inflated to
40%) the inflation pressure.
yy Never exceed the maximum load limits of trailer or trailer towing
equipment. Improper loading may result in damage to your ve-
hicle. It may occur the personal injury. Before driving, check the
Safety Chains
weight and loading at a commercial scale or highway patrol office Always attach safety chains between your vehicle and the
equipped with scales. trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer
yy An improperly loaded trailer may cause the loss of vehicle con- so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes sepa-
trol.
rated from the hitch. Follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation for attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack to permit full turning. Never allow safety chains to drag
on the road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake Fluid yy Allow adequate stopping distance.
Stopping distance is increased when you tow a trailer.
Change the brake fluid every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) under
the following conditions. yy Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too fre-
quently, which will cause the brakes to overheat and result
yy Towing a trailer frequently. in reduced brake efficiency.
yy Driving in hilly or mountainous terrain. yy Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Automatic Transmission Fluid yy Parking on a steep slope is not recommended.
More frequent maintenance is required if your vehicle tows You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer at-
trailer frequently. tached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, such as the trailer/caravan hitch
becoming disengaged, people can be injured and both the
Towing Tips vehicle and trailer can be damaged.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently com- yy If someone removing the blocks stands directly behind
pared with normal driving condition. the trailer, he could be injured. If your brakes or the hitch
yy For safety, observe the following precautions: slipped, the trailer could roll backward. Make sure anyone
removing blocks from your wheels stands to one side.
yy Practice turning, stopping, and reversing before you begin
towing in traffic. yy Take note of trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not tow in traffic until you are confident that you can
handle the vehicle and trailer safely.
yy Before driving, make sure that the lighting system of the
trailer works properly.
yy Do not drive faster than 90 km/h.
yy Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and
avoid sudden maneuvers.
yy Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
yy Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
yy Always have someone guide you when reversing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving on hill 3. When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake,
a long or sleep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might
and then shift to PARK (P) for automatic transmission, or
have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and
First or Reverse gear for a manual transmission.
no longer work well.
5. Release the regular brakes.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to a
level which minimizes the possibility of engine and transmis-
sion overheating. When You Are Ready to Leave Af-
Note ter Parking on a Hill
yy When towing a trailer on steep hill (over 12%), pay particular at- 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while
tention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the you:
engine does not overheat. If the gauge reaches to the “H” mark,
stop your vehicle at a safe place and allow the engine to idle until
• Start your engine
it cools down. When the engine has cooled sufficiently, you may • Shift into a gear and
proceed. • Release the parking brake.
yy To avoid the engine and transaxle overheating, you must check the
driving speed depending on trailer weight and uphill grade. 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Parking on Hills 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached,
on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. Maintenance When Towing Trailer
People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re towing a
can be damaged. trailer. See the maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do that are especially important in trailer operation are engine
it: oil, brake pads & discs, automatic transmission fluid. Each of
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) these is covered in this manual and the index will help you find
for automatic transmission yet, or into a gear for a manual them quickly. If you want to tow a trailer, it’s a good idea to re-
transmission. view these sections before you start your trip.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ACCIDENT OR FIRE
If your vehicle catches on fire, don’t panic.

Evacuate any occupants and use the extinguisher.
Accident Warning
Turn on the emergency hazard warning switch. If possible, yy In an accident, fuel can be released from the vehicle. Therefore,
move your vehicle to a safe place to avoid any secondary acci- stop the engine and avoid any sparks or flames.
dents. If anyone is injured, call an ambulance and contact the yy If you have even a minor burn, see your doctor.
nearest police station.
Fire
Stop immediately in a safe place. Turn off the engine. Use fire
extinguishers to put out the fire. If it is impossible to extinguish
the fire, contact the nearest fire or police station.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Emission reduction device
Catalyst Diesel Particulate Filter (CDPF) - EU5
The CDPF is a compound word for Diesel Oxidation Catalyst
(DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which are exhaust
gas after-treatment devices.
DOC
DOC DPF
DPF LNT (Lean & NOx Trap) DPF (Diesel Particulate
Filter) - EU6
CDPF
CDPF The LNT (Lean & NOx Trap) DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) is a
system to eliminate the nitrogen oxide from exhaust emissions.
Use the specified fuel to avoid exhaust smell due to the poor
quality fuel and to maintain the normal performance of the LNT
DPF.
Regeneration Process
DPF “Regeneration” is the process of combusting particulates when
LNT a certain amount of particulates is collected in the filter. In
this process, the temperature of exhaust gas rises to approx.
600°C by fuel control and particulates are effectively inciner-
LNT & DPF ated.
When the Engine CHECK Indicator Flashes

This vehicle is equipped with the Diesel Oxidation Catalyst Regeneration may not be performed due to
(DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) for emission reduc- several operating conditions. And in this case,
tion devices. the engine CHECK indicator flashes. This
The DOC converts HC and CO2 in the fuel to H2O and re- flashing function is to inform the driver to take
moves 80% of the Soluble Organic Fraction (SOF) among par- action for the proper regeneration of the filter.
ticulate materials, thereby reducing 25% or more of particulate If the engine CHECK indicator flashes, drive the vehicle at
materials. over 80 km/h for 20 minutes to regenerate the DPF. When the
The DPF collects particulate materials to the filter and re- amount of particulates is lowered down to a certain limit, the
moves them by combustion. This device removes 95% or more engine CHECK indicator goes off.
of particulate materials.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Warning
yy The vehicle equipped with DPF system may generate the white yy The engine CHECK indicator blinking means an excessive amount
smoke when using the fuel with high sulfur content (over 100 of particulates accumulated in the DPF. If this happens, you must
ppm). This is caused by the sulfur attached and accumulated in drive the vehicle at the speed of 80 km/h or higher for 15~20
DPF. However, this is very natural situation, not caused by your minutes. If you keep driving the vehicle at the speed of less than
vehicle. 80 km/h without following this instruction, it may cause damage
yy How to fix the problem to the exhaust system related to the DPF.
Replace current fuel with high grade fuel as soon as possible. yy The regeneration process of the DPF produces so much heat, so
However, even after replacing the fuel, the white smoke may be never drive or stop the vehicle near flammable materials to avoid
seen due to residual sulfur in DPF system. For safety driving, have causing fire. Also, be sure to stay away from the exhaust pipe and
the system checked at Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. the DPF to avoid getting burned.
yy The presence of an excessive amount of particulates in the DPF
may reduce the engine power.
yy An excessive amount of accumulated particulates can damage
the DPF. Therefore, make sure to drive the vehicle at 80 km/h or
more for 20 minutes at every 500 km.
yy When the engine CHECK indicator comes on, it means that a sen-
sor related to the engine control or an electric device is malfunc-
tioning. In this case, have your vehicle checked by a Ssangyong

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
D
aily check list......................................................... 12-2 Do-it-yourself operation......................................... 12-38
L
ocations in engine compartment........................... 12-3 Scheduled maintenance services (EU) - 3
E
ngine oil................................................................. 12-8 diesel engine (D22DTR)........................................ 12-39
E
ngine coolant....................................................... 12-11 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN) - 4
A
ir cleaner.............................................................. 12-13 diesel engine (D22DTR)........................................ 12-42
P
ower steering fluid............................................... 12-15 Scheduled maintenance services (EU) - 5
F
uel filter and priming pump (without additional diesel engine (D20DTR)........................................ 12-45
water separator)..................................................... 12-16 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN) - 6
F
uel filter and water separator* (with additional diesel engine (D20DTR)........................................ 12-48
water separator)..................................................... 12-17 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN) -
diesel engine (D27DT/D27DTP)............................ 12-51
7
F
uel filter (D20DTR, D22DTR).............................. 12-20
F
uel filter................................................................ 12-22 Scheduled maintenance services
(gasoline engine)................................................... 12-54 8
G
asoline engine..................................................... 12-22
D
rive belt (for gasoline) / brake pedal &
9
clutch pedal............................................................ 12-23
P
arking brake / catalytic converter........................ 12-24
10
B
rake and clutch fluid (with M/T)........................... 12-25 12
Transfercase fluid.................................................. 12-26
W
asher fluid........................................................... 12-27 11
Service and
B
attery.................................................................... 12-28
S
park plugs............................................................ 12-30 12
G
asoline engine..................................................... 12-30
F
use and relay box................................................ 12-31
Tire......................................................................... 12-33
Maintenance 13
W
iper blade replacement....................................... 12-37 14
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAILY CHECK LIST
1 Exterior Interior
8 The following checks are recommended before driving to 111 Check for the steering wheel’s free play and looseness.
maintain safe and dependable vehicle operation. 222 Check the parking brake lever.
333 Check the operation of the horn, windshield wipers and turn
9 1. Check the tires for inflation pressure and damage.
signals.
2. Check the wheel bolts for looseness. 444 Check the operation of the instrument cluster and indicator
10 3. Check the operation of the lights. warning lights.
555 Check the level of fuel in the fuel tank.
4. Check for any oil, water, fuel and fluid leaks. 666 Check the position of the rearview mirrors.
11 777 Check the operation of the door and window locking mecha-
nism.
888 Check the brake’s and clutch pedal’s free play, height and func-
12 tion.
999 Check the seat belts.
13
Caution
14 If in doubt about driving and operating conditions, have your vehicle checked
at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
12-2 Service and Maintenance

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCATIONS IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Brake and clutch

fluid reservoir Front washer
fluid reservoir
Fuel filter
Coolant surge Power steering

tank fluid reservoir
fuse box
Engine oil
dipstick
Air cleaner Battery
Caution
Do not work on the engine compartment while the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, muffler or catalytic converter is hot. Always turn the engine
off and allow it to cool before starting the maintenance.
Always keep your hands and tools away from the moving parts when the engine is running.
Service and Maintenance 12-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Relay and
fuse box
Brake and clutch
fluid reservoir
Front washer
fluid reservoir
Power steering Fuel filter

Coolant surge fluid reservoir
Engine oil cap
tank
Engine oil
dipstick
Air cleaner
Battery

GETtheMANUALS.org
diesel Engine (d27dt, d27dtP)
Without Additional Water Separator
Front washer 1 2
Coolant surge tank fluid reservoir
Engine oil cap
Engine oil dipstick 1. Priming pump

2. Fuel filter
Relay and
fuse box
Air cleaner
Battery
Power steering
fluid reservoir

GETtheMANUALS.org
diesel engine (d27dt, d27dtP)
With Additional Water Separator

Coolant surge tank
Engine oil Engine oil cap

dipstick
Relay
and
fuse box
Air cleaner Power steering
fluid reservoir
Battery
1. Priming pump 3
2. Fuel filter
2
3. Water separator
4. Front washer fluid reservoir
1

GETtheMANUALS.org
gasoline engine (G32D)

Coolant surge tank Front washer
fluid reservoir
Engine oil cap

Engine oil dipstick
Relay and
fuse box
Air cleaner
Battery
Power steering
fluid reservoir

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL
Diesel Engine Level Check
Park the vehicle on a level ground and apply the parking brake. Stop
the engine and wait more than 5 minutes.
Max 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. Reinsert it all the way.
Min 2. Pull out it again and check the oil level.
Engine oil cap 3. The oil level should be between the maximum (Max) mark and
minimum (Min) marks on the oil dipstick. Oil should be replenished
before the level goes below the minimum mark.
Replenishment
Engine oil 1. If the level gets to the lower point, open the filler cap on top of the
dipstick cylinder block and add the genuine oil without exceeding the level
of the upper mark.
2. Recheck the oil level after 5 minutes.
Specification and Capacity
Specification D22DTR/D20DTR Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
Gasoline Engine (Total Quartz INEO ECS 5W30, SK ZIC SY 5W30 or
Approved by MB 229.51 5W30)
Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
D27DT
(Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 10W40 (W/O CDPF))
D27DTP
(Approved by MB Sheet 229.31 5W40 (W/ CDPF))
G32D (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 10W40, MB 229.51
5W30, SN/GF-5 5W20)
Capacity D22DTR/D20DTR ≒ 6.0ℓ
Engine oil Engine oil D27DT/D27DTP ≒ 8.5ℓ

cap dipstick G32D ≒ 9.0ℓ
Warning
Use only Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filters. Use of non-recommended
products could cause damage to the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Function of Engine Oil yy Driving the rough road, off-road, dirt-laden road, and muddy
roads
Engine oil’s major function is to lubricate and cool the parts yy Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are
inside of the engine, which enables engine to work properly. being used
Consumption of Engine Oil yy Repeated driving in short-distance
The consumption of engine oil is depending on the viscosity yy Driving with the excessive idling
and quality of the oil, and the driving habit. More oil may be re-
yy High load driving such as trailing
quired under the following conditions;
- When the Vehicle is New
A new engine usually consumes more oil because its pistons, Change Interval
piston ring and cylinder walls are not yet adjusted with an opti- yy The engine oil filter element should be changed at the same
mal condition. time with the engine oil.
Oil Consumption : Max. 0.5 Liter per 1,000 km yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filter.
Accordingly, it is necessary for the driver to check frequently
the oil level and to replenish oil if needed. SYMC recommends Engine Oil
that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle Refer to Section “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES”.
or you drive the long distance until the first 5,000 km.
- When driving at High Engine Speeds
Engine Oil Filter
As long as you keep the followings with sufficient care in your
first running the vehicle, it will guarantee you to get excellent Item Service interval
and comfortable performance for a long with your vehicle.
Engine oil filter Same interval with the engine oil
yy Remember to check the engine oil level and shorten the cy-
cle to refuel the engine oil under severe driving conditions.
yy Avoid subjecting to engine to heavy loads by driving at full
throttle, especially be careful when the outside temperature
remains below freezing for the first 1,000 km.
yy Do not use the trailing in the first 1,000 km driving
* What’s Severe Driving Condition?
yy Driving at the high engine speed or at high-speed
yy Driving for consecutive two hours at high speed

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warnings and Cautions When Checking SAE viscosity classes
The SAE classes (viscosity) should be selected in accordance with
Warning
the average seasonal air temperature.
yy Clean the dipstick with a clean cloth so that any foreign materi-
als cannot get into the engine. Applying the SAE classes exactly on the basis of the outside air tem-
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil. peratures would necessitate frequently changing the engine oil. The
yy The oil should not go above the upper mark on the dipstick. temperature limits for the SAE classes should therefore be regarded
yy Operating with insufficient or too much amount of oil can dam- as reference temperatures and the actual air temperature may be
age the engine. higher or lower for a short period of time.
Caution Engine
Regularly check the engine oil level and add the Ssangyong The viscosity should be selected according to outside tempera-
genuine engine oil if necessary. ture. Do not switch to a different viscosity in the event of brief
temperature fluctuations.
* How to check engine oil specification

Example:
0W, 5W, 10W, 15W, 20W, 25W 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
Winter oil viscosity Summer oil viscosity

(W: Winter)
yy The numerical, for example SAE 10W, relates to vis-
cosity at particular temperature and the alphabet “W”
indicates the oil’s suitability for colder temperature.
yy For summer oil viscosity, higher numbers mean
higher viscosities.
Note
In severely cold or hot region, using the engine oil with SAE
(viscosity) classification suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures is strongly recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE COOLANT
Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine
Coolant surge tank Coolant surge tank
Level Check Service Interval

Park the vehicle on level ground and apply the parking brake. Replacement: Every 5 years or every 200,000 km
Stop the engine and wait until it cools.
Diesel Engine Ssangyong genuine
1. The coolant level should be between the MAX and MIN 8.5ℓ
(D22DTR/D20DTR) coolant Anti-Freeze
mark on the coolant surge tank.
Diesel Engine SYC-1025,
2. Check the coolant level. If the level is below the “MIN” mark, 11.0 ~ 11.5ℓ
(D27DT, D27DTP) Anti-Freeze:Water =
immediately add coolant. 50:50
Gasoline Engine (G32D) 11.5 ~ 12.0ℓ ORGANIC ACID TYPE,
Warning COLOR:BLUE
yy Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the
engine and the radiator are hot. The cooling system Check: Everyday, before driving off
may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing
serious injuries. Replenishment: Replenish as necessary
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine coolant and anti-freeze.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Replenishment Warning
Use only the 50/50 mixture of soft water and antifreeze as When the coolant level is too low, the engine can overheat. If the
specified. coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster goes up abnor-
1. Open the coolant surge tank cap slowly when the engine is mally, immediately check the coolant level. Use only the Ssangyong
genuine coolant and anti-freeze. If different types of coolants or
cold. At this time, you can hear a “hissing” sound.
unapproved coolants are used to refill, chemical reactions can be
2. When there is no more “hissing” sound, remove the cap caused and block the flow of the coolant. This may cause the engine
from the surge tank. to overheat or burning inside the engine.
3. Add the 50:50 mixture of water and antifreeze to the coolant
reservoir tank. Warning
4. If no unusual things happen, tighten the coolant reservoir yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pressure,
cap. which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant surge
tank cap when the engine and radiator are hot.
Caution yy Use only the Ssangyoug genuine coolant and anti-freeze.
Avoid any direct contact of the coolant to the painted body of the
vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR CLEANER
Diesel Engine Cleaning
Refer to Section “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES”.
Blow the compressed air through the element in the opposite direction to normal
air flow to clean the element.
Warning
yy Do not drive your vehicle with an improperly installed air cleaner element or without it.
It may damage the engine or may cause a fire.
yy Do not let any object enter the housing when cleaning the air cleaner. It may damage
the engine or may cause an engine to stall.
Air cleaner
Caution
Gasoline Engine yy If you blow the compressed air to normal air flow, the engine will be damaged due to
foreign materials entering.
yy Be careful with the direction of the compressed air on the air cleaner.
Caution
If vehicle is operated under severe condition
yy Pollutant area or off-road driving
yy Driving in dusty condition or sandy condition
frequently inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
Air cleaner

GETtheMANUALS.org
DI Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, replace more often than at the Blow the compressed air through the
usual recommended intervals. If it is dirty, shake the element to remove dust. Clean element in the opposite direction to
the inside of the air cleaner housing and cover with a damp cloth. normal air flow to clean the element as
Clean the air cleaner element by blowing compressed air through it in the opposite di- shown above.
rection to normal air flow.
Warning
yy Engine can be damaged.
yy Do not operate the vehicle without air cleaner element.
Change
1. Unscrew the cover bolts and remove the cover.
2. Replace the air cleaner element with a new one. Make
sure that the element is correctly installed in the air cleaner
housing.
3. Close the cover and tighten the bolts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER STEERING FLUID
Diesel Engine
Power steering
fluid reservoir
Check the fluid level on a level ground with the engine turned
off. The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks
on the reservoir cap gauge. If it drops to or below the MIN mark,
refill the reservoir with the specified fluid. Only use the specified
fluid. The difference between the MIN and MAX marks shows
Gasoline Engine fluctuations of the steering fluid between when it is hot and when
it is cold.
Specification S-PSF3
Power steering Approx. 1.1

fluid reservoir Capacity (L) See NOTE 1: TOTAL FLUIDE DA
(Extreme cold condition only)
NOTE 1: Super multigrade fluid with an exceptionally high viscosity in-

dex and a very low pour point, allowing functionality of hydraulic systems
at extremely low temperatures. Excellent lubricating properties even at
very low and very high temperatures.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER AND PRIMING PUMP (Without Additional Water Separator)
D27DT, D27DTP DIESEL ENGINE
yy Drain water from the fuel filter whenever replacing the engine
Plug opening direction
oil.
yy After changing the fuel filter, perform the pumping operation Plug closing direction
of the priming pump until it becomes rigid. Fuel filter
Water drain plug
Caution
Connector
yy Change the fuel filter according to the specified service interval.
yy Drain water from the fuel filter whenever changing the engine oil. Priming pump
yy After changing the fuel filter or draining the water, perform the
pumping operation of priming the pump until it becomes rigid.
Fuel filter
Water Separating Function Priming Pump Operating Conditions

If water in fuel gets into the engine and fuel system, it may 1. when completely consumed the fuel
cause serious damage to the fuel system. The fuel filter pro- 2. after draining the water from the fuel filter
vides the water separating function to block the inflow of water.
3. after replacing the fuel filter
When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel fil-
ter exceeds a certain level, the warning light comes on and the Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of
buzzer sounds. If it occurs, immediately drain water from the the priming pump until it becomes rigid to fill up the fuel pump
fuel filter. For draining procedures, refer to “How to drain the with fuel.
water from fuel filter” section in this manual.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER AND water separator* (With Additional Water Separator)
D27DT, D27DTP diesel ENGINE
Priming Pump Operating Conditions

1. If the vehicle has been run out of fuel
3
2. After draining water from the fuel filter.
3. After replacing the fuel filter 2
1
Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of
the priming pump until it becomes rigid so that the fuel pump
fills up with fuel. 1. Priming pump 3. Water separator
2. Fuel filter

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel filter
1. Fuel filter Water Separating Function
2. Priming pump
If the water in fuel gets into the engine and the fuel system, it
4. Drain plug
may cause serious damage in the fuel system. The fuel filter
A. Opening direction of drain plug
B. Closing direction of drain plug
offers the water separating function to block the inflow of wa-
ter.
Caution
yy Replace the fuel filter according to the specified maintenance
schedule.
yy Drain the water from the fuel filter whenever replacing the engine
oil.
yy After replacing the fuel filter or draining the water, press the priming
pump until it becomes rigid.
If particles in fuel get into the engine and fuel-related devices,

it may cause serious damage in affected components. Make
sure to replace the fuel filter according to the specified mainte-
nance schedule.
Make sure that the foreign materials do not get into the fuel fil-
ter while changing the fuel filter, and clean around it to prevent
particles from flowing into the filter.
Press the priming pump until it becomes rigid.
yy Service Interval
Replace every 30,000 km (Draining water from

EU
fuel filter: whenever replacing the engine oil)
Replace every 25,000 km (Draining water from

General
fuel filter: whenever replacing the engine oil)

GETtheMANUALS.org
water separator
Draining the Water from Water Separator
Drain the water from the water separator whenever replacing
the engine oil.
After draining the water, press the priming pump until it be-
comes rigid. Do not crank the engine before doing this proce-
dure. For the detailed draining procedures, please refer to “How
to drain the water from the fuel filter” in the water separator
warning light section.
3. Water separator
4. Drain plug Caution
5. Connector yy Replace the water separator according to the specified mainte-
A. Opening direction of drain plug nance schedule.
B. Closing direction of drain plug yy Drain the water from the water separator whenever replacing the
engine oil.
yy After replacing the water separator or draining the water, press the
The water separator is used in the fuel supplying system in or- priming pump until it becomes rigid.
der to reduce the water content in the fuel provided to the FIE
system. It gives additional water volume storage. A water sen-
sor is fitted to the water separator in order to warn the driver
that the water separator has to be drained.
When the water level in the water separator reaches a certain
point, the water separator warning light in the instrument clus-
ter comes on.
yy Service Interval
Change every 150,000 km or 5 year
Location:
Behind the fuel filter (between the fuel filter and the dash pan-
el) in the engine compartment (engine intake side)

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER (d20dtR, d22dtR)
Water Separating Function
If water in fuel gets into the engine and fuel system, it may
cause serious damage to the fuel system. The fuel filter pro-
When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel
filter exceeds a certain level, the warning light comes on and
the buzzer sounds. If it occurs, have the system checked by
Service Interval
EU Change every 40,000 km (Draining water from fuel filter:

whenever replacing the engine oil)
General Change every 45,000 km (Draining water from fuel filter:

Caution
Change the fuel filter according to the specified service interval.

2. After draining water from the fuel filter
3. After replacing the fuel filter
If this happens, pump fuel until the fuel filter is fully filled. Then,
start the engine.
Warning
After replacing the fuel filter or draining the water from the fuel filter,
bleed the air from the fuel filter by using priming pump. Otherwise,
the engine cannot be started or the fuel system could be damaged
due to the air in fuel line.

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to use priming pump
Open
Close
111 Press down the pump knob and turn it 222 Pump the knob until the fuel comes 333 Press down the pump knob and turn
counterclockwise (Open direction). out from the priming hole. it clockwise (Close direction).
444 Close the engine hood and start the
Caution Caution engine.
To open and close the pump knob easier, Pay particular attention when pumping the
please use a pair of pliers. priming pump. It can damage your vision if
it gets into your eyes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel Filter GASOLINE ENGINE
Fuel Filter
If the filter is contaminated, the supplied fuel will be reduced,
main components will be damaged due to entering the con-
taminated materials and the performance of catalytic converter
will be deteriorated.
Replace the fuel filter according to the specified maintenance
schedule.
Service Interval
Every 100,000 km (if using poor quality of
Replacement
fuel, replace every 30,000 km)
Caution
Replace with a Ssangyong genuine part with specified intervals.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVE BELT (for GASOLINE) / BRAKE PEDAL & CLUTCH PEDAL
DRIVE BELT BRAKE PEDAL
Gasoline Engine Checking pedal free play
Turn off the engine and depress the brake pedal several times
to deplete the vacuum in the brake system. Gently depress the
brake pedal by hand and measure the distance it moves until
slight resistance is felt. If the free play is more or less than
specified, have the brakes adjusted by a Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
Brake pedal free play 1 ~ 4 mm
CLUTCH PEDAL
Checking pedal free play
You do not need extra tension adjustment, but check belt for Depress the pedal by hand until clutch resistance is felt; en-
wear or tension by pushing the belt and replace if necessary. sure free play is within specification.
If the free play is more or less than specified, have the clutch
or linkage adjusted by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
Belt replacement: Gasoline Engine thorized Service Operation.
Install a device onto the tension adjuster and rotate clockwise
Clutch pedal free play 5 ~ 10 mm
to release the tension and take off the belt.
Warning
The engine could inadvertently start while checking the belt and
cause moving parts to crush or cut. Remove key from ignition
switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING BRAKE / CATALYTIC CONVERTER
PARKING BRAKE
Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number Damage to the catalytic converter or the vehicle may re-
of notch clicks heard while fully applying it from the released sult if the following points are not observed :
position. Consult a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the ve- vice Operation as Quickly as possible in the event of misfiring,
hicle on a fairly steep grade. If the number of clicks is more irregular engine running following a cold start, a significant
or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by a loss of engine power or other unusual malfunctions which may
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Opera- indicate a fault in the ignition system.
tion. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a low
speed and with low engine revolutions.
Stroke 4 ~ 7 notches at a force of 20 kg
You should therefore avoid :
yy Frequent repeated cold starts.
yy Actuation of the starter for an unnecessarily long time dur-
CATALYTIC CONVERTER ing starting (fuel is injected during the starting procedure).
The catalytic converter is located between exhaust manifold yy Allowing the tank to become empty (an irregular fuel supply
and center muffler. The catalytic converter consists of mono- leads to overheating)
liths with honeycomb shaped structure of ceramic material yy Starting the engine by pushing or towing (unburned fuel
which are elastically mounted in a wire mesh structure. may enter the catalytic converter) : use jump leads.
This precious metal coating on the monoliths accelerate the
reduction and/or oxidation of toxic components. Have all maintenance work carried out by a Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. You can then be
On vehicles with a catalytic converter for unleaded fuel, lead
certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrical, injection
fuel will damage the catalytic converter and parts of the elec-
and ignition system will be operating correctly, that your ve-
tronic system, thereby rendering them inoperative.
hicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that the catalytic
converter system will have a long life.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID (WITH M/T)
Diesel Engine Specification and Replacement
Specification DOT 4
Service interval Every 2 years
Level Check and Replenishment

yy The fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lev-
els on the reservoir.
yy Check the level on a level surface. If it drops to or below the
MIN mark, refill the tank with the specified fluid. Only use
the specified fluid.
Caution
yy Be careful not to let any foreign materials enter the tank when
adding the fluid.
Gasoline Engine yy Do not add the fluid above the “MAX” level.
yy Do not allow the fluid to make contact with the body paintwork.
yy After adding the fluid, tighten the cap securely.
yy If frequent refills are required, have the system checked by a
Warning
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine brake fluid.
yy Do not allow the fluid to make contact with skin or eyes. If contact
happens, rinse affected areas immediately with plenty of water. If
irritation persists, consult a doctor.
yy The fluid gradually decreases according to brake pad wear. A
sudden drop of the fluid level may indicate a leak in the system.
In this case, have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
transfercase fluid
transfercase fluid
Service Interval, Specification and Capacity
Specification Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
Part time
Direct Injection 1.4 L
Capacity Diesel Engine, Full time (TOD)
Gasoline Engine
AWD 1.1 L

GETtheMANUALS.org
WASHER FLUID
Top Up Washer Fluid

Diesel Engine Frequently check the washer fluid level and add the specified
product as needed.
In winter, use only the specified washer liquid for winter sea-
son.
Washer Reservoir
Warning
yy The washer fluid includes flammable materials to prevent freezing.
It could cause a fire when directly contacted with flames. When
checking the washer fluid, avoid the flames near the washer fluid
tank.
yy If engine oil or antifreeze is used as the washer fluid, it will de-
crease your visibility through the windshield and may cause an
accident.
Caution
yy If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will freeze during the winter
Gasoline Engine and damage the washer fluid reservoir and motor. Use only the
specified washer fluid.
yy If you operate the washer switch without washer fluid, the motor
could be damaged due to overloads. Therefore, if there is no
Washer Reservoir
washer fluid, do not operate the washer motor.
yy Operating the wipers on a dry surface on the windshield or rear
window without any washer fluid may cause damage to the glass.
Operate the wipers after sufficiently spraying the washer fluid.
yy Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the engine or body paint of your
vehicle during replenishment. If washer fluid spills onto your hand
or other body part, wash it away under a clean water flow.
yy There is no independent washer reservoir for the tailgate window.
The front washer reservoir is also for the tailgate window.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY
Diesel Engine When the battery charge warning light ( ) on the instru-
ment cluster comes on, the battery is not normally charging.
If the warning light comes on while driving, turn off all unnec-
essary electrical devices and have the system checked by a
Battery Maintenance
yy Make sure the terminal connections are securely tightened.
yy If the terminals are corroded, clean them with a wire brush
or sand paper.
yy The battery terminal should be disconnected only when the
ignition key is removed from the key cylinder. Disconnecting
the terminal with the key in the “ON” or “ACC” position may
cause a sudden change in voltage and damage various
electrical systems.
Gasoline Engine
yy Check the battery for any cracks, damages or leaks. Re-
place it if necessary. To remove any battery fluid on the bat-
tery surface, wear rubber gloves and wipe the fluid out with
a wet-soapy cloth.
Specification
Specification DC 12V
Capacity 90AH

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Warning
yy The battery has acid that can burn you. And its gas can explode. yy Always use the battery with correct voltage for the vehicle. Other-
You can get serious injuries if you are not careful. Keep naked wise, there is a risk of fire.
flames, sparks and smoking items away from the battery. yy Observe the indications on the battery.
yy Loosely connected batter terminals can set up sparks. These
sparks can cause a fire with flammable gas. Therefore, tightly The battery cell always contains highly flammable
connect the terminals. hydrogen gas which may explode if ignited. Be sure to
keep it away from a cigarette, a spark or other flames.
yy At night, if you need to check the engine room, do not use a lighter,
but only use a battery-powered flashlight. Wear a protective goggle when charging the battery or
yy Because the battery electrolyte is very strong acid, avoid any direct performing any work.
contact of the battery electrolyte on your skin or vehicle’s body. If In addition, ensure adequate ventilation of the enclosed
the acid contacts your skin, thoroughly wash your skin with fresh space.
water and see your doctor. Do the same on your vehicle.
The battery electrolyte solution contains a highly cor-
yy Wear eye protection when working with a battery. If working in a rosive sulfuric acid. Be careful not to contact it with
closed area, keep good ventilation. skin, eyes, clothes or paint. In particular, keep out of
the children’s reach.
Caution When in contact with the skin, wash off the contact area;
yy If you disconnect the battery terminal when the engine is running, In case of eye contact, flush with running water for at
electrical systems could be damaged. least 15 minutes, and seek medical help immediately.
yy To remove the battery cable, disconnect the negative cable first
Always read the safety instructions in the User Manual
and be careful on the battery terminal polarity when you con-
before working on the battery.
nect the cables. The negative and the positive should not be
confused. The hydrogen gas in the battery is highly flammable and
yy The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for positive and may explode if ignited.
negative cables, must not be interchanged. Never short-circuit
the battery.
yy When the ambient temperature is too low, the battery capacity will
drop and can be frozen.
yy Keep the battery electrolyte at its specified level. If the electrolyte
level is higher than the MAX level, it can overflow during battery
charging and if the electrolyte is overcharged, the battery can
explode.
yy Only use a battery with the approved voltage and capacity. Oth-
erwise, an incompatible battery can catch fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Spark Plugs GASOLINE ENGINE
Spark Plugs
Service Interval
Replacement (G32D) Change every 30,000 km
NGK BKUR5ETZ-10
Specification (G32D)
Gap 1 ± 0.1 mm
Caution
yy When replacing the spark plugs, disconnect the negative terminal
of the battery and turn off all the switches.
yy It is recommended that the engine be cool or cold when changing
the spark plugs (you could burn yourself).
yy Do not use non-recommended spark plugs.
Spark plugs should be inspected periodically for carbon de- yy Do not allow contaminants to enter spark plug hole.
posits. When carbon accumulates on a spark plug, a strong
spark may not be produced.
Warning
If necessary, clean the electrodes with a fine wire brush and
Spark plugs may be very hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.
carefully scrape the carbon off the insulator with a small file.
The spark plugs should then be blown clean with compressed
air and the upper insulator wiped clean. And adjust the spark
plug gap.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
If any of the electrical system components do not operate, check its corresponding fuse.
If the fuse is blown, replace it with the same capacity.
Interior fuse box
Relay box
Interior fuse box is located at the left side of the instrument panel
and relay box is located on the floor under left instrument panel.
Caution
yy When an electrical system does not operate, check its fuse first.
Engine Room Relay and Fuse Box, PTC Fuse Box If a fuse is blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same
capacity.
yy If you remove an electric system’s fuse while the system is operating,
the electrical equipment could be damaged. Always remove the igni-
tion key from the ignition switch and turn off all electric devices.
Engine Compartment yy Always replace a specified fuse with the same rating.
Fuse and Relay Box yy If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, have the
electrical system checked and repaired by a Ssangyong Dealer or
PTC
fuse box
Warning
If you do not use genuine parts or specified light bulb, and if you alter
the HID bulb or LED lamp wiring, fuse disconnection, malfunction and
other wiring damages could occur.
Engine room fuse box is located at the right side in engine
compartment and PTC fuse box is installed on the battery.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO CHECK AND REPLACE FUSE
Higher amperage Specified amperage
Normal
Open
1. Turn off all electrical systems and remove the ignition key
Warning
from the key cylinder.
yy The use of anything other than the specified fuse could cause
2. Open the fuse and relay box cover. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire.
3. Locate the defective fuse. yy The use of different types or different rating fuses could cause
4. Pull out the relevant fuse by using the fuse puller. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire. Always
replace a fuse with the one with the same rating.
5. Visually check whether it is blown or not.
6. If normal, insert it to its original position.
7. If blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same ca- Note
pacity. The underhood fuse and relay box has some spare fuses. Refill the
fuses immediately as you use them. The fuse rating is indicated on
the upper surface of the fuse.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE
TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Under Proper Over

inflation inflation inflation
Tire Inflation Pressure Caution

Tire Inflation yy Maintaining the specified tire pressure is essential for comfortable
Type Tire Wheel riding, driving safety, and long tire life. Incorrect inflation pressures
Pressure
will increase tire wear and will impair safety, vehicle handling,
235/75R 16 7.0J x 16 comfortable driving and fuel economy. Always make sure that the
tire inflation pressure is correct.
Driving tire 32 psi 255/70R 16 7.0J x 16 yy Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
255/60R 18 7.5J x 18 wheel, prior to any long journey (before the tire is heated up).
yy Even the temporarily installed spare tire should be inflated prop-
Emergency tire 60 psi (4.13 bar) 175/90R 16 5.5J x 16 erly.
Note
The tires should be checked before they are heated up using an tire
pressure gauge.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE WEAR CHECK TIRE ROTATION
Regular tire
Front Rear
Directional tire
Tire tread
Front Rear
Wear limit
The tires on your vehicle have built-in tread wear indicators To avoid uneven wear of tires and to prolong tire life, inspect
that appear between the tread grooves. The tire should be and rotate your tires every 5,000 km.
replaced when the wear indicators appear in two or more adja-
cent grooves. Warning
yy Be sure to replace and rotate the tires at a Ssangyong Authorized
Warning Service Center or professional tire shops.
yy Driving on worn or damaged tires is very dangerous and may yy Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be sure
cause an accident. Also, a damaged tire could burst. to use the same size and type tires of the same manufacturer on
yy Check tires regularly for any damage (foreign objects, punctures, all wheels.
cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls) and replace if necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SPARE TIRE TIRE CHAINS
The temporary spare tire is only for an emergency. Do not use Install tire chains on rear wheels for a 2-Wheel Drive vehicle.
it for normal driving. The spare tire should be replaced with a And install tire chains on all wheels for a 4-Wheel Drive vehi-
regular tire as soon as possible. cle. If installing chains on only two wheels is unavoidable, tire
Check the tire conditions and pressure as needed and always chains should be installed on rear wheels.
keep it available. For replacing procedures, refer to “In Case of If at all possible, install snow tires instead of tire chains for
Emergency” section in this manual. vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, since the aluminum
wheels can be damaged by chains. If installing tire chains is
Caution the only alternative, use wire-type tire chain with a thickness of
yy After replacing the tire, be sure to adjust the pressure to the speci-
less than 15 mm.
fied pressure of the tire. Otherwise, the suspension system and Drive the vehicle with tire chains installed at a speed of 30 km/
driving system may be damaged. h or less or at the specified speed recommended by the chain
yy Keep the vehicle speed below 60 km/h if the spare tire is fitted. manufacturer. If a sound of chains being slammed against
the vehicle body, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately.
Check the installation of the chains carefully and tighten the
WINTER TIRE chains, if needed. Take tire chains off on dry pavement to
avoid damaging the chains.
Use snow tires when driving on snowy or icy roads.
Do not drive the vehicle with tire chains installed on dry pave-
If winter tires are used, they must be installed to all 4 wheels.
ment.
Warning Warning
yy Drive very slowly with extra caution on snowy or icy roads. yy Check the installation of tire chains and inspect the vehicle body for
yy The snow tire with arrow direction markings on its side wall should damage after driving about 0.5 to 1 km with the chains installed. If
be installed according to the arrow direction. tire chains have been loosened, retighten the chains.
yy The snow tires cannot guarantee your safety on icy and slippery yy Improper installation or use of incorrect tire chains can damage the
road. Drive with extra caution, avoiding sudden acceleration, brak- vehicle or seriously endanger the operating reliability of the vehicle
ing or movements of the steering wheel. and road safety. Use tire chains that meet the specifications and
yy When the snow tires are not needed anymore, replace them install them in a professional manner.
with ordinary tires. Keep the removed snow tires in a cool and
shady place. Be careful not to contact them with any oil, grease,
or fuel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Cautions When Checking
yy Installing tire chains on front wheels is not required. If you
need to install them on the front wheels, do not drive your
the Wheel and Tire
vehicle at a high speed and/or change the direction of
travel suddenly to prevent the surrounding components yy Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be
from being damaged. sure to use the same size and type of tires of the same manu-
yy Do not use 4-Wheel Drive mode (4H, 4L) when tire facturer on all wheels. If you do not use the same tires on the
chains are installed only on the rear wheels of a 4-Wheel vehicle equipped with the TOD (4 wheel drive), it may cause a
Drive vehicle equipped with part-time transfer case. The serious damage to the vehicle’s drive system.
driveline of the system can be seriously damaged. Use yy Check the inflation pressure, cracks and tearing of tires before
4-Wheel Drive mode (4H, 4L) only when tire chains are
driving.
installed on both the front and rear wheels or tire chains
are not used. yy Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to be-
come loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to check and tighten the wheel nuts as specified before
any long journey.
yy Do not use non-genuine wheel and tire. Non-genuine wheel
and tire may have inferior performance and function and dan-
gerous for safe driving. Also, any defects due to using them
cannot be covered by warranty.
yy Be sure to check the tires and wheels before driving. If a wheel
is damaged, the tire inflation pressure can be decreased and
the tire can be damaged.
yy If a tire has been impacted by a stone or any other objects
during driving, have it checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or
yy The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may cause
abnormal operation of the steering wheel, increased fuel con-
sumption, damage to the powertrain or the braking system, vi-
bration, or uneven tire wear. Always use the specified tires from
the same manufacturer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT
Front Wiper Rear Wiper Specification
Front wiper
Rear wiper
Left Right
500 mm 500 mm 350 mm
Caution
yy Do not open the hood when the wiper
arm is lifted up. The wiper and hood may
111 Remove the ignition key and lift the 111 Remove the ignition key and lift the be damaged.
wiper arm up from the windshield. wiper arm up from the rear glass. yy Do not operate the wiper when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
yy Be certain not to apply any fluid polish
containing oil to the windshield of your
vehicle since this will result in streaks
which impair vision. Contamination of
either the window or the wiper blades
with foreign materials can reduce the
effectiveness of the windshield wipers.
Never clean up the windshield with a
waxed or oil-saturated cloth.
Warning
222 Pry up the blade lock ( ). 222 Slide the blade out from the wiper yy Malfunctioning wipers on a raining or
333 Slide the blade out from the wiper arm. snowing day may be detrimental to your
arm. 333 Install a new blade. driving safety. Never drive your vehicle
with malfunctioning wipers on a raining
444 Install a new blade. 444 Put the wiper arm down. or snowing day.
555 Put the wiper arm down. yy Do not touch the running wipers. It may
cause a personal injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to your-
self or damage to the vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION
Warning Caution
yy Be careful not to touch any hot components such as the engine, yy Check the level of the engine oil and every fluid including coolant
radiator, exhaust manifold, catalytic converter, or muffler when daily. If you drive while the fluid levels are low, your vehicle can be
the engine is just stopped. They may burn you badly. Let the damaged and such damages will not be covered by warranty.
engine cool down before any service. yy Use only the genuine Ssangyong oils and fluids.
yy When working with the battery or fuel related components, al- yy Do not allow oils and coolant to make contact with skin or painted
ways stop the engine and do not smoke. Also, remove all flames surfaces during inspection or refill of them. They can also dam-
or sparks near the vehicle. age paint finish. If skin contact happens, rinse affected areas
yy Do not connect and disconnect the battery terminals when the immediately with plenty of water and then consult a doctor.
ignition key is in the “ON” position. yy Do not overfill the oil or coolant, otherwise the engine and trans-
yy The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for the positive mission may be damaged. Maintain the specified level.
and negative cables, must not be interchanged. yy The performance of oils and coolant may be deteriorated when
yy The battery cables and wires transfer high voltage and current. they are exposed to dust and moisture. Be careful not to allow
Avoid any short circuit. contact with dust while refilling.
yy Make sure that the ignition key is “OFF” when performing any yy In spite of very limited driving of your vehicle, oils and other
work in an enclosed space such as a garage. fluids can disappear over the time. Therefore, check their levels
yy Keep the used oil and coolant out of reach of children. (For a frequently.
proper disposal of them, contact a professional service.) yy Improperly disposed engine oil and/or other fluids can pollute
yy When checking your vehicle, you must turn off the engine first. the environment. Dispose used fluids in accordance with local
Then, put the shift lever into the “P” (automatic transmission) or environmental regulations.
“Neutral” (manual transmission) position and apply the parking
brake.
yy The electrical cooling fan can start to operate unexpectedly
even when the engine is stopped. Disconnect the negative bat-
tery cable before you check the radiator, cooling fan or nearby
parts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Scheduled Maintenance Services (EU) - Diesel Engine (D22DTR)
* Use only approved Ssangyong genuine parts.
Maintenance service and record retention are the owner’s responsibility. You should retain evidence that proper maintenance has
been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service chart.
* EU Countries: Only countries that belong to EU. (It does not apply to all countries in EU.)
MAINTENANCE Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
MAINTENANCE x1,000 miles 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Drive belt I I I I I I I I
* Engine oil & filter *1 R R R R R R R R
(1)* (3)* (4)* Shorten the service interval under severe conditions
Cooling system hose & connections I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant (3)* (4)* Change every 200,000 km or 5 years. And, inspect and replenish if necessary.
I R* I R* I R* I R*
* Fuel filter (1)*
Draining water from fuel filter: whenever replacing the engine oil
Fuel line & connections I I I I I I I I
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner (2)*
Shorten the service interval under severe conditions
Chart Symbols: - High load driving such as trailer towing
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, - Taxi, patrol service or delivery service (extended idling and exces-
replenish, adjust or replace. sive driving with low speed)
*1 Check the engine oil level and leak every 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty condi-
before starting a long trip. tion or sandy condition, pollutant area or off-road driving, frequently
R - Replace or change. inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: Shorten the service (3)* More frequent maintenance is required if under dusty driving condi-
interval. tion.
- Frequent stop-and-go traffic, extended idling, short driving dis- (4)* Refer to “Recommended fluids, coolant and lubricants”.
tance below 6 km, driving distance below 16 km when the outside
temperature remains below freezing
- Driving in a hilly or mountainous terrain, sandy, or dusty area

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Exhaust pipes & mountings I I I I I I I I
Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* Change every 2 years (inspect frequently)
I I I I I I I I
Parking brake / Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)*
Inspect every 20,000 km or 1 years, adjust or replace if necessary
I I I I I I I I
Brake line & connections (including booster) (4)*
Manual transmission oil (5)* I I
Clutch & brake pedal free play I I I I I I I I
I I R I I R I I
Transfer case fluid (3)*
Frequent check of oil leak
Front Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
Front & Rear differential
Rigid Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
fluid (3)* Rear
IRS I I R I I R I I
I I I I I I I I
Automatic transmission fluid (6)*
Change every 60,000 km under severe condition
Check play/tightness for lower bolt/nut and ball
Check frequently and adjust or replace if necessary
joint grease leak on chassis and body (6)*
Chart Symbols: (5)* Inspect and replenish every 60000 km (or 3 years)
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, Normal driving condition: Fill for Life
correct, clean, replenish, adjust or replace. (Severe driving condition: Change every 120000 km)
R - Replace or change. (6)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: Shorten the service interval.
(3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”. - Towing a trailer or off-road driving (Inspect the leak of fluid at any time, occasionally)
(4)* More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is - Taxi, patrol service or delivery service (extended idling and excessive driving with low speed)
operated under any of the following conditions: - Frequent stop-and-go traffic, extended idling, short driving distance
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature - Driving in a hilly or mountainous terrain, sandy, or dusty area
regularly reaches 32°C (90°F) or higher, or - Driving frequently at high speed over 170 km/hour
- In hilly or mountainous terrain, or - Driving frequently in area where heavy traffic under the ambient temperature above 32°C
- When doing frequent trailer towing, or
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Tire condition & inflation pressure Check frequently and adjust or replace if necessary
Wheel alignment (7)* Inspect when abnormal condition is noted
Steering wheel & linkage I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid & lines (3)* I I I I I I I I
Drive shaft boots (8)* I I I I I I I I
Seat belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I
Lubricate locks, hinges & bonnet latch Check frequently and adjust or replace if necessary
Wheel bearing grease I I I I I I I I
Propeller shaft grease - Front / Rear (9)* I I I I I I I I
R R R R R R R R
Air conditioner filter (10)*
Chart Symbols: (10)* Severe Conditions in Air Conditioner Filter
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, - Pollutant area or off-road driving, extended air conditioner or
replenish, adjust or replace. heater operation
R - Replace or change. - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly
(3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”. reaches 32°C (90°F) or higher
(7)* If necessary, rotate and balance wheels.
(8)* After completion of off-road operation, the drive shaft boots
should be inspected.
(9)* Inspect propeller shaft grease every 5000 km or 3 months if the
vehicle is mainly driven under severe condition.
- In off-road or dusty road, or
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly
reaches 32°C (90°F) or higher, or
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Scheduled Maintenance Services (gen) - Diesel Engine (D22DTR)
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

*1 R R R R R R R R
* Engine oil & filter
(1)* (3)* (4)* Initial change: 7,500 km, and replenish if necessary.
I I R* I I R* I I
* Fuel filter (1)*
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner (2)*
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, - Taxi, patrol service or delivery service (extended idling and excessive
replenish, adjust or replace. driving with low speed)
*1 Check the engine oil level and leak every 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty condition
before starting a long trip. or sandy condition, pollutant area or off-road driving, frequently inspect
R - Replace or change. the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: Shorten the service (3)* More frequent maintenance is required if under dusty driving condition.
interval. (4)* Refer to “Recommended fluids, coolant and lubricants”.
- Frequent stop-and-go traffic, extended idling, short driving dis-

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
Manual transmission oil (5)* Inspect and replenish every 60000 km or 3 years. (Severe driving condition: Change every 120000 km)
I I I R I I I R
fluid (3)* Rear
IRS I I I R I I I R
I I I I I I I I

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

R R R R R R R R


GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

*1 R R R R R R R R
(1)* (3)* (4)* Initial check: 5,000 km, and replenish if necessary.
I R* I R* I R* I R*
* Fuel filter (1)*
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner (2)*
interval. tion.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
I I R I I R I I
fluid (3)* Rear
IRS Periodic check: every 20,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
I I I I I I I I

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

R R R R R R R R

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

*1 R R R R R R R R
I I R* I I R* I I
* Fuel filter (1)*
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner (2)*

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
I I I R I I I R
fluid (3)* Rear
I I I I I I I I

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

R R R R R R R R


GETtheMANUALS.org
Scheduled Maintenance Services (GEN) - Diesel Engine (D27DT/D27DTP)
INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
MAINTENANCE x1,000 miles 6.25 12.5 18.75 25 31.25 37.5 43.75 50
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

* Engine oil & filter *1 Initial change: 5,000 km, change every 10,000 km or 12 months
(1)* (3)* (4)* (But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
Direct Injection
* Fuel filter Replace every 25,000 km (Draining water from fuel filter: whenever replacing the engine oil)
(Diesel Engine)
Additional water separator (if equipped) Replace every 150,000 km or 5 years (Drain the water whenever replacing the engine oil)
Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 10,000 km, replace every 30,000 km
Air cleaner (2)*
(But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
Injection timing (See NOTE 1) I I I I I I I I
NOTE 1: Adjust as required; - When excessive smoke is visible (black or white) - Driving in a hilly or mountainous terrain, sandy, or dusty area
- Poor performance/economy - High load driving such as trailer towing
Chart Symbols: - Taxi, patrol service or delivery service (extended idling and exces-
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replen- sive driving with low speed)
ish, adjust or replace. (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty condi-
*1 Check the engine oil level and leak every 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or before tion or sandy condition, pollutant area or off-road driving, frequently
starting a long trip. inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
R - Replace or change. (3)* More frequent maintenance is required if under dusty driving condi-
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: Shorten the service interval. tion.
- Frequent stop-and-go traffic, extended idling, short driving distance (4)* Refer to “Recommended fluids, coolant and lubricants”.
below 6 km, driving distance below 16 km when the outside temperature * Water separator: When replace the engine oil, also drain the water from the
remains below freezing fuel filter.

GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* Change every: 2 years (inspect frequently)
Parking brake / Brake pads
Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
(Front & Rear) (4)*
Brake line & connections (including booster) Inspect every 15,000 km or 1 years, adjust or replace if necessary
Manual transmission oil (5)* I I I I I R I I
Non IOP Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
Front
Front & Rear IOP Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
differential fluid (3)* Rigid Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
Rear
Transfer case fluid (3)* Inspect every 15,000 km, change every 60,000 km (Frequent check of oil leak)
Automatic transmission fluid (6)* Inspect every 30,000 km or 12 month (But change every 60,000 km under severe condition)
Chart Symbols:
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replenish, adjust or replace.
R - Replace or change.
(3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”.
(4)* More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 32°C (90°F) or higher, or
- In hilly or mountainous terrain, or
(5)* Inspect manual transmission fluid every 10,000 km (Inspect the leak of fluid at any time,occasionally), then change every 60,000 km
(6)* Change automatic transmission fluid and every 60,000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under severe conditions: Towing a trailer or off-road driving (Inspect
the leak of fluid at any time, occasionally)

GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Propeller shaft grease - Front / Rear (9)* Inspect every 10,000 km
Air conditioner filter Change every 10,000 km (But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
Chart Symbols:
(6)* After completion of off-road operation, the underbody of the vehicle should be thoroughly inspected. Examine threaded fasteners for looseness.
(8)* After completion of off-road operation, the drive shaft boots should be inspected.
(9)* Inspect propeller shaft grease every 5,000 km or 3 months if the vehicle is mainly driven under severe condition.
Severe Conditions in Air Conditioner Filter
- Pollutant area or off-road driving, extended air conditioner or heater operation

GETtheMANUALS.org
Scheduled Maintenance Services (GASOLINE Engine)
INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Engine oil & engine oil filter (1)* (3)*
R** R R R R R R R
(Initial check: 5,000 km)
Engine coolant (3)* Change every 200,000 km or 5 years. And, inspect replenish if necessary.
Fuel filter (2)* Replace every 100,000 km (if using poor quality of fuel, replace every 30,000 km)
Air cleaner (2)* I I I I I R I I
Ignition timing I I I I I I I I
Spark plugs Change every 30,000 km or 3 years.
Charcoal canister & vapor lines - - I - - I - -
Chart Symbols:
** - In order to secure engine long life and effective break-in, first oil (factory filled) would be recommended to drain within 10,000 km.
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: short distance driving, extensive idling or driving in dusty condition, shorten the service interval.
(2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, pollutant area or off-road driving, driving in dusty condition or sandy condition, frequently inspect the air cleaner, if
necessary, change the air cleaner.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Parking brake / Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
Front & Rear Front
IOP Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
differential
fluid (3)* Rigid Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
Rear
Chart Symbols:
(5)* Inspect manual transmission fluid every 10,000 km (Inspect the leak of fluid at any time, occasionally), then change every 60,000 km

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Drive shaft boots I I I I I I I I
Chart Symbols:

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Bulb specifications and functional check........13-2
3
Hid headlamp*................................................13-3
Location of exterior lamps...............................13-4 4
Interior lamp....................................................13-9 5
13
6
7
Lamp
8
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
BULB SPECIFICATIONS AND FUNCTIONAL CHECK
1 BULB SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONAL CHECK
Description Amount Specification 1. Check whether the lamp comes on or off by turning its
2 switch.
High beam -
55W + 15W
EU (High + DRL) 2. Check the corresponding fuse when the lamp doesn’t come
3 2
High beam - on.
Headlamp 55W
GEN (High) 3. If the fuse is blown, replace it with a new one.
4 Low beam (HID) 2 55W (25W) For replacing procedures, refer to the “In Case of Emergen-
Position lamp 2 LED cy” section in this manual.
5 Front fog A 2 35W 4. If the fuse is not blown, check the bulb and replace it with a
Front combi-
light B 2 LED new one if needed.
nation lamp
6 Turn signal lamp 2 21W
5. If the bulb is not defective, have the system checked by a
Exterior Outside lamp (auxiliary turn sig- Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
2 LED
lamp nal lamp) ter.
7
Stop lamp (upper) 2 LED
Stop lamp (lower) Caution
8 2 LED
-GEN yy Use only a specified capacity bulb for replacement.
Rear combi-
Tail lamp 2 LED yy Disconnect the negative cable on the battery before replacing the
9 nation lamp
Turn signal lamp 2 21W bulb. Remove the ignition key.
Back-up lamp 2 16W yy Do not apply excessive force to remove the bulb cover.
10 Rear fog light -EU 2 21W yy Make sure that the corresponding switch and the ignition switch
License plate lamp 2 10W are turned off before replacing a bulb.
High mounted stop lamp 1 LED yy Do not touch a bulb with bare hands immediately after turning off
11 the lamp.
Front room lamp 2 10W
yy Do not touch a bulb with bare hands. Fingerprints, dust, or moisture
12 Glove box lamp 1 5W stuck to the bulb may shorten its life or cause it to explode. If you
Interior
Center room lamp 1 10W accidentally touch the bulb, wipe the bulb glass with a soft cloth.
lamp
Luggage lamp 1 10W yy Never try to adjust the headlamp aiming angle. It should be done
13 by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Door courtesy lamp 4 5W
14 The LED is not replaxeable. If LED does not illuminate, replace the
lamp assembly with new one.
13-2 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
HID headlamp*
HID (High Intensity Discharge)
headlamp
Caution
yy HID headlamp bulb is better than regular (halogen) bulb in
If the light does not come on while operating HID type of headlamp
terms of performance and lifetime; however frequent switch- (low beam), more complex actions than fuse/relay replacement needs
ing (ON/OFF) of headlamp may shorten the life. to be taken. Therefore, visit SsangYong service center for overall
yy Unlike regular (halogen) light bulb, HID headlamp bulb inspections of related systems.
slowly dims when turning on the headlamp even after the
bulb ran out. Therefore, if the HID headlamp turns off and Warning
comes on again with the headlamp switch ON, the light bulb
yy Never remove nor disassemble any parts of HID headlamp (pro-
needs to be replaced. jector, high voltage cable, ballast) to avoid serious injuries due to
yy HID headlamp is more complex than regular (halogen) an electrical shock.
headlamp, so an extra charge will be applied when replac- yy It is dangerous to contact your body part to the vehicle equipped
ing. with HID headlamp due to the high voltage direct current flowing
through the system. Besides, more actions than bulb replacement
yy When removing/installing the HID headlamp bulb and unit, should be performed. Therefore, ask SsangYong service center
the angle adjustment (up/down, right/left) should be per- if malfunction occurs.
formed. Visit our SsangYong service center and ask about yy If discretionally modifying the vehicle equipped with regular
it. headlamp to HID headlamp, the system will underperform or be
overloaded causing malfunction of the vehicle. Additionally, the
Note light will interrupt the driver’s view running on opposite side of the
Characteristics of HID headlamp bulb road resulted in deadly accident.
yy The color of the light changes during its initial lighting through 4
seconds later until stabilized. Caution
yy Color change by the usage period is an unique characteristic of yy While driving a vehicle equipped with HID headlamp, the leveling
HID bulb. switch should be used depending on the number of passengers
yy Initial stage: light yellow and loading condition so that the lamp does not interrupt other
yy Over 100 hours: light blue drivers’ views.
yy Over 1000 hours: blue yy Refer to chapter 4, Headlight leveling switch.
yy Late stage: bright red, purple, get dark
Lamp 13-3
GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCATION OF EXTERIOR LAMPS
Outside turn signal lamp
High mounted stop lamp
Front fog light

Turn signal lamp
Headlamp Rear Combination Lamp
Tail lamp
Stop lamp
High beam
Low beam Back-up Turn signal
lamp lamp
Stop lamp or
rear fog light*
Position lamp & DRL lamp
13-4 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOVING HEADLAMP HOUSING
111 Turn off the light switch and remove 333 Unscrew the mounting nut for head- 444 Open the engine hood and remove
the ignition key from the key cylinder. lamp housing from the wheelhouse. two mounting bolts.
222 Unscrew the screw ( A ) and remove
the light cover in wheelhouse.
Warning
For safe driving, do not adjust the headlamp aiming screw. It
should be done by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or
555 Separate the headlamp housing from

the vehicle body and disconnect two
electric connectors.
Lamp 13-5
GETtheMANUALS.org
HEADLAMP
1. Remove the headlamp cover from the removed headlamp

housing.
2. Release the fixing clip.
3. Replace the bulb with new one.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Low beam (HID) High beam
Low beam bulb High beam bulb
HID lamp
13-6 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
1. Remove the ignition key from the key
cylinder.
2. Remove two mounting bolts on the
rear combination lamp housing.
3. Disconnect the main connector and

remove the rear combination lamp
housing.
4. Remove the defective bulb. Rear combination
Turn signal lamp: Push down and lamp
turn the bulb to remove it.
Back-up lamp: Pull the bulb out.
6. Install in the reverse order
of removal.
Note
The tail lamp and stop lamp are LED type. Do not try to replace the
bulb by yourself.
Back-up lamp Rear Turn signal
bulb lamp bulb
Lamp 13-7
GETtheMANUALS.org
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
cylinder.
2. Remove the license plate lamp assem-

bly by pushing it inward.
3. Remove the lamp housing by turning

the connector.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it.
5. Replace the bulb with new one. License
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. plate lamp
13-8 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERIOR LAMP
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 3. Replace the bulb with new one.
2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver. 4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
Caution
yy The cover should be removed from the rear section (arrow). Oth-
erwise, the cover may be damaged.
yy Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it.
Lamp 13-9
GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER ROOM AND LUGGAGE ROOM DOOR COURTESY LAMP
LAMPS
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder.
2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver. 2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver.
3. Replace the bulb with new one. 3. Replace the bulb with new one.
4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing. 4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
Caution Caution
Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it. Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it.
13-10 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOVE BOX LAMP
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 3. Push both sides of the lamp cover to separate the glove box
lamp assembly.
2. Open the glove box.
4. Disconnect the connector and remove the lamp assembly.
6. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
Lamp 13-11
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
5
14
6
7
Index
8
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
1 4 Changing a spare tire.....................................11-8 Engine oil....................................................... 12-8
Checks before starting a journey..................... 1-2 ESP OFF switch*........................................... 4-30
4-Wheel drive system*................................... 4-36
Child restraints and pregnant woman.............. 8-9
2
A Cigarette lighter.............................................. 10-6 F
Courtesy lamp................................................ 10-9 Front room lamps......................................... 10-13
3 Accident or fire..............................................11-32 Cruise control switch* (D20DTR, D27DT(P), Front storage compartment............................ 10-6
Adjustable steering wheel and horn.............. 10-4 G32D)....................................................... 4-18 Front view camera system*........................... 6-26
4 Air bag*.......................................................... 8-19 Cruise control switch* (D22DTR)................... 4-12 Fuel filler door................................................ 3-13
Air cleaner.................................................... 12-13
Fuel filter (D20DTR, D22DTR)..................... 12-20
5
Airbag non-inflation conditions....................... 8-23 D Fuel filter and priming pump (without additional
AQS (air quality system)................................ 9-15
Daily check list............................................... 12-2 water separator)...................................... 12-16
Assist grip..................................................... 10-14
Defogging and defrosting............................... 9-12 Fuel filter and water separator* (with additional
6 Audio system*.............................................. 10-20
Devices related to seat.................................... 7-2 water separator)...................................... 12-17
Automatic heater / air conditioner.................... 9-5
Digital clock.................................................. 10-19 Fuel filter...................................................... 12-22
7 Dimensions....................................................... 0-2 Functions of ignition key ................................. 2-5
B
Direct injection type diesel engine................. 1-36 Fuse and relay box...................................... 12-31
Battery replacement for rekes key................... 2-8
8 Do-it-yourself operation................................ 12-38
Battery.......................................................... 12-28 Doors................................................................ 3-4 G
Bluetooth hands-free system....................... 10-24 Drive belt (for gasoline) / brake pedal &
9 Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)................. 12-25
Gasoline engine........................................... 12-22
clutch pedal............................................. 12-23 Gasoline engine........................................... 12-30
Brake system................................................. 6-27 Driver’s seat..................................................... 7-5 Gear selector lever in automatic
10 Bulb specifications and functional check....... 13-2 Driving tips for automatic transmission............ 6-9 transmission*.............................................. 6-7
DVD changer*.............................................. 10-10 Gear selector lever positions..........................6-11
11 C
Glove box....................................................... 10-9
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F)...... 1-30 E
12 Cautions when a tire is flat.............................11-4 Emergency towing.........................................11-25 H
Cautions when changing the tire..................11-13 Emission reduction device............................11-33 Hazard warning flasher switch....................... 4-29
Center and rear room lamps........................ 10-14 Engine compartment........................................ 0-9
13 Center console............................................... 10-7
HDC (Hill Descent Control) switch*............... 4-32
Engine coolant..............................................12-11 Heater/air conditioner system.......................... 9-2
Certification.................................................... 0-16 Engine hood................................................... 3-12 Hid headlamp*................................................ 13-3
14
14-2 Index
GETtheMANUALS.org
How to fasten the seat belt (3-point) in second N Remote audio controls & gear shift button (A/T)
row seat...................................................... 8-7 on steering wheel..................................... 4-26
Navigation unit* storage............................... 10-10
How to fasten the seat belts in second row Remote control key and ignition key............... 2-2
seat............................................................. 8-6 Removable ashtray...................................... 10-17
O
How to fasten the three point seat belt........... 8-5 Removing the spare tire..................................11-7
How to use service kit* (emergency puncture Opening and closing devices........................... 3-2 Replacing air conditioner filter....................... 9-13
repair kit)..................................................11-14 Opening and closing the doors with ignition Roof rack........................................................ 3-16
key.............................................................. 2-7 Roof rack*.................................................... 10-18
I Outside rearview mirror control switch.......... 4-25
Immobilizer system......................................... 2-10

OVM tools.......................................................11-6 S
Important notice............................................. 0-14 Safety instructions............................................ 1-7
P
Indication of tire pressure (TPMS equipped Safety mode (automatic transmission).......... 6-20
vehicle)*.................................................... 5-10 Parking aid system (PAS)*............................. 6-21 Scheduled maintenance services (EU) -
Inside rearview mirror.................................... 10-5 Parking brake / catalytic converter.............. 12-24 diesel engine (D20DTR)......................... 12-45
Instrument cluster (DIESEL)............................ 5-2 Parking brake operation................................. 6-32 Scheduled maintenance services (EU) -
Instrument cluster (G32D)................................ 5-4 PAS (Parking Aid System) OFF switch*........ 4-34 diesel engine (D22DTR)......................... 12-39
Interior lamp................................................... 13-9 Passenger’s seat............................................ 7-10 Scheduled maintenance services (gasoline
Power outlet................................................... 10-8 engine).................................................... 12-54
J Power steering fluid..................................... 12-15 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN) -
Precautions regarding unauthorized diesel engine (D20DTR)......................... 12-48
Jack storage................................................. 10-10
modification & alteration........................... 1-33 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN) -
Protection of the environment........................ 0-15
L diesel engine (D22DTR)......................... 12-42
Scheduled maintenance services (GEN) -
Light switch...................................................... 4-4 R diesel engine (D27DT/D27DTP)............. 12-51
Location of exterior lamps.............................. 13-4
Rain sensing wiper*......................................... 4-9 SD card slot, terminal for connecting
Locations in engine compartment.................. 12-3
Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)......................9-11 external device and port*........................ 10-22
Luggage net................................................. 10-15
Rear cup holder........................................... 10-10 Seat belt and air bag....................................... 8-2
Rear heated glass........................................ 10-17 Seat belt........................................................... 8-4
M
Rearview camera system*............................. 6-25 Seat heating/ventilation function*................... 7-15
Map pocket....................................................10-11 Seatback pocket............................................10-11
Index 14-3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Second row seat.............................................7-11 T Windows........................................................... 3-7
Shift lever in manual transmission Winter (W) / Standard mode (S).................... 6-19
Tailgate and tailgate window.......................... 3-17
(5-speed)..................................................... 6-3 Wiper and washer switch............................... 4-10
Theft deterrent system................................... 2-12
Shift lever in manual transmission Wiper and washer............................................ 4-8
Third row seat................................................ 7-13
(6-speed)..................................................... 6-2 Wiper blade replacement............................. 12-37
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*......5-11
Shift lever lock release and safety mode
Tire............................................................... 12-33
reset.........................................................11-23
Towing a disabled vehicle.............................11-24
Smart audio*................................................ 10-21
Trailer towing.................................................11-27
Spark plugs.................................................. 12-30
Transfercase fluid......................................... 12-26
Starting the engine and driving the vehicle... 1-17
Starting the engine with jumper cables..........11-2
V
Steering wheel heating switch /
heated glass switch.................................. 4-28 Vehicle care.................................................... 1-20
Storage box in luggage compartment.......... 10-15 Vehicle identification......................................... 0-7
Storage compartments and convenient
devices...................................................... 10-2 W
Sun visors.................................................... 10-12 Warning lights and indicators......................... 5-17
Sunglasses storage...................................... 10-13 Warning triangle*.............................................11-5
Sunroof*........................................................... 3-9 Warnings and cautions..................................... 9-4
Switch panel on driver’s door trim................. 4-24 Warnings for air bag....................................... 8-27
Switches and devices...................................... 0-8 Warnings for seat belt.................................... 8-17
Switches and devices...................................... 4-2 Washer fluid................................................. 12-27
Switches in center console............................ 4-35 Water separator warning light and engine
Switches in overhead console, check warning light..................................11-22
room lamp switch...................................... 4-40 When the engine is overheating...................11-20
14-4 Index
GETtheMANUALS.org
GETtheMANUALS.org
No. PART NO. CODE NO. PRINTING DATE MODEL REMARKS
1 Y295OM1509E RX1-5OM0E-5I-300A Sep 01,2015 Y295 D22DTR+7A/T+M/Y
REXTON W (LHD)
OWNER’S MANUAL
ISSUED BY
EXPORT SERVICE TECHNOLOGY TEAM
SSANGYONG MOTOR CO., LTD.
455-12, Dongsak-ro, Pyeongtaek-si,

Gyeonggi-do, 459-711 Korea
TELEPHONE : 82-31-610-2740
FACSIMILE : 82-31-610-3762
NOTE: All rights reserved. Printed in SSANGYONG Motor Co., Ltd.

No part of this book may be used or reproduced without the
written permission of Export Service Technology Team.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Descriptions Capacity Specifications
Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Total Quartz INEO ECS 5W30, SK ZIC SY
D20DTR/D22DTR ≒ 6.0ℓ
5W30 or Approved by MB Sheet 229.51 SAE 5W/30)
Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 or MB Sheet
Engine Oil D27DT/D27DTP ≒ 8.5ℓ 229.3 or MB Sheet 229.31 for DSL/GSL ENG without CDPF) (Approved by MB Sheet
229.31 for DSL ENG with CDPF)
Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 SAE 10W40 or
G32D ≒ 9.0ℓ
MB Sheet 229.3 SAE 5W40 or MB Sheet 229.51 SAE 5W30, SN/GF-5 SAE 5W20)
D20DTR/D22DTR 8.5ℓ Ssangyong genuine coolant
Engine Coolant D27DT/D27DTP 11.0 ~ 11.5ℓ Anti-Freeze SYC-1025, Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
G32D 11.5 ~ 12.0ℓ ORGANIC ACID TYPE, COLOR:BLUE
Automatic Transmission 5A/T ≒ 8.0ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (Shell ATF 134 or Fuchs ATF 134)
Fluid 7A/T ≒ 9.0ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF 134 FE)
2WD ≒ 3.4ℓ
5M/T Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II)
Manual Transmission Fluid 4WD ≒ 3.6ℓ
6M/T ≒ 2.2ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (SAE 75W 85)
AWD ≒ 1.1ℓ
Transfer Case Fluid TOD ≒ 1.4ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
Part Time ≒ 1.4ℓ
Non IOP ≒ 1.4ℓ, ≒ 1.5ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
Front
IOP ≒ 0.78ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (Shell synthetic fuel efficient GL 75W/90)
Rigid ≒ 2.2ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
Axle Oil
D20DTR/
Rear ≒ 1.5ℓ
IRS D27DT(P) Ssangyong genuine oil (Shell synthetic fuel efficient GL 75W/90)
D22DTR ≒ 1.6ℓ
Brake / Clutch Fluid As required Ssangyong genuine oil (DOT4)
Ssangyong genuine oil (S-PSF-3)
Power Steering Fluid ≒ 1.1ℓ
* TOTAL FLUIDE DA (Extreme cold condition only)
D22DTR: Diesel 2.2 (EU6), D20DTR: Diesel 2.0 (EU5), D27DTP: Diesel 2.7 Power-Up, D27DT: Diesel 2.7, G32D: Gasoline
Warning
yy Use only Ssangyong recommended fluids and lubricants.
yy Do not mix any different types or brands of oils or fluids. This may cause damages.
yy Keep the specified levels when adding or replacing the fluids.
GETtheMANUALS.org
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOREWORD
This manual has been prepared to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
Rexton W and to provide important safety information. We urge you to read it carefully and follow
the recommendations to help assure the most enjoyable, safe, and trouble-free operation of your ve-
hicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best and is
interested in your complete satisfaction.
We would like to take this opportunity to thank you for choosing Rexton W and assure you of our
continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction.
This manual should be considered as a permanent part of your vehicle, and must remain with the ve-
hicle at the time of resale.
PYEONGTAEK, KOREA
GETtheMANUALS.org
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Opening and closing the doors with Switch panel on driver’s door trim..... 4-24
00 General Information
ignition key..................................... 2-7 Outside rearview mirror control switch
Dimensions.......................................... 0-2
Battery replacement for rekes key....... 2-8 . ................................................... 4-25
Vehicle identification............................ 0-7
Immobilizer system............................ 2-10 Remote audio controls & gear shift
Switches and devices.......................... 0-8 button (A/T) on steering wheel..... 4-26
Theft deterrent system...................... 2-12
Engine compartment........................... 0-9 Steering wheel heating switch /
Important notice................................. 0-13 heated glass switch..................... 4-28
03 Opening and Closing
Protection of the environment........... 0-14 Hazard warning flasher switch.......... 4-29
Opening and closing devices.............. 3-2
Certification....................................... 0-15 ESP OFF switch*............................... 4-30
Doors................................................... 3-4
HDC (Hill Descent Control) switch*... 4-32
Windows.............................................. 3-7
01 Safety Precautions PAS (Parking Aid System) OFF switch*
Sunroof*.............................................. 3-9
Checks before starting a journey......... 1-2 . ................................................... 4-34
Engine hood...................................... 3-12
Safety instructions............................... 1-7 Switches in center console................ 4-35
Fuel filler door.................................... 3-13
Starting the engine and driving the 4-Wheel drive system*...................... 4-36
Roof rack........................................... 3-16
vehicle.......................................... 1-17 Switches in overhead console, room
Tailgate and tailgate window............. 3-17
Vehicle care....................................... 1-20 lamp switch.................................. 4-40
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F)
04 Interior Switches 05 Instrument Cluster
. ................................................... 1-30
Precautions regarding unauthorized Switches and devices.......................... 4-2
Instrument cluster (DIESEL)................ 5-2
modification & alteration.............. 1-33 Light switch.......................................... 4-4
Instrument cluster (G32D)................... 5-4
Direct injection type diesel engine..... 1-36 Wiper and washer............................... 4-8
Indication of tire pressure
Rain sensing wiper*............................. 4-9 (TPMS equipped vehicle)*........... 5-10
02 Ignition Key & Wiper and washer switch.................. 4-10
Tire pressure monitoring system
Remote Control Key Cruise control switch* (D22DTR)...... 4-12 (TPMS)*....................................... 5-11
Remote control key and ignition key... 2-2 Cruise control switch* (D20DTR, Warning lights and indicators............ 5-17
Functions of ignition key ..................... 2-5 D27DT(P), G32D)........................ 4-18
GETtheMANUALS.org
06 Transmission and Brake 08 Seat Belt and Air Bag 10 Convenience Devices
Shift lever in manual transmission Seat belt and air bag........................... 8-2 Storage compartments and convenient
(6-speed)....................................... 6-2 Seat belt.............................................. 8-4 devices......................................... 10-2
Shift lever in manual transmission How to fasten the three point seat Adjustable steering wheel and horn
(5-speed)....................................... 6-3 belt................................................. 8-5 . ................................................... 10-4
Gear selector lever in automatic How to fasten the seat belts in Inside rearview mirror........................ 10-5
transmission*................................. 6-7 second row seat............................. 8-6 Front storage compartment/cigarette
Driving tips for automatic How to fasten the seat belt (3-point) lighter........................................... 10-6
transmission................................... 6-9 in second row seat......................... 8-7 Center console.................................. 10-7
Gear selector lever positions............. 6-11 Child restraints and pregnant woman Power outlet...................................... 10-8
Winter (W) / Standard mode (S)........ 6-19 . ..................................................... 8-9 Glove box/courtesy lamp................... 10-9
Safety mode (automatic transmission) Warnings for seat belt........................ 8-17 Rear cup holder/jack storage/
. ................................................... 6-20 Air bag*.............................................. 8-19 DVD changer* storage............... 10-10
Parking aid system (PAS)*................ 6-21 Airbag non-inflation conditions.......... 8-23 Seatback pocket/map pocket.......... 10-11
Rearview camera system*................. 6-25 Warnings for air bag.......................... 8-27 Sun visors........................................ 10-12
Front view camera system*............... 6-26 Front room lamps/sunglasses
09 V
entilation, Heating, storage....................................... 10-13
Brake system..................................... 6-27
Air Conditioning and Center and rear room lamps/assist
Parking brake operation.................... 6-32
Air Purification System grip............................................. 10-14
Heater/air conditioner system.............. 9-2 Storage box in luggage compartment/
07 Seats luggage net................................ 10-15
Warnings and cautions........................ 9-4
Devices related to seat........................ 7-2 Rear heated glass/removable
Automatic heater / air conditioner........ 9-5
Driver’s seat........................................ 7-5 ashtray....................................... 10-17
Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)......... 9-11 Roof rack*........................................ 10-18
Passenger’s seat............................... 7-10
Second row seat................................ 7-11 Defogging and defrosting.................. 9-12 Digital clock..................................... 10-19
Third row seat.................................... 7-13 Replacing air conditioner filter........... 9-13 Audio system*................................. 10-20
Seat heating/ventilation function*...... 7-15 AQS (air quality system).................... 9-15 Smart audio*.................................... 10-21
GETtheMANUALS.org
SD card slot, terminal for connecting Scheduled maintenance services (EU)
12 Service and Maintenance
external device and port*........... 10-22 - diesel engine (D22DTR).......... 12-37
Daily check list................................... 12-2
Bluetooth hands-free system........... 10-24 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN)
Locations in engine compartment..... 12-3 - diesel engine (D22DTR).......... 12-40
Engine oil........................................... 12-7 Scheduled maintenance services (EU)
11 In Case of Emergency
Engine coolant................................. 12-10 - diesel engine (D20DTR).......... 12-43
Starting the engine with jumper
Air cleaner....................................... 12-12 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN)
cables.......................................... 11-2
Power steering fluid......................... 12-14 - diesel engine (D20DTR).......... 12-46
Cautions when a tire is flat................ 11-4
Fuel filter and priming pump............ 12-15 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN)
Warning triangle*............................... 11-5
Fuel filter and priming pump (without - diesel engine (D27DT/D27DTP)
OVM tools.......................................... 11-6
additional water separator)........ 12-16 . ................................................. 12-49
Removing the spare tire.................... 11-7
Fuel filter and water separator* (with Scheduled maintenance services
Changing a spare tire........................ 11-8 additional water separator)........ 12-17 (gasoline engine)....................... 12-52
Cautions when changing the tire..... 11-13 Fuel filter.......................................... 12-20
How to use service kit* (emergency Drive belt (for gasoline) / brake pedal & 13 Lamp
puncture repair kit)..................... 11-14 clutch pedal................................ 12-21 Bulb specifications and functional
When the engine is overheating...... 11-20 Parking brake / catalytic converter.. 12-22 check........................................... 13-2
Water separator warning light and Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)..... 12-23 Hid headlamp*................................... 13-3
engine check warning light........ 11-22
Transfercase fluid............................ 12-24 Location of exterior lamps................. 13-4
Shift lever lock release and safety
Washer fluid..................................... 12-25 Interior lamp...................................... 13-9
mode reset................................. 11-23
Battery............................................. 12-26
Towing a disabled vehicle................ 11-24
Spark plugs..................................... 12-28 14 Index
Emergency towing........................... 11-25
Fuse and relay box.......................... 12-29
Trailer towing................................... 11-27
Tire.................................................. 12-31
Accident or fire................................ 11-32
Wiper blade replacement................ 12-35
Emission reduction device............... 11-33
Do-it-yourself operation................... 12-36
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Dimensions.......................................................0-2
3
Vehicle identification.........................................0-7
Switches and devices.......................................0-8 4
Engine compartment.........................................0-9
5
Important notice..............................................0-13
Protection of the environment.........................0-14 6
Certification.....................................................0-15 7
General
8
Information
9
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dimensions Unit: mm
1 Top View Front View
4
1,900
7
Side View Rear View
8
10
11
12
2,835
13 4,755
14

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (I) * ( ): Optional, [ ]: 2WD, < >: DPF
D20DTR: Diesel 2.0, D27DT: Diesel 2.7, D27DTP: Diesel 2.7 Power-Up, G32D: Gasoline
Overall length (mm) 4,755 ← ← ← ←

Overall width (mm) 1,900 ← ← ← ←
Overall height (mm) 1,840 ← ← ← ←
Gross vehicle weight (kg) 2,710 [2,650] ← 2,740 ← ←
1,995 (2,090) 1,985 (2,053)
A/T 2,033 (2,098) 2,008 (2,080) 2,021 (2,095)
General [1,954 (2,048)] [1,925 (1,993)]
Curb vehicle weight (kg)
1,984 (2,069) 1,960 (2,020) _ _
M/T 2,007 (2,072)
[1,917 (2,003)] [1,901 (1,960)]
Fuel Diesel ← ← ← Gasoline
Fuel tank capacity (ℓ) 78 ← ← ← ←
Minimum turning radius 5.5m ← ← ← ←
Numbers of cylinders/ 5 / 18:1
4 / 15.5:1 4 / 16.5:1 5 / 17.5:1 6 / 10:1
Compression ratio (EURO IV 17.5:1)
Total displacement (cc) 2,157 1,998 2,696 ← 3,199
Camshaft arrangement DOHC ← ← ← ←
165 PS / 4,000 186 PS / 4,000
220 PS / 6,100
A/T <155 PS / rpm <161 PS / rpm <180 PS
rpm
Max. power 178 PS / 4,000 rpm 3,400 ~ 4,000 4,000 rpm> /4,000 rpm>
Engine
rpm> 165 PS / _ _
M/T
4,000 rpm
340 Nm / 1,800 402 Nm / 1,600 312 Nm / 4,600
A/T <360 Nm /
400 Nm / ~ 3,250 rpm ~ 3,000 rpm rpm
Max. torque 1,500 ~ 2,800
1,400 ~ 2,800 rpm 340 Nm / 1,800 _ _
M/T rpm>
~ 3,250 rpm
Idle speed 700 ± 50 rpm 780 ± 50 rpm 750 ± 20 rpm ← 700 ± 50 rpm
General Information 0-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (II) *( ): Optional
Water- cooled /
Cooling system ← ← ← ←
forced circulation
Coolant capacity (ℓ) 8.5 ← 11.0 ~ 11.5 ← 11.5 ~ 12.0
Gear pump,
Engine Lubrication type ← ← ← ←
forced circulation
Max. oil capacity (ℓ) (when shipping) 6.0 ← 9.2 ← 9.8
Turbocharger, _
Turbocharger and cooling type ← ← ←
air-cooled
Semi- Remote
_ _
Operating type control, floor change ← ←
type
_ _
1st 4.489 ← 4.315
_ _
2nd 2.337 ← 2.475
Manual
_ _
Transmission 3rd 1.350 ← 1.536
Gear ratio _ _
4th 1.000 ← 1.000
5th 0.784 ← 0.807 _ _
_ _ _
6th 0.679 ←
_ _
Reverse 4.253 ← 3.919

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (III) *( ): Optional
Model Electronic, 5-speed ← ← ← ←

Operating type Floor change type ← ← ← ←
1st 4.377 3.595 ← ← 3.951
2nd 2.859 2.186 ← ← 2.423
3rd 1.921 1.405 ← ← 1.486
4th 1.368 1.000 ← ← 1.000
Automatic
Transmission 5th 1.000 0.831 ← ← 0.833
Gear ratio 6th 0.820 - - - -
7th 0.728 - - - -
Reverse
3.416 3.167 ← ← 3.147
1st
Reverse
2.231 1.926 ← ← 1.930
2nd
Part-time Part-time
Model Part-time ← AWD
(TOD) (AWD)
_ Planetary gear
Type Planetary gear type ← ←
Transfer Case type
_
High (4H) 1.000 : 1 ← ← 1.000 : 1
Gear ratio _ 2.483 : 1
Low (4L) 2.483 : 1 ← ←
(AWD: _)
_ _
Operating type Hydraulic type ← ←
Clutch (M/T) Dry single _ _
Disc type ← ←
diaphragm type
Type Rack and pinion ← ← ← ←
Power
Inner 38.2° ← ← ← ←
Steering Steering angle
Outer 34.1° ← ← ← ←

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (IV) *( ): Optional
Drive shaft type Ball joint type ← ← ← ←

Front Axle Build-up type
Axle housing type Build-up type ← ← IOP type
(IOP type)
Semi-floating
Drive shaft type Semi-floating type ← type (Ball joint ← ←
Rear Axle type)
Build-up type
Axle housing type ← ← ← ←
(IRS type)
Master cylinder type Tandem type ← ← ← ←
Vacuum assisted
Booster type ← ← ← ←
booster type
Front
Brake Disc type ← ← ← ←
wheels
Brake type
Rear
Disc type ← ← ← ←
wheels
Parking brake Cable type ← ← ← ←
Double - wishbone +
Front suspension ← ← ← ←
coil spring
Suspension 5-link + coil spring 5-link + coil
5-link + coil
Rear suspension (Multi-link + Coil ← spring (Multi-link ←
spring
spring) + Coil spring)
R-134a / 720 ± 30g
Air Conditioner Refrigerant (capacity) (R-134a / 1050 ± ← ← ← ←
30g)
Battery type / Capacity (V-AH) MF / 12 - 90 ← ← ← ←
Electrical Starter capacity (V-kW) 12 - 2.3 ← 12 - 2.2 ← 12 - 1.8
Alternator capacity (V-A) 12-120 ← 12-140 ← 12-115

GETtheMANUALS.org
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
1. Engine Number 2. Vin Label 3. Chassis Number
Gasoline Engine: The engine The chassis number is stamped

number is stamped on the lower on the frame behind the front
area of cylinder block in exhaust right tire.
manifold side.
4. Certification Label
D22DTR D20DTR D27DT D27DTP

Diesel Engine (D22DTR, D20DTR, D27DT, D27DTP): The engine number is stamped on the The certification label is located
lower area of cylinder block behind the Intake manifold. on the driver’s door sill.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Room lamp switch
Sunroof switch*
Wiper and
washer switch
Light switch
Auto cruise*
Center switch
Rear fog
light switch*
Door lock/ Remote control
unlock switch switch on steering
Driver seat heating/
ventilation switch* wheel HLLD*
Passenger seat heating/ 4-wheel drive switch*
ventilation switch*
USB port & Aux jack
(USB & HDMI port)* Door lock/unlock switch
Window control
switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Coolant
Front washer
surge tank
fluid reservoir
Fuel filter
Brake and clutch

Power steering
fluid reservoir
fluid reservoir
Engine oil fuse box
dipstick
Air cleaner Battery

GETtheMANUALS.org
Relay and
Brake and clutch fuse box
fluid reservoir
Front washer
fluid reservoir
Power steering
Coolant surge Engine oil cap fluid reservoir Fuel filter
tank
Engine oil
dipstick
Air cleaner Battery

GETtheMANUALS.org
D27DT(P) diesel ENGINE
Caution
Do not work on the engine compartment while the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, muffler or catalytic
converter is hot. Always turn the engine off and allow it to cool before starting the maintenance.
Always keep your hands and tools away from the moving parts when the engine is running. Front washer
fluid reservoir
Coolant surge tank
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir Relay and
(for manual transmission) fuse box
Engine oil dipstick

Engine oil filler cap
Air cleaner
Battery
Without Additional With Additional

Water Separator Water Separator
3
Power steering
1 3 fluid reservoir
2
1
1. Priming pump 2. Water separator 3. Fuel filter

GETtheMANUALS.org
G32D Gasoline ENGINE
Coolant surge tank

Front washer
fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick
Relay and
fuse box
Battery
Air cleaner
Power steering
fluid reservoir

GETtheMANUALS.org
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Please read this manual and follow the instructions carefully. All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual
are based on the latest product information available at the
Signal words such as “WARNING”, “CAUTION” and “NOTE”
time of publication.
have special meanings.
Ssangyong reserves the right to change specifications or de-
WARNING sign at any time without notice and without incurring any obli-
gation whatsoever.
Warning
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not This vehicle may not comply with the standards or regulations
avoided, could result in death or serious injury. of other countries. Before attempting to register this vehicle in
any other country, check all applicable regulations and make
CAUTION any necessary modifications.
Caution
This manual describes options and trim levels available at the
time of printing, and therefore, some of the items covered may
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
not apply to your vehicle. If any doubt exists about any of the
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or property dam-
age. options or trim levels, please do not hesitate to contact your
Ssangyong Distributor for information on the latest specifica-
tions.
This must absolutely be observed for safety precau-
tions. * : This asterisk in this manual signifies that an item of equip-
ment is not included in all vehicles (model variants, engine
options, models specific to one country, optional equipment,
NOTE etc.).
Note We would like to point out that non Ssangyong Genuine parts
NOTE indicates information to assist maintenance and instruc- and accessories have not been examined and approved by
tions. Ssangyong, and in spite of continuous market product moni-
toring, we cannot certify the suitability nor the safety of such
For product design changes products whether they are installed or intended for fitment in
For a highest level of safety and quality, we are innovating our vehicles
our vehicles. Ssangyong is not liable for any damage caused
through our continual research and development efforts. As a result, by the use of non Ssangyong Genuine parts and accessories.
the specifications are subject to change for the purpose of improve-
ment without any notice and you may find material in this manual that
does not apply to your specific vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
CAUTIONS FOR ENVIRONMENT
You can contribute to the protection of the environment by fol-
Ssangyong Motor Company is pursuing environmental friendly
lowing the below rules.
policies and initiatives. This is the way we can save the natural
resources and humankind can live harmoniously with nature.
You also can contribute to the protection of the environment Driving Conditions
while driving your Ssangyong vehicle. � Drive off the vehicle slowly.
The fuel consumption and engine speed, transmission, brake � Avoid short trip.
and wear of the tires are subject to the following factors:
� Keep the specified tire inflation pressure.
� Driving conditions
� Unload the unnecessary goods from luggage compartment.
� Driving habits
� Always check the fuel economy.
� Have the maintenance service regularly.
� Visit Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center for maintenance service.
Driving Habits
� Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the en-
gine.
� Keep the safe distance with vehicle ahead.
� Avoid abrupt and frequent acceleration.
� Shift the gear at proper time and do not overrun the engine
in each gear.
� Turn off the engine when you stop the vehicle for a long
time.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CERTIFICATION
1. Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Hereby, SsangYong, declares that the in-vehicle mounted radio systems are in compliance
CE EU
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC
Model: TSSSG4G5 and TSSRE4Db
FCC ID: OYGTSSRE4DB
ORD. No: 14778/DFRS19614/F-50
FCC (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and AMERICA
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
Warning
LOGO

CU TR CIS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Model: TSSRE4Db
The device passed all the conformity assesment procedures to CU TR.
EAC mark in the user manual due to product size.

GETtheMANUALS.org
2. FOB/FOLDING
FCC ID: DEO-MT-FLIP01
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
FCC (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may AMERICA
Warning
LOGO
TR CIS

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
C
hecks before starting a journey......................1-2
3
S
afety instructions.............................................1-7
S
tarting the engine and driving the vehicle....1-17 4
V
ehicle care.....................................................1-20
5
C
aring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F).......1-30
1
P
recautions regarding unauthorized 6
modification & alteration.................................1-33
7
D
irect injection type diesel engine..................1-36 Safety
8
Precautions
9
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY
1 Check The Vehicle Outside Inside Of Engine Compartment
2
vr vr
MAX
3 MIN MAX
vr vr MIN
vr
4
Engine oil Coolant

5
6
MAX vr vr
MIN
7 MAX
MIN
Brake/clutch fluid Power steering fluid

8
yy Make sure to carry out the daily inspections before starting yy Check the engine oil and other fluid/oil levels in the engine
9 off your vehicle. compartment.
yy Check the tire inflation and wear.Clean the windshield and
10 rear glasses, side mirrors, and room mirror.
yy Make sure that the engine hood and tailgate are properly closed.
11 yy Make sure that there are no obstacles in the danger area
around the vehicle.
12 yy Make sure that there is not any trace of leak around the vehicle.
 For details, refer to chapter 12 “Service and maintenance”.
13
14

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check The Tires
yy Using wheel and tire other than the specified sizes could
cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehicle
control, resulting in a serious accident.
yy The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may
cause abnormal operation of the steering wheel, increased
fuel consumption, increase braking distance, vibration, im-
proper operation of ABS/ESP, or uneven tire wear. It may
also damage to the powertrain of the vehicle.
yy Use only the same tires from same tire manufacturer for all
the wheels. Otherwise, the powertrain may be damaged.
yy Check the conditions and pressure of the temporary (spare)
tire as needed and always keep it available. The temporary
tire should be replaced with a regular tire as soon as pos-
sible.
yy Check the tire inflation and wear everyday and replace if
necessary.
yy Be sure to keep the specified tire inflation pressure. Note
What is “Standing Wave”?
yy Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the
During driving, the rotating tire repeats deformation and restoring
spare wheel, before any long journey. When driving the ve-
movement in its tread portion. However, when a tire with insufficient
hicle with insufficient tire inflation pressure, the tire could be inflation pressure rolls on the road with high speed, a wave-like
blown out, because of standing wave symptom, resulting in deformation occurs in the radial direction near and behind the tire
severe injury and death. tread portion. This wavy deformation is called “ standing wave”. If
this symptom lasts for an extended period of time, the tire could be
blown out in a short period of time.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check The Vehicle Inside
yy Do not put anything under driver’s seat.
Caution
yy Do not leave empty bottles or cans near or under the driver’s seat.
If it hinders the brake or accelerator pedal operation, it may cause
an unexpected accident.
yy Only use a floor mat with the correct size for your vehicle. And,
make sure not to move the mat while driving. If it hinders the brake
or accelerator pedal operation, it may cause an unexpected ac-
cident.
yy Do not wear the uncomfortable shoes such as high hills or slip-
pers when driving.
yy Adjust the driver’s seat, headrest and steering wheel for

comfortable driving.
y Adjust the outside and inside rear view mirrors.
y
Caution
Do not attempt to adjust the driver’s seat, headrest, rear view mir-
rors, or steering wheel while driving. Adjustments should be done
before driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Black-Face
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
Standard
READY
yy Check that all appropriate warning lights, indicators and yy Check the operations of the clutch pedal, accelerator pedal,
gauges (fuel, vehicle speed, engine rpm) are operating and brake pedal.
when turning the ignition key to the “ON” position.
Caution
Release the parking brake and check that the Brake warning light on
the instrument cluster is turned off.
Warning
When releasing the parking brake, firmly press the brake pedal so
that the vehicle is completely stationary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy Fasten the seat belts and be sure that all other occupants yy Keep the safety precautions for seat belt (refer to chapter 8).
have fastened theirs properly. yy Objects placed in the rear seat or luggage room must not
yy Do not drive with a twisted or tangled seat belt. exceed the height of the seat. It may fall down during the
hard braking and could result in an unexpected accident.
yy Slide the latch plate of the seat belt into the buckle until you
yy Make sure that there are no person or obstacles in the dan-
hear a “click”. gerous area around the vehicle.
yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when releasing the park-
Caution
ing brake.
Do not recline the seatback with the seat belt fastened. You could
slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or
death.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Infant, Child, Old Person No Alcohol Drugs!
yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle yy Avoid driving for an extended period of time. Driving con-
with the doors locked. They can move the vehicle unexpect- tinuously without rest makes you prone to dozing off and
edly. They can be suffocated in especially hot weather. thus causes an accident. For your safety, take a rest every
yy To prevent children from interfering with your driving by ac- 2 hours.
cidental movements or misusing of devices, children should yy Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs is prohibited.
sit in the rear seat. It impairs judgment, making driving highly risky. Drunk driv-
yy Do not let children, infants, old people, or a pregnant ing is also a legal offense.
woman sit in the front passenger seat with the airbag. The yy Driving after taking medicine can be more dangerous than
degree of shock of the airbag’s expansion can be fatal or the drunk driving depending on the medicine you took.
inflict serious injuries to such passengers. An infant or small Therefore do not drive the car after taking medicine.
child should always be restrained in a proper infant or child
restraint in rear seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Sleeping In Your Vehicle Do Not Drive with Tailgate Or
yy Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In par- Doors Open
ticular, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine running yy Do not run the engine with the tailgate open to avoid ex-
and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffo- haust gas entering into passenger compartment.
cate to death.
yy If you drive your vehicle with the tailgate open, loose ob-
yy Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts jects inside the vehicle may cause an accident.
you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts.
yy Driving the vehicle with the doors open puts the passenger
yy While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift at risk of being thrown out, which can cause serious injury.
lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident. While
sleeping in the car with the engine running, you may ac- yy Always drive the vehicle with the doors and tailgate locked.
cidentally step on the accelerator, thereby overheating the Opening a door during driving, especially by children, may
engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire. cause a serious accident.
Cabin Ventilation
yy Volatile organic compounds, or VOCs, can be emitted from
the materials in the cabin of the vehicle parked for a long
time in direct sunlight. Therefore, to prevent the driver and
passengers from being exposed to these harmful chemicals
and keep the comfortable indoor environment, open all win-
dows of the vehicle which is parked under the sun prior to
entering.
yy Prolonged driving without proper ventilation can cause
headaches and dizziness. Set the air source selection
switch to the fresh air intake mode for as long as possible or
open the windows periodically while driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do Not Stick Any Part Of Your Body Power Window
Out Of The Window Or Sunroof
Do not stick any part of your body out of the window and sun- yy When you operate the rear windows from the driver’s seat
roof while the car is running or while you are maneuvering to while a child sits in the rear, make sure that no body part of
park. the child is between the window and the window frame.
You might be hurt by the passing vehicles or other unseen ob- yy When carrying children in the rear seat, press the rear door
stacles. window lock switch to make the rear door switches inopera-
tive.
yy Make sure that all passengers have their body parts such
as hands inside the vehicle.
yy When closing the windows, be aware of safety conditions
before operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check For Any Passing Vehicle Stopping And Parking The Vehicle
When Getting Off yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle
with the doors locked. They can move the vehicle unexpect-
edly. They can be suffocated in especially hot weather.
yy When parking the vehicle on a hilly road, apply the parking
brake and chock the blocks under the wheels. And, place
the gear shift lever in “R” (when parked downhill) or “1”
(when parked uphill) for vehicles with the manual transmis-
sion or place the gear shift lever in “P” for vehicles with the
automatic transmission.
yy If possible, do not stop and park the vehicle on the steep
road.
yy If possible, do not park the vehicle in a humid area or en-
closed area.
yy Do not park in places where hay, foliage, paper, rags, oil, or
other easily inflammable materials are kept. While driving or
after immediately driving, the muffler and exhaust pipe are
hot; inflammable materials near the vehicle might cause a
When getting off, check the rear and side of the car for pass- fire.
ing vehicles or pedestrians.
yy When running the engine while stopping, keep enough dis-
Vehicles or motorcycles coming from the rear, if unchecked, tance from the wall to avoid a fire and discoloration of ve-
might stumble on you when you open the door. hicle.
yy Apply the parking brake when you park the vehicle.
yy Do not use “P” position as a parking brake. Securely apply
the parking brake when you park the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warming Up The Engine Prohibition Of Sudden Accelerat-
yy Do not drive without warming up the engine. Driving imme- ing, Braking And Starting
diately after starting the engine may decrease the engine’s Do not accelerate, start and brake the vehicle suddenly. Oth-
life expectancy. Warm up the engine before moving your erwise, it may increase fuel consumption and cause risk of a
vehicle. car accident. Accelerate or decelerate softly.
yy Do not warm up the engine excessively. Warm up the en-
gine just until the coolant temperature gauge begins to
move. Do Not Turn The Steering Wheel
yy Excessive engine warming increases the fuel consumption Abruptly
and air pollution. An optimized warming up time is approx. 2
Abrupt operation of steering wheel makes the vehicle unstable
minutes.
and may cause an accident.
yy Do not warm up in an airtight space. Exhaust fume may re-
sult in toxicities.
 Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up period. Do Not Run The Engine In An En-
closed Area
Do Not Stop The Engine While Driv- Leaving the engine running in an enclosed place with no air
ventilation, might result in death from carbon monoxide poi-
ing soning.
Do not stop the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the
steering wheel heavier, the brake performance lower and, con-
sequently, gets extremely dangerous. Do not use a cellular phone or
watch DMB including DVD while
driving
Using your cellular phone or watching DMB (including DVD)
while driving will distract yourself and may cause an accident.
If necessary, pull over your vehicle safely to use your cellular
phone.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Passing The Intersection Or Engine Brake
Railway Crossing When driving down a long slope, use the engine brake effect
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the ve- by downshifting the transmission in steps according to the
hicle to check the safety and drive through as fast as you can driving conditions while using the service brake. An excessive
while using low speed gear and without shifting the gear. If the operation of the service brake could result in a “Fade” or “Vapor
engine is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway Lock” effect.
crossing, get someone to help you and move the car to a safe
place quickly. Fade?
tween the brake pads and discs, caused by heat build-up
Hazardous Materials through repeated or prolonged brake application.
Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the
Vapor Lock?
console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode
and cause a fire. When the brake is excessively applied on a downhill, some
bubbles can be formed in brake cylinder or in brake lines.
Because of these bubbles, hydraulic braking pressure can-
Extinguisher not be transferred to braking units of the vehicle despite the
For safety, we strongly recommend that you have an extin- fully depressed brake pedal.
guisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be
familiar with how to use it.
System Protection (Delayed Ac-
celeration)
Do not depress the brake pedal while driving with the acceler-
ator pedal depressed. Otherwise, the response from accelera-
tor pedal may be delayed. This symptom is the safety function
to protect the vehicle’s powertrain system. This symptom can
be eliminated if you depress and release the accelerator pedal
once with the brake pedal not depressed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Being Careful With Accessories Always Using Ssangyong Genuine
Do not attach accessories or other unnecessary things to your Parts
car’s windows as they might interfere with your driving. At- yy You can maintain the safety and performance of your car by
tached accessories can work as a convex lens and cause a using only specified parts or Ssangyong genuine parts.
fire or cause an accident.
yy You can distinguish specified parts by their part numbers
and hologram.
Being Careful While Checking
Coolant
To avoid being scalded, do not remove the engine coolant res-
ervoir cap when the engine is hot.
Warning
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the en-
gine and the radiator are hot. The cooling system may
spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious
injuries.
Part numbers Hologram
Caution
yy The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non-
Ssangyong genuine parts.
yy You can distinguish an authentic Ssangyong genuine part by its
hologram.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving On A Snowy Or Icy Road Driving On A Sandy Or Muddy Road
yy Shift to the lowest possible gear and drive slowly. yy Keep your speed steady as low as possible.
yy Since your braking distance is longer than usual, allow a yy While driving, be careful not to accelerate or stop too quick-
longer following distance. ly because you might get stuck in sand or mud.
yy If you accelerate or brake too fast, your vehicle will slide yy If your vehicle gets stuck in sand or mud, insert a rock or a
and you might get in an accident, so drive with caution. piece of wood under the stuck wheel, lightly apply the ac-
When braking, use the engine brake; apply your brakes only celerator pedal and gently shift back and forth between the
after you have slowed down considerably. reverse and forward gear to allow inertia to get your vehicle
yy When going down a slippery downhill, use the engine brake out.
and drive slowly.
Caution
Caution When your vehicle is stuck in sand or mud and you step on the accel-
erator pedal excessively in order to get out of there, the tire slip may oc-
When traveling on a snowy or icy road, use snow tires for safer
cur which results in the damage of the transmission and corresponding
driving.
drive system. In that case, get another vehicle to tow you if possible.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving On Unpaved And Mountain Going Through Water
Roads yy If water gets into the electric system or engine, it might
yy Before driving, check road conditions such as if the road cause irreparable damage to your vehicle. Please refrain
suddenly ends, or if there is enough space for a U-turn in from underwater driving.
the middle of the road. yy If going through water is unavoidable, choose a shallow
yy It’s easy to slide in a road covered with much sand or with spot where the exhaust outlet wouldn’t get submerged in
much dry dirt. Keep your speed low and steady. water and proceed slowly at a steady speed.
yy There is a danger of driving off the mountain road, so stay yy Before going through water, get out of your vehicle and
alert. check the bottom of the river. Do not go through water if the
bottom is sandy or covered with big rocks.
yy When coasting downhill, do not change gears; go down
slowly by applying the engine brake. yy If several vehicles are going through water together, the
first vehicle might burrow into the bottom, so be careful and
cross in a different place if possible.
Warning
In high mountain area  Important things to remember when going through
The operation stability of diesel engine is not guaranteed in high water
mountainous area over 2,500 meters. The short trip such as passing
yy If the engine stops while you are going through water, do
through tunnel in this area is acceptable. However, do not keep driv-
not try to restart. Get your vehicle towed.
ing there for a long time. If you drive your vehicle in very high altitude
for long time, the engine could be damaged. The engine power, yy Be particularly careful not to allow water to enter into the
climbing ability and emission are subject to the altitude. engine through the air cleaner.
yy Never change gears while going through water.
Warning
If water gets into the brake system, the effectiveness of the brakes
decreases. After going through water, move slowly and gently ap-
plying the brakes several times so that frictional heat dries the brake
pads and discs. Check if the brakes work properly before continuing
driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
 Checking your vehicle after going through water Freeway Driving
yy Check the front, rear, right and left sides, transaxle, axle
yy Before getting on a freeway, listen to the weather forecast,
hubs, propeller shaft, oil and fluid levels, and underbody; if
prepare thoroughly and check the fuel level, brake system,
you discover problems, get your vehicle checked immedi-
cooling system, and tires.
ately.
yy Always respect the speed limit and refrain from speeding.
yy Check all lamps and other electrical devices. If necessary,
replace damaged components and get your vehicle checked. yy Allow for a safe following distance, avoid sudden steering
movements.
yy Check for damages to the vehicle body and underbody; if
you discover problems, get your vehicle checked immedi- yy When it rains or snows and the weather conditions are ad-
ately. verse, double the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle running in front of you. And reduce your speed by
yy If the vehicle body is very dirty, wash your car to protect it.
half.
Driving On Hill Roads Caution

Do not idle the engine for a long time; it wastes fuel and causes
Position the gearshift lever in accordance with the road condi- environmental pollution.
tions. yy Drive at a slow speed for the first 2 km if possible.
yy Do not load your vehicle with unnecessary stuff.
Warning yy Refrain from quick accelerating and abrupt braking, travel at a
yy If you suddenly use the engine brake on an icy or slippery road, the steady speed.
vehicle might slide and get in an accident. Use the engine brakes yy When you park or stop for a long time, turn the engine off.
after fully reducing your vehicle speed. yy Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
yy If you repeatedly apply your brakes on a long downgrade, they yy Keep your vehicle in the best possible condition by periodically
may overheat, their effectiveness decreases and an accident checking it and perform maintenance.
might occur. When on a long downgrade, use the engine brake
together with your brakes.
Caution
If you suddenly apply the engine brake while traveling at a high
speed, the engine may get damaged. Slow down the vehicle speed
and then downshift the gear.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the Engine and Driving the Vehicle
ENGINE STARTING
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. * Gasoline engine equipped vehicle
2. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to
dangerous area around the vehicle. “START” position and hold it there without depressing the
accelerator pedal until the engine starts (a maximum of 10
Caution seconds), then release the key.
yy The engine in automatic transmission equipped vehicle can be * Diesel engine equipped vehicle
started only when the gear selector lever is at the “P” or “N”
position. The engine in manual transmission equipped vehicle can Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the
be started only when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. “ON” position. As soon as the glow indicator ( ) goes
yy Do not turn the ignition key to the “START” position while the out, turn it to “START” position and hold it there without
engine is running. It could result in serious start motor damage. depressing the accelerator pedal until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.
Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position and de- CAUTION
press the brake pedal. If the engine fails to start, turn the key back to “LOCK” position
* Manual transmission equipped vehicle and wait for 10 seconds. Then try again before any attempt to start
the engine.
Move the gear shift lever to the Neutral position and fully
depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal. 5. Warm up the engine properly according to the ambient tem-
perature.
Warning
Depress the brake pedal when the gear shift lever is at the “P”
(A/T) or “Neutral”(M/T) position. Never depress the accelerator
pedal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING OFF STOPPING THE ENGINE
1. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the 1. Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
dangerous area around the vehicle.
2. Release the parking brake. Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position.
3. * Automatic transmission equipped vehicle * Manual transmission equipped vehicle
Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into the “D” or Move the gear shift lever to the Neutral position.
“R” position. Make sure that the position indicator of “D”
or “R” comes on. Slowly release the brake pedal to begin 3. * REKES system equipped vehicle
moving. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position.
* Manual transmission equipped vehicle 4. Apply the parking brake.
Keep the brake pedal and clutch pedal depressed and shift 5. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder.
into the “1” or “R” position. Release the brake pedal and
gradually depress the accelerator pedal while slowly releas- Note
ing the clutch to begin moving. Diesel engine learning mode: The learning mode of the fuel injector
is performed while the vehicle is driven or stationary to maintain the
optimized engine condition. Weak noise and vibration of the engine
may be accompanied by this mode. But, it is normal operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Starting the vehicle in the winter months or operating the A/C in yy If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud or sand, depressing
the summer months increases the engine rpm. Drivers must be the accelerator pedal harder only makes the tires slip more which
careful when driving at this time because the vehicle can move in turn causes damage to the transmission. If this happens, tow
faster than normal. the vehicle away or take other actions as appropriate.
yy Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle, including installa- yy Always contact the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
tion of an electronic device such as after-market remote starting Authorized Service Center for adding and changing transmission
system, could seriously affect its performance and safety and may fluid. A non-genuine fluid can cause various problems including
lead to a serious injury or death. malfunction and performance deterioration of the transmission,
yy Using a mobile telephone or two-way radio requires careful and those damages are not covered by the warranty.
considerations. The electronic control system of the vehicle is yy The application of tint film, especially metallic film, may interfere
subject to possible errors due to electronic interference caused with radio signals. Low visible light transmission (VLT) of the film
by improper use of these devices, and the electromagnetic waves can lead to malfunction in the headlamp. Also, make sure that no
can be harmful to the human body. liquid solution for application of tint film flows into the electronic
yy When leaving the vehicle unattended, always turn off the engine components of the vehicle to prevent error or malfunction.
to prevent unexpected rolling away. yy The tinted glass with very low VLT and enhanced solar control
yy Always apply the parking brake with the brake pedal depressed characteristics reduces visibility through the glass significantly,
when the vehicle is stopped. especially at night or in the rain, thereby causing unforeseen
yy Do not store personal belongs and valuables inside the vehicle. safety problems.
When leaving the vehicle unattended, always make sure all the yy The interior materials of the new vehicle within a year or use can
doors including the tailgate are closed and locked. emit volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Therefore, always open
yy Improper alignment of vibration dampers for the exhaust system all the windows for sufficient ventilation before entering. Those
(rubber hanger bracket) may result in serious vibration problems. chemicals can cause headaches and dizziness especially in
When reinstalling the exhaust system after undercoating, check the cabin of the vehicle parked for a long time in direct sunlight.
the alignment of the dampers. Therefore, to prevent the driver and passengers from being ex-
posed to these harmful chemicals and keep the comfortable indoor
yy Always check the accelerator and brake pedals with your right foot
environment, set the air source selection switch to the fresh air
before starting the vehicle. Even an experienced driver can ac-
intake mode for as long as possible or open the windows periodi-
cidentally hit the wrong pedal if he/she drives different vehicles.
cally while driving.
yy Power unit of the vehicle operates independently of the braking
system of the vehicle, so just calmly depress the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle when it moves unintentionally due to the driver
error including pedal misapplication or a malfunction.

GETtheMANUALS.org
VEHICLE CARE
BREAK-in Period Cleaning Agents
Follow the manufacturer’s advice whenever cleaning agents
or other chemicals are used for the inside or the outside of the
vehicle. Some cleaners may be poisonous or flammable, and
improper use may cause personal injury or damage. When
cleaning the inside or outside of the vehicle, do not use volatile
cleaning solvents such as: acetone, lacquer thinners, enamel
reducers, nail polish removers; or cleaning materials such as
laundry soaps, bleaches or reducing agents, except as noted
in the fabric cleaning advice on stain removal. Never use car-
bon tetrachloride, petrol, benzene, or naphtha for any clean-
ing purpose. Open all vehicle doors for ventilation when any
cleaning agents or other chemicals are used in the interior.
There are no particular break-in rules for your new vehicle. Overexposure to some vapors may result in a health problem
However, following a few simple precautions for the first 1000 km which is more likely to occur in small, unventilated spaces. To
can add to good future performance, fuel economy and long avoid possible permanent discoloration of light colored seats,
life of your vehicle. do not let materials with non-fast colors come in contact with
yy Allow the engine to warm up after starting. seat trim materials until these materials are totally dry. This
yy Avoid harsh operations such as abrupt starts, sudden ac- includes certain types of casual clothing, such as colored den-
celeration and prolonged high speed driving. ims, corduroys, leathers and suedes; also, decorative paper,
yy Do not race the engine. etc.
yy Do not maintain a single speed for long period of time. Vary-
ing engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
yy Avoid overload when climbing.
yy Check the engine oil level more frequently until 5000 km of
driving and add the oil if necessary.
yy Do not tow a trailer during the first 1,000 km of operation.
yy During the first 1000 km of towing a trailer, do not drive the
vehicle over 80 km/h or do not drive off the vehicle with full
acceleration. Otherwise, engine or its components could be
damaged due to overload.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Vehicle Washing Caution
To avoid corrosion, wash your vehicle as soon as possible yy Be careful not to damage the air spoiler when cleaning the vehicle
after driving on a coastal road (salted road), on a road where in an automatic car wash.
the snow removal chemicals (calcium chloride etc.) has been yy Wash your car by hand or using an automatic car washing ma-
spreaded, in the area where the atmospheric fallout/industrial chine. Avoid using a high pressure cleaner as much as possible
pollutants are exist, or on a muddy or dusty road. Also, imme- to maintain and manage the car performance. The high water
diately wash your vehicle when things such as tree sap or bird pressure can cause painted surface damage of the panels or mal-
droppings get on the painted surface. function of the sensors on the bumper. In case where using a high
pressure cleaner is unavoidable, pay attention to the conditions
Do not wash your vehicle under direct sunlight. Always wash of your car by allowing enough space between a high-pressure
your vehicle in the shade. If your vehicle has been parked un- water gun and your vehicle.
der direct sunlight for a long period, let it cool sufficiently be- yy If the engine compartment is cleaned with water (or high-pressure
fore washing. car washing), the water may go into the electrical circuits or air
ducts located on the engine compartment, which causes the ve-
How To Wash: hicle not to maneuver properly.
yy Rinse the vehicle throughly with cool water to remove dust yy After washing the vehicle, check whether the brake is affected
by water by testing the brake operation while driving the vehicle
and loose dirt.
at low speed.
yy Clean the vehicle throughly using a mild soap or detergent
mixed with clean and lukewarm water. Start at the top and
work your way down.
yy Check whether the vehicle is smeared with tree sap, coal Bumper Washing
tar or other foreign materials. Rinse them off while paying yy Remove the dirt or dust first with water and a sponge.
particular attention not to damage the painted surface.
yy If the bumper is contaminated by engine oil or any lubri-
yy Remove the moisture using a soft cloth. If you detect any cants, wipe it off using mild soapy water.
stone chips or scratches in the painted surface, to prevent
corrosion, touch them up immediately. Caution
yy You should allow enough space between a high-pressure Do not use abrasive wax and strong cleaning materials such as steel
water gun and your vehicle when washing the car with a wool which will scratch the vehicle body and bumper.
high pressure cleaner. When the water gun is too close to
the vehicle body, the high pressure of the water gun can
cause painted surface damage of the panels or malfunction
of the sensors on the bumper.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Care And Cleaning Of The Interior
Caution
yy Use only the mild detergent or cleaning agent with a small amount
of alcohol when cleaning the leather product (steering wheel, seats
etc.). Strong acid/alkali detergent or the cleaning agent with plenty
of alcohol may cause the discoloration and peeling of surface.
yy The Leather Seat Maintenance is necessary on Quarter basis with
dedicated Leather Milk or Cream in order to feed the Leather and
avoid any cracks on the seats and conserving the original look
and comfort of the seat.
Warning
To prevent from burning and electric shock, turn off the interior lights
before cleaning the vehicle interior.
With the use of modern trim materials, it is very important that Seat Belt Care
you use proper cleaning techniques and cleaners. Failing to do yy Keep belts clean and dry.
this on the first cleaning may result in water spots, spot rings,
or setting of stains or soils. All of which are more difficult to re- yy Clean seat belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
move in a second cleaning. yy Do not bleach or dye belts since this may severely weaken
Dust and loose dirt that are accumulated on interior fabrics them.
should be frequently removed with a vacuum cleaner or soft
bristle brush. Wipe vinyl or leather trim regularly with a clean
damp cloth. Normal trim soils, spots or stains can be cleaned
with cleaners.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Glass Surfaces Care And Cleaning Of The Exterior
Glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis. The use Exterior Finish
of a glass cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will re-
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of col-
move normal tobacco smoke and dust films.
or, gloss retention, and durability.
Never use abrasive cleaners on any vehicle glass, as they may
cause scratches. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of Washing your Vehicle
the rear window, any electric demister element may be dam-
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
aged. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since
clean by frequent washing.
they may have to be scraped off later.
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm or cold water.
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle under direct sun-
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield wash- light. Do not use a strong soap or chemical detergent.
er, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax or another All cleaning agents should be washed promptly from the sur-
material may be on the blade or windshield, clean the outside face and not allowed to dry on the finish.
of the windshield with cleaning powder or an equivalent non Ssangyong vehicles are designed to operate under normal en-
abrasive cleaner. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form vironmental conditions and to withstand the natural elements.
when rinsing with water. However, unusual conditions, such as high pressure car wash-
ers, may cause water to enter the inside of your vehicle.
Caution
yy Be careful not to damage the heated wire. Polishing and Waxing
yy Do not install the additional tinting film other than factory setting Periodic polishing and waxing is recommended to remove
on the windshield and rear glass. Otherwise, it may affect the surface residue from your paint finish. Approved products are
operation of heated wire in the glasses. supplied through your Ssangyong Distributor.
yy The vehicle with the rain sensor and the auto light sensor on wind-
shield should be handled carefully. If the sensor installation area is
dirty or corrupted by agent, the sensor may not work properly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Corrosion Protection
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Your car was designed to resist corrosion. When it was built,
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their special and protective finishes were used on most parts of
luster. your car to help maintain a good appearance, strength and
reliable operation. Some parts which normally are not visible
Special care should be taken when cleaning the aluminum (such as certain parts located in the engine compartment and
trim. To avoid damaging the protective trim, never use auto- the underbody of the vehicle) are such that surface rust will
motive or chrome polish, steam, or caustic soap to clean the not affect their reliability. Therefore, corrosion protection is not
aluminum trim. A coating of wax is recommended for all bright needed or used on these parts.
metal parts.
Sheet Metal Damage
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels, Alloy Wheels, and
If your car is damaged and requires body panel repair or re-
Wheel Covers placement, make sure the body repair shop applies proper
yy Do not use abrasive cleaners, polishes, solvents, wire anticorrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced so that
brushes or cleaning brushes for cleaning, as they could corrosion protection is restored. (Also refer to “Finish Damage”
damage the finish. on the next page).
yy Use neutral detergents for cleaning the wheel, as acid or
alkaline detergents could damage the wheel cover. Foreign Material Deposits
yy Clean the wheels after driving on a coastal road to prevent Calcium chloride and other salts, deicing agents, road oil and
the wheel from being corroded. tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chim-
neys and other foreign materials may damage vehicle finishes
Caution if left on painted surface. Prompt washing may not completely
remove all of these deposits. Other cleaners may be needed.
Never clean the aluminum wheel or alloy wheel with acidic or
alkalic detergents. Otherwise, wheel’s protective finish could be
When using chemical cleaners, be sure they are safe for use
damaged. on painted surfaces.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Finish Damage
Caution
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish yy When the engine is washed, fuel, grease or oil residues are
should be repaired promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly washed off. Therefore you should use only a filling station or a
and may develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips and Ssangyong Distributor who has oil separator equipment in the
scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials. Larger car wash bay.
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your Distributor’s yy Used engine oil, brake fluid, transmission fluid, antifreeze, bat-
body and paint shop. teries, and tires should be disposed by using the local authorized
waste disposal facilities, or have them disposed of by the vendor
Underbody Maintenance who is under a statutory obligation to do so when you replace
them.
Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust yy None of these items should be placed in the household recycling
control can accumulate on the underbody. If these materials bins or poured into the sewage system.
are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on yy Everyone should be concerned about environmental protection.
underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and yy Help by doing your share.
the exhaust system even though they have been provided with yy When a strong multi-purpose, acid, or alkaline detergent is used to
corrosion protection. At least every spring, flush these materi- clean up the surface of the painted body, side mirrors, windshield,
als from the underbody with plain water. Take care to clean plastic moldings or leather, changes, fading of colors or rusting
any area where mud and other debris can accumulate. can happen.
Sediment packed in closed areas of the frame should be loos- yy When the windshield is cleaned with an oil-contained or waxed
towel, strange sounds and vibrations may occur on the windshield
ened before being flushed. If desired, your Ssangyong Dis-
surface when the wipers are operating. Also, decreased visibility,
tributor can do this service for you. reflection at night, or poor removal of water on the windshield
may happen. Do not clean the windshield with an oil-contained
or waxed towel.
yy An abrasive detergent may damage the painted surface of your
vehicle, including the bumper. Do not buff or polish your vehicle
with an abrasive detergent.
yy An acid or alkaline detergent may damage the painted surface of
the aluminum or alloyed wheels.
yy When chemical products are used to clean up the interior, the
chemical products may change some colors or distort the shape
of some interior parts.
yy When cleaning up interior parts, do not use chemical products
such as acetone, enamel or bleach.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Ignition Key/Remote Control Key Turbocharger System
yy Never use any duplicated key not provided by Ssangyong. Insufficient oil supply to the bearing assembly in turbocharger
It may cause a fire due to an overload in the electric circuit. may cause the turbocharger to seize. Therefore, the following
yy If you lose your keys, you have to replace the whole key set cares are necessary to prevent the seizure.
to prevent from theft. yy Use only the specified engine oil and observe inspection
yy Avoid shock to the transmitter in the remote control key and and replacement intervals.
do not get it wet. yy Operate the engine over the idling speed only after normal
yy Only use the batteries with the same specifications to re- engine oil pressure has been established. Forcing the tur-
place the discharged battery. Do not reverse the polarity. bocharger to operate before the bearings are adequately
lubricated creates unnecessary friction.
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at
idle speed (Avoid acceleration or driving off the vehicle).
System Safety Mode yy Do not stop the engine immediately after coming back from
When the vehicle has a system error, the vehicle operates in high load driving (such as high speed driving or driving on
safety mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and to long slope). Let the engine run for approx. 1 minutes at idle
prevent the system from being damaged. In this mode, the en- speed to cool it down.
gine driving force may be decreased or the engine may stall. yy After changing the engine oil and oil filter, start the engine
When this happens, have the system checked at a Ssangyong and let it run for approx. 1 minutes at idle speed (Avoid ac-
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. celeration or driving off the vehicle).
yy Do not rev the engine at high speed without air cleaner ele-
ment when checking the engine.
Turbocharger?
The turbocharger consists of two turbo elements, a turbine
and a compressor, both of which are driven from the main
center shaft. The turbine rotates between 50000 ~ 160000
revolutions per minute and uses the energy of the exhaust
gas to drive the compressor. The compressor, in turn, draws
in fresh air which it supplies to the cylinders in the form of
compressed air.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel Recommendation
Commercially available high-quality fuels are suitable. Fuel Do not Use Methanol
quality has a decisive influence on the power output, driveabil-
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used
ity and life of the engine. The additives contained in the fuel
in your Rexton W. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle perfor-
play an important role in this connection. You should therefore
mance and damage components of the fuel system.
use only high-quality fuels.
Diesel Engine Note
Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher. The warranty policy will not cover damage of the fuel system and
any performance problems that are caused by the use of methanol
or fuel containing methanol.
Gasoline Engine
Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-ignition
Operation in Foreign Countries
(detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for resultant
damage. If you are going to drive your Rexton W in another country, be
sure to:
Caution yy Observe all regulations regarding registration and insur-
For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex. ance.
yy Check that a suitable fuel is available.
Caution Vehicle Fueling from Drums or Storage Containers

Engine and exhaust system will be damaged. For safety reasons (particularly when using noncommercial
yy Do not use leaded fuel to the vehicle for unleaded fuel. fueling systems) fuel containers, pumps and hoses must be
yy Use the fuel with specified or higher Research Octane Number properly earthed.
recommended for your country by Ssangyong.
Static electricity build up can occur under certain atmospheric
It is not covered by warranty.
and fuel flow conditions if unearthed hoses, particularly plas-
tic, are fitted to the fuel dispensing pump.
It is therefore recommended that earthed pumps with integrally
earthed hoses be used, and that storage containers be prop-
erly earthed during all noncommercial fueling operations.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Using biodiesel fuel and low Water Separator Warning Light
quality fuel (Diesel)
The fuel system of the common rail direct injection engine is When the water in the fuel filter exceeds
precisely machined component. Using low quality fuel and ex- a certain level, this warning light and an
cessive biodiesel fuel could result in a serious damage to the alarming sound are activated. In addition,
engine due to the water, impurities or suspended particles in the driving force of the vehicle decreas-
fuel. es.
Using fuel mixed with too much biodiesel fuel can cause fuel Water separating interval: whenever changing the engine oil
filter clogging, power loss, engine idling problem, engine stall,
difficulty with starting the engine in cold weather as well as Warning
damage to the engine and the fuel system, due to the naturally
yy If the water separator warning light comes on, have the system
produced suspended particles. checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
Currently, the Ssangyong vehicle is designed so that only the vice Center.
mixed fuel of biodiesel and diesel with mixing ratio within the yy The fuel system in the engine may suffer serious damage if you
specified range can be used for safety. If any product in which keep driving while the warning light is on.
the biodiesel fuel is exceeds the total amount of fuel is used
or the aftermarket biodiesel fuel is added to the regular fuel, it
can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle and this is not covered
by warranty.
Engine Check Indicator
What is “Bio-diesel”?
The Engine check indicator on the instru-
The bio-diesel fuel is made by reacting vegetable oil extract- ment cluster comes on when the fuel or
ed from beans, rapeseed, rice bran, etc. with alcohol. This major electronic systems of the engine
can be solely used or used mixed with the diesel fuel for the are not working properly. As a result,
diesel engine as its physical and chemical characteristics the engine’s power output may decrease
are similar to those of the diesel fuel. This is considered to or the engine may stall. If this happens,
be alternative energy to the diesel fuel nowadays. please visit the nearest Ssangyong
dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air Bag Using Ssangyong Dealer or
yy The airbags must never be impacted by hand or with tools. Ssangyong Authorized Service
yy The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt. Center
Make sure that you and your passengers always fasten the
Have the vehicle serviced at Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
seat belts properly even if the air bags are installed in the
Authorized Service Center. The customer warranty may be
vehicle.
void for any concerns with in your vehicle if the vehicle is ser-
yy Do not place any objects on the air bag inflation location. viced by a third party or another service center.
You may be injured by those objects during deployment.
yy The air bag system should be inspected 10 years after in-
stallation regardless of its appearance and other conditions.
yy Repairs to the air bag system should be done only by a Genuine Parts
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen- Always use only Ssangyong genuine parts for replacement.
ter. Ssangyong is not liable for any damage caused by the use of
yy Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not at- non-Ssangyong genuine parts and accessories.
tempt to modify any air bag components including the steer-
ing wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness.
yy Never install a child restraint in the front seat. The children
sitting in the restraint could be seriously injured by the air
bag in a collision.
yy The deployed air bag unit should be removed from the ve-
hicle and replaced with a new one.
yy When the air bag is deployed, the relevant components will
be very hot, so do not touch them until they have cooled
down.
yy A person who is smaller than 140 cm should sit in the rear
seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caring for Your Vehicle Under 0°C (32°F)
Caring For Your Vehicle Under 0°C Engine Oil
(32°F) When the vehicle is shipped, the engine is filled with four-sea-
son engine oil.
During the winter, undesirable road conditions frequently hap-
pen. Therefore, appropriate preparations for emergencies Tires
should occur.
Snow tires are more desirable on an icy or snow-covered road.
Before driving in suburban or rural areas, or on a snowing day,
Have snow tires installed on your vehicle before driving on
have bags of sand, snow chains, a shovel, gloves, and old
such a road.
clothes in your vehicle.
Coolant Caution
Before it gets cold, check the coolant level. yy When snow tires are installed, drive your vehicle at a lower speed
than normal.
The conventional coolant is the 50:50 mixture of water and an-
yy Install snow chains correctly. Otherwise, the chains may damage
tifreeze.
the wheelhouses or the body of your vehicle.
If only water has been added into the coolant reservoir, the en-
gine and the cooling system of your vehicle may seriously be
damaged when the water freezes as it gets below the freezing Air Conditioner
point. When the air conditioner has not been used for an extended
period of time, internal moving components may become
Caution seized because the lubricating system has not worked for a
yy When the vehicle is shipped, the cooling system is filled with a prolonged amount of time. As a result, the refrigerant may leak
four-season coolant. or rusting may happen to the system. Malfunction of the air
yy Before adding or refilling coolant, ensure that the coolant is a 50:50 conditioner may result.
mixture of water and antifreeze. To maintain its optimal operating condition, it is recommended
yy Use only Ssangyong genuine coolant. that the air conditioner be turned on for approximately 5 to 10
minutes every week throughout all seasons.
Washer Fluid
Use a genuine washer fluid that does not freeze on a cold day. Caution
When non-recommended washer liquid is used, the liquid may Do not remove the refrigerant in winter, even though you do not use
form an ice. This will damage the wiper motor and hinder your the air conditioner.
safe driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the Engine and Driving in Parking in Winter
Winter When the parking brake is applied in cold weather, ice may
form on the brake system and cause some difficulty moving
Starting the Engine in Winter
the vehicle. When parking on a hill, first, apply the parking
During winter, the engine experiences increased resistance brake. Put the shift lever into the “1” or “R” position (Manual
from the powertrain; the battery and the starter have a de- Transmission) or into the “P” position (Automatic Transmis-
creased capacity. Therefore, start the engine in an appropriate sion). Put a chock under a tire and release the parking brake.
way.
After starting the engine, allow time to warm it up before driv- Warning
ing the vehicle. Warming up the engine will increase its life When ice forms on the parking brake system, an attempt to move
expectancy and help you drive safely. the vehicle without removing the ice may damage your vehicle. Wait
until the ice melts away and gently move your vehicle.
Caution
yy The glow plugs of the diesel engine should sufficiently be warmed
up before the engine starts.
yy Change the engine oil and fuel filter according to the specified ser-
vice intervals. Contaminated engine oil will decrease its viscosity
and clog the fuel filter and oil filter, causing a difficulty of engine
start at low temperature.
Driving in Winter
Maintain at least twice as long of a normal driving distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. When stop-
ping, shift into a lower gear to use the engine brake.
Avoid speeding, abrupt acceleration, sudden braking, or dras-
tic maneuvering of the steering wheel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Other Maintenance
After driving on a calcium chloride (salt) spayed road, wash the Diesel Fuel in Winter
bottom of your vehicle as soon as possible to avoid any rust.
On an extremely cold day, paraffin, one of the chemicals in
When parking on a snow-covered road, the brake system may diesel fuel, may separate from the diesel fuel. This separation
begin to have some ice on it. The ice will decrease your ve- makes starting the engine difficult. During the winter season,
hicle’s braking ability. If this happens, drive at a low speed and Kerosene is added to diesel in some markets to prevent the
use the brake frequently to remove the ice. After regaining the paraffin separation and secure stable flow of the fuel through
braking ability, drive your vehicle at a normal speed. the fuel filter. The amount of added Kerosene into diesel can
vary by location and their average winter temperatures. There-
Warning fore, to ensure an easy start on a cold day, park your vehicle
yy When there is ice on the wiper blades, turning on the wiper switch inside of a garage. If possible, fill up the fuel tank after each
may put an extra burden on the wiper motor and damage it. Avoid driving to prevent ice from forming inside of the fuel system.
using the wipers when ice is on the blades.
yy When driving on a snow-covered road, a large amount of snow Caution
may build up under each wheelhouse. This buildup prevents the
steering wheel from moving freely. Therefore, remove the snow yy Change engine oil and the fuel filter as scheduled. Contaminated
buildup frequently. engine oil will lose its viscosity, clog the fuel filter and oil filter and
cause difficulties starting the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION
Do not modify this vehicle.

If unauthorized notifications are made on the vehicle, In particular, modifying your vehicle by fitting LPG
the company is not liable for repairing the modified might bring serious damage to the vehicle’s perfor-
parts even during the term of warranty. Other part mance and durability. Not only the engine but also
problems caused by modification are also not cov- the transmission and wheel alignment are excluded
ered. from the warranty.
The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number If you install a wheel dust cover on the tires to enhance
of precision parts that have passed through countless ex- the beauty of tire parts, the heat caused by friction in
periments and tests. These parts are deeply and system- braking might bring serious problems in performance,
atically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or causing Vapor Lock and Fade phenomena.
altered without authorization, said parts may be damaged
from the decrease in performance or overloading, which
can then cause critical damage to the vehicle and human Do not modify the car’s audio system and install
life. other additional electronic devices such as wireless
communication equipment, rear view camera, LCD
TV, and remote starting device.
Do not modify without authorization the driving gear
system, including the engine, just to upgrade the ve- This vehicle’s electronic system contains electronic cir-
hicle’s performance and beauty. cuits and fuses for the installation of standard electric
and electronic devices. If you add new devices or circuits
yy Unauthorized modification of the engine or parts for using the several existing devices and circuits at a time,
the exhaust is prohibited. electric and electronic devices can be damaged from
overloading and may ignite. In addition, when you do drill-
Changing without authorization the preset value in the
ing work in installing devices such as an antenna may
fuel supply system and inlet, exhaust and electric sys-
expose the vehicle to rusting.
tems, and changing or adding unauthorized parts is illegal
and may cause serious problem with the vehicle’s durabil-
ity.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do not use the nonstandard tires, wheels, and other Do not equip the vehicle with bumper guards sold in
related parts. the market.
Installing nonstandard tires such as tires with greater Installing bumper guard or other guard bars that are be-
width than prescribed can wear out the power delivery ing sold in the market may cause problems in parking
system or friction-damage related parts. In addition, other and stopping due to the extended length of vehicle, and
problems such as increase of fuel consumption and brak- increase in fuel cost due to additional vehicle weight, and
ing distance, vehicle’s shudder, and decrease of steering rusting may occur in the holes for equipping the guards.
power can all degrade the vehicle’s performance. The And because of the absence of shock absorber in the
speedometer and odometer can also become inaccurate. bumper guard, even accidents during low-speed driving
The vehicle with automatic transmission may have the will be much serious compared with the damage that un-
shock in changing the speed. modified cars might sustain.
Do not use duplicate key Do not modify or replace the vehicle flooring or the
A duplicate key might cause malfunction to the ignition seats at your discretion.
key cylinder and deter the ignition motor to return to the yy When replacing the interior flooring of vehicle with
original state. If so, electronic circuitry can be damaged laminated paper
and may ignite from the ignition motor’s continuing rota- To improve the comfort of cushion and to facilitate the
tion. cleaning of the vehicle, some drivers replace the flooring
with laminated paper after removing the seats. However,
Do not equip the sunroof or color glasses at your dis- this may cause damage to the various electronic system
cretion. control units and wiring. This also may hinder the function
of the seat rail that enables for the seat to move forward
If you install a sunroof by cutting the vehicle’s roof, rust
and backward. In this case, the locking system to fix the
and leakage may occur in the cut part. Installing color
location of seats may malfunction, which might lead to
glasses to block ultraviolet rays and better appearance
a serious accident if the loose seats tilt forward or back-
may cause leakage and other many problems.
ward during an uphill climb or downhill descent.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy When exchanging the seats with new ones or equip- Do not install products that may decrease the driving
ping separate seat covers. resistance such as sticker, molding, air dam, or wind-
There are several types of seat covers according to role proofing products.
and function although with the same vehicle type. Replac- The sticker’s adhesives may damage the coated surface
ing the seats with new ones may alter the wiring system of the vehicle. If parts of the car are drilled to attach mold-
or over-use the wires because a seat has various electric ing and other functional parts, the area near the holes will
connections and wiring diagram. As mentioned earlier, rust and other unfamiliar sound may occur while driving.
this may damage the wiring and related equipment or Especially if the attached parts are not fixed well, it may
cause fire due to the overloading on the rated capacity. damage the vehicle or even cause a fatal accident.
In addition, replacing the seat cover may damage the
electronic equipment caused by cut or pressured wire. In using audio in the vehicle, do not use illegally cop-
Such a situation may also cause ventilation problems, ied CD and DVD, which violates relevant laws. Such
fire, or noise. discs can also cause malfunction of the audio head
unit and changer. In addition, such discs may also
Do not equip with a separate accessory or assistant not play properly.
device on the vehicle operational device. When installing the vehicle with unauthorized parts or
Making the selection lever longer or equipping with an ac- modifying it in ways including the cases mentioned previ-
celerator pedal and brake pedal pad may make the driver ously, please keep in mind that the changed parts and
prone to make a mistake while driving. related problems with changed auto parts shall not be
covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (i)
Direct Injection (DI) Type Diesel Engine Warning for Using Low Quality Fuel or Bio Fuel
Compared to Indirect Injection (IDI) Type Diesel Engine The fuel system in a DI engine equipped vehicle has many
that uses a mechanical fuel injection system, a Direct In- precisely machined components. Using low quality fuel
jection (DI) Type Diesel Engine controls the amount of in- could result in serious damage to the engine due to the wa-
jected fuel and the fuel injection timing electronically. This ter or impurities in the fuel.
advanced engine enhances the output power and reduces Never use the low quality fuel.
the noxious exhaust gas (CO, HC, NOx....). Because the
Direct Injection Diesel Engine is operated by high pressure Diesel Engine
(max.), any removal, modification or service of the engine Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher.
may contaminate the inside of the system and cause the
system to malfunction. In that case, the malfunction and Gasoline Engine
any related systems are not under warranty of this com- Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-ignition
pany. (detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for resultant
damage.
Caution
For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (iI)
System Safety Mode When flashing (for vehicles equipped with CDPF)
When the vehicle has a system error, the vehicle operates When a particular amount of particulates is collected in the
in safety mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and Catalyst Diesel Particulate Filter (CDPF), these particu-
to prevent the system from being damaged. In this mode, lates are automatically combusted (regeneration process).
the engine driving force may be decreased or the engine However, this regeneration may not be performed due to
may stall. When this happens, have the system checked several operating conditions. And in this case, the engine
at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service CHECK indicator flashes. This flashing function is to inform
Center. the driver to take action for the proper regeneration of the
filter.
Supplementary Heating Device If the engine CHECK indicator flashes, drive the vehicle at
over 80 km/h for 15 ~ 20 minutes to regenerate the CDPF.
PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient)
When the amount of particulates is lowered down to a cer-
This supplementary heater is an electrical air heating type tain limit, the engine CHECK indicator goes off.
and installed on the heater outlet port. This device im-
proves the heating effect by increasing the temperature of Catalyst diesel particulate filter (CDPF)
flowing air into the passenger room. The CDPF is a compound word for Diesel Oxidation Cata-
lyst (DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which are
Engine Check Indicator exhaust gas after-treatment devices.
The engine check indicator on the instrument cluster

comes on when the fuel or major electronic systems of the
engine are not working properly. As a result, the engine’s
power output may decrease or the engine may stall. If this
happens, please visit the nearest Ssangyong dealer or au-
thorized service operator.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (IiI)
Water Separator Warning Priming Pump Operating 1. When completely consumed the
Light Conditions fuel
2. After draining the water from the
D22DTR/D20DTR fuel filter
Can be performed when 3. After replacing the fuel filter
engine oil is changed
- If this happens, pump fuel until the
fuel filter is fully filled. Then, start
the engine.
When the water level inside of the
Warning
water drain in the fuel filter exceeds a
certain level, this warning light and an yy When engine check warning light
alarming sound are activated. In addi- comes on, immediately stop driving
and have the engine system checked
tion, the driving force of the vehicle de-
at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
creases. If this happens, immediately Authorized Service Center.
drain the water from the fuel filter. D27DT(P)
yy Drain the water from fuel filter & water
separator immediately after the water
separator warning light comes on.
yy The fuel system in the engine may
get seriously damaged if you keep
driving while the warning light is on.
Priming Pump

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
R
emote control key and ignition key.................2-2
3
F
unctions of ignition key ..................................2-5
O
pening and closing the doors with 4
ignition key........................................................2-7
5
B
attery replacement for rekes key....................2-8
Immobilizer system.........................................2-10
2
6
Theft deterrent system....................................2-12
7
Ignition Key &
8
Remote Control Key
9
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOTE CONTROL KEY AND IGNITION KEY
1
Door Lock Button
2 Lock (briefly press)
yy If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tailgate are
3 locked and the theft deterrent mode is activated.
yy When the theft deterrent mode is activated, the hazard
4 warning flashers blink twice.
Type A
5 Caution
yy To arm the theft deterrent mode, the ignition key should be re-
6 moved from the ignition switch, all doors including the tailgate and
the engine hood should be closed completely.
yy To prevent from being stolen, after locking the doors and tailgate
7 Type B using the remote control key, check the doors and tailgate have
been securely locked.
8
9 Door Unlock Panic Button
Unlock (briefly press) Panic Function (press and hold)

10
yy If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tailgate are yy If you are in your vehicle and feel threatened while the igni-
unlocked and the theft deterrent mode is deactivated. tion key is inserted into the key switch, you may activate the
11 yy When the deterrent mode is deactivated, hazard warning alarm to call attention. If you press this button, the warning
flashers blink once. siren will sound for approx. 27 seconds.
12 y If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking
y yy The panic function will stop when any of the buttons on the
the doors with remote control key in theft deterrent mode, remote control key is pressed.
13 all doors will be automatically locked again (change to theft
deterrent mode) Note
The alarm sounds only when the ignition key is inserted into the key
14 switch hole.(EU)

GETtheMANUALS.org
When a Remote Control Key is Lost
When one of remote control keys is lost and a new remote
control key is purchased, bring the other old key to the nearest
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center
and have it recoded. Otherwise, the old key will not work.
To prevent from being stolen by the lost key, Immediately take
a recoding for new key when you lost a key.
To use the mechanical key:
Press the button. The mechanical key is automatically folded Caution
up. If you lose your key, you have to replace the whole key set to prevent
from theft.
To stow the mechanical key:
Press the button and push it into its slot.
Room Lamp ON
Caution
If the room lamp switch in overhead console is in DOOR posi-
The key can be broken when folding not to press button.
tion, the front room lamp comes on for 30 seconds when you
press the unlock button on the remote control key. The lamps
immediately go off when the remote lock button is pressed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Under the following conditions, the remote control key does not yy Under the following conditions, the remote control key may not
operate. work due to another radio wave. In these cases, open the doors
- When the key is in the ignition switch using key and key hole in door.
- When you are too far from your vehicle (over 10 m) - In the place near police office, government office, broadcasting
- When the battery in remote control key is discharged
- When you have the radio or mobile phone with the remote control
- When your vehicle is behind other vehicles or obstacles key
- In very cold weather - When another remote control key is using near your vehicle
yy The remote control key could be damaged easily by moisture and
heat. Be sure to keep away from them.
yy Operating range could be changed depending on the surrounding
Certification for FOB/Folding
conditions. It is recommended to use the remote control key in 10 Logo
m from your vehicle.
yy Under the following conditions, the remote control key may not
work due to another radio wave. In these cases, open the doors
using key and key hole in door.
- In the place near police office, government office, broadcasting
- W hen you have the radio or mobile phone with the remote Note
control key
The logos are depicted in the certificate manual because of the
- When another remote control key is using near your vehicle product size.
yy If your remote control key is not working properly, have the system
Center. FCC ID: DEO-MT-FLIP01
yy Opening the tailgate will not trigger the theft deterrent alarm even
in theft deterrent mode. Caution
yy Operating range could be changed depending on the surrounding yy Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which
conditions. It is recommended to use the remote control key in 10 are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
m from your vehicle. could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
yy This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received. Including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUNCTIONS OF IGNITION KEY
ACC Position ON Position

yy The steering wheel is unlocked and yy The engine runs and all electrical
electrical accessories are operative. accessories can be used.
yy The ignition key cannot be removed. yy The steering wheel is unlocked.
START Position
Turn the ignition key to this posi-
LOCK Position tion to start the engine. The engine
yy The ignition key can only will crank until you release the key;
be inserted or removed. then it automatically returns to “ON”
yy The steering wheel can be position.
locked.
From ACC to LOCK Position

Turn the key to LOCK position from ACC
position while pushing the key inward.
Unlocking the Steering Wheel Key Hole Illumination Key Reminder

To unlock the steering wheel, insert the The illumination lamp comes on when The buzzer will sound if the driver’s door
key and gently turn it to the ACC or ON opening the door. This lamp goes out is opened while the key is left in the igni-
position while slightly moving the steer- about 10 seconds after closing the door. tion switch (ACC or LOCK position).
ing wheel right and left.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN STARTING THE ENGINE
yy To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and gently turn it to yy Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds at a time. (The
the “ACC” position while slightly moving the steering wheel right starter may be damaged.)
and left. yy To prevent any damage to the starter, put the ignition switch to
yy The engine in a manual transmission equipped vehicle can only be the “LOCK” position and wait for at least 10 seconds before
started when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. restarting the engine.
yy Diesel engine equipped vehicle: Turn the ignition key to the “ON” yy Never turn the key to the “LOCK” position or remove the ignition
position and wait until the glow indicator goes out. After then, turn key from the ignition switch while driving. The steering wheel will
the ignition key to the “START” position and hold it until the be locked and you may end up with serious injuries.
engine starts. But do not hold the ignition key at the “START” yy Never use any duplicated key not provided from Ssangyong.
position for more than 10 seconds.
yy The duplicated key might not turn back to the “ON” position. It
yy The engine in an automatic transmission equipped vehicle can be may cause a fire due to an overload in the electric circuit. In ad-
started only when the gear selector lever is at the “P” or “N” dition, the engine with the immobilizer system cannot be started
position. with the duplicated key.
yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when starting the engine. yy For a vehicle with automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
yy If the engine fails to start, turn the key back to the “LOCK” posi- with the gear selector lever in “P” position. Otherwise, the vehicle
tion and wait for 10 seconds. Then try again before any attempt can roll away unexpectedly causing a serious accident.
to start the engine. yy Do not operate ignition switch or other switches while driving. You
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at idle will not be able to control the steering wheel or the vehicle and
speed. Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up pe- could be seriously or even fatally injured.
riod. yy Do not stack luggage or other cargo around the driver seat. Any
yy A warning buzzer sounds when opening the driver’s door with the such objects could interfere with your control of the vehicle and
key positioned at the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. can cause harm.
yy Do not leave the key at the “ACC” or “ON” position when engine
is not running. Otherwise, the battery could run down.
yy Never depress the accelerator pedal while starting.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS WITH IGNITION KEY
Caution
When you unlock the door with the ignition key after the door is
locked with the remote control (the theft deterrent mode), a warn-
ing buzzer sounds. Stop the buzzer by pressing any button on the
remote control key.
Automatic Door Locking

All doors will be automatically locked when you drive over 50
km/h while the doors are unlocked.
Automatic Door Unlocking

yy All doors will be automatically unlocked when the engine is
switched off.
yy Even though all doors are locked, they will be automatically
unlocked when the driver’s door is opened.
Unlocking the door and the tailgate
yy In the event of air bag deployment resulting from a vehicle
Locking the door and the tailgate impact, all doors will be automatically unlocked.
To Lock the Door: Warning

Turn the key to the lock position (toward front of the vehicle) When damage is done on a door or the body frame by an impact from
from driver’s door. All doors and the tailgate will be locked. an accident, the automatic door unlocking system may not work.
To Unlock the Door:

Turn the key to the unlock position (toward rear of the vehicle)
from driver’s door. All doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
To Open the Door:

Pull out the door handle lever.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY REPLACEMENT FOR REKES KEY
Type A
When the operational distance noticeably decreases or the 222 Remove the rear cover from the REKES key and replace
remote control does not work occasionally, replace the battery the battery with new one.
with a new one.
vice Center.
Battery
Replacing Procedures: Type A
111 Unscrew the screw from the rear cover of the REKES key
with a flat-blade screwdriver.
Rear cover
333 Use only specified battery (CR2032). Make sure that the
battery is installed in correct direction.
444 Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.
Caution

GETtheMANUALS.org
Type B
When the operational distance noticeably decreases or the 222 Pry off the cover by using a small flat screwdriver.
remote control does not work occasionally, replace the battery 333 Remove the battery and insert a new one (CR2032).
with a new one.
vice Center.
Replacing Procedures : Type B

111 Unscrew two screws from the rear cover.
Caution

GETtheMANUALS.org
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Immobilizer System provides an additional theft deterrent to the vehicle in which it is installed and prevents it from being started
by unauthorized persons. The transponder integrated in the key and the engine control unit have the same code. When the ignition
key with the integrated transponder is turned to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the crypto code of the key
and, if correct, allows your vehicle to start the engine.
Immobilizer Indicator
Black-Face
If this indicator blinks, it may indicate that
there is something wrong in the immobi-
lizer system. Have the system checked by
TRIP A
ODO B
a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
km
READY
Note
Standard The time needed for communication between the immobilizer key
and ECU can vary. If it is very short, the immobilizer indicator does
not come on.
Caution
READY
yy In addition, any remote engine starter cannot be installed to the

vehicle equipped with the immobilizer system. So never install any
Immobilizer Key remote engine starter.
When the ignition key with the integrated transponder is turned yy The immobilizer system should be inspected, replaced, serviced,
to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the or coded by only qualified service personnel in a Ssangyong
crypto code of the key and, if correct, allows your vehicle to yy When an old code should be replaced or another key is added,
start the engine. please observe the process personally.
yy If you fail to start the engine due to the reason (ex, key chain) other
Caution than key itself, remove the key from the ignition switch and wait for
around 10 seconds. And, try to start the engine again.
yy Avoid impact to the transponder inside of the key. The transponder
could be damaged.
yy With a damaged transponder, the engine cannot be started. Warning
yy Do not install any metal object near the ignition switch and on the In any case, the immobilizer system cannot be removed from the
remote control key. Otherwise, they may disturb the signal be- vehicle. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other device
tween ignition switch and remote control key and result in engine to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle
starting problem. inoperable.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine Does Not Start Due To When the Transponder is Damaged
Communication Error When the transponder is damaged, you must replace it with a
new one and register a new code on the engine control unit at
If there is a communication error in immobilizer system, you a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
cannot start engine. In this case, the immobilizer indicator in Otherwise, the engine cannot be started.
meter cluster blinks.
In the following cases, you may be unable to start the vehicle
with the immobilizer. When You Lost The Key
yy When two or more immobilizer keys come into contact with When you lost the key, the encrypted code should be removed
(each) other(s). from the Engine Control Unit to avoid any vehicle theft. Please
yy When the key is close to any device sending or receiving contact a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
electromagnetic fields or waves. Center.
yy When the key is close to any electronic or electric devices
such as lighting equipment, security keys or security cards.
yy When the key is close to a magnetic or metal object or a
battery.
yy When you start the engine before completing the pre-glow
process.
Caution
yy If you fail to start the engine due to the communication error or
early start before completion of pre-glow, clear the reason and wait
for around 10 seconds. And, try to start the engine again.
yy If the indicator remains blinking, have the immobilizer system
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
vice Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
The theft deterrent system is activated when locking the doors Alarm
using the remote control key. When somebody tries to open
the door, tailgate or engine hood with any other way other than If somebody tries to open the door, the tailgate or the hood
using remote control key, the hazard flashers blink and the si- without using the remote control key, the alarm will be acti-
ren sounds. vated.
yy When one of the doors or the tailgate is opened with the
ignition key while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm
Arming the Theft Deterrent will be activated.
System yy The engine hood or the tailgate is opened from the outside
yy When all doors are locked with the remote control key, the while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm will be acti-
anti-theft mode will be activated. vated.
yy If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking yy When the alarm is activated, the buzzer sounds and the
the doors with remote control key in theft deterrent mode, hazard flashers will blink for 27 seconds.
all doors will be automatically locked again (back to theft yy To stop the alarm:
deterrent mode). - Press Unlock or Lock button on the remote control key.
yy When the theft deterrent system is armed, the hazard flash- - Turn the ignition key to ON position
ers blink twice. However, if you press this button once again
- Open the door with the mechanical key
in 4 seconds, the hazard flashers blink twice and the buzzer
sounds once.
yy If you lock the doors using key hole in door, doors will be Disarming the Theft Deterrent
locked but the theft deterrent mode will not be armed. Mode
yy Unlock the door by using the remote control key.
Caution
To arm the theft deterrent system, the ignition key should be removed yy To deactivate the theft deterrent mode at the alarming
from the ignition switch, all doors including the tailgate and the engine stage, unlock the door by using the remote control key.
hood should be closed completely. When the deterrent mode is disarmed, the hazard flashers
blink once.
yy To stop alarm, insert the ignition key into key switch and
turn it to “ON” position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Opening and closing devices............................3-2
3
Doors.................................................................3-4
Windows............................................................3-7 4
Sunroof*............................................................3-9
5
Engine hood....................................................3-12
3
Fuel filler door.................................................3-13 6
Roof rack.........................................................3-16 7
Tailgate and tailgate window...........................3-17 Opening and
8
Closing
9
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING AND CLOSING DEVICES
1 Sunroof Switch Fuel Filler Door
6
Door Opening Lever
7
10
Engine Hood Safety Latch Lever Radiator Grille
11 Type A
12
13 Type B
14

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tailgate/Window Opening Door Lock/Unlock Knob Driver’s Door Windows Switch,
Lever Door Opening Lever
Tailgate
opening lever
Tailgate window
opening lever
Fuel Filler Door

Release Lever, Engine
Child Safety Door Lock Hood Opening Lever
Rear Door Fuel filler door
release lever
Lock
Unlock Engine hood

opening lever

GETtheMANUALS.org
DOORS
Door Lock/Unlock Knob

All doors will be locked/un-
Unlock locked when moving the knob
to the respective lock/unlock
direction (only available at
Lock driver’s and front passenger’s
door).
Note
yy The passenger’s door lock/unlock knob and lever have the same
functions with those of the driver’s door.
yy The door lock/unlock knob on the rear right or rear left door can only
lock or unlock its respective door.
yy The door is unlocked again even when locking the door with the
Child Safety Door Lock door lock/unlock knob while the door is open.
Child safety door lock helps
prevent from an accidental
door open, especially when
Lock
children are in the vehicle.
When the child-safe lever is in
the “ LOCK” position, the
Unlock
rear door can be opened only
from the outside.
Warning
Children in rear seats can open rear doors. Move the child-safe
lever to the “ LOCK” position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver’s side
Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Passenger’s side
Door opening When the door lock/unlock switch is pressed
lever while all doors including the tailgate are
locked, all doors will be unlocked. When the
switch is pressed again, all doors will be
locked.
This switch is not available when any of
doors are not fully closed and the vehicle is
in theft deterrent mode.
Door lock/unlock
Door lock/unlock switch switch
Door Opening Lever
Pull the door opening lever to open the door.
Automatic Door Unlocking Automatic Door Locking

When the airbag deploys while all doors are automatically All doors will be automatically locked when you drive over 30
locked by the Automatic Door Locking System, the doors will km/h while the doors are unlocked.
automatically be unlocked.
Caution
Warning When you drive at 50 km/h or a higher speed and try to unlock all
doors with the door lock/unlock knob or switch, all doors are auto-
When a door or body frame is damaged by an impact from an ac-
matically locked again.
cident, the automatic door unlocking system may not work.
Room Lamp Coupled Operation

Note The room lamps are synchronized with the room lamp switch.
When any door is open, all doors can not be locked by using the door The front room lamp comes on when opening a front door. The
lock knob, the door lock/unlock switch, or the remote control. center room lamp comes on when opening a rear door. The
rear room lamp comes on when opening the tailgate. The front
room lamp dims down and goes out when closing the front
door. The center (rear) room lamp goes out immediately when
closing the door (tailgate).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Caution
yy Close the door properly. Otherwise it can be re-opened. Do not apply excessive force to any door and door handle. It can
yy If you do not pay attention to closing or opening a door, your cause them to break.
fingers may be caught between the door and the vehicle body
by accident.
yy When you exit your vehicle, look for other vehicles, motorcycles,
bicycles, or pedestrians before opening the door. Other people
can be injured by the doors suddenly flung open.
yy Make sure that all the doors are firmly closed before driving. It
is extremely dangerous if any door is opened while the car is
moving.
yy Do not leave children or animals unattended in parked vehicles.
The temperature in the vehicle gets too high or too low according
to the outside temperatures, and a child or an animal could die or
be seriously injured from suffocation.
yy The drive door may be opened by pulling the inside door handle
even if the doors are locked, depending upon the model. Do not
open the door while driving, as it can be fatal. Failure to do so can
result in an accident.
yy Lock the all doors using the central door lock switch on the driver
side before starting off the vehicle. In particular, do not forget to
lock the doors when driving with children. It is very dangerous if
any door is opened unintentionally during driving.
yy A child can be severely injured or killed by opening a door while
the vehicle is moving. Use the child protection door lock system
for your child to prevent him/her from opening a door.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINDOWS
Driver’S Door Window Switch
 When opening the window
� When the front of the switch is lightly pressed, the window will be lowered while the switch is pressed.
� When pressed to its end, the window will open automatically until it is fully open. If you want to stop the
window while automatic lowering, lightly press the switch again or pull the switch up.
 When closing the window
� When you lightly pull the switch up, the window will move up only while the switch is being operated.
� When pulling the switch up to its end, the window will be fully closed (auto-up operation (If equipped)).
If you want to stop the auto-up function, pull up or gently press the switch again.
Window Lock Switch

If the window lock switch is pressed down, only driver’s
Rear Right window is operative. Passenger’s and rear windows can-
Window Switch not be operated by their switches.
Warning
When carrying children in the rear seat, press the window lock
switch to make the rear window switches inoperative. Do not
allow children to play with the power window switch and rear
door window switches.
Caution
When closing the passenger’s and rear windows from driver’s
seat, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of
the body can be trapped by the window.
Passenger’s Door
Window Switch Central Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Rear Left Window Switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
Anti-Trap System for Driver’S Front Passenger’s and Rear Window Switch
Window
Passenger’s seat
The anti-trap system enables the driver’s window to automati-
cally reverse when something is caught in the window as it is
closing. When the sensor detects an obstacle, the window will
be lowered immediately. Door Lock/
Unlock Switch
Caution
yy The anti-trap system is operated only when the driver’s window is
moving up automatically by the “AUTO” switch.
yy The anti-trap system does not operate where the space between
the top of the glass and window frame is very close.
yy If the window is stuck in very cold weather, anti safety function may Window switch
work. In this case, fully close the window by switch.
To move windows up or
Time Lag of Window Operation Rear seat
down, pull up or press the
The power window can be operated for 30 seconds even after corresponding switch for the
the ignition key is turned to another position. However, this window.
function stops immediately when a front door is opened.
Warning
yy Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing can
be trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers) in the window.
yy Make sure that passengers do not stick out their hands or heads
from the vehicle while driving.
yy Do now allow children to play with any switch, door lever or the
gear shift lever.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SUNROOF* * For your safety, never operate the sunroof when the vehicle is moving.
Sunroof Sliding Operation

 Open: 2-Step Opening
The sunroof automatically opens if the sunroof open/close
switch is pushed shortly. However, this operation has two
steps; if you push the switch to its first stop, the sunroof opens
up to 5 cm ahead of end frame. If you push it again, the sun- Sliding Open/Tilt Down
roof opens completely. When the switch is operated while the
sunroof is moving, the sunroof stops sliding. (Manual sliding
open: The sunroof is opened only while the sunroof switch is
pressed)
 Close
The sunroof automatically closes completely if the sunroof
open/close switch is pulled down shortly when the sunroof is
open. To stop it during its operation, operate the switch to any Sliding Close/Tilt Up
direction. (Manual sliding close: The sunroof is closed only
while the sunroof switch is pressed)
Caution
yy Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is
Sunroof Tilting Operation in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the sunroof
repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery.
 Tilt Up Operate the sunroof while the engine is running.
yy When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the switch.
The sunroof is tilted up if the sunroof open/close switch is If you keep the switch operating, it could cause a malfunction.
pulled down when the sunroof is closed. Especially in the winter, never operate the sunroof if moving areas
are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced.
 Tilt Down yy When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close
The sunroof is tilted down if the sunroof open/close switch is the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or, the
pushed when the sunroof is tiled up. interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Anti-Pinch Function Wind Buffeting
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the auto- When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open
closing sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your
the sunroof when an object is trapped. ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter.
This happens because of an influx in air through the window
Caution or sunroof and its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by
yy This safety function is available for the sliding sunroof close. opening the window or sunroof.
yy The Anti-Pinch Function is deactivated just before the sunroof
closes.
yy Opening the sunroof or driving with the sunroof open after a car Battery Discharge or Power
wash or rain may lead to water entering
Failure while Operating Sunroof
yy Do not pull on the blind or apply excessive force on it. The blind
may be damaged. If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery
yy Close the sunroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts or power failure, you need to re-calibrate the starting point
or particles entered can cause operating problems. of the sunroof. In addition, the following cases need the re-
yy If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo calibration.
is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the panorama sunroof.
If you are required to operate the sunroof, carefully check that the
yy The sunroof does not completely close or open by operat-
roof rack system does not interfere with the sunroof and it is safe ing the switch once.
to open the sunroof. yy The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does not
stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof.
Warning yy The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open
yy When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before or tilt up.
operation. Parts of the body can be trapped. yy Operation of the sunroof switch does not do anything or
yy Do not stick any part of your body out of the sunroof. work properly.
yy Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of
his/her body out of the sunroof opening while driving. There is a
risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly.
yy Before operating the sunroof, make sure that no head, hand,
finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of
personal injury or even death.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Re-calibrating the Sunroof Start-
ing Point
yy Close the sunroof completely by using the sunroof open/
close switch (sliding close).
yy When the sunroof stops while the sunroof is par tially
opened, completely tilt it up using the sunroof open/close
switch.
Note
When the sunroof is completely opened with the sunroof switch
and the switch is operated to the “OPEN” direction for more than 5
seconds, the sunroof cannot completely be either closed or opened
by operating the switch once. The sunroof will be moving only when
the switch is being operated. When this happens, re-calibrate the
beginning point of the sunroof to reactivate the one touch button.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE HOOD
1. To open the engine hood, pull the release
knob located on the lower left side of the
steering wheel to unlatch the engine hood.
2. Slightly lift up the engine hood and raise up
the safety latch lever with your fingers. Then,
completely lift up the engine hood.
Warning
yy When you open the hood while the engine is running, extra caution
is needed to avoid any injuries by the moving parts in the engine
compartment.
yy Before driving, try to pull up the front edge of the hood to check
that the hood is securely latched.
yy When it is windy, extra caution is needed to prevent personal in-
jury. Wind might be able to lift up the hood and the prop rod may
be disengaged from its slot. This may result in an unexpected
closing of the hood.
yy Before closing the engine hood, ensure that none of your body
parts are trapped.
yy Before opening the engine hood, turn the engine OFF in flat terrain
and move the gear selector lever to the “P” (Park) position with the
parking brake pedal applied.
Caution
yy Open the engine hood with the engine turned OFF, unless other-
wise specified. If working with the engine running is necessary, yy Before closing the engine hood, ensure that all the caps are in
make sure that loose clothing such as ties, handkerchiefs, scarves, place.
or sleeves do not contact with the radiator fan. Failure to do so yy Before closing the engine hood, ensure that nothing left in engine
can result in severe personal injury and damage to the vehicle. compartment.
Remove any watch, necklaces, rings and bracelets. yy Keep head clearance in work at hood open position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILLER DOOR
111 Open the fuel filler door) by pulling the
release lever ( ) located on the lower left
side of the steering wheel.
222 Open the fuel filler cap ( ) by turning it

OPEN counterclockwise.
333 After refueling, tighten the fuel filler cap by
turning it clockwise until you hear clicking
CLOSE sounds. Then close the fuel filler lid ( )
properly until it latches.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Caution
yy In hot weather, there could be a difference between the pressure yy Fuel damages paintwork. If fuel spills onto paintwork, immediately
in the fuel reservoir and the atmospheric pressure. To remove the wash the affected area with cold water.
cap, turn it one turn and wait until the “hissing” sound is not heard yy The fuel filler door may not open in cold weather. Gently tap the
to prevent fuel from spraying out and possible personal injury. fuel filler door to open.
Then remove the cap. yy When you need to replace the fuel filler cap, use only the
yy Contact a metalic part to remove the static electricity from your Ssangyong genuine part.
body before opening the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, you may get
burnt due to a discharging spark from the static electricity.
yy Do not get in the vehicle during refueling. It may generate the static
electricity on your body, resulting in a fire.
yy If you must use a portable container for refueling in emergency
situation, put the container on the ground other than on vehicle
or in cabin. Otherwise, it may cause a fire due to the static elec-
tricity.
yy Always stop the engine before refueling.
yy Use only the designated fuel and low sulfur diesel. Otherwise,
engine could be seriously damaged.
yy Keep open flames and smoking materials away from the vehicle.
yy If you use inappropriate grade fuel or put improper fuel additives
into the fuel tank, the engine and catalytic converter may seriously
be damaged.
yy Aviod using a mobile phone at gas station. The current or elec-
tromagnetic from the phone can cause a fire with the vaporized
fuel.
yy If a fire breaks out, immediately escape from the gas station and
get help from a fire station.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gasoline Engine
Warning
Fuel with too low octane number can cause pre-ignition yy Do not re-enter the vehicle while adding fuel. Never do anything
(detonation). Ssangyong cannot be held liable for resultant which creates static electricity in or around the gas station. The
damage. vaporized fuel may be ignited by the static and this spontaneous
combustion causes the fuel to explode. If you are required to
Warning re-enter and exit the vehicle, discharge any static electricity by
touching any metal part which is a safe distance away from the
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. fuel filler with your bare hands.
It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries. yy If you use a portable container, Place the container on the ground
When refueling, before refueling. Putting the container on or inside the vehicle
yy Switch off engine. can create static electricity which ignites fuel vapor. Keep the
yy No smoking. container on the ground from the start of fuel filling to the end
yy No naked flame. of fuel filling.
yy No sparking material. yy Never use a cellular phone near a gas station. The electromag-
netic (RF) waves or electronic impulses emitted by the phone
might trigger fire of vaporized fuel. If you must use a cellular
phone, use it in a place away from the gas station.
Caution yy In case of fire during the fuel refilling, stay away from your vehicle
yy For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex. for safety and immediately call the manager of the gas station
Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer. and fire station.
yy Gasoline damages paintwork. If gasoline spills onto paintwork,
wash with cold water immediately.
Caution
Engine and exhaust system will be damaged.
yy Do not use leaded fuel to the vehicle for unleaded fuel.
yy Use the fuel with specified or higher Research Octane Number
recommended for your country by Ssangyong. Otherwise, it is
not covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Roof rack
Caution
or luggage.
Roof rack: 45 kg (100 lbs.) evenly distributed
When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear
securely fastened.
your vehicle.
Note

GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE AND TAILGATE WINDOW
Opening the Tailgate Window
Unlock
Lock
To unlock the tailgate window, unlock the

tailgate and pull the left lever up. Open the
tailgate window by pulling up the outer win-
dow grip.
Tailgate
opening lever
Opening the Tailgate
Tailgate window
opening lever
To open the tailgate, unlock the tailgate and

pull the tailgate opening lever up.
To close the tailgate, lower it by holding the
inside handle to a certain level first, then
close it.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning CAUTIONS WHEN OPENING/
yy Before closing the tailgate, ensure that none of your body parts
are trapped. Also, because the tailgate is heavy, it might unexpect-
CLOSING DOORS
edly fall down and close. To prevent any injury, close the tailgate
with caution. yy Do not allow children to play with any switch, door le-
yy The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are ver and the gear shift.
near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.
yy Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no re-
yy Before operating the power windows, doors, tailgate
straints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or and fuel filler door, make sure that nothing can be
sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained. trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers).
yy If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous exhaust yy Make sure that the doors, tailgate and fuel filler door
fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to
are completely closed before driving.
vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep
the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air yy When a child is on rear seat, use the child safety
comes into the vehicle. functions to avoid any unwanted and dangerous
yy No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment opening of doors.
of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event of a crash. yy Parts of the human body can be trapped in the win-
yy Exhaust gases are poisonous. Do not run the engine with the dow or sunroof and can be struck by passing objects.
tailgate or tailgate window open to avoid exhaust gas in the cabin. Do not stick hands, heads or anything else out of the
Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is in motion, openings.
resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel with the tailgate
or tailgate window open.
Caution
yy Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is in mo-
tion, resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel with the
tailgate open.
yy Make sure that you close the tailgate before driving. Possible dam-
age may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached objects
if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S
witches and devices.......................................4-2
3
L
ight switch.......................................................4-4
W
iper and washer.............................................4-8
4
R
ain sensing wiper*..........................................4-9
W
iper and washer switch................................4-10
5
C
ruise control switch* (D22DTR)....................4-12
C
ruise control switch* (D20DTR, D27DT(P), 4
6
G32D)..............................................................4-18
S
witch panel on driver’s door trim..................4-24 7
O
utside rearview mirror control switch...........4-25
R
emote audio controls & gear shift button
Interior Switches
8
(A/T) on steering wheel...................................4-26
S
teering wheel heating switch / heated 9
glass switch.....................................................4-28
H
azard warning flasher switch........................4-29 10
SP OFF switch*............................................4-30
E
H
DC (Hill Descent Control) switch*................4-32 11
P
AS (Parking Aid System) OFF switch*.........4-34
S
witches in center console.............................4-35 12
4
-Wheel drive system*....................................4-36
S
witches in overhead console, 13
room lamp switch............................................4-40
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
Room lamp switch
2
Sunroof switch*
3
5 Wiper and
washer switch
6 Light switch
Auto cruise*
7
8 Center switch
Rear fog light
switch*
9 Door lock/ Remote control
unlock switch switch on steering
Driver seat heating/
10 ventilation switch* wheel HLLD*
Passenger seat heating/ 4-wheel drive switch*
11 ventilation switch*
USB port & Aux jack
12 Door lock/unlock switch
(USB & HDMI port)*
Window control
13 switch
14

GETtheMANUALS.org
Steering wheel Tailgate and outside rearview ESP OFF switch* PAS OFF switch
heating switch mirror heated glass switch
Windshield heated glass Hazard switch HDC switch*

switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
LIGHT SWITCH
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL)*:

Light Switch DRL Regulation Region Only
Front fog light EXT INT
HEAD- FOG
CONDITION TAIL HEAD- DRL
switch LAMP LAMP
LAMP LAMP
KEY OFF X X X X X
TAIL LAMP OFF X X X X X
ACC
TAIL LAMP ON O O X X X
TAIL LAMP OFF O X X X O
Light switch TAIL LAMP ON O O X X O

IGN HEADLAMP ON O O O X X
ON FOG LAMP ON O X X O X
You can turn the lights on and
TAIL LAMP ON +
off (headlamps, tail lamps, FOG LAMP ON
O O X O X
license plate lamp, turn sig-
nal lamps, fog lights) with this Caution Note
switch. Turn on the headlamps when passing through DRL OFF: When the parking brake is applied with the
the dark area such as tunnel. vehicle stopped, the DRL and tail lamp are turned off.
High mounted stop

lamp
Headlamp
high beam License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Headlamp Turn signal
low beam lamp Stop lamp
Position lamp Stop lamp or
rear fog light*
Front fog light
Turn signal lamp
Turn signal lamp Back-up lamp

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC Light*
AUTO
The auto light and rain sensor senses the ambient illumination
intensity to determine the timing for turning the headlamps and
tail lamps on or off automatically when the light switch is set to
“AUTO”.
Caution
yy Do not clean the area where the auto-light and rain sensor in
installed with detergent or wax. Automatic Light & Rain Sensor*
yy On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual
mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending This senses the ambient illumination intensity to determine the
on the climate, season, or circumstances. timing for turning the headlamps and tail lamps on or off auto-
yy Any aftermarket tanning film or spray may cause the lighting matically when the light switch is set to “AUTO” (integrated
system to malfunction. with rain sensor).
yy Ssangyong recommends you to use this device restrictively around
only a sunrise or sunset. Caution
yy Usually turn the headlamps or tail lights on or off manually. Do not shake and impact the sensor. It may not work properly. On
yy Turn on the headlamps manually when passing through a dark uneven road, Auto Light may work improperly due to impacts and
area such as a tunnel. vibrations from the ground.
yy On a gloomy day, do not rely on this automatic function. But turn
the head or tail lights on or off manually.
Note
yy When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and
head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phe- In AUTO position (Light switch and Wiper switch), the head lamps are
nomenon recognizing the automatic setting. turned on when the wipers are started to operate by rain sensing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Battery Saver (Automatically turns off the lights)
Headlight Leveling Switch
yy To avoid discharging the battery, if the tail lamps are on after the ignition
key is removed, a buzzer will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s
door is opened. The tail lamps will automatically turn off when the door is
closed. (With the light switch on, if the ignition key is removed and all doors
are closed, the tail lamps are off due to the battery saver function. However,
if you open a door and turn the light switch to the “OFF” position and then
to the “ON” position, the tail lamps will stay on after the door is closed.)
yy To turn the tail lamps on again, insert the ignition key into the ignition
switch. Or, turn the light switch to the “OFF” position and then to the “ON”
position. With the low beam switched on, adjust
the aiming angle of headlights to suit
the vehicle load.
yy To lower the aiming angle, rotate
the switch downward.
yy To raise the aiming angle, rotate the
switch upward.
Note
LIGHT SWITCH According to load condition, adjust the
aiming angle of headlights.
(Headlamps ON) AUTO (Automatic light ON)
Head-, side-marker, tail, license plate, front Head- and tail lamps automatically turn on
fog (with front fog light switch ON), and or off based upon the intensity of the sun-
instrument cluster lamps come on. light analyzed by the automatic light sensor.
(Tail lamps ON) OFF (Lights OFF)

Side-marker, tail, license plate, front fog All lights are off.
(with front fog light switch ON), and in-
strument cluster lamps come on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Right Turn Signal Switch
Headlamp High Beam
To turn on the headlamp high beam, Note
push the lever towards the instru- While the turn signal lamp is turned on, the turn
ment cluster with the headlamp low signal indicator in the instrument cluster blinks.
beam on. The headlamp high beam
indicator ( ) in the instrument
cluster comes on when the head- Front Fog Light Switch
lamp high beam is turned on. To turn on the fog lights, turn this switch to ON position
while the tail lamps or headlamps are turned on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL): DRL

Regulation Region Only
For vehicles equipped with the DRL, the tail lights
automatically turn on when turning the starter key
from ACC to ON.
Passing Left Turn Signal Switch
Regardless of the position of the light
switch, if you hold the lever toward the
steering wheel, the headlights are on
high beam during the hold. The high
beam indicator also illuminates on the Rear Fog Light Switch*
instrument cluster during the hold.
To turn on the rear fog light, push the rear fog light
switch while the front fog light switch is turned on. To
Warning
turn it off, push the switch again. The rear fog lights
Driving with high beam headlamps dis- are automatically turned off when turning off the light
turbs the approaching vehicle’s visibility
for safe driving. Use the high beam head-
switch or the front fog light switch. Therefore, to turn on
lamp only during very dark situations the rear fog lights, push the rear fog light switch again
when it is very hard to see the road. after turning on the light switch and the front fog light
switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WIPER AND WASHER
Rear Wiper
Wiper and Washer Switch
Front Wiper
Washer Nozzle
Washer Fluid Reservoir Wiper Blade

Frequently check the washer fluid level and add the specified product as needed. If the windshield cannot be cleaned prop-
In winter, use only the specified washer liquid for winter season. erly due to worn wiper blades, replace
them with new ones. Refer to “Service
Caution and Maintenance” section in this manual.
yy If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will freeze Front Wiper Rear Wiper
during the winter and damage the washer fluid reser-
voir and motor. Use only the specified washer fluid. 500mm 350mm
yy Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the engine or body
paint of your vehicle during replenishment
Warning
The washer fluid includes the flammable materials to
prevent freezing. It could cause a fire when directly
contacted with flames. When checking the washer fluid,
avoid the flames near the washer fluid reservoir.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rain Sensing Wiper*
When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, this sensor detects the amount
of rain, turns on the wiper, and controls the intermittent wiper intervals.
Wiper AUTO Position
Rain and Auto Light Sensor
AUTO
It controls the wiping speed by de-

tecting the amount of rain drops.
Caution Warning
yy When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, the wiper will When you clean the windshield over the sensor with damp clothes,
operate once if the initial engine start is made. This may wear the the wiper may operate suddenly. It could cause serious injury. Make
wiper blades prematurely (especially in winter). Therefore, other sure to place the wiper switch and ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-
than rainy days, set the switch to the “OFF” position. In winter, tion when not in use.
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen and are not stuck to
the windshield. Otherwise, this may cause some damage to the Note
wiper motor.
yy When the light switche is in the “AUTO” position, head lights come
yy If you use only the wipers when the glass is dry, this could scratch
on if the rain sensor detects any rain.
the glass and wear the wiper blades prematurely. Use the wiper
with the washer when the glass is dry. yy The speed of the wipers becomes a little faster when it is dark
enough to turn on the automatic lights.
yy Turn the wiper switch to the “OFF” position before any car wash
to avoid unwanted operation of the wipers. yy When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will auto-
matically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF”
yy When it does not rain, turn the wiper switch into the “OFF” posi-
to the “AUTO” position. But the wiper will not operate again to
tion.
prevent any damage to the window even though the wiper switch
is turned from the “OFF” position to the “AUTO” position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Front Wiper Switch

MIST
If you move the wiper switch to “MIST” position
and release it, the windshield wipers operate one
wiping cycle. The wipers will operate continuously
if the switch is held in this position.
OFF
Wipers are not in operation.
AUTO
Operates automatically according to the
vehicle speed and amount of rainfall.
LO
Continuous wipe, slow operation Front Automatic Wiping Speed
Control Switch
HI
The interval of wiping speed can be adjusted by turning the
Continuous wipe, fast operation control knob upward or downward when the windshield wiper
switch is in AUTO position.
Fast: Fast interval
Slow: Slow interval

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR Wiper Switch Front Auto Washer Switch
When you press this switch with the front wiper
switch in “OFF” position, washer fluid will be sprayed
and the wiper will automatically operate 4 times.
When the switch is fully turned, washer fluid will Then, the fluid will be sprayed again and the wiper
be sprayed onto the rear window glass and the will automatically operate 3 times.
wiper will also operate. When the switch is re-
leased, it will return to the Rear Wiper Operation
mode and only the wiper will keep operating.
Rear wiper operation
OFF
Rear wiper is not in operation.
When the switch is fully turned, washer fluid Windshield Washer Operation
will be sprayed onto the rear window glass and In the “OFF” position, pull the lever toward you to spray washer
the wiper will also operate. When the switch is fluid on the windshield and to operate the wipers 1~3 cycles.
released, it will return to the “OFF” position and Pull the lever briefly (for less than 0.6 seconds): One wiping
turn off the wiper and washer. cycle with washer spray
Pull and hold the lever for more than 0.6 seconds: Three wip-
ing cycles with washer spray
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release
the lever.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH* (D22DTR)
Cruise Control Auto cruise ready light READY
When the cruise control ON/OFF switch is pressed, READY

indicator light appears on the instrument cluster. (Cruise con-
trol is now ready to operate)
Auto cruise control indicator light AUTO

CRUISE
With the READY indicator appeared on the instrument clus-

ter, if you push the cruise control setting switch up or down,
READY indicator turns off and AUTO CRUISE indicator will
turn on (Min. vehicle speed is 36 km/h for operation).
Indicator light Traffic Conditions for Using Cruise Control

AUTO Use the cruise control system only when the traffic is not
READY CRUISE jammed, driving on motorways or highways where there is no
destrian, etc.
Caution
tor pedal. READY or AUTO CRUISE indicator will come on in
the instrument cluster depending on the operation of the cruise Improper use of the cruise control could be dangerous.
control switch. yy Do not use on winding roads.
driving.
injuries.
Caution
The cruise control system is a supplementary system, which helps Note
the driver to drive the vehicle at a desired speed without using the The described speed value may vary slightly depending on the road
accelerator pedal under the traffic condition where the vehicle-to- conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cruise control (Setting the speed)
3. Maintaining the vehicle speed in the specified range, set the
desired speed by pushing the switch up in SET+ direction
(move the lever to position ). Remove your foot from the
4. Take your fingers off the cruise control switch.
5. Now the vehicle is cruised with the set speed (the speed
set at the moment when the cruise control starts operating)
Cruise control without depressing the accelerator pedal.
setting switch
6. To reset the speed during cruise control operation, slowly
press the accelerator pedal down until the desired speed is
reached, and repeat the step 3.
7. Refer to the following contents for operation details depend-
ing on vehicle conditions.
Caution
1. Press the cruise control ON/OFF switch. (READY indicator Never use the cruise control system until you get used to it.
comes on) Improper use or not fully aware of this function could result in collision
2. In order to activate the cruise control system, depress the
accelerator pedal until the vehicle speed reaches to the
proper range.
- Cruise control speed range: between 40 km/h and 140
km/h
- For vehicles with manual transaxle, the cruise control will
be available only when the gear shift lever position is in
3rd or higher.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Accelerating with the cruise control system
While the cruise control system is not in operation
Following steps will describe how to set the speed by accelerat-
ing and start the cruise control while the cruise control system is
not running.
1. Press the cruise control ON/OFF switch. (READY indicator
appears in the instrument cluster)
Cruise control
2. Depress the accelerator pedal over 36 km/h to set the cruise
setting switch control speed.
3. When the vehicle speed exceeds this value, push up or down
the cruise control switch in SET+ or SET- direction, respec-
tively to set the desired speed. Once the desired speed is
reached, release the accelerator pedal slowly.
4. If the cruise control switch is pushed and held up in SET+
direction the vehicle set speed will continue to increase until
the switch is released.
While the cruise control system is in operation 5. Take your finger off the cruise control switch.
1. To increase the set speed during cruise control operation,
push the cruise control switch up in SET+ direction until Increasing the set speed while the cruise control
reached to the desired speed without depressing accelera- system is in operation
tor pedal. If you want the fine increase of the control speed during the
Continue pushing the switch up until the desired speed is cruise control system operation, follow the steps below.
reached. 1. The speed will increase by approx. 1 km/h each time the
2. Remove your finger from the control switch once the de- cruise control switch is tapped up in SET+ direction (within 0.5
sired speed is reached. second).
2. If you want to increase the control speed by 10 km/h while
driving with cruise control running, tap the control switch up
in SET+ direction 10 times.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Decelerating with the cruise control system
Decreasing the set speed while the cruise control
system is in operation
If you want the fine decrease of the set speed during the cruise
control system operation, follow the steps below.
1. The speed will decrease by approx. 1.0 km/h each time the
cruise control switch is tapped down in SET- direction (within
Cruise control 0.5 second).
setting switch 2. If you want to decrease the set speed by 10 km/h while driv-
ing with cruise control running, tap the control switch down
in SET- direction 10 times.
While the cruise control system is in operation

1. To decrease the control speed during cruise control opera-
tion, push the cruise control switch down in SET- direction
until reached to the desired speed without pressing brake
pedal.
Continue pushing the switch down until the desired speed is
reached. Be informed that the cruise control system will be
deactivated when the vehicle speed gets lower than approx.
34 km/h.
2. Remove your finger from the control switch once the de-
sired speed is reached.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Resuming the set speed (RESUME)
Cruise control Cruise control

setting switch setting switch
If the auto cruise stopping conditions are met during the acti- If any of the following conditions is met while cruise control is
vation of the auto cruise, the function of the cruise control is operating, it is cancelled. (READY indicator stays on)
deactivated. But the last set speed memorized in the ECU will
be resumed when the RES button is pressed. Auto cruise stopping conditions (CANCEL)
The speed should be 40 km/h and the brake or accelerator
yy The brake pedal is depressed or ESP is activated.
pedal should not be depressed. (Deactivation by cruise control
OFF switch will not restore the previous set speed.) yy Drive the vehicle at less than 38 km/h.
yy Parking brake is applied while driving.
yy Depress the clutch pedal to change the gear (M/T).
yy ON/OFF switch operation (once) during auto cruise activa-
tion (ON/OFF switch operation in auto cruise ready mode
deactivates cruise control)

GETtheMANUALS.org
According to the vehicle conditions, the cruise
Caution
control will be cancelled when: yy Abnormal changes of the gear selector lever can damage the
1. The brake pedal is depressed or ESP is activated. engine. Do not move the gear shift lever to Neutral while driving at
2. The speed is decelerated below 34 (38) km/h. the set speed. Automatic transaxle damage may result.
3. Parking brake is applied while driving. downhill slopes.
4. Clutch pedal is depressed to shift (M/T only). yy The speed may drop to less than the set speed on a steep uphill
5. The speed increases or decreases drastically. grade. The accelerator must be used if you want to maintain that
speed.
- when driving at more than 50 km/h above the set speed yy The speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep
- when driving for longer than 1 minute at more than 25 downhill grade. When the speed increases too much, turn off the
km/h above the set speed cruise control.
yy Always keep the safe stopping distance and depress the brake
- when driving at less than 70 km/h below the set speed
pedal when necessary.
- when driving for more than 3 minutes at less than 65 km/
h below the set speed
6. The cruise control switch malfunction occurs Using the Cruise Control on Hills
7. The brake switch malfunction or disconnection occurs How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the
speed, load, and the steepness of the hill.
If the cruise control is cancelled without normal conditions de-
When going up steep hills, you may have to depress the accel-
scribed above, or an intermittent malfunction occurs, stop the
erator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you
engine and remove the key. The system will reset and is back
on when restarting the engine.
down.
Caution Applying the brake takes you out of the cruise control.
When not using the cruise control, press the cruise control ON/OFF
switch and then the READY indicator light will go off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH* (D20DTR, D27DT(P), G32D)
Cruise Control
Traffic Conditions for Using Cruise Control
Use the cruise control system only when the traffic is not
jammed, driving on motorways or highways where there is no
destrian, etc.
Caution
Improper use of the cruise control could be dangerous.
yy Do not use on winding roads.
injuries.
Note
maintains a desired driving speed without using the accelera- The described speed value may vary slightly depending on the road
conditions.
tor pedal.
driving.
Caution
The cruise control system is a supplementary system, which helps
the driver to drive the vehicle at a desired speed without using the
accelerator pedal under the traffic condition where the vehicle-to-

GETtheMANUALS.org
Setting a Desired Speed
1. To operate the cruise control, accelerate to the desired
TYPE A speed, which must be more than 36 km/h (24 MPH) and
less than 150 km/h (90 MPH).
2. When the desired speed is reached, push up the ACCEL
switch of the cruise control lever or push down the DECEL
switch for 1 second per one switching and then release the
3. Now, the vehicle is cruised by this system with the set
TYPE B speed.
4. And you can set to other vehicle speeds again with above
steps after an accelerator pedal intervention during the
cruise control running.
Caution
Never use the cruise control system until you get used to it.
Improper use or not fully aware of this function could result in collision
Manual transmission equipped vehicle:

The cruise control is only available when the 3rd or higher
speed gear is engaged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Accelerating with the Cruise Control System
yy While the cruise control system is not running
1. Accelerate using the accelerator pedal over 36 km/h.

2. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever and
hold it.
TYPE A 4. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever.
yy Tap-up while the cruise control system is running
1. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever less

TYPE B system is running. This is a tap-up switching.
2. When you operate a tap-up switching, the vehicle is acceler-
ated by 1.3 km/h over the previous set speed.
yy While the cruise control system is running
3. If you want to accelerate to 13 km/h, operate the tap-up
1. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever and switching ten times without accelerating with the cruise con-
hold it until the desired speed is reached without an accel- trol system.
erator pedal intervention.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Decelerating with the Cruise Control System
yy When the cruise control system is not running
TYPE A
1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control lever and
hold it.
3. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever. But
the cruise control system cannot maintain the cruise function
at less than 36 km/h.
TYPE B
yy Tap-down while the cruise control system is running
1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control lever less
system is running. This is a tap-down switching.
2. When you operate a tap-down switching, the vehicle is de-
yy While the cruise control system is running celerated by 1.3 km/h below the previous set speed.
3. If you want to decelerate to 13 km/h, operate the tap-down
1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control lever and switching ten times without the brake pedal intervention.
hold it until the desired speed is reached without a brake
pedal intervention. But the cruise control system cannot
maintain the cruise function at less than 34 km/h.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Recovery of Set Speed (RESUME) Normal Cancellation of the Cruise Control
TYPE A TYPE A
TYPE B TYPE B
Even if the cruise control is cancelled, the previous set cruise The cruise control system will be canceled when one or more
speed can be recovered by pulling up the cruise control lever items of the following conditions are applied;
when the current vehicle speed is over 38 km/h without an ac- 1. When the brake pedal is depressed.
celeration intervention. But if you turn off the ignition switch, 2. When the cruising speed is decreased less than 38 km/h.
the memorized set speed is cleared and you cannot recover
3. When the OFF switch is operated by pulling the cruise con-
the previous set speed. trol lever (Type A) or by pushing the ON-OFF switch of the
cruise control lever (Type B).
Caution
4. When ESP is activated.
The resume position should only be used if the driver is fully aware
of this speed and wishes to resume this particular speed. 5. When applying the parking brake while driving.
6. When using the clutch in order to shift (M/T only).
And the cruise control system can be operated again in driving
state.
Caution
Keep the main cruise control switch in the neutral position when not
using the cruise control.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Abnormal Cancellation of the Cruise Control Using the Cruise Control on Hills
1. When the rapid deceleration is applied without braking. How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the
2. When the rapid acceleration is applied without acceleration speed, load, and the steepness of the hill.
pedal intervention. When going up steep hills, you may have to depress the accel-
3. When the cruise control lever is failed. erator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you
4. When the brake switch and the brake light switch input sig-
down.
nal are implausible.
Applying the brake takes you out of the cruise control.
And the cruise control system cannot be operated again in
driving state. In this case, you should stop the vehicle, and
turn off the ignition switch and then turn it on again. After you
do that, you can use the cruise control system again. But if the
cruise control system isn’t recovered, you should contact a
Ssangyong Dealer for diagnosis of the cruise control system.
Caution
yy Abnormal changes of the gear selector lever can damage the
engine. Do not move the gear shift lever to Neutral while driving at
the set speed. Automatic transmission damage may result.
downhill slopes.
yy The speed may drop to less than the set speed on a steep uphill
grade. The accelerator must be used if you want to maintain that
speed.
yy The speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep
downhill grade. When the speed increases too much, turn off the
cruise control.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SWITCH PANEL ON DRIVER’S DOOR TRIM
Easy Access Button (Driver’s Seat)*

This system is designed to provide a driver
sufficient space to access and exit (driver’s
door moves rearward automatically).
Position Memory Setting Button (SET)*
Position Memory
Button (1, 2, 3)* Position Memory Cancellation Button (STOP)*
Outside Rearview Mirror

Folding Switch Window Lock Switch
To fold the outside rearview If the window lock switch is pressed
mirrors, press the switch. down, only dirver’s window is opera-
To unfold the mirrors, press tive. Passenger’s and rear windows
again cannot be operated by their switches.
Outside Rearview Mirror Control Switch

Adjust the outside rearview mirror position by
pushing the appropriate edge of this switch
after selecting the desired outside mirror. Window Switch
Central Door Lock/Unlock Switch
When the door lock/unlock switch is pressed
while all doors including the tailgate are locked,
all doors will be unlocked. When the switch is
pressed again, all doors will be locked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Outside Rearview Mirror Control

1. Select the driver side mirror (R) or the passenger side
mirror (L) with the mirror selection switch.
2. Adjust the outside rearview mirror by pushing the ap-
propriate edge of the switch.
Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Switch

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, press the
switch. To unfold the mirrors, press again.
Mirror Selection Switch

▶ “R”: Driver side mirror
▶ “L”: Passenger side mirror
Warning
Do not put any tinting film on the door glasses of the front seats.
Otherwise, your visibility will decrease.
Caution
yy You can fold and unfold the mirrors within 30 seconds after the
ignition is turned to OFF. However, this function is overridden when
any of front doors is opened with the ignition switch OFF. Aiming Switch
yy Do not fold or unfold the outside rearview mirrors manually. It may
cause a malfunction of the mirror folding system. Adjust the selected mirror up, down,
yy If you directly spray high-pressured water to the electric remote- left, or right by pressing the corre-
controlled outside mirrors, this may cause some malfunctions in sponding edges of the switch to get a
the mirror system. desired view.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS & GEAR SHIFT BUTTON (A/T) ON STEERING WHEEL
Type A Bluetooth Handsfree
Phone switch using Bluetooth handsfree for
mobile phone use
Note Cruise control ON/OFF

For more detailed information on audio and Pressing this switch turns on the READY
bluetooth handsfree system, refer to Audio indicator in the warning box. In this state,
Operating Manual provided separately. cruise control system is ready to operate.
SEEK
<
SEEK yy Pressing this switch during cruise con-

<
trol operation deactivates it.

yy in CD(DVD) player mode
- briefly press: Next/Previous track FRT Camera*
- press and hold:Moving in same track
yy in radio mode When this switch is pressed, front view of
- briefly press: Manual search, the vehicle is displayed on the front monitor.
move to selected channel
- press and hold: Auto search
RES*
+ VOL When this switch is pressed during cruise
VOL - control operation, the vehicle speed is
returned to the speed before the deacti-
Increases/decreases volume
vation of cruise control function.
MUTE(POWER) SET -
SET +
yy Pressing this switch briefly with
yy Cruise control system is acti- yy Resume the speed set before
the audio system off turns the sys-
vated by pressing this switch cancellation with the READY
tem on. Press and hold this switch
w it h R E A DY indic ato r O N . indicator ON. (for gasoline only)
to turn off the audio system again.
MODE (Vehicle speed should be 36 yy Decrease the speed set to the
yy Pressing this switch once with the km/h or higher) cruise control system.
audio system on turns off all sound Audio mode changes when yy Increase the speed set to the
outputs. To resume the audio out- the switch is pressed. cruise control system. Note
put, press the switch again.
Refer to Chapter 4, Cruise control
switch for detailed information.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Type B
MODE POWER
yy To change the audio mode, To turn the audio system ON/

press this switch briefly. O FF, p r e s s t h e “ P OW ER ”
Radio → USB → BT Audio switch under the left side of
→ AUX the steering wheel.
yy To change the Radio band,
press and hold this switch.
AM → FM1 → FM2
+ VOL
- SEEK
>
VOL SEEK
>
Increases/decreases volume yy in CD(DVD) player mode
- briefly press:
Next/Previous track
- press and hold:
Moving in same track
yy in radio mode
- briefly press:
Manual search, move
to selected channel
MUTE Bluetooth Switch
- press and hold:
Stops audio output from the To receive a call in Bluetooth Auto search
audio system. To resume the mode, press this switch.
audio output, press the button To reject a call, press and
again. hold this switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
STEERING WHEEL HEATING SWITCH / HEATED GLASS SWITCH
Indicator Indicator
Steering Wheel Heating Windshield Heated Glass Switch Tailgate and Outside Rearview Mirror
Switch yy Press this switch to turn on the windshield Heated Glass Switch
To heat the steering wheel, heated glass. It will operate for about 12 yy Press this switch to turn on the tailgate and
press this switch. To stop the minutes. outside rearview mirror heated glasses. It
heating, press it again. The yy Press the switch again to stop the operation. will operate for about 12 minutes.
indicator on the instrument yy Use this to prevent the windshield wiper yy Press the switch again to stop the operation.
cluster comes on when heating blades from being frozen.
and goes off when turning off. yy This switch is designed to defrost or defog the
y The heated glass will operate for about 6
y tailgate glass and outside rearview mirrors.
Caution
minutes when the switch is pressed again
within 12 minutes after completion of its yy The heated glass will operate for about 6
yy Do not install the supplemental
first operation cycle. minutes when the switch is pressed again
steering device. It may cause within 12 minutes after completion of its
to damage the heated wire yy The indicator in the switch comes on when
first operation cycle.
inside the steering wheel. in use.
yy Take care not to damage the yy The indicator in the switch comes on when
grip surface of the steering in use.
wheel with a sharp object. Outside Tailgate
The built-in heater could be rearview mirror heated
damaged. heated glass glass
yy When cleaning the steering
wheel, do not use organic sol-
vents such as thinner, alcohol
or gasoline. These solvents can Windshield
damage the heater and the sur- heated glass
face of the steering wheel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch Warning

yy To turn on the hazard warning flashers, push the hazard Do not leave the flashers on for an extended period of time. Battery
warning flasher switch. could be discharged.
yy Use the hazard warning flasher to warn other drivers when
you stop or park under emergency conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ESP OFF SWITCH*
ESP OFF Switch ESP OFF Indicator

If you press the ESP OFF switch, ESP function is deactivated On: When ESP is deactivated by pressing
and the ESP OFF indicator in the instrument cluster comes on. ESP OFF switch
To resume the ESP function, press this switch again. At this
time, ESP OFF indicator goes out.
ESP Indicator/Warning Lamp

ESP (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM)
Blinking: When ESP is operating
SYSTEM
On: When ESP system is defective.
The Electronic Vehicle Stability Control Program (ESP) is
When ESP is activated, this indicator blinks. a supplementary driving safety system when your vehicle
is unstably moving in a certain situation, such as during a
If this indicator stays on (ESP warning lamp), immediately
sharp corner. The ESP applies brakes on a certain wheel(s)
have the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
or controls the engine torque to compensate vehicle stabil-
ity. These actions help your vehicle avoid dangerous situ-
ations. The ESP functions automatically, working only in
Note very unstable conditions; it does not operate under normal
When you hit the brake while driving at more than 50 km/h or when driving conditions. If the ESP is operating, the ESP warning
ESP is in operation, the hazard warning flasher will blink for ap- lamp will blink on the instrument cluster.
prox. 10 seconds to inform the emergency situation to the vehicles
around.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Stopping ESP Function With ESP OFF Switch ARP (Active Rollover Protection) Function
If the driving wheels are slipping on snowy or icy roads, the This function is a part of the ESP system. When your vehicle
engine rpm may not increase even when you depress the ac- moves in an extremely unstable manner, this function helps
celerator pedal, and accordingly, you may not be able to move the vehicle maintain normal stability.
your vehicle. In this case, stop the ESP function by pressing
the ESP OFF switch. When the ESP OFF switch is pressed, Caution
the ESP function stops and the vehicle is driven independently The ARP system more powerfully controls the engine and each wheel
from the sensor outputs. than the ESP function. When the ARP is applied, a sudden decrease
of vehicle speed or powerful braking force can make steering your
Driving Impression when ESP is Working vehicle a little difficult.
When ESP is applied in a certain situation (the indicator blinks
and a warning buzzer sounds), such as during a sharp turn, Caution
you may feel that ESP controls each wheel and different levels yy If ESP indicator comes on after engine starting, ESP related sys-
of needed braking force are applied to wheels. You may hear tem is defective. Make sure to check the vehicle at the nearest
some noise or feel some vibrations from the brake pedal or Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
other systems. They are caused by pressure changes in rele- yy The ESP system does not operate during reverse driving.
vant system. You may also notice the engine output decreases yy The ESP system is activated when the vehicle is unstable to cor-
rect the vehicle stability. When the ESP indicator is blinking, reduce
even when the accelerator pedal is being depressed. the speed and pay extra attention to the road.
yy The ESP system is only a supplementary device for the vehicle.
BAS (Brake Assist System) Function When the vehicle exceeds its physical limits, it cannot be con-
A certain driver such as a female driver, aged driver, or a trolled. Do not rely on the system. Keep driving safely.
driver with a disability is unable to depress the brake pedal yy When ESP is applied, you may feel some noise or vibration from
the brake pedal or other relevant systems. They are caused by
as hard as necessary. When the ESP system recognizes any pressure changes in the relevant systems.
emergency situations requiring hard braking, it automatically yy Do not drive off the vehicle immediately after starting the engine.
delivers an extra high braking pressure to the wheels. The ESP system needs approx. 2 seconds to perform self-
diagnosis. If the system could not complete the self-diagnosis,
HDC (Hill Descent Control) Function the ESP system cannot be activated even when the vehicle is in
unstable conditions.
When traveling down steep grades, this function allows you yy Do not press the ESP OFF switch when the ESP system is in
to travel at a low speed without any depression of the brake operation. Stopping the ESP function on the slippery road may
pedal. cause a serious accident. To deactivate the ESP function, press
the ESP OFF switch only on a long straight road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC (HILL DESCENT CONTROL) SWITCH*
HDC Switch HDC?

When this button is pressed once, HDC is ready for use. The
green HDC indicator on the instrument cluster comes on. When HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling
the button is pressed again, HDC is deactivated and the indicator down steep grades, this function allows you to travel at
goes off. a low speed without any depression of the brake pedal.
This convenient function is for only driving down steep
grades. Therefore do not use this function for anything
HDC Indicator other than driving down steep hills.
Green light on: HDC is ready for use
(by pressing the HDC switch).
Red light on: the HDC system is overheated
or malfunctioning.
When HDC is applied, the green HDC indicator blinks.

When the red HDC indicator is on, the HDC system is overheated
or malfunctioning.
When the red HDC indicator is on, the HDC function does not
work.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC Operational Conditions Depressing the Accelerator or Brake Pedal while HDC
1. The HDC switch should be on (The green indicator on is Being Applied
the instrument cluster comes on). If you depress the accelerator or brake pedal, the HDC function im-
2. A certain steep grade. mediately stops and there will be more driving or braking force ac-
3. The vehicle speed is 2 ~ 50 km/h (7 km/h for M/T). cordingly.
4. The automatic gear shift lever is in the “D” or “R” or “N” Warning
position. In case of the manual transmission, the gear
When driving down an extremely dangerous steep grade, HDC will still
shift is in the forwarding “1” or “Reverse” or “Neutral”
work even if the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed.
position.
5. The accelerator or brake pedal is not depressed. Operation of HDC
6. ESP (Electronic Stability Program, including BAS) is If the conditions for activating the HDC are met, HDC is activated
not activated. and the green HDC indicator blinks on the instrument cluster. The
HDC is deactivated when the vehicle speed is below 5 km/h or
Deactivation Conditions of HDC above 70 km/h or the gradient of the slope becomes gentle while it
1. The HDC switch is off (The green indicator on the in- is in operation. It is normal that strong vibrations and noise occur
strument cluster is off too). from the brake system when the HDC is in operation.
2. Less than required steep grade.
Warning
3. Vehicle’s speed is out of the operational ranges.
yy HDC is designed for driving on off-road steep grades.
4. The automatic gear shift lever is in or passes through yy Unnecessary usage of HDC can cause malfunctions in the brake system
the “N” position. Or the manual transmission shift lever or ESP. Do not use HDC when driving on normal roads.
is engaged in or passes through the neutral position. yy If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC may be
5. The accelerator or brake pedal is depressed. applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed bump. There-
fore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal roads.
6. ESP (including BAS) is applied.
yy If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is overheated or malfunctioning.
7. Because of extended operation of HDC, the system is If the indicator is on even after the system has cooled down enough, have
overheated (The red HDC indicator illuminates). the nearest authorized dealer or service center check the system.
yy It is normal to have strong vibrations and noise from the brake system
when HDC is applied.
yy In case of a manual transmission vehicle, the gear shift is in the forward-
ing “1” or “Reverse” position. If HDC is attempted in the “2” position, the
engine may turn off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PAS (Parking Aid System) OFF SWITCH*
Operation of Front Parking Aid System
PAS OFF Switch

This switch turns on and off the front parking aid Lamp OFF Lamp ON
sensors when the gear shift lever is in “D” posi- Gear
tion. If the sensors are OFF, the indicator on the Position
(The front parking aid sensors (The front parking aid sensors
switch is ON. are operable.) are not operable.)
Front Parking Aid Sensor
D
R
Installed on both sides of front bumper
Note
aid sensors do not work when the gear shift lever is
in “P” or “N” position or the vehicle speed is 10 km/h
or more.
aid sensor works in R position

GETtheMANUALS.org
SWITCHES IN CENTER CONSOLE
Driver’s Seat Heating/Ventilation switch*

Rotate the seat heating/ventilation switch
from ‘0’ (OFF) to the desired position (1~3).
Passenger’s Seat Heating/

USB Port and HDMI Jack
Ventilation switch* Use them when you want to hear the music in
Rotate the seat heating/ventilation USB memory stick or an external audio device
switch from ‘0’ (OFF) to the desired through with the speakers in your vehicle.
position (1~3).
Cigarette Lighter
To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in all
the way down. When it becomes heated, it
automatically pops out and is ready for use.
Gear Shift Button
(Tip switch)
You can manually shift
up or down by pushing
Transmission Mode Switch or pulling this button at
You can select ‘Winter’ or M position.
‘Standard’ mode with this
switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4-Wheel Drive SYSTEM*
4-Wheel Drive System DRIVING MODE

Transfer case which allows you, in the case of part-time four 2H : 2-Wheel Drive
wheel drive, to switch between two-wheel drive and four-
This is rear wheel drive with high
wheel drive. Compared with two-wheel drive vehicles, this
speed. Use this position for nor-
system provides more stable driving conditions. This sys-
mal driving. This position gives
tem ensures a more stable drive on wet or slippery roads.
greater fuel economy, quieter
ride and least drive train wear.
Types of Four-Wheel Drive System

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)* 4H : 4-Wheel Drive, High
AWD stands for the full-time 4WD system. Use this position on wet or slip-
AWD reduces wheel slipage and provides greater driver pery roads such as sandy, mud-
control over the vehicle. AWD automatically splits the torque dy or snow covered roads.
between the front (40%) and rear (60%) wheels. This system
controls the vehicle traction force along with the ESP system.
Torque On-Demand (TOD)*
TOD, which is based on the Four-Wheel Drive, enables the
control unit to adjust the proportion of the torque between
the front and rear wheels according to driving conditions. 4L : 4-Wheel Drive, Low
Use this position for maximum
traction.
Part-Time 4-Wheel Drive
Normally, the vehicle is driving in 2WD mode. But if needed,
it can be changed into 4WD High (4H), and 4WD Low (4L) by
pressing the switch. This is equipped with the control unit that
supports the mode transfer. In 4WD mode, the system splits
the torque between the front (50%) and rear (50%) wheels.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4-Wheel Drive Switch Driving Mode Change
Part-Time
2H ⇔ 4H
It is recommended to shift under a speed of 70 km while the
vehicle is being driven.
yy When shifting the driving mode to “4H”, this

indicator comes on.
TOD yy This indic ator blinks dur ing the mo de
change from “4L” to “4H”. After completion
Select a proper driving of the mode change to 4H, the indicator
mode according to the comes on.
road conditions.
2H, 4H ⇔ 4L
yy Automatic Transmission Equipped Vehicle

Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the gear
selector lever into the “N” position. Turn the switch to the
desired position while depressing the brake pedal.
yy Manual Transmission Equipped Vehicle
Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the shift
lever into the “Neutral” position. Turn the switch to the
desired position while depressing the clutch pedal.
Note yy When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this

yy The vehicle equipped with TOD system does not have the 2H indicator blinks until the shifting operation
(2-wheel drive) function because it automatically controls the driv- is completed. After completion of the mode
ing force at front and rear wheels. change to 4L, the indicator comes on.
yy The vehicle with AWD system does not have the 4WD switch
because it is driven in full-time 4WD mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING LIGHTS/INDICATORS AND CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
4WD HIGH Indicator CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
yy When shifting the driving mode from “2H”
to “4H”, this indicator comes on. yy There could be mechanical noises and shocks during mode
changes. However, these are normal conditions due to the mode
yy When shifting the driving mode from “4L” changing operations.
to “4H”, this indicator blinks until the shift- yy Use only the 2H mode on a normal paved surface. Do not drive
ing operation is completed. After comple- your vehicle in the “4H” or “4L” position on paved road surfaces.
tion of the mode change to 4H, the indica- Doing so will result in damages to the drive train.
tor comes on. yy Driving in a 4 wheel mode on a normal paved surface will cause
unwanted noises, premature wear of tires, or increased fuel con-
4WD LOW Indicator sumption.
yy To shift from “4L” into another mode or vice versa, stop the vehicle
When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this and depress the brake pedal before any shift.
indicator blinks until the shifting operation yy If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system
is completed. After completion of the mode checked by the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
change to 4L, the indicator comes on. rized Service Center.
yy When cornering a curved road in a 4-wheel drive mode (4L or
4WD CHECK Warning Indicator 4H), there could be some mechanical shocks and resistances in
vehicle’s drive train. These are normal conditions due to internal
If this warning light comes on while driv- resistance in the drive train when the 4-wheel drive mode is prop-
ing, have t he 4W D system c he c ked by erly working. To avoid damages to the drive train, do not drive your
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized vehicle at an excessively high speed on a sharply curved road.
yy This helps to make the mode changes easily.
Service Center.
yy In case of TOD, cornering a curve in 4L mode may cause shock. It
is operated normally, because it is caused by non-allowable speed
Tight Cornering difference between front and rear wheels to achieve maximum
traction in 4L mode.
Cornering a curve in 4WD mode (4L or 4H) may shake up the yy Drive the vehicle at the speed of 80 km/h or less when driving in
vehicle or cause skidding. Such phenomena indicate that the 4H mode (P/Time).
four-wheel drive is operated normally, because they can be yy We hope you will use 4L mode when high traction is required.
caused by the resistance of the internal power system according yy Drive the vehicle in 2H mode when the spare tire is fitted. When
to the difference of rotation between the front and rear wheels. driving in 4H mode, it will damage the drive system.
Please avoid excessive and tight cornering in four-wheel drive yy Be sure to use the same size and type tires of the same manufac-
turer on all wheels so that the vehicle characteristics can be main-
mode to prevent the power train from being damaged. tained safely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Headlight Leveling Switch*
Description of switch
Position 0: One person on driver’s seat
Two persons on front seat (One driver and one
co-driver)
Position 1: For 7seats: All seats are occupied.
Position 2: For 7seats: All seats are occupied. Plus weight in
loading compartment (270kg for 5-link, 115kg for
IRS)
547kg for IRS)
547kg for IRS) - 2WD M/T only
With the low beam switched on, adjust the aiming angle of The loading includes luggage and the 3rd seat area.
headlights to suit the vehicle load.
yy To lower the aiming angle, rotate the switch counter-clock-
wise.
yy To raise the aiming angle, rotate the switch clockwise.
Note
According to load condition, adjust the aiming angle of headlights.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SWITCHES IN OVERHEAD CONSOLE, ROOM LAMP SWITCH
Front Door Coupled Room Lamp Switch

If you open a door when this switch is pressed the
room lamp comes on. When you close the door,
the room lamp is dimmed out.
Spot Lamp Switch Spot Lamp Switch (Driver’s)

(Passenger’s) The front room lamp (driver’s) turns
The front room lamp on when pressing in this switch.
(passenger’s) turns on
when pressing in this
switch. Sunroof Switch
The sunroof is opened/closed by pulling up/
down the sunroof open/close switch. For de-
tails, refer to “Sunroof” section in this manual.
Center and Rear Room Lamp Switch
OFF position: The lamp does not come on. Caution
ON ON position: The lamp stays on. yy If your vehicle is left unattended while the
DOOR () DOOR position (●): The lamp comes on spot or center room lamp switch is turned
OFF when the door is opened. The lamp goes on, the battery may be discharged.
out when closing the opened door. yy If a door is opened for an extended period
of time when the door switch is pressed in,
the battery may be discharged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Instrument cluster (DIESEL).............................5-2
3
Instrument cluster (G32D)................................5-4
Indication of tire pressure 4
(TPMS equipped vehicle)*..............................5-10
5
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*..... 5-11
5
Warning lights and indicators..........................5-17 6
7
Instrument Cluster
8
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (diesel)
1 Black FACE type*
2
6 TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
8
111Light indicator 1111ABS warning light 2222Auto cruise Ready indicator
9 222Hazard indicator 1111HDC indicator 2222Auto cruise indicator
333Left turn signal indicator 1111Engine check warning light 2222Brake warning light
10 444Right turn signal indicator 1111 Engine oil pressure warning light 3333Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat)
555High beam indicator 1111Battery charge warning light 3333Air bag warning light
11 666Tachometer 1111Auto shift indicator 3333Door ajar warning light
777 Speedometer 2222Odometer/ Trip odometer 3333Trip switch
888Fuel gauge 2222Global warning light 3333Tire pressure warning indicator
12
999Engine coolant temperature gauge 2222Low fuel level warning light 33334WD LOW indicator
1111Front fog light indicator 2222Engine overheat warning light 33334WD HIGH indicator
13
1111Winter mode indicator 2222SSPS warning light 33334WD CHECK warning light
1111Over speed warning light (GCC only) 2222ESP OFF indicator 3333Water separator warning light
14 1111Immobilizer indicator 2222ESP indicator/warning light 3333Glow indicator

GETtheMANUALS.org
Standard type
READY
111Light indicator 1111HDC indicator 2222Brake warning light

222Left turn signal indicator 1111Engine check warning light 2222Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat)
333Right turn signal indicator 1111Engine oil pressure warning light 2222Air bag warning light
444High beam indicator 1111 Battery charge warning light 3333Door ajar warning light
555Tachometer 1111Auto shift indicator 3333Trip switch
666Speedometer 1111Odometer/ Trip odometer 33334WD LOW indicator
777 Fuel gauge 2222Low fuel level warning light 33334WD HIGH indicator
888Engine coolant temperature gauge 2222Engine overheat warning light 33334WD CHECK warning light
999Front fog light indicator 2222SSPS warning light 3333Water separator warning light
1111Winter mode indicator 2222ESP OFF indicator 3333Glow indicator
1111Over speed warning light (GCC only) 2222ESP indicator/warning light
1111Immobilizer indicator 2222Auto cruise Ready indicator
1111ABS warning light 2222Auto cruise indicator

GETtheMANUALS.org
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (g32d)
Black FACE type*


GETtheMANUALS.org
Standard type


GETtheMANUALS.org
Tachometer Speedometer
Diesel Gasoline Type A Type B
RED ZONE RED ZONE
TRIP A
ODO B km
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in kilometers per
minute. Multiply 1,000 to the current number, then it will be the hour (km/h) or mile per hour (mph).
current number of engine revolutions.
Warning
Warning Excessive speed can damage engine.
Do not let engine reach excessive speed, indicated by the pointer
being in the red zone.
Note
Speedometer-KPH (MPH) Speedometer-MPH (KPH)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel gauge Coolant temperature gauge
This gauge indicates the level of fuel remaining in the fuel The temperature gauge indicates the temperature of the en-
tank. Fill up the fuel tank before the needle reaches “E”. gine coolant.
Caution
The engine can overheat.
yy If the pointer reaches the red zone, stop the vehicle.
yy Allow engine to cool.
If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may
seriously damage the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LCD Display
Auto Shift Indicator
This indicator shows the gear selector lever position and
currently selected gear.
Gear selector lever position
(P, R, N, D, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1) - 5A/T
(P, R, N, D, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1) - 7A/T
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
Gear Shift Indicator (6 M/T only)

Trip Switch
This indicator indicates the proper gear shifting time.

EX)
Shift-up to 3rd gear (currently 2nd gear or lower)
Shift-down to 3rd gear (currently 4th gear or higher)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Odometer and Trip Odometer Display
Each time the TRIP/RESET switch on the center panel is
pressed lightly, the indicators are changed. To reset the trip
meter, press and hold the switch.
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY Trip Illumination control

Unit: 0~999999km mode
Trip Switch
Adjusting The Instrument Cluster Illumination

(Black-face Type) Trip A Trip B
To adjust the illumination of instrument cluster, press the trip Unit: 0.0~999.9km Unit: 0 ~ 9999km
until “ILL” appears on the LCD display. Then, press and hold
the trip switch for more than 3 seconds to get into the cluster
illumination adjusting mode. In this mode, press the trip switch
until you get the desired illumination level (ILL6 to ILL1).

GETtheMANUALS.org
INDICATION OF TIRE PRESSURE (TPMS EQUIPPED VEHICLE)*
You can check the tire pressure for each wheel through LCD
display (in “ODO” display mode) as shown in the figure
Caution
The tire pressure cannot be displayed when the vehicle is in station-
ary immediately after engine starting. It can be displayed few minutes
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
after driving off the vehicle.
Trip Switch
Press the trip switch for Wait for more than 10 seconds
more than 1 second or press the trip switch for more
than one second
Tire pressure for
front wheels
Briefly press Briefly press
Tire pressure for rear

wheels

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)*
What’s TPMS?
As an additional safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates an
abnormal tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated or over-inflated.
Trip switch:
Displaying tire pressure
for each tire
TPMS
ECU
Wheel module Wheel module TRIP A

ODO B km
READY
TPMS ECU rec eives the signals for tire pres sure and
temperature from each tire module, and displays the tire
pressure on the instrument cluster.
Tire pressure display

Proper tire pressure: 32 psi (unit: psi)
The tire pressure should be checked when there is nobody
Tire monitoring display
inside the vehicle and the tires are cold (approx. 18°C).
If a specific tire indicator il-
luminates in yellow or blinks,
the tire inflation pressure
may be abnormal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Indication of Tire Pressure
Trip Switch
When you press the trip switch for more
than one second in ODO mode, LCD display
shows the tire pressure for front wheels.
To see the tire pressure for rear wheels,
briefly press the trip switch again.
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
Tire Pressure
TPMS start to recognize the tire pressures in 10 minutes of continuous driving (over 30 km/h)
after starting the engine. If the system is not ready yet, LCD display shows “--”.
Tire pressure for front wheels Tire pressure for rear wheels
Briefly press the trip switch
Front left Front right Rear left Rear right
Caution
yy If your vehicle was in stationary for more than 20 minutes after starting the engine, the tire pressure cannot be
displayed on LCD display. To reset the TPMS, drive (over 30 km/h) your vehicle for more than 10 minutes.
yy The tire pressure on LCD display may vary according to the external factors such as driving condition and,
number of passengers.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tire Pressure Warning Indicator
Normal Under-pressure
Tire pressure warning indicator is When a tire is significantly under-
Green indicator ON Yellow indicator ON
ON in green for 15 seconds inflated, the symbol for the affect-
ed tire is ON in yellow. At this mo-
ment, the tire pressure warning
light on instrument cluster comes
on simultaneously.
If this happens, stop your vehicle
and its pressure.
Over-pressure Imbalanced pressure

When a tire is significantly over- When the tire pressure between
Yellow indicator blinks Yellow indicator blinks in turn
inflated, the symbol for the af- left wheel and right wheel is im-
fected tire blinks in yellow. balanced, both symbols blink in
If this happens, stop your vehicle turn.
and its pressure. Caution
yy The tire pressure between front
wheel and rear wheel cannot be
checked for their balance.
yy In this case, the pressure dif-
ference between left wheel and
right wheel exceeds 4 psi.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOBAL WARNING LIGHT* When Changing a Tire
Changing Tire Locations
The TPMS automatically resets new location of tires after
continuous driving (over 30 km/h) for more than 20 minutes.
Caution
yy The global warning light may come on when you change the loca-
TRIP A
ODO B km tion of tires and tire pressure sensor.
yy The resetting time for new location of tires varied according to the
READY
driving conditions.
sensors.
As an additional safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Warning
that illuminates an abnormal tire pressure telltale when one
yy If you have injected sealant into one of your tire for repairing, drive
or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated or over-
the vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center within a
inflated. driving distance of 200 km at a speed of 80 km/h or slower and
replace the repaired tire with a new one.
Warning yy When replacing the sealant injected tire, the TPMS sensors should
yy If the global warning light blinks when engine starts (IGN ON), be checked for appearance and abnormality at a Ssangyong Au-
the TPMS is not working. This prevents the TPMS from warning thorized Service Center.
to driver for abnormal tire conditions. To reset the TPMS, restart
the engine and drive (over 30 km/h) your vehicle for more than 10
minutes. If the global warning light still stays on, have the system
Center.
yy When the tire pressure warning light is illuminated, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If this happens, have the
tire inflation pressure checked by nearest service center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Spare Tire Is Used
Caution
The spare tire is not equipped with a TPMS module on its yy If the TPMS sensor is covered by some foreign materials such as
wheel. Thus, if a spare tire is installed, the TPMS warning snow or mud, the TPMS may not communicate with the TPMS unit.
lamp comes on and the TPMS does not operate. This may cause an abnormal operation of TPMS.
yy If the snow chains are installed on the wheel, the TPMS may not
Caution work properly.
When the vehicle is driven with the deflated tire placed in the cargo yy If the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cable or radio
area after the spare tire is installed, the tire pressure monitoring transmitter which can interfere with normal operation of TPMS, the
system can detect the pressure of the deflated tire and display “low TPMS may not work properly.
tire pressure” message or turn on the global warning light. yy If you use the tire without TPMS sensor, the TPMS warning light
comes on and the TPMS does not operate.
yy Do not use any tire sealant if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS.
When Low Tire Pressure Detected The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure sensors.
yy The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage
yy The global warning light ( ) and the low pressure tire po- caused by external factors such as a nail on the road. If you feel
sition indicator on the instrument cluster come on when a any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelera-
significantly under-inflated tire is detected. If this occurs, tor and slowly move to a safe position off the road.
slow down and have your vehicle checked and serviced at yy Unauthorized modification or alteration of the vehicle that may
a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. affect the performance of TPMS is not permissible.
yy If you drive continuously without replacing a inflated tire yy Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the TPMS components
with a new one, the operating performance of the vehicle, may interfere with the system’s operation and may cause the
TPMS malfunctions.
breaking force and tire life will be adversely affected and
yy Make sure not to damage the tire pressure sensor while chang-
fuel economy will decrease.
ing a tire.
yy If you cannot take the vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized yy Use only genuine TPMS specific tire with tire pressure sensor.
Service Center, check and follow the instructions for the yy After changing a tire or TPMS sensor, check the tire pressure and
service kit (emergency puncture repair kit). adjust the pressure to the specified value (32 psi) if necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Adjust the tire pressure when the tire is cold. Cold tire is defined as yy Never attempt to adjust or modify any components of the tire pres-
the tire of the vehicle that has not been driven for at least 3 hours, sure monitoring system. The system may not work properly.
in shaded area or driven less than 1.6 km. yy The tire pressure monitoring sensors should be installed on each
yy Even if you have adjusted the tire pressure, the low tire pressure wheel to detect which tire has low pressure. The tire pressure
warning lamp can be turned ON in the cold weather. This is be- monitoring sensor installed to a position on other than the wheels
cause the tire pressure falls below the low pressure limit for low can turn on the tire pressure warning lamp.
temperature effects, and is not cause for concern. yy Make sure that the tire pressure monitoring sensors are not lost
Check the tires and adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. or damaged when replacing tires.
yy If you need to drive when the temperature falls down or rises up
rapidly, check the tire pressure before driving and adjust it to the
Warning
recommended pressure, if necessary.
yy All tires of the vehicle including the spare tire should be checked yy Driving with low tire pressure for an extended time can result in
for proper pressure periodically. tire overheating and burst failure. It may also decrease the tire life,
braking force, fuel economy and stability of the vehicle. Consult
yy The tire pressure monitoring system may pick up electrical distur-
with the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
bances around the police stations, radio stations, military facilities,
Service Center for the recommended tire pressure.
towers, etc. At this time, the tire pressure warning lamp can be
turned on after flashing for a certain time. y Sudden tire damage due to external factors will not be detected
immediately. If the vehicle is unstable, immediately release the
yy Also, the tire pressure warning lamp can be turned on after blinking
accelerator pedal, move the vehicle to the safe place and check
when an after-market equipment, including a laptop, cellular phone
the vehicle.
charger, audio/navigation system, remote starting system, or wire-
less communication device, is used or installed to the vehicle. y Do not carry out any modification or alteration disrupting the opera-
tion of the tire pressure monitoring system.
yy If another vehicle with a properly functioning tire pressure moni-
toring system drives near your vehicle, your tire pressure warning y The wheels on the market have no tire pressure monitoring sensor.
lamp may not be turned on temporarily even when the tire pressure Always use a genuine wheel with tire pressure monitoring sensor
monitoring sensor is malfunctioning. for your safety.
sensor.
yy The tire pressure monitoring system cannot detect a sudden failure
of tires due to nails, metal debris, etc. on the roads.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATORS
LIGHT INDICATOR HAZARD INDICATOR TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the tail This indicator blinks when the hazard This indicator blinks when the turn sig-
lamp or headlamp is switched on. warning flashers are switched on. nal switch is turned on.
Both indicators blink when the hazard
warning switch is turned on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR FRONT FOG LIGHT INDI- Winter Mode Indica-
CATOR tor
This indicator comes on when the high This indicator comes on when the front The indicator comes on when the Win-
beam headlamp is switched on. fog light is switched on. ter mode (W) switch near the gear se-
lector lever is pressed.
Warning Use this mode to drive off smoothly on
Driving with high beam headlamp disturbs an icy and slippery road.
the approaching vehicle’s visibility. For safe
driving, use the high beam headlamp only
when it is very hard to see the road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL INDI- Immobilizer Indicator ABS WARNING LIGHT
CATOR*
AUTO
CRUISE
This indicator comes on when the cruise This indicator comes on when the igni- This warning light comes on when the
control system is switched on. tion key is communicating with the en- ignition switch is turned to “ON” and
gine control unit (during engine starting) should go off in a few seconds.
for 0.5 seconds.
The time needed for communication be- Warning
tween the immobilizer key and ECU can yy If this light stays on after starting the en-
vary. When the time is very short, the gine or comes on while driving, have the
immobilizer indicator does not come on. system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or
Auto cruise Ready In this case, the ABS function is not
Caution
indicator* available, but the conventional brake
If this indicator blinks, it may indicate that system is properly working.
there is something wrong in the immobilizer yy ABS is a device that prevents wheels
system. Have the system checked by a from locking during braking to allow
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- steering. However, the ABS system does
rized Service Center. not shorten the stopping distance.
Caution
This indicator comes on when the cruise
ABS system performs self diagnosis by
control ON/OFF switch is turned on. transferring hydraulic pressure to the brake
READY indicator will go off when press- units for few seconds after starting the
ing the cruise control ON/OFF switch engine. This may cause some noise and
once more. vibrations. This means ABS is properly
functioning.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC Indicator ENGINE CHECK WARNING LIGHT
When the HDC switch is pressed once, Light ON Light Blinking

HDC is ready for use. The green HDC This warning light comes on when the This warning light is blinking when the
indic ato r in t he inst r um ent c luster ignition switch is turned on and it goes CDPF (Emission collecting filter) is con-
comes on. When the button is pressed off when the engine is started. taminated with carbon. If this warning
again, HDC is deactivated and the indi- light is blinking, drive your vehicle over
cator goes off. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, some of the engine control com- 50 km/h of vehicle speed for more than
When HDC is applied, the green HDC ponents including sensors and devices 15 minutes (max. 20 minutes) to per-
indicator blinks. are defective. form the recycling in CDPF system. If
When the red HDC indicator is on, the the recycling process is completed, the
HDC system is overheated or malfunc- WARNING warning light goes out.
tioning. For more information, refer to When this warning light comes on, the ve-
Chapter 4, HDC Switch. hicle operates in safety mode to maintain
minimum driving conditions and to prevent
Caution the system from being damaged. In this
If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC mode, the engine driving force may be de-
is overheated or malfunctioning. If the creased or the engine may stall. When this
indicator is on even after the system has happens, have the system checked at the
cooled down enough, have the nearest nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
authorized dealer or service center check Authorized Service Center.
the system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE BATTERY CHARGE
WARNING LIGHT WARNING LIGHT
This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the
oil pressure drops because of low en- ignition switch is turned on and it goes
gine oil level. off when the engine is started.
If this light turns on while driving, safely If this light doesn’t go off after engine
pull over and stop the vehicle to check starting or comes on while driving, it
the engine oil level. Add engine oil, if means there is a malfunction in the sys-
necessary, to maintain the proper oil tem. Have the charging system checked
level. by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Continuous driving with this light on may Authorized Service Center.
lead to engine failure.
Caution
Caution Continued driving with the battery charge
If this light does not go off after engine warning light illuminated will lead to a sud-
starting or comes on while driving, it means den stop of vehicle, causing an accident
there is a malfunction in the system. Run- and serious injury.
ning the engine with this warning light on
can cause serious damage to the engine.
Have the lubricating system checked by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-

GETtheMANUALS.org
TPMS (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM) INDICATOR AND WARNING LIGHT*
Global Warning Light* Tire Pressure Indicator*
This warning light comes on when the This indicator illuminates in green when
ignition switch is turned to “ON” and the ignition switch is turned to “ON” and
should go off in a few seconds. should go off in 15 seconds. If a specific
When the tire pressure warning light is tire indicator illuminates in yellow or
illuminated, one or more of your tires is blinks, the tire inflation pressure may be
significantly under-inflated. Immediately abnormal or the tire inflation pressure
reduce the vehicle speed, avoid hard sensor is defective. If this happens,
cornering and anticipate increased have the system checked by Ssangyong
stopping distances. If this happens, Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
have the tire inflation pressure checked Center.
by nearest service center. If necessary,
locate the under-inflated tire by using Warning
the tire pressure indicator and replace yy Significantly low tire pressure makes
the under-inflated tire with spare tire. the vehicle unstable and may increase
the braking distances. Always keep the
If this light stays on after starting the en- proper tire pressure.
gine or comes on while driving, have the yy Continued driving on low pressure
system checked by Ssangyong Dealer tires may cause the tires to overheat
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen- and fail.
ter.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARN- ENGINE OVERHEAT SSPS WARNING LIGHT
ING LIGHT WARNING LIGHT
This warning light indicates that the fuel This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the
level in the tank is getting exhausted. ignition switch is turned on and goes off SSPS system is defective. When this
The illuminating point of this warning when the engine is started. warning light comes on, the steerability
light varies according to the driving con- When the engine coolant temperature becomes heavier.
ditions such as driving angle and road is abnormally hot, the engine overheat
conditions. If this warning light comes warning light blinks and a warning buzz-
What is SSPS?
on while driving, immediately refuel the er sounds. When this happens, stop the Speed Sensing Power Steering (SSPS)
tank. However, it is recommended that vehicle in a safe place and let the en- is the device that provides good driv-
fuel should be added before this warn- gine cool down. For more information, ing condition and steering stability by
ing light will come on. refer to Chapter 11 “When the engine is making the steerability heavier in high-
overheating.” speed driving, and lighter in stop or low-
Caution speed driving.
While driving on steep hills or rough roads, Caution
this warning light may come on if the re- Caution
If you keep driving the vehicle with the
maining fuel level is low.
warning light and buzzer on, the engine If the SSPS warning light comes on or when
could be damaged and lead to a fire. you feel the steering wheel heavy, have the
After completely cooling down, have the SSPS system checked by Ssangyong
system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. Operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ESP OFF INDICATOR ESP INDICATOR/WARNING BRAKE WARNING LIGHT
LIGHT
This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to “ON” and ignition switch is turned to “ON” and ignition switch is turned to “ON” and
should go off in a few seconds. should go off in a few seconds. should go off in a few seconds.
This indicator comes on when pressing This indicator blinks when the ESP sys- This warning light comes on when the
the ESP OFF switch to deactivate the tem is operating. parking brake is applied and/or the
ESP function. If this warning light comes on while brake fluid level is lower than a speci-
For detailed information for ESP (Elec- driving, have the system checked by fied level.
tronic Stability Program) system, refer to Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
Chapter 4. thorized Service Center. Caution
If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds
For detailed information for ESP (Elec-
(over 10 km/h) while the parking brake is
tronic Stability Program) system, refer to applied, the parking brake warning light
Chapter 4. comes on and a warning buzzer sounds. If
it occurs, immediately stop the vehicle and
release the parking brake.
Warning
Driving the vehicle with the brake fluid warn-
ing light on is dangerous.
If the parking brake light stays on, you must
immediately have your vehicle checked
and serviced by Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
EBD WARNING LIGHT SEAT BELT REMINDER AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT
If the ABS warning light and the brake This warning light blinks and the warn- When the ignition is switched on, this
warning light come on simultaneously, ing buzzer sounds for 6 seconds when war ning li ght illuminate s and t hen
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” should go off, to confirm that the air bag
tion)system is defective. In this case, position unless the driver’s seat belt is is operational.
ABS system also cannot be activated. securely fastened. This reminding op- If it does not come on, or if it does not go
If this happens, have the system checked eration stops when the driver fastens off, or if it flashes or illuminates continu-
by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au- the seat belt even during its operation ously while driving, it means that there is
thorized Service Center. period. a malfunction in the system. Have the air
When the vehicle speed exceeds 10 bag system checked without delay by a
Warning km/h without fastened driver’s seat belt, Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
When the EBD system is not functioning, this indicator comes on and the alarm rized Service Center.
the vehicle could be unstable during hard sounds.
braking. Therefore, you must pay particular Note
attention to the driving conditions while this For more detailed information, refer to the
warning light is on. “Seat Belt and Air Bag” section.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DOOR AJAR WARNING 4WD INDICATORs
LIGHT 4WD Low Indicator
When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this indicator blinks un-
til the shifting operation is completed. After completion of the
mode change to 4L, the indicator comes on.
This light comes on when a door or the

tailgate is either opened or not closed 4WD High Indicator
securely.
When shifting the driving mode from “4L” to “4H”, this indicator
Warning blinks until the shifting operation is completed. After comple-
Before driving, check that the door ajar tion of the mode change to 4H, the indicator comes on.
warning light is off. When a door is not
completely closed, it may accidentally open
while driving.
4WD Check Warning Light

This warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to “ON” and should go out if the system is normal. If the
“4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system
Service Center.
Warning
yy If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system
checked.
yy Do not drive your vehicle over 80 km/h in 4H mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOW INDICATOR Water Separator over speed Warning
Warning Light Light(gcc ONly)
When the ignition switch is turned to When the water inside the water sepa- The warning light flashes with repeated
“ON”, this indicator comes on and stays rator in the fuel filter exceeds a certain (5 times) buzzer sound when the vehicle
for a short time or may go off right away. level, this warning light comes on and a speed exceeds 120 km/h.
When the glow plugs are sufficiently buzzer sounds. Also, the driving force If the warning light flashes, slow down
heated, the light will go out. In the vehi- of the vehicle decreases. If this warning for your own safety.
cle equipped with a direct injection type light comes on while driving, have the
engine, this indicator may come on very system checked by Ssangyong Dealer
shortly or may not even come on. or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
ter.
Caution
When the glow indicator comes on while Caution
driving or the engine cannot be started yy The fuel system in the engine may get
properly, have the glow plug system seriously damaged if you keep driving
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or while the warning light is on. Prompt
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. correction should be necessary.
yy Using low quality fuel could result in
serious damage to the engine due to the
water or impurities in fuel. Never use low
quality fuel.
yy If the amount of water in the fuel filter
exceeds the specified level, the warning
lamp comes on, a chime sounds or the
engine power decreases.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S
hift lever in manual transmission (6-speed)
3
..........................................................................6-2
S
hift lever in manual transmission (5-speed) 4
..........................................................................6-3
G
ear selector lever in automatic transmission* 5
..........................................................................6-7 6
6
Driving tips for automatic transmission.............6-9
Gear selector lever positions.......................... 6-11 7
Winter (W) / Standard mode (S).....................6-19 Transmission and
8
Safety mode (automatic transmission)...........6-20
Brake
Parking aid system (PAS)*..............................6-21 9
Rearview camera system*..............................6-25
10
Front view camera system*............................6-26
Brake system..................................................6-27 11
Parking brake operation..................................6-32
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
1 The manual transmission in your vehicle has 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal. Then, move the gearshift lever into R 1 3 5
2 a desire gear. After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
3rd Gear
3 For low- or mid-speed driving.
1st Gear When upshifting from 2nd gear to 3rd gear,
4 Position for driving off and high traction particular caution should be taken not to inad- 2 4 6
force. Depress the clutch pedal to its travel vertently press the gear shift lever sideways
5 end and move the shift lever to “1”. Then, in such a manner that 5th gear is engaged.
slowly release the clutch pedal while gently
depressing the accelerator pedal to drive
6
off.
5th Gear
7 Position for high speed driving on a
Reverse Gear
highway. When downshifting from 5th
Position for reverse driving. gear to 4th gear, particular caution
8
should be taken not to inadvertently
press the gear shift lever sideways in
9 such a manner that 2nd gear is en-
gaged.
10
6th Gear
11 Neutral Position
Position for very high speed driving on
Position for engine start, a highway.
12 vehicle stop, and parking
4th Gear
13
2nd Gear driving
14

GETtheMANUALS.org
The manual transmission in your vehicle has 5 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal.
Then, move the gearshift lever into a desire gear. After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
5th Gear
Position for very high speed driving on a
highway
3rd Gear Be careful to avoid any unwanted shift
For low- or mid-speed driving. Be careful to from the 5th gear into the 2nd gear, rather
avoid any unwanted shift from the 2nd gear than the 4th gear.
into the 5th gear, rather than the 3rd gear.
5th
3rd
1st Gear 1st Reverse Gear
Position for driving off and high traction Position for reverse driving
force Reverse
Depress the clutch pedal to its deepest 4th
point and move the shift lever to “1”. Neutral 4th Gear
2nd
Then, slowly release the clutch pedal
while gently depressing the accelerator
driving
pedal to drive off.
Neutral Position
Position for engine start, vehicle stop, 2nd Gear
and parking
6-3
Caution
yy To start the engine in manual transmission equipped vehicle, you must fully depress the clutch
pedal.
yy You should stop your vehicle and fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift into the reverse
position.
yy If the clutch pedal is frequently half-depressed, the clutch disc will be easily worn out. Use only
as needed.
yy Do not put your foot on the clutch pedal if not shifting gears.
yy When shifting from a higher gear into a lower gear, ensure that the RPM gauge pointer does not go
into the red zone on the gauge. Especially, when shifting from the 5th to the 4th gear, moving the
gear shift lever to the left too much may result in shifting into the 2nd gear. This will cause a sudden
increase of the engine speed and may damage the engine and the transmission.
yy When the temperature of the transmission oil is very low on a cold day, you may have some difficulty
for shifting gears. This is a normal phenomenon.
yy When you have difficulty for shifting into the 1st or reserve gear, put the gear shift lever into the
neural position and release the clutch pedal. Then, depress the pedal again and shift into the
intended gear.
yy While your vehicle is moving, do not put your hand on the shift lever except to shift gears. Other-
wise, the gear may be disengaged from the transmission and the internal transmission components
may be damaged.
yy Do not shift into the second next higher gear from a lower gear. Also, while the engine is rotating
fast, do not shift into a lower gear.
yy When using the half clutch mode, there is no need to abruptly depress the accelerator pedal be-
cause the engine power increases. When the accelerator pedal is continuously depressed in half
clutch mode, the internal components can be worn or damaged. Frequent use of half clutch mode
is not recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Shifting to R (Reverse) - 6 speed Gear Position When Parking
m/t ONly Always apply the parking brake fully and shut the engine off
This manual transmission is designed with a detent to differen- after parking. Shift the transmission into 1st gear when the ve-
tiate “1st” and “R (reverse)” gear position. To shift into “R” gear hicle is parked on a level ground or uphill grade, and shift into
position, you must shift past “1” gear position and the detent in “R” on a downhill grade.
order to get into the “R” gear gate.
yy “R” gear gate is located to the left side of the “1st” gear gate.
yy After the vehicle is stoped, push the gear shift lever to the Using the Clutch
left side of the “1st” gear past the detent then push the gear
The clutch pedal should be depressed all the way to its travel
shift lever upward.
end before shifting. The clutch pedal should be fully released
Caution
while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while
driving. This can cause unnecessary wear in clutch system.
yy If you try to shift to the “1st” gear position too quickly, it is possible
Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
to shift to “R (Reverse)” instead of “1st” gear.
yy When the gear shift into “R” position is completed, the “R” indica-
tor should be appeared on the instrument cluster and a warning
chime should be heard. If the warning chime does not sound when
you shift to R (Reverse) position, have the system checked at Parking Brake Operation When
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as possible.
Driving Uphill
When driving on a steep uphill, it is safer to use the parking
brake as follows: Apply the parking brake, follow steps (Vehicle
Downshifting with M/T: steps 1 - 3, and release the parking brake when the
When you need to slow down in heavy traffic or while driving vehicle starts to move.
up steep hills, downshift the gear to release the load to the
engine. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives
better acceleration when you need to increase the vehicle
speed again. When the vehicle is driving down steep hills,
downshifting provides a safe speed and prolongs the life span
of brake system.
6-5
DRIVING TIPS FOR NORMAL STARTING
OFF OR STARTING OFF ON UPHILL
111 Depress the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, start the
engine and move the shift lever to the 1st gear (reverse
gear in reversing) position.
222 If the clutch pedal is released slightly with the brake pedal
depressed, the engine rpm increases. (The increase in en-
gine rpm varies depending on the road inclination).
Release the clutch pedal slightly Increase in engine rpm
333 The vehicle starts to move smoothly if you depress the ac-
celerator pedal while releasing the brake pedal after check-
ing that the engine rpm is raising.
444 Release the clutch pedal completely after the vehicle starts
off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GEAR SELECTOR LEVER IN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION*
Gear Position Tip Switch in “M” Position

yy P : Parking (Manual Gear Shift)
yy R : Reverse The gear can be shifted by moving this switch
to forward and rearward when the gear selec-
yy N : Neutral tor lever is in “M” position.
yy D : Driving
Mode Switch
yy W : Winter mode
yy S : Standard mode Shift Lock Release Button when
Use the standard mode in normal locked in the “P” position
driving conditions.
If you cannot move the selector lever from the
“P” or “N” position, try to move the lever while
pushing down here with a sharp object such
as a ballpoint pen. For your safety, turn off the
engine and depress the brake pedal before
the attempt.
Selection of Manual / To shift into any other positions from the
Automatic Shift Function “P” position after stopping the vehicle,
yy D : Automatic shift according to the driving condition you have to depress the brake pedal
with the ignition switch “ON”
yy M : Manual shift
6-7
Starting and Driving Off
Caution
1. Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P” yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
and the brake pedal is depressed. For your safety, avoid shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged.
starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so. Especially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until
the “D” shift indicator comes on for several seconds with the brake
2. Check whether or not the engine speed is in a normal op- pedal depressed.
erating range (below 1,000 rpm). Keep the brake pedal de- yy When driving on a downhill, never shift the selector lever to “N”. If
pressed and shift into “D” or “R”. you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engagement
can damage the driving train.
3. Depress the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and
yy HDC is designed for driving down a steep hill. When HDC is ap-
move the gear selector lever to “D” position. Wait for a while plied, do not shift to “N”. Otherwise, HDC will be deactivated.
several seconds before driving off with the brake pedal de- yy Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever in
pressed. both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine with the
4. To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress selector lever in “P”.
the accelerator pedal gradually. yy As a safety function, the gear selector lever cannot be moved into
the “P” or “R” position when the vehicle speed about 8 km/h.
Warning yy Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving.
yy For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving
the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped.
yy Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear selec-
tor lever.
yy When starting the engine with the accelerator depressed, your
vehicle may abruptly move and cause an accident.
yy When the parking brake is released while the engine is running at
a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move. Therefore, wait until
the engine speed becomes stable.
yy To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into
“P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion.
yy When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift from a

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING TIPS FOR AUTOMATIC Transmission
Starting and Driving Off Warning
1. Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P” yy For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving
and the brake pedal is depressed. For your safety, avoid the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped.
starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so. yy Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear se-
lector lever.
2. Check whether or not the engine speed is in a normal op-
erating range (below 1000 rpm). Keep the brake pedal de-
yy When starting the engine with the accelerator pedal depressed,
pressed and shift into “D” or “R”. your vehicle may abruptly move and cause an accident.
3. Depress the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and yy When the parking brake is released while the engine is running at
move the gear selector lever to “D” position. Wait for a a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move. Therefore, wait until
while several seconds before driving off with the brake ped- the engine speed becomes stable.
al depressed. yy To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into
4. To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion.
the accelerator pedal gradually. yy When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift from a
Caution
yy A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly
yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine after from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine rpm
shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Es- becomes stable.
pecially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
“D” shift indicator comes on with the brake pedal depressed. shifting into “D”. Otherwise, the transmission will be damaged.
yy When driving on a downhill, never shift the selector lever to “N”. If Especially, when you start off on a hill after stopping and parking
you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engage- the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on
ment can damage the drive train. with the brake pedal depressed.
yy Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever in yy Do not move the gear selector lever into “N” position while the
both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine with HDC (Hill Descent Control) system is operating. Doing so stops
the operation of HDC system.
the selector lever in “P”.
6-9
Creep Phenomenon Engine Brake
Without any depression of the accelerator pedal, your ve- When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle
hicle can move slowly if the selector lever is in any position is in motion, the engine speed decreases. This decreased
other than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You engine speed creates an extra braking force. On a downhill,
can control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the engaging a lower gear can generate a slower engine speed
brake in heavy traffic or narrow areas. and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using this
engine brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed without
Caution excessively using the brake system. The lower gear, the
yy On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the oppo- higher braking force.
site direction of the intended direction in spite of the creep effect.
When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal. Caution
yy Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long
Kickdown Function slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or
the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force.
If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator
yy Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear
pedal to its travel end. Then, a lower gear will be automati-
selector lever is in the “N” position.
cally engaged. This is called the Kickdown function.
yy Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires
may slip.
Caution
yy Do not use the kickdown function while driving on slippery or Automatic gear shift timing
sharply curved roads.
yy If you use the kickdown function too frequently, the durability and The shift timing of the A/T varies with external circum-
fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse. stances, such as road conditions (level surface, hills), posi-
tion of gear selector lever, vehicle speed, accelerator pedal
depression amount. This is a normal condition to improve
the economy of your driving and vehicle performance with
smooth and balanced gear-changing.
Caution
When moving the gear selector lever with force applied to the drive
system due to, for example, stopping or parking on a hill, shift shock
or noise may occur. This is a part of normal operation of parking
mechanism in the A/T.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GEAR SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS
P: Park Position
P: Park position Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or
R: Reverse position stay in a location for an extended length of time.
N: Neutral position To shift into any other position, depress the brake pedal.
D: Drive position Warning
M: Manual shift yy Never shift into “P” when the vehicle is moving, or the transmission
will be damaged.
yy Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into “P”.
yy To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch
must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should be depressed.
Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever from “P” without
the two procedures may damage the selector lever.
6-11
R: Reverse position
Warning
R
yy Please note that the vehicle may slowly move rearward when the
selector lever is at “R”.
Caution
As a safety function, the gear selector lever cannot be moved into
“P” or “R” when the vehicle speed is about 8 km/h.
yy Use this position to reverse the vehicle.

To shift into “R” from “P” or “N”, completely stop the ve-
hicle and depress the brake pedal. When the shift lever is
in “R”, and parking aid system will be activated (optional (If
equipped)).

GETtheMANUALS.org
N: Neutral position
Warning
N
yy Warm up the engine for approx.3 minutes when the ambient tem-
perature is below -15°C. Otherwise, the gear selector lever may
not be moved smoothly (N→R). It is designed for protecting the
vehicle and is not a fault.
yy Never shift into “N” from the “D” position or vice versa when the
vehicle is moving, or the transmission will be damaged.
yy If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral posi-
tion, depress the brake pedal firmly.
yy Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the
vehicle is in motion.
yy Never leave a child or pet alone in the vehicle when stopping
and parking the vehicle with the ignition ON and the shift lever in
neutral “N” position. Move the shift lever to the park “P” position
or turn the ignition off in order to prevent the safety accident due
to an unintentional operation.
No power is transferred in this position.
At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the
wheels and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However,
for safety, apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
To shift into “D” or “R” position from “N” position after stopping
the vehicle, you have to depress the brake pedal with the igni-
tion switch “ON”.
6-13
D: Drive position
Warning
D
yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
shifting into “D”, or the transmission will be damaged. Especially,
when you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle,
wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake
pedal depressed.
yy Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill
according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake
pedal.
Caution
Please note that the vehicle may slowly move forward on level ground
when the selector lever is in “D”.
Warning
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmis- yy If you touch the selector lever unexpectedly while driving, the
sion is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 5th(6th) gears shiftable gear may be changed. It can make the vehicle unstable.
according to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal. Be careful not to touch the selector lever while driving (especially
during the winter season).
yy Do not downshift abruptly (3, 2, or 1) when the vehicle speed is
high (D or 4). You could lose control and hit people or objects
(especially on a slippery road).
lever is in low gears, the transmission can be damaged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
M: MANUAL SHIFT
Warning
M
If the gear selector lever is moved to the “M” position accidentally
during driving, the currently engaged gear may be shifted to another
gear which endangers driving safety. Be careful not to touch the
selector lever while driving (especially in winter season).
Caution
Upshifting should be done properly according to the road conditions,
taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.
If the gear selector lever is in this position, you can shift gear
manually using the tip switch on the lever.
6-15
SHIFT LEVER LOCK RELEASE
Shift Lock Function

This system locks the gear selector lever in the automatic
transmission according to the driving status and condi-
tions to prevent driver from making operational mistakes,
to protect the system, and to provide good driving stability.
Shift lever lock
release
Shift Lever Lock in “P” or “N” position

To shift from “P”, the ignition switch must be turned to ON and
the brake pedal must be depressed.
If you cannot shift out of “P”, check the followings:
- The ignition key is in “ON”.
- The brake pedal is d epressed.
If you cannot shift out of “P” with the ignition
Prohibition of Gear Shift from “N” to “R” While switch in ON, and the brake pedal depressed:
Driving 1. Apply the parking brake firmly and turn the ignition off.
To maintain the vehicle stability and protect the drive train of 2. Depress the brake pedal and push down the shift lock re-
the vehicle, the gear shifting from “N” to “R” is not available lease lever with a stick such as a pen. Then, shift the lever
when the vehicle speed about 8 km/h. to other position.
Warning
If this happens, have your vehicle repaired by the nearest Ssangyong
dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as pos-
sible.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Manual Gear Shift by tip switch
Manual Gear Selection Use of Engine Brake
Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the tip switch after To use the engine brake, change into the manual gear shift
moving the gear selector lever from “D” to “M” position. mode first, then operate the tip switch to next lower shiftable
gear.
Selecting “M”:
Caution
Manual gear shift yy Operate the tip switch only once. If you keep pressing the button,
the gear may be shifted through several steps in a series.
yy Abruptly using the engine brake may make driving unstable. Do
not use the engine brake abruptly especially when driving on roads
covered with snow or ice.
Tip Switch in Gear Selector Lever

If the gear selector level is moved to “M” position while driving,
the gear is shifted down to the next lower gear.
Note Shift up
To prevent shift shock and to protect the system, in some cases, the
current gear may not be shifted to the lower gear even if the gear
selector lever is moved to “M” position.
Shift down
6-17
GEAR POSITION DISPLAY ON INSTRU- Manual Gear Shift Position
MENT CLUSTER
yy 1st gear position
Use on a rugged road, mountain path and
steep hill. Engine braking effect on steep hill
is available.
yy 2nd gear position
yy 3rd gear position

TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
yy 4th gear position Warning

Use on a long and gentle slope. yy Do not downshift abruptly (3rd, 2nd or 1st) when the vehicle is
driven at high speed (D or 4th), or vehicle may be severely dam-
aged. Also, the vehicle may slip, resulting in an accident (especially
yy 5th gear position on a slippery road).
lever is in low gears, the transmission could be damaged.
yy 6th gear position Caution

yy If you press and hold the tip switch, the gear may be shifted
through several steps in series.
yy Please note that the gear may be upshifted if you fully depress the
accelerator pedal while driving with 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear.
yy 7th gear position
yy If you apply excessive force to the tip switch, the gear may not
be shifted into other gears to protect the vehicle system. Soft and
smooth operation is recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINTER (W) / standard mode (s)
Winter Mode
In this mode, the vehicle can start off from the 2nd gear Mode Switch
(forward and reverse). Use this mode in the event of start-
ing-off on slippery roads.
Winter Mode (W)

yy To select the winter mode, press “W” on the mode switch.
The “WINTER” indicator in the instrument cluster comes on.
yy In this mode, the vehicle can start from the 2nd gear (for-
ward and reverse). Use this mode in the event of starting- Use the standard mode in
off on slippery roads. normal driving conditions and
use the winter mode on slip-
Standard Mode (S) pery roads.
yy Use the standard mode in normal driving conditions.
How to Start Off the Vehicle with 2nd

Forward/Reverse Gear
1. Press the “W” portion of the mode switch to select the win-
ter mode.
2. Place the selector lever to “D” and check if the shift lever
indicator shows “D”.
3. You can now start off the vehicle with the 2nd forward gear.
4. Place the selector lever to the “R” position to start off the
vehicle with the 2nd reverse gear.
Caution
Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill ac-
cording to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake pedal.
6-19
SAFETY MODE (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
Symptoms Resetting the safety mode when

When the transmission has an electrical or mechanical fault, the gear is fixed
the transmission operates in the safety mode to maintain mini-
mum driving conditions and to prevent the transmission from How to reset the safety mode
being damaged. 1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to “P”.
When the transmission is defective, the symptoms that can oc- 2. Stop the engine and wait for more than 10 seconds.
cur are as follows:
3. Start the engine.
yy Decreased driving force while driving at high speed Symptoms after resetting the safety mode
yy Fixed gear position during driving (cannot accelerate yy If the vehicle operates normally after resetting, the prob-
the vehicle) lems are corrected.
yy If gear is fixed at the 2nd forward gear in the “D” position or
Caution the 2nd reverse gear in “R”. Have the system checked by a
yy If you find any symptoms caused by mechanical or electrical de- Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
fects in the transmission, stop the vehicle immediately and reset ter.
the safety mode.
yy If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the 2nd forward
gear in “D” or 2nd reverse gear in “R”) still exists, have the system
Center.
yy If the mechanical or electrical problem still exists, have the system
Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING AID SYSTEM (PAS)*
The parking aid system is a supplementary device which detects the distance to any obstacle with front and rear sensors and warns
the driver with alarm sounds, when the vehicle is moving forward or backward. The alarm interval becomes shorter as the obstacle
approaches.
Front Sensors Rear Sensors
yy For detecting front obstacles yy For detecting rear obstacles

yy Two sensors yy Four sensors
yy Operation: in gear position “D” and “R” yy Operation: in gear position “R” only
Operating Conditions
Front Corner Sensor
When pushing the PAS OFF switch, the lamp goes off and the
front corner sensor function operates. The front corner sensor
only operates when the gear selector lever is in “R”, “N”, or “D”
position. But the function does not work when the gear selec-
tor lever is in “P” position or the vehicle speed is 10 Km/h or
more, with or without the PAS OFF switch operation.
6-21
Precautions for Parking Aid System
Caution
yy The alarm may not sound according to the forward or re-
The parking aid system is only the supplementary system to help
versing speeds, the shape of the obstacle. your parking. Always pay attention to your surroundings with your
yy The parking aid system may not work properly if the bum- own eyes while reversing.
per height or the sensor fitting condition is changed or any yy The system can detect only its sensing scope. And the system
commercial accessory (other than a device installed at the can not detect the center area between sensors, objects lower
factory) is mounted within the sensing area. than the sensors or narrow objects, etc. So, always be careful for
these cases while parking.
yy When the sensor is frozen or blocked by snow and water,
yy The alarm does not sound if the distance between the sensor
you may assume that the sensors are defective. If this hap- and obstacle is 30 cm or less. However, if the sensor detects the
pens, check the sensors and remove them with a soft mate- obvious obstacle, the alarm may sound.
rial. yy Do not rely on the front corner sensors when parking. Always park
yy To prevent damage to the sensor surface, avoid hard pres- while checking the left and right spaces.
sure and contact with hard or sharp materials. yy If the buzzer sounds abnormally or sounds for over 3 seconds
when placing the gear selector lever to “R” position, the parking
aid system is defective. Have the system checked at Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service center.
Warning
An accident or damage of the car caused by the defective parking
aid system is not covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Alarm Interval
In gear position “D” Activated PAS sensors Distance to
Alarm interval
obstacle
over 60cm No alarm
In gear position “D”, only the front sensors are operable.
In gear position “R” Activated PAS sensors Distance to

Alarm interval
obstacle
over 120cm No alarm
80cm ~ 120cm approx. 2 sec
In gear position “R”, the front and rear sensors are operable.
6-23
CAUTION
You should continue to utilize the mirrors or turn- The alarm interval becomes faster as your vehicle ap-
ing your head. When reversing, adhere to the proaches the obstacle.
common precautions.
 Certain obstacles that sensors cannot detect
yy The parking aid system is a supplementary system
to help your parking. It is not intended to replace yy Thin and narrow objects, such as wires, ropes, or chains
the driver’s attentiveness. yy Cotton, sponge, clothes, snow that absorb ultrasonic waves.
yy Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or us- yy Obstacles lower than the bumper: Drainage or puddle
ing a high-pressure water gun while washing. The  Sensor Cannot Detect
sensors could be damaged.
yy When the sensing portion is frozen.
yy Normally, when you select the “R” position with the
yy When the sensing portion is covered by rain, water drops,
ignition “ON”, the alarm sounds “beep” once.
snow or mud.
In the parking lot as shown in the figure, the upper  Weak Sensing Scopes
portion of the vehicle can be hit before the sensor op-
yy When they are partially covered by snow or mud.
eration, so check with the outside rearview mirrors or
by turning your head during parking. yy When the ambient temperature is too high or too low.
 Not defective but improperly working
yy When driving on rough roads, gravel roads, hills, or grass.
yy When the bumper height is changed due to a heavy load.
yy When receiving other ultrasonic signals (metal sounds or air
braking noises from heavy commercial vehicles).
yy When a high-power radio is turned on.
yy When there is heavy rainfall or water drops
yy The front corner sensors may not work properly if the rear
sensor is faulty.
yy When the sensor is hindered by improperly fitted accessories.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rearview camera system*
The rearview camera system is a supplementary function for
safe driving to display the condition behind the vehicle while
the gear selector lever in R position.
Rearview monitor
Gear selector lever in R
The monitor shows the view behind the vehicle when the gear
selector lever is in R position.
Rearview monitor Rearview camera

Cautions for using rearview camera system
yy Rear Detection Cameras use wide-angle lens to acquire

a wider view, so there may be differences between the
actual distance and the distance that appears on the
screen. For safety, make sure to check the rear, right
and left sides of the car yourself.
yy Only the volume and incoming call features will operate
when operating the rear detection camera.
yy The rearview camera does not show the entire area be- The rearview monitor is ap-
hind the vehicle.
plied depending on the vehicle
yy Keep the camera lens clean using a camera lens clean-
specifications.
er so that the lens is free of foreign matter.
6-25
Front view camera system*
The front view camera system is an auxiliary safety device which displays the front
view image of the vehicle on the front monitor, with an easy operation of a switch.
 How to use
yy When the driver presses the front view camera ON/OFF
switch with the shift lever in P, N, D or M position, the front
monitor displays the front view image of the vehicle.
yy If the driver moves the shift lever to the R position, the front
monitor displays the rear view image by linked operation
with the rear view camera.
yy If the driver presses the front view camera ON/OFF switch
Front view again with the front view of the vehicle displayed on the
Monitor display
camera switch front monitor, the monitor displays the previously displayed
image.
 Deactivation conditions
yy Vehicle driven at 20 km/h or higher: Front monitor displays
Front view camera the previously displayed image.
yy Front view camera switch OFF: Front monitor displays the
previously displayed image.
yy IGN OFF
 Inactivation conditions
yy Shift lever in R position
Caution
yy The distance to objects displayed on the front monitor may look
different from the actual distance. Therefore always check the
front, left and right spaces
yy Clean the camera lens with a lens cleaner or equivalent frequently
so that it is free from dust and dirt particles.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake SYSTEM
Warning Light and Indicator Related to Brake
ABS warning Brake warning EBD warning HDC indicator ESP warning ESP OFF
light light light light indicator
Paking brake lever
Brake pedal
6-27
Brake Pedal (Foot Brake)
The brake pedal (foot brake) is designed to decrease the ve- Nothing Under Driver’s Seat
hicle speed and stop the vehicle. Do not excessively apply the
brake pedal while going down a long hill. The brake system Do not leave empty bottles or
will overheat causing the vapor lock or fade phenomenon thus cans near or under the driver’s
losing braking force. Use the foot brake along with the engine seat. If it hinders the brake or
braking effects by selecting lower gears. accelerator pedal operation, it
may cause an unexpected ac-
Caution cident.
Avoid abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires may
slip.
Engine brake?
A system that allows for the slowing of a vehicle that is in- Brake Disc
dependent of the conventional braking systems. A driver
would normally down-shift to slow the driver’s descent of a Check the brake discs at every 10000 km of driving, and re-
hill, using engine compression. The engine brake increases place if necessary.
the effectiveness of this regarding force. When the brake disc is badly worn, you may hear a squeak-
ing sound from the brake system. If this happens, replace the
Fade? brake discs as a set (left and right) as soon as possible.
tween brake pads and discs. Caution
The life span of brake disc depends on the driving habits.
Vapor Lock?
When the brake system is overheated, the fluid in the brake
lines will boil and form bubbles. Only the bubbles will be
compressed when the brake pedal is depressed. So the When the Foot Brake Is Not Working
brakes cannot work properly due to loss of braking force. When the foot brake is not working, decelerate the vehicle
speed by using the engine braking effect, then stop the vehicle
by applying the parking brake slowly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ABS(Anti-Lock Brake System)
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)? Warning
When braking suddenly or braking on slippery roads, the yy ABS is designed to secure more safety and increase the control
vehicle keeps moving forward but the wheels are locking of steering wheel during emergency braking situation. The braking
and not rotating. If these happen, your vehicle may lose sta- distance for vehicles equipped with an ABS may be longer than
for those without it on uneven, gravel, rough or snow-covered
bility or rotate resulting in an accident. ABS helps to main-
roads.
tain directional stability and control of the vehicle.
yy While driving on these roads, reduce the vehicle speed and main-
tain a safe distance from a proceding car.
yy To get the maximum benefit from ABS in an emergency situation,
ABS Warning Light
do not pump the brake pedal.
This warning light comes on when the igni- yy Even a vehicle equipped with ABS has a risk of skidding sideways.
tion switch is turned to “ON” and should go Therefore, always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead
off in a few seconds. and drive at low speed on slippery surfaces.
Warning
If this light stays on after starting the engine or comes on while driv- Caution
ing, have the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong yy ABS system performs self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pres-
Authorized Service Center. In this case, the ABS function is not avail- sure to the brake units for few seconds after starting the engine.
able, but the conventional brake system is properly working. This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ABS is
yy When the ABS is operating, you may feel pulsations from the brake
pedal along with noise. This is normal and indicates that the ABS
6-29
EBD (Electronic Brake-Force Dis- ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
tribution)
ESP SYSTEM?
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)? The ESP system is an electronic vehicle stability control
and safe driving system and driving safety supplementary
When the brake pedal is applied, it controls the braking pres-
system that helps to avoid dangerous situations by con-
sure electronically to effectively distribute the braking forces
trolling the brakes on the wheels or the engine torque to
to the front wheels and rear wheels. EBD operates when the
compensate vehicle stability when it is extremely unstable
speed differences between the fastest front wheel and the rear
under conditions such as sharp cornering.
wheel are over 1 km/h. If ABS is engaged, it does not operate.
ESP Indicator/Warning Light

EBD Warning Light*
ON
This warning light comes on when ESP
system is defective.
Blinking
This indicator blinks when the ESP system
is operating.
If the ABS warning light and the brake warning light come on
simultaneously, EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) sys- Warning
tem is defective. For your safety, reduce the vehicle speed when the indicator is blink-
ing or you are driving on a slippery or curved road.
Caution
If the EBD warning light stays on, have the system checked at the
Caution
yy ESP system performs self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pres-
sure to the brake units for few seconds after starting the engine.
This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ESP is
yy When the ESP is operating, you may feel pulsations from the brake
pedal along with noise. This is normal and indicates that the ESP

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC (Hill Descent Control)*
ESP OFF Indicator HDC (Hill Descent Control)?
This indicator comes on when pressing HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling down
the ESP OFF switch to deactivate the ESP steep grades, this function allows you to travel at a low speed
function. without depressing the brake pedal. This convenient function
When the wheels are slipping on a snow- is only for driving down steep grades. Therefore do not use
covered or iced road, you can stop ESP this function for anything other than driving down steep hills.
function by pressing ESP OFF switch. This
may help to drive off the vehicle.
HDC Indicator
Green light on: HDC is ready for use (by
pressing the HDC switch).
Red light on: the HDC system is over-
heated or malfunctioning.
Caution
If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC may
be applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed bump.
Therefore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal roads.
HDC Operation
If the conditions for activating the HDC are met, HDC is acti-
vated and the green HDC indicator blinks on the instrument
cluster. The HDC is deactivated when the vehicle speed is
below 5 km/h or above 70 km/h or the gradient of the slope
becomes gentle while it is in operation. It is normal that strong
vibrations and noise occur from the brake system when the
HDC is in operation.
6-31
PARKING BRAKE OPERATION
Parking Brake Lever Brake Warning Light
yy This warning light comes on when the
parking brake is applied and/or the
brake fluid level is lower than a speci-
fied level.
yy If you drive the vehicle without releas-
ing the parking brake, the brake warn-
ing light blinks and the buzzer sounds
to warn the driver when the vehicle
speed exceeds 10 km/h for more than
2 seconds. When this happens, stop
the vehicle immediately and release the
parking brake.
Caution
yy Before driving off, be sure to check that the brake warning light
is turned off.
Parking Brake Operation yy Driving with the parking brake applied could damage the rear brake
system. Before driving, fully release the parking brake.
Park your vehicle at a safe place and pull up the parking brake
lever. Then, the parking brake warning light ( ) comes on. yy If the brake warning light ( ) doesn’t go out after releasing the
parking brake, have the brake system checked by a Ssangyong
Parking Brake Release
yy Place the gear selector lever to “P” or “N” position when applying
Lift up the brake lever a little and press the release button at the parking brake.
the end of the lever. Then, push down the lever. yy The parking brake cable should be checked and adjusted regu-
larly.
yy Do not use “P” position as a parking brake. Securely apply the
parking brake when you park the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Devices related to seat.....................................7-2
3
Driver’s seat......................................................7-5
Passenger’s seat............................................7-10 4
Second row seat............................................. 7-11
5
Third row seat.................................................7-13
7
Seat heating/ventilation function*...................7-15 6
7
Seats
8
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
DEVICES RELATED TO SEAT
1
Second row heating switch
2 Easy Access Switch &
Head Restraint Height
Driver Seat Memory
Adjust Knob
3 Setting Switch
Lumbar Support Lever
Driver Seat
4 Control Switch
Driver Seat Rear Seat
Heating/Ventilation Armrest
5
Switch
6
8 Head Restraint Height

Adjust Knob
Passenger Seat
9 Heating/Ventilation
Switch
10
11
12
13 Seat Folding Lever

(Rear Seat) Seatback Reclining Lever
Passenger Seat (Rear Seat)
14 Control Switch
7-2 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can

result in serious head and neck injuries in case if a colli-
yy All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made
sion. Make sure that the head restraints are in place and
before any driving.
adjusted before driving.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely locked after ad-
justing.
Caution
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for com-
fort while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effec- yy Power seats will be operated even when the ignition
tive when the passenger sits back and straight up in the switch is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to pre-
seat. If the seatback is reclined too much, then the risks vent battery discharge, operate your seats when the
of sliding under the lap belt and getting injured are in- engine is running.
creased. yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simul-
yy Never press the driver’s seat & outside rearview mirror taneously. It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate
position switch while the vehicle is in motion. the electric seat button one by one.
yy Any object that might damage the seat should not be yy When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based sol-
placed on the seat. vents such as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or
they will cause discoloration and dull the surface of the
yy Front seats and rear seats are equipped with heated
seats.
lines. If the following types of persons sit on the heated
seats, they might receive minor burns. Extra caution is yy Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if
needed for them: children, elderly persons, ill persons, the seat comes in contact with other object and cannot
persons with sensitive skin, excessively fatigued per- be adjusted anymore.
sons, persons under the influence of alcohol or sleep- yy If the power seats are not operational, the seats should
inducing medication such as cold medicine or sleeping be checked and fixed before any driving.
pills.
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such
as a blanket, cushion or seat cover.
Seats 7-3
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING
yy Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This yy To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries
can cause unexpected accident. and death, sit in the position so that the distance be-
yy You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the tween the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25
seat when trying to get the small objects (cigarette light- cm, as long as you are comfortable with driving.
ers, coins, credit cards) under the seat or caught be- yy Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between
tween the seat and the center console. Wear protective the seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat
gloves to prevent injury. is potentially flammable when it is released from the con-
yy Never try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. tainer when the seat is moved.
yy Unexpected movement of the seat or seatback can yy Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion re-
cause loss of control. duces the frictional force and could make you slide under
the seat belt. This could result in serious injury or death.
yy Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when
adjusting the seat position. yy Do not insert your hands under the seat or in the path of
the seat movement when adjusting the seat. Your hands
yy Sit upright in the center of the seat and wear the seat belt
or fingers could get trapped between the seat and the
around your hip and pelvic bones.
frame.
yy Do not place any objects in the path of seatback move-
yy Do not ride with the seatback reclined too much. You
ment. Any obstruction in this path prevents the seatback
could slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could
from being locked, causing severe injuries or death dur-
result in severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be pro-
ing a collision.
tected by the seat belt and the belt can strangle you or
yy Always raise the seatback to the proper upright position even cut into your stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in
before driving. your seat by keeping your seatback upright while driving.
yy Never drive the vehicle with the seat folded. In a colli- yy When returning the seatback to the upright position, hold
sion, you will be seriously killed or injured as you lose the the seatback with your one hand and pull the release
protection the seat belt can provide. lever with the other hand. The more the seatback is re-
clined, the greater the restoring force of the seatback is.
If you do not hold the seatback while adjusting the seat-
back, you could be injured by the restoring force.
7-4 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVER’S SEAT
Height Adjustment of Head Restraint POWER SEAT*
To raise the head restraint, pull it up without
pressing the release button. To lower the head
restraint, press the release button on top of Seat Heater*
the seatback and push the head restraint down.
By operating the seat heater
Warning switch, you can heat the
1 Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints seat cushion and seatback.
can result in serious head and neck injuries in case
of a collision. Cooling Fan*
There are four
Caution
cooling fans
Do not apply excessive force to the head restraint
during adjustment. It may be damaged.
Forward and Backward Adjustment of Head Restraint

The head restraint can be adjusted forward to
three different positions by pulling the headrest
forward. To adjust the head restraint backward,
pull it fully forward to the farthest position and
release it. Adjust the head restraint so that it Seat Position Control
properly supports the head and neck. Switches
Lumbar Support (Driver’s Seat)

Turn the lever forward to
Warning
increase the amount of lumbar
support. To decrease it, turn Do not adjust the driver’s seat when the vehicle is moving.
Control of the vehicle can be lost.
the lever backward.
Seats 7-5
GETtheMANUALS.org
Seat Slide Adjustment Seatback Reclining Adjustment
Seat Height Adjustment Seat Tilt Adjustment
7-6 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
EASY ACCESS SYSTEM (DRIVER’S SEAT)*
This system is designed to provide the driver sufficient space to access and exit.
Easy Access Button To operate

To use this function, press the Easy Access button located at
driver’s window switch panel.
To exit: The seat moves rearward and downward when re-
moving the ignition key only while the parking brake warning
light in the instrument cluster is ON or the gear selector lever
is in “P” position before turning off the ignition switch. Howev-
er, the gear position requirement is not applied to the manual
transmission equipped vehicle since it does not have the “P”
position. Therefore, manual transmission equipped vehicle is
only applied parking brake.
To access : The seat moves back to its original position when
turning the ignition key to “ON” position while the gear selector
lever is in “P” position or the parking brake is applied. Howev-
Caution er, the gear position requirement is not applied to the manual
yy The moving distance of the seat is based on when the seat is transmission equipped vehicle since it does not have the “P”
located at its front end. It varies according to the initial position. position. Therefore,manual transmission equipped vehicle is
yy There could be some differences when the seat moves back to only applied parking brake.
its original position. The differences of the passenger weights and
electrical loads can cause the differences in its distance, and this To release
is normal, not defective.
yy Operation of easy access while the parking brake is not securely To release this function, press the Easy Access button again.
applied may cause an accident. Make sure that the gear selector
lever is in “P” position and the parking brake is securely applied.
yy The easy access system may not operate properly when operat-
ing the seat memory switch or any other switches during the easy
access operation.
Seats 7-7
GETtheMANUALS.org
POSITION MEMORY SETTING*
The position memory is available for up to three drivers. Each driver can set his/ her own driver’s seat and outside rearview mirror
positions. The information will individually be stored in the integrated computer. If somebody has moved the seat, the memory posi-
tions can be recalled automatically by pressing the position button.
SET button
STOP button
Position button (1, 2, 3)
Caution
yy The automatic positioning operation stops when operating any seat
adjusting switch or the outside rearview mirror adjusting switch
during its operation. To erase the memorized seat and outside
To Store the Memory Settings rearview mirror positions, press the “STOP” button.
yy If you do not press any position button within 5 seconds after
1. Position the transmission shift lever to “P” with the ignition
pressing “SET” switch, the memory setting is cancelled.
switch “ON” (for your safety, do not start the engine). In
case of a manual transmission vehicle, you must apply the
parking brake too. To Recall the Memory Settings
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rearview mirrors to the
desired positions. 1. Press and hold one of the position buttons ( ),( ),( )
3. Press the (SET) switch. The indicator on the switch comes you want until the buzzer sounds.
on. 2. The driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors start to move
4. Within 5 seconds, press and hold one of the position but- to the stored positions. If you drive off during this recalling
tons ( ), ( ), ( ) you want to set. When the memory process, this automatic memory setting stops operating.
setting is completed, a buzzer sounds twice. 3. Wait until they stop moving.
4. When the process is completed, a buzzer sounds twice.
7-8 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVER’S SEAT (MANUAL SEAT)
Height Adjustment and Tilt
Operation of Head Restraint
Seat Heater*
Lumbar Support
Same as that of the
To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly and raise power seat
the lever. Then, lean back to the desired angle and release
the lever. After adjusting, make sure the lever is returned to
its original position and the seatback is locked.
Seat Height Adjustment Seat Slide Adjustment
You can adjust the angle and height of the front or rear sec- To move the seat forward or backward, pull and hold the seat
tion of the seat cushion by rotating the adjustment knob on slide lever up and move the seat as desired. Then, release
the side of the seat clockwise or counterclockwise. the lever.
Seats 7-9
GETtheMANUALS.org
PASSENGER’S SEAT
Power Seat* Manual Seat
Head Restraint Head Restraint

Same as that of driver’s seat Same as that of driver’s seat
Seat Heater* Seat Heater*
Cooling Fan*
Seat Slide Seatback Reclining Seat Slide Seatback Reclining

Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
7-10 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
SECOND ROW SEAT

the head restraint, press the release but-
head restraint down.
Warning

Pull up the lever and adjust the seatback angle to the desired
position. After adjustment, release the lever and make sure
Seat Heater* that the lever is returned to its original position and the setback
is securely locked.
Armrest Seat Backboard (7-seater)
The middle of the second Release the backboard lock after
row seat is equipped with folding the second and third row
an armrest. seats. Then let the backboard tilt
toward the third row seat. The sec-
ond and third row seats will be flat.
Backboard
Seat Folding Lever Lock Lever
To access to the third row seats easily, make the second row
seat upright. Raise the second row seat while pulling up the
seat folding lever with the second row seatback folded down.
Seats 7-11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Folding the SECOND Row Seat (when ACCESSING TO THIRD ROW SEAT)
1. Position the headrest to the lowest level. 3. Press the upper portion of the seat- 4. Pull up the seat folding lever and
2. Pull up the seatback reclining lever and back until it is engaged with seat make the seat upright.
fold down the seatback. cushion.
5. Fix the folded seat to the front seat 6. Unfold the seat in
with a fixing strap from the case un- the reverse order of
der the floor. folding. Make sure
that the seat is se-
Caution curely locked. If the
yy If the headrest is not adjusted to the seat is not locked,
lowest level, the seat can be reached to the seat may be
the front seat while making it upright. folded forward.
yy After folding the seatback, ensure to
press the upper seatback to set the Warning
seat upright. If the seat is made upright When returning the second row seat to
without fixing the seat, the seat can be its original position, be careful not to hit
damaged by conflicting with the front the feet and leg of the passenger in third
seat. row seat.
7-12 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
THIRD Row Seat
Folding Lever the head restraint, press the release but-
Pull up the folding
lever to fold down the head restraint down.
third row seat.
Warning
Headrest Type
Type A NON HEADREST
Seat Folding Type B MIDDLE HEADREST
(Making a Luggage Compartment) Type C SMALL HEADREST
1. Position the headrest to the lowest level.
2. Pull up the folding loop of the third row seat, and fold the 3. Fold the seatback of the third row seat to make the luggage
seatback forward. compartment.
Seats 7-13
GETtheMANUALS.org
Making a Bed
1. Fold down the third row seats. (refer to “Folding the third
Warning
row seat” section)
yy When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that the
2. Fold down the second row seats. (refer to “Folding the sec- luggage is placed firm enough to avoid being shaken while driv-
ond row seat” section) ing. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or
3. Lock the seatback of second row seats by pressing the up- passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not obstruct
per portion of it. the field of the rearview.
yy Do not sit on the folded seat because the seatbelt and other safety
4. Release the locks on backboard of the second row seat. devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious
5. Make a bed by unfolding the backboard. injury in case of accident.
7-14 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT HEATING/Ventilation function*
Electric fan for ventilated seat Front Seat Heating/Ventilation Switch

When the seat ventilation switch is operated, yy Turning the seat ventilation
4 ventilation fans run to reduce the discom- switch to the position 1, 2
fort resulted from the contact with the seat in or 3 to the left ( ) allows
hot weather. Passenger Driver side to adjust the fan speed ac-
side cording to its position.
yy Turning the seat heating
switch to the position 1, 2
or 3 to the right ( ) allows
to adjust the heating power
according to its position.
yy The operation indicator (red lamp for heating and blue lamp for ven-
tilation) comes on while the seat heating and ventilation is activated.
yy If you set the switch to the position 0, the seat heating and ventila-
tion is deactivated.
Note
When you cycle the ignition key to the OFF position and back to the ON
position with the seat heating/ventilation activated, the seat heating and
ventilation will not work. In order to reactivate, you have to turn the switch to
the other positions.
Seat Heating/ Caution

Ventilation yy The ventilated seat is not the cooling/heating seat which blows out cold air from it.
yy The ventilated seat uses the interior air for ventilation. Make sure that it is used together
with the air conditioner.
yy Don’t put your hand in the bottom of the cushion when the ventilated seat is in operation.
Otherwise, the running ventilation fan may cause you to be frightened or injured.
yy The battery can be discharged when the seat heating/ventilation switch and current
consumers are used with IGN ON (engine off).
Seats 7-15
GETtheMANUALS.org
Second row heating switch (for both sides)
Second row seat

Seat Heating
The heating switches for the rear seats are located on the rear
door trims. During heating the seats, the seat heater indicator
comes on.
Caution
The battery can be discharged when the seat heating/ventilation
switch and current consumers are used with IGN ON (engine off).
7-16 Seats
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning Warning
yy Do not operate the seat heater for a long time when the passen- yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a
ger is an infant, child, old or handicapped person, person with blanket, cushion or seat cover.
sensitive skin, person under the influence of alcohol, or exces- yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in se-
sively fatigued person. They might receive minor burns. rious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make sure that
yy If your skin is in contact with the heated seat for a long time, you the head restraints are in place and adjusted before driving.
might get low temperature burns. Be careful. yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort while
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective when the
blanket, cushion or seat cover. passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback
yy If the temperature continues to rise, turn the switch off and have is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under the lap belt
the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au- and getting injured are increased.
thorized Service Center.
yy In the case of the driver’s seat, an excessive usage of the heated Caution
seat might make you sleepy and could negatively affect your
safety. yy Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery dis-
yy Do not place anything sharp on the seat. This may cause dam-
charge, operate your seats when the engine is running.
age to the seat heater.
yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simultaneously.
yy All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made before
It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the electric seat
any driving.
button one by one.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjusting.
yy When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents such
yy Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed on as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will cause
the seat. discoloration and dull the surface of the seats.
yy Front seats are equipped with heated lines. If the following yy Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat
types of persons sit on the heated seats, they might receive comes in contact with other object and cannot be adjusted
minor burns. Extra caution is needed for them: children, elderly anymore.
persons, ill persons, persons with sensitive skin, excessively fa-
yy If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be
tigued persons, persons under the influence of alcohol or sleep-
checked and fixed before any driving.
inducing medication such as cold medicine or sleeping pills.
Seats 7-17
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S
eat belt and air bag.........................................8-2
3
S
eat belt............................................................8-4
H
ow to fasten the three point seat belt.............8-5 4
H
ow to fasten the seat belts in second 5
row seat.............................................................8-6
8
H
ow to fasten the seat belt (3-point) in second 6
row seat.............................................................8-7
7
Child restraints and pregnant woman...............8-9
Warnings for seat belt.....................................8-17
Seat Belt and
8
Air bag*............................................................8-19 Air Bag
9
Airbag non-inflation conditions........................8-23
Warnings for air bag........................................8-27 10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT AND AIR BAG
1 To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended
that the seat belts should be used by all occupants inside of your vehicle.
2 Air Bag Warning Light Three point
Three point seat belt
3 Front air bag seat belt
(Driver’s)
4
Side air bag (Driver’s)
5 Three point seat belt
6 Seat Belt Reminder Front air bag

Lap belt or Three
(Passenger’s)
point seat belt
7
Three point seat Three point
8 belt seat belt
9 Side air bag Three point

(Passenger’s) seat belt
10
The Restraint Systems Include: Fastening the seat belt

11
yy Air bags When seat belts are not used or improperly worn, they may not work and can
cause serious injury. In addition, air bags can protect occupants when the oc-
12 yy Seat belts cupants are wearing their seat belts. Air bags may cause injuries to occupants if
yy Seat belt pretensioners (For front seat) they do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
13 As independent systems, their protective
functions complement one another.
14

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air Bag
Warning
Side air bag
(Driver’s) yy Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not,
the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden
maneuvering of the vehicle.
yy Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time.
Front air bag Side air bag
yy Seat belts and air bags can significantly minimize possible injury
(Driver’s) (Passenger’s)
to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from
fatal collisions or injury.
yy Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems
could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts
Front air bag should be checked and repaired by only a Ssangyong Dealer or
(Passenger’s) Ssangyong Authorised Service Center.
yy An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant
or child restraint.
When a strong frontal impact occurs, the front air bags are
inflated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT IN FRONT SEATS
Seat Belt Height Adjustment
yy To raise the seat belt, slide the seat belt

height adjuster up.
yy To lower the seat belt, press the button ( )
and slide it down.
Fastening the Seat Belt Warning

yy Adjust the seat belt height before driving.
yy Shoulder belt should be positioned midway over
the shoulder, never across the neck.
Pretensioner (for Front Seat)

When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt
pretensioners rewind the seat belts immediately to
yy Insert the metal latch plate into the restrain the occupants to their seats. It helps the
buckle until it clicks. effective operation of the seat belts and airbags.
yy To unfasten the seat belt, press the
Warning
button on the buckle.
Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed
again. Have the deployed seat belt pretensioners re-
placed by an authorized dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO FASTEN THE THREE POINT SEAT BELT
1. Pull out the latch plate from the 2. Position the shoulder belt across the 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
retractor. If the seat belt is locked body and the lap belt as low as pos- is securely locked. A slack belt will
when being pulled out, rewind it sible across the hips. Insert the latch greatly reduce the protection af-
completely in the retractor, then pull plate into the buckle until it clicks. forded to the wearer.
it out to the desired length. 3. Adjust the seat belt height as need- 5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the
ed. red button on the buckle.
Caution Warning
Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an Improperly worn seat belts could cause
upright position and wear the seat belt. serious injury or death.
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible
across the hips. Do not put it across
Warning
the waist. In an accident, the belt may
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is apply pressure to your abdomen. This
not twisted. may cause internal injuries.
yy The shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over the shoulder, never across
the neck.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO FASTEN THE SEAT BELTS IN SECOND ROW SEAT
1. Pull out the latch plate at the bight of the seat.
Warning
Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it
across waist. In an accident, the belt may apply pressure to your
abdomen. This may cause serious internal injuries.
To lengthen, hold the metal latch

plate at a right angle to the belt and
pull the belt. To shorten, pull the free
end of the belt away from the latch
plate, then pull the belt clip to take up
the slack.
2. Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the belt
as low as possible across your hips, not across your abdomen.
3. If the belt is too tight or slack on your hips,
readjust the belt.
4. To unfasten the seat belt, press the red but-
ton on the buckle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO FASTEN THE SEAT BELT (3-POINT) IN SECOND ROW SEAT
1. Pull out the latch plate from the 2. Insert the latch plate into the left 3. Position the shoulder belt across the
retractor. If the seat belt is locked buckle until it clicks. body and the lap belt as low as pos-
when being pulled out, rewind it sible across the hips. Insert the latch
completely in the retractor, then pull plate into the buckle until it clicks.
it out to the desired length. 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
is securely locked. A slack belt will
greatly reduce the protection af-
forded to the wearer.
5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the
red button on the buckle.
Warning
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
Improperly worn seat belts could cause serious injury or death.
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it across the waist. In an accident,
the belt may apply pressure to your abdomen. This may cause internal injuries.
yy The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over the shoulder, never across the neck.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR cENTER SEAT BELT (3-point type)*
1. Pull out the smaller latch plate (B) from upper re-
tractor (1).
2. Insert it into the black buckle (2) until it clicks.
3. Pull out the bigger latch plate (A) and position the
seat belt across your shoulder, chest and hips.
4. Insert it into the buckle (3) until it clicks.
Warning
yy Make sure to fasten the seat belt according to the
order as described so that it functions properly.
yy To prevent the seat belt from bumping against the rear
glass, unfasten the seat belt while holding it.
yy This seat belt is designed only for a passenger who
sits on the center seat in the rear seat.
yy Tug on the seat belt to make sure that the latch plate
is securely locked.
yy Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
yy Improper wearing of seat belts increases the chance
of injury or death in case of a collision.
yy Position the seat belt away from your neck and abdo-
men.
Caution
Stow the seat belt into the console when it is not in
use.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Child restraints and Pregnant Woman
Pregnant Women Warning
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts yy Infants and tiny children should always be restrained in an infant
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the or child restraint.
best way to keep the baby safe. yy Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat with front
passenger air bag.
Warning yy A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat can
be seriously injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. Secure
yy Pregnant women should wear 3-point seat belt whenever possible
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
according to the professional recommendations by her doctor.
yy A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear seat
yy Pregnant women should wear the lap portion of the belt across
whenever possible. If installed in the front passenger seat, adjust
the thighs and as snugly and low as possible.
the seat as far back as it will go.
yy When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
Child Restraints yy When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with
the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
When transporting infants or small children, an appropriate yy In a collision an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become
child restraint system should always be used. The child re- a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an
straint system should be appropriate for your child’s weight infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the
and height and properly fit the car’s seat. Accident statistics child, no matter how strong you are.
indicate that children are safer when properly restrained in the yy Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is mov-
rear seat rather than in the front seat. ing.
yy If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer
to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder
Securing Methods of Child Re- belt under an arm or behind their back.
yy Please note that the three point seat belt is designed for a person
straint System who is taller than 140 cm.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in ve-
hicle seats by seat belts or the latch system (ISOFIX seat - if
equipped).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Infant and Child Safety
Child Seat
Children that are too small to use the seat belts must be prop-
erly secured in a child restraint system.
Warning
yy Do not place a child restraint system in the front seat. The infant
or child could be severely injured by an air bag inflation in case
of an accident.
yy Use only the qualified child restraint systems. Follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use of the child restraint
systems.
yy Do not carry your child on your lap while driving. You cannot resist
against the impact pressure in an accident. The child could be
crushed between you and the parts of vehicle.
yy Remember that a child restraint seat left in a concealed vehicle can
cause it to be very hot. Check the seating surface before putting
your child in the child restraint.
yy When your child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle
or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown
forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident.
yy When installing a child restraint, do not let the seat belts come
across the child’s neck.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various Seating Positions
TYPE A TYPE B
Rear-facing child seat Forward-facing child seat Booster seat
2nd seat 2nd seat

Restraint device Front
Mass group row row out Mounting method of vehicle
figure seat
center board
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 month) Rear facing child seat X X U 3-point belt rear-facing
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 year) Rear facing child seat X X U 3-point belt rear-facing
Forward facing child
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 month ~ 4 year) X UF U 3-point belt
seat
II ~ 15 to 25 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat X UF U 3-point belt
III ~ 22 to 36 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat X UF U 3-point belt
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories.
X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Securing by Seat Belt
Rear-facing Child Seat Front-facing Child Seat
Secure the child restraint with a seat belt as shown in the fig- Secure the child restraint with a seat belt as shown in the fig-
ure. ure.
Warning Caution
A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat can When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions pro-
be seriously injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. Secure a vided by the manufacturer.
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ISOFIX system is a standardised method of fitting child seats
SECURING A CHILD RESTRAIN that eliminates the need to use the stadard adult seatbelt to
SYSTEM WITH “ISOFIX” SYSTEM secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more se-
cure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and
How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor quicker installation.
ISOFIX child restrain
Latch anchor
ISOFIX mark
yy The ISOFIX lower latch anchors are located in the left and
Warning
right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations ( )
yy When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system, all unused vehicle
are shown in the illustration.
rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in
yy Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted
latch anchors until it clicks. behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and
taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
yy Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child re- or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts
straint. which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to
the child in the child restraint.
yy There is no ISOFIX lower latch anchor provided for the cen-
yy Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
ter rear seating position.
loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to use the Rear Anchor
Cautions for ISOFIX Seat
yy There are two rear anchors on the floor under the 3rd row
seat. (7-seater) yy The rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure
yy There are two rear anchors on the floor under the 2nd row the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower
seat. (5-seater) latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint
system only with the seatback anchors. The increased
load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, caus-
ing serious injury or death.
yy If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle
and a child is not properly restrained in the child re-
straint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in
a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer for installation.
yy Remove the headrest from the second row seat. yy Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are
yy Place the child restraint on the second row seat. latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear
the “click” sound.
yy Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the rear
anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the yy Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause
webbing of the tether connector. an unexpected personal injury.
yy Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints.
yy The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct rear anchor.
yy Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely in-
stalled. Refer to instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the child restraint.
yy Do not install the child restraint if it hinders the opera-
tions of front seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability
for Various ISOFIX Positions
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Mass group Size Class Fixture Front 2nd seat row 2nd seat row
Passenger center out board
F ISO/L1 X X X
CARRYCOT
G ISO/L2 X X X
GROUP 0 UP TO 10KG E ISO/R1 X X IUF
E ISO/R1 X X IUF
GROUP 0+ UP TO 13KG D ISO/R2 X X IUF
D ISO/R2 X X IUF
GROUP I 9 TO 18KG B ISO/F2 X X IUF
B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF
A ISO/F3 X X IUF (LHD only)
NOTE: Key of letters be inserted in the above table
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in attached list.
These ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning For Child Restraint
� Use only the officially approved child restraint.
Ssangyong is not responsible for the personal injury and
property damage due to the defect of child restraint.
� Use only the child restraint with proper type and size
for your baby.
� Use only the child restraint at proper location.
� Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as
below:
GROUP 0: 0 ~ 10KG
GROUP 0+: 0 ~ 13KG
GROUP I: 9 ~ 18KG
GROUP II: 15 ~ 25KG
GROUP III: 22 ~ 36KG
� Group 0 & 0+
Rear facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
� Group I
Forward facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
� Group II & III
Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened
Always follow the installation and use instructions provided
by the manufacturer of the booster seat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy Always put on your shoulder belt over the shoulder and yy Periodically check that the seat belt and its components
across the chest. Do not put the shoulder belt across your work properly. A damaged seat belt can cause serious inju-
neck. ries. Repair or replace the damaged seat belt immediately
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
put it across the waist. In an accident, the belt may apply Center.
pressure to your abdomen. yy The warning light comes on whenever the ignition is
yy Do not wear the shoulder belt under the arm. It increases switched on. The light goes out when the driver’s seat belt
the danger of sliding out of the belt and can cause serious is securely fastened. If the light does not go off after fasten-
injury or even death. The belt may also tighten the chest ing the seat belt, it means that there is a malfunction in the
which is not as strong as the shoulders. This may also re- system. Have the seat belt system checked by a Ssangyong
sult in serious internal injuries. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
yy Do not lock the seat belt with a clip or a clamp. If the seat yy Additional devices or accessories on the seat belt may re-
belt is too loose, it may not protect your body from injury or sult in improper operation. Do not add any adjusting devices
death in an accident. which restrict the seat belt operation.
yy Before driving, all occupants should wear the seat belts. yy Periodically inspect all parts of the belt and have the dam-
Otherwise, occupants could be seriously injured in colli- aged parts replaced. The belt that has been overstretched
sions or sudden maneuvers. In many countries, there are in an accident must be replaced with a new one. Ssangyong
regulations regarding the use of the seat belts. Please ob- recommends replacing all component parts of the seat belt
serve local laws and regulations. after a collision. No replacement is required after a minor
yy Do not buckle up two or more persons with one seat belt. collision if a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center finds that no damage has occurred and
yy Do not wear the seat belt over any hard or breakable ob-
jects in pockets or on clothes. everything is in proper working order. The seat belt compo-
nents that were not used during a collision must also be in-
yy An infant and tiny child must be restrained in a child restraint
spected and replaced if they show signs of damage or faulty
system. Note that the three point seat belt is designed for a
operation.
person who is taller than 140 cm.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy Replace the entire seat belt assembly after a severe impact yy Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of
even if the damage is not obvious. the body, and should be worn low across the front of the
yy Never modify the seat belt. pelvis or the hips, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wear-
yy Always keep the seat belts clean and dry. Care should be ing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area
taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oil must be avoided.
and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Use mild soap yy Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consis-
and water for cleaning. The seat belt must be replaced if web- tent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they
bing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the
yy Adjust the seat properly before wearing the seat belt. protection afforded to the wearer.
yy Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an upright position yy Belts should not be worn with straps twisted.
and wear the seat belt. If the seat belt is positioned too high yy Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it
or fastened too loose, it may not protect your body from an is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on
injury or death in the event of a collision. the occupant’s lap.
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort yy No modifications or additions should be made by the user
while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effective when which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from
the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assem-
seatback is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding un- bly from being adjusted to remove slack.
der the lap belt and getting injured are increased. yy If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly
yy If the latch plate is inserted into a wrong buckle, the belt pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly
may exert pressure on your abdomen instead of your pelvis. pull the belt out of the retractor.
This may cause serious internal injury. yy Never unbuckle the seat belt while traveling. Careless driv-
yy If the seat belt is twisted, there will not be enough contact of ing actions, such as fastening/releasing the seat belt re-
the belt to spread the impact pressure. peatedly, may result in serious injury.
yy Make sure that the latch plate is securely locked. yy Make sure that the seat belt does not go around any solid
yy When pregnant women use the seat belt, consult with a body or fragile objects.
doctor for specific recommendations. yy Keep the buckle clean. Foreign materials caught inside
yy Keep the buckle clean. the buckle can prevent the seat belt latch plate from being
locked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
The air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) can provide additional protection for the driver and
AIR BAG* passenger in the event of a collision.
Driver’s Side Air Bag

The side air bags are integrated into
the side wall (window side) of both
front seats. The side air bag is de- Side Air Bag
signed to inflate only in certain side
(Passenger’s)
collision and protect occupants’ head
and chest.
Driver’s Air Bag

When a severe frontal impact occurs, Front Air Bag
sensors will cause the airbag to be (Passenger’s)
deployed so that driver’s and front
passenger’s head and chest will be
pillowed by the air bag instead of hit-
ting the steering wheel or dashboard.
Air Bag Warning Light

If this lamp does not go out after engine starting
or comes on while driving, it means that there is a
malfunction in the system. Have the air bag system
checked immediately by a Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorised Service Center.
Seat Belt Pretensioner (for front seats) Operation of pretensioner Operation of load limiter
When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners When a severe frontal im- After frontal collision, the
rewind the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants pact occurs, seat belt pre- load limiters releases the
to their seats. It helps the effective operation of the seat belts tensioners rewind the seat seat belt to prevent the oc-
and air bags. The load limiter is integrated into each seat belt belts immediately to restrain cupant from being injured
pretensioner. the occupants to their seats. due to belt force.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SRS Air Bag Locations of Air Bag Warning Labels
The Supplemental Restraint System air bag is designed to
Warning
supplement the seat belts and provide the driver and front pas-
senger with protection against head, chest, and other injuries NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by
an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to
in the event of a collision. For maximum protection, seat belts
the Child can occur
should always be worn by all occupants.
Type A (FRT/RR) Type B (FRT/RR)
Warning
yy The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt. Make
sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts properly,
even if air bags are installed in the vehicle.
yy Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the air bag may
not deploy.
yy The driver’s and front passenger’s air bags simultaneously de-
ploy.
yy Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an airbag in front of it.
Caution
yy If you see “SRS” on a certain area, the air bag is contained un-
derneath it. Therefore, do not apply any impact upon it and never
place any accessories or objects on the area. And avoid any direct
contact with the area.
yy As a reminder of possible dangers of the air bag, air bag warn-
ing labels are affixed on the driver’s and front passenger’s sun
visors. Locations of
Locations of side air bag
side air bag warning labels
warning labels

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Air Bags
Air Bag Operation
yy In response to a severe frontal impact, the driver’s and front
passenger’s air bags deploy at the same time to supplement
the seat belts to prevent or reduce any personal injuries.
yy Underbody impact from the road surface; impact against
the curb at a very high speed; dropping impact onto the
road surface with a large angle
yy Rollover, side impact or rear impact
Passenger’s Air Bag* Driver’s Air Bag
yy Oblique impact, rollover
The front passenger’s air bag The driver’s air bag is located
yy Weak impact in which the sensor is unable to detect (under
is located on the dashboard. at center of the steering wheel.
the inflation requirements)
yy Impact against narrow objects such as a utility pole or a tree
Pretensioner (for Front Seat) yy The vehicle falls into a drainage or a puddle
When front air bags deploy, the seat belt pretensioners simul- yy The front of the vehicle crashes into a high impact point ve-
taneously work too. hicle such as a truck
1st operation: When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt yy Impact on the hood by falling stones
pretensioners rewind the seat belts immediately to restrain the yy The air bag warning lamp is on
occupants to their seats. yy Moderate or severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
2nd operation: After frontal collision, the load limiters releases body’s side structure. In that case, only the side air bags
the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to deploy.
belt force.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SIDE AIR BAG*
Side Air Bag Operation
Side air
bag
yy A moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
body’s side structure.
yy Vehicle rolls onto its side and causes a severe side impact.
yy Frontal collision while vehicle stops or is moving at a low
speed.
yy Rear end collision
Side air bag
yy Oblique impact (diagonal direction)
Warning
yy Frontal impact or rear impact
yy Do not apply any impact on the installation area of impact sensor.
The air bag might deploy. yy Rollover but without a severe impact
yy Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the side air bag yy The air bag warning lamp is on
may not deploy.
yy Do not bang the door. The side air bag might deploy.
yy Driver’s and passenger’s air bags are inflated simultaneously. At
the same time, the pretentioners for seatbelts are also activated. Air Bag Inspection
The side air bags, however, are inflated individually in case of The air bag system should be inspected 10 years from its
side impact.
installation regardless of its appearance and other condi-
tions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Airbag non-inflation conditions
Low Speed Collision Rear Collision
In collisions, the seat belts are sufficient to protect the vehicle Air bags may not inflate in rear collisions, because occupants
occupants and the air bags may not deploy. In some cases, are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case,
deploying air bags in low-speed collisions can cause a sec- the air bags do not provide proper protection.
ondary impact to the occupants (light abrasions, cuts, burns,
etc.), or loss of vehicle control.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Side Collision Angled Collision
Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collision, because In a slant impact or collision, the force delivered will be rela-
occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus front tively weaker than that of frontal collision. So, the air bags may
air bag deployment does not provide proper protection. not inflate.
However, side or curtain air bags(if equipped) may inflate de-
pending on the intensity, vehicle speed and angles of impact.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Riding Rollover
At the moment of an accident, drivers brake heavily with reflex. Air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag
In such heavy braking, the front portion of the vehicle is low- deployment would not provide proper protection to the occu-
ered by the force of the braking and the vehicle can go under pants.
a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not in- However, side air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
flate in this situation because impacts may not be delivered or over by a side impact collision, if the vehicle is equipped with
may be delivered with less intensity. side air bags and/or curtain air bags.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Collision with Narrow Object Secondary Injury Due To Air Bag Deployment
Burn
Abrasion/Bruise
Any injury by broken glasses

(e.g. sunglasses)
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such If the air bag control module detects the impact during an ac-
as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concen- cident, it transmits the signal to deploy the air bag. This signal
trated to one area and the full force of the impact is not deliv- triggers the explosion of the powder, which is included in the
ered to the sensors. air bag module, and the air bag deploys in a very short time to
protect the occupants. When the air bag inflates, there will be
heavy noise, glare and smoke. You could suffer secondary in-
juries caused by inflated air bag such as an abrasion, a bruise,
a burn or injury by broken glasses.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (I)
yy Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not at- yy Do not impact any air bag components including the steering
tempt to modify any air bag components including the steer- wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness by hand or tools.
ing wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness. You may get injured by sudden deployment.
yy Incorrect air bag inspection can be dangerous and cause yy The air bag contains explosive materials, so contact a
injuries. The air bag system must be disposed only by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. when trashing or replacing it.
yy Replace the steering wheel with only Ssangyong genuine yy The air bag components will be very hot after deployment. Do
parts. not touch them.
yy When the engine starts, the air bag warning lamp comes on yy Once the air bag system is triggered, the triggered air bag as-
for a system check. It goes out after 6 seconds when the sys- sembly should be removed from the vehicle and replaced with
tem is normal. If this warning lamp stays on then the system a new one.
may be defective. Have the air bag system checked immedi- yy Do not attach any objects such as a sticker, scent bottle, or
ately by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser- phone holder on the steering wheel pad and to the dash-
vice Center. board.
yy Never let small children or infants sit in the front passenger yy Do not lean against the window or door or do not stretch your
seat or be held in your arms. When the front air bags deploy, arm through the window frame. If the side air bag deploys,
they could be seriously injured or killed. you will be at great risk.
yy The child restraint system should be installed in the rear seat. yy Do not place any objects between the side air bags and occu-
yy The child restraint system must not be placed on the front pants. The object may prevent the air bag from deploying or
seat. The infant or child can severely be injured by an air bag can be shot at you.
inflation in case of an accident. yy Do not bang the door. It may cause malfunction in the curtain
yy The seat belt and air bags are the most effective when you sit air bag(side air bag) or the front air bag.
well back and upright in the seat. yy When mounting a child restraint system in the rear seat with
yy Do not move your seat too close to the steering wheel or the curtain air bag, adjust the child seat securely away from
dashboard. If you lower your head, the air bag can hit your the door as much as possible. Otherwise, there is a great risk
head during inflation and can cause severe injury or even of serious injuries or even death due to an impact of air bag
death. inflation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (II)
yy Hold only the outer rim of the steering so that the air bag can yy You could suffer secondary injuries caused by an inflated air
inflate without any hindrance. bag such as an abrasion, a burn or injuries by broken glass.
yy Do not hold and operate the steering wheel by crossing your Non-toxic gas will come out when the air bag is inflated.
arms. You could get seriously injured when the air bag de- yy If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant and
ploys. the seat belts are enough to protect occupants, the air bags
yy Do not place your face or chest near the steering wheel and do not deploy to prevent any secondary injuries such as cuts,
dashboard. Also, do not allow anyone to place their hands, abrasions, or burns.
leg or face on the dashboard. The air bag cannot work prop- yy Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat pro-
erly. tected by an airbag in front of it.
yy When the air bag inflates, it makes a loud noise and smoke. yy The driver’s and passenger’s air bags inflate during a se-
However, the smoke is a non-toxic nitrogen gas. vere frontal collision, and the side and curtain air bags in-
yy When the air bag deploys, non-toxic gas will come out. This flate during a severe side collision or rollover. Typically, the
gas may cause skin, eyes or nose irritation. Wash it out with air bags are not deployed during a rear collision. In most
cold and clean water and consult your doctor if irritation con- cases, the air bags does not inflate during a mild collision
tinues. or some pole collisions. The air bag cannot protect the
yy The windshield glass may be broken when the passenger’s passenger from the impact created in a rear end collision
air bag deploys. accident.
yy When mounting a child restraint system in the rear seat with yy Do not impact the area where an air bag or impact sensor
the curtain air bag, adjust the child seat securely away from is installed with a hammer or similar hard tool. You could
the door as much as possible. be severely injured by the unexpectedly deployed air bag.
Otherwise, there is a great risk of serious injuries or even The side impact sensor built in the front seat door detects
death due to an impact of air bag inflation. the pressure applied to the door. Therefore, applying im-
pact on the door (e.g. shopping cart, basket ball) can acti-
yy When any repairs are needed for the steering wheel, or
when an accident occurred without the air bag deployment, vate the side air bag. Always make sure that the engine is
have the air bag system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or turned OFF when checking the engine compartment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (III)
yy If the vehicle is submerged in water (carpet is wet, the yy If the driver apply brakes suddenly, a passenger without
water is up to the floor mat, etc.), never start the engine the seat belt fastened can be thrown out from the vehicle
or turn ON the ignition key. As soon as the currents are or too close to the air bag during inflation. The unre-
supplied to the electronic systems, the air bag may deploy strained passenger will be severely injured or killed by the
unexpectedly causing harm to the driver or passengers. inflation of the air bag.
Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Ssangyong Dealer yy No objects, such as cellular phone holder, cup holder,
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center for necessary cassette holder, air freshener bottle, stickers, should be
checks and services. placed/attached over or near on the instrument panel
yy Unauthorized modifications to the genuine parts or use of where the passenger’s air bag is installed. Do not install
after-market accessories, including side steps, other elec- any accessories on the windshield or extra wide mirror on
tronic devices, can adversely affect performance of the air the inside rearview mirror. Any such objects may cause
bag system. harm to the driver and passengers if the vehicle is in a col-
yy Tow the vehicle with the ignition switch in OFF or ACC po- lision severe enough to cause the airbag to deploy.
sition. If a vehicle with side and curtain air bags is tilted to
Secondary Injury Due To Air Bag Deployment
one side, the system can treat it as a rollover and activate
the air bag system. yy If the air bag control module detects the impact during an ac-
cident, it transmits the signal to deploy the air bag. This signal
yy When disassembling an air bag assembly, some integral
triggers the explosion of the powder, which is included in the
parts can be deformed or damaged. If this is the case, the
air bag module, and the air bag deploys in a very short time
damaged/deformed part may not be engaged normally to protect the occupants. When the air bag inflats, there will
and can move out of its position, causing serious malfunc- be heavy noise, glare and smoke. You could suffer second-
tion. ary injuries caused by inflated air bag such as an abrasion, a
yy The passenger’s air bag is larger and stronger than the bruise, a burn or injury by broken glasses.
driver’s air bag. Therefore, the passenger in the front pas-
senger seat should sit in the center of the seat with the
seat belt fastened. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or even death. The front passenger should move the
seat in the rearmost position and sit upright.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Heater/air conditioner system...........................9-2
3
Warnings and cautions.....................................9-4
Automatic heater / air conditioner.....................9-5 4
Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)...................... 9-11 5

Defogging and defrosting................................9-12 9
6
Replacing air conditioner filter........................9-13
AQS (air quality system).................................9-15 7
Ventilation, Heating,
8
Air Conditioning
9
and Air Purification
10
System 11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
HEATER/AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
1
Sun Sensor
2
10
Heater/AC Control Panel Rear Air Conditioner Switch/Vent*
11
12
13
14

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Center Vent Front Side Vent
Flow Direction
Control Lever
Flow Volume
Control Dial
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving
the knob horizontally or vertically. the airflow direction control lever on the air outlet.
Rear Vents in Center Console (Upper) Rear Vents in Center Console (Lower)
Flow Direction
Control Lever
Flow Volume
Control Dial
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving The airglow is delivered through the vents when operat-
the airflow direction control lever on the air outlet. ing A/C and heater.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
Refrigerant Specification & Capacity
Item Caution
yy If your vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight, open all windows to
Specification R134a
extract heat before turning on the air conditioning (A/C).
Single A/C 720 ± 30g yy Operating the air conditioning (A/C) for a long time while the vehicle
Capacity is parked may cause the engine to overheat.
Dual A/C 1,050 ± 30g yy When driving up a long hill for an extended period of time, turn on and
off the air conditioner every 3 to 5 minutes.
yy To prevent battery discharge, do not run the fan for an extended period
Warning of time when the engine is not running.
yy If you sleep while the air conditioner or heater is on, with all yy To maintain the system at its optimum state and to keep the lubrica-
windows closed, you may suffocate to death. tion of the air conditioner compressor and related components, run
yy Continued operation in the recirculation mode may cause the the air conditioner at low speed once a week even during the season
interior to become stuffy and windows to fog. Do not use the than summer.
recirculation mode for a long period of time. yy Do not stop the engine when the air conditioner is operating. It may pro-
yy If exhaust gas comes in, there is danger of carbon monoxide duce an unpleasant odor trapped in the duct. Turn the A/C off and wait
poisoning. Be sure to switch back to fresh air mode after pass- for a few minutes in the fresh air mode before stopping the engine.
ing through an area of smoke or fumes. yy If you start the engine with the air conditioner on, the engine may not
yy Never leave a child or a handicapped person alone in the ve- start easily and the engine idling can be unstable causing the vehicle
hicle with the air conditioner or heater on in hot or cold weather. to vibrate. Be sure to turn off electrical systems such as the fan.
The child or handicapped person can be in serious danger by yy When the air conditioner is not used in periods, odors will come out.
the heat and lack of oxygen. Run the air conditioner for 20 ~ 30 minutes with the windows opened
and you could remove the odors.
yy During the winter when the air conditioner is not used regularly, run the
air conditioner once or twice every month for 5 ~ 10 minutes.
yy If the air conditioner is not used regularly, the lubricant in the A/C
compressor will not circulate causing the A/C to malfunction. Be sure
to turn the air conditioner at low speed.
yy When sharply accelerating the vehicle while the air conditioner is
operating, you may hear a “click” sound from the magnetic clutch in
compressor. This is a normal operation to protect the air conditioner
system (by lowering the excessively high refrigerant pressure).

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC HEATER / AIR CONDITIONER
If the Auto button is pressed, the temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set tem-
perature. By operating the relevant switch of the automatic air conditioner, you may also manually control the air conditioner opera-
tion, air flow direction, fan speed and air source. To turn off the air conditioner and heater, press the “OFF” button. The desired room
temperate can be set up by turning the temperature control switch.
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
111 Temperature display (ambient
temperature, set temperature)
222 Defroster indicator
333 Air flow indicator
444 A/C ON indicator
555 Fan speed indicator
666 Ambient temperature display
777 Auto mode indicator
Air conditioner
switch Air source selection switch / AQS switch
Mode switch Defroster switch
AUTO switch AUTO switch
Temperature Fan speed control button

control button
OFF switch Ambient temperature
display button

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTO OPERATION MODE (AUTO indica- MANUAL OPERATION MODE (AUTO indi-
tor ON) cator OFF)
1. Press the AUTO button. When you use the fan speed control switch, air conditioner
2. AUTO indicator is displayed on the VFD. switch, recirculation switch or mode switch during the auto op-
eration mode, the “AUTO” indicator on the VFD goes out and
the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.
In manual mode, the “AUTO” indicator on display does not
come on and you have to adjust the airflow direction, airflow
AUTO switch volume, and temperature you want.
Note
AUTO indicator ON To resume the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
3. Set the desired room temperature with the temperature

control button.
4. The temperature of the passenger compartment is auto-
matically maintained according to the set temperature.
Temperature
control button
Set temperature

GETtheMANUALS.org
Auto Switch Fan Speed Control Button
When you press the Auto Switch, the “AUTO” indicator is To control the fan speed, press the switch as needed. When
displayed on the VFD and the temperature of the passenger pressing the switch in the Auto mode, the “AUTO” indicator
compartment is automatically maintained according to the set goes out and the system is changed to the manual mode.
temperature. When you press the Auto Switch during manual
operation mode, the system is changed to the auto operation Caution
mode. If the air conditioner switch is turned off, the air conditioner does
not work even when the fan is running. However, the air flows due
to fan operation.
Rear Air Conditioner

Switch*
To operate the rear air condi-
tioner, this switch should be
pressed before turning the rear
air flow control dial.
Temperature Control Button OFF Switch Ambient Temperature Display Button

To adjust the temperature and fan To stop the air conditioner / When you press this button, the “AMB” indicator
speed, press the switch as needed. heater operation, press this appears and the ambient temperature is dis-
switch. played on the VFD for about 5 seconds.
Caution
The actual ambient temperature may not be displayed
correctly due to engine heat or ground heat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air Conditioner Switch Air Source Selection Switch / AQS Switch
When you press this switch, the A /C indicator ( ) To switch over the air conditioner mode to a specific mode
comes on and the air conditioner starts to operate. (air recirculation, fresh air intake, AQS ON or OFF), use this
When you press the switch again, the air conditioner switch. For detailed information of switch functions and AQS
stops operation and the indicator goes out. system, refer to AQS system in this section.
Caution
To change the air source selection mode in auto operation mode,
press the air source selection switch after changing to the manual
operation mode.
Air conditioner
indicator
Air Source Selection and AQS Operation

AQS
AQS automatically adjusts from the fresh
air intake mode to the recirculation mode
when polluted air is detected by the AQS
sensor.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Defroster Switch
Use this switch for quick defrosting.
When you press this switch, the airflow direction will be
changed to the windshield and door glasses, the air condi-
tioner operates automatically, and outside air comes in.
If you press the switch again during its operation, the indicator
AUTO goes off. When the defrosting is complete, press the
switch to return to normal operations.
A/C ON indicator
Defroster indicator
Automatic Selection of the Fresh or Air Recircula-

tion Mode
1. When the defroster switch ( ) is pressed, outside air
automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed again,
the previous mode will be restored.
2. If the AQS system is operating (AQS indicator ON), AQS
automatically adjusts from the fresh air mode to the recircu-
lation mode when polluted air is detected by the AQS sen-
sor.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode Switch
When you press this switch each time, the air flow mode will be changed to another mode and displayed
When you press this switch in the auto air conditioner operation (“AUTO” indicator ON), the system is
changed to the manual air conditioner mode (“AUTO” indicator OFF).
Vent Defroster and

Floor
Bi-level Floor

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR AIR CONDITIONER* (Dual A/C)
Operation of Rear Air Conditioner
Air Flow Direction

Control Lever (B)
Rear Air Flow

Control Dial (A)
Rear A/C switch
1. Press the rear air conditioner switch.

2. Turn the rear air flow control dial (A) to any position (1 ~ 3)
from “0” position.
3. Adjust the air flow direction with the flow direction control
lever (B).
Caution
yy If the rear air conditioner switch in front control panel is turned
off, the rear air conditioner does not work even when the rear air
flow control dial is operated. However, the air flows due to fan
operation.
yy The rear air conditioner is only for air cooling. It does not include
the air heating function.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEFOGGING AND DEFROSTING
Inside of the Windshield Automatic Heater & Air Conditioner
3. To quickly remove the moisture on the glass, set the fan
speed button at a high speed position.
4. To prevent fog from forming on the glass, setting the air
source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode is rec-
ommended.
Defroster switch
Outside of the Windshield
3. To quickly remove the frost on the glass, set the fan speed
button at a high speed position.
4. Set the temperature control switch to a hot position.
Warning Caution
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the windshield yy An extended air conditioner operation in the bi-level mode or
and windows. The fog will block your view through all windows and defrost mode may cause the outside glass to fog due to the high
can create a dangerous situation. To prevent any fog on the glass, temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the
setting the air source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode vehicle. In this case, change the air flow to the fresh air intake
is recommended. mode and set the fan at a low speed.
yy Especially in winter or summer, to avoid glass fogging, remove any
obstacles such as snow or leaves on the air inlets.
Note
When you press this defrost switch, the air conditioner turns on au-
tomatically and the system selects the fresh air intake mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REPLACING AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
Replace the Air Conditioner Filter When
yy Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long unused period.
yy Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.
Caution Caution
yy Do not apply excessive force to the holders when removing the yy Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10,000 km of driving.
glove box. It may cause a deformation of holders and results in a However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions, such
loose installation. as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air conditioner or
yy Replace both air conditioner filters at the same time while paying heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened.
attention to the installing direction. yy When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or heat-
ing capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors.
Replacement of A/C Filter
1. Open the glove box. 2. Remove the glove box from the dash 3. Unscrew the bolts and remove the
panel by moving the glove box hold- air conditioner filter cover.
ers at both sides in the direction of
the arrow.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4. Pull out the first filter. 5. Lift up the second filter and remove it. 6. Install new filter while the protruding
section (arrow) of the filter faces up-
ward.
A/C filter
2 filters as a set

GETtheMANUALS.org
AQS (AIR QUALITY SYSTEM)
AQS System?
AQS automatically adjusts from the fresh air intake mode to
the recirculation mode when polluted air is detected by the
AQS sensor. The air source selection returns back to the
fresh air intake mode if a certain time passes or the polluted
air has disappeared.
In Auto Mode (AUTO indicator ON)

Whenever you press the AQS switch, the AQS switches over
Air Source Selection Switch/ between ON and OFF. When the AQS is turned on, the air
AQS Sensor source selection is changed to air recirculation mode automati-
AQS Switch
cally. It cannot be changed to the fresh air intake mode manu-
ally.
In Manual Mode (AUTO indicator OFF)

Whenever you press the Air source selection switch / AQS
switch, the system is switched to fresh air intake, air recircula-
tion, and AQS ON mode in order.
Indications of AQS Switch

Caution
To change the air source selection mode in
auto operation mode, press the air source
selection switch after changing to the manual
operation mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S torage compartments and convenient mart audio*.................................................10-21
S
3
devices............................................................10-2 SD card slot, terminal for connecting external
A
djustable steering wheel and horn................10-4 device and port*............................................10-22
4
Inside rearview mirror.....................................10-5 Bluetooth hands-free system........................10-24
F
ront storage compartment/cigarette lighter..10-6 5
C
enter console................................................10-7
P
ower outlet....................................................10-8 6
G
love box/courtesy lamp................................10-9 10 7
R
ear cup holder/jack storage/DVD changer*
storage..........................................................10-10
8
S
eatback pocket/map pocket....................... 10-11
S
un visors.....................................................10-12
Convenience 9
F
ront room lamps/sunglasses storage.........10-13 Devices 10
C
enter and rear room lamps/assist grip.......10-14
S
torage box in luggage compartment/
luggage net...................................................10-15 11
R
ear heated glass/removable ashtray..........10-17
12
oof rack*.....................................................10-18
R
D
igital clock...................................................10-19 13
udio system*...............................................10-20
A
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS AND CONVENIENT DEVICES
1
Sunglasses box
2 Passenger’s sun visor
Driver’s sun visor
4
Inside rearview mirror
(ECM*)
5
6 Power outlet
Digital clock
7
8
Horn
9
10
Glove box
Cigarette lighter
11
12 Power outlet
Center console
13 Passenger’s door map pocket
Driver’s door map pocket
14

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy Driving with any storage box open can cause injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop. Keep all the storage boxes closed while driving.
yy Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire.
yy When vehicle is in motion, liquid may spill out. Spilled liquid can damage the vehicle and cause burns if it is hot. Do not use the cup holder while
vehicle is in motion. Therefore, do not put any cup with hot liquid into the cup holder.
Seatback Seatback
pocket pocket
Center console
Rear cup holder
Rear power
outlet

GETtheMANUALS.org
Adjustable steering wheel and horn
Horn
Adjustable Steering Wheel Press the horn pad on the steering wheel to
sound the horn.
Caution
The sound of the horn can startle pedestrians.
Use only when needed.
To adjust the steering wheel, push the

control lever to right, adjust the wheel up
or down to the proper position, release the
control lever to lock the wheel in place.
After adjustment, make sure that the steer-
ing wheel is securely fixed.
Warning
yy Do not adjust the steering wheel while your vehicle is
Caution
moving. Otherwise, control of your vehicle can be lost.
yy Before driving, make sure that the steering wheel is yy If the temperature of the power steering fluid is low, sometimes
locked. the power steering temporarily delays the vehicle activation.
Therefore, start off the vehicle after idling for up to 3 minutes in
yy Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving dis-
the winter months (less than -10°C).
tracts a driver which could cause an accident.
yy Take care not to damage the grip surface of the steering wheel
yy Avoid turning the steering wheel all the way in either direc-
with a sharp object. The built-in heater could be damaged.
tion for more than 10 seconds, with the engine started.
This may cause overload the power steering system and yy When cleaning the steering wheel, do not use organic solvents
damage it. such as thinner, alcohol or gasoline. These solvents can damage
the heater and the surface of the steering wheel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down or side ways
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR to obtain the best rear view.
ECM (Anti-glare auto adjustment function)* Manual Type Inside Rearview Mirror
Anti-glare auto
adjustment switch
Brightness
Indicator detecting
sensor
The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be automati- Manual Day/Night Adjustment
cally adjusted by the light intensity from a vehicle behind you by You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or
pressing the anti-glare auto adjustment switch. While pressing the pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to
switch, its corresponding indicator comes on. Pressing the switch other vehicles behind you.
once more turns off the indicator and deactivates the function.
Caution Caution
Under the following conditions, automatic anti-glare function may not oper- When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust
ate properly. the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing or pulling
yy When the rear vehicle’s headlamp is not beamed directly to the inside it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.
rearview mirror’s sensor.
yy When the rear window has a dark tinted glass. Warning
yy When the gear selector lever is in the R position, automatic anti-glare
function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview. For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.
yy For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
Warning
yy The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not allow it
to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in your eyes, flush
with water and see your doctor.
yy For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front storage compartment/CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Front storage compartment CIGARETTE LIGHTER
There is a storage compartment at the bottom of the front cen- To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in all the way down. When
ter panel which can be used to store any small items. it becomes heated, it automatically pops out and is ready for use.
Caution Warning
The item may fall down or it may obstruct the movement of the selec- yy When the cigarette lighter does not automatically pop up after 30 seconds,
tor lever or gearshift lever so caution should be exercised. there is a danger of overheating. If this happens, pull it out and have the problem
corrected by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
yy Inserting your finger into the cigarette lighter outlet can cause burns or
electric shock.
yy The barrel of the cigarette lighter becomes very hot when it is fully charged.
When touched by or dropped on bare skin, this may cause burns. Dropping
the hot lighter can cause damage to a car seat or even start a fire.
yy Use only the genuine cigarette light in the cigarette lighter shock. To prevent
from electrical damage and fire, never use any other electric device such
as shaver, vacuum cleaner or coffee pot.
Caution
Do not tap the cigarette lighter strongly to clean up. That may damage the coil.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER CONSOLE
CUP HOLDER STORAGE BIN
To use the cup holder, push the outer surface. Push the button and lift the cover lid to open in order to store
Push it in when not in use. small items.
Caution Caution
yy When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, liquid may spill. Do not store any flammables including disposable lighters in the
yy Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode and
holder. cause a fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER OUTLET
Front Power Outlet Rear Power Outlet
upper
lower
Location: One power outlet on the center of instrument panel The rear power outlet is installed at the right side of storage
One power outlet at the left side of passenger foot- box in luggage compartment.
well
Warning
This power outlet supplies power when the ignition key is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position. yy For the extra electrical devices, you must use this power outlet. If
you alter the vehicle’s wire lines and leave the wires to hang freely,
it could cause an accident like a fire.
Caution
yy Abide by the nominal capacity of 12V-120W.
Keep the power outlet cover closed if not in use. Electrical defects
yy Do not put a finger into the outlet. It may cause an electric
can occur if objects other than power outlet plugs or water gets in.
shock.
This will prevent the socket from becoming clogged or short circuit-
ing. yy The battery can be discharged if the power outlet is used exces-
sively when the engine is not running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOVE BOX/COURTESY LAMP
Glove Box COURTESY LAMP
Courtesy lamp
Pull up on the lever to open the glove box. Items can be stored. The courtesy lamp comes on when opening the door and goes
When the tail lights are on and the glove box is open, the glove out when closing it.
box inner lamp comes on.
Caution
yy Driving with the glove box lid open can cause injury in case of
an accident or a sudden stop. Keep glove box lid closed when
driving.
yy Do not store any flammables including a disposable lighter in
the console box or glove box. In hot weather, it may explode and
cause a fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR CUP HOLDER/Jack storage/dvd changer* storage
REAR CUP HOLDER dvd changer* storage
DVD changer
storage
The rear cup holder is located at the rear side of center con- The jack storage and the navigation unit/DVD changer storage
sole. are located at the left side of luggage compartment.
To use it, pull the cover down while pulling down the lever.
Close it when not in use.
Caution
yy When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, the liquid may spill.
yy Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup
holder.
yy Do not place any can or bottle under the direct sunlight or in the
hot vehicle as it may burst.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SEATBACK POCKET/MAP POCKET
SEATBACK POCKET MAP POCKET
Map pocket
Storage pocket is installed at the rear side of front seat. Use it The map pocket is located on each front door. Maps, maga-
to put personal belongings. zines, newspapers, and other items can be stored.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS Ticket holder/VANITY MIRROR AND LAMP
Ticket holder
(only for driver’s)
Ticket holder
Vanity Lamp
mirror
Sun visors are installed on the roof trim above the driver’s and The driver’s sun visor has a ticket holder on its back side.
passenger’s seat. Swing the sun visor down or to the left (right), Swing the sun visor down and open the cover to reveal the
if necessary. mirror.
The vanity mirror comes on only when opening the cover.
Caution
Do not operate the sun visor, vanity mirror or ticket holder while driv-
ing. It may cause an unexpected accident.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT ROOM LAMPS/SUNGLASSES STORAGE
Front Room Lamp SUNGLASSES STORAGE
Room lamp switch

Room lamp switch (driver side)
(passenger side)
When the switch is pressed, the appropriate front room lamp is Sunglasses storage is located in the overhead console.
turned on. When pressed it again, the lamp goes out. Press the top side of the cover to open it. To close it, push the
cover up until you hear the “click” sound.
Caution
Do not turn on the room lamp for a long period of time with the engine Caution
stopped. Otherwise, the battery may be discharged.
yy If glasses falls down, it may be damaged. Fix it firmly.
yy The unclosed console can block your rearview. Also, the console
can injure you in an accident or a sudden stop. Therefore, close
the console before driving off your vehicle.
yy Do not store any item that can be deformed in a hot tempera-
ture.
yy Do not store any heavy items inside the console. When it falls out
of the console, occupants may get injuries.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER AND REAR ROOM LAMPS/ASSIST GRIP
CENTER AND REAR ROOM LAMPS ASSIST GRIP
ON
Door
OFF
Coat hook
The room lamps are operated by room lamp switch. Your vehicle has assist grips above the front passenger’s door
If the center room lamp switch is at “Door” position; the center and the rear doors. The coat hook is installed only on the grip
room lamp is turned on when opening a rear door. It goes out above rear left door.
when closing the door.
If the rear room lamp switch is at “Door” position; the rear
room lamp is turned on when opening the tailgate. It goes out
when closing the tailgate.

GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE BOX IN LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT/LUGGAGE NET
STORAGE BOX IN LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT Luggage Net
To use the storage box in luggage compartment, release the Any possibly moving objects during driving can be stored in
lock on the cover and open the cover. the luggage net.
Hook the net up to the luggage compartment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Luggage Cover (Except for 7-Seater)
Note
Store the luggage cover separately to use the luggage room of the
vehicle wide.
Caution
Don’t put anything on the luggage cover.
When Unrolling the Luggage Cover

Pull the handle of the luggage cover at the center, and fix it into
the grooves at left and right sides of quarter trim inner panels.
When Rolling the Luggage Cover

Take the luggage cover out of the grooves by pulling the han-
dle and let go the grasp slightly to roll the luggage cover.
When Removing the Luggage Cover

After tearing off the edge of luggage cover at the back of rear
seat, remove the luggage cover assembly by raising up it from
the fixing holder’s grooves.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR HEATED GLASS/reMOVABLE ASHTRAY
REAR DEFOGGER REMovable Ashtray
Heating grids
The heating grids are installed on the tailgate glass. This portable ashtray can be easily placed on where you want.
Be careful not to damage the heating grids while cleaning the Tab the ash off your cigarette.
inside of the window.
Warning
Caution To avoid danger of fire, do not accumulate inflammable materials,
Do not coat the tailgate window and side windows with any after- such as garbage or cigarette butts, in your ashtray and make sure
market products, especially a metal anti-glare film or a two-tone film. the cigarettes are full extinguished.
When it is used on the windows, the sensitivity of the heating grids
can be deteriorated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ROOF RACK*
Roof rack
Caution
or luggage.
yy Roof rack: 45 kg (100 lbs.) evenly distributed
yy When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear
securely fastened.
your vehicle.
Note

GETtheMANUALS.org
DIGITAL CLOCK
H (HOUR) : Hour Adjusting Button

M (MINUTE) : Minute Adjusting Button
S (SET) : Setting Button
yy Press the “S” button to adjust the time to the nearest hour.
yy When the time is between 00 and 29 minutes of a certain hour,
the minute indicator will show “00” if this button is pressed.
hour, the minute indicator will show “00” and one hour will
be added to the hour indicator if this button is pressed.
Note
When disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse, the clock
should be adjusted again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUDIO SYSTEM*
System Configuration USB Port and HDMI terminal
Steering wheel audio switch
You can use the audio system, HDMI terminal (AUX jack) and The USB port and HDMI terminal (AUX jack) are provided.
USB port when you want to hear the musics. Use them when you want to hear the music in USB memory
stick or an external audio device through with the speakers in
Note your vehicle.
For detailed information for the audio system, refer to the audio
For detailed information, refer to the audio operation manual
operation manual provided with this manual.
provided with this manual.
Antenna
Caution
Some USB memory sticks and external audio devices may not work
in this audio system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SMART AUDIO*
Cautions for using smart audio*
yy It is available on devices which support HDMI. (Some

Smart audio*
devices may not be supported)
yy Some applications may not be supported.
yy The connection of HDMI (such as gender or cable)
may cause image quality degradation.
Audio remote control
yy When the HDMI cable or gender is disconnected from
switches on steering
the system, noise may occur on the screen.
wheel
yy For some devices, you should supply power to the
HDMI gender using a USB cable when connecting
HDMI terminal
HDMI.
and USB port
yy For some devices, voice output may be limited when
connecting HDMI while Bluetooth is enabled.
Supporting USB / HDMI / Camera, this audio system can be
controlled by using the touch panel and steering switches. yy For safety reasons, only the voice is played without
video during driving. (video played again when vehicle
Note stops)
This owner’s manual describes all audio models. Check the audio
model fitted to the vehicle you have purchased and for detailed
information regarding audio system, refer to the operating manual
provided separately.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SD CARD SLOT, TERMINAL FOR CONNECTING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PORT*
Navigation SD card* HDMI Terminal and USB Port*
(With Navigation System)
SD card
USB Port HDMI Terminal
The slot for inserting the navigation SD card is under the touch You can play the music file stored on the memory stick using a
panel navigation monitor. For more information on this device, USB port or mirroring between the HDMI terminal and applica-
please refer to the operating manual provided separately. tions in the smart devices.
For more information, refer to the operating manual provided
Caution separately.
yy Make sure that the engine is turned off when inserting or remov-
ing the SD Card. Caution
yy If the SD Card is removed while the navigation is in operation, the Some USB memories and smart devices may not be supported.
unit may become defective.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN USING AUDIO SYSTEM
yy An illegal copy of a CD may cause a malfunction in the

Usable Discs
audio head unit and abnormal replay. Use only original
CD. yy CD + MP3 player : Audio CD/MP3 CD
yy Incompatible discs may cause a malfunction in the sys- yy CD player : Audio CD
tem. Use only compatible discs.
yy Do not use the audio/video/navigation system for a long Please refer to the audio manual to check disk compatibility.
time when the engine is not running. The battery could
be discharged.
yy Be careful not to spill water on the unit or to let any for-
eign objects into the system.
yy Do not apply any impacts and pressure to the monitor
screen. The LCD panel or touch screen panel can be
damaged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE SYSTEM*
The Bluetooth hands-free system allows you to make calls
through the vehicle microphone and speakers by connecting
the audio system of the vehicle to your mobile phone. Bluetooth hands-free call switch
Note ► To make a call

For detailed information on how to make a call with Bluetooth hands- Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe
free system and how to use the system, refer to the separate booklet area. Pick up your mobile phone and dial
(Audio Operating Manual). the number you wish to call. After that
press the Bluetooth hands-free call switch
briefly.
►►To accept a call

Bluetooth hands-free Press the Bluetooth hands-free call switch briefly to accept a
microphone call.
Bluetooth hands-free ►►To end a call
call switch
Press and hold the Bluetooth hands-free call switch to end a
call.
►►To redial
Press and hold the Bluetooth hands-free call switch with no
call currently in progress.
Bluetooth hands-free
call speaker Note
You can redial the last call without pressing the numbers on the key-
pad by pressing and holding the Bluetooth hands-free call switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Cautions for using Bluetooth
yy Talking on a mobile phone while driving is banned in many coun- hands-free system
tries. Always observe applicable local laws wherever you drive.
yy Using a mobile phone while driving is extremely dangerous even if
you are using the Bluetooth hands-free system. Make sure to park
yy The hands-free system may not fully support a cer-
or stop the vehicle before using/programming your mobile phone/ tain mobile phone.
Bluetooth hands-free system. yy For some mobile phone models, you should press
the Bluetooth hands-free call switch once or twice
to redial the last call you made. Or you may need to
Caution press CALL/END buttons on the mobile phone, not
yy Pressing the Bluetooth hands-free call switch shortly does not the Bluetooth hands-free call switch to make or end
end a call. a call. Therefore, you should be familiar with your
yy Be careful not to press and hold the Bluetooth hands-free call mobile phone.
switch after the other caller has ended the call. If you press and yy For some mobile phone models, you may need to
hold this switch in this situation, the number of the last call is press the CALL button on the mobile phone if you
redialed.
cannot make or answer a call by pressing the Blu-
yy Not all functions of the Bluetooth hands-free system may be avail-
etooth hands-free call switch.
able or work the same depending on your mobile phone.
yy You may experience howling depending on mobile
phone models.
yy In this case, try to adjust the call volume.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
S
tarting the engine with jumper cables........... 11-2
3
C
autions when a tire is flat.............................. 11-4
W
arning triangle*............................................. 11-5 4
O
VM tools....................................................... 11-6
5
R
emoving the spare tire.................................. 11-7
C
hanging a spare tire...................................... 11-8 11
6
C
autions when changing the tire.................. 11-13
7
In Case of
H
ow to use service kit* (emergency puncture
repair kit)....................................................... 11-14
8
W
hen the engine is overheating................... 11-20
W
ater separator warning light and engine
Emergency
9
check warning light....................................... 11-22
S
hift lever lock release and safety mode reset 10
...................................................................... 11-23
T
owing a disabled vehicle............................. 11-24 11
E
mergency towing........................................ 11-25
Trailer towing................................................. 11-27 12
A
ccident or fire.............................................. 11-32
13
E
mission reduction device............................ 11-33
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
STARTING THE ENGINE WITH JUMPER CABLES
1 If the batter is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper cables to start the engine.
3 4
5 Connecting order:
(1) The + terminal of the discharged battery
6 (2) The + terminal of the booster battery
(3) The - terminal of the booster battery
7 (4) Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the body of
the discharged vehicle, such as the engine block or a front
Discharged battery
8 towing hook.
9 3 2
10
1. Prepare a set of jumper cables.
Booster battery
11 2. Place another vehicle that has the same 12 V of power near
to the discharged vehicle.
The positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal.
12 3. Switch off all electrical accessories for the discharged ve-
The minus (–) cable to the minus (–) terminal. hicle.
13 4. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission to the
P position (automatic transmission) or neutral (N) position
(manual transmission).
14
5. Connect the jumper cables.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy Connecting the jumper cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery
could result in arcing and possibly a battery explosion. Serious personal injury
or vehicle damage can result.
yy Make sure that the jumper leads are securely connected. Otherwise, an abrupt
disconnection due to vibration during engine starting may cause an electrical
short resulting in severe damage to electric components.
yy A battery generates the gas which is flammable and explosive. This gas could
be exploded due to the spark when connecting the jump cables. Make sure that
the booster battery has the same voltage rate with the discharged battery.
yy While connecting the jumper cables, make sure that the negative (–) and
positive (+) cables never touch each other. Otherwise sparks might cause an
explosion of the battery.
yy Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact
eyes, skin, or painted surfaces. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and contact your doctor.
yy While being transported in an ambulance, gently wipe out the contacted area
with a water-wet cloth or sponge.
Caution
yy When starting your vehicle with jumper cable, turn off the engine of the boost
vehicle and connect the jumper cables
yy Ensure that the jumper cables are clear away fan blades before starting the
engine.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, and let
the engine idle for a few minutes.
7. Attempt to start the engine with the discharged battery.
8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the jumper cables in the
reverse sequence of connection.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN A TIRE IS FLAT
If one of the tires becomes flat while driving, grab the steering
wheel firmly and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Gradually slow down and park your vehicle in a safe place.
Replace the flat tire with a spare tire. For the process, refer to
sections about the spare tire.
Warning Warning
yy Don’t panic! Improper operation of the steering wheel or abrupt yy Stop the engine and set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle
braking may cause a consequential accident on the road. Stop (daytime: 100 m, night time: 200 m - on express way).
your vehicle in a safe place and turn on the hazard flasher and yy Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to the
then apply the parking brake. wheel being changed.
yy Do not drive with a flat tire for even a very short distance. In addi- yy Have all passengers get out of vehicle and move in a safe place.
tion to damages to the rim of the tire, abnormal driving conditions
can cause a very danger situation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING TRIANGLE*
When the vehicle has a serious problem during

driving
1. Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traf-
fic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind your
vehicle (days: 100 m, nights: 200 m) to warn other vehicles.
2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away
from the traffic. When your safety is secured, contact your
Ssangyong dealer for your emergency service.
When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe

Caution
place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle.
yy Set up a warning triangle on a place where it can be very visible
(Daytime: 100 meters behind, Night: 200 meters behind) while paying attention to traffic conditions.
yy On a highway or vehicle-designated road, evacuate yourself to a
safe place after pulling over your vehicle.
yy At night time, set up a blinking emergency triangle behind your
vehicle (over 200 meters) to warn others.
yy On a curved road, provide a emergency hand signal with a warning
light to others at the point over 200 meters behind your vehicle.
yy If your vehicle is operational or the problem is fixed, resume driving
paying extra attention to traffic conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
OVM TOOLS
OVM tools box
1. Jack 4. Screwdriver (+ and -)

2. Jack connection 5. Spanner
3. Wheel nut wrench
Caution
You can find a jack, jack extension, wheel nut wrench, and
other OVM tools under the second row seat behind driver’s yy Put out the OVM tools after fixing the upright seat with a strap. Do
not put out the tools without fixing the seat using a strap. In that
seat.
case, the second row seat may fall and cause injury.
yy After using the OVM tools, return them to the original locations.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
Warning
The emergency spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or a tire-
specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
Caution
yy When reinstalling the spare tire to the carrier, be sure to securely
lock it to the carrier holder.
yy While your vehicle is being raised up with the jack, avoid any im-
pact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured.
1. Insert the connection rod in the hole located in the upper

center of the bumper after opening the tailgate, and then
connect the wheel nut wrench to it.
2. Turn the wheel nut wrench counter-clockwise to lower the
spare tire.
3. When the spare tire is on the ground, remove the tire by
prying off the lift plate.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHANGING A SPARE TiRE
2. Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns by turning them

counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
Warning
yy Do not remove the nuts yet from the wheel. If they are removed, the
wheel could slip off from the vehicle. Then, the body of the vehicle
will fall down on you and you may get seriously injured.
yy Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns.
yy The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.
yy Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to the
wheel being changed.
Caution
When reinstalling the wheel cap, be sure to completely fit it into its
location.
1. Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed.
Warning
The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Replacing a Front Tire When Replacing a Rear Tire
Front jack up point Rear jack up point
3. Place the jack directly under the jack-up points so that the
top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Warning
yy The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible.
yy It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and
that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.
yy No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
yy Jack working load limit 1,300 kg.
<Jack up points>

GETtheMANUALS.org
4. Combine the jack, jack extension and the wheel nut wrench 6. Take the wheel off and place the wheel under the vehicle
as shown in the figure. Raise up the vehicle by rotating the body. This helps to minimize any danger if the jack slip off
combined wrench clockwise until the tire is off from the position.
ground about 3 cm.
5. Remove the wheel nuts by hands while the vehicle is sta-
tionary. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
Warning
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle until the jack is in the proper posi-
tion, and secure both to the vehicle and the ground. It may cause a
personal injury or vehicle damage.

GETtheMANUALS.org
8. Lower the vehicle by rotating the combined wrench coun-
Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with
ter-clockwise until the tire touches the ground. Remove
the sequence as shown in the figure.
the jack.
Warning
While the jack is supporting your vehicle, do not use too much force
to tighten the nuts. Otherwise, the vehicle may slip off and you may
get injured.
9. Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with the sequence

10. When done with mounting the spare tire, place the flat tire
in the luggage room. Store the jack and other emergency
tools in their storages.
7. Then mount the spare tire and temporarily tighten the wheel
nuts until the spare tire wheel is no longer loose.
Warning
By tightening up the spare tire until it is not loose any more, you can
avoid any tilting of the tire on the wheel hub when the tire touches
the ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy With the emergency spare tire, do not drive any faster than
60 km/h.
yy The temporary spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or a
tire-specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
yy Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off or any malfunctioning in the steering and
braking system.
yy This could lead to an accident. Be sure to tighten the wheel nuts
as specified. If the wheel comes off due to a loose wheel nut, you
may have a fatal accident.
yy Using different tires could cause you to lose control while driving.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires from the same manu-
facturer on all wheels.
If over tightened, the wheel nuts could be damaged. Do not
overtighten the wheel nuts by pressing the wheel nut wrench
Caution
by foot or using an assist pipe.
After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 1000 km, re-
tighten the wheel nuts.
- Wheel nut tightening torque: 120 ~ 140 Nm

GETtheMANUALS.org
 Before changing the tire yy Securely fix the tire in its carrier. Check to see if the spare
yy Turn on hazard flashers and move off the road to a safe tire is securely locked into the carrier without any loose-
place away from traffic. Park on a firm and level ground. ness. Otherwise, it may make some abnormal noises or
fall out from the carrier on the road while the vehicle is
yy Set up the jack at the specified position. Never get under
moving. This may cause an accident or hit a pedestrian.
the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. While the ve-
hicle is on the jack, never start or run the engine or push yy If this happens, the fallen tire can be a great danger to
the vehicle. other vehicles or people. Check the tightness of the wheel
nuts and tire pressure before driving.
yy Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay in a
place away from traffic. yy The spare tire is designed as an emergency spare only.
Do not exceed 60 km/h speed when the spare tire is in-
 During changing the tire stalled on the vehicle.
yy Do not completely tighten the wheel nuts at a time. Tighten yy Repair or change the flat tire. Stow the emergency tire in
the wheel nuts in the diagonal sequence in 2 or 3 steps. its location properly.
yy Never apply oil or grease to either wheel studs or nuts as yy Make sure to check the tightness and inflation pressure of
it will cause them to overtighten. tires before driving.
yy In the vehicle equipped with TPMS, the TPMS warning
 After changing the tire lamp comes on and TPMS does not work when installing
the emergency tire.
yy Check, repair, and retighten the replaced tire at the near-
est Ssangyong Authorized Service Center or a qualified
tire shop after an emergency change.
Warning
yy Make sure that tighten the wheel nuts again after driving of about 1,000 km when the tires have been replaced.
yy Drive the vehicle at the speed of 60km/h or less (maximum speed 80 km; maximum distance 200 km) when the vehicle is driven with the spare tire.
yy Drive the vehicle in 2H mode when the spare tire is fitted. When driving in 4H mode, it will damage the drive system.
yy Be sure to use the same size and type tires of the same manufacturer on all wheels so that the vehicle characteristics can be maintained safely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO USE SERVICE KIT* (EMERGENCY PUNCTURE REPAIR KIT)
The service kit is located in the storage box in the luggage Note
compartment. While the vehicle with the service kit has no spare tire, the vehicle
with the spare tire has no service kit.
Warning
Working principle of service kit yy Use the service kit only when the hole size on the tread is about 6
If you get a flat tire, you can put the sealant into the tire using a mm or less. If the tire sidewall is torn or the hole size is too large, do
compressor. After short driving, the sealant will be applied on not use the service kit. Tow your vehicle or take it to a Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center and have the vehicle serviced.
the inner surface of the tire evenly and the puncture is sealed
yy If the tire pressure is not increased even when the air is injected
by the sealant so that you can drive the vehicle for a short dis-
using the service kit, stop immediately. And tow your vehicle or
tance. take it to a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have the
vehicle serviced.
yy When driving with the repaired tire using the service kit, make sure
that the vehicle speed does not exceed 80 km/h.
yy If you feel or hear any vibrations, unstable steering, or noises,
stop the vehicle immediately. And tow your vehicle or take it to
a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have the vehicle
serviced.
Evenly applied sealant yy The service kit is for emergency use only. The temporarily sealed
during driving tire must be repaired or replaced as soon as possible. (maximum
driving distance: 100 km)

GETtheMANUALS.org
INFLATING A TIRE
When the tire pressure is low, you can add 3. Securely connect the air hose to the air 5. Connect the power cable for the service
the air to your tire using the service kit ac- valve on the tire. kit to the battery positive and negative
cording to the specified air pressure. 4. Unscrew the protective cap from the air terminals.
1. Take out the service kit from the storage hose and connect the air hose to the 6. Start the engine.
box in the luggage compartment. tire’s air valve.
Warning
2. Take out the air valve and power cable
from the service kit unit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Repair kit
power switch
7. Start the compressor by pressing the 10. Disconnect the air hose from the
power switch of the service kit. tire.
8. Wait until the pressure reaches to the 11. Install the air valve cap of the tire.
standard pressure (32 psi, 2.2 bar) 12. Turn off the engine and place the ser-
while checking the pressure gauge of vice kit back to the original position.
the service kit.
9. Once the standard pressure is reached,
switch off the service kit.
Caution
To prevent overheating, do not operate the
compressor for more than 10 minutes.
Note
To measure the tire pressure, switch off the
service kit and read the pressure gauge.

GETtheMANUALS.org
REPAIRING FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, repair the tire using a 3. Take out the air valve and power cable 4. Connect the compressor hose ( ) of
service kit as per the following procedures: from the service kit unit. the service kit to the sealant bottle.
1. Take out the service kit from the storage
box in the luggage compartment.
2. Remove the speed limit sticker from
the service kit and affix it on the steer-
ing wheel. Side wall part
⏷⪿ᠧ#⨟#⃋
Caution
yy This is intended to inform the driver of
that the current tire is repaired with a ser-
vice kit and speed limit is required. Never
drive at a speed of 80 km/h or higher. Warning
yy Check the expiration date for the sealant. Check the sidewall of tire prior to repairing
The expiration date is imprinted on the it with the service kit. If it is torn, cracked or
top of the sealant. If the expiration date damaged, contact the Ssangyong Autho-
has passed, discard the sealant and 5. Fix the sealant bottle to the compressor
rized Service Operation for any necessary
prepare for new one, just in case. action without using the service kit.
body securely.
yy Always read the precautions on the con-
tainer before using it.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Repair kit
power switch
6. Remove the air valve cap from the 8. Connect the power cable for the service 10. Start the compressor by pressing the
flat tire. kit to the battery positive and negative power switch of the service kit.
7. Securely connect the air hose from terminals.
the service kit to the air valve on the 9. Start the engine.
flat tire.
Warning

GETtheMANUALS.org
13. Disconnect the connecting hose from
Warning
the repaired tire.
yy Use the service kit only when the hole
14. Install the air valve cap of the tire. size on the tread is about 6 mm or less.
15. Turn off the ignition, remove the If the tire’s sidewall or shoulder is torn or
sealant bottle and air hose from the the hole size is too large, do not use the
service kit and place the service kit to service kit. Tow your vehicle or take it to
the original position. a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center
and have the vehicle serviced.
Caution yy If the tire pressure is not increased
even when the air is injected using the
yy Be careful not to touch the sealant with service kit, stop immediately. And tow
your skin when removing the sealant bot- your vehicle or take it to a Ssangyong
tle. In the case of contact with skin, wash Authorized Service Center and have the
away the sealant with soapy water.
11. Inflate the tire to 32 psi (2.2 bar) while vehicle serviced.
yy Dispose of the used sealant bottle.
checking the pressure gauge of the yy You should drive with the speed below
service kit. yy Check the expiration date for the sealant 80 km/h if using a repaired tire with the
before use. service kit. The maximum distance you
12. Once the standard pressure is yy If the expiration date has passed, discard could drive with the repaired tire may
reached, switch off the service kit. the sealant and prepare for new one. differ depending on the tire condition,
yy The material of the sealant may vary in however do not exceed 100 km.
Caution different products. Using an unapproved yy If steering is unstable or wobbling/noise
To prevent overheating, do not operate the sealant, not our genuine one could result is felt, stop driving and obtain help from
compressor for more than 10 minutes. If in damage of TPMS system sensor. SsangYong service center.
the tire pressure does not increase 26 psi yy The service kit is for emergency use
or higher within 10 minutes, the tire is too 16. Immediately drive the vehicle for only. Bring your vehicle to authorized
damaged to repair using a service kit. about 3 km so that the sealant is ap- SsangYong dealer as soon as possible
plied on the inner surface of the tire to replace the tire treated by sealant with
evenly. new one and check TPMS.
Warning
yy Obtain a new bottle of sealant from the
Never stand next to the sidewall of the 17. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and dealer with returning the used sealant
tire when the compressor is operating. check the tire pressure with the ser- bottle for disposal.
Instead, look at the sidewall of the tire. You vice kit.
may get injured severely in the event of tire
rupture.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE ENGINE IS OVERHEATING
Coolant temperature gauge
Engine overheat warning lamp
When the engine overheats, steam or spray may come out

the engine compartment. Or, the coolant temperature gauge
is closed to “H”. If this happens, the engine overheat warning
lamp comes on and a buzzer will sound. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe place.
Symptoms:
yy The engine overheat warning lamp blinks (Buzzer
sounds)
yy The gauge indicates over the normal range (or in the red
zone),
yy Steam or spray from the engine compartment.
yy Reduced engine output.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When the engine overheats
1. Move off the road to a safe place away from traffic. Park on
Caution
a firm and level ground. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission to the P position (automatic transmission) yy When the engine overheats because of the low coolant level, im-
mediately turn off the engine and let it cool down.
or the neutral position (manual transmission).
yy Opening the reserve tank cap should be performed when the
2. Turn off the air conditioner or heater if used. Open the en- engine is off and has cooled down.
gine hood to ventilate the engine compartment. yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pres-
3. If you see steam under the hood, stop the engine immedi- sure, which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant
ately. reserve tank cap when the engine and the radiator are hot.
yy The engine may be damaged if you add cold water abruptly when
If there is no steam, open the hood and leave the engine
the engine is still hot.
running in idling speed.
yy Use only Ssangyong recommended (antifreeze) coolants.
4. However, if the gauge doesn’t go down to the normal range yy If the problem continues, have the cooling system checked by a
even in idling, stop the engine and cool it down. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If it is too low,
check for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections. Warning
6. Add coolant into the reserve tank if necessary. yy To avoid being scalded, carefully open the engine hood.
7. If necessary, cover the tank cap with a cloth and turn the yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pres-
cap a little to release any pressure. After fully releasing the sure, which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant
pressure, remove the cap and fill up the tank. Then, put the reservoir cap when the engine and the radiator are still hot.
cap back on the tank. yy Extremely careful not to contact to running parts such as drive belt
when the engine is running.
8. If the coolant level is normal, have the cooling system
Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WATER SEPARATOR WARNING LIGHT AND ENGINE CHECK WARNING LIGHT
TRIP A
ODO B km
READY
Engine Check Warning Light Water Separator Warning Light

If the light stays on or comes on while driving, When the water level inside the water separa-
some of the engine control components including tor in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level, this
sensors and other devices are defective. Have warning light comes on and a buzzer sounds.
the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or If these conditions occur, immediately drain the
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. water from the fuel filter & the water separator. For the draining
procedures, please refer to “How to drain the water from fuel
Warning filter” section in this manual.
yy The fuel system in the engine may get serious damages if you keep
driving while the warning light is on. Prompt correction should be Caution
necessary. When this warning light comes on, the engine driving force may be
yy Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of the decreased or the engine may stall.
priming pump until it becomes rigid to fill up the fuel pump with
fuel.
Caution
When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level, this warning light comes on and a buzzer sounds. Also, the
driving force of the vehicle decreases. If these conditions occur, immediately drain the water from the fuel filter & the water separator. If the above
conditions are still existing after draining the water, have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SHIFT LEVER LOCK RELEASE AND SAFETY MODE RESET
How to Release the Shift Lever Lock
Symptoms after Resetting of the Safety Mode
yy Decreased driving force while driving at a high speed
yy Fixed gear position during driving
yy If the safety mode is activated, the shift indicator displays
“D”.
If one of these symptoms happens, reset the automatic trans-
mission safe mode.
How to Reset the Safety Mode

1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to the “P” posi-
tion.
2. Stop the engine and wait for over 10 seconds.
1. Apply the parking brake firmly and turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal and push down the shift lock re-
lease lever with a stick such as a pen. Then, shift the lever Warning
to other position. If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the 2nd forward
gear in the “D” position or the 2nd(1st) reverse gear in the “R” posi-
3. Start the engine, release the parking brake, and place the
tion)still exists, have the system check by a Ssangyong Dealer or
selector lever to the “D” position. Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
Warning
yy If the automatic gear selector does not move out of “P”, take the
steps mentioned above and take the vehicle to a Ssangyong
dealer or authorized service center. Have the vehicle checked
and repaired.
yy The brake pedal must be depressed when you try to move the
selector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
yy Flat towing For 2WD vehicles
Warning
It is not allowed to use a tow truck or
yy The 4WD system equipped vehicle
should never be towed with the wheels
keep the rear wheels from moving with
on the ground. This can cause serious the parking brake released for towing,
damage to the transmission or the 4WD as shown in the following figure.
system. Do not tow the vehicle with the rear
yy Towing with front wheels on ground
yy If your vehicle should be towed due to wheels on the ground.
wheel slips in mud or sand, you can use
the towing hooks in your vehicle. How-
ever, if the load to hooks is too heavy,
the towing hook, rope or chain could be
Dolly
broken, resulting in serious personal
yy Towing with rear wheels on ground injury and vehicle damage.
yy To prevent damage to your vehicle, Caution
proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary. When you need a tow-
ing service, contact Ssangyong Dealer
Dolly or Ssangyong Authorized Ser vice
Center.
Towing with tow truck
The best towing method is to lift the
entire vehicle onto the flatbed so that
all wheels are off the ground. If it is
impossible, put the front or rear wheels
on the jig and tow the vehicle using a
dolly, with other wheels off the ground. yy Do not tow with the sling-type equip-
ment or the bumper and lower parts can
For 4WD vehicle be damaged.
Your vehicle must be towed with a yy If the vehicle is towed with the driving
wheels on the ground, the transmission
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equip-
may be damaged.
ment with all the wheels off the ground.
yy Be careful not to damage the bumper
and lower parts during towing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EMERGENCY TOWING
yy When towing your vehicle with the towing rope:

1. Securely tie up the towing rope to the towing hooks. Secure
the rope to both of the towing hooks under the front of the
vehicle as tight as possible.
2. To make the rope conspicuously visible, bind a white col-
ored cloth on the center of the rope.
3. Place the gearshift lever in the neutral position and release
the parking brake.
Within 5 m 4. Switch on the hazard warning flashers of both vehicles.
5. Maintain the towing distance. Apply more force to depress
the brake pedal of the vehicle that will be towed.
6. Set the ignition in the ON position.
7. Total length of the towing and towed vehicle and the towing
rope should be less than 25 meters. And tow the vehicle
within 25 km with 5 km/h of the towing speed. The length of
the rope should be less than 5 m.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of Towing Hooks
Front towing hook Rear towing hook Caution
yy If you cannot use a professional towing service, the driver of the
towed vehicle should stay behind the steering wheel. But, never
use this emergency towing when the electrical system, steering
system, or brake system is not operative.
yy Ensure that only horizontal tension is applied to the front or rear
towing hook.
yy If there are steep hills or sharp turns in your towing path, do not
use this method.
yy Depress the brake pedal stronger than normal condition when the
engine is not running.
yy When your electrical systems operate properly, turn on the haz-
ard warning lamps or turn signal lamps according to the towing
vehicle’s signals.
yy Avoid overloaded towing and do not tow a heavier vehicle than
yours.
Warning yy Position the ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON” so that the steering
wheel is not locked.
yy The towing hook should be used only for temporary and short-
distance recovery or towing in an emergency situation. Avoid using
it all the time. Misusing can have serious consequences.
yy Special cares should be taken when towing. Avoid an abrupt start-
off or reckless driving because it could over-tighten the towing
hook, towing rope or chain with excessive force. To prevent dam-
age, do not take up slack in the towing rope or chain too quickly.
yy If the towing hook is required for towing as the vehicle becomes
stuck in snow, mud or sand or it can’t get out by itself due to poor
traction, make sure no excessive force is applied to the towing
hook. Otherwise, the towing hook, towing rope or chain may be
broken, resulting in an injury or damage to the vehicle. For safe
towing, it is recommended to contact Ssangyong authorized ser-
vice shop or a professional towing company.

GETtheMANUALS.org
trailer Towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger vehicle Trailer Loading
therefore handling, braking, durability and economy will be af-
fected by towing a trailer. To load your trailer properly, you must know how to measure
gross trailer weight and trailer ball weight. Gross trailer weight
Your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of cor-
is the weight of the trailer plus all cargo in it.
rect equipment. Also, you should avoid overloading and other
abusive use. You can measure gross trailer weight by putting the fully load-
ed trailer on a vehicle scale.
The maximum loaded trailer weight you can pull with your
vehicle depends on your intended use and what special equip- Trailer ball weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ment has been installed on it. Before attempting any towing, by the trailer coupler at its normal towing height. This weight
ensure that the correct equipment is fitted to your vehicle. can be measured using a bathroom scale.
Your Ssangyong Dealer will help supply and install towing The weight of your loaded trailer (gross trailer weight) should
equipment to suit your requirement. never exceed the specified values.
The permissible trailer loads are valid for several gradients
from 6.8% to 12.6% according to engine power applied.
Maximum Load Limits (unit: kg) When the trailer has been coupled, the permissible rear axle
load for the fully loaded towing vehicle (including occupants)
Trailer coupling weight must not be exceeded.
Maximum Maximum permissible Maximum
Engine Type
Trailer static vertical load on trailer
the coupling device hitch
D22DTR/ with brake 2,600
129 25
D20DTR without brake 750
with brake 2,300
D27DT
without brake 750
with brake 2,300
D27DTP 117 25
without brake 750
with brake 2,300
G32D
without brake 750

GETtheMANUALS.org
If you want to pull a trailer
Important points:
yy You have to consider a sway control. You can check the
sway control to hitch dealer.
yy If the total driving distance of your new vehicle is under 800
km (500 miles), do not tow a trailer. For the first 800 km (500
miles) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 80 km/h (50
mph) and do not start off your vehicle at full throttle. Other-
wise, your engine and other parts could be damaged due to
heavier loads.
yy Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than
80 km/h).
yy You have to consider the weight of trailer.
yy The permissible trailer ball weight varies according to the
cargo weight on the deck.
yy It has to be limited to the number of passengers by 5 people
including a driver.
Weight of trailer
To keep the vehicle and trailer safely, you must consider many
factors except the maximum load limit.
The vehicle and trailer’s safety depends on how you use your
trailer. Vehicle speed, altitude, load, outside temperature and
frequency of using trailer are all very important. Any special
equipment on your vehicle also affects on your vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Weight of trailer tongue Trailer Brakes
The tongue load of a trailer is also considered very carefully If the trailer brakes are used, you should follow all instructions
because it affects the gross vehicle weight (GVW) of your provided by the manufacturer. Never modify the brake system
vehicle. This weight includes the curb weight of vehicle, any of your vehicle.
luggage in trailer, and the passengers in vehicle. In addition to
that, you must add the trailer tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will carry all the weight. Trailer Lights
The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 4% of total Make sure your trailer is equipped with lights which meet coun-
loaded trailer weight. To check the weights are proper, you try and local requirements.
must weigh the trailer and the tongue separately after load- Always check for the proper operation of all trailer lights before
ing. If the weights are not proper, unload some items from the you start to tow.
trailer.
Caution Tires
yy Never load a trailer with more weight in the rear side than in the
front side. (Recommendation - Front: approx. 60%, Rear: approx.
When towing trailers, be sure your tires are properly inflated to
40%) the inflation pressure.
yy Never exceed the maximum load limits of trailer or trailer towing
equipment. Improper loading may result in damage to your ve-
hicle. It may occur the personal injury. Before driving, check the
Safety Chains
weight and loading at a commercial scale or highway patrol office Always attach safety chains between your vehicle and the
equipped with scales. trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer
yy An improperly loaded trailer may cause the loss of vehicle con- so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes sepa-
trol.
rated from the hitch. Follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation for attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack to permit full turning. Never allow safety chains to drag
on the road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake Fluid yy Allow adequate stopping distance.
Stopping distance is increased when you tow a trailer.
Change the brake fluid every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) under
the following conditions. yy Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too fre-
quently, which will cause the brakes to overheat and result
yy Towing a trailer frequently. in reduced brake efficiency.
yy Driving in hilly or mountainous terrain. yy Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Automatic Transmission Fluid yy Parking on a steep slope is not recommended.
More frequent maintenance is required if your vehicle tows You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer at-
trailer frequently. tached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, such as the trailer/caravan hitch
becoming disengaged, people can be injured and both the
Towing Tips vehicle and trailer can be damaged.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently com- yy If someone removing the blocks stands directly behind
pared with normal driving condition. the trailer, he could be injured. If your brakes or the hitch
yy For safety, observe the following precautions: slipped, the trailer could roll backward. Make sure anyone
removing blocks from your wheels stands to one side.
yy Practice turning, stopping, and reversing before you begin
towing in traffic. yy Take note of trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not tow in traffic until you are confident that you can
handle the vehicle and trailer safely.
yy Before driving, make sure that the lighting system of the
trailer works properly.
yy Do not drive faster than 90 km/h.
yy Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and
avoid sudden maneuvers.
yy Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
yy Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
yy Always have someone guide you when reversing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving on hill 3. When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake,
a long or sleep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might
and then shift to PARK (P) for automatic transmission, or
have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and
First or Reverse gear for a manual transmission.
no longer work well.
5. Release the regular brakes.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to a
level which minimizes the possibility of engine and transmis-
sion overheating. When You Are Ready to Leave Af-
Note ter Parking on a Hill
yy When towing a trailer on steep hill (over 12%), pay particular at- 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while
tention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the you:
engine does not overheat. If the gauge reaches to the “H” mark,
stop your vehicle at a safe place and allow the engine to idle until
• Start your engine
it cools down. When the engine has cooled sufficiently, you may • Shift into a gear and
proceed. • Release the parking brake.
yy To avoid the engine and transaxle overheating, you must check the
driving speed depending on trailer weight and uphill grade. 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Parking on Hills 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached,
on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. Maintenance When Towing Trailer
People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re towing a
can be damaged. trailer. See the maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do that are especially important in trailer operation are engine
it: oil, brake pads & discs, automatic transmission fluid. Each of
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) these is covered in this manual and the index will help you find
for automatic transmission yet, or into a gear for a manual them quickly. If you want to tow a trailer, it’s a good idea to re-
transmission. view these sections before you start your trip.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ACCIDENT OR FIRE
If your vehicle catches on fire, don’t panic.

Evacuate any occupants and use the extinguisher.
Accident Warning
Turn on the emergency hazard warning switch. If possible, yy In an accident, fuel can be released from the vehicle. Therefore,
move your vehicle to a safe place to avoid any secondary acci- stop the engine and avoid any sparks or flames.
dents. If anyone is injured, call an ambulance and contact the yy If you have even a minor burn, see your doctor.
nearest police station.
Fire
Stop immediately in a safe place. Turn off the engine. Use fire
extinguishers to put out the fire. If it is impossible to extinguish
the fire, contact the nearest fire or police station.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Emission reduction device
Catalyst Diesel Particulate Filter (CDPF) - EU5
The CDPF is a compound word for Diesel Oxidation Catalyst
(DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which are exhaust
gas after-treatment devices.
DOC
DOC DPF
DPF LNT (Lean & NOx Trap) DPF (Diesel Particulate
Filter) - EU6
CDPF
CDPF The LNT (Lean & NOx Trap) DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) is a
system to eliminate the nitrogen oxide from exhaust emissions.
Use the specified fuel to avoid exhaust smell due to the poor
quality fuel and to maintain the normal performance of the LNT
DPF.
Regeneration Process
DPF “Regeneration” is the process of combusting particulates when
LNT a certain amount of particulates is collected in the filter. In
this process, the temperature of exhaust gas rises to approx.
600°C by fuel control and particulates are effectively inciner-
LNT & DPF ated.
When the Engine CHECK Indicator Flashes

This vehicle is equipped with the Diesel Oxidation Catalyst Regeneration may not be performed due to
(DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) for emission reduc- several operating conditions. And in this case,
tion devices. the engine CHECK indicator flashes. This
The DOC converts HC and CO2 in the fuel to H2O and re- flashing function is to inform the driver to take
moves 80% of the Soluble Organic Fraction (SOF) among par- action for the proper regeneration of the filter.
ticulate materials, thereby reducing 25% or more of particulate If the engine CHECK indicator flashes, drive the vehicle at
materials. over 80 km/h for 20 minutes to regenerate the DPF. When the
The DPF collects particulate materials to the filter and re- amount of particulates is lowered down to a certain limit, the
moves them by combustion. This device removes 95% or more engine CHECK indicator goes off.
of particulate materials.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Warning
yy The vehicle equipped with DPF system may generate the white yy The engine CHECK indicator blinking means an excessive amount
smoke when using the fuel with high sulfur content (over 100 of particulates accumulated in the DPF. If this happens, you must
ppm). This is caused by the sulfur attached and accumulated in drive the vehicle at the speed of 80 km/h or higher for 15~20
DPF. However, this is very natural situation, not caused by your minutes. If you keep driving the vehicle at the speed of less than
vehicle. 80 km/h without following this instruction, it may cause damage
yy How to fix the problem to the exhaust system related to the DPF.
Replace current fuel with high grade fuel as soon as possible. yy The regeneration process of the DPF produces so much heat, so
However, even after replacing the fuel, the white smoke may be never drive or stop the vehicle near flammable materials to avoid
seen due to residual sulfur in DPF system. For safety driving, have causing fire. Also, be sure to stay away from the exhaust pipe and
the system checked at Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. the DPF to avoid getting burned.
yy The presence of an excessive amount of particulates in the DPF
may reduce the engine power.
yy An excessive amount of accumulated particulates can damage
the DPF. Therefore, make sure to drive the vehicle at 80 km/h or
more for 20 minutes at every 500 km.
yy When the engine CHECK indicator comes on, it means that a sen-
sor related to the engine control or an electric device is malfunc-
tioning. In this case, have your vehicle checked by a Ssangyong

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
D
aily check list.................................................12-2 D
o-it-yourself operation.................................12-36
3
L
ocations in engine compartment...................12-3 S
cheduled maintenance services (EU) -
E
ngine oil.........................................................12-7 diesel engine (D22DTR).................................12-37
4
E
ngine coolant..............................................12-10 S
cheduled maintenance services (GEN) -
A
ir cleaner.....................................................12-12 diesel engine (D22DTR).................................12-40
5
P
ower steering fluid.......................................12-14 S
cheduled maintenance services (EU) -
F
uel filter and priming pump.........................12-15 diesel engine (D20DTR).................................12-43
6
F
uel filter and priming pump S
(without additional water separator)..............12-16 diesel engine (D20DTR).................................12-46
7
F
uel filter and water separator* S
(with additional water separator)...................12-17 diesel engine (D27DT/D27DTP)......................12-49
8
F
uel filter........................................................12-20 S
cheduled maintenance services
(gasoline engine)...........................................12-52
D
rive belt (for gasoline) / brake pedal & 9
clutch pedal...................................................12-21
P
arking brake / catalytic converter................12-22 10
B
rake and clutch fluid (with M/T)...................12-23
T
ransfercase fluid..........................................12-24
12 11
W
asher fluid..................................................12-25
B
attery...........................................................12-26 12
S
park plugs...................................................12-28
F
use and relay box........................................12-29 Service and 13
T
ire................................................................12-31
W
iper blade replacement..............................12-35 Maintenance 14
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAILY CHECK LIST
1 Exterior Interior
8 The following checks are recommended before driving to 111 Check for the steering wheel’s free play and looseness.
maintain safe and dependable vehicle operation. 222 Check the parking brake lever.
333 Check the operation of the horn, windshield wipers and turn
9 1. Check the tires for inflation pressure and damage.
signals.
2. Check the wheel bolts for looseness. 444 Check the operation of the instrument cluster and indicator
10 3. Check the operation of the lights. warning lights.
555 Check the level of fuel in the fuel tank.
4. Check for any oil, water, fuel and fluid leaks. 666 Check the position of the rearview mirrors.
11 777 Check the operation of the door and window locking mecha-
nism.
888 Check the brake’s and clutch pedal’s free play, height and func-
12 tion.
999 Check the seat belts.
13
Caution
14 If in doubt about driving and operating conditions, have your vehicle checked
at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCATIONS IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Coolant
Front washer
surge tank
fluid reservoir
Fuel filter
Brake and clutch

Power steering
fluid reservoir
fluid reservoir
Engine oil fuse box
dipstick
Air cleaner Battery
Caution
Do not work on the engine compartment while the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, muffler or catalytic converter is hot. Always turn the engine
off and allow it to cool before starting the maintenance.
Always keep your hands and tools away from the moving parts when the engine is running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Relay and
Brake and clutch fuse box
fluid reservoir
Front washer
fluid reservoir
Power steering
Engine oil cap fluid reservoir Fuel filter
Coolant surge
tank
Engine oil
dipstick
Air cleaner Battery

GETtheMANUALS.org
D27DT(P) diesel ENGINE
Caution
Do not work on the engine compartment while the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, muffler or catalytic
converter is hot. Always turn the engine off and allow it to cool before starting the maintenance.
Always keep your hands and tools away from the moving parts when the engine is running. Front washer
fluid reservoir
Coolant surge tank
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir Relay and
(for manual transmission) fuse box
Engine oil dipstick

Air cleaner
Battery
Without Additional With Additional

Water Separator Water Separator
3
Power steering
1 3 fluid reservoir
2
1
1. Priming pump 2. Water separator 3. Fuel filter

GETtheMANUALS.org
G32D Gasoline ENGINE
Coolant surge tank

Front washer
fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick
Relay and
fuse box
Air cleaner
Battery
Power steering
fluid reservoir

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL
Diesel Engine Level Check
Park the vehicle on a level ground and apply the parking brake. Stop
the engine and wait more than 5 minutes.
Max 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. Reinsert it all the way.
Min 2. Pull out it again and check the oil level.
Engine oil cap 3. The oil level should be between the maximum (Max) mark and
minimum (Min) marks on the oil dipstick. Oil should be replenished
before the level goes below the minimum mark.
Replenishment
Engine oil 1. If the level gets to the lower point, open the filler cap on top of the
dipstick cylinder block and add the genuine oil without exceeding the level
of the upper mark.
2. Recheck the oil level after 5 minutes.
Specification D22DTR/D20DTR Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
Gasoline Engine (Total Quartz INEO ECS 5W30, SK ZIC SY 5W30 or
Approved by MB 229.51 5W30)
D27DT
(Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 10W40 (W/O CDPF))
D27DTP
(Approved by MB Sheet 229.31 5W40 (W/ CDPF))
G32D (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 10W40, MB 229.51
5W30, SN/GF-5 5W20)
Capacity D22DTR/D20DTR ≒ 6.0ℓ
Engine oil Engine oil D27DT/D27DTP ≒ 8.5ℓ

cap dipstick G32D ≒ 9.0ℓ
Warning
Use only Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filters. Use of non-recommended
products could cause damage to the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Function of Engine Oil yy Driving the rough road, off-road, dirt-laden road, and muddy
roads
Engine oil’s major function is to lubricate and cool the parts yy Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are
inside of the engine, which enables engine to work properly. being used
Consumption of Engine Oil yy Repeated driving in short-distance
The consumption of engine oil is depending on the viscosity yy Driving with the excessive idling
and quality of the oil, and the driving habit. More oil may be re-
yy High load driving such as trailing
quired under the following conditions;
- When the Vehicle is New
A new engine usually consumes more oil because its pistons, Change Interval
piston ring and cylinder walls are not yet adjusted with an opti- yy The engine oil filter element should be changed at the same
mal condition. time with the engine oil.
Oil Consumption : Max. 0.5 Liter per 1,000 km yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filter.
Accordingly, it is necessary for the driver to check frequently
the oil level and to replenish oil if needed. SYMC recommends Engine Oil
that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle Refer to Section “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES”.
or you drive the long distance until the first 5,000 km.
- When driving at High Engine Speeds
Engine Oil Filter
As long as you keep the followings with sufficient care in your
first running the vehicle, it will guarantee you to get excellent Item Service interval
and comfortable performance for a long with your vehicle.
Engine oil filter Same interval with the engine oil
yy Remember to check the engine oil level and shorten the cy-
cle to refuel the engine oil under severe driving conditions.
yy Avoid subjecting to engine to heavy loads by driving at full
throttle, especially be careful when the outside temperature
remains below freezing for the first 1,000 km.
yy Do not use the trailing in the first 1,000 km driving
* What’s Severe Driving Condition?
yy Driving at the high engine speed or at high-speed
yy Driving for consecutive two hours at high speed

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warnings and Cautions When Checking SAE viscosity classes
The SAE classes (viscosity) should be selected in accordance with
Warning
the average seasonal air temperature.
yy Clean the dipstick with a clean cloth so that any foreign materi-
als cannot get into the engine. Applying the SAE classes exactly on the basis of the outside air tem-
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil. peratures would necessitate frequently changing the engine oil. The
yy The oil should not go above the upper mark on the dipstick. temperature limits for the SAE classes should therefore be regarded
yy Operating with insufficient or too much amount of oil can dam- as reference temperatures and the actual air temperature may be
age the engine. higher or lower for a short period of time.
Caution Engine
Regularly check the engine oil level and add the Ssangyong The viscosity should be selected according to outside tempera-
genuine engine oil if necessary. ture. Do not switch to a different viscosity in the event of brief
temperature fluctuations.
* How to check engine oil specification

Example:
0W, 5W, 10W, 15W, 20W, 25W 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
Winter oil viscosity Summer oil viscosity

(W: Winter)
yy The numerical, for example SAE 10W, relates to vis-
cosity at particular temperature and the alphabet “W”
indicates the oil’s suitability for colder temperature.
yy For summer oil viscosity, higher numbers mean
higher viscosities.
Note
In severely cold or hot region, using the engine oil with SAE
(viscosity) classification suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures is strongly recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE COOLANT
Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine
Coolant surge tank
Coolant surge tank
Level Check Service Interval

Park the vehicle on level ground and apply the parking brake. Replacement: Every 5 years or every 200,000 km
Stop the engine and wait until it cools.
Diesel Engine Ssangyong genuine
1. The coolant level should be between the MAX and MIN 8.5ℓ
(D22DTR/D20DTR) coolant Anti-Freeze
mark on the coolant surge tank.
Diesel Engine SYC-1025,
2. Check the coolant level. If the level is below the “MIN” mark, 11.0 ~ 11.5ℓ
(D27DT, D27DTP) Anti-Freeze:Water =
immediately add coolant. 50:50
Gasoline Engine (G32D) 11.5 ~ 12.0ℓ ORGANIC ACID TYPE,
Warning COLOR:BLUE
yy Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the
engine and the radiator are hot. The cooling system Check: Everyday, before driving off
may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing
serious injuries. Replenishment: Replenish as necessary
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine coolant and anti-freeze.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Replenishment Warning
Use only the 50/50 mixture of soft water and antifreeze as When the coolant level is too low, the engine can overheat. If the
specified. coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster goes up abnor-
1. Open the coolant surge tank cap slowly when the engine is mally, immediately check the coolant level. Use only the Ssangyong
genuine coolant and anti-freeze. If different types of coolants or
cold. At this time, you can hear a “hissing” sound.
unapproved coolants are used to refill, chemical reactions can be
2. When there is no more “hissing” sound, remove the cap caused and block the flow of the coolant. This may cause the engine
from the surge tank. to overheat or burning inside the engine.
3. Add the 50:50 mixture of water and antifreeze to the coolant
reservoir tank. Warning
4. If no unusual things happen, tighten the coolant reservoir yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pressure,
cap. which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant surge
tank cap when the engine and radiator are hot.
Caution yy Use only the Ssangyoug genuine coolant and anti-freeze.
Avoid any direct contact of the coolant to the painted body of the
vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR CLEANER
Diesel Engine Cleaning
Refer to Section “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES”.
Blow the compressed air through the element in the opposite direction to normal
air flow to clean the element.
Warning
yy Do not drive your vehicle with an improperly installed air cleaner element or without it.
It may damage the engine or may cause a fire.
Air cleaner yy Do not let any object enter the housing when cleaning the air cleaner. It may damage
the engine or may cause an engine to stall.
Caution
Gasoline Engine yy If you blow the compressed air to normal air flow, the engine will be damaged due to
foreign materials entering.
yy Be careful with the direction of the compressed air on the air cleaner.
Caution
If vehicle is operated under severe condition
yy Pollutant area or off-road driving
Air cleaner yy Driving in dusty condition or sandy condition
frequently inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DI Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, replace more often than at the Blow the compressed air through the
usual recommended intervals. If it is dirty, shake the element to remove dust. Clean element in the opposite direction to
the inside of the air cleaner housing and cover with a damp cloth. normal air flow to clean the element as
Clean the air cleaner element by blowing compressed air through it in the opposite di- shown above.
rection to normal air flow.
Warning
yy Engine can be damaged.
yy Do not operate the vehicle without air cleaner element.
Change
1. Unscrew the cover bolts and remove the cover.
2. Replace the air cleaner element with a new one. Make
sure that the element is correctly installed in the air cleaner
housing.
3. Close the cover and tighten the bolts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER STEERING FLUID
Diesel Engine
Power steering
fluid reservoir
Check the fluid level on a level ground with the engine turned
off. The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks
on the reservoir cap gauge. If it drops to or below the MIN mark,
refill the reservoir with the specified fluid. Only use the specified
fluid. The difference between the MIN and MAX marks shows
Gasoline Engine fluctuations of the steering fluid between when it is hot and when
it is cold.
Specification S-PSF3
Power steering Approx. 1.1

fluid reservoir Capacity (L) See NOTE 1: TOTAL FLUIDE DA
(Extreme cold condition only)
NOTE 1: Super multigrade fluid with an exceptionally high viscosity in-

dex and a very low pour point, allowing functionality of hydraulic systems
at extremely low temperatures. Excellent lubricating properties even at
very low and very high temperatures.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER AND PRIMING PUMP
D22DTR, D20DTR DIESEL ENGINE
111 When completely consumed the fuel
Caution
222 After draining the water from the fuel filter
333 After replacing the fuel filter pumping operation of priming pump until some fuel gets out from
If this happens, pump fuel until the priming pump is fully filled. the priming pump hole.
Then, start the engine. yy Otherwise, air may get into the fuel line. It may cause serious
damage to the fuel system.
How to Use the Priming Pump
Open Close
111 Turn the pump knob counterclockwise 222 Press and release the priming pump 333 Press down the pump knob and turn it
(Open direction). until the fuel gets out from the priming clockwise (Close direction).
pump hole. 444 Close the engine hood and start the
Caution engine.
The pump knob is highly tightened. Use the Caution
pliers when opening and closing it.
Do not let the fuel from the fuel filter come
in contact with your eyes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER AND PRIMING PUMP (Without Additional Water Separator)
D27DT, D27DTP DIESEL ENGINE
yy Drain water from the fuel filter whenever replacing the engine
Plug opening direction
oil.
yy After changing the fuel filter, perform the pumping operation Plug closing direction
of the priming pump until it becomes rigid. Fuel filter
Water drain plug
Caution
Connector
yy Change the fuel filter according to the specified service interval.
yy Drain water from the fuel filter whenever changing the engine oil. Priming pump
pumping operation of priming the pump until it becomes rigid.
Fuel filter
Water Separating Function Priming Pump Operating Conditions

If water in fuel gets into the engine and fuel system, it may 1. when completely consumed the fuel
cause serious damage to the fuel system. The fuel filter pro- 2. after draining the water from the fuel filter
3. after replacing the fuel filter
When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel fil-
ter exceeds a certain level, the warning light comes on and the Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of
buzzer sounds. If it occurs, immediately drain water from the the priming pump until it becomes rigid to fill up the fuel pump
fuel filter. For draining procedures, refer to “How to drain the with fuel.
water from fuel filter” section in this manual.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER AND water separator* (With Additional Water Separator)
D27DT, D27DTP diesel ENGINE
Fuel filter
2. After draining water from the fuel filter.
Priming Water
3. After replacing the fuel filter pump separator
Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of
the priming pump until it becomes rigid so that the fuel pump
fills up with fuel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel filter
1. Fuel filter Water Separating Function
2. Priming pump
If the water in fuel gets into the engine and the fuel system, it
4. Drain plug
may cause serious damage in the fuel system. The fuel filter
A. Opening direction of drain plug
B. Closing direction of drain plug
offers the water separating function to block the inflow of wa-
ter.
Caution
yy Replace the fuel filter according to the specified maintenance
schedule.
yy Drain the water from the fuel filter whenever replacing the engine
oil.
yy After replacing the fuel filter or draining the water, press the priming
pump until it becomes rigid.
If particles in fuel get into the engine and fuel-related devices,

it may cause serious damage in affected components. Make
sure to replace the fuel filter according to the specified mainte-
nance schedule.
Make sure that the foreign materials do not get into the fuel fil-
ter while changing the fuel filter, and clean around it to prevent
particles from flowing into the filter.
Press the priming pump until it becomes rigid.
Service Interval
yy Replace every 25,000 km (Draining water from fuel filter:

GETtheMANUALS.org
water separator
Draining the Water from Water Separator
Drain the water from the water separator whenever replacing
the engine oil.
After draining the water, press the priming pump until it be-
comes rigid. Do not crank the engine before doing this proce-
dure. For the detailed draining procedures, please refer to “How
to drain the water from the fuel filter” in the water separator
warning light section.
3. Water separator
Caution
4. Drain plug
5. Connector yy Replace the water separator according to the specified mainte-
A. Opening direction of drain plug nance schedule.
B. Closing direction of drain plug yy Drain the water from the water separator whenever replacing the
engine oil.
yy After replacing the water separator or draining the water, press the
The water separator is used in the fuel supplying system in or- priming pump until it becomes rigid.
der to reduce the water content in the fuel provided to the FIE
system. It gives additional water volume storage. A water sen-
sor is fitted to the water separator in order to warn the driver
that the water separator has to be drained.
When the water level in the water separator reaches a certain
point, the water separator warning light in the instrument clus-
ter comes on.
yy Service Interval
Change every 150,000 km or 5 year
Location:
Behind the fuel filter (between the fuel filter and the dash pan-
el) in the engine compartment (engine intake side)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel Filter GASOLINE ENGINE
Fuel Filter
If the filter is contaminated, the supplied fuel will be reduced,
main components will be damaged due to entering the con-
taminated materials and the performance of catalytic converter
will be deteriorated.
Replace the fuel filter according to the specified maintenance
schedule.
Service Interval
Every 100,000 km (if using poor quality of
Replacement
fuel, replace every 30,000 km)
Caution
Replace with a Ssangyong genuine part with specified intervals.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVE BELT (for GASOLINE) / BRAKE PEDAL & CLUTCH PEDAL
DRIVE BELT BRAKE PEDAL
Gasoline Engine Checking pedal free play
Turn off the engine and depress the brake pedal several times
to deplete the vacuum in the brake system. Gently depress the
brake pedal by hand and measure the distance it moves until
slight resistance is felt. If the free play is more or less than
specified, have the brakes adjusted by a Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
Brake pedal free play 1 ~ 4 mm
CLUTCH PEDAL
Checking pedal free play
You do not need extra tension adjustment, but check belt for Depress the pedal by hand until clutch resistance is felt; en-
wear or tension by pushing the belt and replace if necessary. sure free play is within specification.
If the free play is more or less than specified, have the clutch
or linkage adjusted by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
Belt replacement: Gasoline Engine thorized Service Operation.
Install a device onto the tension adjuster and rotate clockwise
Clutch pedal free play 5 ~ 10 mm
to release the tension and take off the belt.
Warning
The engine could inadvertently start while checking the belt and
cause moving parts to crush or cut. Remove key from ignition
switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING BRAKE / CATALYTIC CONVERTER
PARKING BRAKE
Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number Damage to the catalytic converter or the vehicle may re-
of notch clicks heard while fully applying it from the released sult if the following points are not observed :
position. Consult a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the ve- vice Operation as Quickly as possible in the event of misfiring,
hicle on a fairly steep grade. If the number of clicks is more irregular engine running following a cold start, a significant
or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by a loss of engine power or other unusual malfunctions which may
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Opera- indicate a fault in the ignition system.
tion. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a low
speed and with low engine revolutions.
Stroke 4 ~ 7 notches at a force of 20 kg
You should therefore avoid :
yy Frequent repeated cold starts.
yy Actuation of the starter for an unnecessarily long time dur-
CATALYTIC CONVERTER ing starting (fuel is injected during the starting procedure).
The catalytic converter is located between exhaust manifold yy Allowing the tank to become empty (an irregular fuel supply
and center muffler. The catalytic converter consists of mono- leads to overheating)
liths with honeycomb shaped structure of ceramic material yy Starting the engine by pushing or towing (unburned fuel
which are elastically mounted in a wire mesh structure. may enter the catalytic converter) : use jump leads.
This precious metal coating on the monoliths accelerate the
reduction and/or oxidation of toxic components. Have all maintenance work carried out by a Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. You can then be
On vehicles with a catalytic converter for unleaded fuel, lead
certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrical, injection
fuel will damage the catalytic converter and parts of the elec-
and ignition system will be operating correctly, that your ve-
tronic system, thereby rendering them inoperative.
hicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that the catalytic
converter system will have a long life.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID (WITH M/T)
Diesel Engine Specification and Replacement
Specification DOT 4
Service interval Every 2 years
Level Check and Replenishment

yy The fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lev-
els on the reservoir.
yy Check the level on a level surface. If it drops to or below the
MIN mark, refill the tank with the specified fluid. Only use
the specified fluid.
Caution
yy Be careful not to let any foreign materials enter the tank when
adding the fluid.
Gasoline Engine yy Do not add the fluid above the “MAX” level.
yy Do not allow the fluid to make contact with the body paintwork.
yy After adding the fluid, tighten the cap securely.
yy If frequent refills are required, have the system checked by a
Warning
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine brake fluid.
yy Do not allow the fluid to make contact with skin or eyes. If contact
happens, rinse affected areas immediately with plenty of water. If
irritation persists, consult a doctor.
yy The fluid gradually decreases according to brake pad wear. A
sudden drop of the fluid level may indicate a leak in the system.
In this case, have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
transfercase fluid
transfercase fluid
Service Interval, Specification and Capacity
Specification Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
Part time
Direct Injection 1.4 L
Capacity Diesel Engine, Full time (TOD)
Gasoline Engine
AWD 1.1 L

GETtheMANUALS.org
WASHER FLUID
Top Up Washer Fluid

Diesel Engine Frequently check the washer fluid level and add the specified
product as needed.
In winter, use only the specified washer liquid for winter sea-
son.
Washer Reservoir
Warning
yy The washer fluid includes flammable materials to prevent freezing.
It could cause a fire when directly contacted with flames. When
checking the washer fluid, avoid the flames near the washer fluid
tank.
yy If engine oil or antifreeze is used as the washer fluid, it will de-
crease your visibility through the windshield and may cause an
accident.
Caution
yy If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will freeze during the winter
Gasoline Engine and damage the washer fluid reservoir and motor. Use only the
specified washer fluid.
yy If you operate the washer switch without washer fluid, the motor
could be damaged due to overloads. Therefore, if there is no
Washer Reservoir washer fluid, do not operate the washer motor.
yy Operating the wipers on a dry surface on the windshield or rear
window without any washer fluid may cause damage to the glass.
Operate the wipers after sufficiently spraying the washer fluid.
yy Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the engine or body paint of your
vehicle during replenishment. If washer fluid spills onto your hand
or other body part, wash it away under a clean water flow.
yy There is no independent washer reservoir for the tailgate window.
The front washer reservoir is also for the tailgate window.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY
Diesel Engine When the battery charge warning light ( ) on the instru-
ment cluster comes on, the battery is not normally charging.
If the warning light comes on while driving, turn off all unnec-
essary electrical devices and have the system checked by a
Battery Maintenance
yy Make sure the terminal connections are securely tightened.
yy If the terminals are corroded, clean them with a wire brush
or sand paper.
yy The battery terminal should be disconnected only when the
ignition key is removed from the key cylinder. Disconnecting
the terminal with the key in the “ON” or “ACC” position may
cause a sudden change in voltage and damage various
electrical systems.
Gasoline Engine
yy Check the battery for any cracks, damages or leaks. Re-
place it if necessary. To remove any battery fluid on the bat-
tery surface, wear rubber gloves and wipe the fluid out with
a wet-soapy cloth.
Specification
Specification DC 12V
Capacity 90AH

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Warning
yy The battery has acid that can burn you. And its gas can explode. yy Always use the battery with correct voltage for the vehicle. Other-
You can get serious injuries if you are not careful. Keep naked wise, there is a risk of fire.
flames, sparks and smoking items away from the battery. yy Observe the indications on the battery.
yy Loosely connected batter terminals can set up sparks. These
sparks can cause a fire with flammable gas. Therefore, tightly The battery cell always contains highly flammable
connect the terminals. hydrogen gas which may explode if ignited. Be sure to
keep it away from a cigarette, a spark or other flames.
yy At night, if you need to check the engine room, do not use a lighter,
but only use a battery-powered flashlight. Wear a protective goggle when charging the battery or
yy Because the battery electrolyte is very strong acid, avoid any direct performing any work.
contact of the battery electrolyte on your skin or vehicle’s body. If In addition, ensure adequate ventilation of the enclosed
the acid contacts your skin, thoroughly wash your skin with fresh space.
water and see your doctor. Do the same on your vehicle.
The battery electrolyte solution contains a highly cor-
yy Wear eye protection when working with a battery. If working in a rosive sulfuric acid. Be careful not to contact it with
closed area, keep good ventilation. skin, eyes, clothes or paint. In particular, keep out of
the children’s reach.
Caution When in contact with the skin, wash off the contact area;
yy If you disconnect the battery terminal when the engine is running, In case of eye contact, flush with running water for at
electrical systems could be damaged. least 15 minutes, and seek medical help immediately.
yy To remove the battery cable, disconnect the negative cable first
Always read the safety instructions in the User Manual
and be careful on the battery terminal polarity when you con-
before working on the battery.
nect the cables. The negative and the positive should not be
confused. The hydrogen gas in the battery is highly flammable and
yy The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for positive and may explode if ignited.
negative cables, must not be interchanged. Never short-circuit
the battery.
yy When the ambient temperature is too low, the battery capacity will
drop and can be frozen.
yy Keep the battery electrolyte at its specified level. If the electrolyte
level is higher than the MAX level, it can overflow during battery
charging and if the electrolyte is overcharged, the battery can
explode.
yy Only use a battery with the approved voltage and capacity. Oth-
erwise, an incompatible battery can catch fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Spark Plugs GASOLINE ENGINE
Spark Plugs
Service Interval
Replacement (G32D) Change every 30,000 km
NGK BKUR5ETZ-10
Specification (G32D)
Gap 1 ± 0.1 mm
Caution
yy When replacing the spark plugs, disconnect the negative terminal
of the battery and turn off all the switches.
yy It is recommended that the engine be cool or cold when changing
the spark plugs (you could burn yourself).
yy Do not use non-recommended spark plugs.
Spark plugs should be inspected periodically for carbon de- yy Do not allow contaminants to enter spark plug hole.
posits. When carbon accumulates on a spark plug, a strong
spark may not be produced.
Warning
If necessary, clean the electrodes with a fine wire brush and
Spark plugs may be very hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.
carefully scrape the carbon off the insulator with a small file.
The spark plugs should then be blown clean with compressed
air and the upper insulator wiped clean. And adjust the spark
plug gap.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
If any of the electrical system components do not operate, check its corresponding fuse.
If the fuse is blown, replace it with the same capacity.
Interior fuse box
Relay box
Interior fuse box is located at the left side of the instrument

panel and relay box is located on the floor under left instru-
ment panel. Engine Room Relay and Fuse Box, PTC Fuse Box
Caution
yy When an electrical system does not operate, check its fuse first.
Engine Compartment
If a fuse is blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same
Fuse and Relay Box
capacity.
yy If you remove an electric system’s fuse while the system is operat-
ing, the electrical equipment could be damaged. Always remove
the ignition key from the ignition switch and turn off all electric
devices.
PTC
yy Always replace a specified fuse with the same rating. fuse box
yy If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, have the
electrical system checked and repaired by a Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorised Service Center.
Engine room fuse box is located at the right side in engine
compartment and PTC fuse box is installed on the battery.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO CHECK AND REPLACE FUSE
Higher amperage Specified amperage
Normal
Open
1. Turn off all electrical systems and remove the ignition key
Warning
from the key cylinder.
yy The use of anything other than the specified fuse could cause
2. Open the fuse and relay box cover. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire.
3. Locate the defective fuse. yy The use of different types or different rating fuses could cause
4. Pull out the relevant fuse by using the fuse puller. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire. Always
replace a fuse with the one with the same rating.
5. Visually check whether it is blown or not.
6. If normal, insert it to its original position.
7. If blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same ca- Note
pacity. The underhood fuse and relay box has some spare fuses. Refill the
fuses immediately as you use them. The fuse rating is indicated on
the upper surface of the fuse.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE
TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Under Proper Over

inflation inflation inflation
Tire Inflation Pressure Caution

Tire Inflation yy Maintaining the specified tire pressure is essential for comfortable
Type Tire Wheel riding, driving safety, and long tire life. Incorrect inflation pressures
Pressure
will increase tire wear and will impair safety, vehicle handling,
235/75R 16 7.0J x 16 comfortable driving and fuel economy. Always make sure that the
tire inflation pressure is correct.
Driving tire 32 psi 255/70R 16 7.0J x 16 yy Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
255/60R 18 7.5J x 18 wheel, prior to any long journey (before the tire is heated up).
yy Even the temporarily installed spare tire should be inflated prop-
Emergency tire 60 psi (4.13 bar) 175/90R 16 5.5J x 16 erly.
Note
The tires should be checked before they are heated up using an tire
pressure gauge.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE WEAR CHECK TIRE ROTATION
Regular tire
Front Rear
Directional tire
Tire tread
Front Rear
Wear limit
The tires on your vehicle have built-in tread wear indicators To avoid uneven wear of tires and to prolong tire life, inspect
that appear between the tread grooves. The tire should be and rotate your tires every 5,000 km.
replaced when the wear indicators appear in two or more adja-
cent grooves. Warning
yy Be sure to replace and rotate the tires at a Ssangyong Authorized
Warning Service Center or professional tire shops.
yy Driving on worn or damaged tires is very dangerous and may yy Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be sure
cause an accident. Also, a damaged tire could burst. to use the same size and type tires of the same manufacturer on
yy Check tires regularly for any damage (foreign objects, punctures, all wheels.
cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls) and replace if necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SPARE TIRE TIRE CHAINS
The temporary spare tire is only for an emergency. Do not use Install tire chains on rear wheels for a 2-Wheel Drive vehicle.
it for normal driving. The spare tire should be replaced with a And install tire chains on all wheels for a 4-Wheel Drive vehi-
regular tire as soon as possible. cle. If installing chains on only two wheels is unavoidable, tire
Check the tire conditions and pressure as needed and always chains should be installed on rear wheels.
keep it available. For replacing procedures, refer to “In Case of If at all possible, install snow tires instead of tire chains for
Emergency” section in this manual. vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, since the aluminum
wheels can be damaged by chains. If installing tire chains is
Caution the only alternative, use wire-type tire chain with a thickness of
yy After replacing the tire, be sure to adjust the pressure to the speci-
less than 15 mm.
fied pressure of the tire. Otherwise, the suspension system and Drive the vehicle with tire chains installed at a speed of 30 km/
driving system may be damaged. h or less or at the specified speed recommended by the chain
yy Keep the vehicle speed below 60 km/h if the spare tire is fitted. manufacturer. If a sound of chains being slammed against
the vehicle body, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately.
Check the installation of the chains carefully and tighten the
WINTER TIRE chains, if needed. Take tire chains off on dry pavement to
avoid damaging the chains.
Use snow tires when driving on snowy or icy roads.
Do not drive the vehicle with tire chains installed on dry pave-
If winter tires are used, they must be installed to all 4 wheels.
ment.
Warning Warning
yy Drive very slowly with extra caution on snowy or icy roads. yy Check the installation of tire chains and inspect the vehicle body for
yy The snow tire with arrow direction markings on its side wall should damage after driving about 0.5 to 1 km with the chains installed. If
be installed according to the arrow direction. tire chains have been loosened, retighten the chains.
yy The snow tires cannot guarantee your safety on icy and slippery yy Improper installation or use of incorrect tire chains can damage the
road. Drive with extra caution, avoiding sudden acceleration, brak- vehicle or seriously endanger the operating reliability of the vehicle
ing or movements of the steering wheel. and road safety. Use tire chains that meet the specifications and
yy When the snow tires are not needed anymore, replace them install them in a professional manner.
with ordinary tires. Keep the removed snow tires in a cool and
shady place. Be careful not to contact them with any oil, grease,
or fuel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Cautions When Checking
yy Installing tire chains on front wheels is not required. If you
need to install them on the front wheels, do not drive your
the Wheel and Tire
vehicle at a high speed and/or change the direction of
travel suddenly to prevent the surrounding components yy Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be
from being damaged. sure to use the same size and type of tires of the same manu-
yy Do not use 4-Wheel Drive mode (4H, 4L) when tire facturer on all wheels. If you do not use the same tires on the
chains are installed only on the rear wheels of a 4-Wheel vehicle equipped with the TOD (4 wheel drive), it may cause a
Drive vehicle equipped with part-time transfer case. The serious damage to the vehicle’s drive system.
driveline of the system can be seriously damaged. Use yy Check the inflation pressure, cracks and tearing of tires before
4-Wheel Drive mode (4H, 4L) only when tire chains are
driving.
installed on both the front and rear wheels or tire chains
are not used. yy Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to be-
come loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to check and tighten the wheel nuts as specified before
any long journey.
yy Do not use non-genuine wheel and tire. Non-genuine wheel
and tire may have inferior performance and function and dan-
gerous for safe driving. Also, any defects due to using them
cannot be covered by warranty.
yy Be sure to check the tires and wheels before driving. If a wheel
is damaged, the tire inflation pressure can be decreased and
the tire can be damaged.
yy If a tire has been impacted by a stone or any other objects
during driving, have it checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or
yy The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may cause
abnormal operation of the steering wheel, increased fuel con-
sumption, damage to the powertrain or the braking system, vi-
bration, or uneven tire wear. Always use the specified tires from
the same manufacturer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT
Front Wiper Rear Wiper Specification
Front wiper
Rear wiper
Left Right
500 mm 500 mm 350 mm
Caution
yy Do not open the hood when the wiper
arm is lifted up. The wiper and hood may
111 Remove the ignition key and lift the 111 Remove the ignition key and lift the be damaged.
wiper arm up from the windshield. wiper arm up from the rear glass. yy Do not operate the wiper when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
yy Be certain not to apply any fluid polish
containing oil to the windshield of your
vehicle since this will result in streaks
which impair vision. Contamination of
either the window or the wiper blades
with foreign materials can reduce the
effectiveness of the windshield wipers.
Never clean up the windshield with a
waxed or oil-saturated cloth.
Warning
222 Pry up the blade lock ( ). 222 Slide the blade out from the wiper yy Malfunctioning wipers on a raining or
333 Slide the blade out from the wiper arm. snowing day may be detrimental to your
arm. 333 Install a new blade. driving safety. Never drive your vehicle
with malfunctioning wipers on a raining
444 Install a new blade. 444 Put the wiper arm down. or snowing day.
555 Put the wiper arm down. yy Do not touch the running wipers. It may
cause a personal injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to your-
self or damage to the vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION
Warning Caution
yy Be careful not to touch any hot components such as the engine, yy Check the level of the engine oil and every fluid including coolant
radiator, exhaust manifold, catalytic converter, or muffler when daily. If you drive while the fluid levels are low, your vehicle can be
the engine is just stopped. They may burn you badly. Let the damaged and such damages will not be covered by warranty.
engine cool down before any service. yy Use only the genuine Ssangyong oils and fluids.
yy When working with the battery or fuel related components, al- yy Do not allow oils and coolant to make contact with skin or painted
ways stop the engine and do not smoke. Also, remove all flames surfaces during inspection or refill of them. They can also dam-
or sparks near the vehicle. age paint finish. If skin contact happens, rinse affected areas
yy Do not connect and disconnect the battery terminals when the immediately with plenty of water and then consult a doctor.
ignition key is in the “ON” position. yy Do not overfill the oil or coolant, otherwise the engine and trans-
yy The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for the positive mission may be damaged. Maintain the specified level.
and negative cables, must not be interchanged. yy The performance of oils and coolant may be deteriorated when
yy The battery cables and wires transfer high voltage and current. they are exposed to dust and moisture. Be careful not to allow
Avoid any short circuit. contact with dust while refilling.
yy Make sure that the ignition key is “OFF” when performing any yy In spite of very limited driving of your vehicle, oils and other
work in an enclosed space such as a garage. fluids can disappear over the time. Therefore, check their levels
yy Keep the used oil and coolant out of reach of children. (For a frequently.
proper disposal of them, contact a professional service.) yy Improperly disposed engine oil and/or other fluids can pollute
yy When checking your vehicle, you must turn off the engine first. the environment. Dispose used fluids in accordance with local
Then, put the shift lever into the “P” (automatic transmission) or environmental regulations.
“Neutral” (manual transmission) position and apply the parking
brake.
yy The electrical cooling fan can start to operate unexpectedly
even when the engine is stopped. Disconnect the negative bat-
tery cable before you check the radiator, cooling fan or nearby
parts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

* Engine oil & filter *1 R R R R R R R R
(1)* (3)* (4)* Shorten the service interval under severe conditions
I R* I R* I R* I R*
* Fuel filter (1)*
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner (2)*
interval. tion.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
I I R I I R I I
fluid (3)* Rear
IRS I I R I I R I I
I I I I I I I I

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

R R R R R R R R

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

*1 R R R R R R R R
(1)* (3)* (4)* Initial change: 7,500 km, and replenish if necessary.
I I R* I I R* I I
* Fuel filter (1)*
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner (2)*

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
I I I R I I I R
fluid (3)* Rear
IRS I I I R I I I R
I I I I I I I I

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

R R R R R R R R


GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

*1 R R R R R R R R
I R* I R* I R* I R*
* Fuel filter (1)*
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner (2)*
interval. tion.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
I I R I I R I I
fluid (3)* Rear
I I I I I I I I

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

R R R R R R R R

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

*1 R R R R R R R R
I I R* I I R* I I
* Fuel filter (1)*
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner (2)*

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
I I I R I I I R
fluid (3)* Rear
I I I I I I I I

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

R R R R R R R R


GETtheMANUALS.org
Scheduled Maintenance Services (GEN) - Diesel Engine (D27DT/D27DTP)
INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

* Engine oil & filter *1 Initial change: 5,000 km, change every 10,000 km or 12 months
(1)* (3)* (4)* (But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
Direct Injection
* Fuel filter Replace every 25,000 km (Draining water from fuel filter: whenever replacing the engine oil)
(Diesel Engine)
Additional water separator (if equipped) Replace every 150,000 km or 5 years (Drain the water whenever replacing the engine oil)
Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 10,000 km, replace every 30,000 km
Air cleaner (2)*
(But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
Injection timing (See NOTE 1) I I I I I I I I
NOTE 1: Adjust as required; - When excessive smoke is visible (black or white) - Driving in a hilly or mountainous terrain, sandy, or dusty area
- Poor performance/economy - High load driving such as trailer towing
Chart Symbols: - Taxi, patrol service or delivery service (extended idling and exces-
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replen- sive driving with low speed)
ish, adjust or replace. (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty condi-
*1 Check the engine oil level and leak every 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or before tion or sandy condition, pollutant area or off-road driving, frequently
starting a long trip. inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
R - Replace or change. (3)* More frequent maintenance is required if under dusty driving condi-
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: Shorten the service interval. tion.
- Frequent stop-and-go traffic, extended idling, short driving distance (4)* Refer to “Recommended fluids, coolant and lubricants”.
below 6 km, driving distance below 16 km when the outside temperature * Water separator: When replace the engine oil, also drain the water from the
remains below freezing fuel filter.

GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Parking brake / Brake pads
Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
(Front & Rear) (4)*
Manual transmission oil (5)* I I I I I R I I
Front
Front & Rear IOP Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
differential fluid (3)* Rigid Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
Rear
Chart Symbols:
(5)* Inspect manual transmission fluid every 10,000 km (Inspect the leak of fluid at any time,occasionally), then change every 60,000 km

GETtheMANUALS.org

INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Chart Symbols:
(8)* After completion of off-road operation, the drive shaft boots should be inspected.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Scheduled Maintenance Services (GASOLINE Engine)
INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Engine oil & engine oil filter (1)* (3)*
R** R R R R R R R
(Initial check: 5,000 km)
Engine coolant (3)* Change every 200,000 km or 5 years. And, inspect replenish if necessary.
Fuel filter (2)* Replace every 100,000 km (if using poor quality of fuel, replace every 30,000 km)
Air cleaner (2)* I I I I I R I I
Ignition timing I I I I I I I I
Spark plugs Change every 30,000 km or 3 years.
Charcoal canister & vapor lines - - I - - I - -
Chart Symbols:
** - In order to secure engine long life and effective break-in, first oil (factory filled) would be recommended to drain within 10,000 km.
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: short distance driving, extensive idling or driving in dusty condition, shorten the service interval.
(2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, pollutant area or off-road driving, driving in dusty condition or sandy condition, frequently inspect the air cleaner, if
necessary, change the air cleaner.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Parking brake / Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
Front & Rear Front
IOP Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
differential
fluid (3)* Rigid Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
Rear
Chart Symbols:
(5)* Inspect manual transmission fluid every 10,000 km (Inspect the leak of fluid at any time, occasionally), then change every 60,000 km

GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERVAL x1,000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY

Drive shaft boots I I I I I I I I
Chart Symbols:

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Bulb specifications and functional check........13-2
3
Hid headlamp*................................................13-3
Location of exterior lamps...............................13-4 4
Interior lamp....................................................13-9 5
13
6
7
Lamp
8
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
BULB SPECIFICATIONS AND FUNCTIONAL CHECK
1 BULB SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONAL CHECK
Description Amount Specification 1. Check whether the lamp comes on or off by turning its
2 switch.
High beam -
55W + 15W
EU (High + DRL) 2. Check the corresponding fuse when the lamp doesn’t come
3 2
High beam - on.
Headlamp 55W
GEN (High) 3. If the fuse is blown, replace it with a new one.
4 Low beam (HID) 2 55W (25W) For replacing procedures, refer to the “In Case of Emergen-
Position lamp 2 LED cy” section in this manual.
5 Front fog A 2 35W 4. If the fuse is not blown, check the bulb and replace it with a
Front combi-
light B 2 LED new one if needed.
nation lamp
6 Turn signal lamp 2 21W
5. If the bulb is not defective, have the system checked by a
Exterior Outside lamp (auxiliary turn sig- Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
2 LED
lamp nal lamp) ter.
7
Stop lamp (upper) 2 LED
Stop lamp (lower) Caution
8 2 LED
-GEN yy Use only a specified capacity bulb for replacement.
Rear combi-
Tail lamp 2 LED yy Disconnect the negative cable on the battery before replacing the
9 nation lamp
Turn signal lamp 2 21W bulb. Remove the ignition key.
Back-up lamp 2 16W yy Do not apply excessive force to remove the bulb cover.
10 Rear fog light -EU 2 21W yy Make sure that the corresponding switch and the ignition switch
License plate lamp 2 10W are turned off before replacing a bulb.
High mounted stop lamp 1 LED yy Do not touch a bulb with bare hands immediately after turning off
11 the lamp.
Front room lamp 2 10W
yy Do not touch a bulb with bare hands. Fingerprints, dust, or moisture
12 Glove box lamp 1 5W stuck to the bulb may shorten its life or cause it to explode. If you
Interior
Center room lamp 1 10W accidentally touch the bulb, wipe the bulb glass with a soft cloth.
lamp
Luggage lamp 1 10W yy Never try to adjust the headlamp aiming angle. It should be done
13 by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Door courtesy lamp 4 5W
14 The LED is not replaxeable. If LED does not illuminate, replace the
lamp assembly with new one.
13-2 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
HID headlamp*
HID (High Intensity Discharge)
headlamp
Caution
yy HID headlamp bulb is better than regular (halogen) bulb in
If the light does not come on while operating HID type of headlamp
terms of performance and lifetime; however frequent switch- (low beam), more complex actions than fuse/relay replacement needs
ing (ON/OFF) of headlamp may shorten the life. to be taken. Therefore, visit SsangYong service center for overall
yy Unlike regular (halogen) light bulb, HID headlamp bulb inspections of related systems.
slowly dims when turning on the headlamp even after the
bulb ran out. Therefore, if the HID headlamp turns off and Warning
comes on again with the headlamp switch ON, the light bulb
yy Never remove nor disassemble any parts of HID headlamp (pro-
needs to be replaced. jector, high voltage cable, ballast) to avoid serious injuries due to
yy HID headlamp is more complex than regular (halogen) an electrical shock.
headlamp, so an extra charge will be applied when replac- yy It is dangerous to contact your body part to the vehicle equipped
ing. with HID headlamp due to the high voltage direct current flowing
through the system. Besides, more actions than bulb replacement
yy When removing/installing the HID headlamp bulb and unit, should be performed. Therefore, ask SsangYong service center
the angle adjustment (up/down, right/left) should be per- if malfunction occurs.
formed. Visit our SsangYong service center and ask about yy If discretionally modifying the vehicle equipped with regular
it. headlamp to HID headlamp, the system will underperform or be
overloaded causing malfunction of the vehicle. Additionally, the
Note light will interrupt the driver’s view running on opposite side of the
Characteristics of HID headlamp bulb road resulted in deadly accident.
yy The color of the light changes during its initial lighting through 4
seconds later until stabilized. Caution
yy Color change by the usage period is an unique characteristic of yy While driving a vehicle equipped with HID headlamp, the leveling
HID bulb. switch should be used depending on the number of passengers
yy Initial stage: light yellow and loading condition so that the lamp does not interrupt other
yy Over 100 hours: light blue drivers’ views.
yy Over 1000 hours: blue yy Refer to chapter 4, Headlight leveling switch.
yy Late stage: bright red, purple, get dark
Lamp 13-3
GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCATION OF EXTERIOR LAMPS
Outside turn signal lamp
High mounted stop lamp
Front fog light

Turn signal lamp
Headlamp Rear Combination Lamp
Tail lamp
Stop lamp
High beam
Low beam Back-up Turn signal
lamp lamp
Stop lamp or
rear fog light*
Position lamp & DRL lamp
13-4 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOVING HEADLAMP HOUSING
111 Turn off the light switch and remove 333 Unscrew the mounting nut for head- 444 Open the engine hood and remove
the ignition key from the key cylinder. lamp housing from the wheelhouse. two mounting bolts.
222 Unscrew the screw ( A ) and remove
the light cover in wheelhouse.
Warning
For safe driving, do not adjust the headlamp aiming screw. It
should be done by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or
555 Separate the headlamp housing from

the vehicle body and disconnect two
electric connectors.
Lamp 13-5
GETtheMANUALS.org
HEADLAMP
1. Remove the headlamp cover from the removed headlamp

housing.
2. Release the fixing clip.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Low beam (HID) High beam
Low beam bulb High beam bulb
HID lamp
13-6 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
cylinder.
2. Remove two mounting bolts on the
rear combination lamp housing.
3. Disconnect the main connector and

remove the rear combination lamp
housing.
4. Remove the defective bulb. Rear combination
Turn signal lamp: Push down and lamp
turn the bulb to remove it.
Back-up lamp: Pull the bulb out.
6. Install in the reverse order
of removal.
Note
The tail lamp and stop lamp are LED type. Do not try to replace the
bulb by yourself.
Back-up lamp Rear Turn signal
bulb lamp bulb
Lamp 13-7
GETtheMANUALS.org
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
cylinder.
2. Remove the license plate lamp assem-

bly by pushing it inward.
3. Remove the lamp housing by turning

the connector.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it.
5. Replace the bulb with new one. License
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. plate lamp
13-8 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERIOR LAMP
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 3. Replace the bulb with new one.
2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver. 4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
Caution
yy The cover should be removed from the rear section (arrow). Oth-
erwise, the cover may be damaged.
yy Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it.
Lamp 13-9
GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER ROOM AND LUGGAGE ROOM DOOR COURTESY LAMP
LAMPS
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder.
2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver. 2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver.
3. Replace the bulb with new one. 3. Replace the bulb with new one.
4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing. 4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
Caution Caution
Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it. Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it.
13-10 Lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOVE BOX LAMP
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 3. Push both sides of the lamp cover to separate the glove box
lamp assembly.
2. Open the glove box.
4. Disconnect the connector and remove the lamp assembly.
6. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
Lamp 13-11
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
1
5
14
6
7
Index
8
10
11
12
13
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
1 4 Changing a spare tire.....................................11-8 Engine oil....................................................... 12-7
Checks before starting a journey..................... 1-2 ESP OFF switch*........................................... 4-30
4-Wheel drive system*................................... 4-36
Child restraints and pregnant woman.............. 8-9
2
A Cigarette lighter.............................................. 10-6 F
Courtesy lamp................................................ 10-9 Front room lamps......................................... 10-13
3 Accident or fire..............................................11-32 Cruise control switch* (D20DTR, D27DT(P), Front storage compartment............................ 10-6
Adjustable steering wheel and horn.............. 10-4 G32D)....................................................... 4-18 Front view camera system*........................... 6-26
4 Air bag*.......................................................... 8-19 Cruise control switch* (D22DTR)................... 4-12 Fuel filler door................................................ 3-13
Air cleaner.................................................... 12-12
Fuel filter and priming pump (without additional
5
Airbag non-inflation conditions....................... 8-23 D water separator)...................................... 12-16
AQS (air quality system)................................ 9-15
Daily check list............................................... 12-2 Fuel filter and priming pump........................ 12-15
Assist grip..................................................... 10-14
Defogging and defrosting............................... 9-12 Fuel filter and water separator* (with additional
6 Audio system*.............................................. 10-20
Devices related to seat.................................... 7-2 water separator)...................................... 12-17
Automatic heater / air conditioner.................... 9-5
Digital clock.................................................. 10-19 Fuel filter...................................................... 12-20
7 Dimensions....................................................... 0-2 Functions of ignition key ................................. 2-5
B
Direct injection type diesel engine................. 1-36 Fuse and relay box...................................... 12-29
Battery replacement for rekes key................... 2-8
8 Do-it-yourself operation................................ 12-36
Battery.......................................................... 12-26 Doors................................................................ 3-4 G
Bluetooth hands-free system....................... 10-24 Drive belt (for gasoline) / brake pedal &
9 Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)................. 12-23
Gear selector lever in automatic transmission*
clutch pedal............................................. 12-21 .................................................................... 6-7
Brake system................................................. 6-27 Driver’s seat..................................................... 7-5 Gear selector lever positions..........................6-11
10 Bulb specifications and functional check....... 13-2 Driving tips for automatic transmission............ 6-9 Glove box....................................................... 10-9
DVD changer* storage................................. 10-10
11 C
H
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F)...... 1-30 E Hazard warning flasher switch....................... 4-29
Cautions when a tire is flat.............................11-4
12 Emergency towing.........................................11-25 HDC (Hill Descent Control) switch*............... 4-32
Cautions when changing the tire..................11-13 Emission reduction device............................11-33 Heater/air conditioner system.......................... 9-2
Center and rear room lamps........................ 10-14 Engine compartment........................................ 0-9
13 Center console............................................... 10-7
Hid headlamp*................................................ 13-3
Engine coolant............................................. 12-10 How to fasten the seat belt (3-point) in second
Certification.................................................... 0-15 Engine hood................................................... 3-12 row seat...................................................... 8-7
14
14-2 Index
GETtheMANUALS.org
How to fasten the seat belts in second row seat Opening and closing the doors with ignition key S
.................................................................... 8-6 .................................................................... 2-7
Safety instructions............................................ 1-7
How to fasten the three point seat belt........... 8-5 Outside rearview mirror control switch.......... 4-25
Safety mode (automatic transmission).......... 6-20
How to use service kit* (emergency puncture OVM tools.......................................................11-6
Scheduled maintenance services (EU) -
repair kit)..................................................11-14
diesel engine (D20DTR)......................... 12-43
P
Scheduled maintenance services (EU) -
I Parking aid system (PAS)*............................. 6-21 diesel engine (D22DTR)......................... 12-37
Immobilizer system......................................... 2-10 Parking brake / catalytic converter.............. 12-22 Scheduled maintenance services (gasoline
Important notice............................................. 0-13 Parking brake operation................................. 6-32 engine).................................................... 12-52
Indication of tire pressure (TPMS equipped PAS (Parking Aid System) OFF switch*........ 4-34 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN) -
vehicle)*.................................................... 5-10 Passenger’s seat............................................ 7-10 diesel engine (D20DTR)......................... 12-46
Inside rearview mirror.................................... 10-5 Power outlet................................................... 10-8 Scheduled maintenance services (GEN) -
Instrument cluster (DIESEL)............................ 5-2 Power steering fluid..................................... 12-14 diesel engine (D22DTR)......................... 12-40
Instrument cluster (G32D)................................ 5-4 Precautions regarding unauthorized Scheduled maintenance services (GEN) -
Interior lamp................................................... 13-9 modification & alteration........................... 1-33 diesel engine (D27DT/D27DTP)............. 12-49
Protection of the environment........................ 0-14 SD card slot, terminal for connecting external
J device and port*...................................... 10-22
Jack storage................................................. 10-10 R Seat belt and air bag....................................... 8-2
Rain sensing wiper*......................................... 4-9 Seat belt........................................................... 8-4
L Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)......................9-11 Seat heating/ventilation function*................... 7-15
Light switch...................................................... 4-4 Rear cup holder........................................... 10-10 Seatback pocket............................................10-11
Location of exterior lamps.............................. 13-4 Rear heated glass........................................ 10-17 Second row seat.............................................7-11
Locations in engine compartment.................. 12-3 Rearview camera system*............................. 6-25 Shift lever in manual transmission (5-speed)
Luggage net................................................. 10-15 Remote audio controls & gear shift button .................................................................... 6-3
(A/T) on steering wheel............................ 4-26 Shift lever in manual transmission (6-speed)
M Remote control key and ignition key............... 2-2 .................................................................... 6-2
Removable ashtray...................................... 10-17 Shift lever lock release and safety mode reset
Map pocket....................................................10-11
Removing the spare tire..................................11-7 .................................................................11-23
Replacing air conditioner filter....................... 9-13 Smart audio*................................................ 10-21
O
Roof rack........................................................ 3-16 Spark plugs.................................................. 12-28
Opening and closing devices........................... 3-2 Roof rack*.................................................... 10-18
Index 14-3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the engine and driving the vehicle... 1-17 V
Starting the engine with jumper cables..........11-2
Vehicle care.................................................... 1-20
Steering wheel heating switch /
Vehicle identification......................................... 0-7
heated glass switch.................................. 4-28
Storage box in luggage compartment.......... 10-15
W
Storage compartments and convenient
devices...................................................... 10-2 Warning lights and indicators......................... 5-17
Sun visors.................................................... 10-12 Warning triangle*.............................................11-5
Sunglasses storage...................................... 10-13 Warnings and cautions..................................... 9-4
Sunroof*........................................................... 3-9 Warnings for air bag....................................... 8-27
Switch panel on driver’s door trim................. 4-24 Warnings for seat belt.................................... 8-17
Switches and devices...................................... 0-8 Washer fluid................................................. 12-25
Switches and devices...................................... 4-2 Water separator warning light and engine
Switches in center console............................ 4-35 check warning light..................................11-22
Switches in overhead console, When the engine is overheating...................11-20
room lamp switch...................................... 4-40 Windows........................................................... 3-7
Winter (W) / Standard mode (S).................... 6-19
T Wiper and washer switch............................... 4-10
Wiper and washer............................................ 4-8
Tailgate and tailgate window.......................... 3-17
Wiper blade replacement............................. 12-35
Theft deterrent system................................... 2-12
Third row seat................................................ 7-13
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*......5-11
Tire............................................................... 12-31
Towing a disabled vehicle.............................11-24
Trailer towing.................................................11-27
Transfercase fluid......................................... 12-24
14-4 Index
GETtheMANUALS.org
GETtheMANUALS.org
No. PART NO. CODE NO. PRINTING DATE MODEL REMARKS
1 Y295OM1509ER RRX1-5OM0E-5I-300A Sep 01,2015 Y295 D22DTR+7A/T+M/Y
REXTON W (RHD)
OWNER’S MANUAL
ISSUED BY
EXPORT SERVICE TECHNOLOGY TEAM
SSANGYONG MOTOR CO., LTD.
455-12, Dongsak-ro, Pyeongtaek-si,

Gyeonggi-do, 459-711 Korea
TELEPHONE : 82-31-610-2740
FACSIMILE : 82-31-610-3762
NOTE: All rights reserved. Printed in SSANGYONG Motor Co., Ltd.

No part of this book may be used or reproduced without the
written permission of Export Service Technology Team.
GETtheMANUALS.org
사용설명서
User Manual
Manual del usuariol
한
AGC-9145BY/WY
Manual do Usuário
글
English
Español
Português
MP3[WMA] CD Player with USB Host
AM/FM Radio with Bluetooth Hands-free
GETtheMANUALS.org
AGC-9145BY/WY
AGC-9146BA/WA
한
사용설명서 ▶
글
English
User Manual ▶
Español
Manual del usuariol ▶
Português
Manual do Usuário ▶
AM/FM Radio with Bluetooth Hands-free
GETtheMANUALS.org
한글
● 먼저“안전한사용을 위하여”항목을 읽고 사용하시고,

본 설명서는 잘 보관하십시오.
●본 사용설명서에 사용한 도안과 그림은 실물과 다를 수 있습니다.
● 제품의성능 개선을 위하여 실제 제품은 사용설명서의 내용과 일부
다를 수 있으며, 사전 통보없이 변경될 수 있습니다.
● 해당
무선설비는 운용중 전파 혼신 가능성이 있으므로, 인명안전과
관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.
GETtheMANUALS.org
차례
한글
사용하기 전에
차
안전한 사용을 위하여 ........................................ 2
사용하기
례
명칭과 기능 ................................................. 4
기본 기능 ................................................... 7
라디오 ...................................................... 9
MP3/CD 플레이어 ......................................... 11
블루투스 (Bluetooth) ..................................... 14
외부 연결장치 .............................................. 18
핸들 리모컨 ............................................... 20
부록
고장이라고 생각하기 전에 ................................... 21
제품의 규격 ................................................ 24
서비스 안내 ............................................... 26
1
AGC-9145BY/WY AGC-9146BA/WA
GETtheMANUALS.org
안전한 사용을 위하여
한글 사용하기 전에
▶ 안전을 위한 경고 ▶ 안전을 위한 주의
경고! 주의!
● 화재나 전기적 충격을 방지하기 위하여 본 제품을 습기나 ● 사용자께서 직접 수리를 목적으로 제품을 분해하지 마시
빗 속에 노출하지 마십시오. 고 고객상담실로 문의하시기 바랍니다.
● 화재나 전기적 충격, 불필요한 상호간섭을 방지하기 위하
여 본 제품은 꼭 필요한 부품만을 사용하였습니다.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
안전한 사용을 위하여
한글 사용하기 전에
▶ 사용시 주의사항
차량 운행시... ◆본제품의 공급전원은 차량용 DC 14V 배터리 전용이며 차체가
● 차량 운행상태에서 본 제품의 조작이 꼭 필요한 경우, 반드시 전방을 마이너스 접지(- Ground) 되었는지 꼭 확인하십시오.
주시하고 안전운행에 각별한 주의를 요합니다. 규격전원 이외에는 절대로 사용하지 마십시오.
● 너무 큰 음량으로 사용하면 운행에 지장을 초래할 수 있습니다.
도로나 교통상황 파악을 위하여 적당한 크기의 음량을 유지하시기 바랍
니다.
● 복잡한 작동이 필요한 경우, 차량운행을 정지한 상태에서 작동하십시오.
세차시...
● 물기에 직접 닿거나 습기가 많은 곳에 스피커, 디스크 장치 및 출력앰프 ◆본제품을 청소할 때는 휘발류, 시너, 벤젠 등 기타 유용제를 사용
등이 포함된 본 제품을 노출시키지 마십시오. 해서는 안됩니다.
전기적 충격이나 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
주차시...
No!
● 차량이 직사광선 아래에서 장시간 주차하였을 경우, 차량 내부 온도가
높기 때문에 창문을 열어 환기한 후, 본 제품을 사용하시기 바랍니다.
사용 전원에 대하여...
● 본 제품은 차체가 마이너스 접지(- Ground)된 차량용 DC 14V의
전원을 사용하도록 설계되었습니다.
◆각기능버튼은 살짝 눌러도 동작되므로 무리한 힘을 가하지 마십
A/S 대하여... 시오. 고장의 원인이 됩니다.
● 본 제품은 매우 정밀한 부품으로 제작되었습니다. 함부로 분해하거나 조
정하지 마시고 고객상담실(080-500-5582)로 문의하시기 바랍니다.
참고
● 차량 배터리가 방전되거나 전원 연결상태가 차단되면 제품 출하시의
No!
초기상태로 변경되어 모든 메모리의 내용이 지워집니다.
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
명칭과 기능
한글
▶ 제품의 앞면
1. 기능 표시창 : 제품의 작동상태와 각종 정
보를 표시합니다.
사용하기
2. 라디오/방송 자동지정 [B BAND/AS] 버튼

AM 또는 FM 라디오 기능을 선택하거나
양호한 방송을 자동으로 등록/저장합니다.
3. 탐색/정보표시 [S SCAN/INF] 버튼 : 짧게
눌러 수신 가능한 방송을 탐색하거나 곡
탐색모드로 진입하고 길게 눌러 수신/재생
중인 방송/곡 등의 정보표시를 변경합니다.
4. 미디어 [MMEDIA] 버튼 : USB/AUX 등 연
결된 외부장치의 재생기능을 선택합니다.
5. 설정 [SSET] 버튼 : 제품의 설정모드를 실
행합니다.
6. 조절(TTUNE) 버튼
● 라디오에서 짧게 눌러 방송 주파수를 찾거
나 길게 눌러 수신 가능한 주파수의 방송을

찾습니다.
● MP3/CD/USB 모드에서 짧게 눌러 이전/다음 곡으로 이동
12. 전원 [ ]/음음향차단 [M MUTE] 버튼, 음량 조절기
하며, 길게 눌러 곡의 앞/뒤로 빠르게 이동할 수 있습니다. ● 버튼을 눌러 전원을 켜고 음향차단 또는 재생 일시정지 기
7. 통화 [ ] 버튼 : 길게 눌러 블루투스 휴대전화를 연결하며 능을 켜거나 끄며 길게 눌러 전원을 끕니다.

짧게 눌러 걸려 온 전화를 받습니다. ● 조절기를 돌려 음량 또는 선택값을 조절합니다.
8. 종료 [ ] 버튼 : 블루투스 휴대전화 연결을 해제하고 짧게 13. 방송기억 [11 ~ 6 D+] 버튼

눌러 통화를 종료합니다. ● 라디오 모드에서 1 ~ 6 D+ 버튼을 길게 눌러 방송주파수를
9. 디스크 삽입구 : 재생할 디스크를 넣거나 꺼내는 곳입니다. 저장하거나 짧게 눌러 저장된 방송을 직접 선택합니다.
● MP3/CD 모드에서 2 RPT/33 INT/4
4 RDM 버튼을 눌러 재생모드
10. CD 버튼 : CD/MP3 디스크 재생기능을 선택합니다. 를 선택하고, 5 D-/6
6 D+ 버튼을 눌러 폴더를 이동할 수 있습
11. 디스크 꺼냄 [ ] 버튼 : 디스크를 꺼냅니다. 니다.
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
명칭과 기능
한글
▶ 기능 표시창
[Radio function] [CD/MP3/WMA function]
1 2
사용하기
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ST RDM CLAS
ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00:01
FM1 89.1 MHz Knocking on he
3 4 5
1. 방송지정 번호 표시 9. 현재 재생 곡번호 표시
ch1 ~ ch6 10. USB 연결 표시
2. 스테레오 방송수신 표시 11. 폴더 선택 표시
FM 스테레오 방송 수신시 표시됨
12. 재생모드 표시
3. 방송주파수 밴드 표시 RDM (Random) : 무순위 재생
FM1/FM2/AM
RPT (Repeat) : 반복 재생
4. 수신방송 주파수 표시 INT (Intro) : 전주 재생
5. 재생곡 정보 표시 13. 블루투스 장치연결 표시
6. 디스크 삽입상태 표시 14. 재생 진행시간 표시
7. 재생 파일형식 표시 15. EQ 스타일 표시
CDP : 오디오 CD
MP3 : MP3 음악파일 POP, ROCK, COUNTRY, VOICE, JAZZ,
WMA : WMA 음악파일 CLASSIC
8. 현재 폴더번호 표시
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
명칭과 기능
한글
▶ 제품의 뒷면/연결단자
사용하기
1. 라디오 안테나 연결단자

차량의 라디오 안테나 플러그를 꽂아 연결합니다.
2. 외부입력 (A
AUX) 연결단자
차량의 외부 음향기기 연결부의 커넥터를 꽂아 연결합니다.
3. USB 연결단자
차량의 USB 연결부의 커넥터를 꽂아 연결합니다.
4. 입/출력 연결단자
차량의 입/출력 연결부의 커넥터를 꽂아 연결합니다.
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
기본 기능
한글
▶ 제품 켜기/끄기 ▶ 음량크기 직접 조절하기
1 차량 시동키를 ACC 또는 ON 위치로 돌려 차 1 음량 조절기를 돌려 제품의 음량을 조절합니다.
량의 전원을 켭니다. ● 음량조절 범위는 오디오 모드 00 ~ 45, 통화 모드 06
사용하기
~ 32입니다.
2 전원 [ ] 버튼을 눌러 제품의 전원을 켭니다.
● 전원이 켜지면 이전에 청취했던 방송이 수신되거나 곡
이 재생됩니다.
● 전원이 꺼진 상태에서 라디오 [B
BAND/AS] 버튼을 눌
러 라디오 기능을, CD 버튼을 누르거나 디스크가 들어
있지 않은 상태에서는 디스크를 넣으면 CD 기능을,
USB 장치를 연결하면 USB 기능을 직접 켤 수 있습니
다.
▶ 음향차단/일시정지 기능 사용하기
3 전원 [ ] 버튼을 길게 눌러 제품의 전원을 끕
니다.
● 전원이 꺼지기 전에 사용하던 기능은 다음에 전원을 켜
1 음향차단 [MUTE] 버튼을 눌러 음향차단 또는
재생 일시정지 기능을 켜거나 끕니다.
면 선택되고 자동으로 실행됩니다.
●“MUTE” (음향차단) 또는“PAUSE”
(재생 일시정지)가
깜박이며 스피커의 음향출력이 차단됩니다. CD/USB
전원이 꺼진 상태에서 기능 바로 켜기 재생시에는 재생 일시정지 기능이 켜지면서 스피커 음
● 전원이 꺼진 상태에서 디스크를 넣거나 USB 저장장치를 연결하면 전 향 출력이 중지됩니다.
● 음향차단 또는 재생 일시정지 기능을 해제하려면 음향
원이 자동으로 켜지면서 CD 또는 USB의 처음 곡을 바로 재생합니다.
● 라디오 [B
BAND/AS] 버튼을 누르거나 디스크가 삽입상태에서 CD 버 차단 [M
MUTE] 버튼을 한번 더 누릅니다.
튼을 누르면 이전에 청취한 방송을 바로 수신하거나 이전에 재생한
곡을 바로 재생할 수 있습니다.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
기본 기능
한글
▶ EQ 스타일 선택하기 ▶ 음향 조절하기

출력되는 스피커음향의 EQ(음향효과) 스타일을 선택합니다. 출력되는 스피커음향의 저음/중음/고음, 음균형 등을 조절합니다.
1 설정 [S
SET] 버튼을 누르면 설정 메뉴가 표시됩 1 설정 [S
SET] 버튼을 누르면 설정 메뉴가 표시됩
사용하기
니다. 니다.
●“EQ”
.“TONE”
“BT”
가 표시됩니다. “EQ”
● .“TONE”
“BT”
가 표시됩니다.
2 음량 조절기를 돌려 원하는 EQ 메뉴를 선택한 2 음량 조절기를 돌려 원하는 음향 [TONE] 메뉴

후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다. 를 선택한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다.
3 음량 조절기를 돌려 원하는 원하는 EQ모드를 3 음량 조절기를 돌려 원하는 원하는 음향 설정

선택한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다. 항목을 선택한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다.
● 조절기를 돌려 EQ OFF ↔ POP ↔ ROCK ↔ ● 조절기를 돌려 BASS ↔ MIDDLE ↔ TREBLE ↔
COUNTRY ↔ VOICE ↔ JAZZ ↔ CLASSIC ↔ BALANCE ↔ FADER ↔ PREVIOUS ↔ ... 중 하나
... 중 하나를 선택할 수 있습니다. 를 선택할 수 있습니다.
4 음량 조절기를 돌려 원하는 원하는 설정값을 선

택한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다.
● BASS : 저음부 레벨을 설정합니다. (-7 ~ +7)
● MIDDLE : 중음부 레벨을 설정합니다. (-7 ~ +7)
● TREBLE : 고음부 레벨을 설정합니다. (-7 ~ +7)
● BALANCE : 좌, 우 스피커의 밸런스를 설정합니다.

(LEFT 15 ~ RIGHT 15)
● FADER : 앞/뒤 스피커간의 밸런스를 설정합니다.
(FRONT 15 ~ REAR 15)
● PREVIOUS : 설정 메뉴화면으로 돌아갑니다.
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
라디오
한글
▶ 방송 청취하기 ▶ 방송주파수 수동으로 등록하기
1 라디오 [BBAND/AS] 버튼을 반복해서 눌러 원하 ● 본 제품은 각 밴드 별로 6개의 방송주파수를 미리 등록한 후, 방송기
억 버튼을 눌러 직접 선택할 수 있습니다.
는 라디오의 방송밴드를 선택합니다.
사용하기
● 본 제품은 FM1, FM2 또는 AM을 선택할 수 있습니다.
● 이전에 청취한 방송 주파수의 방송이 수신됩니다.
1 방송 청취하기 항목을 참조하여 등록할 방송주파수를 선택
합니다.
● 수동으로방송찾기
2 조절(T
TUNE) 버튼을 반복해서 눌러 원 ~ 2 원하는 방송지정 [11 ~ 6 D+] 버튼을 2초 이상
길게 누르면 알림음이 울리며 등록됩니다.
하는 방송주파수를 선택합니다.
1 ~ 2 항목을 반복하여 각 방송지정 [11 ~ 6 D+]
버튼에 등록합니다.
● 자동으로방송찾기
● 이미 등록된 방송기억 버튼에 새로운 방송주파수를 등
3 조절(T
TUNE) 버튼을 2초 이상 누른 후, 록하면 마지막에 등록한 방송주파수로 변경됩니다.
놓으면 수신상태가 양호한 방송주파수 하나를 찾
아 자동으로 수신합니다.
● 원하는 방송이 아닌 경우, 본 항목을 반복해서 다시 선
택하십시오.
● 자동탐색으로방송선택하기
4 탐색 [SSCAN/INF] 버튼을 누르면 수신주파수 범

위내에서 양호한 수신상태의 방송을 하나씩 차례로
찾아 5초 정도 들려 줍니다. 원하는 방송일 경우,
탐색 [S
SCAN/INF] 버튼을 짧게 눌러 계속 청취할
수 있습니다.
● FM은 스테레오 방송입니다. 양호한 스테레오 수신상태의 FM 주파

수에서는“ST”표시가 화면에 켜집니다.
● 차량 운전중에 방송 주파수 탐색은 사고의 위험이 있으므로 미리 등
록한 방송기억 버튼을 이용하여 안전하게 사용하십시오.

9
GETtheMANUALS.org
라디오
한글
▶ 방송주파수 자동으로 등록하기 ▶ 등록방송 청취하기

1 라디오 [BBAND/AS] 버튼을 반복해서 눌러 원하 1 라디오 [BBAND/AS] 버튼을 반복해서 눌러 원하
는 방송밴드를 선택합니다. 는 방송밴드를 선택합니다.
사용하기
● 선택한 방송밴드의 이전에 선택한 주파수가 표시되면 ● 본 제품은 FM1, FM2 또는 AM을 선택할 수 있습니다.
서 수신합니다. ● 선택한 방송밴드의 이전에 선택한 주파수가 표시되면
서 수신합니다.
2 자동등록 [BBAND/AS] 버튼을 2초 이상 길게 누
릅니다.
AST Scanning이 표시되고 수신상태가 양호한 6
개의 방송을 자동으로 찾아 차례대로 각 방송지정 ~ 2 원하는 방송지정 [11 ~ 6 D+] 버튼을 눌러 등록
[1 ~ 6 D+] 버튼에 등록됩니다. 된 주파수의 방송을 청취할 수 있습니다.
● 항목 1 ~ 2를 반복하여 다른 밴드도 등록합니다.
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD 플레이어
한글
▶ MP3[WMA]/CD를 사용하기 전에 ▶ 디스크 넣어 재생하기
본 제품은 CD-DA, MP3/WMA 디스크를 재생할 수 있습니다.
◆ CD-DA: CD-R/CD-RW
1 재생할 디스크를 인쇄면을
◆ MP3/WMA : CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM
위로하여 디스크 삽입구에
사용하기
◆ CD-DA와 MP3/WMA 파일을 혼합해서 만들어진 디스크는 재생이
가볍게 밀어 넣습니다.
안될 수 있습니다.
본 제품은 아래의 MP3/WMA 파일은 재생할 수 없습니다. ● 디스크가 삽입되면 디스크를 읽어 자동으로 재생합니다.
◆ MP3i 또는 MP3 PRO 규격으로 인코딩된 파일. ● 시동키가 ACC 위치에 있고 전원이 꺼진 상태에서 디스크를 삽입하
◆ 비규격으로 인코딩된 MP3 파일 면 자동으로 전원이 켜지고 재생됩니다.
◆ Layer 1/2가 포함하는 MP3 파일 ● 다기능 표시기에 디스크 표시가 켜지면 이미 디스크가 들어있는 상
태입니다. 이 상태에서는 CD 버튼을 눌러 CD 기능을 선택하여 재
디스크 사용시 주의사항 생할 수 있습니다.
아래의 디스크는 사용하지 마십시오.
스티커, 라벨 또는 보호용 씰 등을 부착한 디스크
◆
◆ 잉크젯 프린트로 디스크 라벨을 표면에 직접 출력한 디스크 ▶ 재생곡 이동하기

◆ 라벨 또는 씰 등을 붙인 디스크를 사용하지 마십시오.
◆ 8 cm 디스크는 본 제품에 사용할 수 없으므로 넣지 마십시오. 1 재생상태에서 조절(T

TUNE) 버튼을 반복
◆ 원형이 아닌 다른 모양(사각형, 오각형, 타원형 등)의 디스크는 해서 눌러 현재 곡의 처음이나 이전 또는 다음
사용할 수 없습니다. 곡으로 이동할 수 있습니다.
디스크를 취급할 때는 아래의 사항을 주의하십시오.
◆ 인쇄면에 종이를 붙이거나 볼펜 등으로 쓰지 마십시오.
◆ 닦는 방향을 중심에서 바깥으로 해 주십시오

2 재생상태에서 조절(T
TUNE) 버튼을 누르
고 있으면 빠른 재생이 진행되고 원하는 지점에
◆ 휘지 마시고, 직사광선이 닿는 곳 등 고온의 장소, 습도가 높은 곳에
서 떼면 그 지점에서 정상적으로 재생됩니다.
는 두지 마십시오. ● 빠른 재생의 속도는 일정하지 않을 수 있으며, 출력되
◆ 연주하기 전에 재생면에 붙은 먼지나 지문을 부드러운 천조각으로
는 음향크기는 작게 조절됩니다.
닦아 주십시오. 벤젠등 종래의 레코드판 크리너로 닦지 마십시오.
디스크 삽입구에 손가락, 젓가락 등 디스크 이외는 넣지 마십시오. 3 MP3/WMA 재생상태에서 방송지정 5D-/6
6D+ 버
고장 또는 다칠 위험이 있습니다. 튼을 눌러 다른 폴더로 이동할 수 있습니다.
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
한글
▶ 재생모드 변경하기 ▶ 연주곡 찾아 재생하기

1 방송지정 2 RPT 버튼 반복해서 눌러 반복재생 모 1 탐색 [SSCAN/INF] 버튼을 누르면 재생곡 탐색화
드를 선택합니다. 면에 표시됩니다.
사용하기
● RPT 표시 : 재생중인 곡을 연속해서 반복재생

● FOLDER [ ] RPT 표시 : 현재 폴더의 전 곡을 순서 2 음량 조절기를 돌려 재생할 곡 번호나 이름을
대로 재생을 반복 (MP3/WMA 디스크만 해당) 선택한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누르면 재생이 시
● 꺼짐 : 반복재생을 해제
작됩니다.
2 방송지정 3 INT 버튼 반복해서 눌러 전주재생 모
드를 선택합니다.
● INT 표시 : 디스크의 전 곡의 앞 부분 10초 정도만 순
서대로 재생
● FOLDER [ ] INT 표시 : 현재 폴더의 전 곡의 앞 부
분 10초 정도를 순서대로 재생 (MP3/WMA 디스크만 ▶ MP3[WMA] 폴더 정보보기
해당)
● 꺼짐 : 전주재생을 해제 1 MP3/CD 재생상태에서 정보표시 [SSCAN/INF]
버튼을 길게 누르면 5초간 현재 폴더의 정보를
3 방송지정 4 RDM 버튼 반복해서 눌러 무순위재생 볼 수 있습니다.
모드를 선택합니다.
● RDM 표시 : 디스크의 전 곡을 무순위로 재생 ● 정보표시스크롤기능을켜거나끄려면
● FOLDER [ ] RDM 표시 : 현재 폴더의 전 곡을 무순
위로 재생 (MP3/WMA 디스크만 해당) 2 폴더정보 표시상태에서 정보표시 [SSCAN/INF]
● 꺼짐 : 무순위재생을 해제 버튼을 길게 누르면 표시항목 스크롤 여부가 표
시됩니다.
● SCRL ON : 표시항목을 스크롤함
● SCRL OFF : 표시항목을 스크롤하지 않음
3 음량 조절기를 돌려 SCRL ON 또는 OFF를 선

택한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 눌러 설정합니다.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
한글
● 고온
다습한 환경에서 디스크를 사용하면 이상동작이나 제품 고장의
▶ 정지/디스크 꺼내기 원인이 됩니다. 규정된 환경에서 사용하십시오.
1 재생상태에서 디
스크 꺼냄 [ ]
버튼을 누릅니다. ▶ MP3[WMA] 음악파일에 대하여
사용하기
재생이 정지되고
●본 제품은 .mp3, .wma(소문자) 또는 .MP3, .WMA(대문자) 확장자
디스크가 나오며, 라디오 기능이 자동 선택됩니다.
를 가진 MP3[WMA]파일을 재생할 수 있습니다.
디스크를 꺼내어 보관하십시오. ● 본 제품은 앨범이름, 아티스트 등 MP3 파일의 id3 tag(Version 1.0,
● 15초
이내에 디스크를 꺼내지 않으면 디스크는 자동으로 다시 삽입 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 또는 2.4) 정보를 표시할 수 있습니다.
됩니다. 이때는 자동으로 재생되지는 않습니다. ● 본 제품은 한글과 영문 문자 코드만 인식하여 표시할 수 있습니다.
● 본 제품이 재생할 수 있는 MP3파일은 아래와 같습니다.
▶ CD-R/CD-RW 디스크에 대하여 - Bit rate : 8 kbps ~ 320 kbps

- Sampling frequency :
● CD닫기(Finalized)가 처리된 CD-R/CD-RW 디스크를 사용하십시오. 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
● CD-DA 파일과 MP3 파일을 혼합한 디스크를 사용할 경우, 본 제품 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
은 처음 검출한 동일한 형식의 파일만 재생됩니다. - Disc format : ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,
● 멀티 세션(Multi-session) 디스크를 사용할 경우, 본 제품은 세션닫 Windows long file name
기가 처리된 내용만 재생하고 닫히지 않은 세션부분은 건너 뜁니다. ● 디스크 저장 형식별로 사용할 수 있는 파일/폴더 이름은 4자리의 확장
● 아래와 같은 원인으로 일부 디스크는 정상적으로 재생되지 않을 수 있 자(.mp3)를 포함하여 아래와 같습니다.
습니다. - ISO 9660 Level 1 : 최대 12 문자
- 재생면이 오염되었거나 반사면의 긁힘 등이 있는 경우 - ISO 9660 Level 2 : 최대 31 문자
- 추위로 인해 차량내의 습기가 제품 내부의 픽업 렌즈에 이슬이 맺힌 - Romeo : 최대 128 문자(1byte)
경우 - Joliet : 최대 64 문자(1byte)
- 픽업 렌즈에 오물이 묻은 경우 - Windows long file name : 최대 28 문자(1byte)
- Packet Write 방식으로 제작된 디스크 ● 본 제품는 디스크 내의 전체 파일수는 512개, 폴더 수는 200개 그리
- 잘못된 내용으로 제작되었거나 오염, 긁힘 또는 휘어진 디스크 고 8단계의 폴더 구조를 인식할 수 있습니다.
● CD-RW 디스크는 낮은 반사율로 인해 표준 CD 디스크에 비해 디스 ● 본 제품은 가변 압축율(VBR)을 이용한 MP3 파일을 재생할 수 있습
크 인식에 다소 시간이 걸릴 수 있습니다. 니다. 이 가변 압축율(VBR) 형식의 MP3 파일을 재생시, 남은 시간을
● 아래의 CD-R/RW 디스크는 사용하지 마십시오. 표시할 경우, 실제의 시간과 다를 수 있습니다.
- 스티커, 라벨 또는 보호용 씰 등을 표면에 부착한 디스크
- 디스크 표면에 잉크젯 프린트로 직접 인쇄한 디스크
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
블루투스 (Bluetooth)
한글
블루투스 기능을 사용하려면 필요에 따라 아래의 과정을 먼저 실행하고

확인하여야 합니다.
3 연결할 블루투스 기기의 *PIN code 입력항목에서 본 제품
화면에 표시된 Pairing Key“00xx”
를 입력하고 등록을 완
1. 등록하기 (Pairing)
료하십시오.
본 제품과 무선으로 연결/사용하려면 블루투스 기기를 먼저 등록하고
인증(비밀번호 입력)하여야 합니다. 이 등록하기는 처음 한번 필요하
● 블루투스 기기에서의 등록이 정상적으로 완료되면 본 제품의 화면에
“BT CONNECT”
가 표시된 후, 연결된“기기의 모델명” 이나“BT
사용하기
며, 이후에는 자동으로 연결됩니다. (일부 기기에서는 자동 연결시 비

밀번호 입력이 필요할 수도 있습니다.) MOBILE”이“ ”아이콘과 함께 표시됩니다.
● 블루투스 기기의 등록은 한번 등록으로 완료되며, 여러 장치를 등록
2. 연결하기 (Connection)
할 수 있지만 사용시에는 한 대의 장치만 연결할 수 있습니다. 등록
본 제품과 등록된 블루투스 기기와의 연결은 기기간의 거리와 상태조 된 블루투스 기기에 다른 장치가 연결상태로 설정되어 있으면 블루
건이 맞을 경우, 자동으로 연결됩니다. 물론 수동으로 연결도 가능합 투스 장치연결 항목에서 이전 장치 연결을 해제한 후,“CAR
니다. AUDIO”또는“오디오 장치”
를 선택하여 본 제품과 장치연결을 설정
3. 핸즈프리/음악 스트리밍 하십시오.
블루투스 기기와 연결상태에서는 휴대폰의 통화기능이나 음악재생은 * 블루투스 기기에 따라서 이 PIN code가 비밀번호 또는 PIN 번호 등
본 제품을 이용하여 사용하고 작동할 수 있습니다. 단, 일부 기기에서 다르게 표현될 수 있습니다.
는 본 제품이 제공하는 특정 기능을 지원하지 않을 수도 있습니다.
4 블루투스 기기에 본 제품이 연결된 것을 확인합니다.
▶ 블루투스 기기 등록하기 ● 블루투스 연결이 정상적으로 완료되면 이전 화면으로 복귀합니다.
본 제품과 사용할 블루투스 기기를 3 m 이내에 위치한 후, 각각 대상 장
치를 등록합니다. 본 제품은 5개의 블루투스 기기를 등록할 수 있으며
한번 등록한 기기는 재 등록할 필요가 없습니다. ▶ 블루투스 연결하기
1 통화 [ ] 버튼을 3초 이상 길게 누릅니다. 등록된 블루투스 기기는 자동으로 연결되지만 필요에 따라서 수동으로
“PAIRING”
이 표시된 후,“KEY 00xx”
가 표시 연결할 수도 있습니다.
되면서 등록 대기상태가 됩니다.
1 등록된 장치를 이용하여 연결을 시도한 후 본
2 등록할 블루투스 기기를 작동하여 블루투스 설정/기기 검색 제품의 통화 [ ] 버튼을 눌러 연결합니다.
을 실행한 후, 본 제품과 등록/연결을 시도하십시오. ● 장치와 연결이 완료되면“BT CONNECT”
과“ ”
이
● 검색된 장치 선택항목이 표시되면“New Rexton”또는 표시되고 블루투스 신호가 켜집니다.
“SSANGYONG” 을 선택/연결을 실행하십시오. 참조
● 만약에 등록할 블루투스 기기에서 60 초 동안에 본 제품 검색을 실패 ● 연결된 장치의 관련정보를 확인하려면 정보표시
하게 되면 “No device paired ”
가 표시될 수 있습니다. 이런 경우, SCAN/INF] 버튼을 누릅니다.
[S
위의 1 ~ 2 항목을 다시 실행하십시오.
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
한글
▶ 최근 통화목록으로 전화걸기 ▶ 통화음량 조절하기
휴대전화기의 최근 통화목록으로 전화를 걸 수 있습니다.
1 음량 조절기를 돌려 통화음량을 조절합니다.
1 통화 [ ] 버튼을 3초 이상 길게 누르면 ● 통화음량 조절범위는 BT VOL 06 ~ 32입니다.
사용하기
“REDIAL”이 표시되고 최근 통화한 번호로 전화
가 걸립니다.
▶ 전화받기 ▶ 송화음 차단하기

전화가 걸려 오면 착신벨이 울리고“CALL IN”
과 발신자 전화번호가 표
시됩니다. 1 스티어링 휠 리모컨의 음향차단 [M
MUTE] 버튼을
눌러 송화음 차단기능을 켤 수 있습니다.
1 통화하려면 통화 [ ] 버튼을 눌러 통화합니다. ●“MIC MUTE” 가 표시고 송화음이 차단됩니다.
● 통화상태에서는“BT TEL”
이 표시되고 본 제품과 연결 ● 송화음 차단기능을 끄려면 스티어링 휠 리모컨의 음향
된 마이크와 스피커를 통하여 통화할 수 있습니다. 차단 [MUTE] 버튼을 한번 더 누릅니다.
통화를 원하지 않을 경우, 종료 [ ] 버튼을 눌
러 거절합니다.
“CALL REJECT”표시후, 이전 상태로 복귀합니다.
●
▶ 전화끊기
1 통화를 끝내려면 종료 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다.
통화가 종료되고 이전 상태로 복귀합니다.
● 통화는 종료되지만 본 제품과 휴대전화기와의 연결상
태는 유지됩니다.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
한글
▶ 통화 전환하기 (Private mode) ▶ 휴대폰 음악 재생하기

핸즈프리 통화상태에서 휴대전화기를 이용하는 개인통화로 전환할 수 A2DP (Advance Audio Distribution Profile)을 지원하는 블루투스
있습니다. (상대방의 통화음성이 스피커를 통해서 출력되지 않으며, 휴 장치에서 재생하는 음원을 본 제품으로 출력할 수 있습니다.
대전화기를 통해서만 통화가 가능합니다.)
먼저, 본 제품과 등록/연결된 휴대전화기의 음악재생 기능을
사용하기
1 핸즈프리 통화상태에서 통화 [ ] 버튼을 누르 준비합니다.

면“PRIVATE”
이 표시되고 핸즈프리 모드에서
휴대전화기 통화모드로 전환됩니다. 1 본 제품의 음량 조절기를 돌려 음량크기를 작게
합니다.
휴대전화기 통화상태에서 통화 [ ] 버튼을 누
르면“BT TEL”
이 표시되고 휴대전화기 통화모
드에서 핸즈프리 통화모드로 전환됩니다. 2 본 제품의 미디어 [M
MEDIA] 버튼을 반복해서 눌
● 휴대전화기에 따라서 핸즈프리로 전환이 원활하지 않 러“BT AUDIO”
를 선택합니다.
을 수 있습니다. 자세한 내용은 휴대전화기 사용설명서
를 참조 하십시오.
3 휴대전화기의 음악재생 기능을 사용하여 음악을
재생한 후, 본 제품의 음량 조절기를 돌려 음량
▶ 연결 해제하기 크기를 적당하게 조절합니다.
● 본 제품의 버튼을 이용하여 휴대전화기의 재생 곡을 변
1 종료 [ ] 버튼을 길게 누르면 블루투스 연결이 경할 수 있습니다. CD/MP3[WMA] 프레이어 설명을
해제되고 한번 더 길게 누르면 블루투스 기능이 참조하십시오.
꺼집니다.
● 연결해제시에는“PARING OFF”
가 표시되고 블루투 4 휴대전화기의 음악재생 기능을 종료하려면 종료
스 꺼짐상태에서“ ”아이콘이 사라집니다. [ ] 버튼을 누르거나 라디오 [B BAND/AS], 미디
어 [M
MEDIA] 또는 CD 버튼을 눌러 다른 기능을
선택합니다.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
한글
▶ 블루트스/통화모드 설정하기
블루투스 장치와 등록/연결/해제 및 통화모드를 설정합니다. ● PAIR (등록)을 선택한 경우
1 설정 [S
SET] 버튼을 누르면 설정 메뉴가 표시됩 5 블루투스 장치 등록하기 (14 페이지)의 2 ~ 4
사용하기
니다. 항목을 참조하여 블루투스 등록을 완료합니다.
●“EQ”
.“TONE”
“BT”
가 표시됩니다.
● DELETE 삭
( 제)를 선택한 경우
2 음량 조절기를 돌려 블루투스 [BT] 메뉴를 선택
한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다. 5 음량 조절기를 돌려“YES”또는“NO”를 선택
한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다.
● YES (예) : 선택한 블루투스 장치를 삭제합니다.
● NO (아니오) : 블루투스 장치삭제를 취소합니다.
3 음량 조절기를 돌려 원하는 블루투스 설정항목
을 선택한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다.
● 조절기를 돌려 PAIR ↔ SELECT ↔ PRIORITY ↔
DELETE ↔ BT VOL ↔ TEL OPTION ↔
PREVIOUS ↔ .... 중 하나를 선택할 수 있습니다.
4 음량 조절기를 돌려 장치목록이나 조절값을 선

택한 후, 전원 [ ] 버튼을 누릅니다.
● PAIR : 블루투스 장치를 등록합니다.
● SELECT : 등록장치 중, 연결할 장치를 선택합니다.
● PRIORITY : 블루투스 장치 연결의 우선순위를 설정
합니다.
● DELETE : 등록된 장치를 해제합니다.
● PREVIOUS : 이전 블루투스 메뉴로 복귀합니다.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
외부 연결장치AGC-9145BY/WY 제품 전용으로 AGC-9146BA/WA 제품에서는 지원하지 않습니다.
한글
▶ USB 저장장치 재생하기 ▶ USB 저장장치 사용시 주의사항

재생할 음악파일이 저장된 USB 장치를 본 제품에 연결하면 본 제품으 ● 본 제품과 USB 저장장치의 연결/분리는 차량 시동이 꺼진 상태에서
로 USB의 음악파일을 재생하여 차량의 스피커로 감상할 수 있습니다. 만 실시하십시오. 만약 USB 저장장치의 연결/분리 도중에 차량 시동
이 켜지거나 꺼지면 USB 저장장치가 손상되거나 정상적으로 동작하
1 전원 [
사용하기
] 버튼을 길게 눌러 본 제품의 전원을 지 않을 수 있습니다.

끕니다. ● 일부 USB 저장장치는 호환성 또는 상태에 따라 본 제품에서 인식되
지 않을 수 있습니다. 사용 전 차량에서 동작 확인 후 사용하십시오.

● USB 연결 부위에 사람의 신체나 물체가 닿지 않도록 하시고 USB 연
결 케이블은 안전운행에 방해되지 않도록 각별히 유의하여야 합니다.

2 USB 단자에 재생 할 MP3/WMA 파일이 저장 ● 본 제품과 USB 저장장치의 연결/분리시 짧은 시간 동안 반복적으로
된 USB 저장장치를 꽂아 연결합니다. 할 경우 USB 저장장치의 손상을 초래할 수 있습니다. 특히 USB 재생
전원이 켜지고“USB”
가 표시되고 USB 저장장치 상태에서 분리할 경우, USB 저장장치의 파손이나 이상 동작이 발생
의 음악파일이 자동으로 재생됩니다. 할 수 있습니다.
● FAT/FAT 32로 포맷된 USB 저장장치만 인식이 가능하며, 할당 단위
의 크기는 512Byte/Sector 또는 2048Byte /Sector인 제품만 사용

할 수 있습니다. (NTFS 포맷은 지원하지 않습니다.)
● USB 장치의 종류, 용량 및 저장 파일의 형식에 따라서 인식시간에 차
이가 발생할 수 있으나, 이는 고장이 아니므로 잠시 기다리십시오.

3 USB 장치가 연결된 상태에서는 미디어 ● 음악파일 재생을 위한 용도 외의 다른 USB 저장장치는 본 제품과 연
결하여 사용하지 마십시오.

MEDIA] 버튼을 반복해서 눌러 USB 기능을 선
[M
● 제품의 USB 단자를 이용하여 충전, 발열 등의 USB 액서서리 기기 사
택합니다.
용시 제품의 성능 저하 및 고장 발생을 초래할 수 있습니다.
“USB”가 표시되고 이전에 재생하던 USB 저장 ● USB HUB를 연결하여 사용하면 인식이 안될 수 있습니다.
장치의 음악파일이 자동으로 재생됩니다.
● 사용자의 편의상 논리적 드라이브를 분리한 대용량의 USB 저장장치
이후, USB 재생기능은 MP3/CD 플레이어 사용법과 동일하게 작동할 의 경우, 재생할 음악파일은 최상위의 드라이브에 저장하십시오. 최상
수 있으므로 MP3/CD 플레이어 사용법을 참고하십시오. 위의 논리 드라이브의 파일만 재생 가능합니다. 또한 특정 USB 장치
의 경우, 내부에 별도의 드라이브를 구성하여 응용프로그램을 탑재하
면 음악파일 재생이 정상적으로 되지 않을 수 있습니다.
● HDD 내장 USB 저장장치 또는 CF, SD 메모리를 USB 어댑터를 이
용하여 연결한 경우 동작을 보증할 수 없습니다.

● DRM(Digital Right Management)이 적용된 음악파일은 재생할 수
없습니다.
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
외부 연결장치AGC-9145BY/WY 제품 전용으로 AGC-9146BA/WA 제품에서는 지원하지 않습니다.
한글
▶ 외부입력 연결/사용하기
외부 음향기기를 본 제품의 AUX 단자 (스테레오 미니 잭)에 연결하여
본 제품의 스피커 시스템으로 청취하고 음량을 조절할 수 있습니다.
사용하기
1 본 제품의 음량 [VOLUME] 조절기를 돌려 음
향크기를 최소로 합니다.
2 전원을 끈 상태의 외부기기 음향출력을 본 제품

의 외부음향 입력 [A
AUX] 단자에 연결합니다.
3 외부 음향기기의 전원을 켜고 재생 또는 시청
기능을 작동합니다.
4 본 제품의 미디어 [M
MEDIA] 버튼을 반복해 눌러
외부음향 입력 [A
AUX IN] 기능을 선택합니다.
● 이미 연결된 상태에서는 본 항목을 바로 실행하십시오.
5 본 제품의 음량 [VOLUME] 조절기를 돌려 적

절한 음향크기로 조절합니다.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
핸들 리모컨
한글
▶ 핸들 리모컨 사용하기
핸들 리모컨이 장착된 차량의 경우, 아래의 버튼 설명을 참조하여 본 제품을 작동할 수 있습니다.
▲ SEEK ▼ MUTE
사용하기
● 라디오 ● 전화 통화상태에서 버튼을 눌러 송화음

청취시 버튼을 눌러 방송지정
버튼에 등록된 이전 또는 다음 방송을 차단기능을 켜거나 끕니다.
선택하고, 버튼을 길게 눌러 수신상태 ● 라디오 청취, CD/USB/BT Audio 재
가 양호한 가까운 주파수의 방송을 선 생시 버튼을 눌러 방송음향 차단 기능
택합니다. 또는 CD/USB /BT 오디오 재생의 일
● CD/USB/BT Audio 재생시 버튼을 시정지 기능을 켜거나 끕니다.
눌러 이전 또는 다음 곡을 선택하고,
CD 또는 USB 재생상태에서 버튼을
Phone [ ]
● 전화 대기 상태에서 버튼을 길게 눌러
길게 눌러 재생곡의 위치를 앞 또는 뒤
로 빠르게 이동합니다. 재다이얼 기능으로 전화를 겁니다.
● 전화가 걸려 오면 버튼을 눌러 통화하
▲ VOL ▼ 거나 길게 눌러 거절합니다.
● 전화 통화상태에서 버튼을 눌러 휴대전
버튼을 눌러 음량을 조절합니다.
화 통화나 핸즈프리 통화로 전환하며,
MODE 길게 눌러 통화를 종료합니다.
버튼을 눌러 기능을 선택하고 (CD → PWR [ ]
USB → AUX → BT Audio → RADIO 버튼을 눌러 제품의 전원을 켜거나 끄
...), 버튼을 길게 눌러 라디오 주파수 며, 통화상태에서 걸려 온 전화를 휴대
밴드를 선택합니다. (FM1 → FM2 → 전화 통화로 변경할 수 있습니다.
AM → FM1...)
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
고장이라고 생각하기 전에
한글
▶ 공통사항
증 상 예상 원인 확인 / 조치사항
- 음향이 출력되지 않음 - 음향차단 기능이 켜짐 - 음향차단 기능을 해제함 (7 페이지 참조)
부
- 잡음 발생 - 휴대전화기 등 전자파를 발생하는 기기가 - 휴대전화기 등 전자파를 발생하는 기기를 본 제품의 전기 신호
본 제품의 전기 신호라인과 가깝게 있음 라인에서 멀리 떨어뜨려 위치함. (계속해서 잡음이 발생하여 가
까운 구입처로 문의할 것)
록
- 일부 스피커의 음향이 출력 - 앞/뒤 또는 좌/우 음균형 조절이 적절하 - 앞/뒤 또는 좌/우 음균형을 적절하게 조절함 (8 페이지 참조)
되지 않음 지 않음
▶ 라디오
- 방송이 약하고 잡음이 남 - 차량 안테나 작동이 안됨 - 차량 안테나 상태를 점검/확인할 것
- 방송선국시간이 오래 걸림 - 수신 가능한 방송이 6개 이하임 - 방송주파수 수신상태가 양호한 지역으로 이동한 후, 자동 등록

기능을 이용하여 6개까지 등록할 것.
- 자동등록 방송이 6개 이하 - 차량 배터리 연결상태가 나쁨 - 차량 배터리 연결상태를 점검/확인한 후, 자동등록 기능을 다시
도할 것
- 방송주파수 수동등록이 안됨 - 방송주파수 자동등록 기능이 작동중임 - 방송주파수 자동등록 기능을 끄고 다시 등록할 것
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
한글
▶ MP3[WMA]/CD 재생
- 재생이 안 되거나 디스크가 - 디스크의 재생면을 뒤집혀 삽입됨 - 디스크의 재생면을 바르게 하여 삽입할 것
부
꺼내지지 않음
- 이물질 또는 비정상적인 디스크가 삽입됨 - 이물질을 제거하고 정상적인 디스크를 사용할 것
- 재생할 수 없는 형식의 디스크가 삽입됨 - “CD-R/RW에 대하여”또는“MP3[WMA]에 대하여”항목을

록
참조하여 정상적인 형식의 디스크를 사용할 것

- 다른 기기에서 재생되는 CD - CD-DA와 Data 파일을 혼합한 디스크 - Data 파일이 있는 CD-ROM 트랙을 건너 뛸 것
-R/RW 디스크가 본 제품 에서 Data 파일 읽기를 시도함
에서는 재생안됨
- CD-R/RW 디스크는 미디어의 특성과 - “CD-R/RW에 대하여”또는“MP3[WMA]에 대하여”항목을
녹음장치 및 녹음 소프트웨어의 조합에 참조하여 새로운 미디어와 녹음기기 및 녹음 소프트웨어의 조
따라 개인용 컴퓨터와 다르게 본 제품에 합으로 본 제품이 재생할 수 있는 CD-R/RW 디스크를 작성
서의 재생 가능여부가 다를 수 있음 할것
- 음향이 튀거나 잡음이 발생 - 이물질이 묻어 있거나 디스크에 결함이 - 이물질을 제거하고 정상적인 디스크를 사용할 것
있음
- 진동에 의한 음향이 건너 뜀 - 제품의 장착상태가 불안정함 - 제품 후면에 있는 지지부를 이용하여 차량의 기구믈과 안정적
으로 장착할 것
- 제품 장착시 전면에서 후면방향으로 30 - 제품 전면에서 후면방향으로 기울림 각도를 30도 이하로 조절

도 이상 기울려짐 하여 설치할 것
- 디스크가 나오지 않음 - 디스크 삽입된 상태에서 디스크 표면에 - 구입처로 문의하여 수리할 것
붙어 있던 라벨이 벗겨짐
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
한글
▶ MP3[WMA] USB 재생
- USB가 작동하지 않음 - USB 메모리의 손상이 있음 - USB 장치를 FAT 또는 FAT32로 다시 포맷한 후, 사용할
부
것 (NTFS 포맷은 지원하지 않음)
- USB 플러그부의 이물질 또는 오염됨 - 이물질 또는 오염을 제거하고 USB 플러그부를 깨끗하게 한
록
후 사용할 것
- USB 허브를 사용함 - USB 허브를 제거하고 USB 장치를 직접 연결할 것
- USB 연장 케이블을 사용함 - USB 케이블을 제거하고 USB 장치를 직접 연결할 것
- USB 플러그부가 금속 물질이 아닌 제품 - USB 플러그부가 금속으로 둘러 쌓인 제품을 사용할 것

을 사용함
- HDD 타입, CF 또는 SD 카드 등의 메 - 플래시 메모리 형식의 표준 USB 저장장치를 사용할 것

모리를 사용함
- 재생가능한 음악파일이 없음 - 재생 가능한 MP3와 WMA 파일을 사용할 것
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
제품의 규격
한글
▶ 일반 ▶ MP3[WMA]/CD section
사용 전원 DC 14.4 V 마이너스 접지 Sampling frequency 8 times oversampling
스피커 임피던스 4 ohm DA converter 4 DAC system
부
최대 출력 45 Watts x 4 Ch Pick-up type Astigma 3-beam

무게 880 g (Net) Light source Semiconductor laser
록
크기 (W x H x D) 178 x 52 x 155 mm Wave length 780 nm

주파수 응답 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz (±3 dB)
▶ 라디오 S/N 비 ≥50 dB
FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108 MHz Total harmonic distortion ≤1 % (1 kHz)
수신 주파수 범위
AM 53`1 kHz ~ 1602 kHz Wow and flutter Below measurable limits
FM ≤18 dBu 채널 분리도 ≥35 dB
감 도
AM ≤35 dBu
FM ≥45 dB
S/N 비 ▶ 블루투스
AM ≥40 dB
스테레오 분리도 FM ≥20 dB
Core Spec. Bluetooth V2.0 (Bluetooth V1,2와 호환)
▶ MP3[WMA] USB section 감도 - 60 dBm

내부 메모리 16 M bits Flash Memory
주파수 응답 20 Hz ~ 20 KHz
Higher Bandwidth Audio 지원
Total harmonic distortion 0.1 % (at 1 KHz)
적용 기능 Advanced Audio Distribution Profile
다이나믹 레인지 85 dB (at 1 KHz) (Bluetooth 호환기기내 음원 재생기능)
S/N 비 60 dB (at 1 KHz) Hands-free Profile 지원/Private Call
채널 분리도 54 dB (at 1 KHz)
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
제품의 규격
한글
▶ 인증정보
적합성 평가를
받은 자의 상호 주식회사 대우아이에스
부
기기의 명칭 무선데이터통신시스템용 무선기기
(모델명) (AGC-91`45WY)
록
식별부호 KCC-CMM-DWZ-AGC-9145WY
제조년월일 별도표기
제조자/제조국 주식회사 대우아이에스/한국
25
GETtheMANUALS.org
서비스 안내
한글
▶ 서비스센터 안내
제품 사용중 이상이 생기면....

부
전국 어디서나 지역번호없이 전화 080-500-5582

(주)쌍용자동차 고객센터로 연락 바랍니다.
록
친절하고 신속하게 도와 드립니다.
고객상담실
제품상담 ● 불편상담 ● 고객제안
● 고객센터 전화 080-500-5582
● 홈페이지 http://www.smotor.com
(주)쌍용자동차
26
GETtheMANUALS.org
서비스 안내
한글
▶ 쌍용자동차(주) 지역별 서비스센터/정비사업소 안내
부
록
27
GETtheMANUALS.org
English
● Please read these instructions carefully before using this product

and save this manual for future use.
● The illustrations and pictures in this manual may differ with the
actual design of the product.
● The design and specifications of this product may change without
prior notification for product improvement.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Contents
English
Before using
Precautions ..................................................................... 2
Usage
Location of controls ....................................................... 4
Contents
Getting started ................................................................ 7
Radio ............................................................................... 9
MP3[WMA]/CD player ................................................... 11
Bluetooth ....................................................................... 14
USB/AUX player ............................................................ 18
Steering wheel audio control ...................................... 20
Appendix
Troubleshooting ........................................................... 21
Specifications ............................................................... 24
1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precautions
▶ Safety information
WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, the limits for a Class 1 laser product, pursuant to Part 15 of
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR
English
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

MOISTURE. reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE, USE ONLY THE and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
INCLUDED COMPONENTS. and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However
Before using
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

CAUTION:
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
interference to radio reception, which can be determined
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
by turning the equipment off or on, the user is encouraged
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
to consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
help.
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR BY
YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment would void the user’s authority to operate this
device.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precautions
▶ Safety Information ▶ Handling precautions for safety
When Driving ◆ Thisunit is designed for DC 14V negative-ground vehicles only.
Keep the volume level low enough to be aware of road and Do not use a non-standard power supply.
traffic conditions.
English
When Washing Your Car
Do not expose the product, including the speakers and
CDs, to water or excessive moisture. This could cause
electrical shorts, fire, or other damage.
When Parked
Before using
Parking in direct sunlight can produce very high
temperatures inside your car. Give the interior a chance to
cool down before switching the unit on. ◆ Do not use gasoline, thinner, benzene, organic solvent, etc., to
Use the Proper Power Supply clean the unit.
This product is designed to operate with a 14 V DC,
negative-ground battery system. No!
Disc Mechanism
Do not insert coins or other small objects.
Keep screwdrivers and other metallic objects away from
the disc mechanism and disc.
Use Authorized Service Centers
This product is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to
disassemble or adjust any parts. Please refer to the
Service Center list included with this product for service ◆ Do not forcibly press function buttons.
assistance. By pressing lightly, damage can be avoided.
For Installation
This product should be installed in a horizontal position
with the front end up at a convenient angle, but not more
than 30°.
Note: No!
The preset memory is cleared to return to the original factory setting
when the power connector or battery is disconnected.
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of controls
▶ Front view
1. Display window
2. BAND/AS button
Selects the radio function or band (press : FM1 →
English
FM2 → AM → FM1 → ....), to store stations

automatically (press and hold)
3. SCAN/INF button
Scan in each station automatically, enter the file
search mode (press); switch the display items
(press and hold).
4. MEDIA button
Select the connected external device (USB, AUX
Usage
or Bluetooth Audio) playback.

5. SET button
Enters the setting mode (EQ style, Tone and
Bluetooth).
6. TUNE button
- During radio reception
Find a station manually (press); seek a station
automatically (press and hold).
- During CD/USB playback
Skip a track (press); up/down for file searching, 10. CD button 13. Number [1 to 6 D+] buttons
fast-forward/rewind a track (press and hold). Select the CD playback. - During radio reception
Receive each stored stations (press);
7. CALL [ ] button 11. Disc EJECT [ ] button
store each station (press and hold).
Receive the incoming a call (press); connect the Ejects the disc. - During CD/USB playback
Bluetooth device (press and hold). 12. POWER [ ]/MUTE button with 2 RPT : Repeat playback
8. END [ ] button VOLUME dial 3 INT : Intro playback
End a call (press); release the Bluetooth Turn the power on, turn the radio mute or 4 RDM : Random playback
connection (press and hold). CD/USB pause playback on/off (press), 5 D- : Folder down
tune the power off (press and hold); 6 D+ : Folder up
9. Disc slot adjusts the volume or selects the item for
Insert a disc (label side up), playback starts. setting/searching (rotate).
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Display window
1 2
English
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ST RDM CLAS
ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00:01
Usage
3 4 5
1. Preset channel number 6. Disc indicator

2. Stereo indicator 7. Media indicator
CDP lights up when an audio CD is loaded.
3. Band indicator MP3 lights up when a MP3 file is loaded.
WMA lights up when a WMA file is loaded.
4. Multi-function display area
8. Current folder (directory) number
9. Current file (track) number
10. USB indicator
11. Folder select mode indicator
12. Playback mode indicators
RPT (Repeat), INT (Intro), RDM (Random)
13. Bluetooth connection indicator
14. Playing time
15. EQ (Equalizer) indicator
POP, ROCK, COUNTRY, VOICE, JAZZ, CLASSIC
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Rear view
English
Usage
1. Antenna jack
To plug the radio antenna cable.
2. AUX In port
To connect an AUX connector for audio device.
3. USB port
To connect a USB connector for USB host function.
4. I/O connector (18 pin)
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
Getting started
▶ Turn the unit on/off ▶ Adjusting volume directly
1 Turn your car’s ignition key to ACC or ON 1 Rotate VOLUME dial to increase or decrease
position. the volume level.
English
The display will show the volume level (Audio mode
2 Press POWER [ ] button to turn the unit on. : 00 to 45 / Call mode : 06 to 32).
● If the source is ready, playback also starts.
● If you turn the power off while listening to a disc/
USB, the CD/USB play will start form where
playback has been stopped previously.
● If you turned the power off while listening to the
radio, the same radio station will be selected.
Usage
3 Press and hold POWER [ ] button to turn the
unit off.
● If you turned the power off while listening to a disc,
next time you turn the power on disc play will start
▶ Muting the sound quickly
from where playback was stopped previously.
1 Press MUTE button to set mute or pause on.
‘MUTE’ or “PAUSE” will flash on the display.
During the CD/USB, paused the playback and mute the
sound.
To restore the sound or resume CD/USB playback,
press MUTE button or rotate VOLUME dial.
To turn the power on directly

◆ By inserting a disc, connecting the USB device or pressing BAND/AS,
CD or MEDIA button (while the disc is inserted or the USB/AUX/BT
Audio device is connected), you can also turn the power on and the unit
then plays.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
Getting started
▶ Selecting the Equalizer style ▶ Setting the sound
◆You can select the one of the 6 EQ styles or EQ OFF. ◆You can adjust the level of the Bass, Middle, Treble, Balance and Fader.
1 Press SET button to enter the Setting mode. 1 Press SET button to enter the Setting mode.
English
“EQ”, “TONE” and “BT” appear on the display.

“EQ”, “TONE” and “BT” appear on the display.
2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the EQ menu, 2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the TONE
then press POWER [ ] button.
menu, then press POWER [ ] button.
Usage
3 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the desired EQ 3 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the desired
style, then press POWER [ ] button.
Tone Control item, then press POWER [ ]
● By rotating the VOLUME dial, you can select one of the
button.
following EQ Styles.
● By rotating the VOLUME dial, you can select one of the
EQ OFF ↔ POP ↔ ROCK ↔ COUNTRY ↔ VOICE ↔
JAZZ ↔ CLASSIC ↔ .... following Tone Control items.
BASS ↔ MIDDLE ↔ TREBLE ↔ BALANCE ↔ FADER
↔ PREVIOUS ↔ BASS ↔ ....
4 Rotate VOLUME dial to adjust the value of the

level or balance, then press POWER [ ]
button.
● BASS: adjust the bass sound level (-7 to +7).
● MIDDLE: adjust the treble sound level (-7 to +7).
● TREBLE: adjust the treble sound level (-7 to +7).
● BALANCE: adjust the sound balance between the
right and left speakers (LEFT15 to RIGHT15).
● FADER: adjust the sound fade between the front
and rear speakers (FRONT15 to REAR15).
● PREVIOUS: return to the TONE menu.
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Tuning in a station ▶ Storing a station manually
● Turn on the radio ◆ You can preset 6 stations for each band (FM1, FM2 and AM).
1 Press BAND/AS button repeatedly to select the 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Tuning in a station” to tune to the
English
band. frequency you wish to preset.
FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1 → ....
~ 2 Press and hold Number [1 to 6 D+] buttons for
● Tuning a station manually more 2 seconds to select the preset number.
The frequency is stored in the selected preset number
2 Press TUNE buttons repeatedly to tune and you will hear a beep.
to a desired frequency. To preset another station, repeat these steps.
Usage
Note
● Tuning a station automatically ◆If you try to store another station in the same preset number, the previously
stored station will be replaced.
3 Press TUNE buttons for more 2
seconds, then release.
Seeking will start.
The tuning automatically stops at the stations whose
signals can be received, and the station are received.
● To quickly scan a station

4 Press SCAN/INF button to start tuning for a
station.
The unit will go to a station, play for 5 seconds, and
then go to the next station.
When the unit tunes in to the desired station, press
SCAN/INF button to stop scanning.
Note
◆ During reception of stereo stations the “ST” indicator is on.
◆ When tuning in stations while driving, use preset number button to prevent
accidents.
9
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Storing stations automatically ▶ Listening to a preset station
◆ The unit selects the stations with the strongest signals within the selected
band, and stores them in the order of their frequency. 1 Press BAND/AS button repeatedly to select the
◆ Up to 6 stations can be stored in current band. band.
English
FM1 → FM2 → AM→ FM1 → ....

1 Press BAND/AS button repeatedly to select the
band.
FM1 → FM2 → AM→ FM1 → .... ~ 2 Press the Number [1 to 6 D+] button on which the
desired station is stored.
2 Press and hold BAND/AS button for more 2
seconds.
“AST Scanning” appears on the display.
Usage
The unit stores stations in the order of their frequencies

on the number buttons.
Notes
◆ If only a few stations can be received due to weak signals, some number
buttons will retain their former settings.
◆ When a number is indicated in the display, the unit starts strong stations from
the one currently displayed.
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD player
▶ Before disc playback ▶ Loading a disc and starting playback
◆ You can play CD-DA and MP3/WMA discs. 1 Insert a disc into the disc
Note : Available discs slot with the label side
◆ CD-DA : CD-R/CD-RW
facing up.
English
● Playback will start automatically
◆ This unit cannot play the following files;
after recognizing the data of the
- MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format. loading disc.
- MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format. ● It may take some time to start playing.
- MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2. ● All tracks will be played until you change the source or eject the disc.
- WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
- WMA files which are not based upon Windows MediaⓇ Audio. Note:
- WMA files copy-protected with DRM. ◆ Do not insert a disc when the disc indicator lights on the display window
Usage
- Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc. because a disc is already loaded.
◆ When disc is in the unit
Press CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio button repeatedly to select the CD and
Caution playback starts.
◆ 3” (8 cm) CD is not available for this unit, so do not insert it.
◆ Do not use irregularly-shaped discs.
◆ Do not use discs that have a seal or label attached.
◆ To avoid damaging the front panel, do not push it down or place objects
▶ Controlling the playback
on it while it is open.
◆ Do not put your finger or hand in the front panel. 1 Press TUNE buttons repeatedly to go to
◆ Do not insert foreign objects into the disc slot. the next or previous tracks.
Note
◆The power will be turned on automatically when a disc is loaded.
A disc which has both CD-DA data and MP3/WMA data on it may not
2 Press and hold TUNE buttons to fast-
be reproduced normally. (For example, it may be reproduced forward or rewind the track, and release to resume
without sound.) the playback.
◆ The search function works but search speed is not constant.
◆ While fast forwarding or rewinding, you can only hear
intermittent sounds.
3 Press 5 D- or 6 D+ button repeatedly to go to the
previous or next folders (only for MP3 or WMA
disc).
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD player
▶ Selecting the playback modes ▶ Searching the music
1 Press 2 RPT button repeatedly to select Repeat 1 Press SCAN/INF button to enter the track search
playback mode. Mode.
English
● RPT : The current track plays repeatedly.

● FOLDER [ ] RPT (for MP3/WMA only) : All tracks of 2 Rotate and hold VOLUME dial to select the
current folder play repeatedly. desired track number or name, then press
● Off : Cancels repeat playback. POWER [ ] button to start playback the
selected track.
2 Press 3 INT button repeatedly to select Intro scan
playback mode.
● FOLDER [ ] INT (for MP3/WMA only) : Successively
Usage
plays the intro of the track in the current folder.

● INT : Successively plays the intro of the track in the
disc. ▶ Showing the folder information
● Off : Cancels intro playback.
1 Press and hold SCAN/INF button to show the
3 Press 4 RDM button repeatedly to select Random current folder information for 5 seconds.
playback mode.
● To switch the scroll function on/off
● FOLDER [ ] RDM (for MP3/WMA only) : Tracks of
current folder play in random order. ◆ Activate/deactivate the scroll function for displaying performance.
● RDM : Tracks of disc play in random order.
● Off : Cancels random playback.
2 While showing the folder information, press and
hold SCAN/INF button to show the SCROLL ON
Note: Changing the source or OFF.
◆ If you change the source, playback also stops (without ejecting the disc).
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source, disc play starts from 3 Rotate VOLUME dial to switch to OFF or ON,
where it was been stopped previously. then press POWER [ ] button.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD player
▶ Stopping playback and ejecting a disc ▶ About MP3/WMA
1 Press EJECT [ ] This unit can playback MP3/WMA files with the extension code<.mp3>
or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case-upper/lower).
button, and take
the disc. This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag
English
(Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
Note: Ejecting a disc
This unit can display only one-byte characters, no other characters can be
If the ejected disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the disc is
automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. correctly displayed.
(Disc will not play this time.) This unit can playback MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below;
- Bit rate:
8 kbps ~ 320 kbps for MP3 / 64 kbps ~ 161 kbps (VBR) for WMA
▶ About CD-R/CD-RW - Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1 Layer 2/3)
Usage
Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
This unit can playback only files of the same type which are first 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5 Layer 3)
detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA
files. - Disc format: ISO/IEC 11172-3, ISO/IEC 13818-3
The maximum number of characters for file/folder names vary among the
This unit can playback multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions
will be skipped while playing. disc format used (includes 4 extension characters - <.mp3> or <.wma>).
- ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not playback on this unit because of their
disc characteristics, or for the following reasons; - ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31characters
- Discs are dirty or scratched. - Romeo: up to 128 characters
- Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit. - Joliet: up to 64 characters
- The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty. - Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
- CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with “Packet Write” The unit can playback files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate). Files
method. recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not
- There are improper recording conditions(missing data, etc) or media
conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc). show the actual elapsed time. After performing the search function, this
difference becomes noticeable.
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-
RWs is lower then that of regular CDs. The unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8
hierarchies.
Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs;
- Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seals stuck to the surface.
- Discs in which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer. Note
◆ Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or
Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidity may cause trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
malfunctions or damage to the unit. countries.
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Bluetooth operation - If your phone does not find “New Rexton” or “SSANGYONG” repeat steps
1~2.
To use the Bluetooth function, the following procedure is necessary.
1. Pairing 3 If *Pass key input is required on the display of a connecting
When connecting Bluetooth devices for the first time, mutual device, input “00xx” (4 digit).
English
registration is required. This is called “pairing.”. This registration This unit and Bluetooth device memorize each other’s information,
(pairing) is required only for the first time, as this unit and the other and when pairing is made, the unit is ready for connection to the
devices will recognize each other automatically from the next time. device.
(Depending on the device, you may need to input a pass code for "BT CONNECT" and “Bluetooth device model name” or “BT
each connection.) MOBILE” with “ ” indicator appear after pairing is completed.
2. Connection - Some Bluetooth device ask you to accept the “BT link” or “Connect”.
Sometimes pairing allows automatic connection. Enter “Yes” or “OK”.
To use the device after pairing is made, start the connection. * Pass key may be called “passcode,” “PIN code,” “PIN number” or
3. Handsfree talk/Music streaming “password,” etc., depending on the device.
Usage
You can call a mobile phone and listen to music when the connection
is made. 4 Set the Bluetooth device to connect to this unit.
Some Bluetooth device may not support specific functions. Note : Pairing standby mode is not released until the connection is made.
▶ Pairing your phone and car audio system

Fist, register (“pair”) a Bluetooth device (mobile phone, etc.) and this unit with
▶ Connecting a mobile phone
each other. You can pair up to 6 devices. Once pairing is established, there is no - Devices are registered once paired and connected with this unit. You
need for pairing again. can select the registered device and connect it.
Place the Bluetooth device within 3 m (9 ft) of this unit. - If pairing has already been achieved, start operation from here.
1 Press and hold CALL [ ] button for more 3 - Depending on the device, connection may start automatically after pairing.
seconds.
The unit enters pairing standby mode. The "PAIRING" 1 Connect to this unit using your mobile phone and
appears in the display with beep and then flash the press CALL [ ] button.
"KEY 00xx". The “BT CONNECT” with “ ” icon is appeared and
Bluetooth signal is switched to on.
2 Set the Bluetooth device to search for this unit.
A list of detected devices appears in the display of the connecting
device. This unit is displayed as “New Rexton” or “SSANGYONG” Note
on the connecting device. To show the information of connected Bluetooth
Confirm this by pressing “YES” or “OK” on your phone. device, press SCAN/INF button.
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Making a call via last call ▶ Adjusting the talk volume
You can make a call from the connected mobile phone by operating this unit.
1 Rotate VOLUME dial to increase or to
1 Press and hold CALL [ ] button for more 3 decrease the talk volume level.
English
seconds to enter the Last call dial mode. The display will show the Bluetooth volume level.
“REDIAL” appears and the phone redialing starts. (BT VOL 6 ~ 32)
▶ Receiving a call ▶ Muting the talk sound

When receiving a call, the ring tone is output from your car speakers and
caller’s number appears on screen. 1 Press MUTE button on the Steering wheel
Usage
audio control to activate the microphone mute
1 When a call comes in, “CALL IN” and ”Telephone function.
number” appears with a ring tone, press CALL
[ ] button to answer a call. The display will show ‘MIC MUTE’.
“BT TEL” appears and the phone call starts. To cancel the microphone mute function, press
MUTE button on the Steering wheel audio control.
The built-in microphone of this audio system will pick up ‘MIC MUTE’ disappears.
your voice.
To reject an incoming call, press END [ ]

button.
“CALL REJECT” appears and return to previous
function.
▶ Ending a call
1 Press END [ ] button.
Note:
◆ Even if the calls is ended, the Bluetooth connection is not
canceled.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Transferring a call ▶ Listening to music from a Bluetooth device
In oder to activate/deactivate the appropriate device (this unit/mobile phone), You can listen to music of the mobile phone on this unit if the mobile phone
check the following. supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of Bluetooth
technology.
1 During a call via Bluetooth handsfree, press
English
CALL [ ] button. The hands-free function is 1 Switch to Bluetooth signal on of the your mobile phone or
deactivated, and the microphone and speaker of audio device.
mobile phone are activated. “Stereo Headset” appears when the connection is made.
“PRIVATE” appears and the mobile phone calling
starts. 2 Rotate VOLUME dial to turn down the volume
level on this unit.
During a call via mobile phone, press CALL [ ]
Usage
button. The Bluetooth hands-free function is

activated. 3 Press MEDIA button repeatedly until “BT AUDIO”
“BT TEL” appears and the hands-free calling starts. appears.
For details on mobile phone operation, refer to your mobile

phone manual. 4 Operate the audio device to start playback.
You can change the volume and skip track by using buttons on this
Note: unit. (Refer to ‘MP3[WMA]/CD player’ section)
◆ Depending on the mobile phone, hands-free connection may be cut off
when call transfer is attempted. 5 Rotate VOLUME dial to adjust the volume level
on this unit.
6 To stop listening to music, press and hold END

[ ] button or press BAND/AS, MEDIA or CD
button to select other function.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Setting the Bluetooth mode
◆ You can control the Bluetooth modes. ● Incase of the PAIR selecting
1 Press SET button to enter the Setting mode. 5 Follow steps 2 to 4 in 14 page “Pairing your
English
“EQ”, “TONE” and “BT” appear. phone and car audio system” to complete the
pairing.
2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the BT menu, ● Incase of the DELETE selecting
5 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the “YES” or
“NO”, then press POWER [ ] button.
YES: Deletes the selected Bluetooth device list.
Usage
3 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the desired NO: Cancels the Delete operation.
Bluetooth Setting item, then press POWER
[ ] button.
● By rotating VOLUME dial, you can select one of the
following Bluetooth Setting items.
PAIR ↔ SELECT ↔ PRIORITY ↔ DELETE ↔ BT
VOL ↔ TEL OPTION ↔ PREVIOUS ↔ PAIR ↔ ...
4 Rotate VOLUME dial to select device list or

adjust value, then press POWER [ ] button.
● PAIR:enter the pairing (Key Code : 00xx).
● SELECT: selects one of 5 Bluetooth devices for
connection.
● PRIORITY: selects the priority of connection.
● DELETE: deletes a Bluetooth device.
● PREVIOUS: return to the BT menu.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
The USB/AUX player functions are only for AGC-9145BY/WY models.
USB/AUX player The AGC-9146BA/WA models are not supported.
▶ Playing a USB device ▶ Precautions for handling USB device

By connecting a USB device to the USB input port on the unit,
you can listen on your car speakers, while controlling the USB
● When using the external USB device, ● The amount of time required to recognize
device from the unit. make sure to keep the device disconnected the external USB device may differ
and connect only some time after turning depending on the type, size, or file formats
English
on the vehicle ignition. The USB device stored on the USB. Such differences in the
1 Press and hold POWER [ ] button may be damaged if the USB device required time are not indications of
to turn the unit off. already connected when the ignition is malfunction. Please wait the period of time
turned on. (USB device is not an electronic required to recognize the device.
automotive component) ● The device supports only USB devices
● Some USB devices may not operate used to play music files.
2 Connect the USB storage properly because of compatibility issues.
Check that the external device is supported
● Do not use the USB I/F to charge batteries
or USB accessories which generate heat.
device with MP3/WMA files by the device before starting use. Such acts may lead to deteriorated
Usage
to be played to the USB ● The device will only recognize USB performance or damage to the device.
input terminal. devices formatted in FAT or FAT32. ● The device may not recognize the USB
The unit turn power on, then (NTFS format is not supported.) device if separately purchased USB hubs
When formatting the external USB device, and extension cables are being used.
playback starts automatically the device may not properly recognize a
with “USB” indication after Byte/Sector selection other than 512Byte ● In the case of high capacity USB devices,
recognizing the data of the or 2048Byte. there are instances where the logical drives
USB storage device. are partitioned for user convenience. In this
● Avoid the contact of bodily parts and
case, it will only be possible to play the
foreign substances with the USB connector. USB music in the top level drive.
3 When the USB storage device is ● Repeatedly connecting/disconnecting the
USB in a short period of time may cause
When using partitioned drives, save the
songs you wish to play on the device only
already connected, press MEDIA damage to the device. in the top-level logical drive. In addition,
button repeatedly until ‘USB’ ● When disconnecting the USB, an certain USB devices are configured with a
appears. abnormal sound may occur occasionally. separate drive used to install application
The USB playback will starts programs and it may not be possible to
● Abruptly disconnecting the external USB
automatically. play songs from such drives for the reasons
device while the USB is operating may as described above.
You can change the volume, play mode cause the device to be damaged or function
and track selection by using buttons on abnormally. ● The device may not support normal
control panel. Make sure to disconnect the USB device operation when using formats such as
(Refer to ‘MP3[WMA]/CD player’ section) only after the audio power is turned off or HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
when the audio is operating in a different ● The device will not support files locked by
mode. DRM (Digital Rights Management).
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
The USB/AUX player functions are only for AGC-9145BY/WY models.
USB/AUX player The AGC-9146BA/WA models are not supported.
▶ Listening to auxiliary audio equipment

By connecting an optional portable audio device to the AUX input jack (stereo
mini jack) on the unit and then simply selecting the source, you can listen on
your car speakers. The volume level is adjustable for any difference between the
English
unit and the portable audio device.
1 Turn down the volume on the unit.
2 Turn off the external audio equipment.

Connect the audio output of the external
Usage
audio equipment to AUX input terminal on
the the unit.
Be sure to adjust the volume for
each connected audio device before
playback.
3 Start playback of the external audio equipment at

a moderate volume.
4 Press MEDIA button repeatedly until ‘AUX IN’

appears.
When the external audio equipment is already
connected, skip the 1 ~ 3 steps.
5 Set your usual listening volume on the unit.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Steering wheel audio control
▶ Using the Steering wheel audio control
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.
They include the following:
▲ VOL ▼
English
MODE
Press : increase/decrease the volume. ● Press : selects the functions (CD → USB
→ AUX → BT Audio → RADIO...)
▲ SEEK ▼ ● Press and hold : selects the band (FM1
During a station listen → FM2 → AM → FM1...)

● Press : go to the next/previous preset
MUTE
station.
● Press and hold : search the next/previous During a call
Usage
radio station. (The radio seeks stations Press : turns the MIC. MUTE function
only with a strong signal that are in the on/off
selected band) During Radio or CD/USB/BT Audio mode
During a CD/USB/BT Audio play Press : turns the radio mute or CD/ USB
● Press : go to the next/previous track. pause playback on/off.
● Press and hold : fast forward/backward
through the tracks. (only for CD/ USB Phone [ ]
playback) During standby
Press and hold : makes a call via last call
PWR [ ] dialing function
Press : turns the system on/off or switch
to private call mode for incoming a call. During a call coming in
● Press : receives the incoming a call
● Press and hold : rejects the incoming a
call
During a call
● Press : switches to the private or
bluetooth call mode.
● Press and hold : ends a call
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
Troubleshooting
▶ Common
Symptoms Possible causes Possible remedies
- Sound is not generated. - MUTE is set to ON. - Set MUTE to OFF.
English
- Noise - There is an electromagnetic-wave - Keep electromagnetic-wave generators such as a cellular
generator such as a cellular phone near phones away from the unit and the wiring of the unit. If the
the unit or its electrical lines. noise cannot be eliminated due to the wiring harness of the
car, consult your dealer.
- No sound from speaker(s) - Balance/fader setting is not appropriate. - Readjust balance/fader.
Appendix
▶ Radio
- Poor reception or noise - Unsatisfactory broadcast conditions. - Receive and listen to the signals from the station concerned
in the analog mode.
- Seeking takes too long. - The number of receivable stations is - Move to an area with maximum number of receivable
less than 6. stations, and try presetting.
- The number of auto preset - The contact of the battery lead is poor, - Make sure that the battery lead is connected securely, and
stations is less than 6. or the battery lead is not always preset stations again.
powered.
- Preset stations cannot be - Digital seeking may take some time. - Change to auto seeking, and proceed with seeking again.
stored.
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
Troubleshooting
▶ MP3[WMA]/CD player
- No playback or disc ejected - The disc is inserted upside down. - Insert the disc correctly.
English
- There is a flaw or foreign object on the - Remove the foreign objects, or use a flawless disc.
disc.
- The disc has unplayable formatted data. - Refer to the description about MP3/WMA for playable sound
data except CD-DA (i.e. music CD).
- The unit plays back the ROM track of a - Skip the ROM track.
mix mode CD.
Appendix
- The CD-R/RWs that are - The playability of some CD-R/RWs may - Make CD-R/RWs in different combination of media,
playable on other devices depend on the combination of media, recording software and recorder after referring to the
are not playable on this recording software and recorder to be description about MP3/WMA.
unit. used even if these CD-R/RWs are
playable on other devices such as a
personal computer.
- Sound skipping or noise - There is a flaw or foreign object on the - Remove the foreign objects, or use a flawless disc. For
disc. MP3/WMA, refer to the description about MP3/WMA.
- Sound skipping due to - The unit is not sufficiently secured. - Secure the unit to the console box with the rear support
vibration strap, etc.
- The unit is tilted at over 30° in the front- - Make the angle 30° or less.
to-end direction.
- Disc unejectable - A label is peeled off from the CD in the - Refer repair to the dealer where you purchased the unit.
unit.
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
Troubleshooting
▶ USB MP3[WMA] player
- The USB does not work - USB memory is damaged. - Please use after formatting the USB into FAT or FAT32
English
format.(NTFS format is not supported)
- USB memory has been contaminated. - Remove any foreign substances on the contact surface of
the USB memory and multimedia terminal.
- A separately purchased USB HUB is - Directly connect the USB memory with the multimedia
being used. terminal in the vehicle.
Appendix
- A USB extension cable is being used. - Directly connect the USB memory with the multimedia
terminal in the vehicle.
- A USB which is not a Metal Cover Type - Use a standard USB Memory.
USB Memory is being used.
- An HDD type, CF, SD Memory is being - Use a standard USB Memory.

used.
- There are no music files which can be - Only MP3, WMA file formats are supported. Please use only
played. the supported music file formats.
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications
▶ General section ▶ MP3[WMA]/CD section
Power supply DC 14.4V Negative Ground Sampling frequency 8 times oversampling
Speaker impedance 4 ohm DA converter 4 DAC system
English
Max. Power 45 Watts x 4 Ch Pick-up type Astigma 3-beam

Weight 880 g (Net) Light source Semiconductor laser
Dimension(WxHxD) 178 x 52 x 155 mm Wave length 780 nm
Frequency response 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz (±3 dB)
▶ FM/MW/LW Radio section ≥50 dB
Appendix
Signal to noise ratio

FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108 MHz Total harmonic distortion ≤1 % (1 kHz)
Frequency range
AM 531 kHz ~ 1602 kHz Wow and flutter Below measurable limits
Usable sensitivity FM ≤18 dBu
Channel separation ≥35 dB
AM ≤35 dBu
Signal to noise ratio FM ≥45 dB
AM ≥40 dB ▶ Bluetooth section
Stereo separation FM ≥20 dB
Bluetooth V2.0
Core Spec.
(Bluetooth V1.2 compatible)
▶ MP3[WMA] USB section
Sensitivity - 60 dBm
Frequency response 20 Hz ~ 20 KHz Internal Memory 16 M bits Flash Memory
Total harmonic distortion 0.1 % (at 1 KHz) Higher Bandwidth Audio support
Dynamic range 85 dB (at 1 KHz) Applied function Advanced Audio Distribution Profile
Signal-to-noise ratio 60 dB (at 1 KHz) Hands-free Profile support/Private Call
Channel separation 54 dB (at 1 KHz)
Specifications and design are subject to modification without notice due to improvements.
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
GETtheMANUALS.orgAGC-9145BY/WY AGC-9146BA/WA
Español
● Lea atentamente estas instrucciones antes de utilizar este

producto y guarde este manual para usos futuros.
● Las ilustraciones e imágenes de este manual pueden diferir del
diseño real del producto.
● El diseño y las especificaciones de este producto pueden
cambiar sin previo aviso por mejoras en el producto.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Contenido
Antes de usar
Precauciones .................................................................. 2
Uso
Español
Ubicación de los controles ............................................ 4
Inicio ................................................................................ 7
Radio ............................................................................... 9
Reproductor de MP3 [WMA]/CD .................................. 11
Bluetooth ....................................................................... 14
Contenido
Reproductor USB/AUX ................................................. 18
Control de audio en el volante .................................... 20
Apéndice
Solución de problemas ................................................ 21
Especificaciones .......................................................... 24
1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauciones
▶ Información de seguridad
ADVERTENCIA: Se ha probado y comprobado que este equipo cumple con
PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O los límites de un producto láser de Clase 1, según la Parte
DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA, NO EXPONGA ESTE 15 de las Normas de la FCC.
PRODUCTO A LA LLUVIA O A LA HUMEDAD. Estos límites están diseñados para brindar una protección
PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O razonable contra una interferencia negativa en una
DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA E INTERFERENCIA MOLESTA, instalación residencial. Este equipo genera, usa y puede
UTILICE SOLAMENTE LOS COMPONENTES INCLUIDOS. irradiar energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y
utiliza conforme a las instrucciones, puede provocar
Español
interferencia dañina a las comunicaciones de radio.

PRECAUCIÓN:
Sin embargo, no existe garantía de que no ocurra
ESTE PRODUCTO ES UN PRODUCTO LÁSER CLASE 1. interferencia en una instalación determinada.
EL USO DE CONTROLES, AJUSTES O DESEMPEÑO DE Si este equipo provoca interferencia negativa para la
PROCEDIMIENTOS QUE NO SEAN LOS recepción de radio, que puede determinarse apagando o
ESPECIFICADOS AQUÍ PUEDE OCASIONAR LA
Antes de usar
encendiendo el equipo, se recomienda al usuario que

EXPOSICIÓN A RADIACIONES PELIGROSAS. consulte al distribuidor o a un técnico de radio
NO ABRA LAS TAPAS Y NO LO REPARE USTED MISMO. experimentado para obtener ayuda.
REMITA LAS REPARACIONES AL PERSONAL
CALIFICADO.
Parte 15 de otras Normas de la FCC

Advertencia de la FCC:
Cualquier cambio o modificación no autorizada en este
equipo podría anular la autoridad del usuario para operar
este dispositivo.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauciones
▶ Información de seguridad ▶ Medidas de seguridad para la manipulación
Cuando conduzca ◆ Esta unidad está diseñada únicamente para vehículos de toma a
Mantenga el nivel del volumen lo suficientemente bajo para tierra negativa de 14 V CC. No utilice un suministro de energía no
estar atento a las condiciones de la carretera y el tráfico. estándar.
Cuando lave su auto
No exponga el producto, incluyendo los altavoces y los CD, al
agua o a la humedad excesiva. Esto podría provocar
cortocircuitos, incendios u otros daños.
Cuando estacione
Estacionar directamente a la luz solar puede provocar
Español
temperaturas muy altas dentro de su auto. Deje que el interior
se enfríe antes de encender la unidad. ◆ No utilice gasolina, disolvente, benceno, solvente orgánico, etc., para
Utilice el suministro de energía apropiado limpiar la unidad.

Este producto está diseñado para operar con un sistema de
batería de toma a tierra negativa de 14 V CC. No!
Mecanismo del disco
Antes de usar
No inserte monedas u otros objetos pequeños.
Mantenga los destornilladores y otros objetos metálicos fuera
del mecanismo del disco y del disco.
Utilice centros de servicio autorizados
Este producto está hecho de piezas de precisión. No intente
desmontar o ajustar las piezas.
Consulte la lista del Centro de servicio incluida con este ◆ No presione los botones de función con fuerza. Al presionar
producto para obtener asistencia. suavemente, se pueden evitar daños.
Para la instalación
Este producto debe instalarse en posición horizontal con el
extremo frontal en un ángulo adecuado, pero no a más de 30°.
Nota:
La memoria predeterminada se borra para volver a la configuración original de No!
fábrica cuando está desconectado el conector de energía o la batería.
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ubicación de los controles
▶ Vista frontal
1. Ventana de visualización
2. Botón BAND/AS
Seleccione la función o banda de radio (presione: FM1 →
FM2 → AM → FM1 → ...), para almacenar las estacion-
es automáticamente (presione y mantenga presionado)
3. Botón SCAN/INF
Explore cada estación de forma automática, ingrese en el
modo de búsqueda de archivos (presione); cambie los
elementos de la pantalla (presione y mantenga
presionado).
Español
4. Botón MEDIOS [MEDIA]

Seleccione la reproducción del dispositivo externo
conectado (USB, AUX o audio Bluetooth).
5. Botón CONFIGURACIÓN [SET]
Ingresa al modo de configuración (estilo, tono y Bluetooth
del ecualizador).
6. Botón SINTONIZAR
- Durante la recepción de radio
Encuentre una estación manualmente (presione); busque
Uso
una estación automáticamente (presione y mantenga

presionado).
se inicia la reproducción. 13. Botones del Número [1 al 6 D+]
- Durante la reproducción de CD/USB - Durante la recepción de radio
Saltee una pista (presione); arriba/abajo para buscar 10. Botón CD button Reciba todas las estaciones almacenadas
archivos, adelante/retroceda una pista (presione y Seleccione la reproducción del CD. (presione); almacene todas las estaciones
mantenga presionado). [ ]
11. Botón EXPULSAR el disco (presione y mantenga presionado).
7. Botón LLAMAR [ ] Expulsa el disco. - Durante la reproducción de CD/USB
Reciba llamadas entrantes (presione); conecte el 2 RPT : Repite la reproducción
dispositivo Bluetooth (presione y mantenga presionado). 12. Botón ENCENDIDO [ ]/MUDO [MUTE] 3 INT : Reproducción de intro
8. Botón FINALIZAR [ ] con el dial VOLUMEN 4 RDM : Reproducción aleatoria
Finalice una llamada (presione); desconecte la conexión Enciende el equipo, silencia la radio o pausa la 5 D- : Carpeta inferior
Bluetooth (presione y mantenga presionado). reproducción del CD/USB (presione), apaga el 6 D+ : Carpeta superior
equipo (presione y mantenga presionado);
9. Ranura para el disco ajusta el volumen o selecciona el elemento de
Inserte un disco (con el lado de la etiqueta hacia arriba), configuración/búsqueda (gire).
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Ventana de visualización
[Función de radio] [Función de CD/MP3/WMA]
1 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ST RDM CLAS
ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00:01
Español
3 4 5
1. Número de canal preconfigurado 6. Indicador de Disc (Disco)

2. Indicador de Stereo (Estéreo)r 7. Indicador de Media (Medios)
CDP se ilumina cuando se carga un CD de audio.
3. Indicador Band (Banda) MP3 se ilumina cuando se carga un archivo MP3.
WMA se ilumina cuando se carga un archivo WMA.
4. Área de pantalla multifunción
8. Número de carpeta actual (directorio)
Uso
9. Número de archivo actual (pista)
10. Indicador de USB
11. Indicador de Modo de selección de carpeta
12. Indicadores de Modo de reproducción
RPT (Repetir), INT (Intro), RDM (Aleatorio)
13. Indicador de Conexión Bluetooth
14. Duración de la reproducción
15. Indicador de EQ (Ecualizador)
POP, ROCK, COUNTRY, VOZ, JAZZ, CLÁSICO
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Vista trasera
Español
Uso
1. Conector de la antena
Para conectar el cable de la antena de la radio.
2. Puerto de entrada AUX
Para conectar un conector AUX para un dispositivo de audio.
3. Puerto USB
Para conectar un conector USB para una función de servidor USB.
4. Conector de I/O (Entrada/Salida) (18 clavijas)
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
Inicio
▶ Encender y apagar la unidad ▶ Ajustar el volumen directamente
1 Gire la llave de encendido de su auto en 1 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para aumentar o
posición ACC u ON (ENCENDIDO). disminuir el nivel del volumen.
La pantalla mostrará el nivel del volumen (modo
2 Presione el botón ENCENDIDO [ ] para Audio: 00 a 45 / modo Llamada: 06 a 32).
encender la unidad.
● Si la fuente está lista, la reproducción también
comienza.
● Si apaga el equipo mientras escucha un disco/USB,
la reproducción del CD/USB comenzará donde se
Español
había interrumpido anteriormente.
● Si apaga el equipo mientras está escuchando la
radio, se seleccionará la misma estación de radio.
3 Presione y mantenga presionado el botón ▶ Silenciar el sonido rápidamente

ENCENDIDO [ ] para apagar la unidad.
● Si apagó el equipo mientras escuchaba un disco, la
próxima vez que lo encienda, la reproducción del 1 Presione el botón MUDO [MUTE] para
disco comenzará desde donde se había silenciar o pausar.
Uso
interrumpido anteriormente. Aparecerá "MUTE" o "PAUSE" en la pantalla.
Durante la reproducción del CD/USB, pause la
reproducción y silencie el sonido.
Para restablecer el sonido o reanudar la
reproducción del CD/USB, presione el botón MUDO
Apagar el equipo directamente [MUTE] o gire el dial de VOLUMEN.
◆ Al insertar un disco, conectar el dispositivo USB o presionar el botón
BAND/AS, CD o MEDIA (MEDIOS)(mientras el disco está insertado
o el dispositivo de audio USB/AUX/BT está conectado), también puede
encender el equipo y, entonces, la unidad se reproducirá.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
Inicio
▶ Seleccionar el estilo de ecualizador 2 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para seleccionar el
menú TONE (TONO), luego presione
◆Puede seleccionar uno de los 6 estilos d e ecualizador o EQ OFF (apagarlo). ENCENDIDO [ ].
1 Presione el botón CONFIGURAR [SET] para
ingresar al modo de configuración.
En la pantalla aparecen "EQ", "TONE" y "BT".
3 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para seleccionar el
elemento de Control de tono deseado, luego
presione el botón ENCENDIDO [ ].
2 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para seleccionar el ● Al girar el dial VOLUME, puede seleccionar uno de los
siguientes elementos de Control de tono.
menú EQ, luego presione el botón
BASS (GRAVE) ↔ MIDDLE (MEDIO) ↔ TREBLE
ENCENDIDO [ ].
Español
(AGUDO) ↔ BALANCE ↔ FADER (POTENCIÓMETRO)

↔ PREVIOUS (ANTERIOR) ↔ BASS ↔ (GRAVE) ↔ ....
3 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para seleccionar el 4 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para seleccionar el
estilo deseado del ecualizador, luego valor del nivel o el balance, luego presione el
presione el botón ENCENDIDO [ ]. botón ENCENDIDO [ ].
● Al rotar el dial de VOLUMEN, puede seleccionar uno
● BASS (GRAVE): ajusta el nivel de sonido de los
de los siguientes estilos de ecualizador. graves (-7 a +7).
EQ OFF (APAGAR ECUALIZADOR) ↔ POP ↔
● MIDDLE (MEDIO): ajusta el nivel de sonido de los
Uso
ROCK ↔ COUNTRY ↔ VOICE (VOZ) ↔ JAZZ ↔

CLASSIC (CLÁSICO) ↔ .... agudos (-7 a +7).
● TREBLE (AGUDO): ajusta el nivel de sonido de los
agudos (-7 a +7).
● BALANCE: ajusta el balance del sonido entre el
▶ Configurar el sonido altavoz derecho y el izquierdo (IZQUIERDO15 a
◆ Puede ajustar el nivel de los graves, los medios, los agudo s, el balance y el DERECHO15).
potenciómetro. ● FADER (POTENCIÓMETRO): ajusta la potencia del
sonido entre el altavoz derecho y el izquierdo
1 Presione el botón CONFIGURAR [SET] para (FRONTAL15 a TRASERO15).
ingresar al modo de configuración. ● PREVIOUS (ANTERIOR): vuelve al menú TONE.
En la pantalla aparecen "EQ", "TONE" y "BT".
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Sintonizar una estación ▶ Almacenar una estación manualmente
● Encender la radio ◆ Puede preconfigurar 6 estaciones para cada banda (FM1, FM2 y AM).
1 Presione el botón BAND/AS repetidamente para 1 Siga los pasos del 1 al 4 en "Sintonizar una estación" para
seleccionar la banda. sintonizar la frecuencia que desea preconfigurar.
FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1 → ....
~ 2 Presione [y mantenga
]
presionado el botón
● Sintonizar una estación manualmente Número 1 a 6 D+ durante más de 2 segundos
para seleccionar el número preconfigurado.
2 Presione el botón SINTONIZAR La frecuencia está almacenada en el número
repetidamente para sintonizar una frecuencia preconfigurado seleccionado y escuchará un bip.
Español
deseada. Para preconfigurar otra estación, repita estos pasos.
● Sintonizar una estación automáticamente
3 Presione el botón SINTONIZAR durante
más de 2 segundos, luego suéltelo. Nota
La búsqueda comenzará. ◆Si intenta almacenar otra estación en el mismo número preconfigurado, se
La sintonización se detiene automáticamente en las reemplazará la estación almacenada previamente.
estaciones cuyas señales pueden recibirse y la
Uso
estación es recibida.
● Para explorar rápidamente una estación
4 Presione el botón SCAN/INF para comenzar a
sintonizar una estación.
La unidad irá a una estación, la reproducirá durante 5
segundos y luego irá a la siguiente estación.
Cuando la unidad sintoniza la estación deseada,
presione el botón SCAN/INF para dejar de explorar.
Nota
◆ Durante la recepción de las estaciones estéreo, se enciende el indicador "ST".
◆ Cuando sintoniza estaciones mientras conduce, utilice el botón de número
preconfigurado para evitar accidentes.
9
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Almacenar estaciones automáticamente ▶ Escuchar una estación preconfigurada
◆ La unidad selecciona las estaciones con las señales más fuertes dentro de la
banda seleccionada y las almacena en orden de su frecuencia. 1 Presione el botón BAND/AS repetidamente para
◆ Se pueden almacenar hasta 6 estaciones en la banda actual. seleccionar la banda.
FM1 → FM2 → AM→ FM1 → ....
1 Presione el botón BAND/AS repetidamente para
seleccionar la banda.
FM1 → FM2 → AM→ FM1 → .... ~ 2 Presione el botón Número [1 a 6 D+] donde está
almacenada la estación deseada.
2 Presione y mantenga presionado el botón
BAND/AS durante más de 2 segundos.
Español
"AST Scanning" aparece en la pantalla.

La unidad almacena las estaciones en orden de sus
frecuencias en los botones de números.
Notas
◆ Si sólo pueden recibirse unas pocas estaciones a causa de señales débiles,
algunos botones de números mantendrán sus configuraciones anteriores.
◆ Cuando está indicado un número en la pantalla, la unidad inicia las estaciones
fuertes del que aparece actualmente.
Uso
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reproductor de MP3 [WMA]/CD
▶ Antes de la reproducción del disco ▶ Cargar un disco e iniciar la reproducción
◆ Puede reproducir discos CD-DA y MP3/WMA. 1 Inserte un disco en la
Nota: Discos disponibles ranura para discos con la
◆ CD -DA: CD-R/CD-RW
etiqueta hacia arriba.
◆ MP3/WMA: CD -R/CD-RW/CD-ROM
● La reproducción se iniciará automáticam-
◆ Esta unidad no puede reproducir los siguientes archivos;
ente después de que se reconozcan los
- Archivos MP3 codificados con formato MP3i y MP3 PRO.
datos del disco que se está cargando.
- Archivos MP3 codificados en un formato inapropiado.
● Puede tomar algo de tiempo para que empiece a reproducirse.
- Archivos MP3 codificados con Layer 1/2. ● Se reproducirán todas las pistas hasta que usted cambie la fuente o expulse el disco.
- Archivos WMA codificados con formato sin pérdidas, profesional y de
voz. Nota:
◆ No inserte un disco cuando el indicador de disco está encendido en la ventana
Español
- Archivos WMA que no están basados en audio de Windows Media. de visualización, eso significa que ya hay un disco cargado.
- Archivos WMA protegidos con DRM. ◆ Cuando el disco está en la unidad
- Archivos con datos como WAVE, ATRAC3. etc. Presione el botón de Audio CD/USB/AUX/BT repetidamente para
seleccionar el CD e iniciar la reproducción.
Precaución
◆ Los CD de 3" (8 cm) no están disponibles para esta unidad, así que no ▶ Controlar la reproducción
los inserte.
◆ No utilice discos con formas irregulares.
◆ No utilice discos que tengan un sello o etiqueta adjunta. 1 Presione el botón SINTONIZAR
repetidamente para ir a las pistas siguientes o
Uso
◆ Para no dañar el panel delantero, no lo empu °ﬂ je hacia abajo ni coloque
objetos mientras está abierto. previas.
◆ No coloque su dedo o mano en el panel delantero.
◆ No inserte objetos extraños en la ranura para discos. 2 Presione y mantenga presionado el botón
Nota SINTONIZAR para adelantar o retroceder la
◆ El equipo se encenderá automáticamente cuando el disco esté cargado. pista y suéltelo para reanudar la reproducción.
Puede que un disco con datos CD-DA y MP3/WMA no se reproduzca ◆ La función de búsqueda funciona pero la velocidad de
normalmente. (Por ejemplo, puede que se reproduzca sin sonido.) búsqueda no es constante.
◆ Mientras adelanta o retrocede, sólo puede oír sonidos
intermitentes.
3 Presione el botón 5 D- o 6 D+ repetidamente para ir
a las carpetas previas o siguientes (únicamente
para discos MP3 o WMA).
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Seleccionar los modos de reproducción ▶ Buscar la música
1 Presione el botón 2 RPT repetidamente para 1 Presione el botón SCAN/INF para ingresar al
seleccionar el modo de Repetir reproducción. modo de búsqueda de pistas.
● RPT : La pista actual se reproduce reiteradamente.
● CARPETA [ ] RPT (Únicamente para MP3/WMA): 2 Gire y mantenga el dial VOLUMEN para
Todas las carpetas actuales se reproducen seleccionar el número o el nombre de la pista
reiteradamente. deseada, luego presione el botón ENCENDIDO
● desactivado : Cancela Repetir reproducción. [ ] para comenzar a reproducir la pista
seleccionada.
2 Presione el botón 3 INT repetidamente para
Español
seleccionar el modo de lectura de exploración de

intro.
● CARPETA [ ] INT (únicamente para MP3/WMA):
Reproduce exitosamente la intro de la pista en la ▶ Mostrar la información de la carpeta
carpeta actual.
● INT : Reproduce exitosamente la intro de la pista en el 1 Presione y mantenga presionado el botón SCAN
disco. /INF para mostrar la información de la carpeta
● desactivado : Cancela la reproducción de intro. actual durante 5 segundos.
Uso
3 Presione el botón 4 RDM repetidamente para ● Para encender/apagar la función de desplazar

seleccionar el modo de Reproducción aleatoria. ◆ Active/desactive la función de desplazar para visualizar el rendimiento.
● CARPETA [ ] RDM (únicamente para MP3/WMA) :
Las pistas de la carpeta actual se reproducen en orden
2 Mientras se muestra la información de la carpeta,
aleatorio. presione y mantenga presionado el botón
● RDM : Las pistas del disco se reproducen en orden SCAN/INF para mostrar los botones SCROLL
aleatorio. ON (DESPLAZAMIENTO ACTIVADO) u OFF
● desactivado : Cancela la reproducción aleatoria. (DESPLAZAMIENTO DESACTIVADO).
Nota: Cambio de la fuente 3 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para cambiar a OFF u

Si cambia la fuente, la reproducción también se detiene (sin expulsar el disco). ON, luego presione el botón ENCENIDO [ ].
La próxima vez que seleccione "CD" como fuente de reproducción, el disco
comenzará a reproducirse desde donde se había interrumpido anteriormente.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Detener la reproducción y expulsar el disco ▶ Acerca de MP3/WMA
Esta unidad puede reproducir archivos MP3/WMA con código de
1 Presione el botón extensión <.mp3> o <.wma> (sin distinción de mayúsculas o
EXPULSAR [ ] y minúsculas)
extraiga el disco. Esta unidad puede mostrar los nombres de los álbumes, los artistas
(intérpretes) y la etiqueta (Versión 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 ó 2.4) para archivos
Nota: Expulsar un disco MP3 y WMA.
Si no se quita el disco expulsado en 10 segundos, el mismo volverá a insertarse Esta unidad sólo puede mostrar caracteres de un byte, ningún otro
automáticamente en la ranura de carga para protegerlo del polvo. (El disco no se caracter puede mostrarse correctamente.
reproducirá esta vez). Esta unidad puede reproducir archivos MP3/WMA que cumplen con las
siguientes condiciones;
▶ Acerca de CD -R/CD-RW - Velocidad de bits:
Español
8 Kbps ~ 320 Kbps para MP3/ 64 Kbps ~ 161 Kbps (VBR) para WMA
Utilice únicamente los CD-R o CD-RW "finalizados". - Frecuencia de muestreo:
Esta unidad sólo puede reproducir archivos del mismo tipo que son los 48 KHz, 44,1 kHz, 32 KHz (para MPEG-1 Layer 2/3)
que se detectan primero si un disco incluye archivos de audio en CD 24 KHz, 22,05 kHz, 16 KHz (para MPEG-2 Layer 2/3)
(CD-DA) y MP3/WMA. 12 KHz, 11,025 kHz, 8 KHz (para MPEG-2,5 Layer 3)
Esta unidad puede reproducir discos multisesión; sin embargo, las
- Formato de disco: ISO/IEC 11172-3, ISO/IEC 13818-3
sesiones abiertas serán salteadas durante la reproducción. El número máximo de caracteres para los nombres de archivo/carpeta
Puede que algunos CD-R o CD-RW no se reproduzcan en esta unidad
varía según el formato de disco utilizado (incluye 4 caracteres de
debido a sus características de disco, o por las siguientes razones; extensión - <mp3> o <wma>).
- Los discos están sucios o rayados.
Uso
- ISO 9660 Nivel 1: hasta 12 caracteres
- Se produce condensación de humedad en la lente dentro de la unidad. - ISO 9660 Nivel 2: hasta 31 caracteres
- La lente de captación dentro de la unidad está sucia. - Romeo: hasta 128 caracteres
- CD-R/CD-RW cuyos archivos están escritos con el método "Packet - Joliet: hasta 64 caracteres
Write". - Nombre largo de archivo de Windows: hasta 128 caracteres
- Condiciones de grabación (falta de datos, etc.) o condiciones de medios La unidad puede reproducir archivos grabados en VBR (velocidad de
(manchas, rayones, combado, etc.) inadecuadas. bits variable). Los archivos grabados en VBR tienen una discrepancia en
Puede que los CD-RW requieran más tiempo de lectura ya que la
la visualización del tiempo transcurrido y no muestra el tiempo real.
reflectancia de los CDRW es más baja que la de los CD normales. Luego de realizar la función de búsqueda, esta diferencia se hace
No utilice los siguientes CD-R o CD-RW; evidente.
- Discos con adhesivos, etiquetas o sellos protectores pegados en la La unidad puede reconocer un total de 512 archivos, 200 carpetas y 8
superficie. jerarquías.
- Discos en los cuales las etiquetas pueden imprimirse directamente por
medio de una impresora de chorro a tinta. Nota
Utilizando estos discos en altas temperaturas o alta humedad puede Microsoft y Windows Media son marcas registradas o marcas de Microsoft
provocar fallas o daños a la unidad. Corporation en los Estados Unidos y/u otros países.
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
- Si su teléfono no encuentra a "New Rexton" u "SSANGYONG", repita los
▶ Operación de Bluetooth pasos 1 y 2.
Para usar la función de Bluetooth, es necesario el siguiente procedimiento. 3 Si se necesita un clave de entrada en la pantalla de un
1. Emparejamiento dispositivo conectado, ingrese "00xx" (4 dígitos).
Cuando conecta los dispositivos Bluetooth por primera vez, se requiere un Esta unidad y el dispositivo Bluetooth memorizan la información de
registro mutuo. Esto se llama "emparejamiento". Este registro (emparejamiento) cada uno y cuando se realiza el emparejamiento, la unidad está lista
se requiere sólo la primera vez, ya que la próxima vez esta unidad y otros para conectarse con el dispositivo.
dispositivos se reconocerán entre sí automáticamente. (Dependiendo del Después de completarse el emparejamiento, aparece el indicador
dispositivo, puede que necesite ingresar un código para cada conexión.) "BT CONNECT" (CONEXIÓN BT) y "Bluetooth device model name"
2. Conexión (nombre del modelo del dispositivo Bluetooth) o "BT MOBILE"
A veces el emparejamiento permite la conexión automática. Para utilizar el (TELÉFONO MÓVIL BT) con " ".
dispositivo luego de que se haga el emparejamiento, inicie la conexión. - Algunos dispositivos Bluetooth le piden aceptar "BT link" (conexión BT) o
3. Manos libres/Reproducción continua de música "Connect" (conectar). Introduzca "Yes" (sí) u "OK" (aceptar).
Español
Puede llamar a un teléfono móvil y escuchar música cuando se establece la * La clave de entrada se puede llamar "contraseña", "código de PIN",
conexión. "número de PIN" etc., dependiendo del dispositivo.
Puede que algunos dispositivos Bluetooth no sean compatibles con las
funciones específicas.
4 Configure el dispositivo Bluetooth para conectarlo a esta
unidad.
Nota: El modo de espera de emparejamiento no se desactiva hasta que se
▶ Emparejar su teléfono y el sistema de sonido de su automóvil establezca la conexión.
Primero, vincule ("empareje") un dispositivo Bluetooth (teléfono móvil, etc.)
con esta unidad. Puede emparejar hasta 6 dispositivos. Una vez establecido el
▶ Conectar un teléfono móvil
Uso
emparejamiento, no hay necesidad de hacerlo de nuevo. - Los dispositivos se registran una vez que se emparejan y conectan con esta
Coloque el dispositivo Bluetooth dentro de los 3 m (9 pies) de esta unidad. unidad. Puede seleccionar el dispositivo registrado y conectarlo.
- Si ya se ha logrado un emparejamiento, comience la operación desde aquí.
1 Presione y mantenga presionado el botón - Dependiendo del dispositivo, la conexión puede comenzar automáticamente
LLAMAR [ ] durante más de 3 segundos. después del emparejamiento.
La unidad ingresa al modo de espera de emparejamiento.
En la pantalla aparece "EMPAREJAMIENTO" con un
pitido y luego "KEY 00xx".
1 Conéctese a esta unidad utilizando su teléfono
móvil y presione LLAMAR [ ].
2 Configure el dispositivo Bluetooth para buscar esta unidad. Aparece el ícono "BT CONNECT" con " " y se activa
En la pantalla del dispositivo conectado aparece una lista de la señal del Bluetooth.
dispositivos detectados. Esta unidad se visualiza como "New Nota
Rexton" u "SSANGYONG" en el dispositivo conectado.
Confírmelo presionando “YES” (SÍ) u “OK” (ACEPTAR) en su Para mostrar la información del dispositivo
teléfono. Bluetooth conectado, presione el botón SCAN/INF.
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Realizar una llamada a través de la última llamada ▶ Finalizar una llamada
Puede realizar una llamada desde el teléfono móvil conectado operando esta
unidad.
1 Presione el botón FINALIZAR [ ].
1 Presione y mantenga presionado el botón Nota:

◆ Incluso si finaliza la llamada, no se cancela la conexión
LLAMAR [ ] durante más de 3 segundos para
Bluetooth.
ingresar al modo de marcado de la última
llamada.
Aparece "REDIAL" (VOLVER A MARCAR) y se vuelve
a marcar el número.
▶ Ajustar el volumen
Español
▶ Recibir una llamada 1 Gire el dial Rotar VOLUMEN para aumentar o
Cuando recibe una llamada, el tono del timbre se emite desde los altavoces de disminuir el nivel del volumen.
su auto y el número de la persona que llama aparece en la pantalla. La pantalla mostrará el nivel del volumen del
Bluetooth. (BT VOL 6 ~ 32)
1 Cuando entra una llamada, aparece "CALL IN"
(LLAMADA ENTRANTE) y "Número de teléfono"
con un tono de timbre, presione el botón
Uso
LLAMAR [ ] para contestar una llamada.
Aparece "BT TEL" y se inicia la llamada.
El micrófono incorporado del sistema de audio captará
▶ Silenciar el sonido de charla
su voz.
1 Presione el botón MUDO [MUTE]en el control
Para rechazar una llamada entrante, presione el de audio en el volante para activar la función
botón FINALIZAR [ ]. de micrófono mudo.
Aparecerá "CALL REJECT" (LLAMADA RECHAZADA)
y volverá a la función anterior. La pantalla mostrará "MIC MUTE" (MICRÓFONO
MUDO).
Para cancelar la función de micrófono mudo,
presione el botón MUDO en el control de audio en
el volante "MIC MUTE" desaparece.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Transferir una llamada ▶ Escuchar música desde un dispositivo Bluetooth
Para activar/desactivar el dispositivo apropiado (esta unidad/teléfono móvil), Puede escuchar música de un teléfono móvil en esta unidad si el mismo es
verifique lo siguiente. compatible con la tecnología A2DP (Perfil de distribución de audio avanzado)
del Bluetooth.
1 Durante una llamada con manos libres 1 Encienda la señal del Bluetooth de su teléfono móvil o
Bluetooth, presione el botón LLAMAR [ ] La
función manos libres está desactivada, y el dispositivo de audio.
Aparece "Stereo Headset" (Auricular estéreo) cuando la conexión
micrófono y el altavoz del teléfono móvil están está establecida.
activados.
Aparece "PRIVATE" (PRIVADO) y se inicia la llamada
telefónica. 2 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para disminuir el nivel del
Español
volumen de esta unidad.

Durante una llamada por teléfono móvil, presione
el botón LLAMAR [ ] Se activa la función
manos libres Bluetooth. 3 Presione el botón MEDIOS [MEDIA]
Aparece "BT TEL " y se inicia la llamada con manos repetidamente hasta que aparezca "BT AUDIO".
libres.
Para obtener detalles sobre el funcionamiento del teléfono
móvil, consulte el manual del mismo. 4 Opere el dispositivo de audio para iniciar la reproducción.
Puede cambiar el volumen y saltear la pista utilizando los botones de
Uso
Nota: esta unidad. (Consulte la sección “Reproductor de MP3 [WMA]/CD”)

◆ Dependiendo del teléfono móvil, la conexión manos libres puede
interrumpirse al intentar transferir una llamada.
5 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para ajustar el nivel del
volumen de esta unidad.
6 Para dejar de escuchar música, presione y

mantenga presionado el botón FINALIZAR [ ]
o presione BAND/AS, MEDIA (MEDIOS) o CD
para seleccionar otra función.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
● DELETE (ELIMINAR): elimina un dispositivo
▶ Configurar el modo Bluetooth Bluetooth.
◆ Puede controlar los modos Bluetooth. ● PREVIOUS (ANTERIOR): vuelve al menú BT.
1 Presione el botón CONFIGURAR [SET] para

ingresar al modo de configuración. ● En caso de seleccionar PAIR (EMPAREJAMIENTO)
Aparecen "EQ", "TONE" y "BT".
5 Sigua los pasos 2 a 4 en la página 14
"Emparejar su teléfono y el sistema sonido
2 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para seleccionar el de su automóvil" para completar el
menú BT, luego presione el botón emparejamiento.
ENCENDIDO [ ].
Español
3 Gire el dial VOLUMENpara seleccionar el ● En caso de seleccionar DELETE (ELIMINAR)
Elemento de configuración de Bluetooth
deseado, luego presione el botón 5 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para seleccionar "YES
ENCENDIDO [ ]. (SI)" o "NO", luego presione el botón
ENCENDIDO [ ].
● Girando el dial VOLUMEN, puede seleccionar uno de
los siguientes elementos de configuración de YES (SÍ): Elimina la lista seleccionada de dispositivos
Bluetooth. Bluetooth.
PAIR (EMPAREJAR) ↔ SELECT (SELECCIONAR) ↔ NO: Cancela la operación Eliminar.
Uso
PRIORITY (PRIORIDAD) ↔ DELETE (ELIMINAR) ↔
PREVIOUS (ANTERIOR) ↔ PAIR (EMPAREJAR) ↔
...
4 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para seleccionar la

lista de dispositivos o ajustar el valor, luego
presione el botón ENCENDIDO [ ].
● PAIR (EMPAREJAR): ingrese el emparejamiento
(Código: 00xx).
● SELECT (SELECCIONAR): selecciona uno de los 5
dispositivos Bluetooth para la conexión..
● PRIORITY (PRIORIDAD): selecciona la prioridad de
conexión.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reproductor USB/AUX Las funciones del reproductor USB/AUX corresponden únicamente a los
modelos AGC-9145BY/WY. Los modelos AGC-9146BA/WA no las admiten.
▶ Reproducir un dispositivo USB ▶ Precauciones para manejar el dispositivo USB

Al conectar un dispositivo USB al puerto USB en la unidad, ● Al utilizar el dispositivo USB externo, asegúr- USB. Tales diferencias en el tiempo requerido
puede escucharlo en los altavoces de su automóvil, mientras ese de mantener desconectado el dispositivo y no son indicaciones de un mal
controla el dispositivo USB desde a unidad. sólo conéctelo un tiempo después de encender funcionamiento. Espere el período de tiempo
el vehículo. El dispositivo USB se puede requerido para reconocer el dispositivo.
1 Presione y mantenga presionado dañar si se encuentra conectado al encender el
vehículo. (El dispositivo USB no es un
● El dispositivo admite solamente dispositivos
USB utilizados para reproducir archivos de
el botón ENCENDIDO [ ] para componente automotriz electrónico.) música.
apagar la unidad. ● Es posible que algunos dispositivos USB no ● No utilice el I/F del USB para cargar las
funcionen adecuadamente debido a problemas baterías o los accesorios del USB que generan
de compatibilidad. calor. Tales acciones pueden causar el
2 Conecte el dispositivo de Verifique que el dispositivo externo sea deterioro del rendimiento o daños al
Español
almacenamiento USB con compatible con el dispositivo antes de dispositivo.

los archivos MP3/WMA a comenzar a usarlo. ● Es posible que el dispositivo no reconozca al
● El dispositivo sólo reconocerá los dispositivos dispositivo USB si se utilizan hubs y cables
reproducirse en la terminal USB formateados en FAT o FAT32. de extensión del USB comprados por
del puerto USB. (Formato NTFS no es compatible.) separado.
La unidad se enciende, luego se Al dar formato al dispositivo USB externo, es ● En el caso de dispositivos USB de alta
inicia la reproducción automátic- posible que el dispositivo no reconozca capacidad, existen instancias en las cuales las
amente con la indicación "USB" adecuadamente una selección de Byte/Sector unidades lógicas se dividen para la
distinta de 512Byte o 2048Byte. comodidad del usuario. En este caso, sólo
después de reconocer los datos ● Evite el contacto de las partes del cuerpo y será posible reproducir música del USB en la
del dispositivo de almacenamie- unidad del nivel superior. Al utilizar unidades
Uso
sustancias extrañas con el conector USB.

nto USB. ● El conectar/desconectar repetidamente el USB divididas, guarde las canciones que desea
durante un corto período de tiempo puede reproducir en el dispositivo sólo en la unidad
3 Cuando el dispositivo de dañar el dispositivo. lógica superior. Además, algunos dispositivos
almacenamiento USB ya esté ● Al desconectar el USB, escuchará USB están configurados con una unidad
ocasionalmente un sonido anormal. independiente utilizada para instalar los
conectado, presione el botón programas de aplicación y es posible que no
● Si desconecta en forma abrupta el dispositivo
MEDIOS [MEDIA] repetidamente USB externo mientras el USB está funciona- permita la reproducción de canciones desde
hasta que aparezca "USB". ndo, puede causar daños o el funcionamiento dichas unidades por las razones descritas
La reproducción del USB comenzará anormal del dispositivo. anteriormente.
automáticamente. ● Es posible que el dispositivo no funcione de
Asegúrese de desconectar el dispositivo USB
sólo después de apagar el audio o cuando el manera normal al utilizar formatos tales como
Puede cambiar el volumen, el modo de reproducción y la de tipo HDD, CF o memoria SD.
selección de pista audio esté funcionando en un modo distinto.
● La cantidad de tiempo requerida para ● El dispositivo no admitirá archivos
utilizando los botones que están en el panel de control. bloqueados con DRM (Administración de
reconocer el dispositivo USB externo puede
(Consulte la sección “Reproductor de MP3 [WMA]/CD”) diferir dependiendo del tipo, tamaño o derechos digitales).
18 formato de los archivos almacenados en el
GETtheMANUALS.org
Las funciones del reproductor USB/AUX corresponden únicamente a los modelos
Reproductor USB/AUX AGC-9145BY/WY. Los modelos AGC-9146BA/WA no las admiten.
▶ Escuchar un equipo de audio auxiliar

Al conectar un dispositivo de audio portátil opcional a la entrada AUX (mini
enchufe estéreo) en la unidad y luego simplemente seleccionar la fuente, podrá
escuchar el audio en los altavoces de su automóvil. El nivel del volumen es
ajustable para cualquier diferencia entre la unidad y el dispositivo de audio
portátil.
1 Baje el volumen de la unidad.
Español
2 Apague el equipo de audio externo.
Conecte la salida de audio del equipo de
audio externo a la terminal de entrada AUX
en la unidad.
Asegúrese de ajustar el volumen
para cada dispositivo de audio
conectado antes de la reproducción.
Uso
3 Inicie la reproducción del equipo de audio
externo a un volumen moderado.
4 Presione MEDIOS [MEDIA] repetidamente

hasta que aparezca "AUX IN".
Cuando el equipo de audio externo ya esté
conectado, omita los pasos del 1 al 3.
5 Configure su volumen habitual en la unidad.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Control de audio en el volante
▶ Utilizar el control de audio en el volante
Si su vehículo tiene esta característica, algunos controles de audio pueden ajustarse desde el volante.
Incluyen lo siguiente:
▲ VOL ▼ MODE
Presione: aumentar/disminuir el volumen. ● Presione: selecciona las funciones (CD →
USB → AUX → BT Audio → RADIO...)
▲ SEEK ▼ ● Presione y mantenga presionado: selecciona
Mientras se escucha una estación la banda (FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1...)

● Presione: vaya a la estación preconfigurada
MUTE
siguiente/anterior.
Español
● Presione y mantenga presionado: busque

Durante una llamada
la estación de radio siguiente/anterior. (La Presione: enciende el micrófono. Función
radio busca sólo las estaciones con una MUTE encendida/apagada
señal fuerte que estén en la banda Durante el modo radio o audio CD/USB/BT
seleccionada) Presione: silencia la radio o pausa la
Durante una reproducción de CD/USB/BT reproducción del CD/USB.
● Presione: vaya a la pista siguiente/anterior.
● Presione y mantenga presionado:
Teléfono [ ]
Durante la espera
Uso
adelante/retroceda las pistas. (sólo para

reproducción de CD/USB) Presione y mantenga presionado: realiza una
llamada a través de la función de marcación
PWR [ ] de la última llamada
Presione: enciende/apaga el sistema o Durante una llamada entrante
cambia al modo de llamada privada para ● Presione: recibe una llamada entrante
una llamada entrante. ● Presione y mantenga presionado: rechaza una
llamada entrante
Durante una llamada
● Presione: cambia al modo llamada privada o
por bluetooth.
● Presione y mantenga presionado: finaliza una
llamada
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
Solución de problemas
▶ Común
Síntomas Causas posibles Soluciones posibles
- No se genera sonido. - MUTE está configurado en ON. - Configure MUTE en OFF.
- Ruido - Hay un generador de ondas - Mantenga los generadores de ondas electromagnéticos como
electromagnéticas como un teléfono teléfonos celulares alejados de la unidad y de los cables de la
celular cerca de la unidad o de sus líneas misma. Si no se puede eliminar el ruido debido al arnés de
eléctricas. cableado del automóvil, consulte con su distribuidor.
- El (los) altavoz(ces) no - La configuración del balance/ - Reajuste el balance/potenciómetro.
emite(n) sonido potenciómetro no es adecuada.
Español
▶ Radio
Apéndice
- Recepción débil o ruido - Condiciones de transmisión insuficientes. - Reciba y escuche las señales de la estación correspondiente en
el modo analógico.
- Tarda mucho en buscar. - El número de estaciones admisibles es - Muévase a un área con el mayor número de estaciones
menor a 6. admisibles e intente preconfigurar.
- El número de estaciones - El contacto del cable de la batería es - Asegúrese de que el cable de la batería esté conectado de
preconfiguradas automática- pobre, o el cable de la batería no siempre forma segura, y preconfigure las estaciones otra vez.
mente es menor a 6. funciona.
- No se pueden almacenar las - La búsqueda digital puede tardar. - Cambie a búsqueda automática y proceda a buscar
estaciones preconfiguradas. nuevamente.
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Reproductor de MP3 [WMA]/CD
- No hay reproducción o disco - El disco está insertado al revés. - Inserte el disco correctamente.
expulsado
- Hay una falla u objeto extraño en el disco. - Extraiga los objetos extraños o utilice un disco sin fallas.
- El disco tiene datos con un formato que no - Consulte la descripción acerca de MP3/WMA para datos de
se puede reproducir. sonido que se pueden reproducir, excepto CD-DA (por ej., CD
de música).
- La unidad reproduce la pista ROM de un - Saltee la pista ROM.
Español
CD modo mixto.
- Los CD-R/RW que se - La capacidad de reproducción de algunos - Haga CD-R/RW en diferentes combinaciones de medios,
pueden reproducir en otros CDR/RW puede depender de la software de grabación y grabadoras luego de consultar la
dispositivos, no se pueden combinación de medios, software de descripción de MP3/WMA.
reproducir en esta unidad. grabación y grabadoras a utilizarse incluso
si estos CDR/RW pueden reproducirse en
otros dispositivos como una computadora
Apéndice
personal.
- Saltos de sonido o ruido - Hay una falla u objeto extraño en el disco. - Extraiga el objeto extraño o utilice un disco sin fallas. Para
MP3/WMA, consulte la descripción de los mismos.
- Saltos de sonido debido a - La unidad no está lo suficientemente - Asegure la unidad a la caja de la consola con la correa de
vibraciones asegurada. soporte trasera, etc.
- La unidad está inclinada a más de 30°∆ - Haga un ángulo de 30° o menos.
en dirección de adelante hacia atrás.
- No se puede expulsar el - Hay una etiqueta despegada del CD en la - Consulte las reparaciones con el distribuidor donde compró la
disco unidad. unidad.
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Reproductor de MP3[WMA] USB
- El USB no funciona - La memoria USB está dañada. - Utilícelo después de dar formato al USB en formato FAT o
FAT32. (Formato NTFS no es compatible.)
- Se ha contaminado la memoria USB. - Elimine cualquier sustancia extraña en la superficie de
contacto de la memoria USB y la terminal multimedia.
- Se está utilizando un HUB de USB - Conecte la memoria USB directamente con la terminal
comprado por separado. multimedia del vehículo.
Español
- Se está utilizando un cable de extensión - Conecte la memoria USB directamente con la terminal
USB. multimedia del vehículo.
- Se está utilizando un USB que no es del - Utilice una memoria USB estándar.
tipo de memoria USB Metal Cover.
- Se está utilizando una memoria de tipo - Utilice una memoria USB estándar.
HDD, CF, SD.
Apéndice
- No hay archivos de música para - Sólo se admiten formatos de archivos MP3 y WMA. Utilice
reproducir. solamente los formatos de archivos compatibles.
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Especificaciones
▶ Sección general ▶ Sección MP3 [WMA]/CD
Suministro de energía Toma a tierra negativa de 14.4V CC Frecuencia de muestreo Sobremuestreo, 8 veces
Impedancia de altavoces 4 ohm Conversor de DA Sistema 4 DAC
Potencia máxima 45 Watts x 4 Ch Tipo de recogida Astigma de 3 haces
Peso 880 g (Neto) Fuente de luz Láser semiconductor
Dimensión longitud de onda 780 mn
(ancho x alto x profundidad) 178 x 52 x 155 mm
Repuesta en frecuencia 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz (±3 dB)
Relación señal ruido ≥50 dB
Español
▶ Sección Radio FM/MW/LW

Distorsión armónica total ≤1 % (1 kHz)
Rango de frecuencia FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108 MHz Lloro y fluctuación Por debajo de los límites mensurables
AM 531 kHz ~ 1602 kHz
FM ≤18 dBu Separación de canales ≥35 dB
Sensibilidad útil
AM ≤35 dBu
FM ≥45 dB
Apéndice
Relación señal ruido

AM ≥40 dB
▶ Sección Bluetooth
Separación estérea FM ≥20 dB Especificaciones Bluetooth V2.0
centrales (Compatible con Bluetooth V1.2)
▶ Sección MP3[WMA] USB Sensibilidad - 60 dBm
Memoria Interna Memoria Flash de 16 M bits
Repuesta en frecuencia 20 Hz ~ 20 KHz
Distorsión armónica total 0.1 % (en 1 KHz) Soporte de audio con mayor ancho de banda
Función aplicada Perfil de distribución de audio avanzado
Alcance dinámico 85 dB (en 1 KHz)
Soporte de perfil de manos libres/llamada
Relación señal ruido 60 dB (en 1 KHz) privada
Separación de canales 54 dB (en 1 KHz)
Las especificaciones y el diseño están sujetos a modificaciones sin previo aviso debido a mejoras.
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
Português
● Por favor, leia estas instruções cuidadosamente antes de utilizar o

produto e guarde este manual para uso posterior.
● As ilustrações e figuras deste manual podem ser diferentes do
verdadeiro design do produto.
● O design e as especificações deste produto podem ser alterados
sem prévio aviso, para fins de melhoria do produto.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Índice
Antes da utilização
Precauções ..................................................................... 2
Utilização
Localização de controles ............................................... 4
Iniciando .......................................................................... 7
Rádio ............................................................................... 9
Reprodutor de CD/MP3 [WMA] .................................... 11
Português
Bluetooth ....................................................................... 14
Reprodutor USB/AUX ................................................... 18
Controle de áudio tipo volante .................................... 20
Apêndice
Resolução de Problemas ............................................. 21
Índice
Especificações ............................................................. 24
1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauções
▶ Informações de segurança
ADVERTÊNCIA: Este equipamento foi testado e obedece aos limites de um
PARA REDUZIR OS RISCOS DE INCÊNDIO OU CHOQUE produto a laser Classe 1, conforme a Cláusula 15 das
ELÉTRICO, NÃO EXPONHA ESTE PRODUTO À CHUVA Regulamentações da FCC.
OU À UMIDADE. Estes limites destinam-se a fornecer uma proteção razoável
PARA REDUZIR OS RISCOS DE INCÊNDIO OU CHOQUE contra a interferência prejudicial de um ambiente
ELÉTRICO, ALÉM DE INTERFERÊNCIAS INDESEJADAS, residencial.
UTILIZE APENAS OS COMPONENTES INCLUSOS. Este equipamento gera, utiliza e pode irradiar a energia da
frequência de rádio e, caso não seja instalado e utilizado de
acordo com as instruções, poderá causar interferências
CUIDADO: prejudiciais às comunicações via rádio.
ESTE É UM PRODUTO A LASER CLASSE 1. No entanto, não há garantias de que não ocorra essa
O USO DOS CONTROLES OU AJUSTES, OU A interferência em um determinado ambiente.
EXECUÇÃO DE PROCEDIMENTOS DIFERENTES Se este equipamento realmente causar uma interferência
Português Antes da utilização
DAQUELES ESPECIFICADOS NESTE MANUAL PODERÁ prejudicial à recepção via rádio, que pode ser determinada
RESULTAR EM EXPOSIÇÃO AO PERIGO DE RADIAÇÃO. ao ligar ou desligar o equipamento, recomenda-se que o
NÃO ABRA AS TAMPAS NEM REALIZE REPAROS POR usuário consulte o revendedor ou um técnico em rádio para
CONTA PRÓPRIA. buscar ajuda.
PROCURE A ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA DE
PROFISSIONAIS QUALIFICADOS.
Cláusula 15 das Regulamentações da FCC

Advertência da FCC:
Quaisquer alterações ou modificações não autorizadas
neste equipamento cancelam o direito de utilização deste
dispositivo pelo usuário.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauções
▶ Informações de segurança ▶ Usando as precauções de segurança
Ao dirigir ◆ Esta unidade é projetada apenas para veículos com aterramento
Mantenha o nível de volume suficientemente baixo para estar negativo de 14V DC. Não use fontes de energia elétrica fora do
ciente das condições da estrada e do tráfego. padrão.
Ao lavar seu carro
Não exponha o produto, inclusive os alto-falantes e CDs, à água
ou à umidade excessiva. Isso poderia provocar choques
elétricos, incêndio ou outros danos.
Ao estacionar
O estacionamento diretamente exposto à luz solar pode
produzir temperaturas altíssimas no interior do veículo. Dê um
tempo para resfriar o interior do veículo, antes de ligar o ◆ Não use gasolina, thinner, benzeno, solvente orgânico, etc., para
aparelho. limpar a unidade.
Utilize a fonte de energia adequada
Este produto é projetado para operar em um sistema de
baterias de 14 V DC, com aterramento negativo. No!
Português Antes da utilização

Mecanismo do disco
Não insira moedas ou outros objetos pequenos.
Mantenha chaves de fenda e outros objetos metálicos longe do
disco e do mecanismo do disco.
Utilize as Centrais de Atendimento autorizadas
Este produto é fabricado com peças de precisão.
Não tente desmontar ou ajustar quaisquer peças. ◆ Não pressione excessivamente os botões de função. Pressionando
Favor consultar a lista de Centrais de Atendimento que
suavemente, podem-se evitar danos.
acompanha o produto para assistência técnica.
Na instalação
Este produto deve ser instalado em posição horizontal, com a
extremidade frontal para cima em um ângulo conveniente,
porém, não superior a 30°.
Observação:
No!
A memória pré-definida se apaga e volta à configuração original de fábrica,
quando o cabo de energia ou a bateria é desconectada.
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Localização de controles
▶ Visão frontal
1. Janela do visor
2. Botão BANDA/A.A. [BAND/AS]
Seleciona a função ou banda do rádio (pressione: FM1 →
FM2 → AM → FM1 → ....) para armazenar as estações
automaticamente (pressione e segure)
3. Botão BUSCA/INF [SCAN/INF]
Buscar automaticamente em cada estação, entrar no
modo de busca de arquivos (pressionar); alternar os itens
de exibição (pressionar e segurar).
4. Botão MÍDIA [MEDIA]
Selecionar a reprodução do dispositivo externo conectado
(USB, AUX ou Áudio via Bluetooth).
5. Botão CONFIGURAR [SET]
Entra no modo de configuração (Estilo de EQ, Tom e
Bluetooth).
Português
6. Botão SINTONIZAR
- Durante a recepção do rádio
Encontrar uma estação manualmente (pressionar); buscar
uma estação manualmente (pressionar e segurar).
- Durante a reprodução de CD/USB
Pular uma faixa (pressionar); comandos para cima/para 10. Botão CD 13. Botões de Números [1 a 6 D+]
baixo para busca de arquivo, avanço/ retrocesso rápido de Selecionar a reprodução do CD. - Durante a recepção do rádio
uma faixa (pressionar e segurar). Receber cada estação armazenada
11. Botão EJETAR disco [ ] (pressionar); armazenar cada estação
7. Botão LIGAR [ ] Ejeta o disco.
Utilização
(pressionar e segurar).
Receber uma chamada (pressionar); conectar o 12. Botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ]/SEM ÁUDIO - Durante a reprodução de CD/USB
dispositivo Bluetooth (pressionar e segurar). 2 RPT (REPETIR): Repetir a reprodução
[MUTE] com regulagem de VOLUME
8. Botão FINALIZAR [ ] Ligar o aparelho, ativar a função "sem áudio" 3 INT (INTRODUZIR): Introduzir a reprodução
Finalizar uma chamada (pressionar); liberar a conexão ou pausar reprodução de CD/USB 4 RDM (ALEATÓRIA): Reprodução aleatória
Bluetooth (pressionar e segurar). ligada/desligada (pressionar), desconectar a 5 D- : Pastas abaixo
9. Slot de disco alimentação (pressionar e segurar); ajusta o 6 D+ : Pastas acima
Inserir um disco (lado do rótulo para cima), a reprodução é volume ou seleciona o item para
iniciada. configuração/busca (girar).
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Janela do visor
[Função rádio] [Função CD/MP3/WMA]
1 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ST RDM CLAS
ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00:01
3 4 5
1. Número do canal predefinido 6. Indicador de disco

2. Indicador de estéreo 7. Indicador de mídia
O indicador CDP acende quando um CD de áudio é carregado.
Português
3. Indicador de banda O indicador MP3 acende quando um arquivo MP3 é carregado.
O indicador WMA acende quando um arquivo WMA é carregado.
4. Área do visor multifuncional
8. Número do (diretório) da pasta atual
9. Número da (faixa) da pasta atual
10. Indicador de USB
11. Indicador do modo de seleção de pastas
12. Indicadores do modo de reprodução
Utilização
RPT (Repetir), INT (Introduzir), RDM (Aleatória)
13. Indicador de conexão Bluetooth
14. Tempo de reprodução
15. Indicador de EQ (Equalizador)
POP, ROCK, COUNTRY, VOZ, JAZZ, CLÁSSICO
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Visão traseira
Português
1. Plugue da antena
Para conexão do cabo da antena de rádio.
2. Porta de entrada AUX (AUXILIAR)
Utilização
Para a conexão feita através de dispositivo de áudio com conector AUX (AUXILIAR).
3. Porta USB
Para uma conexão de unidade USB para a função de entrada USB.
4. Conector de E/S (Entrada/Saída) (18 pin)
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
Iniciando
▶ Ligar/desligar a unidade ▶ Ajustando diretamente o volume
1 Gire a chave da ignição do seu carro para a 1 Gire o regulador de VOLUME para aumentar
posição ACC ou ON . ou diminuir o nível do volume.
O visor exibirá o nível do volume (Modo áudio: 00 a
2 Pressione o botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ] para 45 / Modo chamada: 06 a 32).
ligar a unidade.
● Se a fonte estiver pronta, será iniciada a
reprodução.
● Se você desligar a alimentação enquanto estiver
ouvindo um disco/USB, a reprodução será
retomada a partir do ponto em que foi interrompida
anteriormente.
● Se você desligou a alimentação enquanto ouvia o
rádio, será selecionada a mesma estação de rádio.
3 Pressione e segure o botão ALIMENTAÇÃO ▶ Ativação rápida da função "sem áudio"
Português
[ ] para desligar a unidade.
● Se você desligou a alimentação enquanto estava 1 Pressione o botão SEM ÁUDIO [MUTE] para
ouvindo um disco, da próxima vez que você ligar a ativar a função "sem áudio" ou pausa.
alimentação, a reprodução do disco será iniciada a O sinal "MUTE"(SEM ÁUDIO) ou "PAUSE"
partir do ponto em que foi interrompida (PAUSA) ficará piscando no visor.
anteriormente. Durante a reprodução de CD/USB, essa função
interrompe a reprodução, deixando sem áudio.
Para restaurar o som ou retomar a reprodução de
Utilização
Para ligar diretamente a alimentação CD/USB, pressione o botão SEM ÁUDIO [MUTE]
Ao inserir um disco, conectar um dispositivo USB ou pressionar o botão ou gire o regulador do VOLUME .
BAND/AS, CD ou MEDIA (enquanto o disco está sendo inserido ou o
dispositivo de áudio USB/AUX/BT está sendo conectado), também é
possível ligar a alimentação e, então, a unidade começará a reprodução.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
Iniciando
▶ Selecionando o estilo do equalizador 2 Gire o regulador do VOLUME para selecionar
o menu TONE (TOM), depois, pressione o
◆Você pode selecionar um dos 6 estilos de EQ (EQUALIZADOR) ou EQ botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ].
desligado.
1 Pressione o botão CONFIGURAR [SET] para 3 Gire o regulador do VOLUME para selecionar
entrar no modo de configuração. o item desejado do controle de tons, depois,
O visor exibirá o sinal "EQ", "TONE" e "BT". pressione o botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ].
● Ao girar o regulador do VOLUME, é possível
2 Gire o regulador do VOLUME para selecionar selecionar um dos seguintes itens do controle de tons.
BASS (GRAVES) ↔ MIDDLE (MÉDIOS) ↔ TREBLE
o menu EQ (EQUALIZADOR), depois, (AGUDOS) ↔ BALANCE (EQUILÍBRIO) ↔ FADER
pressione o botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ]. (DESVANECIMENTO) ↔ PREVIOUS (ANTERIOR) ↔
BASS ↔ (GRAVES) ↔ ....
3 Gire o regulador do VOLUME para selecionar 4 Gire o regulador do VOLUME para ajustar o
o estilo de EQ desejado, depois, pressione o valor do nível ou do equilíbrio, depois,
botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ].
Português
pressione ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ].
● Ao girar o regulador do VOLUME, é possível ● BASS (GRAVES): ajusta o nível de sons graves (-7
selecionar um dos seguintes estilos de EQ. a +7).
EQ OFF (DESLIGADO) ↔ POP ↔ ROCK ↔ ● MIDDLE (MÉDIOS): ajusta o nível de sons médios
COUNTRY ↔ VOICE (VOZ) ↔ JAZZ ↔ CLASSIC (-7 a +7).
(CLÁSSICO) ↔ ....
● TREBLE (AGUDOS): ajusta o nível de sons agudos
(-7 a +7).
● BALANCE (EQUILÍBRIO): ajusta o equilíbrio do
Utilização
▶ Configurando o som som entre os alto-falantes direito e esquerdo

(LEFT15 até RIGHT15).
◆ Você pode ajustar o nível de graves, médios, agudos, equilíbrio e ● FADER (DESVANECIMENTO): ajusta o
desvanecimento. desvanecimento do som entre os alto-falantes
frontal e posterior (FRONT15 até REAR15).
1 Pressione o botão CONFIGURAR [SET] para ● ANTERIOR: retorna ao menu TONE (TOM).
entrar no modo de configuração.
O visor exibirá o sinal "EQ", "TONE" e "BT".
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rádio
▶ Sintonizando uma estação ▶ Armazenando uma estação manualmente
● Ligue o rádio ◆ Você pode pré -definir 6 estações em cada banda (FM1, FM2 e AM).
1 Pressione o botão BANDA/A.A. [BAND/AS] 1 Siga as etapas de 1 a 4 na seção “Sintonizando uma

repetidamente para selecionar a banda. estação” para sintonizar a frequência que deseja pré-definir.
FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1 → ....
● Sintonizando uma estação manualmente ~ 2 Pressione e segure[ por mais
]
de 2 segundos os
botões Números 1 a 6 D+ para selecionar o
2 Pressione os botões SINTONIA número pré-definido.
repetidamente para sintonizar a frequência A frequência é armazenada com o número pré-
definido selecionado e será ouvido um bip.
desejada.
Para pré-definir outra estação, repita essas etapas.
● Sintonizando uma estação automaticamente
3 3. Pressione os botões SINTONIA por
mais de 2 segundos, depois, libere.
Observação
Português
Será iniciada a busca.
A sintonização é interrompida automaticamente nas
◆Se você tentar armazenar outra estação com o mesmo número pré-definido, a
estações cujos sinais podem ser recepcionados e estação armazenada anteriormente será substituída.
essas estações são memorizadas.
● Para a busca rápida de uma estação
4 Pressione o botão BUSCA/INF [SCAN/INF] para
iniciar a sintonia de uma estação.
Utilização
A unidade vai até uma estação, reproduz por 5
segundos e, depois, vai até a próxima estação.
Quando a unidade estiver sintonizada na estação
desejada, pressione o botão BUSCA/INF [SCAN/INF]
para interromper a busca.
Observação
◆ Durante a recepção de estações em estéreo, é exibido o indicador “ST”
(ESTÉREO).
◆ Ao sintonizar estações enquanto dirige, utilize o botão de números predefinidos,
a fim de prevenir acidentes. 9
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rádio
▶ Armazenando estações automaticamente ▶ Ouvindo uma estação predefinida
◆ A unidade seleciona as estações com os sinais mais fortes dentro de uma
banda selecionada, armazenando-as na ordem de sua frequência. 1 Pressione o botão BANDA/B.A. [BAND/AS]
◆ Podem ser armazenadas até 6 estações na banda atual. repetidamente para selecionar a banda.
FM1 → FM2 → AM→ FM1 → ....
1 Pressione o botão BANDA/B.A. [BAND/AS]
repetidamente para selecionar a banda.
FM1 → FM2 → AM→ FM1 → .... ~ 2 Pressione o botão Números [1 a 6 D+] no qual
está armazenada a estação desejada.
2 Pressione e segure o botão BANDA/B.A.
[BAND/AS] por mais de 2 segundos.
O visor exibirá a mensagem "AST Scanning" (Busca
de SAE - Sintonização Automática de Estações).
A unidade armazena as estações na ordem de suas
frequências através dos botões numéricos.
Observações
Português
◆ Se apenas algumas estações puderem ser recepcionadas, por conta do sinal

fraco, alguns botões numéricos conservarão suas configurações anteriores.
◆ Quando estiver indicado um número no visor, a unidade reproduzirá as
estações com sinais mais fortes, a partir da que estiver sendo exibida no
momento.
Utilização
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reprodutor de CD/MP3 [WMA]
▶ Antes da reprodução do disco ▶ Carregando um disco e iniciando a reprodução
◆ É possível reproduzir discos CD -DA e MP3/WMA. 1 Insira um disco no slot de disco com
Observação : Discos disponíveis o lado do selo voltado para cima.
◆ CD -DA: CD-R/CD-RW ● A reprodução será iniciada automatic-
◆ MP3/WMA: CD -R/CD-RW/CD-ROM
amente, após o reconhecimento dos
◆ Nesta unidade, não é possível a reprodução dos seguintes arquivos:
dados do disco carregado.
- Arquivos MP3 codificados nos formatos MP3i e MP3 PRO. ● O início da reprodução pode levar
- Arquivos MP3 codificados em um formato inadequado. algum tempo.
- Arquivos MP3 codificados em Camada 1/2. ● Todas as faixas serão reproduzidas até você mudar a fonte ou ejetar o disco.
- Arquivos WMA codificados em formato profissional de voz, sem
perdas. Observação:
◆ Não insira um disco quando estiver aceso o indicador de disco na janela do visor,
- Arquivos WMA que não são baseados no áudio do Windows pois um disco já foi carregado.
Media. ◆ Quando houver um disco na unidade
- Arquivos WMA protegidos contra cópia através de DRM Pressione o botão de áudio CD/USB/AUX/BT repetidamente para selecionar o CD
(Gerenciamento de direitos autorais digitais). e será iniciada a reprodução.
- Arquivos que apresentam dados como WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
Português
Cuidado: ▶ Controlando a reprodução
◆ O CD de 3°± (8 cm) não está disponível para esta unidade, por isso,
não insira esse t ipo de CD. 1 Pressione os botões SINTONIA
◆ Não use discos de formas irregulares.
repetidamente para ir até as faixas anteriores ou
◆ Não use discos que possuam selos ou rótulos colados.
◆ Para evitar danos ao painel frontal, não o empurre para baixo nem
posteriores.
coloque objetos sobre ele, enquanto estiver aberto.
◆ Não coloque o dedo ou a mão no painel frontal.
2 Pressione e segure os botões SINTONIA para
◆ Não insira objetos estranhos no slot de disco. o avanço ou retrocesso rápido da faixa e libere o
Utilização
botão para retomar a reprodução.
Observação
◆A alimentação será ligada automaticamente, quando um disco for
◆ A função de busca está em curso, mas a velocidade da busca não é
carregado. Um disco que contenha dados tanto do tipo CD-DA constante.
◆ Apesar do avanço ou retrocesso rápido, é possível ouvir apenas sons
quanto MP3/WMA não pode ser reproduzido normalmente. (Por
exemplo, pode ser que sua reprodução esteja sem som.) intermitentes.
3 Pressione o botão 5 D- ou 6 D+ repetidamente para ir
até as pastas anteriores ou posteriores (apenas no
disco MP3 ou WMA).
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Selecionar os modos de reprodução ▶ Buscando a música
1 Pressione o botão 2 RPT (REPETIR) 1 Pressione o botão SCAN/INF [INF/BUSCA] para
repetidamente para selecionar o modo Repetir entrar no modo de busca de faixas.
reprodução.
● RPT (REPETIR) : A faixa atual é reproduzida várias vezes. 2 Gire e segure o botão VOLUME para selecionar
● PASTA [ ] RPT (REPETIR) (apenas para MP3/WMA) : o número ou nome da faixa desejada, depois,
Todas as faixas da pasta atual são reproduzidas várias vezes. pressione o botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ] para
● Desligado: Cancela a função de repetição da reprodução iniciar a faixa selecionada.
2 Pressione o botão 3 INT (INTRODUÇÃO)
repetidamente para selecionar Introdução à
busca do modo de reprodução.
● PASTA [ ] INT (INTRODUÇÃO) (apenas para MP3/WMA) :
Reproduz sequencialmente a introdução das faixas da pasta
atual. ▶ Mostrando as informações da pasta
● INT (INTRODUÇÃO) : Reproduz sequencialmente a introdução
Português
das faixas do disco.

● Desligado: Cancela a reprodução da introdução
1 Pressione e segure o botão BUSCA/INF [SCAN/
INF] para exibir as informações da pasta atual
durante 5 segundos.
3 Pressione o botão 4 RDM (ALEATÓRIO)
repetidamente para selecionar o modo de ● Para ativar/desativar a função de rolagem
reprodução aleatória.
● PASTA [ ] RDM (ALEATÓRIO) (apenas para MP3/WMA):
◆ Ativar/desativar a função de rolagem para exibir o desempenho.
As faixas da pasta atual são reproduzidas aleatoriamente. 2 Durante a exibição das informações da pasta,
Utilização
● RDM (ALEATÓRIO) : Faixas do disco em ordem aleatória.

● Desligado: Cancela a reprodução aleatória.
pressione e segure o botão BUSCA/INF [SCAN/
INF] para exibir a função SCROLL ON
(ROLAGEM) ou SCROLL OFF (DESATIVADA).
Observação: Modificando a fonte
◆ Se você modificar a fonte, a reprodução também será interrompida (sem 3 Gire o regulador do VOLUME para alternar entre
ejetar o disco). Da próxima vez que você selecionar "CD" como fonte de OFF (LIGADO) ou ON (DESLIGADO), depois,
reprodução, a reprodução do disco será iniciada a partir do ponto em que foi
interrompida anteriormente. pressione o botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ].
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Interrompendo a reprodução e ejetando o disco ▶ Sobre o MP3/WMA
Esta unidade pode reproduzir arquivos MP3/WMA com o código de
1 Pressione o botão extensão <.mp3> ou <.wma> (independentemente do uso de letras
EJETAR [ ] e maiúsculas ou minúsculas).
pegue o disco. Esta unidade pode exibir os nomes dos álbuns, artistas (intérpretes) e a
marcação (Versão 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 ou 2.4) dos arquivos MP3 e/ou
Observação: Ejetando o disco. arquivos WMA.
Se o disco ejetado não for removido em 10 segundos, o disco será outra vez Esta unidade pode exibir apenas caracteres de um bit; nenhum outro
inserido automaticamente no slot de carregamento, a fim de protegê-lo da caractere poderá ser exibido corretamente.
poeira. (O disco não será reproduzido desta vez.) Esta unidade pode reproduzir arquivos MP3/WMA conforme as
condições abaixo.
▶ Sobre o CD-R/CD-RW - Taxa de bits:
8 kbps ~ 320 kbps em MP3 / 64 kbps ~ 161 kbps (VBR) em WMA
Use apenas CD-Rs ou CD-RWs "finalizados". - Frequência de amostra:
Esta unidade pode reproduzir apenas arquivos do mesmo tipo que são 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (para Camada 2/3 em MPEG-1)
inicialmente detectados quando um disco inclui tanto arquivos de áudio 24 kHz, 22,05 kHz, 16 kHz (para Camada 2/3 em MPEG-2)
CD (CD-DA) quanto arquivos MP3/WMA.
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (para Camada 3 em MPEG-2,5)
Esta unidade pode reproduzir discos multissessão; contudo, sessões
- Formato do disco: ISO/IEC 11172-3, ISO/IEC 13818-3
Português
restritas serão ignoradas durante a reprodução.
O número máximo de caracteres para nomes de arquivos/pastas varia
Alguns CD-Rs ou CD-RWs podem não ser reproduzidos nesta unidade
por conta das características do disco ou pelas razões a seguir: conforme o formato do disco utilizado (inclui 4 caracteres de extensão -
- Os discos estão sujos ou arranhados. <.mp3> ou <.wma>).
- Ocorre a condensação pela umidade nas lentes do interior da unidade. - ISO 9660 Nível 1: até 12 caracteres
- A lente de captura interna da unidade está suja. - ISO 9660 Nível 2: até 31 caracteres
- O CD-R/CD-RW no qual estão gravados os arquivos através do método - Romeo: até 128 caracteres
“Gravação em Pacotes”. - Joliet: até 64 caracteres
- Existem condições de gravação (falta de dados, etc.) ou condições de - Arquivo de nome longo do Windows: até 128 caracteres
mídia (manchada, arranhada, empenada, etc.) inadequadas. A unidade pode reproduzir arquiva gravados em VBR (taxa variável de
Utilização
Os CD-RWs podem exigir um tempo mais prolongado de leitura, pois a
bits). Os arquivos gravados em VBR apresentam discrepância na exibição
refletância dos CDRWs é mais baixa que a dos CDs normais. do tempo decorrido e não mostram o verdadeiro lapso de tempo. Após a
execução da função de busca, esta diferença se torna perceptível.
Não utilize os seguintes CD-Rs ou CD-RWs:
A unidade pode reconhecer um total de 512 arquivos, 200 pastas e 8
- Discos com selos, rótulos ou adesivos de proteção colados na
superfície. hierarquias.
- Discos nos quais os selos podem ser impressos diretamente com um Observação
impressora jato de tinta. ◆ Microsoft e Windows Media são marcas comerciais registradas ou
A utilização desses discos em altas temperaturas ou com muita umidade marcas registradas da Microsoft Corporation nos Estados Unidos e/ou
pode causar um funcionamento precário ou danos à unidade. em outros países.
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
- Caso o telefone não encontre o "New Rexton" ou "SSANGYONG", repita
▶ Operação do Bluetooth as etapas 1~2.
Para utilizar a função Bluetooth, é necessário o seguinte procedimento. 3 Caso seja necessária a digitação de uma senha no visor do
1. Emparelhamento dispositivo em conexão, digite "00xx" (4 dígitos).
Ao conectar dispositivos Bluetooth pela primeira vez, é necessário um registro Esta unidade e o dispositivo Bluetooth memorizam as informações
mútuo. Isto se chama "emparelhamento.". O registro (emparelhamento) é um do outro e, quando é feito o emparelhamento, a unidade está
necessário apenas na primeira vez, pois esta unidade e outros dispositivos pronta para se conectar ao dispositivo.
reconhecerão uns aos outros automaticamente a partir da próxima vez. Serão exibidos, com " " (aspas), os indicadores "BT CONNECT"
(Dependendo do dispositivo, pode ser preciso digitar um código secreto para (CONECTAR BLUETOOTH) e "Nome do modelo do dispositivo
cada conexão.) Bluetooth" ou "BT MOBILE" (CELULAR COM BLUETOOTH), após a
2. Conexão conclusão do emparelhamento.
Às vezes, o emparelhamento permite a conexão automática. - Alguns dispositivos Bluetooth solicitam sua aceitação do "Link BT" ou da
Para utilizar o dispositivo depois que é feito o emparelhamento, inicie a conexão. "Conexão". Digite "Yes" ou "OK".
* A senha pode ser denominada "passcode," "PIN code," "PIN number" ou
3. Fluxo contínuo de conversa/música com a função "sem as mãos" "password," etc., dependendo do dispositivo.
Você pode ligar para um telefone móvel e ouvir música, quando for feita a conexão.
Algum dispositivo Bluetooth pode não suportar funções específicas. 4 Configure o dispositivo Bluetooth para se conectar a esta
unidade.
Observação : O modo de emparelhamento em standby não é liberado até que
▶ Emparelhando seu telefone e o sistema de áudio do carro seja feita a conexão.
Português
Primeiro, registre (“par”) um dispositivo Bluetooth (telefone móvel, etc.) e esta

unidade com em relação à outra. É possível emparelhar até 6 dispositivos. Uma vez ▶ Conectando um telefone móvel
estabelecido o emparelhamento, não há necessidade de novo emparelhamento.
Posicione o dispositivo Bluetooth a até 3 m (9 pés) desta unidade. - Os dispositivos são registrados logo que emparelhados e conectados a
esta unidade. Você pode selecionar o dispositivo registrado e conectá-lo.
1 Pressione e segure o botão LIGAR [ ] por - Caso o emparelhamento já tenha sido realizado, inicie a operação a partir
deste ponto.
mais de 3 segundos.
- Dependendo do dispositivo, a conexão poderá ser iniciada
A unidade entra em modo standby de emparelhamento. A automaticamente, após o emparelhamento.
mensagem "EMPARELHANDO" aparece no visor com
Utilização
um bip e, depois, exibe a mensagem intermitente "KEY

00xx".
1 Conecte-se a esta unidade utilizando seu
telefone móvel e pressione o botão LIGAR [ ].
2 Configure o dispositivo Bluetooth para buscar esta unidade. Será exibido o ícone "BT CONNECT" (CONEXÃO
Será exibida uma lista dos dispositivos detectados no visor do BLUETOOTH) com " " e o sinal de Bluetooth será
dispositivo em conexão. Esta unidade é exibida como "New Rexton" ativado.
ou "SSANGYONG" no visor do dispositivo. Observação
Confirme essa opção pressionando "YES" ou "OK" em seu Para exibir as informações do dispositivo Bluetooth
telefone. conectado, pressione o botão BUSCA/INF [SCAN/INF].
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Fazendo uma chamada através da última ligação ▶ Finalizando uma chamada
É possível fazer uma chamada a partir do telefone móvel conectado, utilizando
esta unidade. 1 Pressione o botão FINALIZAR [ ].
1 Pressione e segure o botão LIGAR [ ] por
Observação:
mais de 3 segundos para entrar no modo de ◆ Mesmo que a chamada seja finalizada, a conexão Bluetooth
discagem das últimas chamadas. não é cancelada.
Será exibida a mensagem "REDIAL" (REDISCAGEM)
e iniciada a rediscagem do número de telefone.
▶ Ajustando o volume da conversa

▶ Recebendo uma chamada
Ao receber uma chamada, o tom da campainha sai pelos alto-falantes do carro e
1 Gire o regulador de VOLUME para aumentar
é exibido na tela o número de quem está ligando. ou diminuir o nível de volume da conversa.
O visor exibirá o nível de volume Bluetooth. (BT
VOL 6 ~ 32)
1 Quando receber uma chamada e forem exibidas
Português
na tela as mensagens "CALL IN" (NOVA
CHAMADA) e "Número do telefone" junto com o
toque da campainha, pressione o botão LIGAR ▶ Configurando o modo "sem áudio" da conversa
[ ] para atender a chamada.
É exibida a mensagem "BT TEL" (TELEFONE
BLUETOOTH) e é iniciada a ligação. 1 Pressione o botão SEM ÁUDIO [MUTE] no
O microfone embutido deste sistema de áudio captará controle de áudio do volante para ativar a função
sua voz. de microfone "sem áudio".
Utilização
O visor exibirá a mensagem "MIC MUTE"
Para rejeitar uma chamada, pressione o botão (MICROFONE SEM ÁUDIO).
FINALIZAR [ ]. Para cancelar a função de microfone "sem áudio",
Será exibida a mensagem "CALL REJECT" pressione o botão SEM ÁUDIO [MUTE] no controle de
(REJEIÇÃO DE CHAMADA) e é retomada a função áudio do volante.
anterior. A mensagem "MIC MUTE" desaparece.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Transferindo uma chamada ▶ Ouvindo música a partir de um dispositivo Bluetooth
A fim de ativar/desativar o dispositivo adequado (esta unidade/este telefone Você pode ouvir música do telefone móvel nesta unidade, caso o telefone
móvel), verifique o seguinte. ofereça suporte a A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile - Perfil
Avançado de Distribuição de Áudio) da tecnologia Bluetooth.
1 Durante uma chamada através de Bluetooth 1 Ative o sinal Bluetooth em seu telefone móvel ou dispositivo
"mãos-livres", pressione o botão LIGAR [ ].
A função "mãos-livres" é desativada e o microfone e o
de áudio.
alto-falante do telefone móvel são ativados. É exibida a mensagem "Stereo Headset" (Fone de ouvido estéreo)
quando é feita a conexão.
Será exibida a mensagem "PRIVATE" (PRIVADA) e
iniciada a chamada do telefone móvel.
2 Gire o regulador de VOLUME para diminuir o
Durante uma chamada através de telefone nível de volume desta unidade.
móvel, pressione o botão LIGAR [ ].
A função Bluetooth "mãos-livres" é ativada.
É exibida a mensagem "BT TEL" (TELEFONE
BLUETOOTH) e é iniciada a chamada "mãos-livres".
3 Pressione o botão MÍDIA [MEDIA] repetidamen-
te até aparecer a mensagem "BT AUDIO".
Para mais detalhes sobre a operação de telefones móveis,
Português
consulte seu manual de telefones móveis.

4 Utilize o dispositivo de áudio para iniciar a reprodução.
Você pode alterar o volume mudar de faixa utilizando os botões
Observação: desta unidade. (Consulte a seção "MP3[WMA]/CD player")
◆ Dependendo do telefone móvel, a conexão "mãos-livres" pode ser
interrompida quando se tenta transferir uma chamada.
5 Gire o regulador de VOLUME para ajustar o
nível de volume desta unidade.
Utilização
6 Para interromper a música, pressione e segure o

botão FINALIZAR [ ]ou pressione o botão
BAND/AS, MEDIA ou CD para selecionar outra
função.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
● DELETE (EXCLUSÃO): exclui um dispositivo
▶ Configurando o modo Bluetooth Bluetooth.
◆ Você pode controlar os modos Bluetooth ● PREVIOUS (ANTERIOR): retorna ao menu BT.
1 Pressione o botão CONFIGURAR [SET] para ● Encaixe da seleção de EMPARELHAMENTO

entrar no modo de configuração.
Será exibido "EQ", "TONE" e "BT".
5 Siga as etapas 2 a 4 da página 14 "Emparelha-
ndo seu telefone com o sistema de áudio do
automóvel" para concluir o emparelhamento.
2 Gire o regulador de VOLUME para selecionar o
menu BT, depois, pressione o botão
ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ]. ● Encaixe da seleção de EXCLUSÃO
3 Gire o regulador de VOLUME para selecionar o 5 Gire o regulador de VOLUME para selecionar
item desejado de configuração de Bluetooth, "YES (SI)" ou "NO", depois, pressione o botão
depois, pressione o botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ].
]. YES (SI): Exclui a lista selecionada de dispositivos
Português
● Ao girar o regulador de VOLUME, é possível Bluetooth.
selecionar um dos seguintes itens de configuração de NO: Cancela a operação de Exclusão.
Bluetooth.
PAIR (EMPARELHAR) ↔ SELECT (SELECIONAR)
↔ PRIORITY (PRIORIDADE) ↔ DELETE (EXCLUIR)
↔ PREVIOUS (ANTERIOR) ↔ PAIR
(EMPARELHAR) ↔ ...
4 Gire o regulador de VOLUME para selecionar a
Utilização
lista de dispositivos ou ajustar o valor, depois,
pressione o botão ALIMENTAÇÃO [ ].
● PAIR (EMPARELHAR): digite o emparelhamento
(Senha: 00xx).
● SELECT (SELECIONAR): seleciona um dos 5
dispositivos Bluetooth para conexão.
● PRIORITY (PRIORIDADE): seleciona a prioridade da
conexão.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reprodutor USB/AUX As funções USB/AUX do reprodutor estão disponíveis apenas nos modelos
AGC-9145BY/WY. Os modelos AGC-9146BA/WA não são suportados.
▶ Reproduzindo um dispositivo USB ▶ Precauções ao manusear o dispositivo USB

Ao conectar um dispositivo USB à porta de entrada USB da ● Ao utilizar o dispositivo externo USB, necessário não são indicações de mau
unidade, você pode ouvir pelos altofalantes do seu automóvel, certifique-se de manter o dispositivo funcionamento. Por favor, aguarde o período
ao controlar o dispositivo USB a partir da unidade. desconectado e só conecte algum tempo de tempo necessário para o reconhecimento
depois de ligar a ignição do veículo. O do dispositivo.
● O dispositivo suporta apenas dispositivos
1 Pressione e segure o botão dispositivo USB pode ser danificado, se já
estiver conectado quando a ignição estiver USB utilizados para reprodução de arquivos
LIGAR [ ] para ligar a unidade. ligada. (O dispositivo USB não é um de música.
componente eletrônico automotivo) ● Não utilize o recurso I/F USB para carregar
● Alguns dispositivos USB podem não baterias ou acessórios USB que produzem
funcionar adequadamente por conta de calor. Essas ações podem levar a um
problemas de compatibilidade. Verifique se o desempenho deficiente ou danos ao
2 Conecte ao terminal de dispositivo externo é suportado pelo dispositivo.
entrada USB o dispositivo de dispositivo, antes de começar a utilizá-lo. ● O dispositivo pode não reconhecer o
armazenamento USB que ● O dispositivo só reconhecerá os dispositivos dispositivo USB, se estiverem sendo
contém os arquivos MP3/ USB formatados em FAT ou FAT32. (O utilizadas centrais USB e cabos de extensão
NTFS formato não é suportado.) Ao formatar adquiridos separadamente.
WMA a serem reproduzidos. o dispositivo USB externo, o dispositivo pode ● No caso de dispositivos USB de alta
A unidade é ligada, depois, é não reconhecer adequadamente uma seleção capacidade, existem situações em que os
Português
iniciada a reprodução de bites/setores diferente de 512 bites ou 2048 drives locais são particionados para a
automaticamente com a bites. conveniência do usuário. Neste caso, só será
indicação "USB", após o ● Evite o contato de partes do corpo e possível reproduzir a música em USB no
reconhecimento dos dados do substâncias estranhas com o conector USB. drive de nível mais alto. Ao utilizar drives
dispositivo de armazenamento. ● A conexão/desconexão repetitiva do particionados, salve as músicas que deseja
dispositivo USB em um curto período de reproduzir no dispositivo apenas no drive
tempo pode causar danos ao dispositivo. lógico de nível mais alto. Além disso,
3 Quando o dispositivo de armazena- ● Ao desconectar o dispositivo USB, pode determinados dispositivos USB são
mento já estiver conectado, ocorrer, ocasionalmente, um som incomum. configurados com um drive separado, que é
pressione o botão MÍDIA [MEDIA] ● A desconexão abrupta do dispositivo externo utilizado para instalar programas de
Utilização
USB enquanto ele estiver funcionando pode aplicativos e talvez não seja possível
repetida-mente até aparecer o reproduzir músicas a partir desses drives,
fazer com que o dispositivo seja danificado
termo "USB". ou funcione de forma irregular. Certifique-se pelas razões descritas acima.
A reprodução USB será iniciada de desconectar o dispositivo USB só depois ● O dispositivo pode não suportar a operação
automaticamente. que for desligada a alimentação do áudio ou normal, ao utilizar formatos tais como: HDD
quando o áudio estiver funcionando em um Type, CF ou SD Memory.
modo diferente. ● O dispositivo não suportará arquivos
Você pode alterar o volume, o modo de reprodução e a ● O período de tempo necessário para bloqueados pelo DRM (Gerenciamento de
seleção de faixas, utilizando os botões do painel de reconhecer o dispositivo externo USB pode Direitos Autorais Digitais).
controle. (Consulte a seção "MP3[WMA]/CD player") variar, dependendo do tipo, tamanho ou
18 formato do arquivo armazenado no
GETtheMANUALS.org
dispositivo USB. Essas variações no tempo
As funções USB/AUX do reprodutor estão disponíveis apenas nos modelos
Reprodutor USB/AUX AGC-9145BY/WY. Os modelos AGC-9146BA/WA não são suportados.
▶ Ouvindo o equipamento de áudio auxiliar

Ao conectar um dispositivo de áudio portátil opcional à entrada AUX (mini-
tomada estéreo) da unidade e, depois, apenas selecionar a fonte, você pode
ouvir através dos alto-falantes do automóvel. O nível de volume é ajustável em
relação a alguma diferença entre a unidade e o dispositivo portátil de áudio.
1 Diminua o volume da unidade.
2 Desligue o equipamento externo de áudio.

Conecte a saída de áudio do equipamento
externo de áudio ao terminal de entrada
AUX da unidade.
Certifique-se de ajustar o volume
para cada dispositivo de áudio
Português
conectado, antes da reprodução.
3 Inicie a reprodução do equipamento externo de

áudio em um volume moderado.
4 Pressione o botão MÍDIA [MEDIA] repetidamen-

te até aparecer a mensagem "AUX IN".
Utilização
Quando um dispositivo externo de áudio já estiver
conectado, ignore as etapas 1 ~ 3.
5 Defina seu volume normal de reprodução da

unidade.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Controle de áudio tipo volante
▶ Utilizando o controle de áudio tipo volante
Caso seu veículo possua este recurso, alguns controles de áudio podem ser ajustados no volante.
Eles incluem o seguinte:
▲ VOLUME (VOL) ▼ MODO (MODE)

Pressione: aumentar/diminuir o volume. ● Pressione:seleciona as funções (CD → USB
▲ BUSCA (SEEK) ▼ ● Pressione e segure: seleciona a banda (FM1
Durante a reprodução de uma estação → FM2 → AM → FM1...)

● Pressione: ir para a estação pré-definida
SEM ÁUDIO (MUTE)
anterior/posterior.
● Pressione e segure: buscar a estação de
Durante uma chamada
rádio anterior/posterior. (O rádio busca Pressione: liga/desliga a função SEM ÁUDIO
apenas as estações com sinal forte que do microfone
estão na banda selecionada) Durante a execução do modo de áudio do
Durante uma reprodução de áudio em rádio ou CD/USB/BT
Português
CD/USB/BT Pressione: liga/desliga a função "sem áudio"

● Pressione: ir para a faixa anterior/posterior.
do rádio ou a pausa na reprodução de CD/
USB.
● Pressione e segure: avanço/retrocesso
rápido ao longo das faixas. Telefone [ ]
(apenas para a reprodução de CD/USB)
Durante o modo star
ALIMENTAÇÃO (PWR) [ ] Pressione e segure: faz uma chamada através
Pressione: liga/desliga o sistema ou alterna da função de discagem das últimas chamadas
para o modo de chamada privada na Durante uma nova chamada
Utilização
recepção de novas chamadas. ● Pressione: recebe a nova chamada

● Pressione e segure: rejeita a nova chamada
Durante uma chamada

● Pressione: alterna para o modo de chamada
privada ou por Bluetooth.
● Pressione e segure: finaliza uma chamada
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
Resolução de Problemas
▶ Comuns
Sintomas Possíveis causas Possíveis soluções
- O som não é reproduzido. - A função SEM ÁUDIO está definida em - Defina a função SEM ÁUDIO em OFF (DESLIGADA).
ON (LIGADA).
- Ruídos - Há um gerador de ondas - Mantenha os geradores de ondas eletromagnéticas, tais como
eletromagnéticas, tais como um telefone telefones celulares, longe da unidade e da fiação da unidade.
celular próximo à unidade ou seus cabos Caso os ruídos não possam ser eliminados por conta do
elétricos. conjunto de cabos do veículo, consulte seu revendedor.
- Nenhuma emissão de som - A configuração de equilíbrio/ - Reajuste o equilíbrio/desvanecimento.
do (s) alto-falante (s) desvanecimento não é adequada.
▶ Rádio
Português
- Recepção ruim ou ruídos - Condições de transmissão insatisfatórias. - Recepcionar e ouvir os sinais da estação em questão no modo
analógico.
- A busca leva muito tempo. - O número de estações sintonizadas é - Desloque-se até uma área em que possa recepcionar o maior
menor que 6. número de estações e tente pré-definir.
- O número de estações - O contato da extremidade da bateria é - Certifique-se de que a extremidade da bateria esteja firmemente
automaticamente pré- precário ou a extremidade da bateria nem conectada e volte a pré-definir as estações.
Apêndice
definidas é menor que 6. sempre está carregada.
- As estações pré-definidas - A busca digital pode levar algum tempo. - Alterne para a busca automática e execute novamente a busca.
não podem ser
armazenadas.
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Reprodutor de CD/MP3 [WMA]
- Nenhuma reprodução ou - O disco foi inserido do lado errado. - Insira o disco corretamente.
disco ejetado
- Há um defeito ou objeto estranho no - Remova os objetos estranhos ou use um disco sem defeitos.
disco.
- O disco possui dados em formato não - Consulte a descrição sobre MP3/WMA em dados sonoros
reproduzível. reproduzíveis, exceto CD-DA (p. ex.: CD de música).
- A unidade reproduz a faixa ROM de um - Pule a faixa ROM.
CD em modo misto.
- Os CD-R/RWs que são - A capacidade de reprodução de alguns - Produza CD-R/RWs em diferentes combinações de mídia,
reproduzíveis em outros CD-R/RWs pode depender da software de gravação e gravador, após consultar a descrição
dispositivos não podem ser combinação da mídia, software de sobre MP3/WMA.
reproduzidos nesta unidade. gravação e do gravador a ser utilizado,
mesmo que estes CD-R/RWs sejam
reproduzíveis em outros dispositivos, tais
Português
como um computador pessoal.

- Oscilação de som ou ruídos - Há um defeito ou objeto estranho no - Remova os objetos estranhos ou use um disco sem defeitos.
disco. Para MP3/WMA, consulte a descrição sobre MP3/WMA.
- Oscilação de som por conta - A unidade não está suficientemente firme. - Prenda a unidade à caixa do console com a tira de suporte
da vibração traseiro, etc.
- A unidade está inclinada em mais de 30° - Modifique o ângulo para 30° ou menos.
na direção da parte frontal para a
Apêndice
posterior.
- O disco não pode ser - O selo desprendeu-se do CD dentro da - Consulte a assistência técnica do revendedor onde foi adquirida
ejetado: unidade. a unidade.
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Reprodutor de USB MP3 [WMA]
- A entrada USB não funciona - A memória USB está danificada. - Por favor, após formatar, utilize o USB em formato FAT ou
FAT32. (O NTFS formato não é suportado.)
- A memória USB foi contaminada. - Remova quaisquer substâncias estranhas que estejam na
superfície de contato da memória USB e no terminal de
multimídia.
- Um HUB USB adquirido separadamente - Conecte a memória USB diretamente com o terminal de
está sendo utilizado. multimídia no veículo.
- Um cabo de extensão USB está sendo - Conecte a memória USB diretamente com o terminal de
utilizado. multimídia no veículo.
- Um dispositivo USB que não é do tipo - Utilize uma memória-padrão USB.
tampa metálica A memória USB está
sendo utilizada.
Português
- Uma memória tipo HDD, CF, SD está - Utilize uma memória-padrão USB.
sendo utilizada.
- Não há arquivos de música que possam - São suportados apenas os formatos de arquivo MP3 e
ser reproduzidos. WMA. Por favor, utilize apenas os formatos de música
suportados.
Apêndice
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Especificações
▶ Seção geral ▶ Seção de MP3 [WMA]/CD
Fornecimento de energia elétrica DC 14.4V Aterramento negativo Frequência de amostra 8 vezes mais amostras
Impedância do alto-falante 4 ohm Conversor de DA 4 Sistema DAC
Potência máx. 45 Watts x 4 Canais Tipo de pick-up Astigma 3-feixes
Peso 880 g (líquido) Fonte de iluminação Laser semicondutor
Dimensões (L x A x D) 178 x 52 x 155 mm Comprimento de onda 780 nm
Frequência de resposta 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz (±3 dB)
▶ Seção do rádio FM/MW/LW Proporção de sinal para ruído ≥50 dB
Distorção harmônica total ≤1 % (1 kHz)
Intervalo de frequência FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108 MHz Flutuação de velocidade Abaixo dos limites mensuráveis
AM 531 kHz ~ 1602 kHz
Separação de canais ≥35 dB
Sensibilidade utilizável FM ≤18 dBu
AM ≤35 dBu
Português
Proporção de sinal para ruído FM ≥45 dB ▶ Seção Bluetooth

AM ≥40 dB
Separação de estéreo FM ≥20 dB Especif. principal Bluetooth V2.0 (Compatível com Bluetooth V1.2)
Sensibilidade - 60 dBm
Memória interna Memória flash de 16 M bits
▶ Seção USB e MP3 [WMA]
Função aplicada Suporte de áudio com maior largura de banda
Frequência de resposta 20 Hz ~ 20 KHz Perfil avançado de distribuição do áudio Suporte
Apêndice
ao perfil "mãos-livres"/Chamada privada

Distorção harmônica total 0.1 % (a 1 KHz)
Intervalo dinâmico 85 dB (a 1 KHz)
Proporção de sinal-para-ruído 60 dB (a 1 KHz)
Separação de canais 54 dB (a 1 KHz)
As especificações e o design estão sujeitos a alterações sem prévio aviso, por conta de melhorias.
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
AGC-9145BY/WY
GETtheMANUALS.org
AGC-9146BA/WA
Memo
Memo
AGC-9145BY/WY
GETtheMANUALS.org
AGC-9146BA/WA
Memo
Memo
AGC-9145BY/WY
GETtheMANUALS.org
AGC-9146BA/WA
AGC-9145BY/WY
GETtheMANUALS.org
User Manual
Benutzerhandbuch
Mode d'emploi
Manuale dell’utente AGC-9145RY
Manual de usuario
Gebruikershandleiding

RDS Receiver with Bluetooth Hands-free
GETtheMANUALS.org
User Manual ▶
Benutzerhandbuch ▶
AGC-9145RY AGC-9146RA
RDS Receiver with Bluetooth Hands-free
Mode d'emploi ▶
Manuale dell’utente ▶
Manual de usuario ▶
Gebruikershandleiding ▶
GETtheMANUALS.org
English
● Please read these instructions carefully before using this product

and save this manual for future use.
● The illustrations and pictures in this manual may differ with the
actual design of the product.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Contents
Precautions MP3[WMA]/CD player USB/AUX player
English
Safety information ................................ 2 Before disc playback ...................... 14 Playing an USB device ...................... 21
Handing precautions for safety ............ 3 Loading a disc and Precautions for handling
starting playback ................................ 14 USB device ......................................... 21
Location of controls Controlling the playback .................... 14
Front view ............................................. 4 Listening to auxiliary
Selecting the playback modes .......... 15 audio equipment ................................. 22
Display window ..................................... 5
Searching the music .......................... 15
Rear view .............................................. 6 Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Showing the folder information .......... 15
Getting started Stopping playback and Using the Steering Wheel Audio
Turn the unit on/off ............................... 7 ejecting a disc ............................. 16 Controls .............................................. 23
Adjusting volume directly ..................... 7 About CD-R/CD-RW .......................... 16
Muting the sound quickly ..................... 7
Troubleshooting
About MP3/WMA ............................... 16
Common ............................................. 24
Setting the Equalizer style ................... 8 Bluetooth Radio ................................................... 24
Setting the sound ................................. 8 Bluetooth operation ............................ 17 MP3[WMA] CD player ....................... 25
Radio Pairing your phone and USB MP3[WMA] player ..................... 26
Tuning in a station ................................ 9 car audio system ................................ 17
Storing a station manually ................... 9 Connecting a mobile phone ............... 17 Specifications
Storing a station automatically ........... 10 Making a call via last call ................... 18 General section .................................. 27
Listening to a preset station ............... 10 Receiving a call .................................. 18 FM/MW/LW Radio section ................ 27
Adjusting the talk volume ................... 18 MP3[WMA]/CD player section .......... 27
Radio with RDS Muting the talk sound ......................... 18
Limiting stations to MP3[WMA] USB section ................... 27
Regional programming ...................... 11 Ending a call ....................................... 18 Bluetooth section ................................ 27
Using PTY functions .......................... 12 Transferring a call ............................... 19
Selecting Alternative Frequencies ..... 12 Listening to music from
an audio device .................................. 19
Receiving Traffic Program ................. 13
Setting the Bluetooth mode ............... 20
Receiving Traffic Announcements .... 13
Changing the display items/
scroll function ...................................... 13
1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precautions
▶ Safety information
English
WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, the limits for a Class 1 laser product, pursuant to Part 15 of
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
MOISTURE. reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE, USE ONLY THE and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
INCLUDED COMPONENTS. and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
CAUTION:
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
interference to radio reception, which can be determined
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
by turning the equipment off or on, the user is encouraged
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
to consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
help.
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR BY
YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment would void the user’s authority to operate this
device.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precautions
▶ Safety Information ▶ Handling precautions for safety
English
When Driving ◆ Thisunit is designed for DC 14V negative-ground vehicles only.
Keep the volume level low enough to be aware of road and Do not use a non-standard power supply.
traffic conditions.
When Washing Your Car
Do not expose the product, including the speakers and
CDs, to water or excessive moisture. This could cause
electrical shorts, fire, or other damage.
When Parked
Parking in direct sunlight can produce very high
temperatures inside your car. Give the interior a chance to
cool down before switching the unit on. ◆ Do not use gasoline, thinner, benzene, organic solvent, etc., to
Use the Proper Power Supply clean the unit.
This product is designed to operate with a 14 V DC,
negative-ground battery system. No!
Disc Mechanism
Do not insert coins or other small objects.
Keep screwdrivers and other metallic objects away from
the disc mechanism and disc.
Use Authorized Service Centres
This product is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to
disassemble or adjust any parts. Please refer to the
Service Centre list included with this product for service ◆ Do not forcibly press function buttons.
assistance. By pressing lightly, damage can be avoided.
For Installation
This product should be installed in a horizontal position
with the front end up at a convenient angle, but not more
than 30°.
Note: No!
The preset memory is cleared to return to the original factory setting
when the power connector or battery is disconnected.
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Front view
English
1. Display window
2. BAND/AS button
Selects the radio function or band (press : FM1 →
FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....), to store stations
automatically (press and hold)
3. SCAN/INF button
Scan in each station automatically, enter the file
search mode (press); switch the display items
(press and hold).
4. RDS button
Seek the specified program type or traffic program
station (press), enter the RDS (Radio Data
System) menu (press and hold).
5. SET button
Enters the setting mode (EQ style, Tone and
Bluetooth).
6. TUNE button
- During radio reception
Find a station manually (press); seek a station
automatically (press and hold). 10. CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio button 13. Number [1 to 6 D+] buttons
- During CD/USB playback Select the CD, USB, AUX or Bluetooth - During radio reception
Skip a track (press); up/down for file searching, Audio playback. Receive each stored stations (press);
fast-forward/rewind a track (press and hold). store each station (press and hold).
11. Disc EJECT [ ] button
Ejects the disc. - During CD/USB playback
7. CALL [ ] button 2 RPT : Repeat playback
Receive the incoming a call (press); connect the 12. POWER [ ]/MUTE button with 3 INT : Intro playback
Bluetooth device (press and hold). VOLUME dial 4 RDM : Random playback
8. END [ ] button Turn the power on, turn the radio mute or 5 D- : Folder down
End a call (press); release the Bluetooth CD/USB pause playback on/off (press), 6 D+ : Folder up
connection (press and hold). tune the power off (press and hold);
adjusts the volume or selects the item for
9. Disc slot setting/searching (rotate).
Insert a disc (label side up), playback starts.
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Display window
English
1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
TP TA AF REG ST TP TA AF REG RDM CLAS

ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00 : 01
FM2 BBC R3 Knocking on heaven
4 5 5
1. Preset channel number 8. Current folder (directory) number
2. RDS indicator 9. Current file (track) number
- TP lights up when a TP (Traffic Program) station is tuned in. 10. USB indicator
- TA lights up when TA (Traffic Announcement standby) function is on.
- REG lights up when a REG (Regional) station is tuned in. 11. Folder select mode indicator
- AF lights up when AF (Alternative Frequencies search) function is on. 12. Playback mode indicators
3. Stereo indicator RPT (Repeat), INT (Intro), RDM (Random)
4. Band indicator 13. Bluetooth function indicator
5. Multi-function display area 14. Playing time
6. Disc indicator 15. EQ (Equalizer) indicator
7. Media indicator
CDP lights up when an audio CD is loaded.
MP3 lights up when a MP3 file is loaded.
WMA lights up when a WMA file is loaded.
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Rear view
English
1. Antenna jack
To plug the radio antenna cable.
2. AUX In port
To connect an AUX connector for audio device.
3. USB port
To connect a USB connector for USB host function.
4. I/O connector (18 pin)
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
Getting started
▶ Turn the unit on/off ▶ Adjusting volume directly
English
1 Turn your car’s ignition key to ACC or ON 1 Rotate VOLUME dial to increase or to
position. decrease the volume level.
The display will show the volume level (Audio mode
2 Press POWER [ ] button to turn the unit on. : 00 to 45 / Call mode : 06 to 32).
● If the source is ready, playback also starts.
● If you turn the power off while listening to a disc/
USB, the CD/USB play will start form where
playback has been stopped previously.
● If you turned the power off while listening to the
radio, the same radio station will be selected.
3 Press and hold POWER [ ] button to turn the

unit off.
● Ifyou turned the power off while listening to a disc,
next time you turn the power on disc play will start
▶ Muting the sound quickly
from where playback was stopped previously.
1 Press MUTE button to set mute or pause on.
‘MUTE’ or “PAUSE” will flash on the display.
During the CD/USB, paused the playback and mute the
sound.
To restore the sound or resume CD/USB playback,
press MUTE button or rotate VOLUME dial.
To turn the power on directly

By inserting a disc, connecting the USB device or pressing BAND/AS or
CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio button (while the disc is inserted or the
USB/AUX/BT Audio device is connected), you can also turn the power on
and the unit then plays.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
Getting started
▶ Selecting the Equalizer style ▶ Setting the sound
English
You can select the one of the 6 EQ styles or EQ OFF. You can adjust the level of the Bass, Middle, Treble, Balance and Fader.
1 Press SET button to enter the Setting mode. 1 Press SET button to enter the Setting mode.
“EQ”, “TONE” and “BT” appear on the display. “EQ”, “TONE” and “BT” appear on the display.
2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the EQ menu, 2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the TONE
then press POWER [ ] button. menu, then press POWER [ ] button.
3 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the desired EQ 3 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the desired
style, then press POWER [ ] button. Tone Control item, then press POWER [ ]
● By rotating the VOLUME dial, you can select one of the button.
following EQ Styles. ● By rotating the VOLUME dial, you can select one of the
EQ OFF ↔ POP ↔ ROCK ↔ COUNTRY ↔ VOICE following Tone Control items.
↔ JAZZ ↔ CLASSIC ↔ .... BASS ↔ MIDDLE ↔ TREBLE ↔ BALANCE ↔ FADER
↔ PREVIOUS ↔ ....
4 Rotate VOLUME dial to adjust the value of the

level or balance, then press POWER [ ]
button.
● BASS: adjust the bass sound level (-7 to +7).
● MIDDLE: adjust the treble sound level (-7 to +7).
● TREBLE: adjust the treble sound level (-7 to +7).
● BALANCE: adjust the sound balance between the
right and left speakers (LEFT15 to RIGHT15).
● FADER: adjust the sound fade between the front
and rear speakers (FRONT15 to REAR15).
● PREVIOUS: return to the TONE menu.
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Tuning in a station ▶ Storing a station manually
English
● Turn on the radio You can preset 6 stations for each band (FM1, FM2, MW and LW).
1 Press BAND/AS button repeatedly to select the 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Tuning in a station” to tune to the
band. frequency you wish to preset.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
● Tuning a station manually

~ 2 Press and hold Number [1 to 6 D+] buttons for
more 2 seconds to select the preset number.
The frequency is stored in the selected preset number
2 Press TUNE buttons repeatedly to tune and you will hear a beep.
to a desired frequency. To preset another station, repeat these steps.
Note
● Tuning a station automatically If you try to store another station in the same preset number, the previously
stored station will be replaced.
3 Press TUNE buttons for more 2
seconds, then release.
Seeking will start.
The tuning automatically stops at the stations whose
signals can be received, and the station are received.
● To quickly scan a station

4 Press SCAN/INF button to start tuning for a
station.
The unit will go to a station, play for 5 seconds, and
then go to the next station.
When the unit tunes in to the desired station, press
SCAN/INF button to stop scanning.
Note
◆ During reception of stereo stations the “ST” indicator is on.
◆ When tuning in stations while driving, use preset number button to prevent
accidents.
9
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Storing stations automatically ▶ Listening to a preset station
English
◆ The unit selects the stations with the strongest signals within the selected
band, and stores them in the order of their frequency. 1 Press BAND/AS button repeatedly to select the
◆ Up to 6 stations can be stored in current band. band.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
1 Press and hold BAND/AS button for more 2
seconds.
“AST Scanning” appears on the display. ~ 2 Press the Number [1 to 6 D+] button on which the
The unit stores stations in the order of their frequencies
desired station is stored.
on the number buttons.
Notes
◆ If only a few stations can be received due to weak signals, some number
buttons will retain their former settings.
◆ When a number is indicated in the display, the unit starts strong stations from
the one currently displayed.
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio with RDS
◆ About RDS
▶ Limiting stations to Regional programming
English
RDS (Radio Data System) is a broadcasting service which a growing number
of FM stations are now providing. It allows the FM stations to send additional When AF is used, the regional function limits the selection of stations
signals along with their regular programme signals. For example, the stations broadcasting regional programs.
send their station names and information about what type of programme they
broadcast, such as sports or music, etc.
When tuned to an FM station which provides the RDS service, the RDS
1 Press and hold RDS button repeatedly to
indicator lights up, the station frequency (and then the station name if sent) is select the “REG ON” or “REG OFF”.
displayed. ◆ If you do not operate functions within about 5 seconds,
Not all FM stations provide RDS service, nor do all RDS stations provide the display automatically returns to the ordinary display.
same services. If in doubt, check with local radio stations for details on RDS
services in your area.
This machine can use the following RDS service. 2 Rotate VOLUME dial to turn the “REG ON”
PS (Programme Service name) / PTY (Programme Type) / TP (Traffic then press POWER [ ] button.
Program) / TA (Traffic Announcement) / AF (List of Alternative
Frequencies) / RT (Radio Text) ◆ To turn the regional function off, select the “REG OFF”.
This allows you to locate a specific type name of programme being broadcast.
Notes
◆ Regional programming and regional networks are organized differently
RDS (Radio Data System) contains inaudible information that helps search depending on the country (i.e., they may change according to the hour,
for the radio stations. state or broadcast area).
- RDS service may not be provided by all stations. ◆ The preset number may disappear from the display if the tuner tunes in a
- RDS functions such as AF and TA are only active when your radio is regional station which differs from the originally set station.
tuned to an RDS station.
◆ The regional function can be turned on or off independently for each FM
band.
◆ PTY information and the frequency of the current station appear on the
display for 3 seconds.
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio with RDS
▶ Using PTY functions ▶ Selecting Alternative Frequencies
English
You can tune in a station by using PTY (Program Type) information. When the tuner cannot get a good reception, the unit automatically
searches for a different station in the same network.
● Searching for an RDS station by PTY information
1 Press and hold RDS button repeatedly to select 1 Press and hold RDS button repeatedly to
select the “AF ON” or “AF OFF”.
the PTY search mode. ◆ If you do not operate functions within about 5 seconds,
“PTY NONE” or “PTY name” appears on the display. the display automatically returns to the ordinary display.
◆ If you do not operate functions within about 10 seconds, the
display automatically returns to the ordinary display.
2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the “AF ON”
2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select a program type as then press POWER [ ] button.
below, then press POWER [ ] button; ◆ If you do not operate functions within about 5 seconds,
the display automatically returns to the ordinary display.
PTY NONE ↔ NEWS ↔ AFFAIRS ↔ INFO ↔ SPORT↔ ◆ To turn the alternative frequencies function off, select the
EDUCATE ↔ DRAMA ↔ CULTURE ↔ SCIENCE ↔ “AF OFF”.
VARIED ↔ POP M ↔ ROCK M ↔ EASY M ↔ LIGHT M ↔
CLASSICS ↔ OTHER M ↔ WEATHER ↔ FINACE ↔
Notes
CHILDREN ↔ SOCIAL ↔ RELIGION ↔ PHONE IN ↔
◆ Only RDS stations are tuned in during seek tuning or preset station when
TRAVEL ↔ LEISURE ↔ JAZZ ↔ COUNTRY ↔ NATION M
↔ OLDIES ↔ FOLK M ↔ DOCU ↔ PTY NONE ↔ .... AF is on.
◆ When you recall a preset station, the tuner may update the preset station
3 Press RDS button to begin the seeking. with a new frequency from the station’s AF list. No preset number
appears on the display if the RDS data for the station received differs
The unit searches for a station broadcasting that from that of the originally stored station.
program type. When a station is found, its program ◆ Sound may be temporarily interrupted by another program during an AF
service name is displayed. frequency search.
◆ To cancel the search, press RDS button again.
◆ AF can be turned on or off independently for each FM band.
Notes
◆ The program of some stations may differ from that indicated by the
transmitted PTY.
◆ If no station is broadcasting the type of program you searched for, “Not
found” is displayed for about two seconds and then the tuner returns to
the original station.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio with RDS
▶ Receiving Traffic Program 2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the TA ON
English
mode then press POWER [ ] button.
● Searching for a TP (Traffic Program) station TA standby is on.
1 Press and hold RDS button repeatedly to select If a traffic announcement is being received, the unit
automatically switches to the traffic announcement
the TP SEEK mode. broadcast station.
“TP ON” or “TP OFF” appear on the display. ◆ When the traffic announcement ends, the unit automatically
2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the TP ON switches to the previous function. (The Bluetooth audio
function can not be resumed. Retry the Bluetooth
mode then press POWER [ ] button. connection)
TP standby is on. ◆ To turn off, select the “TA OFF” by using the VOLUME
◆ To turn off, select the “TP OFF” by using the VOLUME dial.
dial.
3 Press RDS button to begin the seek.
The unit seek for a traffic program broadcast station.
◆ When the traffic program ends, the unit automatically
switches to the previous function. (The Bluetooth audio
function can not be resumed. Retry the Bluetooth
▶ Changing the display items/scroll function
connection)
◆ To cancel the search, press RDS button again. 1 Press and hold INF button repeatedly to select
the display item or scroll function on/off as below;
● Radio text : Allows the RDS station to send text
▶ Receiving Traffic Announcements messages that appear on the display.
● PTY (Program Type) name : Identifies the type of RDS
TA (Traffic Announcement standby) lets you receive traffic
announcements automatically, no matter what source you are listening to. program.
TA can be activated for both a TP station (a station that broadcasts traffic ● SCROLL ON/OFF : Activate/deactivate the scroll
information) or an enhanced other network’s TP station (a station carrying function for displaying performance.
information which cross-references TP stations).
● Incase of the SCROLL ON/OFF
● Turning on/off the TA standby function
1 Press and hold RDS button repeatedly to select 2 Rotate VOLUME dial to switch to OFF or ON,
the TA menu.
“TA ON” or “TA OFF” appear on the display.
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD player
▶ Before disc playback ▶ Loading a disc and starting playback
English
◆
◆
You can play CD-DA and MP3/WMA discs.
This unit cannot play the following files;
1 Insert a disc into the disc slot
with the label side facing up.
- MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format. ● Playback will start automatically
- MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
after recognizing the data of the
- MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2. loading disc.
- WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format. ● It may take some time to start
- WMA files which are not based upon Windows MediaⓇ Audio. playing.
- WMA files copy-protected with DRM. ● All tracks will be played until you change the source or eject the disc.
- Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
Note:
Note : Available discs ◆ Do not insert a disc when the disc indicator lights on the display window
◆ CD-DA : CD-R/CD-RW because a disc is already loaded.
◆ When disc is in the unit
Caution Press CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio button repeatedly to select the CD and

◆ 3” (8 cm) CD is not available for this unit, so do not insert it. playback starts.
◆ Do not use irregularly-shaped discs.
◆ Do not use discs that have a seal or label attached.
◆ To avoid damaging the front panel, do not push it down or place objects
▶ Controlling the playback
on it while it is open.
◆ Do not put your finger or hand in the front panel. 1 Press TUNE buttons repeatedly to go to
◆ Do not insert foreign objects into the disc slot. the next or previous tracks.
Note ◆ For MP3 or WMA disc, you can skip tracks within the same
◆The power will be turned on automatically when a disc is loaded. folder.
A disc which has both CD-DA data and MP3/WMA data on it may not
be reproduced normally. (For example, it may be reproduced 2 Press and hold TUNE buttons to fast-
without sound.) forward or rewind the track, and release to resume
the playback.
◆ The search function works but search speed is not constant.
◆ While fast forwarding or rewinding, you can only hear
intermittent sounds.
3 Press 5 D- or 6 D+ button repeatedly to go to the

previous or next folders (only for MP3 or WMA
disc).
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD player
▶ Selecting the playback modes ▶ Searching the music
English
1 Press 2 RPT button repeatedly to select Repeat 1 Press SCAN/INF button to enter the Search
playback mode. Mode.
● RPT : The current track plays repeatedly. Track number or name appears on the display for 5
● FOLDER [ ] RPT (for MP3/WMA only) : All tracks of seconds.
current folder play repeatedly.
● Off : Cancels repeat playback. 2 Rotate and hold VOLUME dial to select the
desired track number or name, then press
2 Press 3 INT button repeatedly to select Intro scan POWER [ ] button to start playback the
playback mode. selected track.
● FOLDER [ ] INT (for MP3/WMA only) : Successively
plays the intro of the track in the current folder.
● INT : Successively plays the intro of the track in the disc.
● Off : Cancels intro playback.
▶ Showing the folder information
3 Press 4 RDM button repeatedly to select Random 1 Press and hold SCAN/INF button to show the
playback mode.
● FOLDER [ ] RDM (for MP3/WMA only) : Tracks of
current folder information for 5 seconds.
current folder play in random order.
● RDM : Tracks of disc play in random order. ● To switch the scroll function on/off
● Off : Cancels random playback. ◆ Activate/deactivate the scroll function for displaying performance.
Note: Changing the source
If you change the source, playback also stops (without ejecting the disc). 2 While showing the folder information, press
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source, disc play starts from where it SCAN/INF button to show the SCROLL ON or
was been stopped previously. OFF.
3 Rotate VOLUME dial to switch to OFF or ON,

15
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD player
▶ Stopping playback and ejecting a disc ▶ About MP3/WMA
English
1 Press EJECT [ ] This unit can playback MP3/WMA files with the extension code<.mp3>
or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case-upper/lower).
button, and take
the disc. This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag
(Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
Note: Ejecting a disc
This unit can display only one-byte characters, no other characters can be
If the ejected disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the disc is
automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. correctly displayed.
(Disc will not play this time.) This unit can playback MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below;
- Bit rate:
8 kbps ~ 320 kbps for MP3 / 64 kbps ~ 161 kbps (VBR) for WMA
▶ About CD-R/CD-RW - Sampling frequency:
Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs. 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1 Layer 2/3)
This unit can playback only files of the same type which are first 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5 Layer 3)
detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA
files. - Disc format: ISO/IEC 11172-3, ISO/IEC 13818-3
The maximum number of characters for file/folder names vary among the
This unit can playback multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions
will be skipped while playing. disc format used (includes 4 extension characters - <.mp3> or <.wma>).
- ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not playback on this unit because of their
disc characteristics, or for the following reasons; - ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31characters
- Discs are dirty or scratched. - Romeo: up to 128 characters
- Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit. - Joliet: up to 64 characters
- The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty. - Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
- CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with “Packet Write” The unit can playback files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate). Files
method. recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not
- There are improper recording conditions(missing data, etc) or media
conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc). show the actual elapsed time. After performing the search function, this
difference becomes noticeable.
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-
RWs is lower then that of regular CDs. The unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8
hierarchies.
Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs;
- Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seals stuck to the surface.
- Discs in which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer. Note
◆ Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or
Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidity may cause trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
malfunctions or damage to the unit. countries.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
- If your phone does not find “New Rexton” or “SSANGYONG” repeat steps
▶ Bluetooth operation 1~2.
English
To use the Bluetooth function, the following procedure is necessary.
1. Pairing 3 If *Pass key input is required on the display of a connecting
When connecting Bluetooth devices for the first time, mutual device, input “00xx” (4 digit).
registration is required. This is called “pairing.”. This registration This unit and Bluetooth device memorize each other’s information,
(pairing) is required only for the first time, as this unit and the other and when pairing is made, the unit is ready for connection to the
devices will recognize each other automatically from the next time. device.
(Depending on the device, you may need to input a pass code for "BT CONNECT" and “Bluetooth device model name” or “BT
each connection.) MOBILE” with “ ” indicator appear after pairing is completed.
2. Connection - Some Bluetooth device ask you to accept the “BT link” or “Connect”.
Sometimes pairing allows automatic connection. Enter “Yes” or “OK”.
To use the device after pairing is made, start the connection. * Pass key may be called “passcode,” “PIN code,” “PIN number” or
3. Handsfree talk/Music streaming “password,” etc., depending on the device.
You can call a mobile phone and listen to music when the connection
is made.
Some Bluetooth device may not support specific functions. 4 Set the Bluetooth device to connect to this unit.
Note : Pairing standby mode is not released until the connection is made.
▶ Pairing your phone and car audio system

Fist, register (“pair”) a Bluetooth device (mobile phone, etc.) and this unit with
▶ Connecting a mobile phone
each other. You can pair up to 6 devices. Once pairing is established, there is no - Devices are registered once paired and connected with this unit. You
need for pairing again. can select the registered device and connect it.
Place the Bluetooth device within 3 m (9 ft) of this unit. - If pairing has already been achieved, start operation from here.
1 Press and hold CALL [ ] button for more 3 - Depending on the device, connection may start automatically after pairing.
seconds.
The unit enters pairing standby mode. The "PAIRING" 1 Connect to this unit using your mobile phone and
appears in the display with beep and then flash the press CALL [ ] button.
"KEY 00xx". The “BT CONNECT” with “ ” icon is appeared and
Bluetooth signal is switched to on.
2 Set the Bluetooth device to search for this unit.
A list of detected devices appears in the display of the connecting
device. This unit is displayed as “New Rexton” or “SSANGYONG” Note
on the connecting device. To show the information of connected Bluetooth
Confirm this by pressing “YES” or “OK” on your phone. device, press SCAN/INF button.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Making a call via last call ▶ Adjusting the talk volume
English
You can make a call from the connected mobile phone by operating this unit.
1 Rotate VOLUME dial to increase or to
1 Press and hold CALL [ ] button for more 3 decrease the talk volume level.
seconds to enter the Last call dial mode. The display will show the Bluetooth volume level.
“REDIAL” appears and the phone redialing starts. (BT VOL 6 ~ 32)
▶ Receiving a call ▶ Muting the talk sound

When receiving a call, the ring tone is output from your car speakers and
caller’s number appears on screen. 1 Press MUTE button on the Steering wheel
audio control to activate the microphone mute
1 When a call comes in, “CALL IN” and ”Telephone function.
number” appears with a ring tone, press CALL
[ ] button to answer a call. The display will show ‘MIC MUTE’.
“BT TEL” appears and the phone call starts. To cancel the microphone mute function, press
MUTE button on the Steering wheel audio control.
The built-in microphone of this audio system will pick up ‘MIC MUTE’ disappears.
your voice.
To reject an incoming call, press END [ ]

button.
“CALL REJECT” appears and return to previous ▶ Ending a call
function.
1 Press END [ ] button.
Note:
Even if the calls is ended, the Bluetooth connection is not canceled.
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Transferring a call ▶ Listening to music from a Bluetooth device
English
In oder to activate/deactivate the appropriate device (this unit/mobile phone), You can listen to music of the mobile phone on this unit if the mobile phone
check the following. supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of Bluetooth
technology.
1 During a call via Bluetooth handsfree, press
CALL [ ] button. The hands-free function is 1 Switch to Bluetooth signal on of the your mobile phone or
deactivated, and the microphone and speaker of audio device.
mobile phone are activated. “Stereo Headset” appears when the connection is made.
“PRIVATE” appears and the mobile phone calling
starts. 2 Rotate VOLUME dial to turn down the volume
level on this unit.
During a call via mobile phone, Press CALL [ ]
button. The Bluetooth hands-free function is
activated.
“BT TEL” appears and the hands-free calling starts.
3 Press CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio button
repeatedly until “BT AUDIO” appears.
For details on mobile phone operation, refer to your mobile
phone manual. 4 Operate the audio device to start playback.
You can change the volume and skip track by using buttons on this
Note: unit. (Refer to ‘MP3[WMA]/CD player’ section)
Depending on the mobile phone, hands-free connection may be cut off
when call transfer is attempted. 5 Rotate VOLUME dial to adjust the volume level
on this unit.
6 To stop listening to music, press and hold END

[ ] button or press BAND/AS or CD/USB/AUX
/BT Audio button to select other function.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Setting the Bluetooth mode
English
◆ You can control the Bluetooth modes. ● Incase of the PAIR selecting
1 Press SET button to enter the Setting mode. 5 Follow steps 2 to 4 in 17 page “Pairing your
“EQ”, “TONE” and “BT” appear. phone and car audio system” to complete the
pairing.
2 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the BT menu, ● Incase of the DELETE selecting
5 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the “YES” or
“NO”, then press POWER [ ] button.
YES: Deletes the selected Bluetooth device list.
3 Rotate VOLUME dial to select the desired NO: Cancels the Delete operation.
Bluetooth Setting item, then press POWER
[ ] button.
● By rotating VOLUME dial, you can select one of the
following Bluetooth Setting items.
PAIR ↔ SELECT ↔ PRIORITY ↔ DELETE ↔
PREVIOUS ↔ PAIR ↔ ...
4 Rotate VOLUME dial to select device list or

adjust value, then press POWER [ ] button.
● PAIR:enter the pairing (Key Code : 00xx).
● SELECT: selects one of 5 Bluetooth devices for
connection.
● PRIORITY: selects the priority of connection.
● DELETE: deletes a Bluetooth device.
● PREVIOUS: return to the BT menu.
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB/AUX player
▶ Playing a USB device ▶ Precautions for handling USB device
English
By connecting a USB device to the USB cable at the USB input ● When using the external USB device, ● The amount of time required to recognize
jack on the unit, you can listen on your car speakers, while make sure to keep the device disconnected the external USB device may differ
controlling the USB device from the unit. and connect only some time after turning depending on the type, size, or file formats
on the vehicle ignition. The USB device stored on the USB. Such differences in the
1 Press and hold POWER [ ] button may be damaged if the USB device
already connected when the ignition is
required time are not indications of
malfunction. Please wait the period of time
to turn off the unit.
turned on. (USB device is not an electronic required to recognize the device.
automotive component) ● The device supports only USB devices
● Some USB devices may not operate used to play music files.
2 Connect the USB storage properly because of compatibility issues.
Check that the external device is supported
● Do not use the USB I/F to charge batteries
or USB accessories which generate heat.
device with MP3/WMA files to by the device before starting use. Such acts may lead to deteriorated
be played to the USB input performance or damage to the device.
● The device will only recognize USB
terminal using by USB cable. devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32. ● The device may not recognize the USB
The ‘USB’ appears and playback When formatting the external USB device, device if separately purchased USB hubs
starts automatically after the device may not properly recognize a and extension cables are being used.
recognizing the data of the USB Byte/Sector selection other than 512Byte ● In the case of high capacity USB devices,
storage device. or 2048Byte. there are instances where the logical drives
● Avoid the contact of bodily parts and are partitioned for user convenience. In this
foreign substances with the USB connector. case, it will only be possible to play the
USB music in the top level drive.
3 When the USB storage device is ● Repeatedly connecting/disconnecting the
USB in a short period of time may cause
When using partitioned drives, save the
songs you wish to play on the device only
already connected, press damage to the device. in the top-level logical drive. In addition,
CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio button certain USB devices are configured with a
repeatedly until ‘USB’ appears. ● When disconnecting the USB, an separate drive used to install application
abnormal sound may occur occasionally. programs and it may not be possible to
The USB playback will starts
automatically. ● Abruptly disconnecting the external USB play songs from such drives for the reasons
device while the USB is operating may as described above.
cause the device to be damaged or function ● The device may not support normal
abnormally. operation when using formats such as
Make sure to disconnect the USB device HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
You can change the volume, play mode and track only after the audio power is turned off or ● The device will not support files locked by
selection by using buttons on control panel. when the audio is operating in a different
(Refer to ‘MP3[WMA]/CD player’ section) DRM (Digital Rights Management).
mode.
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB/AUX player
▶ Listening to auxiliary audio equipment
English
By connecting an optional portable audio device to the AUX input jack (stereo
mini jack) on the unit and then simply selecting the source, you can listen on
your car speakers. The volume level is adjustable for any difference between the
unit and the portable audio device.
1 Turn down the volume on the unit.
2 Turn off the external audio equipment.

Connect the audio output of the external
audio equipment to AUX input terminal on
the the unit.
Be sure to adjust the volume for
each connected audio device before
playback.
3 Start playback of the external audio equipment at

a moderate volume.
4 Press CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio button

repeatedly until ‘AUX IN’ appears.
When the external audio equipment is already
connected, skip the 1 ~ 3 steps.
5 Set your usual listening volume on the unit.
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
Steering wheel audio control
▶ Using the Steering wheel audio control
English
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.
They include the following:
▲ VOL ▼ MODE
Press : increase/decrease the volume. ● Press : selects the functions (CD → USB
▲ SEEK ▼ ● Press and hold : selects the band (FM1
During a station listen → FM2 → MW → LW...)

● Press : go to the next/previous preset
MUTE
station.
● Press and hold : search the next/previous During a call
radio station. (The radio seeks stations Press : turns the MIC. MUTE function
only with a strong signal that are in the on/off
selected band) During Radio or CD/USB/BT Audio mode
During a CD/USB/BT Audio play Press : turns the radio mute or CD/ USB
● Press : go to the next/previous track. pause playback on/off.
● Press and hold : fast forward/backward
through the tracks. (only for CD/ USB Phone [ ]
playback) During standby
Press and hold : makes a call via last call
PWR [ ] dialing function
Press : turns the system on/off or switch
to private call mode for incoming a call. During a call coming in
● Press : receives the incoming a call
● Press and hold : rejects the incoming a
call
During a call
● Press : switches to the private or
bluetooth call mode
● Press and hold : ends a call
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Troubleshooting
▶ Common
English

- Sound is not generated. - MUTE is set to ON. - Set MUTE to OFF.
- Noise - There is an electromagnetic-wave - Keep electromagnetic-wave generators such as a cellular
generator such as a cellular phone near phones away from the unit and the wiring of the unit. If the
the unit or its electrical lines. noise cannot be eliminated due to the wiring harness of the
car, consult your dealer.
- No sound from speaker(s) - Balance/fader setting is not appropriate. - Readjust balance/fader.
▶ Radio
- Poor reception or noise - Unsatisfactory broadcast conditions. - Receive and listen to the signals from the station concerned
in the analog mode.
- Seeking takes too long. - The number of receivable stations is - Move to an area with maximum number of receivable
less than 6. stations, and try presetting.
- The number of auto preset - The contact of the battery lead is poor, - Make sure that the battery lead is connected securely, and
stations is less than 6. or the battery lead is not always preset stations again.
powered.
- Preset stations cannot be - Digital seeking may take some time. - Change to auto seeking, and proceed with seeking again.
stored.
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Troubleshooting
▶ MP3[WMA]/CD player
English
- No playback or disc ejected - The disc is inserted upside down. - Insert the disc correctly.
- There is a flaw or foreign object on the - Remove the foreign objects, or use a flawless disc.
disc.
- The disc has unplayable formatted data. - Refer to the description about MP3/WMA for playable sound
data except CD-DA (i.e. music CD).
- The unit plays back the ROM track of a - Skip the ROM track.
mix mode CD.
- The CD-R/RWs that are - The playability of some CD-R/RWs may - Make CD-R/RWs in different combination of media,
playable on other devices depend on the combination of media, recording software and recorder after referring to the
are not playable on this recording software and recorder to be description about MP3/WMA.
unit. used even if these CD-R/RWs are
playable on other devices such as a
personal computer.
- Sound skipping or noise - There is a flaw or foreign object on the - Remove the foreign objects, or use a flawless disc. For
disc. MP3/WMA, refer to the description about MP3/WMA.
- Sound skipping due to - The unit is not sufficiently secured. - Secure the unit to the console box with the rear support
vibration strap, etc.
- The unit is tilted at over 30° in the front- - Make the angle 30° or less.
to-end direction.
- Disc unejectable - A label is peeled off from the CD in the - Refer repair to the dealer where you purchased the unit.
unit.
25
GETtheMANUALS.org
Troubleshooting
▶ USB MP3[WMA] player
English

- The USB does not work - USB memory is damaged. - Please use after formatting the USB into FAT 12/16/32
format.
- USB memory has been contaminated. - Remove any foreign substances on the contact surface of
the USB memory and multimedia terminal.
- A separately purchased USB HUB is - Directly connect the USB memory with the multimedia
being used. terminal in the vehicle.
- A USB extension cable is being used. - Directly connect the USB memory with the multimedia
terminal in the vehicle.
- A USB which is not a Metal Cover Type - Use a standard USB Memory.
USB Memory is being used.
- An HDD type, CF, SD Memory is being - Use a standard USB Memory.

used.
- There are no music files which can be - Only MP3, WMA file formats are supported. Please use only
played. the supported music file formats.
26
GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications
▶ General section ▶ MP3[WMA]/CD section
English
Power supply DC 14.4V Negative Ground Sampling frequency 8 times oversampling
Speaker impedance 4 ohm DA converter 4 DAC system
Max. Power 45 Watts x 4 Ch Pick-up type Astigma 3-beam
Weight 880 g (Net) Light source Semiconductor laser
Dimension(WxHxD) 178 x 52 x 155 mm Wave length 780 nm
Frequency response 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz (±3 dB)
▶ FM/MW/LW Radio section
Signal to noise ratio ≥50 dB
FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108 MHz
Total harmonic distortion ≤1 % (1 kHz)
Frequency range MW 522 kHz ~ 1620 kHz
LW 144 kHz ~ 290 kHz Wow and flutter Below measurable limits
FM ≤18 dBu Channel separation ≥35 dB
Usable sensitivity MW ≤35 dBu
LW ≤35 dBu
FM ≥45 dB ▶ Bluetooth section
Signal to noise ratio MW ≥40 dB
LW ≥40 dB Bluetooth V2.0
Core Spec.
Stereo separation FM ≥20 dB (Bluetooth V1,2 compatible)
Sensitivity - 60 dBm
▶ USB MP3[WMA] section Internal Memory 16 M bits Flash Memory
Frequency response 20 Hz ~ 20 KHz Higher Bandwidth Audio support
Total harmonic distortion 0.1 % (at 1 KHz) Applied function Advanced Audio Distribution Profile
Hands-free Profile support/Private Call
Dynamic range 85 dB (at 1 KHz)
Signal-to-noise ratio 60 dB (at 1 KHz)
Specifications and design are subject to modification without notice
Channel separation 54 dB (at 1 KHz) due to improvements.
27
GETtheMANUALS.org
Deutsch
● Bitte
lesen Sie diese Anweisungen vor der Inbetriebnahme des
Produkts sorgfältig durch und bewahren Sie das Handbuch auf.
● Das Design und die Spezifikationen dieses Produkts können
ohne weitere Ankündigung für Produktverbesserungen geändert
werden.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Inhalt
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen Ändern der Display- USB-/AUX-Player
Informationen zur Sicherheit ...................... 2 Elemente/Bildlauffunktion ......................... 13 Wiedergabe über ein USB-Gerät ............. 21
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen bei der MP3-[WMA-]/CD-Player Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für die
Handhabung................................................. 3 USB-Nutzung ............................................ 21
Vor der Wiedergabe einer CD .................. 14
Anhören über ein Zubehör-Audiogerät .... 22
Deutsch
Bedienelemente Laden einer CD und Starten
Ansicht von vorn .......................................... 4 der Wiedergabe ........................................ 14 Audiobedienelemente am Lenkrad
Display-Fenster ........................................... 5 Steuerung der Wiedergabe ...................... 14 Verwenden der Audiobedienelemente
Ansicht von hinten ....................................... 6 Auswahl der Wiedergabemodi ................. 15 am Lenkrad ............................................... 23
Suchen von Musik .................................... 15
Erste Schritte Anzeigen der Ordnerinformationen ......... 15 Fehlerbehebung
Ein-/Ausschalten des Geräts ...................... 7 Stoppen der Wiedergabe und Allgemeines ............................................... 24
Direkte Anpassung der Lautstärke ...... 7 Auswerfen einer CD ................................. 16 Radio ......................................................... 24
Stummschaltung ......................................... 7 Info zu CD-R/CD-RW ............................... 16 MP3-[WMA-]CD-Player ............................ 25
Einrichten des Equalizer-Stils ..................... 8 Info zu MP3/WMA ..................................... 16 USB-MP3-[WMA-]Player .......................... 26
Einrichten des Tons .................................... 8
Bluetooth Spezifikationen
Radio Bluetooth-Betrieb ...................................... 17 Allgemeines ............................................... 27
Einstellen eines Senders ............................ 9 Koppeln von Telefon und FM-/MW-/LW-Radio ................................. 27
Manuelles Speichern eines Senders ......... 9 Fahrzeug-Audiosystem ............................ 17 MP3-[WMA-]CD-Player ............................ 27
Automatisches Speichern Anschließen eines Mobiltelefons ............. 17 MP3-[WMA-]USB ...................................... 27
eines Senders ........................................... 10 Anruf über Wahlwiederholung .................. 18 Bluetooth-Bereich ..................................... 27
Anhören eines gespeicherten Senders ... 10 Annehmen eines Anrufs ........................... 18
Anpassen der Sprechlautstärke ............... 18
Radio mit RDS Stummschaltung ....................................... 18
Begrenzen der Sender auf Beenden eines Anrufs .............................. 18
regionale Programme ............................... 11 Weiterleiten eines Anrufs .......................... 19
Verwenden von PTY-Funktionen ............. 12 Anhören von Musik über
Auswahl alternativer Frequenzen ............ 12 ein Audiogerät ........................................... 19
Empfang von Verkehrsprogramm ........... 13 Einrichten des Bluetooth-Modus .............. 20
Empfang von Verkehrsnachrichten ......... 13
1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen
▶ Informationen zur Sicherheit
WARNUNG: Dieses Gerät wurde getestet und erfüllt die Grenzwerte für ein
ZUR VERMEIDUNG DES BRAND- ODER Laserprodukt der Klasse 1 gemäß Teil 15 der FCC-Regularien.
STROMSCHLAGRISIKOS DARF DIESES GERÄT NIE Diese Grenzwerte wurden festgelegt, um einen angemessenen
Deutsch
REGEN ODER FEUCHTIGKEIT AUSGESETZT WERDEN. Schutz vor Störungen beim Einsatz des Gerätes in einer
ZUR VERMEIDUNG DES BRAND-, STROMSCHLAG- UND Wohngegend zu gewährleisten.
STÖRUNGSRISIKOS DARF DIESES GERÄT NUR MIT DEN Dieses Gerät erzeugt und verwendet Funkfrequenzenergie und
IM LIEFERUMFANG ENTHALTENEN KOMPONENTEN kann diese ausstrahlen.
VERWENDET WERDEN. Dies kann sich, sofern das Gerät nicht gemäß der
ACHTUNG: Bedienungsanleitung angeschlossen und eingesetzt wird,
störend auf andere Funkfrequenzen auswirken.
ES HANDELT SICH UM EIN LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE
Eine Garantie, dass bei einer bestimmten Installation keine
1. DIE VERWENDUNG VON BEDIENELEMENTEN ODER
Störungen auftreten, kann nicht gegeben werden.
ANPASSUNGEN ODER LEISTUNGEN ODER
PROZEDUREN, DIE NICHT IN DIESEM DOKUMENT Sollte das Gerät Störungen beim Radioempfang verursachen,
die durch Aus- und Einschalten der Geräte erkannt werden
ANGEGEBEN SIND, KANN ZU GEFÄHRLICHEN
können, sollten die Störungen durch ein oder mehrere der
STRAHLUNGEN FÜHREN. folgenden Maßnahmen behoben werden:
ÖFFNEN SIE NIE DIE ABDECKUNGEN UND NEHMEN SIE
NIE EIGENHÄNDIG REPARATUREN AM GERÄT VOR.
WENDEN SIE SICH AN EINEN QUALIFIZIERTEN
REPARATURTECHNIKER.
Teil 15 der FCC-Regularien

FCC-Warnung:
Alle nicht autorisierten Änderungen an diesem Gerät führen
zu einem Erlöschen der Betriebserlaubnis des Geräts.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen
▶ Informationen zur Sicherheit ▶ Sicherheitsmaßnahmen bei der Handhabung
Während des Fahrens ◆ Dieses Gerät ist auf die Speisung durch 14 Volt Gleichspannung
Halten Sie die Lautstärke so niedrig, dass Ihre Aufmerksamkeit für bei negativer Erdung ausgerichtet. Eine nicht standardmäßige
den Verkehr und die Straßenbedingungen nicht beeinträchtigt wird. Spannungsversorgung darf nicht verwendet werden.
Beim Waschen des Fahrzeuges
Deutsch
Das Produkt und die Lautsprecher und CDs dürfen nie Wasser oder
übermäßiger Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden. Anderenfalls kann es
zu Kurzschlüssen, Bränden oder anderen Beschädigungen
kommen.
Beim Parken
Beim Parken in direkter Sonneneinstrahlung können die
Temperaturen im Innenbereich des Fahrzeuges enorm ansteigen.
Sorgen Sie dafür, dass die Temperatur im Innenbereich abgekühlt ◆ Das Gerät darf nicht mit Verdünner, Benzin, Lösemittel, usw.
ist, bevor Sie das Gerät einschalten. gereinigt werden.
Verwenden der geeigneten Spannungsversorgung n!
Dieses Produkt ist auf die Speisung mit 14 Volt Gleichspannung bei Nei
negativer Erdung ausgelegt.
CD-Mechanismus
Stecken Sie keine Münzen oder kleine Objekte in das Gerät.
Berühren Sie den CD-Mechanismus und die CD nicht mit einem
Schraubendreher oder anderen metallischen Gegenständen.
Autorisierter Kundendienst
Dieses Produkt ist aus hochpräzisen Komponenten aufgebaut.
Versuchen Sie nie, Teile eigenständig auseinander zu nehmen oder
◆ Wenden Sie nicht übermäßige Kraft auf, um die Funktionstasten
anzupassen. Wenden Sie sich an einen Kundendienst auf der mit
dem Produkt gelieferten Liste, wenn Sie Unterstützung bei zu betätigen. Betätigen Sie die Tasten seicht, um
Reparaturen benötigen. Beschädigungen zu vermeiden.
Installation
Dieses Produkt sollte in horizontaler Position mit dem vorderen
Ende nach oben bei einem Winkel von maximal 30° installiert
werden. Nein
Hinweis:
Der voreingestellte Speicher wird auf die Werkseinstellungen zurückgesetzt
(gelöscht), wenn der Spannungsanschluss aufgehoben wird. 3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bedienelemente
▶ Ansicht von vorn
1. Display-Fenster
2. Taste BAND/AS
Auswahl der Radiofunktion oder des Bandes (drücken: FM1
→ FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....); automatische
Deutsch
Speicherung von Sendern (gedrückt halten).

3. Taste SCAN/INF
Automatischer Sender-Scan; Zugriff auf den Modus der
Dateisuche (drücken); Schalten der Displayposten (drücken
und gedrückt halten).
4. Taste RDS
Suchen des festgelegten Programmtyps oder des Senders
mit Verkehrsnachrichten (drücken); Zugriff auf das RDS-Menü
(Radio Data System) (drücken und gedrückt halten).
5. Taste SET
Zugriff auf den Einstellmodus (EQ-Stil, Ton und Bluetooth).
6. Taste TUNE
- Während des Radioempfangs
Manuelles Suchen eines Senders (drücken); automatisches
Suchen einer Station (drücken und gedrückt halten).
- Während der CD-/USB-Wiedergabe
10. Taste CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio 13. Zahlentasten [1 INT bis 6 D+]
Überspringen eines Titels (drücken); hoch/runter in - Während des Radioempfangs
Dateisuche; schneller Vor-/Rücklauf (drücken und gedrückt Auswahl zwischen CD, USB, AUX oder
halten). Bluetooth-Audio-Wiedergabe. Empfang gespeicherter Sender (drücken);
Speichern des Senders (drücken und gedrückt
7. Taste CALL [ ] 11. Taste AUSWURF [ ] für CD
halten).
Annehmen eines eingehenden Anrufs (drücken); Anschließen Auswurf der eingelegten CD.
- Während der CD-/USB-Wiedergabe
eines Bluetooth-Geräts (drücken und gedrückt halten). 12. Taste POWER [ ]/MUTE mit 2 RPT : Wiederholen
8. Taste END [ ] Lautstärkeregler 3 INT : Intro-Wiedergabe
Beenden eines Anrufs (drücken); Aufheben der Bluetooth- Einschalten; Stummschaltung des Radios; 4 RDM : Zufällige Wiedergabe
Verbindung (drücken und gedrückt halten). Pausieren und Anhalten der Pause von 5 D- : Ordner nach unten
CD/USB-Wiedergabe (drücken); 6 D+ : Ordner nach oben
9. CD-Schacht Ausschalten (drücken und gedrückt halten);
Einlegen der CD (Beschriftung nach oben); die Anpassen der Lautstärke; Auswahl des Postens
Wiedergabe startet automatisch. für Einstellung/Suche (drehen)
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bedienelemente
▶ Display-Fenster
[Radiofunktion] [CD/MP3/WMA-Funktion]
1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Deutsch
ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00 : 01
4 5 5
1. Voreingestellte Kanalnummer 6. CD-Anzeige
2. RDS-Anzeige 7. Medien-Anzeige
- TP leuchtet auf, wenn ein Sender mit TP (Traffic Program; CDP leuchtet auf, wenn eine Audio-CD geladen ist.
Verkehrsprogramm) eingestellt wird. MP3 leuchtet auf, wenn eine MP3-Datei geladen ist.
- TA leuchtet auf, wenn die Funktion TA (Traffic Announcement; WMA leuchtet auf, wenn eine WMA-Datei geladen ist.
Benachrichtigung über Verkehrsnachrichten) aktiviert ist.
- REG leuchtet auf, wenn ein REG-Sender (regional) eingestellt ist. 8. Nummer des aktuelles Ordners (aktuelles Verzeichnis)
- AF leuchtet auf, wenn die Funktion AF (Alternative Frequencies; 9. Nummer der aktuellen Datei (des aktuellen Titels)
Alternative Frequenzsuche) aktiviert ist.
10. USB-Anzeige
3. Stereo-Anzeige 11. Anzeige für Ordnerauswahlmodus
4. Band-Anzeige 12. Anzeige für Wiedergabemodus
RPT (Repeat; Wiederholen), INT (Intro), RDM (Random; Zufällig)
5. Multifunktionsdisplay-Bereich
13. Anzeige für Bluetooth-Funktion
14. Wiedergabezeit
15. Anzeige für EQ (Equalizer)
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bedienelemente
▶ Ansicht von hinten
Deutsch
1. Antennenbuchse
Für den Anschluss des FM-Antennenkabels.
2. AUX-Eingang
Für den Anschluss eines AUX-Steckers für ein Audiogerät.
3. USB-Anschluss
Für den Anschluss eines USB-Steckers für die USB-Host-Funktion.
4. E/A-Anschluss (18polig)
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
Erste Schritte
▶ Ein-/Ausschalten des Geräts ▶ Direkte Anpassung der Lautstärke
1 Stellen Sie den Zündschlüssel in die Position 1 Drehen Sie am Lautstärkeregler, um die
ACC oder ON. Lautstärke zu erhöhen oder zu senken.
Auf dem Display wird das Lautstärkeniveau angezeigt
Deutsch
2 Betätigen Sie die Taste POWER [ ], um das (Audio-Modus: 00 bis 45/Anrufmodus: 06 bis 32).
Gerät einzuschalten.
● Ist die Quelle bereit, erfolgt die Wiedergabe.
● Wenn Sie das Gerät ausschalten, während Sie eine
CD oder USB-Medien hören, wird die CD-/USB-
Wiedergabe beim Einschalten wieder an dem Punkt
begonnen, an dem sie zuvor gestoppt wurde.
● Wenn Sie das Gerät beim Hören von Radio
ausschalten, wird beim Wiedereinschalten wieder der
Sender ausgewählt, der zum Zeitpunkt des
Ausschaltens ausgewählt war.
▶ Stummschaltung
3 Betätigen Sie die Taste POWER [ ], um das
Gerät auszuschalten. 1 Betätigen Sie die Taste MUTE, um die
● Wenn Sie das Gerät ausgeschaltet haben, während Stummschaltung oder Pause zu aktivieren.
eine CD wiedergegeben wurde, beginnt beim nächsten Auf dem Display wird „MUTE“ oder „PAUSE“
Einschalten des Geräts die Wiedergabe der CD wieder angezeigt.
an dem Punkt, an dem sie gestoppt wurde.
Während der Wiedergabe von CD/USB wird die
Wiedergabe bei Stummschaltung des Tons pausiert.
So schalten Sie das Gerät direkt ein Um den Ton wieder herzustellen oder die Wiedergabe
◆ Durch Einlegen einer CD, Anschließen eines USB-Geräts oder Betätigen
von CD/USB fortzusetzen, betätigen Sie die Taste
der BAND/AS- oder CD-/USB-/AUX-/BT-Audio-Taste (bei eingelegter MUTE oder drehen den Lautstärkeregler.
CD oder angeschlossenem USB-/AUX-/BT-Audio-Gerät), kann das
Gerät ebenfalls eingeschaltet werden. Es erfolgt dann die Wiedergabe.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
Erste Schritte
▶ Einrichten des Equalizer-Stils 2 Drehen Sie am Lautstärkeregler, um das Menü
TONE auszuwählen und betätigen Sie dann die
◆ Sie können aus den 6 EQ-Stilen und der Option EQ OFF auswählen. Taste POWER [ ].
1 Betätigen Sie die SET-Taste, um den
Einstellmodus zu öffnen. 3 Drehen Sie am Lautstärkeregler, um das
Deutsch
Auf dem Display werden „EQ“, „TONE“ und „BT“ gewünschte Element für die Tonregeleung
angezeigt. auszuwählen und betätigen Sie dann die Taste
POWER [ ].
2 Drehen Sie am Lautstärkeregler, um das Menü ● Bei jedem Drehen am TUNE-Regler können Sie eines
EQ auszuwählen und betätigen Sie dann die der folgenden Elemente für die Tonregelung
Taste POWER [ ]. auswählen.
BASS ↔ MIDDLE ↔ TREBLE ↔ BALANCE ↔
FADER ↔ PREVIOUS ↔ BASS ↔ ....
3 Drehen Sie am Lautstärkeregler, um den
gewünschten EQ-Stil auszuwählen und 4 Drehen Sie am Lautstärkeregler, um die
betätigen Sie dann die Taste POWER [ ]. einzelnen Werte für das Niveau und die Balance
● Bei jedem Drehen am TUNE-Regler können Sie einen anzupassen und betätigen Sie dann die Taste
der folgenden EQ-Stile auswählen. POWER [ ].
EQ OFF ↔ POP ↔ ROCK ↔ COUNTRY ↔ VOICE ● BASS: Anpassen des Bass-Niveaus (-7 bis +7).
↔ JAZZ ↔ CLASSIC ↔ EQ OFF ↔ .... ● MIDDLE: Anpassen des Mitten-Niveaus (-7 bis +7).
● TREBLE: Anpassen des Mitten-Niveaus (-7 bis +7).
● BALANCE: Anpassen der Ton-Balance zwischen
rechtem und linkem Lautsprecher (LEFT15 bis
▶ Einrichten des Tons RIGHT15).
● FADER: Anpassen des Ton-Fade zwischen vorderem
◆ Die Niveaus für Bass, Höhen, Mitten, Balance und Fade können angepasst und hinterem Lautsprecher (FRONT15 bis REAR15).
werden. ● PREVIOUS: zurück zum TONE-Menü.
Einstellmodus zu öffnen.
Auf dem Display werden „EQ“, „TONE“ und „BT“
angezeigt.
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
Hinweis
▶ Einstellen eines Senders ◆ Während des Empfangs von Stereo-Sendern wird „ST“ angezeigt.
● Radio Achtung
einschalten ◆ Verwenden Sie während des Fahrens zum Einstellen eines Senders die
1 Betätigen Sie die Taste BAND/AS, um das Band vordefinierten Zahlentasten, um einen Unfall zu vermeiden.
auszuwählen.
Deutsch
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
● Manuelles Einstellen eines Senders

▶ Manuelles Speichern eines Senders
2 Die Tasten TUNE wiederholt drücken,
um die gewünschte Frequenz einzustellen. ◆ Sie können für jedes Band (FM1, FM2, MW und LW) sechs Sender speichern.
1 Führen Sie die Schritte 1 bis 4 unter „Einstellen eines

● Automatisches Einstellen eines Senders Senders“ durch, um die Frequenz einzustellen, die
gespeichert werden soll.
3 Die Tasten TUNE für mehr als zwei
Sekunden drücken und loslassen.
Die Suche startet. ~ 2 Drücken Sie eine Zahlentaste [1 to 6 D+] und
Das Einstellen stoppt automatisch, wenn ein Sender
halten Sie diese für mehr als zwei Sekunden
erreicht wird, dessen Signal empfangen werden kann. gedrückt, um die voreingestellte Zahl
auszuwählen.
● Schnelles Scannen eines Senders Die Frequenz wird unter dieser voreingestellten Zahl
gespeichert. Zur Bestätigung wird ein Piepton
4 Betätigen Sie die Taste SCAN/INF, um die ausgegeben.
Sender zu scannen. Um einen weiteren Sender zu speichern, wiederholen
Das Gerät wechselt zum nächsten Sender, gibt diesen Sie diese Schritte.
für fünf Sekunden wieder und geht dann weiter zum Hinweis
nächsten Sender. ◆Wenn Sie unter der gleichen Nummer einen anderen Sender speichern, wird
Hat das Gerät den gewünschte Sender erreicht, der zuvor gespeicherte Sender mit dem neuen überschrieben.
betätigen Sie die Taste SCAN/INF, um den Scan-
Vorgang zu beenden.
Hinweis
◆ Während des Empfangs von Stereo-Sendern wird „ST“ angezeigt.
9
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Automatisches Speichern eines Senders ▶ Anhören eines gespeicherten Senders
◆ Das Gerät wählt die Sender mit dem stärksten Signal innerhalb des
ausgewählten Frequenzbandes aus und speichert diese in Reihenfolge der 1 Betätigen Sie die Taste BAND/AS, um das Band
Frequenz. auszuwählen.
◆ Im aktuellen Band können bis zu sechs Sender gespeichert werden.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
Deutsch
1 Halten Sie die Taste BAND/AS für mehr als zwei

~ 2 Betätigen Sie die Zahlentaste [1 to 6 D+], unter
Sekunden gedrückt.
Auf dem Display wird „AST Scanning“ angezeigt. der der gewünschte Sender gespeichert ist.
Das Gerät speichert Sender in Reihenfolge ihrer
Frequenz unter den Zahlentasten.
Hinweise
◆ Wenn aufgrund eines schwachen Signals nur wenige Sender empfangen
werden können, behalten einige Zahlentasten ihre vorherige Einstellung.
◆ Wird eine Zahl auf dem Display angezeigt, startet das Gerät starke Sender ab
der aktuell angezeigten.
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio mit RDS
◆ Acerca de RDS ▶ Begrenzung der Sender auf regionale Programme
RDS (Radio Data System) ist ein Rundfunkdienst, den immer mehr FM-
Sender anbieten. Über diesen Dienst können FM-Sender zusätzliche Signale ◆ Ist AF aktiviert, begrenzt diese Funktion die Auswahl der Sender auf
zusammen mit ihren regulären Programmsignalen senden. regionale Programme.
Beispielsweise senden die Sender den Namen und Informationen über den
Programmtyp, z. B. ob es sich um ein Sport- oder Musikprogramm handelt, 1 Die Taste RDS, um „REG ON” oder „REG
Deutsch
usw. OFF” wiederholt auszuwählen, drücken und
Ist ein FM-Sender eingestellt, der den RDS-Dienst anbietet, leuchtet die RDS- gedrückt halten.
Anzeige auf und es wird die Senderfrequenz angezeigt (und der Name des
Senders, wenn dieser mitgesendet wird). ◆ Wird das Gerät fünf Sekunden lang nicht bedient, kehrt
Nicht alle FM-Sender unterstützen den RDS-Dienst. Und nicht alle RDS- das Display automatisch in den Ausgangszustand zurück.
Sender bieten die gleichen Dienste. Überprüfen Sie die Informationen zu
ihren lokalen Radiosendern in Bezug auf die RDS-Dienste in ihrer Region. 2 Am Drehregler Lautstärke drehen, um „REG
ON” zu aktivieren, dann Taste POWER [ ]
Dieses Gerät unterstützt den folgenden RDS-Dienst.
PS (Programm-Service-Name)/PTY (Programmtyp)/TP
betätigen.
(Verkehrsprogramm)/TA (Verkehrsnachrichten)/AF (Liste der alternativen ◆ Wählen Sie „REG OFF“ aus, um die Funktion zu
Frequenzen)/RT (Radio-Text) deaktivieren.
So können Sie einen spezifischen Namen für den Typ des übertragenen
Programms ausfindig machen. Hinweise
◆ Regionale Programmierung und regionale Netzwerke sind je nach Land
unterschiedlich (d. h. sie können je nach Zeit oder Region
◆ RDS (Radio Data System) enthält nicht akustische Informationen, unterschiedlich) sein.
welche die Suche nach Radiosendern unterstützt. ◆ Die voreingstellte Nummer wird ggf. nicht mehr auf dem Display
- Der RDS-Dienst wird ggf. nicht von allen Sendern unterstützt.
- RDS-Funktionen, wie AF und TA, sind nur aktiv, wenn Ihr Radio auf angezeigt, wenn der Tuner auf einen regionalen Sender eingestellt ist,
einen RDS-Sender eingestellt ist. der vom ursprünglich eingestellten Sender abweicht.
◆ Die Funktion für regionale Programme kann unabhängig vom FM-Band
aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden.
◆ PTY-Informationen und die Frequenz der aktuellen Sender werden für
drei Sekunden auf dem Display angezeigt.
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio mit RDS
▶ Verwenden von PTY-Funktionen ▶ Auswahl alternativer Frequenzen
◆ Sie können einen Sender über PTY-Informationen (PTY: Programmtyp) ◆ Wenn der Tuner keinen guten Empfang hat, sucht die Einheit
einstellen. automatisch nach einem anderen Sender im gleichen Netzwerk.
● Suchen nach einem RDS-Sender über PTY-Informationen
1 Die Taste RDS, um „AF ON” oder „AF OFF”
Deutsch
1 Die Taste RDS drücken und gedrückt halten, um wiederholt auszuwählen drücken und gedrückt
den PTY-Suchmodus auszuwählen. halten.
Auf dem Display wird „PTY None“ oder „PTY“ ◆ Wird das Gerät fünf Sekunden lang nicht bedient, kehrt
angezeigt. das Display automatisch in den Ausgangszustand zurück.
◆ Wird das Gerät zehn Sekunden lang nicht bedient, kehrt das
Display automatisch in den Ausgangszustand zurück.. 2 Am Drehregler VOLUME (Lautstärke) drehen,
um „AF ON” auszuwählen, dann Taste
2 Am Drehregler Lautstärke drehen, um den POWER [ ] betätigen.
Programmtyp wie unten auszuwählen; dann ◆ Wird das Gerät fünf Sekunden lang nicht bedient, kehrt
Taste POWER [ ] betätigen; das Display automatisch in den Ausgangszustand zurück.
PTY NONE ↔ NEWS ↔ AFFAIRS ↔ INFO ↔ SPORT↔ ◆ Wählen Sie „AF OFF“ aus, um die Funktion für
EDUCATE ↔ DRAMA ↔ CULTURE ↔ SCIENCE ↔ alternative Frequenzen zu deaktivieren.

VARIED ↔ POP M ↔ ROCK M ↔ EASY M ↔ LIGHT M ↔ Hinweise
CLASSICS ↔ OTHER M ↔ WEATHER ↔ FINACE ↔ ◆ Ist AF aktiviert, werden nur RDS-Sender während der Suche oder dem
CHILDREN ↔ SOCIAL ↔ RELIGION ↔ PHONE IN ↔ Einstellen gespeicherter Sender eingestellt.
TRAVEL ↔ LEISURE ↔ JAZZ ↔ COUNTRY ↔ NATION M ◆ Wenn Sie einen gespeicherter Sender abrufen, aktualisiert der Tuner den
↔ OLDIES ↔ FOLK M ↔ DOCU ↔ PTY NONE ↔ .... gespeicherten Sender ggf. durch eine neue Frequenz aus der AF-Liste
der Sender. Es wird keine voreingestellte Zahl auf dem Display
3 RDS-Taste drücken, um Suche zu starten. angezeigt, wenn die RDS-Daten für den empfangenen Sender vom
Das Gerät sucht nach Radiosendern vom angegebenen ursprünglich gespeicherten Sender abweichen
Programmtyp. Wird ein Sender gefunden, erscheint der ◆ Während der AF-Frequenzsuche kann der Ton ggf. vorübergehend durch
Programm-Dienstname. ein anderes Programm gestört werden.
◆ Betätigen Sie die Taste RDS erneut, um die Suche abzubrechen. ◆ AF kann unabhängig vom FM-Band aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden.
Hinweise
◆ Das Programm einiger Sender kann von dem abweichen, das vom
übertragenen PTY angegeben wird.
◆ Überträgt kein Sender den Programmtyp, nach dem Sie suchen, wird für
etwa zwei Sekunden „Not found“ angezeigt. Der Tuner kehrt dann zum
ursprünglichen Sender zurück.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio mit RDS
Auf dem Display wird „TA ON“ oder „TA OFF“ angezeigt.
▶ Empfangen von Verkehrsprogramm
● Suchen nach einem TP-Sender (Traffic Program; Verkehrsprogramm) 2 Am Drehregler Lautstärke drehen, um „TA
ON“ auszuwählen, dann Taste POWER [ ]
1 Die Taste RDS drücken und gedrückt halten, betätigen.
um den TP SEEK-Modus auszuwählen. TA-Standby ist nun aktiviert.
Deutsch
Auf dem Display wird „TA ON“ oder „TA OFF“ angezeigt.
Wird eine Verkehrsnachricht empfangen, schaltet das
2 Am Drehregler Lautstärke drehen, um „TP ON“ Gerät automatisch auf den Sender, der die
Verkehrsnachricht überträgt.
auszuwählen, dann Taste POWER [ ] betätigen.
◆ Nach Durchsage der Verkehrsnachricht wird automatisch wieder auf die
TA-Standby ist nun aktiviert. vorherige Funktion gewechselt. (Die Bluetooth-Audio-Funktion kann nicht
◆ „TP OFF“ über den Lautstärke-Regler auswählen, um die
fortgesetzt werden. Stellen Sie die Bluetooth-Verbindung wieder her.)
Funktion zu deaktivieren. ◆ Wählen Sie „TA OFF“ über den Lautstärke-Regler aus, um die Funktion
zu deaktivieren.
3 RDS-Taste drücken, um Suche zu starten.
Das Gerät sucht nach einem Sender mit
Verkehrsnachrichten. ▶ Ändern der Display-Elemente/Bildlauffunktion
◆ Nach Durchsage der Verkehrsnachricht wird automatisch wieder auf die
vorherige Funktion gewechselt. (Die Bluetooth-Audio-Funktion kann nicht
fortgesetzt werden. Stellen Sie die Bluetooth-Verbindung wieder her.)
1 Betätigen Sie wiederholt die Taste BAND und
◆ Die Taste RDS erneut drücken, um die Suche abzubrechen. halten Sie die Taste gedrückt, um das Display-
Element oder die Aktivierung/Deaktivierung der
Bildlauffunktion auszuwählen.
▶ Empfangen von Verkehrsnachrichten ● Radiotext: Hierüber können RDS-Sender Textnachrichten senden,
die auf dem Display angezeigt werden.
Über die Funktion TA (Traffic Announcement; Verkehrsnachrichten)
● PTY-Name (PTY: Programmtyp): Gibt des Typ des RDS-Programms
können Sie unabhängig vom Medium, das gerade wiedergegeben wird,
automatisch Verkehrsnachrichten empfangen. TA kann sowohl für einen an.
TP-Sender (einen Sender, der Verkehrsinformationen sendet) oder einen ● SCROLL ON/OFF: Aktiviert/deaktiviert die Bildlauffunktion.
erweiterten TP-Sender eines anderen Netzwerks (einen Sender, auf dem
auch Verkehrsnachrichten ausgegeben werden) aktiviert werden. ● Bei SCROLL ON/OFF
● Aktiveren/Deaktivieren der TA-Standby-Funktion 2 Drehen Sie am Lautstärke-Regler, um die
Funktion zu aktivieren (ON) oder zu deaktivieren
1 Die Taste RDS drücken und gedrückt halten, (OFF) und betätigen Sie dann die Taste
um den TA-Modus auszuwählen.
POWER [ ].
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3-[WMA-]/CD-Player
● Nachdem die Daten auf der CD
▶ Vor der Wiedergabe einer CD erkannt wurden, startet die
◆ Sie können CD-DA- und MP3/WMA-CDs wiedergeben. Wiedergabe automatisch.
◆ Die folgenden Dateien werden von diesem Gerät nicht unterstützt:
● Es kann einen Moment dauern, bis
- im MP3i- und MP3 PRO-Format verschlüsselte MP3-Dateien die Wiedergabe startet.

● Es werden alle Titel wiedergegeben,
- in einem nicht unterstützten Format verschlüsselte MP3-Dateien
Deutsch
- mit Layer 1/2 verschlüsselte MP3-Dateien bis Sie die Quelle ändern oder die
CD ausgeben lassen.
- im verlustfreien, professionellen und sprachbasierten Format
verschlüsselte WMA-Dateien Hinweis:
- WMA-Dateien, die nicht auf Windows Media-Audio basieren Legen Sie keine CD ein, wenn die CD-Anzeige auf dem Display leuchtet. In
- über DRM kopiergeschützte WMA-Dateien diesem Fall ist bereits eine CD eingelegt.
◆ Wenn sich bereits eine CD im Gerät befindet
- Dateien mit Daten wie WAVE, ATRAC3, usw. Betätigen Sie wiederholt die CD/USB/AUX/BT-Audio-Taste, um CD
Hinweis: Unterstützte CDs auszuwählen und die Wiedergabe zu starten.
◆ CD-DA: CD-R/CD-RW
◆ MP3/WMA: CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM
▶ Steuerung der Wiedergabe
Achtung
◆ 3-Zoll-CDs (8 cm) werden von diesem Gerät nicht unterstützt. Daher
sollte eine solche nicht eingelegt werden.
1 Den Regler TUNE wiederholt drücken,
◆ Es dürfen keine ungewöhnlich geformten CDs eingelegt werden. um zum nächsten oder vorherigen Titel zu
◆ Es dürfen keine CDs mit Siegel oder Etiketten eingelegt werden. wechseln.
◆ Um das Bedienfeld nicht zu beschädigen, darf dieses nie nach unten ◆ Bei MP3- oder WMA-CDs können Titel im gleichen Ordner
gedrückt werden und es dürfen keine Gegenstände darauf abgelegt übersprungen werden.
werden, während es geöffnet ist.
◆ Stecken Sie nicht Finger oder die Hand in das Bedienfeld.
◆ Stecken Sie keine Gegenstände in das CD-Fach.
2 Den Regler TUNE drücken und gedrückt
halten, um einen schnellen Vor- oder Rücklauf zu
Hinweis
◆ Das Gerät wird automatisch beim Einlegen einer CD eingeschaltet.
machen; dann loslassen, um Wiedergabe
Eine CD, auf der sowohl CD-DA- als auch MP3/WMA-Daten enthalten fortzusetzen.
sind, wird ggf. nicht normal wiedergegeben. (Beispielsweise kann der ◆ Die Suchfunktion funktioniert, aber die Suchgeschwindigkeit
Ton stumm bleiben.) ist nicht konstant.
◆ Während des schnellen Vor- oder Rücklaufs ist der Ton nur
zwischenzeitlich zu hören.
▶ Laden einer CD und Starten der Wiedergabe
1 Legen Sie eine CD mit der Beschriftung nach oben in das 3 Betätigen Sie wiederholt die Taste 5 D- oder 6 D+,
um zum vorherigen oder nächsten Ordner zu
CD-Fach.
wechseln (gilt nur für MP3- oder WMA-CD).
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Auswahl der Wiedergabemodi ▶ Suchen von Musik
1 Betätigen Sie wiederholt die Taste 2 RPT, um den 1 Die Taste SCAN/INF drücken, um den
Wiederholungsmodus auszuwählen. Suchmodus aufzurufen.
● RPT: Der aktuelle Titel wird wiederholt. Titelnummer und -name werden fünf Sekunden lang
Deutsch
● FOLDER [ ] RPT (nur für MP3/WMA): Alle Titel des auf dem Display angezeigt.
aktuellen Ordners werden wiederholt.
● Aus: Hierüber wird die Wiederholung abgebrochen. 2 Den Drehregler Lautstärke drehen, um die
Nummer oder den Namen des Titels anzeigen
2 Betätigen Sie wiederholt die Taste 3 INT, um den zu lassen. Dann die Taste POWER [ ]
Intro-Scan-Wiedergabemodus auszuwählen. betätigen, um die Wiedergabe des ausgewählten
● FOLDER [ ] INT (nur für MP3/WMA): Hierüber Titels zu starten.
werden die Anfänge der Titel in einem Ordner der
Reihe nach angespielt.
● INT: Hierüber werden die Anfänge der Titel auf der CD
der Reihe nach angespielt. ▶ Anzeigen der Ordnerinformationen
● Aus: Hierüber wird die Wiedergabe abgebrochen.
3 Betätigen Sie wiederholt die Taste 4 RDM, um 1 Taste SCAN/INF drücken und gedrückt halten,
um die aktuellen Ordnerinformationen fünf
den Modus der zufälligen Wiedergabe Sekunden lang anzeigen zu lassen.
auszuwählen.
● FOLDER [ ] RDM (nur für MP3/WMA): Die Titel des ● Aktivieren/Deaktivieren der Bildlauffunktion
aktuellen Ordners werden in zufälliger Reihenfolge
wiedergegeben.
◆ Aktivieren/deaktivieren Sie die Bildlauffunktion.
● RDM: Die Titel der CD werden in zufälliger Reihenfolge
wiedergegeben. 2 Bei Anzeige der Ordnerinformationen die Taste
● Aus: Hierüber wird die zufällige Wiedergabe abgebrochen. SCAN/INF drücken, um die Bildlauffunktion zu
aktivieren (SCROLL ON) oder zu deaktivieren
Hinweis: Ändern der Quelle (SCROLL OFF).
Wenn Sie die Quelle ändern, wird die Wiedergabe ebenfalls gestoppt (ohne dass die
CD ausgegeben wird). Wenn Sie wieder „CD“ als Wiedergabequelle wählen, beginnt
die Wiedergabe der CD an dem Punkt, an die Wiedergabe zuvor gestoppt wurde. 3 Am Drehregler Lautstärke drehen, um „OFF“
oder „ON“ auszuwählen, dann Taste POWER
[ ] betätigen.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Anhalten der Wiedergabe und Auswerfen einer CD ▶ Info über MP3/WMA
1 Betätigen Sie die Dieses Gerät kann MP3/WMA-Dateien mit den Dateiendungen <.mp3>
oder <.wma> wiedergeben (Groß-/Kleinschreibung ist hierbei unwichtig).
Auswurftaste [ ]
Dieses Gerät kann bei MP3-und WMA-Dateien die Namen für Alben,
und nehmen Sie Künstler und Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 oder 2.4) anzeigen.
Deutsch
die CD heraus. Dieses Gerät kann nur 1-Byte-Zeichen anzeigen. Andere Zeichen können
Hinweis: Auswerfen einer CD nicht richtig angezeigt werden.
Wird die ausgeworfene CD nicht innerhalb von zehn Sekunden aus dem Schacht Dieses Gerät kann MP3/WMA-Dateien wiedergeben, welche die
genommen, wird sie automatisch wieder eingezogen und geladen. So wird die CD vor folgenden Bedingungen erfüllen:
Staubablagerungen geschützt. (In diesem Fall erfolgt keine Wiedergabe der CD.) 8 kbps bis 320 kbps für MP3/64 kbps bis 161 kbps (VBR) für WMA
- Abtastfrequenz:
▶ Info über CD-R/CD-RW 48 kHz, 44,1 kHz, 32 kHz (für MPEG-1 Layer 2/3)
24 kHz, 22,05 kHz, 16 kHz (für MPEG-2 Layer 2/3)
Verwenden Sie nur abgeschlossene CD-Rs oder CD-RWs.
Dieses Gerät kann nur Dateien vom gleichen Typ wiedergeben, der zuerst 12 kHz, 11,025 kHz, 8 kHz (für MPEG-2.5 Layer 3)
erkannt wird, wenn eine sowohl Audio-CD-(CD-DA-)Dateien und - CD-Format: ISO/IEC 11172-3, ISO/IEC 13818-3
MP3/WMA-Dateien enthält. Die maximale Anzahl der Zeichen für die Datei-/Ordnernamen ist je nach
Dieses Gerät kann Multisession-CDs wiedergeben. Nicht abgeschlossene CD-Format unterschiedlich (inklusive vier Zeichen für die Dateiendung-
Sessions werden jedoch bei der Wiedergabe übersprungen. <.mp3> oder <.wma>).
Einige CD-Rs oder CD-RWs werden auf diesem Gerät eventuell nicht - ISO 9660 Level 1: max. 12 Zeichen
wiedergegeben. Grund hierfür können die CD-Eigenschaften oder folgende - ISO 9660 Level 2: max. 31 Zeichen
Punkte sein: - Romeo: max. 128 Zeichen
- Die CD ist verschmutzt oder verkratzt. - Joliet: max. 64 Zeichen
- Auf der optischen Komponente im Inneren des Geräts hat sich Feuchtigkeit - Windows, lange Dateinamen: max. 128 Zeichen
niedergeschlagen.
Das Gerät kann Dateien wiedergeben, die mit VBR (variable Bitrate)
- Der Abtaster ist verschmutzt.
- Die CD-R/CD-RW enthält Dateien, die mit der Methode „Packet Write“ aufgenommen wurden. Mit VBR aufgenommene Dateien weisen eine
geschrieben wurden. Abweichung zur Anzeige der bereits abgelaufenen Wiedergabedauer auf.
- Die Aufzeichnung war fehlerhaft (fehlende Daten, usw.) oder der Zustand Nach Ausführung der Suchfunktion wird dieser Unterschied merklich.
des Mediums ist mangelhaft (Schmutz, Kratzer, Verkrümmungen, usw.). Das Gerät kann insgesamt 512 Dateien in 200 Ordnern und 8 Hierarchien
CD-RWs können eine längere Auslesezeit benötigen, da die Reflexion der
erkennen.
CD- RWs geringer ist als die von CDs.
Die folgenden CD-Rs oder CD-RWs dürfen nicht verwendet werden:
- CDs mit Aufklebern, Etiketten oder Schutzhüllen auf der Oberfläche Hinweis
- CDs, die mittels Tintenstrahldrucker direkt bedruckt werden können Microsoft und Windows Media sind entweder eingetragene Marken oder
Die Verwendung dieser CDs bei hohen Temperaturen oder hoher Marken der Microsoft Corporation in den USA Und/oder anderen Ländern.
Feuchtigkeit kann zu Fehlfunktionen oder Schäden am Gerät führen.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Bluetooth-Betrieb - Sollte Ihr Telefon „New Rexton“ oder „SSANGYONG“ nicht erkennen,
wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1~2.
Um die Bluetooth-Funktion zu nutzen, muss die folgende Prozedur
durchgeführt werden. 3 Wenn auf dem Display des angeschlossenen Geräts die Eingabe
1. Koppeln einer Kennung gefordert wird, geben Sie „00xx“ (4-stellig) ein.
Bei erstmaligem Anschluss von Bluetooth-Geräten ist eine Registrierung Dieses Gerät und das Bluetooth-Gerät speichern die Informationen
Deutsch
erforderlich. Diese wird Koppeln genannt. Die Registrierung (das des entsprechenden Partners. Ist die Kopplung durchgeführt, ist das
Koppeln) ist nur beim ersten Mal erforderlich, da das Gerät und andere Gerät für die Verbindung mit dem angeschlossenen Gerät bereit.
Geräte sich beim nächsten Mal automatisch erkennen. (Je nach Gerät
müssen Sie ggf. eine Kennung für die Verbindung angeben.) Nach Abschluss der Kopplung werden „BT CONNECT“ und
2. Anschluss „Bluetooth-Gerätemodellname“ oder „BT MOBILE“ mit „ “ angezeigt.
Zuweilen ermöglicht das Koppeln eine automatische Verbindung. - Einige Bluetooth-Geräte erfordern eine Bestätigung für den BT-Link oder die
Verbindung. Bestätigen Sie mit „Ja“ oder „OK“..
Um das Gerät nach Vornahme der Kopplung zu verwenden, beginnen
Sie den Verbindungsaufbau. * Die Kennung kann geräteabhängig „Passcode“, „PIN-Code“, „PIN-
Nummer“, „Kennwort“ oder „Passwort“, usw. heißen.
3. Freisprechen/Musik-Streaming
Sie können ein Mobiltelefon anrufen und Musik hören, nachdem die
Verbindung hergestellt wurde.
4 Richten Sie das Bluetooth-Gerät auf die Verbindung mit
Einige Bluetooth-Geräte unterstützen spezifische Funktionen nicht.
diesem Gerät ein.
Hinweis: Der Kopplungs-Standby-Modus wird nicht freigegeben, bis die
▶ Koppeln von Telefon und Fahrzeug-Audiosystem Verbindung hergestellt ist.
Nehmen Sie zuerst die Registrierung (Kopplung) für das Bluetooth-Gerät
(Mobiltelefon, usw.) und dieses Gerät vor. Sie können bis zu sechs Geräte ▶ Anschließen eines Mobiltelefons
miteinander koppeln. Sobald das Koppeln durchgeführt wurde, muss kein erneutes - Nach der Kopplung und der Verbindung mit diesem Gerät werden die Geräte
Koppeln vorgenommen werden. Das Bluetooth-Gerät muss sich in einem Abstand registriert. Sie können das registrierte Gerät auswählen und eine Verbindung herstellen.
von maximal drei Metern von diesem Gerät befinden.
- Ist die Kopplung bereits abgeschlossen, können Sie den Betrieb starten.
1 Halten Sie die Anruftaste [ ] für mehr als drei - Je nach Gerät kann die Verbindung nach dem Koppeln ggf. automatisch starten.
Sekunden gedrückt.
Das Gerät geht in den Kopplungs-Standby-Modus über. 1 Nehmen Sie die Verbindung zu diesem Gerät
Auf dem Display wird „PAIRING“ angezeigt, es wird ein über Ihr Mobiltelefon vor und betätigen Sie die
Piepton ausgegeben und die Anzeige „KEY 00xx“ blinkt. Anruftaste [ ].
2 Richten Sie das Bluetooth-Gerät auf die Suche nach diesem Es werden „BT CONNECT“ und das Symbol „ “
angezeigt und das Bluetooth-Signal wird aktiviert.
Gerät ein.
Auf dem Display des angeschlossenen Geräts wird eine Liste der erkannten Hinweis
Geräte angezeigt. Dieses Gerät wird auf dem angeschlossenen Gerät als Um die Informationen über das verbundene Bluetooth-
„New Rexton“ oder „SSANGYONG“ angezeigt. Bestätigen Sie, indem Sie Gerät anzuzeigen, betätigen Sie die Taste SCAN/INF.
auf Ihrem Telefon „Ja“ oder „OK“ betätigen. 17
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Anruf über Wahlwiederholung ▶ Anpassen der Sprechlautstärke
Sie können über das verbundenes Mobiltelefon einen Anruf tätigen, indem Sie
dieses Gerät bedienen. 1 Drehen Sie am Lautstärkeregler, um die
Sprechlautstärke zu erhöhen oder zu senken.
1 Halten Sie die Anruftaste [ ] für mehr als drei Auf dem Display wird das Bluetooth-Lautstärkeniveau
Deutsch
Sekunden gedrückt, um in den Modus der angezeigt. (BT VOL 6 bis 32)
Wahlwiederholung zu wechseln.
Es wird „REDIAL” angezeigt. Die Wahlwiederholung
wird vorgenommen.
▶ Annehmen eines Anrufs ▶ Stummschaltung

Bei einem eingehenden Anruf wird der Klingelton über die Lautsprecher des
Fahrzeuges ausgegeben und es wird die Nummer des Anrufers auf dem 1 Betätigen Sie die Taste MUTE auf dem
Bildschirm angezeigt. Audiobedienelement am Lenkrad, um die
Stummschaltung des Mikrofons zu aktivieren.
1 Bei einem eingehenden Anruf werden „CALL IN” Auf dem Display wird „MIC MUTE” angezeigt.
und die Telefonnummer angezeigt. Betätigen Sie
die Anruftaste [ ], um den Anruf Um die Stummschaltung des Mikrofons aufzuheben,
betätigen Sie die Taste MUTE auf dem
anzunehmen. Audiobedienelement des Lenkrades.
Es wird „BT TEL” angezeigt. Der Anruf ist aktiv. Die Anzeige „MIC MUTE” erlischt.
Das eingebaute Mikrofon dieses Systems erfasst Ihre
Stimme.
Um einen eingehenden Anruf abzulehnen,

betätigen Sie die Taste BEENDEN [ ].
Es wird „CALL REJECT” angezeigt und es erfolgt ein
▶ Beenden eines Anrufs
Umschalten in die vorherige Funktion.
1 Betätigen Sie die Taste BEENDEN [ ].
Hinweis:
◆ Es wird nur der Anruf beendet. Die Bluetooth-Verbindung
bleibt bestehen.
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Weiterleiten eines Anrufs ▶ Anhören von Musik über ein Audiogerät
Prüfen Sie Folgendes, um das entsprechende Gerät (dieses Produkt/ein Sie können über dieses Gerät Musik von einem Mobiltelefon hören, wenn das
Mobiltelefon) zu aktivieren/deaktivieren. Mobiltelefon A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) der Bluetooth-
Technologie unterstützt.
1 Betätigen Sie während der Bluetooth- 1 Schalten Sie das Bluetooth-Signal des Mobiltelefons oder
Deutsch
Freisprechfunktion die Anruftaste [ ]. Die
Freisprechfunktion wird deaktiviert und Mikrofon Audiogerätes ein.
Es wird „Stereo Headset” angezeigt, wenn eine Verbindung
und Lautsprecher des Mobiltelefons werden aufgebaut wird.
aktiviert.
Es wird „PRIVATE“ angezeigt. Der Mobiltelefonanruf 2 Drehen Sie den Lautstärkeregler, um die
wird vorgenommen. Lautstärke an diesem Gerät herunterzuregeln.
Betätigen Sie während eines Anrufs per
Mobiltelefon die Anruftaste [ ]. Die Bluetooth-
Freisprechfunktion wird aktiviert. 3 Betätigen Sie die CD/USB/AUX/BT-Audio-Taste
Es wird „BT TEL” angezeigt. Der Anruf mit wiederholt, bis „BT AUDIO” angezeigt wird.
Freisprechfunktion ist aktiv.
Informationen zur Bedienung des Mobiltelefons finden Sie 4 Starten Sie die Wiedergabe über die Bedienelemente des
im entsprechenden Handbuch des Mobiltelefons. Audiogerätes.
Hinweis: Sie können mit Hilfe der Tasten dieses Gerätes die Lautstärke
◆ Abhängig vom Mobiltelefon kann die Freisprechverbindung bei Versuch
ändern und die Titel wechseln. (Siehe Kapitel „MP3[WMA]/CD-
einer Anrufweiterleitung unterbrochen werden. Player”).
5 Drehen Sie den Lautstärkeregler, um die

Lautstärke an diesem Gerät anzupassen.
6 Um das Anhören von Musik zu beenden, halten

Sie die Taste BEENDEN [ ] oder betätigen
Sie die CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio- oder BAND-
Taste, um eine andere Funktion zu wählen.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Einrichten des Bluetooth-Modus
◆ Sie können die Bluetooth-Modi steuern. ● DELETE : Löschen eines Bluetooth-Gerätes.
● PREVIOUS : zurück zum BT-Menü.
Einstellmodus zu öffnen. ● Bei Auswahl von PAIR
Deutsch
Auf dem Display werden „EQ”, „TONE” und „BT”

angezeigt. 5 Führen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 4 auf Seite 17 unter
„Koppeln von Telefon und Fahrzeug-
Audiosystem” durch, um die Kopplung
2 Drehen Sie am Lautstärke-Regler, um das durchzuführen.
Menü BT auszuwählen und betätigen Sie dann
die Taste POWER [ ]. ● Incase of the DELETE selecting
3 Drehen Sie am Lautstärke-Regler, um die 5 Drehen Sie am Lautstärke-Regler, um „YES”

oder „NO” auszuwählen und betätigen Sie dann
gewünschte Option für die Bluetooth-Einstellung
die Taste POWER [ ].
auszuwählen und betätigen Sie dann die Taste
POWER [ ]. YES: Löschen der ausgewählten Bluetooth-Geräteliste.
● Bei jedem Drehen am Lautstärke-Regler können Sie NO: Abbrechen des Löschmodus.
eine der folgenden Optionen zur Bluetooth-Einstellung
auswählen
4 Drehen Sie am Lautstärke-Regler, um die

Geräteliste auszuwählen oder den Wert
anzupassen, und betätigen Sie dann die Taste
POWER [ ].
● PAIR : Zugriffauf die Kopplung (Kennung: 00xx).
● SELECT : Auswahl von einem aus fünf Bluetooth-
Geräten für die Verbindung.
● PRIORITY : Auswahl der Priorität der Verbindung.
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB-/AUX-Player
▶ Wiedergabe über ein USB-Gerät ▶ Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für die USB-Nutzung
Durch den Anschluss eines USB-Geräts über ein USB- ● Stellen Sie beim Einsatz eines externen USB- ● Die Zeit, die notwendig ist, um das externe
Kabel am USB-Eingang des Geräts können Sie über Ihre Geräts sicher, dass das Gerät erst USB-Gerät zu erkennen, kann je nach Typ,
Fahrzeug-Lautsprecher Musik hören, während Sie das angeschlossen wird, nachdem die Größe oder Dateiformat der auf dem USB-
USB-Gerät über dieses Gerät steuern. Fahrzeugzündung eingeschaltet wurde. Gerät gespeicherten Dateien unterschiedlich
Deutsch
Entfernen Sie das USB-Gerät nach der ausfallen. Derartige Unterschiede in der Dauer
1 Betätigen Sie die Taste POWER Verwendung wieder. Das USB-Gerät kann sind kein Hinweis auf eine Fehlfunktion. Warten
[ ], um das Gerät beschädigt werden, wenn es bereits Sie, bis das Gerät erkannt wurde.
auszuschalten. angeschlossen ist, wenn die Zündung ● Das Gerät unterstützt nur USB-Geräte, die zur
eingeschaltet wird. (Das USB-Gerät ist keine Wiedergabe von Musikdateien zum Einsatz
elektronische Fahrzeugkomponente.) kommen.
2 Schließen Sie das USB- ● Einige USB-Geräte funktionieren eventuell
aufgrund von Kompatibilitätsproblemen nicht
● Verwenden Sie das USB-Gerät nicht zum
Laden von Batterien oder USB-Zubehör. Dies
Speichergerät, auf dem die richtig. Prüfen Sie vor der Nutzung, ob das kann zu Wärmeerzeugung führen. Dies hat eine
MP3/WMA-Dateien enthalten externe Gerät vom Gerät unterstützt wird. schlechtere Leistung des Geräts und Schäden
sind, die wiedergegeben ● Das Gerät erkennt nur USB-Geräte, die FAT- am Gerät zur Folge.
werden sollen, über ein USB- 12/16/32-formatiert sind. Bei der Formatierung ● Bei USB-Geräten hoher Kapazität kann zur
Kabel am USB-Anschluss an. des externen USB-Geräts erkannt das Gerät besseren Handhabung durch den Benutzer
eine Byte/Sektor-Auswahl, die nicht 512 Byte eine Partitionierung der logischen Laufwerke
Es wird „USB” angezeigt und oder 2.048 Byte entspricht, eventuell nicht erfolgen. In diesem Fall ist eine Wiedergabe der
die Wiedergabe startet richtig. USB-Musik nur vom Laufwerk der obersten
automatisch, nachdem die ● Vermeiden Sie den Kontakt zwischen Ebene möglich. Speichern Sie im Falle
Daten des USB-Speichergeräts Körperteilen und Fremdkörpern und dem USB- partitionierter Laufwerke die Lieder, die Sie auf
erkannt wurden. Anschluss. dem Gerät wiedergeben möchten, daher nur
● Ein wiederholtes Anschließen/Entfernen des auf der obersten Ebene. Darüber hinaus sind
3 Ist das USB-Speichergerät USB-Geräts in kurzer Zeit kann zu Schäden am einige USB-Geräte mit einem separaten
bereits angeschlossen, betätigen Gerät führen. Laufwerk konfiguriert, das für die Installation
● Beim Entfernen des USB-Geräts kann es zu von Anwendungen genutzt wird. Eine
Sie wiederholt die Wiedergabe von Liedern von derartigen
CD/USB/AUX/BT-Audio-Taste, Geräuschentwicklung kommen.
● Ein abruptes Entfernen des externen USB-
Laufwerken ist aufgrund der oben genannten
bis „USB” angezeigt wird. Geräts während des Betriebs des USB-Geräts
Gründe eventuell nicht möglich.
● Das Gerät kann eventuell nicht ordnungsgemäß
Die USB-Wiedergabe startet kann zu Schäden oder Fehlfunktionen am
automatisch. Gerät führen. Stellen Sie sicher, dass das USB- funktionieren, wenn HDD-, CF- oder SD-
Gerät nur entfernt wird, nachdem die Speicherformate zum Einsatz kommen.
Sie können die Lautstärke, den Wiedergabemodus Audiofunktion abgeschaltet wurde oder die ● Das Gerät unterstützt keine DRM-gesperrten
und die Titelauswähl über die Tasten am Bedienfeld Audiofunktion in einem anderen Modus (DRM: Digital Rights Management; Digitale
ändern. (Siehe Kapitel „MP3[WMA]/CD-Player”.) betrieben wird. Rechteverwaltung) Dateien.
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB-/AUX-Player
▶ Anhören über ein Zubehör-Audiogerät
Durch den Anschluss eines optionalen, tragbaren Audiogerätes an den AUX-
Eingang (Stereo-Minibuchse) am Gerät und durch einfache Auswahl der Quelle
können Sie über Ihre Fahrzeug-Lautsprecher Musik hören. Die Lautstärke ist
auf jeden Unterschied zwischen Gerät und tragbarem Audiogerät anpassbar.
Deutsch
1 Senken Sie die Lautstärke des Geräts.
2 Schalten Sie das externe Audiogerät aus.

Schließen Sie den Audioausgang des
externen Audiogeräts an den AUX-Eingang
des Gerätes an.
Passen Sie vor der Wiedergabe die
Lautstärke für jedes angeschlossene
Audiogerät an.
3 Starten Sie die Wiedergabe des externen

Audiogeräts bei mäßiger Lautstärke.
4 Betätigen Sie die CD/USB/AUX/BT-Audio-Taste

wiederholt, bis „AUX” angezeigt wird.
Ist das externe Audiogerät bereits angeschlossen,
überspringen Sie die Schritte 1 bis 3.
5 Richten Sie die übliche Laustärke für das Gerät

ein.
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
Audiobedienelemente am Lenkrad
▶ Verwenden der Audiobedienelemente am Lenkrad
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug über diese Funktion verfügt, können einige Audiofunktionen über die Bedienelemente am Lenkrad eingestellt werden.
Hierzu gehören:
▲ VOL ▼ MODE
Deutsch
Drücken: Erhöhen oder Senken der ● Drücken:Auswahl zwischen den Funktionen (CD
Lautstärke. → USB → AUX → BT Audio → RADIO...)
● Drücken und gedrückt halten: Auswahl des Bandes
▲ SEEK ▼ (FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW...)
Während des Anhörens eines MUTE
Radiosenders
● Drücken: Wechsel zum nächsten/
Während eines Anrufs
vorherigen gespeicherten Sender. Drücken: Aktivieren/Deaktivieren des Mikrofons
● Drücken und gedrückt halten: Suche des
(MIC). MUTE-Funktion
nächsten/vorherigen Radiosenders. (Das Während Radio- oder CD/USB/BT-Audio-Modus
Radio sucht nur nach Sendern mit starkem Drücken: Aktivieren/Deaktivieren der Radio-
Signal auf dem ausgewählten Stummschaltung oder CD/ USB-Pause.
Frequenzband.)
Während einer CD/USB/BT-Audio- Phone [ ]
Wiedergabe Im Standby
● Drücken: Wechsel zum nächsten/ Drücken und gedrückt halten: Tätigen eines Anrufs
vorherigen Titel. über die Wahlwiederholung.
● Drücken und gedrückt halten: Schneller Während Eingang eines Anrufes
Vor-/Rücklauf durch die Titel. ● Drücken: Empfang des eingehenden Anrufs.
(Gilt nur für CD/USB-Wiedergabe.) ● Drücken und gedrückt halten: Ablehnen des
eingehenden Anrufs.
PWR [ ] Während eines Anrufs
Drücken: Ein-/Ausschalten des Systems ● Drücken: Umschalten zum Privat- oder Bluetooth-
und Wechsel in den Privatanrufmodus für Anrufmodus
eingehende Anrufe. ● Drücken und gedrückt halten: Beenden eines
Anrufs.
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Fehlerbehebung
▶ Allgemein
Symptome Mögliche Ursachen Mögliche Korrekturmaßnahme
- Es wird kein Ton - MUTE ist auf ON eingerichtet. - Stellen Sie MUTE auf OFF.
ausgegeben.
Deutsch
- Störungen - Das Gerät befindet sich in der Nähe eines - Halten Sie das Gerät fern von Geräten, die elektromagnetische
Gerätes, das elektromagnetische Wellen Wellen aussenden (z. B. Mobiltelefone). Wenden Sie sich an
aussendet (z. B. ein Mobiltelefon), oder Ihren Händler, wenn die Störungen aufgrund der Verdrahtungen
von Stromleitungen. in Ihrem Fahrzeug nicht behoben werden können.
- Kein Ton aus dem - Die Balance-/Fader-Einstellung ist nicht - Passen Sie die Balance-/Fader-Einstellung an.
Lautsprecher korrekt.
▶ Radio
- Schlechter Empfang oder - Die Übertragungsbedingungen sind - Empfangen Sie die Signale des Senders im analogen Modus.
Störungen schlecht.
- Suche dauert zu lange - Es sind weniger als sechs Sender - Wechseln Sie in einen Bereich, in dem die Anzahl der
verfügbar. empfangbaren Sender größer ist und versuchen Sie eine
Voreinstellung vorzunehmen.
- Es sind weniger als sechs - Der Kontakt der Batterieleitung ist schlecht - Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Batterie richtig angeschlossen ist und
automatisch gespeicherte oder die Batterieleitung wird nicht ständig nehmen Sie erneut eine Speicherung der Sender vor.
Sender verfügbar. versorgt.
- Sender können nicht - Die digitale Suche dauert eventuell zu - Wechseln Sie zur automatischen Suche und suchen Sie erneut.
gespeichert werden. lange.
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Fehlerbehebung
▶ MP3-[WMA-]/CD-Player
- Keine Wiedergabe oder CD - Die CD ist falsch eingelegt. - Legen Sie die CD richtig ein.
wird ausgegeben - Die CD hat einen Fehler oder ist - Reinigen Sie die CD oder legen Sie eine nicht fehlerhafte CD
Deutsch
verschmutzt. ein.
- Auf der CD befinden sich Daten, die nicht- Informationen über abspielbare Tondaten (ausgenommen CD-
für die Wiedergabe formatiert sind. DA) (z. B. Musik-CD) finden Sie in der Beschreibung über
MP3/WMA.
- Das Gerät gibt die ROM-Spur einer CD mit - Überspringen Sie den ROM-Titel.
Mischmodus Anteilen wieder.
- CD-R/RWs, die auf anderen - Die Abspielbarkeit einiger CD-R/RWs - Erstellen Sie CD-R/RWs in unterschiedlicher Kombination aus
Geräten abspielbar sind, kann von der Kombination aus Medien, Medien, Aufnahmesoftware und Aufnahmegerät, nachdem Sie
können auf diesem Gerät Aufnahmesoftware und eingesetztem sich die Beschreibung zu MP3/WMA angesehen haben.
nicht wiedergegeben werden. Aufnahmegerät abhängen, auch wenn
diese CD-R/RWs auf anderen Geräten,
wie z. B. PCs abspielbar sind.
- Ton springt; Störungen - Die CD hat einen Fehler oder ist - Reinigen Sie die CD oder legen Sie eine nicht fehlerhafte CD
verschmutzt. ein. Für MP3/WMA siehe Beschreibung zu MP3/WMA.
- Ton springt aufgrund von - Das Gerät ist nicht ausreichend gesichert. - Sichern Sie das Gerät mit Hilfe des hinteren Halteriemens, usw.
Vibrationen an der Konsole.
- Das Gerät ist mehr als 30 ° von vorn nach - Sorgen Sie dafür, dass der Winkel maximal 30 °beträgt.
hinten geneigt.
- CD lässt sich nicht - Ein Etikett klebt nicht mehr vollständig auf - Lassen Sie Reparaturen über den Händler vornehmen, bei dem
auswerfen. der CD. Sie das Gerät gekauft haben.
25
GETtheMANUALS.org
Fehlerbehebung
▶ USB-MP3-[WMA-]Player
- Das USB-Gerät funktioniert - Der USB-Speicher ist beschädigt. - Verwenden Sie nach der Formatierung das Format FAT 12/16/
nicht ordnungsgemäß. 32.
Deutsch
- Der USB-Speicher wurde verschmutzt. - Entfernen Sie jegliche Fremdkörper von den Kontakten des
USB-Speichers und Multimediaanschlusses.
- Es wird ein separat erworbener USB-HUB - Schließen Sie das USB-Gerät direkt an den
verwendet. Multimediaanschluss des Fahrzeuges an.
- Es wird ein USB-Verlängerungskabel - Schließen Sie das USB-Gerät direkt an den
verwendet. Multimediaanschluss des Fahrzeuges an.
- Es wird ein USB-Gerät verwendet, das - Verwenden Sie einen Standard-USB-Speicher.
nicht dem USB-Speicher mit
Metallabdeckung entspricht.
- Ein HDD-, CF-, SD-Speicher wird - Verwenden Sie einen Standard-USB-Speicher.
verwendet.
- Es sind keine Musikdateien vorhanden, - Es werden nur MP3-, WMA-Dateien unterstützt. Verwenden Sie
die wiedergegeben werden könnten. ausschließlich die unterstützten Musikdateiformate.
26
GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications
▶ Allgemeines ▶ MP3-[WMA-]/CD-Player
Netzteil 14,4 V Gleichspannung, negative Erdung Abtastfrequenz 8-Fach-Oversampling
Lautsprecherimpedanz 4 Ohm DA-Konverter 4-DAC-System
Max. Leistung 45 Watt x 4 Kanäle Aufnehmer Astigma 3-Beam
Deutsch
Gewicht 880 g (netto) Lichtquelle Halbleiterlaser
Maße (B x H x T) 178 x 52 x 155 mm Wellenlänge 780 nm
Frequenzantwort 20 Hz bis 20 kHz (±3 dB)
▶ FM/MW/LW-Radio Signalrauschverhältnis ≥50 dB
FM 87.5 MHz bis 108 MHz Klirrfaktor ≤1 % (1 kHz)
Frequenzbereich MM 522 kHz bis 1,620 kHz
LW 144 kHz bis 290 kHz Tonhöhenschwankung Unter messbarem Bereich
FM ≤18 dBu Kanaltrennung ≥35 dB
Nutzbare Empfindlichkeit MW ≤35 dBu
LW ≤35 dBu
FM ≥45 dB ▶ Bluetooth-Bereich
Signalrauschverhältnis MW ≥40 dB
LW ≥40 dB Hauptspezifikationen Bluetooth V2.0 (kompatibel mit Bluetooth V1, 2)
Stereotrennung FM ≥20 dB Empfindlichkeit - 60 dBm
Interner Speicher 16-Mbit-Flash-Speicher
▶ Capítulo de USB MP3[WMA]
Unterstützung von Audio mit höher Bandbreite
Frequenzantwort 20 Hz bis 20 KHz Angewandte Erweitertes Audioverteilungsprofil
Funktion Unterstützung des Freisprechprofils/private
Klirrfaktor 0.1 % (bei 1 KHz) Anrufe
Dynamikbereich 85 dB (bei 1 KHz)
Signalrauschverhältnis 60 dB (bei 1 KHz)
Technische Daten und Design unterliegen Änderungen ohne vorherige
Kanaltrennung 54 dB (bei 1 KHz) Ankündigung.
27
GETtheMANUALS.org
Français
● Veuillez lire attentivement les présentes instructions avant

d'utiliser ce produit. Conservez ce mode d'emploi pour une
utilisation ultérieure.
● Dans le cadre d'une amélioration du produit, l'apparence et les
caractéristiques de ce produit peuvent être soumises à
modification sans avertissement préalable.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sommaire
Précautions Lecteur MP3[WMA] CD Lecteur USB/AUX
Consignes de sécurité ......................... 2 Avant la lecture du disque ................. 14 Lecture d'un périphérique USB ......... 21
Consignes importantes de sécurité ..... 3 Charger un disque et Précautions pour le matériel USB ..... 21
lancer la lecture .................................. 14 Ecoute d'un périphérique
Emplacement des commandes
Contrôler la lecture ............................. 14 audio auxiliaire .................................... 22
Vue avant .............................................. 4
Sélection des modes de lecture ........ 15
Fenêtre d'affichage ............................... 5 Commandes audio au volant
Recherche de la musique .................. 15
Vue arrière ............................................ 6 Utilisation des commandes
Affichage des informations
Avant de commencer du dossier ........................................... 15 audio au volant ................................... 23
Allumer/éteindre l'unité ......................... 7 Arrêt de la lecture et
Français
Réglage automatique du volume ........ 7 éjection du disque .............................. 16 Dépannage
A propos de CD-R/CD-RW ............... 16 Problèmes courants ........................... 24
Mise en sourdine rapide ...................... 7
Sélection d'un style d'égaliseur ........... 8 A propos de MP3/WMA ..................... 16 Radio ................................................... 24
Mettre le son du micro en sourdine ..... 8 Lecteur MP3[WMA] CD ..................... 25
Bluetooth Lecteur USB MP3[WMA] ................... 26
Radio Fonctionnement du Bluetooth ........... 17
Recherche d'une station ...................... 9 Pairage de votre téléphon e et du Caractéristiques
Enregistrement manuel d'une station . 9 système audio du véhicule ........... 17 Généralités .................................. 27
Enregistrement automatique Connexion d'un téléphone mobile ..... 17 Section Radio FM/MW/LW ................ 27
d'une station ....................................... 10 Passer un appel via le dernier appel . 18 Section MP3[WMA] CD .......... 27
Ecoute d'une station présélectionnée 10 Recevoir un appel .............................. 18 Section USB MP3[WMA] ................... 27
Réglage du volume du micro ............ 18
Radio avec RDS Fonction Bluetooth ............................. 27
Mettre le son du micro en sourdine ... 18
Limitation des stations aux
programmes régionaux ...................... 11 Terminer un appel .............................. 18
Utilisation des fonctions PTY ............. 12 Transfert d'appel ................................ 19
Sélection de fréquences alternatives 12 Ecouter de la musique à partir
d'un périphérique audio ..................... 19
Réception programme du trafic ......... 13
Paramétrage du mode Bluetooth ...... 20
Réception d'annonces du trafic ......... 13
Changement des éléments d'affichage/
fonction de défilement ........................ 13
1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Précautions
▶ Consignes de sécurité
AVERTISSEMENT : Ce produit a été testé et a été approuvé conforme à la
AFIN DE REDUIRE TOUT RISQUE D'INCENDIE OU limitation concernant les produits laser de classe 1,
D'ELECTROCUTION, N'EXPOSEZ PAS CE PRODUIT A conformément à l'alinéa 15 de la réglementation FCC.
LA PLUIE OU A L'HUMIDITE; Cette limitation est destinée à assurer une protection
raisonnable contre les interférences nuisibles dans une
AFIN DE REDUIRE TOUT RISQUE D'INCENDIE,
installation résidentielle.
D'ELECTROCUTION ET D'INTERFERENCE NUISIBLE,
UTILISEZ UNIQUEMENT LES COMPOSANTS INCLUS; Ce produit génère, utilise et peut irradier une énergie de
fréquence radio et, en cas d'installation et d'utilisation non
Français
conformes aux présentes instructions, il peut émettre des

ATTENTION : interférences nuisibles pour les communications radio.
CE PRODUIT EST UN PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1. Cependant, les risques d'interférences ne peuvent pas être
L'UTILISATION DE COMMANDE, DE REGLAGES OU DE totalement exclus. Si ce produit émet des interférences
PROCEDURES AUTRES QUE CEUX MENTIONNES nuisible pour la réception radio; ce qui peut être vérifié en
DANS LE PRESENT DOCUMENT PEUT ENTRAINER éteignant et en rallumant le produit, nous invitons
UNE EXPOSITION DANGEREUX AUX RAYONS. l'utilisateur à contacter son revendeur ou un technicien
NE PAS OUVRIR LES CAPOTS ET NE PAS REPAIRER radio qualifié.
SOI-MÊME.
FAIRE APPEL A UNE PERSONNE QUALIFIEE.
Alinéa 15 de la réglementation FCC

Attention FCC :
Tout changement ou toute modification non autorisé(e) au
produit privera l'utilisateur de son droit à utiliser le produit.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
Précautions
▶ Consignes de sécurité ▶ Consignes importantes de sécurité
En conduite ◆ Cetteunité est conçue pour les véhicules ayant une polarité
Maintenez le volume sonore à un niveau vous permettant négative de 14V CC uniquement. N'utilisez pas d'alimentation
d'entendre les conditions de la route et de la circulation. non conforme.
Lors du lavage du véhicule
N'exposez pas le produit, dont les baffles et les CD à l'eau ou à
une humidité excessive. Cela peut entraîner un court-circuit, un
incendie ou tout autre dommage.
En stationnement
Français
Vous garer à la lumière directe du soleil peut entraîner une
température très élevée à l'intérieur du véhicule. Laissez l'intérieur
se refroidir avant d'allumer l'appareil.
◆ N'utilisezpas de gasoil, de solvants, de benzène, etc. pour
Utilisation de la bonne alimentation nettoyer l'unité.
Ce produit est conçu pour fonctionner avec un système de batterie !
à polarité négative de 14 V CC. Nee
Mécanisme du disque
N'insérez pas de pièces ou de petits objets.
Ne laissez pas de tournevis ou d'autres objets métalliques à
proximité du mécanisme du disque et du disque.
Centres de services agréés
Ce produit est composé de pièces de précision. Ne tentez pas de
démonter ou de réparer une pièce. Reportez-vous à la liste des
centres de services fournie avec le produit et faites appel au ◆ N'appuyezpas trop fort sur les boutons.
centre le plus proche. En appuyant en douceur, vous éviterez d'endommager l'unité.
Lors de l'installation
Ce produit doit être installé à l'horizontale avec la façade avant à
un angle pratique pour l'utilisation, mais jamais supérieur à 30°.
Note:
La mémoire préprogrammée est remise à zéro et revient au paramétrage Nee
Usine par défaut lorsque le connecteur ou la batterie est débranché(e). !
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Vue avant
1. Fenêtre d'affichage
2. Bouton BANDE/SA [BAND/AS]
Sélectionne la fonction radio ou la bande (appuyez sur : FM1
→ FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....) pour enregistrer
automatiquement les stations (appuyez puis maintenez
enfoncé le bouton).
3. Bouton BALAYAGE/INF [SCAN/INF]
Balayer chaque station automatiquement, entrer dans le mode
de recherche de fichier (Appuyer), changer les éléments
Français
d'affichage (appuyer puis maintenir enfoncé).

4. Bouton RDS
Rechercher le type de programme indiqué ou la station du
programme du trafic (appuyer), entrer dans le menu RDS
(Radio Data System) (Appuyer et maintenir enfoncé).
5. Bouton PARAMETRAGE [SET]
Entre dans le mode de paramétrage (Style EQ, Tonalité et
Bluetooth).
6. Bouton TONALITE
- Lors d'une réception radio
Trouver une station manuellement (appuyer), rechercher une Insérez un disque (étiquette vers le haut), la lecture enfoncé); règle le volume ou sélectionne les
station automatiquement (appuyer puis maintenir enfoncé). démarre. éléments de paramétrage/rechercher (tourner).
- Lors de la lecture CD/USB
Passer une piste (Appuyer) ; rechercher un dossier vers le 10. Bouton Audio CD/USB/AUX/BT 13. Boutons numériques [1 INT à 6 D+]
haut / bas ; avancer ou reculer une piste (appuyer et maintenir Sélectionne le lecteur audio CD, USB, AUX ou - Lors d'une réception radio
enfoncé). Bluetooth. Reçoit les stations enregistrées (appuyez) ;
11. Bouton EJECTER [ ] le disque enregistre une station
7. Bouton APPEL [ ] (appuyez et maintenez enfoncé).
Recevoir un appel entrant (appuyer), connecter l'appareil Ejecte le disque
- Lors de la lecture CD/USB
Bluetooth (appuyer et maintenir enfoncé). 12. Bouton MARCHE [ ]/SOURDINE [MUTE] 2 RPT : Lecture en mode Répétition
8. Bouton FIN [ ] avec le bouton du VOLUME 3 INT : Lecture Intro
Terminer un appel entrant (appuyer), déconnecter l'appareil Allumer, mettre la radio en sourdine, mettre le 4 RDM : Lecteur en mode Aléatoire
Bluetooth (appuyer et maintenir enfoncé). CD/USB en pause ou reprendre la lecture 5 D- : Dossier en-dessous
(appuyer), éteindre (appuyer et maintenir 6 D+ : Dossier au-dessus
9. Fente du disque
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Fenêtre d'affichage
[Fonction radio] [Fonction CD/MP3/WMA]
1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00 : 01
BBC R3 Knocking on heaven
Français
FM2
4 5 5
1. Numéro du canal préprogrammé 6. Indicateur Disque
2. Indicateur RDS 7. Indicateur Media
- TP s'allume lorsqu'une station TP (Programme de trafic) passe à CDP s'allume lorsqu' un CD audio est chargé.
la radio. MP3 s'allume lorsqu' un fichier MP3 est chargé.
- TA s'allume lorsque la fonction TA est activée. WMA s'allume lorsqu' un fichier WMA est chargé.
- REG s'allume lorsqu'une station REG (REGionale) passe à la
radio. 8. Numéro du dossier (répertoire) actuel
- AF s'allume lorsque la fonction AF (Recherche de fréquences 9. Numéro du fichier (piste) actuel
alternatives) est activée.
10. Indicateur USB
3. Indicateur Stéréo 11. Indicateur du mode de sélection du dossier
4. Indicateur Bande 12. Indicateurs du mode de lecture
RPT (Répétition), INT (Intro), RDM (Aléatoire)
5. Zone d'affichage multifonction
13. Indicateur de la fonction Bluetooth
14. Durée de lecture
15. Indicateur EQ (Egaliseur)
POP, ROCK, COUNTRY, VOICE, JAZZ, CLASSIC, EQ OFF
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Vue arrière
Français
1. Prise antenne
Pour brancher le câble de l'antenne FM
2. Port entrée AUX
Pour connecter un connecteur AUX pour un périphérique audio.
3. Port USB
Pour connecter un connecteur USB pour une fonction hôte USB.
4. Connecteur E/S (18 broches)
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
Avant de commencer
▶ Allumer / éteindre l'unité ▶ Réglage automatique du volume
1 Mettez la clé de contact sur la position ACC ou 1 Tournez le bouton du VOLUME pour augmenter
ON. ou réduire le volume sonore.
L'affichage indiquera le volume sonore (mode audio :
00 à 45 / mode Appel : 06 à 32).
2 Appuyez sur le bouton MARCHE [ ] pour
allumer l'unité.
● Si la source est prête, la lecture démarrera également.
● Si vous coupez le contacter lors de l'écoute d'un disque
Français
ou d'une source USB, la lecture CD/USB reprendra
ensuite là où elle s'est arrêtée.
● Si vous coupez le contacter lors de l'écoute de la radio,
c'est la même station qui passera lors du redémarrage.
3 Appuyez sur le bouton MARCHE [ ] et

maintenez-le enfoncé pour éteindre l'unité. ▶ Mise en sourdine rapide
● Si vous coupez le contacter lors de l'écoute d'un disque
ou la lecture du disque reprendra ensuite là où elle
s'est arrêtée. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton SOURDINE [MUTE] pour
activer la fonction sourdine ou mettre en pause.
‘MUTE’(SOURDINE) or “PAUSE” clignotera sur
l'affichage.
Lorsque la lecture CD/USB est sur pause et le son en
sourdine.
Pour restaurer le son ou reprendre la lecture CD/USB,
Pour l'allumer automatiquement appuyez sur le bouton SOURDINE [MU TE] ou tournez
◆ En insérant un disque, en connectant le périphérique USB ou en
le bouton VOLUME.
appuyant sur le bouton BANDE [BAND/AS] ou Audio CD/USB/AUX
/BT (lorsque le disque est inséré ou le périphérique audio USB/AUX/BT
est connecté), vous pouvez aussi allumez l'unité et la lecture se lancera.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
Avant de commencer
▶ Sélection d'un style d'égaliseur 2 Tournez le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner le
menu TONE (Tonalité), puis appuyez sur le
◆ Vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des styles 6 EQ ou EQ OFF. bouton MARCHE [ ].
1 Appuyez sur le bouton PARAMETRAGE [SET]
pour entrer en mode Paramétrage. 3 Tournez le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner
“EQ”, “TONE” et “BT” apparaissent à l'écran.. l'élément de commande de la tonalité souhaitée,
puis appuyez sur le bouton MARCHE [ ].
2 Tournez le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner le ● Lors de chaque tour du bouton VOLUME, vous pouvez
sélectionner l'un des éléments de commande de la
menu EQ, puis appuyez sur le bouton MARCHE
tonalité souhaitée.
Français
[ ].
3 Tournez le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner le
style EQ souhaité, puis appuyez sur le bouton 4 Tournez le bouton VOLUME pour régler chaque
POWER [ ]. valeur du niveau de la balance, puis appuyez sur
● Lors de chaque tour du bouton VOLUME, vous pouvez
le bouton MARCHE [ ].
sélectionner l'un des styles EQ suivants. ● BASS (BASSE) : règle le niveau des basses (-7 à +7).
EQ OFF ↔ POP ↔ ROCK ↔ COUNTRY ↔ VOICE ● MIDDLE (MEDIUM) : règle le niveau des medium (-7 à
↔ JAZZ ↔ CLASSIC ↔ EQ OFF ↔ .... +7).
● TREBLE (TREMBLE) : règle le niveau des trembles (-7
à +7)
● BALANCE : règle le niveau de la balance entre le haut-
parleur de droite et le haut-parleur de gauche :
(GAUCHE 15 à DROITE15).
▶ Mettre le son du micro en sourdine ● FADER (ATTENUATEUR) : règle le niveau de
◆ Vous pouvez régler chaque niveau de basse, médium, tremble, balance et l'atténuateur entre le haut-parleur avant et le haut-
atténuateur. parleur arrière (AVANT 15 à ARRIERE 15).
1 Appuyez sur le bouton PARAMETRAGE [SET] ● PREVIOUS (PRECEDENT): revient au menu TONE
(Tonalité).
pour entrer en mode Paramétrage.
“EQ”, “TONE” et “BT” apparaissent à l'écran.
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
Note
▶ Recherche d'une station ◆ Lors de la réception de stations stéréo, l'indicateur “ST” s'allumera.
● Allumer la radio Attention

◆ Lors du balayage en conduite, utilisez les boutons numérique de pré-
1 Appuyez sur le bouton BANDE/SA [BAND/AS] programmation pour éviter tout accident.
plusieurs fois pour sélectionner la bande.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
● Recherche manuelle d'une station

▶ Enregistrement manuel d'une station
2 Appuyer sur TONALITE pour obtenir la
Français
fréquence souhaitée. ◆ Vous pouvez présélectionner 6 stations pour chaque bande (FM1, FM2, MW
et LW).
● Recherche automatique d'une station 1 Suivez les étapes 1 à 4 de la section “Recherche d'une
station” pour trouver la fréquence que vous souhaiter
3 Appuyer sur TONALITE plus de 2 préenregistrer.
secondes, puis relâcher.
La recherche se lancera.
Le tuner s'arrêtera automatiquement sur les stations, ~ 2 Appuyez sur le bouton Numérique [1 à 6 D+] et
dont le signal est reçu, et la station passera. maintenez-le enfoncé 2 secondes pour
sélectionner le numéro de présélection.
● Pour balayer rapidement une station La fréquence est enregistrée dans le chiffre de
présélection sélectionné et vous entendrez un bip.
4 Tournez le bouton BALAYAGE [SCAN/INF]. Pour présélectionner une autre station, répétez ces
L'unité s'arrêta à une station, la passera 5 secondes étapes.
puis ira à la station suivante.
Lorsque l'unité s'arrête sur la station souhaitée, tournez Note
le bouton BALAYAGE [SCAN/INF] pour arrêter le ◆Si vous tentez d'enregistrer une autre radio avec le chiffre de présélection, la
balayage. station précédemment enregistrée sera remplacée.
9
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Enregistrement automatique d'une station ▶ Ecoute d'une station présélectionnée
◆ L'unité sélectionne les stations de la bande sélectionnée ayant les signaux les
plus puissants et les enregistre dans l'ordre de fréquence. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton BANDE/SA [BAND/AS]
◆ Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 6 stations sur la bande actuelle. plusieurs fois pour sélectionner une bande.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
1 Appuyez sur le bouton BANDE/SA [BAND/AS]
~ 2 Appuyez sur le bouton Numérique [1 à 6 D+]
et maintenez-le enfoncé 2 secondes.
“AST Scanning” (Balayage AST) apparaît à l'écran. sous lequel la station souhaitée est enregistrée.
L'unité enregistre des stations dans l'ordre de
fréquence, sous les boutons numériques.
Français
Notes
◆ Si seules quelques stations peuvent être reçues en raison d'une faiblesse des
signaux, certains boutons numériques conserveront leur paramétrage
précédent.
◆ Lorsqu'un chiffre s'affiche à l'écran, l’unité commence par les stations à
signaux puissants, à partir de la station indiquée.
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio avec RDS
◆ A propos du RDS ▶ Limiter des stations aux programmations régionales
Le RDS (Système des données radio) est un service de diffusion avec un
nombre de stations FM croissant. Il permet aux stations FM d'envoyer des ◆ Lorsque l'AF est utilisée, la fonction régionale limite le choix aux
signaux supplémentaires en plus des signaux de programmation normaux. stations diffusant des programmes régionaux.
Par exemple, les stations envoient leur nom et les informations indiquant le
programme qui passe, comme "sports", "musique", etc. 1 Appuyer et maintenir le bouton RDS de
Lors de l'écoute d'une station FM offrant un service RDS, l'indicateur RDS manière répétée pour sélectionner "REG ON"
s'allume, la fréquence de la station (et le nom de la station, s'il est transmis) (ENREG. ON) ou "REG OFF" (ENREG. OFF).
s'affiche. ◆ Si vous n'utilisez pas de fonctions au bout de 5 secondes,
Toutes les stations FM n'offrent pas de service RDS, et toutes les stations environ, l'affichage revient automatiquement à l'affichage
RDS n'offrent pas tous les mêmes services. En cas de doute, consultez les ordinaire.
Français
stations radio locales pour obtenir plus d'informations sur les services RDS
dans votre région. 2 Tourner le bouton du VOLUME pour activer
Ce produit peut utiliser les services RDS suivants : REG ON" (ENREG. ON) puis appuyer sur me
PS (Nom du service des programmes) / PTY (Type de programme) / TP bouton ALIMENTATION [ ].
(Programme trafic / TA (Annonce trafic) / AF (Liste des fréquences
alternatives) / RT (Texte radio)
◆ Pour désactivez la fonction régionale, sélectionnez “REG
OFF”.
Cela vous permet de trouver un type de programme passant à l'antenne.
Notes
◆ La programmation régionale et les réseaux régionaux sont organisés
◆ Le RDS (Système de données radio) contient des informations
inaudibles facilitant la recherche des stations de radio. différemment selon les pays (par exemple, ils peuvent changer en
- Le service RDS peut ne pas être disponible pour toutes les stations. fonction de l'heure, l'état ou de la zone de diffusion).
- Les fonctions RDS comme l'AF et la TA sont uniquement activées ◆ Le numéro de présélection peut disparaître de l'écran si les tonalités du
lorsque votre radio passe une station RDS. tuner d'une station régionale diffèrent de la station initialement
paramétrée.
◆ La fonction régionale peut être activée ou désactivée indépendamment
pour chaque bande FM.
◆ Les informations PTY ainsi que la fréquence de la station actuelle
apparaissent à l'écran pendant 3 secondes.
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio avec RDS
◆ Überträgt kein Sender den Programmtyp, nach dem Sie suchen, wird für
▶ Utilisation des fonctions PTY etwa zwei Sekunden „Not found“ angezeigt. Der Tuner kehrt dann zum
ursprünglichen Sender zurück.
Vous pouvez syntoniser une station en utilisant les informations PTY
(Type de programme)
● Recherche d'une station RDS avec des informations PTY ▶ Sélection de fréquences alternatives
1 Appuyer plusieurs fois sur le bouton RDS pour ◆ Lorsque le tuner ne peut pas obtenir une bonne réception, l'unité cherche
sélectionner le mode de recherche PTY. automatiquement une autre station, dans le même réseau.
“PTY None” (Aucune PTY) ou le nom “PTY” s'affiche à
l'écran. 1 Appuyer et maintenir le bouton RDS de manière
◆ Si vous n'utilisez pas de fonctions au bout de 10 secondes, répétée pour sélectionner "AF ON" ou "AF OFF".
Français
environ, l'affichage revient automatiquement à l'affichage ◆ Si vous n'utilisez pas de fonctions au bout de 5 secondes,
ordinaire. environ, l'affichage revient automatiquement à l'affichage
ordinaire.
2 Tourner le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner
l'un des programmes ci-dessous, puis appuyer 2 Tourner le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner
sur le bouton ALIMENTATION [ ]. "AF ON" puis appuyer sur le bouton
PTY NONE ↔ NEWS ↔ AFFAIRS ↔ INFO ↔ SPORT↔ ALIMENTATION [ ].
EDUCATE ↔ DRAMA ↔ CULTURE ↔ SCIENCE ↔ ◆ Si vous n'utilisez pas de fonctions au bout de 5 secondes,
VARIED ↔ POP M ↔ ROCK M ↔ EASY M ↔ LIGHT M ↔ environ, l'affichage revient automatiquement à l'affichage
CLASSICS ↔ OTHER M ↔ WEATHER ↔ FINACE ↔ ordinaire.
CHILDREN ↔ SOCIAL ↔ RELIGION ↔ PHONE IN ↔ ◆ Pour désactiver les fréquences alternatives, sélectionnez
TRAVEL ↔ LEISURE ↔ JAZZ ↔ COUNTRY ↔ NATION M “AF OFF”.
↔ OLDIES ↔ FOLK M ↔ DOCU ↔ PTY NONE ↔ ....
Notes
3 Appuyer sur le bouton RDS pour lancer la ◆ Lors de la recherche, seules les stations RDS passent ou les stations
préprogrammées lors que l'option AF est activée.
recherche.
◆ Lorsque vous rappeler une station présélectionnée, le tuner peut mettre à
L'appareil recherche une station diffusant ce type de
programme. Quand une station est trouvée, son nom de jour la station préprogrammée avec une nouvelle fréquence, à partir de la
service de programme est affiché. liste AF. Aucun chiffre de pré-programmation ne s'affiche si les données
RDS de la station reçues diffèrent de la station originalement enregistrée.
◆ Pour annuler la recherche, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton
◆ Le son peut être temporairement interrompu par un autre programme
RDS.
lors d'une recherche de fréquence AF.
Hinweise
◆ Das Programm einiger Sender kann von dem abweichen, das vom ◆ L'AF peut être activée ou désactivée indépendamment pour chaque
übertragenen PTY angegeben wird. bande FM.

12
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio avec RDS
“TA ON” ou “TA OFF” s'affichent à l'écran.
▶ Réception programme du trafic
● Recherche d'une station TP (Programme Trafic) 2 Tourner le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner
le mode "TA ON" puis appuyer sur le bouton
1 Appuyer et maintenir plusieurs fois le bouton RDS ALIMENTATION [ ].
pour sélectionner le mode de recherche TP. La fonction TA est activée.
“TA ON” ou “TA OFF” s'affichent à l'écran. Si une annonce trafic est reçue, l'appareil passe automati-
quement à la station diffusant des annonces trafic.
2 Tourner le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner ◆ Lorsque l'annonce trafic est terminée, l'appareil passe automatiquement à la
le mode TP ON puis appuyer sur le bouton fonction précédente (La fonction audio Bluetooth ne peut pas être réactivée.
ALIMENTATION [ ] . Relancez la connexion Bluetooth)
Français
La fonction TP est activée. ◆ Pour désactiver l'option, sélectionnez “TA OFF” à l'aide du bouton
◆ Pour désactiver l'option, sélectionner “TP OFF” à l'aide du VOLUME.
bouton VOLUME.
▶ Changement des éléments d'affichage/
3 Appuyer sur le bouton RDS pour lancer la fonction de défilement
recherche.
L'unité recherche une station de radio diffusant une 1 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur le bouton BALAYAG
émission sur le trafic. E/INF [SCAN/INF] pour sélectionner l'élément
◆ Lorsque lle programme "trafic" est terminé, l'appareil passe d'affichage ou activer/ désactiver la fonction de
automatiquement à la fonction précédente (La fonction audio Bluetooth ne défilement comme ci-dessous :
peut pas être réactivée. Relancer la connexion Bluetooth)
◆ Pour annuler la recherche, de nouveau appuyer sur le bouton RDS. ● Radio text (Texte radio) : Permet à la station RDS d'envoyer des
messages texte qui s'affichent à l'écran.
● Nom PTY (Type de programme Type) : Identifie le type de
▶ Réception d'annonces du trafic programme RDS.
La TA (Annonce trafic) vous permet de recevoir automatiquement des ● SCROLL ON/OFF (ACTIVATION/DESACTIVATION DU
annonces de trafic, quelle que soit la source que vous écoutez La TA peut être DEFILEMENT) : Activer/désactiver la fonction de défilement pour
activée à la fois pour une station TP (une station qui diffuse des informations afficher la performance.
sur le trafic) ou une autre station TP d'un autre réseau amélioré (une station
émet des informations dont les infos se recoupent sur les stations TP). ● En cas d'ACTIVATION/DESACTIVATION DU DEFILEMENT
● Activation/désactivation de la fonction TA 2 Appuyez sur le bouton VOLUME pour passer à
1 Appuyer et maintenir le bouton RDS plusieurs OFF ou ON, puis appuyez sur le bouton
ALIMENTATION [ ].
fois pour sélectionner le menu TA.
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lecteur MP3[WMA]/CD
● La lecture démarre automatiquement
▶ A vant la lecture du disque après avoir reconnu les données du
disque en cours de chargement.
◆ Vous pouvez lire des disques CD-DA et MP3/WMA. ● La lecture peut mettre du temps avant
◆ Cette unité ne peut pas lire les fichiers suivants :
de démarrer.
- Les fichiers MP3 encodés avec un format MP3i et MP3 PRO. ● Toutes les pistes seront jouées
- Les fichiers MP3 encodés avec un format inapproprié.
jusqu'à ce que vous changiez la
- Les fichiers MP3 encodés avec une 1/2 couche. source ou éjectiez le disque.
- Les fichiers WMA encodés avec un format sans déperdition, pro ou
vocal. Note: N'insérez pas de disque lorsque l'indicateur du disque est affiché sur
- Les fichiers WMA non basés sur Windows Media Audio. l'écran, cela signifie qu'un disque est déjà chargé.
◆ Lorsque le disque est dans l'unité
- Les fichiers WMA protégés avec la technologie DRM.
Appuyez plusieurs fois sur le bouton audio CD/USB/AUX/BT pour
Français
- Les fichiers ayant des données comme WAVE, ATRAC3, etc. sélectionner CD et lancer la lecture.
Note : Disques compatibles
◆ CD-DA : CD-R/CD-RW
◆ MP3/WMA : CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM ▶ Contrôler la lecture
Attention
◆ Les CD 8 cm ne sont pas compatibles, n'en insérez pas. 1 Appuyer plusieurs fois sur les boutons
◆ N'utilisez pas de disques ayant une forme irrégulière. TONALITE pour aller à la piste
◆ N'utilisez pas de disques ayant une étiquette collée.
suivante ou revenir à la piste précédente.
◆ Pour éviter tout endommagement du panneau avant, n'appuyez pas
dessus vers le bas et ne posez d'objet dessus lorsqu'il est ouvert.
◆ Pour un disque MP3 ou WMA, vous pouvez passer des pistes dans un
◆ Ne mettez pas votre doigt ni votre main dans le panneau avant. même dossier.
◆ N'insérez pas d'objets étrangers dans la fente du disque.
Note
2 Tourner le bouton TONALITE et le
◆L'appareil se mettra automatiquement en route, une fois le disque
maintenir pour avancer ou revenir en arrière
chargé. Un disque ayant à la fois des données CD-DA et des données rapidement la piste, puis relâcher pour reprendre
MP3/WMA ne peut pas fonctionner correctement. (Par exemple, il ne la lecture.
peut pas y avoir de son). ◆ La fonction de recherche fonctionne mais la vitesse de recherche n'est pas
constante.
◆ Pendant l'avance ou le retour rapide, vous pouvez uniquement entendre des
sons par intermittence.
▶ Charger un disque et lancer la lecture
3 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur les boutons 5 D- ou 6 D+
1 Insérez un disque dans la fente du disque avec l'étiquette pour aller dans les dossiers précédents ou suivants
vers le haut. (uniquement pour un disque MP3 ou WMA).
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lecteur MP3[WMA]/CD
▶ Sélection des modes de lecture ▶ Recherche de la musique
1 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur le bouton 2 RPT pour 1 Appuyer sur le bouton BALAYAGE/INF [SCAN/
sélectionner le mode de lecture "Répétition". INF] pour entrer dans le menu de Recherche.
● RPT : La piste actuelle sera répétée. Le numéro de la piste ou le nom du morceau
● DOSSIER [ ] RPT : Toutes les pistes du dossier s'affichera 5 secondes.
seront répétées (uniquement pour MP3/WMA).
● Off : Annule la lecture "Répétition". 2 Tourner le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner le
numéro ou le nom de la piste souhaitée, puis
2 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur le bouton 3 INT pour appuyer sur le bouton ALIMENTATION [ ]
Français
sélectionner le mode de lecture "Intro". pour lancer la lecture de la piste sélectionnée.
● FOLDER [ ] INT (DOSSIER INT): Lit successivement
le début de la piste du dossier courant (uniquement
pour MP3/WMA).
● INT: Lit successivement le début de la piste du disque.
● Off: Annule la lecture Intro.
▶ Affichage des informations du dossier
3 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur le bouton 4 RDM pour 1 Appuyer et maintenir le bouton BALAYAGE/INF
sélectionner le mode de lecture "Aléatoire". [SCAN/INF] pour afficher les informations du
● FOLDER [ ] RDM (DOSSIER RDM): Les pistes du dossier en cours 5 secondes.
fichier actuel seront lues dans un ordre aléatoire
(uniquement pour MP3/WMA). ● Pour activer/désactiver la fonction "défilement"
● RDM: Les pistes du disque seront lues dans un ordre
aléatoire.
● Off: Annule la lecture Aléatoire.
2 Lors de l'affichage des informations du dossier,
appuyer sur le bouton BALAYAGE/INF [SCAN/
INF] pour afficher/masquer le dé filement.
Note : Changer de source 3 Tourner le bouton VOLUME pour l'activer ou le

Si vous changez la source, la lecture s'arrêtera (sans à avoir à éjecter le disque). désactiver, puis appuyer sur le bouton
La prochaine fois que vous sélectionnerez “CD” comme source de lecture, la ALIMENTATION [ ].
lecture du disque recommencera là où elle s'arrêtera.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lecteur MP3[WMA]/CD
▶ Arrêt de la lecture et éjection du disque ▶ A propos de MP3/WMA
1 Appuyez plusieurs Cet appareil peut lire les fichiers MP3/WMA avec le code d'extension
<.mp3> or <.wma> (quelle que soit la casse).
fois sur le bouton Cet appareil peut afficher les noms des albums, des artistes (interprète) et
EJECTER [ ] pour les balises (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, ou 2.4) pour les fichiers MP3 ou les
prendre le disque. fichiers WMA.
Note : Ejection du disque. Cet appareil peut uniquement afficher un octet de caractères, aucun autre
Si le disque éjecté n'est pas retiré dans les 10 secondes, le disque est caractère ne peut être affiché correctement.
automatiquement réinséré dans la fente d'insertion pour le protéger de la Cet appareil peut lire les fichiers MP3/WMA répondant aux conditions
poussière. (Le disque ne se lancera pas.) suivantes :
Français
- Taux de bits : 8 kbps ~ 320 kbps pour les MP3 / 64 kbps ~ 161 kbps
▶ A propos de CD-R/CD-RW (VBR) pour les WMA
Utilisez uniquement des CD-R ou CD-RW finalisés.
- Fréquence d'échantillonnage :
Cet appareil peut lire uniquement des fichiers du même type, qui sont d'abord 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (pour les MPEG-1 avec une couche 2/3)
détectés si un disque comprend à la fois des fichiers CD (CD-DA) et des 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (pour les MPEG-2 avec une couche 2/3)
fichiers MP3/WMA. 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (pour les MPEG-2.5 avec une couche 3)
Cet appareil peut lire les disques multisessions, mais les sessions non fermées - Format du disque : ISO/IEC 11172-3, ISO/IEC 13818-3
seront sautées lors de la lecture. Le nombre maximum de caractères pour les noms du fichier/dossier varie
Certains CD-Rs ou CD-RWs peuvent ne pas être lus sur cet appareil à cause selon le format du disque utilisé (comprend 4 caractères d'extension -
de leurs caractéristiques, ou pour les raisons suivantes : <.mp3> or <.wma>).
- Les disques sont sales ou rayés.
- De la condensation s'est formée sur la lentille à l'intérieur de l'appareil. - ISO 9660 Niveau 1 : jusqu'à 12 caractères
- La lentille du capteur à l'intérieur de l'unité est sale. - ISO 9660 Niveau 2 : jusqu'à 31 caractères
- Le CD-R/CD-RW sur lequel les fichiers a été gravé avec une méthode dite - Romeo : jusqu'à 128 caractères
"écriture par paquets". - Joliet : jusqu'à 64 caractères
- Des erreurs sont survenus lors de l'enregistrement (données manquantes, etc.) - long nom du fichier Windows : jusqu'à 128 caractères
ou le support présente des conditions inappropriées (tâche, rayure, Cet appareil peut lire les fichiers enregistrés en VBR (Taux de bits
déformation, etc.) variable). Les fichiers enregistrés en VBR présentent un écart d'affichage
Le CD-RW peut nécessiter un temps de lecture plus long en raison de la concernant la durée écoulée et ne montre pas la durée écoulée réelle. Après
réflectance plus faible sur les CD- RW que sur les CD. avoir effectué la fonction de recherche, cette différence devient importante.
N'utilisez pas les CD-R ou CD-RW suivants :
L'unité peut reconnaître un total de 512 fichiers, de 200 dossiers, et de 8
- Disques avec des autocollants, des étiquettes ou sceaux protecteur collés à la
surface hiérarchies
- Les disques dont les étiquettes peuvent être directement imprimées par une Note :
imprimante à jet d'encre. Microsoft et Windows Media sont des marques déposées de Microsoft
L'utilisation de ces disques sous des températures élevées ou une forte Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays.
humidité peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements ou d'endommager l'appareil.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
Confirmez en appuyant sur “OUI” ou “OK” sur votre
▶ Fonctionnement du Bluetooth téléphone.
Pour utiliser la fonction Bluetooth, la procédure suivante est nécessaire. - Si votre téléphone ne trouve pas “New Rexton” ou “New Rexton”, répétez
1. Pairage les étapes 1~2.
Lors de la connexion d'appareils Bluetooth pour la première fois,
l'enregistrement mutuel est nécessaire. Cela s'appelle le "pairage".
3 Si un code est demandé à l'affichage d'un appareil en cours
Cet enregistrement (pairage) est requis uniquement lors de la de connexion “00xx” (4 chiffres).
première fois, cette unité et les autres appareils se reconnaîtront Cette unité et le périphérique Bluetooth mémorise leurs informations
automatiquement dès la fois suivante. (Selon le périphérique, vous mutuelles, et quand le pairage est terminé, l'appareil est prêt pour la
devez entrer un mot de passe pour chaque connexion.) connexion à l'appareil
2. Connexion "BT CONNECT" et “le modèle de l'appareil Bluetooth” ou “BT MOBILE”
Parfois le pairage permet une connexion automatique. avec l'indicateur “ ” apparaissent, une fois le pairage terminé.
Français
Pour utiliser l'appareil une fois le pairage terminé, lancez la - Certain appareil Bluetooth vous demande d'accepter le lien BT ou
connexion. "Connecter". Entrez "Oui" ou "Ok".
3. Kit mains libres / Musique en streaming * Selon le périphérique, le code est appelé "mot de passe", "code PIN",
Vous pouvez appeler un téléphone portable et écouter de la musique "Numéro PIN", etc.
lorsque la connexion est faite.
Certains appareils Bluetooth ne supportent pas de fonctions spécifiques. 4 Paramétrez l'appareil Bluetooth pour connecter cette unité.
Note : Le mode pairage n'est pas disponible tant que la connexion n'a pas
été effectuée.
▶ Pairage de votre téléphon e et du système audio du véhicule
Tout d'abord d'enregistrer ("pairer") un appareil Bluetooth (téléphone portable,
▶ Connexion d'un téléphone mobile
etc.) et cette unité entre eux. Vous pouvez pairer jusqu'à 6 appareils. Une fois le - Les appareils sont enregistrés une fois pairés et connectés à cet appareil. Vous
pairage terminé, il n'est plus nécessaire de reprocéder au pairage. pouvez sélectionne l'appareil enregistré et le connecter.
Placez le périphérique Bluetooth dans les 3 m de cet appareil. - Si le pairage a déjà été réalisé, lancez l'opération à partir de l'oreillette
- Selon l'appareil, la connexion peut démarrer automatiquement, après le pairage.
1 Appuyez sur le bouton APPEL [ ] et
maintenez pendant 3 secondes. 1 Connectez-vous à cet appareil en utilisant votre
L'appareil passe en mode de pairage "PAIRING" téléphone mobile et appuyez sur le bouton
(PAIRAGE) s'affichera à l'écran avec un bip et "KEY APPEL [ ].
00xx" clignotera.
“BT CONNECT” et l'icone “ ” s'affichent et le signal
2 Paramétrez l'appareil Bluetooth pour rechercher l'unité. Bluetooth est allumé.
Une liste de périphériques détectés s'affichent à l'écran de Note :
l'appareil en cours de connexion. Cette unité s'affiche comme Pour afficher les informations de l'appareil Bluetooth
“New Rexton” ou “SSANGYONG” sur l'appareil en cours de connecté, appuyez sur le bouton SCAN/INF.
connexion.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Passer un appel via le dernier appel ▶ Réglage du volume du micro
Vous pouvez effectuer un appel à partir du téléphone mobile connecté en
utilisant cet appareil. 1 Tournez le bouton du VOLUME pour augmenter
ou réduire le volume sonore.
1 Appuyez sur le bouton APPEL [ ] et L'affichage montrera le volume sonore Bluetooth (BT
maintenez pendant 3 secondes pour entrer dans VOL 6 ~ 32).
le mode dernier numéro composé.
“REDIAL” (RECOMPOSER) s'affiche et le téléphone
compose le dernier numéro.
Français
▶ Recevoir un appel ▶ Mettre le son du micro en sourdine

Lors d'un appel entrant, la sonnerie est émise par les haut-parleurs de la voiture
et le numéro de l'appelant s'affiche à l'écran. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton SOURDINE [MUTE] du
volant pour activer la fonction "sourdine" du
micro.
1 Lors d'un appel entrant, “CALL IN” (APPEL
ENTRANT) et le numéro de téléphone s'affichent L'affichage montrera ‘MIC MUTE’ (SOURDINE
lorsque la sonnerie retentit, appuyez sur l bouton MICRO).
APPEL [ ] pour répondre à l'appel. Pour annuler la fonction Sourdine du micro, appuyez
“BT TEL” (TEL BT) s'affiche et l'appel est effectué. sur le bouton SOURDINE [MUTE] du volant ‘MIC
MUTE’ (SOURDINE MICRO) disparaît.
Le micro intégré du système audio captera votre voix.
Pour rejeter un appel entrant, appuyez sur le

bouton TERMINER [ ].
“CALL REJECT” (REJETER APPEL) apparaîtra et
vous reviendrez à la fonction précédente.
▶ Terminer un appel
1 Appuyez sur le bouton TERMINER [ ].
Note:
◆ Même si les appels sont terminés, la connexion Bluetooth n'est
pas annulée.
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Transfert d'appel ▶ Ecouter de la musique à partir d'un périphérique audio
Pour activer/désactiver le périphérique approprié (cet appareil/téléphone Vous pouvez écouter de la musique de votre téléphone mobile via cet appareil,
mobile), vérifiez les points suivants : si le téléphone mobile à la technologie A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) Bluetooth.
1 Pendant un appel via le kit mains libres Bluetooth 1 Activez le signal Bluetooth de votre téléphone mobile de
mains libres, appuyez sur le bouton APPEL [ ].
votre périphérique audio. “Stereo Headset” (Ecouteurs stéréo)
Le kit mains-libres est désactivé tandis que le
microphone et le haut-parleur du téléphone s'affichera une fois la connexion terminée.
mobile sont activés.
“PRIVATE” (PRIVE) s'affiche et l'appel du téléphone
2 Tournez le bouton du VOLUME pour réduire le
volume sonore de l'appareil.
Français
portable est effectué.
Pendant un appel via le téléphone portable,

appuyez sur le bouton APPEL [ ]. 3 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur le bouton Audio CD/
La fonction kit mains libres Bluetooth est activée. USB/AUX/BT jusqu'à ce que “BT AUDIO”
“BT TEL” (TEL BT) s'affiche et l'appel avec le kit mains (AUDIO BT) apparaisse.
libres est effectué.
Pour plus de détails sur le fonctionnement du téléphone 4 Faites fonctionner l'appareil audio pour lancer la lecture.
mobile, reportez au manuel de votre téléphone mobile. Vous pouvez changer le volume et passer une piste à l'aide des
boutons de l'appareil. (Reportez-vous à la section “Lecteur
Note: MP3[WMA/CD”)
◆ Selon le téléphone portable, la connexion mains-libres peut être coupée
lorsque le transfert d'appel est tenté.
5 Tournez le bouton du VOLUME pour régler le
volume sonore de l'appareil.
6 Pour éteindre la musique, appuyez sur le bouton

TERMINER [ ] ou appuyez sur CD/USB/AUX/
BT.
“Appuyez sur le bouton BAND ou Audio CD/
USB/AUX/BT pour sélectionner une autre fonction.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
● En cas de sélection de PAIRER
▶ Paramétrage du mode Bluetooth
◆ Vous pouvez commander les modes Bluetooth. 5 Suivez les étapes 2 à 4 de la page 17 “Pairage
de votre téléphone et du système audio du
1 Appuyez sur le bouton PARAMETRAGE [SET] véhicule" pour terminer le pairage.
pour entrer en mode Paramétrage.
“EQ”, “TONE” et “BT” apparaissent à l'écran. ● En cas de sélection de SUPPRIMER
2 Tournez le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner le 5 Tournez sur le bouton VOLUME pour
menu BT, puis appuyez sur le bouton MARCHE sélectionner “YES”(OUI) ou “NO” (NON), puis
[ ]. appuyez sur le bouton MARCHE [ ].
Français
YES (OUI) : Supprime la liste de l'appareil Bluetooth

sélectionné.
3 Tournez le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner NO (NON) : Annule la fonction "Supprimer".
l'élément de paramétrage Bluetooth souhaité,
● Lors de chaque tour du bouton VOLUME, vous pouvez
sélectionner l'un des éléments de paramétrage
Bluetooth.
PAIR ↔ SELECT ↔ PRIORITY ↔ DELETE ↔ BT
VOL ↔ TEL OPTION ↔ PREVIOUS ↔ PAIR ↔ ...
4 Tournez le bouton VOLUME pour sélectionner la

liste des appareils souhaitée ou ajuster la valeur,
● PAIR(PAIRER) : entre en mode pairage (Code PIN :
00xx).
● SELECT (SELECTIONNER) : sélectionne l'un des 5
appareils Bluetooth à connecter.
● PRIORITY (PRIORITE) : sélectionne la priorité de la
connexion.
● DELETE (SUPPRIMER) : supprime un appareil
Bluetooth.
● PREVIOUS (PRECEDENT): revient au menu BT.
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lecteur USB/AUX
▶ Lectur e d'un périphérique USB ▶ Précautions pour le matériel USB
En connectant un périphérique USB au câble USB de la prise ● Lors de l'utilisation de l'appareil USB externe, ● Le temps requis pour la reconnaissance de
USB de l'appareil, vous pouvez écouter la musique sur vos assurez-vous de maintenir l'appareil l'appareil USB externe peut varier en
haut-parleurs de voiture, tout en contrôlant le périphérique USB déconnecté et de le connecter uniquement fonction du type, de la taille et des formats
à partir de l'appareil. après avoir attendu quelques instants après des fichiers stockés sur l'USB. Des
1 Appuyez sur le bouton MARCHE avoir mis le contact. L'appareil USB peut être
endommagé si l'appareil USB est déjà
différences dans le temps requis n'indiquent
aucunement un dysfonctionnement. Veuillez
[ ] et maintenez-le enfoncé pour connecté lorsque le contact est mis en route. attendre que l'appareil soit reconnu.
éteindre l'unité. L'appareil USB n'est pas un composant ● L'appareil supporte seulement les appareils
automobile électronique.) USB utilisés pour les fichiers musique.
● Certains appareils USB peuvent ne pas ● N'utilisez pas l’I/F USB pour recharger la
2 Connectez l'appareil USB
Français
fonctionner correctement en raison de batterie ou des accessoires USB pouvant
contenant les fichiers problème de compatibilité. générer de la chaleur. Cela peut entraîner
● L'appareil reconnaître uniquement les une altération de la performance ou
MP3/WMA à lire au terminal
appareils USB formatés en FAT 16/12/32. endommager l'appareil.
d'entrée USB à l'aide d'un Lors du formatage de l'appareil USB externe, ● En cas d'appareil USB de grande capacité,
câble USB. l'appareil peut ne pas correctement les pilotes logiques peuvent être divisés pour
‘USB’ apparaît et la lecture reconnaître une sélection Byte/Secteur autre la facilité de l'utilisateur. Dans ce cas, il est
démarre automatiquement après que 512 Bytes ou 2 048 Bytes. uniquement possible de lire la musique USB
● Vérifier que l'appareil externe est supporté dans le pilote de haut niveau. Lors de
avoir reconnu les données du
périphérique USB. par le produit avant de l'utiliser. l'utilisation de pilotes divisés, sauvegardez
● Eviter le contact entre les pièces principales les chansons que vous souhaitez lire sur
et les corps étrangers et le connecteur USB. l'appareil uniquement dans le pilote logique
● Connecter et déconnecter à répétition, sur de haut niveau. Par ailleurs, certains
3 Une fois le périphérique USB une courte période, l'USB peut endommager dispositifs USB sont configurés avec un
connecté, appuyez plusieurs fois sur l'appareil. pilote séparé utilisé pour installer des
programmes d'application. Il peut donc être
le bouton Audio CD/USB/AUX/BT ● Lors de la déconnexion de l'USB, un bruit
impossible de lire les chansons à partir de
jusqu'à ce que ‘USB’ apparaisse. anormal peut parfois se fait entendre. tels pilotes pour les raisons évoquées ci-
● Déconnecter brutalement l'appareil USB
La lecture USB se lancera dessus.
automatiquement. externe lorsque l'USB est en cours ● L'appareil peut ne pas supporter l'opération
d'opération peut endommager l'appareil ou normale lors de l'utilisation des formats tels
Vous pouvez changer le volume, le mode de lecture et causer un dysfonctionnement. Assurez-vous que HDD, CF, ou Mémoire SD.
sélectionner la piste à l'aide des boutons du panneau de de déconnecter l'appareil USB après avoir
● L'appareil ne supportera pas les fichiers
commandes. éteint l'audio ou lorsque l'audio fonctionne
sous un autre mode. verrouillés par DRM (Digital Rights
(Reportez-vous à la section ‘Lecteur MP3[WMA]/CD’) Management).
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lecteur USB/AUX
▶ Ecoute à partir d'un périphérique audio auxiliaire
En connectant un périphérique audio portable en option à la prise AUX (mini
jack stéréo) de l'appareil et ensuite en sélectionnant simplement la source, vous
pouvez écouter la musique sur vos haut-parleurs de voiture. Le niveau de
volume est réglable pour toute différence entre l'unité et l'appareil audio
portable.
1 Baissez le son de l'unité
Français
2 Eteignez le périphérique audio externe.

Connectez la sortie audio du périphérique
audio externe au terminal d'entrée AUX de
l'appareil.
Veillez à régler le volume pour
chaque périphérique audio connecté
avant la lecture
3 Lancez la lecture du périphérique audio externe

à un volume modéré.
4 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur le bouton Audio

CD/USB/AUX/BT jusqu'à ce que “AUX IN”
(ENTREE AUX) apparaisse.
Lorsque le périphérique audio externe est déjà
connecté, passez les étapes 1 à 3.
5 Réglez votre volume d'écoute habituel de

l'appareil.
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
Commandes audio au volant
▶ Utilisation des commandes audio au volant
Si votre véhicule dispose de cette fonctionnalité, certaines commandes audio peuvent être réglées au niveau du volant
Dont :
▲ VOL ▼ MODE
Appuyez : augmente / réduit le volume ● Appuyez : Sélectionne les fonctions (CD →
USB → AUX → BT Audio → RADIO...)
▲ SEEK ▼ ● Appuyez et maintenez : sélectionne la bande
Lors de l'écoute d'uns station (FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW...)

● Appuyez : va à la station suivante/
SOURDINE [MUTE]
Français
précédente préprogrammée
● Appuyez et maintenez : recherche la Lord d'un appel
station de radio suivante/ précédente Appuyez : Allume/éteint le MICRO. Fonction
(La radio recherche uniquement les SOURDINE
stations avec un signal puissant se En mode radio ou audio CD/USB/BT
trouvant dans la bande sélectionnée) Appuyez : Allume/éteint la sourdine de la radio
Lors de la lecture audio CD/USB/BT ou active/désactive la mise en pause de la
● Appuyez : va à la piste lecture CD/USB.
suivante/précédente
● Appuyez et maintenez : avance ou Téléphone [ ]
recule rapidement les pistes En veille
(uniquement pour la lecture CD/USB) Appuyez et maintenez : passe un appel via le
dernier appel composé
MARCHE [PWR ]
Appuyez : active/désactive le système Lord d'un appel entrant
ou passe en mode appel privé pour un ● Appuyez : reçoit un appel entrant
appel entrant ● Appuyez et maintenez : rejette un appel
entrant
Lord d'un appel
● Appuyez : passe en mode appel privé ou
Bluetooth
● Appuyez et maintenez : termine un appel
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dépannage
▶ Problèmes courants
Problèmes Causes possibles Solutions possibles
- Aucun son n'est émis. - MUTE (SOURDINE) est sur ON. - Mettez MUTE (SOURDINE) est sur OFF.
- Bruit - Il y a un générateur d'ondes - Gardez les générateurs d'ondes électromagnétiques comme un
électromagnétiques comme un téléphone téléphone portable loin de l'unité et des câbles de l'appareil. Si le
portable près de l'appareil ou de ses fils bruit ne peut pas être éliminé en raison du câblage de la voiture,
électriques. consultez votre revendeur
- Aucun son ne sort des haut- - Le paramétrage de la balance/de - Réglez de nouveau la balance/l'atténuateur
Français
parleurs. l'atténuateur n'est pas approprié.
▶ Radio
- Mauvaise réception ou bruit - Conditions de diffusion insatisfaisantes. - Recevoir et écouter les signaux de la station concernée en mode
analogique
- La recherche prend trop de - Le nombre de stations recevables est - Déplacez-vous vers un endroit où la réception est maximale, et
temps. inférieur à 6. essayer les pré-programmations.
- Le nombre de stations auto - Le contact de la batterie est pauvre, ou la - Assurez-vous que la batterie est bien connectée et
programmées est inférieur à 6. batterie n'est pas toujours chargée préprogrammez une nouvelle fois les stations.
- Les stations préréglées ne - La recherche numérique peut prendre un - Changez et passer en recherche automatique et relancez la
peuvent pas être enregistrées certain temps. recherche
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dépannage
▶ Lecteur MP3[WMA]/CD
- Pas de lecture ou le disque - Le disque est inséré à l'envers. - Insérez correctement le disque
éjecté - Il y a une rayure ou un corps étranger sur - Retirez les corps étrangers ou utilisez un disque sans défaut
le disque
- Le disque comprend des données - Reportez-vous à la description du MP3/WMA pour des données
formatées illisibles. sonores lisibles sauf CD-DA (ex. CD musique).
- L'appareil lit la piste CD ROM d'un CD - Passez la piste ROM
Français
mixte.
- Les CD-R/RW lisibles sur - La lisibilité de certains CD-R/RW peut - Faites les CD-R/RW avec différents médias, logiciels
d'autres appareils ne sont dépendre de la combinaison des médias, d'enregistrement et enregistreur après vous être reporté à la
pas lisibles sur cet appareil. du logiciel d'enregistrement et d'un description du MP3/WMA.
enregistreur pour être utilisé même si ces
CD-R/RW sont lisibles sur d'autres
appareils, comme un PC.
- Son qui saute ou bruit - Il y a une rayure ou un corps étranger sur - Retirez les corps étrangers ou utilisez un disque sans défaut.
le disque Pour les MP3/WMA, reportez-vous à la description du
MP3/WMA.
- Son qui saute en raison des - L'unité n'est pas suffisamment fixée. - Fixez l'unité à la console avec la sangle de support arrière, etc.
vibrations - L'appareil est incliné à plus de 30 ° dans le - Réduisez l'angle à 30° ou moins.
sens avant-arrière
- Impossible d'éjecter le disque - Une étiquette du CD s'est décollée dans - Consulter le revendeur ou fournisseur où vous avez acheté
l'appareil. l'appareil.
25
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dépannage
▶ Lecteur USB MP3[WMA]
- L' USB ne fonctionne pas - La mémoire USB est endommagée - Veuillez l'utiliser après avoir formaté l'USB dans le format FAT
12/16/32
- La mémoire USB a été corrompue - Retirez tous les corps étrangers de la surface de contact de la
mémoire USB et le terminal multimédia.
- Un HUB USB acheté séparément est - Connectez directement la mémoire USB au terminal multimédia
Français
utilisé. dans le véhicule.

- Un câble d'extension USB est utilisé. - Connectez directement la mémoire USB au terminal multimédia
dans le véhicule.
- Un périphérique USB autre qu'une - Utilisez une mémoire USB standard.
mémoire USB de type Metal Cover est
utilisé.
- Une mémoire SD, CF et de type HDD est - Utilisez une mémoire USB standard.
utilisée.
- Certains fichiers musique ne peuvent pas - Seuls les fichiers MP3, WMA sont supportés.
être lus. - N'utilisez que les formats de fichiers musiques supportés
26
GETtheMANUALS.org
Caractéristiques
▶ Généralités ▶ Section MP3[WMA]/CD
Alimentation Polarité négative CC 14,4V Fréquence d'échantillonnage Suréchantillonnage 8 fois
Impédance du haut-parleur 4 ohm Convertisseur AD Système 4 ACD
Alimentation max. 45 Watts x 4 C Type de lecteur 3 rayons Astigma
Poids 880 g (Net) Source de lumière Laser semi-conducteur
Dimension (L x H x P) 178 x 52 x 155 mm Longueur d'ondes 780 nm
Réponse de fréquence 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz (±3 dB)
▶ Section radio FM/MW/LW
Français
Ratio Signal / Bruit ≥50 dB
Distorsion harmonique totale ≤1 % (1 kHz)
Portée de fréquence FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108 MHz
MM 522 kHz ~ 1,620 kHz Pleurage et scintillement Sous les limites mesurables
LW 144 kHz ~ 290 kHz Séparation des canaux ≥35 dB
FM ≤18 dBu
Sensibilité utilisable MM ≤35 dBu
LW ≤35 dBu
FM ≥45 dB
Ratio Signal/Bruit MM ≥40 dB ▶ Fonction Bluetooth
LW ≥40 dB
Caractéristiques Bluetooth V2.0 (Bluetooth V1,2 compatible)
Séparation stéréo FM ≥20 dB
rincipales
Sensibilité - 60 dBm
▶ Section USB MP3[WMA] Mémoire interne Mémoire Flash 16 M bits
Réponse de fréquence 20 Hz ~ 20 KHz Fonction appliquée Compatibilité Audio large bande passante
Profil de distribution Audio avancé
Distortion harmonique totale 0.1 % (à 1 KHz) Fixation du kit mains libres / Appel privé
Portée dynamique 85 dB (à 1 KHz)
Taux signal/bruit 60 dB (à 1 KHz) Les caractéristiques et la conception sont sujets à modification sans
Séparation des canaux 54 dB (à 1 KHz) avis à des fins d'amélioration du produit.
27
GETtheMANUALS.org
Italiano
● Prima di usare il dispositivo leggere attentamente le istruzioni e

conservarle per un futuro riferimento.
● Per apportare miglioramenti al dispositivo, il progetto e le specifiche
dello stesso possono subire modifiche senza preavviso .
GETtheMANUALS.org
Indice
Precauzioni Cambiamento delle voci visualizzate/ Lettore USB/AUX
Informazioni sulla sicurezza ..................... 2 funzione di scorrimento .......................... 13 Riproduzione da un dispositivo USB .... 21
Precauzioni di sicurezza .......................... 3 Lettore MP3[WMA]/CD Precauzioni relative al dispositivo USB . 21
Riproduzione della musica
Posizionamento dei controlli Prima di riprodurre un disco .................. 14
dai dispositivi audio ausiliari ................... 22
Vista anteriore .......................................... 4 Caricamento di un disco e avvio
Finestra del display .................................. 5 della riproduzione ................................... 14 Controlli audio sul volante
Vista posteriore ......................................... 6 Controllo della riproduzione ................... 14 L’uso dei controlli audio sul volante ....... 23
Selezione delle modalità
Per iniziare di riproduzione ........................................ 15 Risoluzione dei problemi
Accensione/Spegnimento Ricerca dei brani .................................... 15 Problemi comuni ................................ 24
del dispositivo ........................................... 7 Visualizzazione delle informazioni Radio ................................................... 24
Regolazione diretta del volume ............... 7 sulla cartella ............................................ 15 Lettore MP3[WMA] CD ...................... 25
Disattivazione dell’audio .......................... 7 Arresto della riproduzione e Lettore USB MP3[WMA] .................... 26
Selezione dello stile dell’equalizzatore .... 8 l’espulsione del disco ............................. 16
Informazioni su CD-R/CD-RW .............. 16
Specifiche
Impostazione dell’audio ........................... 8 Sezione generica ............................... 27
Italiano
Informazioni su MP3/WMA .................... 16
Radio Sezione dedicate alla
Sintonizzazione di una stazione .............. 9 Bluetooth radio FM/MW/LW ............................... 27
Memorizzazione manuale La modalità Bluetooth ............................ 17 Sezione dedicate al lettore
di una stazione ......................................... 9 Collegamento del cellulare e del USB MP3[WMA] ................................... 27
Salvataggio automatico delle stazioni ... 10 sistema audio del veicolo ....................... 17 Sezione dedicate al lettore
Riproduzione di una Connessione di un cellulare .................. 17 MP3[WMA]/CD ................................... 27
stazione preimpostata ............................ 10 Come effettuare una chiamata Sezione Bluetooth .................................. 27
all’ultimo numero .................................... 18
Radio con RDS Come ricevere una chiamata ................ 18
Restrizione delle stazioni ai Regolazione del volume della voce ...... 18
programmi regionali ............................... 11 Disattivazione della voce ....................... 18
L’uso delle funzioni PTY ........................ 12 Come terminare una chiamata .............. 19
Selezione di frequenze alternative ........ 13 Come trasferire una chiamata ............... 19
Ricezione delle programma sul traffico . 13 Riproduzione della musica da un
Ricezione delle informazioni dispositivo audio ..................................... 19
sul traffico ................................................ 13 Impostazione della modalità Bluetooth . 20
1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauzioni
▶ Informazioni sulla sicurezza
AVVERTENZA: Questo dispositivo è stato sottoposto ai test e trovato conforme
PER RIDURRE IL RISCHIO DI INCENDIO O DI ai limiti previsti per i dispositivi laser di Classe 1, conformemente
FOLGORAZIONE, NON ESPORRE IL DISPOSITIVO ALLA alla Parte 15 delle norme FCC.
PIOGGIA O ALL’UMIDITA’. Questi limiti sono previsti per garantire una protezione
PER RIDURRE IL RISCHIO DI INCENDIO O DI ragionevole contro interferenze nocive quando il dispositivo è
FOLGORAZIONE, E FASTIDIOSE INTERFERENZE, USARE installato in una zona residenziale.
SOLO GLI ACCESSORI A CORREDO. Questo dispositivo genera, utilizza e può emettere le onde
elettromagnetiche della stessa frequenza delle onde radio e se
ATTENZIONE: non è installato ed utilizzato conformemente alle istruzioni, può
causare interferenze nocive alla comunicazione radio.
QUESTO PRODOTTO E' UN DISPOSITIVO LASER DI PRIMA
Comunque, non ci sono garanzie che tali interferenze non si
CLASSE. L’USO DEI COMANDI, REGOLAZIONI O verifichino in un’installazione particolare.
ESECUZIONE DELLE PROCEDURE OLTRE QUELLI
Italiano
Se il dispositivo dovesse causare interferenze nocive alla

INDICATI NEL PRESENTE MANUALE POSSONO CAUSARE
ricezione dei segnali radio, il che si può constatare spegnendo il
ESPOSIZIONE PERICOLOSA ALLE RADIAZIONI. dispositivo e riaccendendolo, per ottenere assistenza si
NON APRIRE I COPERCHI DELL’INVOLUCRO E NON consiglia di consultare il venditore o un tecnico radio esperto.
EFFETTUARE ALCUNE RIPARAZIONI DA SOLI.
AFFIDARE LE RIPARAZIONI SOLO AL PERSONALE
QUALIFICATO.
Parte 15 delle normative FCC

Avviso FCC:
Eventuali cambiamenti o modifiche non autorizzati possono
invalidare il diritto dell'utente di adoperare il dispositivo.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauzioni
▶ Informazioni sulla sicurezza ▶ Precauzioni di sicurezza
Mentre si guida ◆ Ildispositivo può essere alimentato solo dalla corrente costante a
Tenere il volume abbastanza basso per essere consapevoli del 14 V con massa negativa. Non usare fonti d'alimentazione non
traffico e della situazione sulla strada. idonee.
Quando si lava il veicolo
Non esporre il dispositivo, incluso gli altoparlanti ed i CD, all’acqua o
all’umidità eccessiva. Ciò potrebbe causare un cortocircuito, un
incendio o altri danni.
Quando il veicolo è parcheggiato
Non parcheggiare il veicolo in un posto esposto alla luce solare
diretta per non surriscaldare eccessivamente l’interno dell'abitacolo.
Prima di accendere il dispositivo aspettare che l'interno dell'abitacolo
◆ DNon usare benzina, diluenti, benzene e solventi organici per
si raffreddi.
pulire il dispositivo
Alimentazione del dispositivo
Il dispositivo è alimentato da una batteria con massa negativa, a No!
Italiano
corrente costante di 14 V.
Lettore dei dischi
Non inserire nel lettore monete o altri corpi estranei.
Tenere cacciaviti e altri oggetti metallici lontano dal lettore e dal
disco stesso.
Centri di assistenza autorizzati
Il dispositivo contiene componenti precisi. Non tentare di
disassemblarlo né di effettuare regolazioni delle parti. Per ottenere ◆ Non esercitare forza mentre si premono i tasti. Premendoli con
assistenza tecnica fare riferimento all’elenco dei centri di servizio
delicatezza si evita di danneggiare il dispositivo.
autorizzati allegato al dispositivo.
Installazione
Installare il dispositivo in posizione orizzontale con la parte frontale
rivolta verso l’alto, tenendo presente che l’inclinazione non debba
superare 30°.
No!
Nota: Dopo aver staccato il connettore dell’alimentazione o la batteria, la
memoria delle preimpostazioni viene cancellata e vengono ripristinate le
impostazioni predefinite di fabbrica.
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Posizionamento dei controlli
▶ Vista anteriore
1. Finestra del display
2. Tasto BANDA/AS [BAND/AS]
Serve per selezionare la funzione radio o una banda
(premere: FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....),
oppure per memorizzare automaticamente le stazioni
(premere e tenere premuto)
3. Tasto SCANSIONE/INFO [SCAN/INF]
Serve per la scansione automatica delle stazioni, entrare in
modalità della ricerca dei file (premere) oppure per scorrere le
voci visualizzate sul display premere e tenere premuto).
4. Tasto RDS
Serve per cercare un particolare tipo di trasmissione
oppure di una stazione che trasmette informazioni sul
traffico (premere) oppure per accedere al menù RDS
(Radio Data System).
Italiano
5. Tasto IMPOSTA [SET]

Permette di accedere alla modalità delle impostazioni (stile
EQ, tono e Bluetooth).
6. Tasto SINTONIZZA
- Durante la ricezione del segnale radio 9. Vassoio per dischi tenere premuto), regolare il volume oppure
Permette di cercare una stazione manualmente (premere) Inserire un disco (con l'etichetta rivolta verso selezionare la voce che si desidera impostare/
oppure automaticamente (premere e tenere premuto). l'alto) per avviare la riproduzione. cercare (girare la manopola).
- Durante la riproduzione CD/USB
Serve per saltare un brano (premere), effettuare la ricerca dei 10. Tasto CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio 13. Tasti Numerici [da 1 a 6 D+]
file, passando in alto/in basso oppure per far avanzare Selezionare la riproduzione audio da CD, USB, - Durante la ricezione del segnale radio
velocemente/riavvolgere un brano premere e tenere premuto). AUX o Bluetooth. Serve per ricevere il segnale dalle stazioni
memorizzate (premere) e per memorizzare le
7. Tasto CHIAMATA [ ] 11. Tasto ESPELLI [ ] (disco) stazioni (premere e tenere premuto).
Serve per ricevere chiamate in arrivo (premere) o per connettere Serve per espellere i dischi. - Durante la riproduzione CD/USB
un dispositivo Bluetooth (premere e tenere premuto). 12. Tasto ALIMENTAZIONE [ ]/MUTO 2 RPT : Riproduzione ripetuta
8. Tasto FINE [ ] [MUTE] con la manopola del VOLUME 3 INT : Introduzione della riproduzione
Serve per terminare una chiamata (premere) oppure per Serve per accendere il dispositivo, abilitare/ 4 RDM : Riproduzione casuale
interrompere la connessione Bluetooth (premere e tenere disabilitare l'audio della radio o interrompere/ 5 D- : Serve per passare alla cartella interiore
premuto) riprendere la riproduzione in modalità CD/USB 6 D+ : Serve per passare alla cartella superiore
4 (premere), spegnere l’alimentazione (premere e
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Finestra del display
[Funzioni della radio] [Funzione CD/MP3/WMA]
1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00 : 01
4 5 5
1. Numero del canale preimpostato 6. Indicatore del disco
Italiano
2. Indicatore RDS 7. Indicatore dei media
- L’indicatore TP si accende dopo aver sintonizzato la stazione TP L’indicatore CD si accende dopo aver caricato un audio CD.
(Informazioni sul traffico). L’indicatore MP3 si accende dopo aver caricato un file MP3.
- L’indicatore TA si accende, quando la funzione TA (modalità L’indicatore WMA si accende dopo aver caricato un file WMA.
d’attesa delle informazioni sul traffico) è attiva. 8. Numero della cartella attuale
- L’indicatore REG si accende, quando è sintonizzata la stazione 9. Numero del file (brano) attuale
REG (REGionale).
- L’indicatore AF si accende, quando la funzione AF (ricerca delle 10. Indicatore USB
frequenze alternative) è attiva. 11. Indicatore della modalità di selezione della cartella
3. Indicatore STEREO 12. Indicatori della modalità di riproduzione
RPT (Ripeti), INT (Intro), RDM (Casuale)
4. Indicatore della banda 13. Indicatore della funzione Bluetooth
5. Area della visualizzazione multifunzione 14. Durata di riproduzione
15. Indicatore EQ (Equalizzatore)
POP, ROCK, COUNTRY, VOICE (VOCE), JAZZ, CLASSIC
(CLASSICA), EQ OFF
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Vista posteriore
Italiano
1. Presa dell’antenna
Serve per collegare il cavo dell'antenna FM.
2. Porta d’ingresso AUX
Serve per collegare un connettore AUX di un dispositivo audio.
3. Porta USB
Serve per collegare un connettore USB per supportare la funzione del concentratore USB.
4. Connettore I/O (ingresso/uscita, 18 pin)
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
Per iniziare
▶ Accensione/spegnimento del dispositivo ▶ Regolazione diretta del volume
1 Girare la chiave d’accensione del veicolo in 1 Girare la manopola del VOLUME per alzare o
posizione ACC o ON. abbassare il volume.
Sul display verrà visualizzato il livello del volume
2 Premere il tasto ALIMENTAZIONE [ ] per (modalità audio: da 00 a 45 / Modalità di chiamata: da
06 a 32).
accendere il dispositivo.
● Quando la sorgente è pronta, inizia la riproduzione.
● Se si spegne l’alimentazione durante la riproduzione di
un disco/USB, la riproduzione di CD/USB inizierà dal
punto in cui è stata precedentemente fermata.
● Se l’alimentazione viene spenta quando si ascolta la
radio, verrà selezionata la stessa stazione radio.
3 Premere e tenere premuto il tasto ALIMENTAZ-
Italiano
IONE [ ] per spegnere il dispositivo. ▶ Disabilitazione veloce dell’audio
● Se si spegne l’alimentazione durante la riproduzione di
un disco, dopo averla riaccesa la riproduzione del disco
ripartirà dal punto in cui è stata precedentemente
1 Premere il tasto MUTO [MUTE] per disattivare il
fermata. suono o interromperà la riproduzione.
Sul display lampeggerà la voce “MUTE” o “PAUSE”.
In modalità CD/USB, la riproduzione verrà interrotta e
l’audio verrà disattivato.
Per ripristinare l’audio o riprendere la riproduzione di
Per accendere l’alimentazione direttamente CD/USB premere il tasto MUTO [MUTE] o girare la
Inserendo un disco, collegando un dispositivo USB o premendo il tasto manopola del VOLUME.
BANDA [BAND] o CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio (mentre il disco è inserito o
è collegato un dispositivo audio USB/AUX/BT), è possibile accendere
l’alimentazione e avviare la riproduzione.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
Per iniziare
▶ Selezione dello stile dell’equalizzatore 2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare il
menù TONE (TONO), dopodichè premere il tasto
E’possibile selezionare uno dei 6 stili dell’equalizz atore oppure disattivarlo. ALIMENTAZIONE [ ].
1 Premere il tasto IMPOSTA [SET] per entrare in
modalità delle impostazioni. 3 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare la
Sul display compariranno le seguenti voci: “EQ”, voce del menù del tono che si desidera regolare,
“TONE” (TONO) e “BT”. dopodichè premere il tasto ALIMENTAZIONE
[ ].
2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare il ● Ogni volta che si gira la manopola VOLUME è possibile
menù EQ, dopodichè premere il tasto selezionare le seguenti voci relative ai toni.
ALIMENTAZIONE [ ]. BASS ↔ MIDDLE ↔ TREBLE ↔ BALANCE ↔
3 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare lo 4 Girare la manopola VOLUME per regolare il
stile EQ, dopodichè premere il tasto livello o il bilanciamento di ciascuna delle voci,
Italiano
ALIMENTAZIONE [ ]. dopodichè premere il tasto ALIMENTAZIONE

● Ogni volta che si gira la manopola VOLUME è [ ].
possibile selezionare uno dei seguenti stili ● BASS (BASSI): Serve per regolare il livello dei bassi
dell’equalizzatore. (da (-7 fino a +7).
EQ OFF ↔ POP ↔ ROCK ↔ COUNTRY ↔ VOICE ● MIDDLE (MEDI): Serve per regolare il livello dei toni
↔ JAZZ ↔ CLASSIC ↔ EQ OFF ↔ .... medi (da (-7 fino a +7).
● TREBLE (ACUTI): Serve per regolare il livello dei toni
acuti (da (-7 fino a +7).
▶ Impostazione dell’audio ● BALANCE (BILANCIAMENTO): Serve per regolare il
bilanciamento del suono fra l’altoparlante destro e
E’ possibile regolare ciascun livello dei bassi, dei toni medi e acuti, del quello sinistro (da SINISTRO 15 fino a DESTRO 15).
bilanciament o e del fader. ● FADER: Serve per regolare l’intensità del suono fra
l’altopparlante destro e quello sinistro (da SINISTRO 15
1 Premere il tasto IMPOSTA [SET] per entrare in fino a DESTRO 15).
modalità delle impostazioni. ● PREVIOUS (PRECEDENTE): Permettere di tornare al
Sul display compariranno le seguenti voci: “EQ”, menù TONO
“TONE” (TONO) e “BT”.
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
Nota
▶ Sintonizzazione di una stazione Durante la ricezione delle stazioni stereofoniche l’indicatore “ST” è acceso.
● Accensione Precauzione
della radio
Sintonizzando le stazioni mentre si guida conviene usare il tasto numerico
1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto BANDA/AS corrispondente alla preimpostazione per prevenire incidenti.
[BAND/AS] per selezionare la banda.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
▶ Memorizzazione manuale di una stazione
● Sintonizzazione manuale di una stazione
Per ciascuna delle bande (FM1, FM2, MW e LW) è possibile preimpostare fino
2 Premere ripetutamente il tasto SINTONIZZA a 6 stazioni.
per sintonizzare il dispositivo alla frequenza 1 Seguire le istruzioni riportate nei punti da 1 a 4 nella sezione
desiderata. “Sintonizza zione di una stazione” per sintonizzare la
frequenza che si desidera preimpostare.
● Sintonizzazione automatica di una stazione
3 Premere il tasto SINTONIZZA e ~ 2 Premere i tasti Numerico [da 1 a 6 D+] e tenerli
Italiano
tenerlo premuto per altri 2 secondi, dopodichè premuti per più di 2 secondi per selezionare il
rilasciarlo. numero della preimpostazione.
La frequenza verrà memorizzata col numero
Verrà avviata la ricerca. selezionato della preimpostazione e verrà emess
La sintonizzazione viene fermata automaticamente segnale acustico.
dopo aver trovato le stazioni i cui segnali possono Ripetere le stesse operazioni per preimpostare u
essere ricevuti e la stazione è ricevuta. stazione.
● Scansione veloce di una stazione Nota
Se si vuole memorizzare un’altra stazione con lo stesso numero della
4 Premere il tasto SCANSIONE/INFO preimpostazioni, la stazione precedentemente salvata verrà sostituita.
[SCAN/INF] per avviare la ricerca di una
stazione.
Il dispositivo passerà ad una stazione, riprodurrà la
trasmissione per 5 secondi e passerà alla stazione
successiva.
Quando il dispositivo raggiungerà la stazione
desiderata premere il tasto SCANSIONE [SCAN/INF]
per terminare la scansione.
9
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Salvataggio automatico delle stazioni ▶ Riproduzione di una stazione preimpostata
◆ Il dispositivo seleziona le stazioni con segnali più forti nell’ambito della
banda selezionata e li memorizza nell’ordine che corrisponde alle loro 1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto BANDA/AS
frequenze. [BAND/AS] per selezionare la banda.
◆ Nell’ambito della banda corrente è possibile memorizzar e fino a 6 stazioni.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
1 Premere il tasto BANDA/AS [BAND/AS] e
tenerlo premuto di 2 secondi. ~ 2 Premere il tasto Numerico [da 1 a 6 D+] che si
Sul display verrà visualizzata la voce “AST Scanning”. vuole assengnare alla stazione memorizzata.
Il dispositivo memorizza le stazioni nell’ordine che
corrispon loro frequenze, assegnando ad esse i tasti
numerici.
Nota
◆ Se a causa del segnale scarso possono essere ricevute solo poche stazioni,
Italiano
certi tasti numerici mantengono le impostazioni precedenti.

◆ Quando sul display compare un numero, il dispositivo inizia la ricezione delle
stazioni con segnale forte da quella attualmente visualizzata.
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio con RDS
◆ Informazioni generali sul RDS ▶ Restrizione delle stazioni ai programmi regionali
RDS (Radio Data System) è un servizio di trasmissione che comprende
sempre più stazioni FM. Permette alle stazioni FM di trasmettere segnali ◆ Quando si usa l’opzione AF, l’impostazio ne funzione regionale limita la
supplementari oltre a quelli regolari, relativi alle trasmissioni. Per esempio, le selezione delle stazioni a quelle che trasmettono i programmi regionali.
stazioni inviano i loro nomi e le informazioni sul tipo di programma che
trasmettono, per esempio sport, musica ecc. 1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto RDS e tenerlo
Dopo aver sintonizzato una stazione FM che offre il servizio RDS si accende premuto per selezionare la voce “REG ON” o
l’indicatore RDS e viene visualizzata la frequenza della stazione (e il nome “REG OFF”.
della stazione, se trasmesso). ◆ Se la funzione non viene usata entro circa 5 secondi, il
Non tutte le stazioni FM dispongono del servizio RDS e non tutte le stazioni display torna automaticamente alla visualizzazione
RDS forniscono gli stessi servizi. In caso di dubbi contattare gli enti che standard.
trasmettono le stazioni radio locali per ottenere informazioni dettagliate circa i
servizi RDS nella zona. 2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per attivare
Il presente dispositivo usa il seguente servizio RDS. l’opzione “REG ON”, dopodichè premere il tasto
PS (nome del programma) / PTY (tipo di programma) / TP (programma ALIMENTAZIONE [ ].
dedicato al traffico) / TA (informazioni sul traffico) / AF (lista delle frequenze
alternative) / RT (testo via radio)
◆ Per disattivare l’impostazione regionale selezionare la
voce “REG OFF”.
Italiano
In questo modo è possibile localizzare il nome o il tipo del programma
attualmente trasmesso. Nota
◆ I programmi regionali e le reti regionali possono essere organizzati in
◆ RDS (Radio Data System) contiene informazioni non udibili che aiutano modo diverso a seconda del paese (ovvero possono cambiare a seconda
a cercare stazioni radio. dell'orario, dello stato o dell'area in cui vengono trasmessi).
- Il servizio RDS può non essere fornito da tutte le stazioni. ◆ Il numero della preimpostazione può sparire dal display se il
- Le funzioni RDS, quali AF e TA, sono attive solo quando la radio è sintonizzatore passa ad una stazione regionale diversa da quella
sintonizzata su una stazione RDS. precedentemente impostata.
◆ L’impostazione regionale può essere attivata o disattivata
indipendentemente per ciascuna banda FM.
◆ Le informazioni PTY e la frequenza della stazione attuale compaiono sul
display per 3 secondi.
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio con RDS
circa due secondi, dopodichè il sintonizzatore torna alla stazione originale.
▶ Verwenden von PTY-Funktionen
E’ possibile sintonizzare il dispositivo su una stazione, usando le
informazioni PTY (tipo di programma).
● Ricerca
▶ Selezione di frequenze alternative
di una stazione RDS usando le informazio ni PTY
Quando il sintonizzator e non riceve un segnale abbastanza forte, il
1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto RDS e tenerlo dispositivo cerca automatica mente una stazione diversa nella stessa rete.
premuto per selezionare la modalità di ricerca
delle informazioni PTY. 1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto RDS e tenerlo
premuto per selezionare la voce “AF ON” o
Sul display compare il messaggio “PTY None” o “PTY”.
◆ Se la funzione non viene adoperata entro 10 secondi, il display
“AF OFF”.
torna automaticamente alla visualizzazione standard. ◆ Se la funzione non viene adoperata entro 5 secondi, il
display torna automaticamente alla visualizzazione
2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare un standard.
tipo di trasmissione, come riportato nella figura 2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare
sottostante, dopodichè premere il tasto l’opzione “AF ON”, dopodichè premere il tasto
Italiano
LIMENTAZIONE [ ]; ALIMENTAZIONE [ ] .
PTY NONE ↔ NEWS ↔ AFFAIRS ↔ INFO ↔ SPORT↔ ◆ Se la funzione non viene adoperata entro 5 secondi, il
EDUCATE ↔ DRAMA ↔ CULTURE ↔ SCIENCE ↔ display torna automaticamente alla visualizzazione
VARIED ↔ POP M ↔ ROCK M ↔ EASY M ↔ LIGHT M ↔ standard.
CLASSICS ↔ OTHER M ↔ WEATHER ↔ FINACE ↔ ◆ Per disattivare la funzione delle frequenze alternative
CHILDREN ↔ SOCIAL ↔ RELIGION ↔ PHONE IN ↔ selezionare la voce “AF OFF”.
TRAVEL ↔ LEISURE ↔ JAZZ ↔ COUNTRY ↔ NATION M Nota
◆ Quando la funzione AF è attiva, durante la scansione vengono
3 Premere il tasto RDS per avviare la ricerca. sintonizzate solo le stazioni RDS o le stazioni preimpostate.
◆ Quando si richiama una stazione preimpostata il sintonizzatore può
Il dispositivo cerca una stazione che trasmette questo
tipo di programma. Una volta trovata la stazione viene aggiornarla con una nuova frequenza dalla lista delle stazioni AF. Se i
visualizzato il nome del programma. dati RDS della stazione ricevuta differiscono da quelli della stazione
◆ Per annullare la ricerca premere un’altra volta il tasto RDS. precedentemente memorizzata, sul display non compare alcun numero
della preimpostazione.
Nota
◆ Il programma di certe stazioni può differire da quello indicato dalle ◆ Durante la ricerca della frequenza effettuata dalla funzione AF l’audio
informazioni PTY trasmesse. può essere temporaneamente interrotto da un'altra trasmissione.

◆ Se nessuna stazione trasmette il tipo di programma che si cercava, sul ◆ La funzione AF può essere attivata o disattivata indipendentemente per
display viene visualizzato il messaggio “Not found” (Non trovato) per ciascuna banda FM.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio with RDS
▶ Ricezione delle Programma sul traffico 1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto RDS e tenerlo
premuto per selezionare la modalità TA.
● Ricerca di una stazione TP (Programma dedicato al traffico) Sul display compare il messaggio “TA ON” o “TA OFF”.
1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto RDS e tenerlo 2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare
premuto per selezionare la modalità TP SEEK l’opzione “TA ON”, dopodichè premere il tasto
(RICERCA PT). ALIMENTAZIONE [ ].
Sul display compare il messaggio “TP ON” o “TP OFF”. La modalità d’attesa della funzione TA verrà attivata.
Quando viene ricevuto un messaggio sul traffico, il dispositivo passa
2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare automaticamente alla stazione che trasmette le informazioni sul traffico.
l’opzione “TP ON”, dopodichè premere il tasto ◆ Quando il messaggio sul traffico finisce, il dispositivo torna
ALIMENTAZIONE [ ]. automaticamente alla funzione precedente. (La funzione audio del Bluetooth
La modalità d’attesa della funzione TP verrà attivata. non può essere ripristinata. Ritentare a stabilire una connessione Bluetooth)
◆ Per disattivare la funzione selezionare la voce “TA OFF” con la manopola
◆ Per disattivare la funzione, selezionare la voce “TP OFF”, girando la
manopola VOLUME. VOLUME.
3 Premere il tasto RDS per avviare la ricerca. ▶ Cambiame nto delle voci visualizzate/funzione di scorrimento
Italiano
Il dispositivo cercherà una stazione che trasmette
informazioni sul traffico. 1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto INF e tenerlo
◆ Quando il programma sul traffico finisce, il dispositivo torna premuto per selezionare la voce visualizzata sul
automaticamente alla funzione precedente. (La funzione audio del Bluetooth display o attivare/disattivare la funzione di
non può essere ripristinata. Riprovare ad effettuare la connessione
Bluetooth) scorrimento come segue;
◆ Per annullare la ricerca premere un’altra volta il tasto RDS. ● Testo via radio: Permette alla stazione RDS di inviare messaggi di
testo che compaiono sul display.
● Nome PTY (Tipo di programma): Identifica il tipo di programma RDS.
▶ Ricezione delle informazioni sul traffico
● SCROLL ON/OFF (SCORRIMENTO ON/OFF): Attiva/disattiva la
L’opzione TA (modalità d’attesa delle informazioni sul traffico) permette funzione di scorrimento delle voci visualizzate.
di ricevere automaticamente le informazioni sul traffico indipendentemente
dalla sorgente che si sta ascoltando. L’opzione TA può essere attivata sia ● In caso di attivazion e/disattiva zione della funzione di SCORRIMENTO
per una stazione TP (una stazione che trasmette le informazioni sul
traffico) o una stazione TP appartenente ad un'altra rete (una stazione che 2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per attivare o
trasmette le informazioni, creando dei riferimenti incrociati con delle disattivare la funzione, dopodichè premere il tasto
stazioni TP). ALIMENTAZIONE [ ] .
● Attivazione/Disattivazio ne della funzione TA in modalità d’attesa
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lettore MP3[WMA]/CD
▶ Prima di riprodurre un disco ▶ Caricamento del disco e l’avvio della riproduzione
◆ Il dispositivo supporta la riproduzione dei dischi CD-DA e MP3/WMA. 1 Inserire un disco nel portadischi
◆ Il dispositivo non può riprodurre i seguenti tipi di file; con l'etichetta rivolta verso l'alto.
- I file MP3 codificati in formato MP3i e MP3 PRO. ● Una volta riconosciuto il tipo dei dati
- I file MP3 codificati in un formato non appropriato. masterizzati nel disco caricato, la
- I file MP3 codificati in formato Layer 1/2. riproduzione partirà automaticamente.
- I file WMA codificati senza perdita di informazioni, in formato ● Ci può volere un po' di tempo prima
professionale e vocale. che la riproduzione venga avviata.
-I file WMA che non supportano la modalità Windows Media Audio. ● Tutti i brani verranno riprodotti fino a quando non si
- I file WMA protetti dalla copiatura attraverso DRM. cambia la sorgente o si tolga il disco.
- I file che contengono i dati come WAVE, ATRAC3, ecc.
Nota: Non inserire alcun disco, quando l’indicatore è acceso, perché ciò indica
Nota: Dischi supportati che il disco è già stato caricato.
◆ CD-DA: CD-R/CD-RW ◆ Quando il disco è nell’unità
Premere il tasto CD/USB/AUX/BT audio per selezionare il CD; in seguito
Precauzione comincerà la riproduzione.
Italiano
◆ Il lettore non supporta i CD da 3” (8 cm) CD, quindi non inserirli nel

dispositivo. ▶ Controllo della riproduzione
◆ Non usare dischi da forma irregolare.
◆ Non usare dischi con un sigillo o un’etichetta.
◆ Per evitare di danneggiare il pannello frontale non spingerlo né posare
1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto SINTONIZZA
su esso oggetti estranei mentre è aperto. per passare al brano successivo o precedente.
◆ Non inserire le dita o le mani nel pannello frontale.
◆ Nei dischi MP3 o WMA è possibile saltare brani salvati nella
◆ Non inserire corpi estranei nel portadischi. stessa cartella.
Nota 2 Premere e tenere premuto il tasto SINTON-
◆Una volta caricato un disco, l’alimentazione si accenderà IZZA per far avanzare velocemente o
automaticamente. Un disco che contiene sia i dati CD-DA che riavvolgere il brano e rilasciarlo per riprendere
MP3/WMA può non essere riprodotto correttamente. (Per esempio può la riproduzione.
essere riprodotto senza audio.) ◆ La funzione di ricerca è operativa, ma la velocità di ricerca non
è costante.
◆ Durante l’avanzamento veloce o il riavvolgimento si possono
sentire solo suoni intermittenti.
3 Premere ripetutamente il tasto 5 D- o 6 D+ per
passare alla cartella precedente o quella
14 successive (solo nei dischi MP3 o WMA).
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lettore MP3[WMA]/CD
▶ Selezione delle modalità di riproduzione ▶ Ricerca dei brani
1 Premere ripetutamente il tasto 2 RPT per 1 Premere il tasto SCANSIONE/INFO [SCAN/INF]
selezionare la modalità di riproduzione ripetuta. per entrare in modalità di ricerca.
● RPT: Il brano attuale viene riprodotto ripetutamente. Sul display verrà visualizzato per 5 secondi il numero
del brano o il suo titolo.
● FOLDER [ ] RPT (solo per MP3/WMA): Tutti i brani
appartenenti alla cartella corrente vengono riprodotti
ripetutamente. 2 Girare e tenere la manopola VOLUME per
● Off: Annulla la riproduzione ripetuta. visualizzare il numero o il titolo del brano
desiderato, in seguito premere il tasto
2 Premere ripetutamente il tasto 3 INT per ALIMENTAZIONE [ ] per avviare la
selezionare la modalità di riproduzione dell’intro. riproduzione del brano selezionato.
● FOLDER [ ] INT (solo per MP3/WMA): Serve per
riprodurre l’intro del brano nella cartella corrente.
● INT: Serve per riprodurre l’intro del brano sul disco.
▶ Visualizzazione delle informazioni sulla cartella
Italiano
● Off: Annulla la riproduzione dell’intro.
3 Premere ripetutamente il tasto 4 RDM per 1 Premere e tenere premuto il tasto SCANSIONE/
selezionare la modalità di riproduzione casuale. INFO [SCAN/INF] per visualizzare per 5 secondi
● FOLDER [ ] RDM (solo per MP3/WMA): I brani le informazioni sulla cartella corrente.
appartenenti alla cartella corrente vengono riprodotti in
ordine casuale. ● Abilitazione/Disabilitazione della funzione di scorrimento
● RDM: I brani masterizzati sul disco vengono riprodotti in
ordine casuale.
● Off: Annulla la riproduzione casuale.
2 Mentre vengono visualizzate le informazioni sulla
cartella, premere il tasto SCANSIONE/INFO
[SCAN/INF] per visualizzare la voce SCROLL
ON o OFF SCORRIMENTO ON/OFF).
3 RGirare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare

Nota: Cambiamento della sorgente l’opzione “OFF” o “ON”, dopodichè premere il
Cambiamento della sorgente comporta l’interruzione della riproduzione (senza tasto ALIMENTAZIONE [ ].
l’espulsione del disco). La volta successive che si seleziona “CD” come sorgente, la
riproduzione riparte dal punto in cui è stata precedentemente interrotta.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lettore MP3[WMA]/CD
▶ Arresto della riproduzione e l’espulsione del disco ▶ Informazioni su MP3/WMA
Il dispositivo supporta la riproduzione dei file MP3/WMA con
1 Premere il tasto l’estensione <.mp3> o <.wma> (senza distinzione fra le maiuscole e le
ESPELLI [ ] e minuscole).
togliere il disco. Il dispositivo può visualizzare i nomi degli album, gli artisti ed i tag
Nota: Espulsione di un disco (Versione 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, o 2.4) per i file MP3 e WMA.
Se il disco espulso non verrà tolto entro 10 secondi, verrà Il dispositivo può visualizzare solo i caratteri a byte singolo. Non è
automaticamente reinserito nel lettore per proteggerlo dalla polvere. possibile visualizzare correttamente nessun altro tipo di caratteri.
(Questa volta il disco non verrà riprodotto.) Il dispositivo supporta la riproduzione dei file MP3/WMA che
corrispondono ai seguenti requisiti;
- Velocità di trasmissione:
▶ Informazioni su CD-R/CD-RW 8 kbps ~ 320 kbps per MP3 / 64 kbps ~ 161 kbps (VBR) per WMA
- Frequenze di campionatura:
Usare solo i dischi CD-R o CD-RW finalizzati. 48 kHz, 44,1 kHz, 32 kHz (per MPEG-1 Layer 2/3)
Se un disco contiene sia i file audio CD (CD-DA) che MP3/WMA il 24 kHz, 22,05 kHz, 16 kHz (per MPEG-2 Layer 2/3)
dispositivo può riprodurre solo i file dello stesso tipo come il primo file 12 kHz, 11,025 kHz, 8 kHz (per MPEG-2.5 Layer 3)
rilevato.
Italiano
- Formato di disco: ISO/IEC 11172-3, ISO/IEC 13818-3

Il dispositivo può riprodurre i dischi di tipo multisessione, comunque le
Il massimo numero di caratteri consentito per i nomi dei file/delle cartelle
sessioni non finite verranno saltate durante la riproduzione. può variare a seconda del formato del disco (inclusi i 4 caratteri
Il dispositivo può non supportare certi dischi CD-R o CD-RW a causa dell’estensione - <.mp3> o <.wma>).
delle loro caratteristiche e proprietà o per uno dei seguenti motivi; - ISO 9660 Livello 1: Fino a 12 caratteri
- Il disco è graffiato o sporco. - ISO 9660 Livello 2: Fino a 31 caratteri
- Nella lente dentro il dispositivo si forma la condensa.
- La lente dentro l’unità è sporca. - Romeo: Fino a 128 caratteri
- Il disco CD-R/CD-RW sul quale si trovano i file è stato masterizzato - Joliet: Fino a 64 caratteri
usando il metodo “Packet Write”. - Nome lungo del file Windows: Fino a 128 caratteri
- Le condizioni della registrazione (dati mancanti ecc.) o dei media Il dispositivo supporta la riproduzione dei file masterizzati in modalità
(macchiati, graffiati, deformati ecc.) non sono idonee. VBR (velocità di trasmissione variabile). I file masterizzati in modalità
La lettura dei dischi CD-RW può richiedere più tempo perché la loro VBR dimostrano discrepanze del tempo trascorso dall’inizio della
riflettanza è inferiore rispetto ai CD regolari. riproduzione visualizzato e non permettono di visualizzarlo
Non usare i seguenti dischi CD-R o CD-RW; correttamente. Dopo aver eseguito la funzione di ricerca questa
- Dischi con etichette o sigilli protettivi attaccati alla superficie. differenza diventa significante.
- Dischi con etichette che possono essere stampate direttamente da una Il dispositivo può rilevare complessivamente 512 files appartenenti a 200
stampante a getto d’inchiostro. cartelle e 8 livelli.
Usando questi dischi a temperature elevate o umidità elevate si rischiano
Nota : Microsoft e Windows Media sono marchi o marchi registrati della
malfunzionamenti o danni al dispositivo. Microsoft Corporation negli Stati Uniti e/o altri paesi.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
- Se il telefonino non riesce a trovare il dispositivo “New Rexton” o
▶ La modalità Bluetooth “SSANGYONG”, ripetere le procedure riportate nei punti 1~2.
Per usare la modalità Bluetooth occorre eseguire la seguente procedura. 3 Se sul display del dispositivo che stabilisce la connessione
1. Collegamento compare la richiesta di *password, immettere “00xx” (4 cifre).
Collegando i dispositivi Bluetooth per la prima volta, è necessario che essi si L’unità e il dispositivo Bluetooth memorizzano a vicenda le rispettive
riconoscano a vicenda. Questa procedura viene chiamata "collegamento". La informazioni e dopo aver effettuato il collegamento l’unità è pronta
registrazione (collegamento) è richiesto solo la prima volta, in quanto questa per connettersi al dispositivo.
unità ed altri dispositivi in seguito si riconosceranno automaticamente. (A
seconda del dispositivo per ogni collegamento può rivelarsi necessaria Una volta eseguita la procedura di collegamento sul display viene
l'immissione di una password.) visualizzato il messaggio "BT CONNECT" e "Il nome/modello del
dispositivo Bluetooth" o "BT MOBILE" con l’indicatore .
2. Connessione
Talvolta il collegamento può avvenire automaticamente. Per usare il dispositivo - Certi dispositivi Bluetooth richiedono di accettare il collegamento BT o la
dopo la procedura di collegamento occorre stabilire la connessione. connessione. In tal caso occorre confermare la richiesta, selezionando “Yes”
(Si) o “OK”.
3. Vivavoce/Audio streaming
* A seconda del dispositivo la password può anche essere chiamata “codice”,
Dopo aver stabilito la connessione è possibile effettuare chiamate ai cellulari o
ascoltare la musica. “codice PIN”, “numero PIN” ecc.
Certi dispositivi Bluetooth possono non supportare funzioni specifiche. 4 Impostare il dispositivo Bluetooth per la connessione all'unità.
Italiano
Nota: La modalità d’attesa del collegamento non termina fino a quando
▶ Collegamento del cellulare e del sistema audio del veicolo non sarà stabilita la connessione.
Prima occorre registrare (collegare) un dispositivo Bluetooth (cellulare ecc.) e
questa unità. È possibile collegare fino a 6 dispositivi. Una volta stabilito il ▶ Connessione di un cellulare
collegamento non occorre ripetere la procedura. La distanza fra il dispositivo
Bluetooth e l’unità non può superare 3 metri. - I dispositivi vengono registrati dopo il collegamento e la connessione all'unità.
È possibile selezionare un dispositivo registrato e connetterlo.
1 Premere il tasto CHIAMATA [ ] e tenerlo - Se la procedura del collegamento è già stata effettuata, cominciare le
operazioni da questo punto.
premuto per 3 secondi. für mehr als drei
- A seconda del dispositivo la connessione può avvenire automaticamente dopo
Sekunden gedrückt. aver collegato i dispositivi.
Il dispositivo entrerà in modalità di attesa del collegamento. Sul
display verrà visualizzato il messaggio "PAIRING" 1 Connettersi all’unità usando il cellulare e premere
(COLLEGAMENTO IN CORSO) accompagnato da un segnale il tasto CHIAMATA [ ].
acustico ed in seguito lampeggerà la scritta "KEY 00xx". Sul display compare il messaggio “BT CONNECT”
2 Impostare il dispositivo Bluetooth sulla ricerca dell’unità. (CONNESSIONE BT) accompagnato dall’icona “ ” e
Sul display del dispositivo che sta per connettersi verrà visualizzata la il segnale Bluetooth viene attivato.
lista dei dispositivi rilevati. L’unità è visualizzata come “New Rexton” o
“SSANGYONG” sul dispositivo che sta stabilendo la connessione. Nota : Per visualizzare le informazioni sul dispositivo
Confermare la connessione, premendo “YES” (SI) o “OK” sul telefonino. Bluetooth connesso premere il tasto SCAN/INF.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Come effettuare una chiamata all’ultimo numero ▶ Come terminare una chiamata
È possibile effettuare chiamate dal cellulare connesso, usando questo
dispositivo.
1 Premere il tasto FINE [ ].
Nota:
1 Premere il tasto CHIAMATA [ ] e tenerlo ◆ Anche se la chiamata viene terminate, la connessione
premuto per secondi per entrare in modalità della Bluetooth rimane attiva.
ricomposizione dell'ultimo numero.
Sul display compare il messaggio “REDIAL” e il
telefonino ricompone l’ultimo numero.
▶ Regolazione del volume della voce

▶ Come ricevere una chiamata 1 Girare la manopola del VOLUME per alzare o
Quando c’è una chiamata in arrivo, la suoneria è trasmessa dagli altoparlanti del abbassare il volume.
Italiano
veicolo e sullo schermo compare il numero di telefono del chiamante. Auf dem Display wird das Bluetooth-Lautstärkeniveau
angezeigt. (BT VOL 6 bis 32)
1 Quando c’è una chiamata in arrivo, sul display
compare il messaggio “CALL IN” (CHIAMATA IN
ARRIVO) accompagnato dal numero di telefono
e dalla suoneria; premere il tasto CHIAMATA
[ ] per rispondere alla chiamata. ▶ Disattivazione della voce
Sul display compare il messaggio “BT TEL”e inizia la
chiamata.
Il microfono integrato nel sistema audio trasmetterà la
1 Premere il tasto MUTO [MUTE] sul pannello di
Vostra voce. controllo audio del volante per disattivare il
microfono.
Per rifiutare una chiamata in arrivo premere il Sul display verrà visualizzato il messaggio “MUTE”.
tasto FINE [ ]. Premere il tasto MUTO [MUTE] sul pannello di controllo
Sul display verrà visualizzato il messaggio “CALL audio del volante per annullare la disattivazione del
REJECT” (RIFIUTA CHIAMATA) e il dispositivo tornerà microfono.
alla funzione precedente. Il messaggio “MIC MUTE” sparirà.
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Come trasferire una chiamata ▶ Riproduzione della musica da un dispositivo audio
Per attivare/di sattivare il dispositiv o appropriat o (questa unità/telef onino) È possibile ascoltare la musica salvata nel telefonino, usando questo dispositivo,
effettuare le seguenti verifiche. se il telefonino supporta la tecnologia A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) di Bluetooth.
1 Durante una chiamata effettuata attraverso il 1 Attivare la modalità Bluetooth sul telefonino o sul dispositivo
vivavoce Bluetooth premere il tasto CHIAMATA
[ ]. La funzione di vivavoce verrà disattivata, audio.
Dopo aver stabilito la connessio ne compare il messaggi o “Stereo
invece il microfono e l’altoparlante del telefonino Headset” (Cuffia stereo).
verranno attivati.
Sul display compare il messaggio “PRIVATE” e inizierà 2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per abbassare il
la chiamata dal cellulare. volume del dispositivo.
Durante una chiamata effettuata dal telefonino

premere il tasto CHIAMATA [ ]. La funzione
del vivavoce Bluetooth è attivata. 3 Premere ripetutamente il tasto CD/USB/AUX/BT
Italiano
Sul display compare il messaggio “BT TEL” e inizia la
Audio fino a quando non verrà visualizzato il
messaggio “BT AUDIO”.
chiamata dal vivavoce.
Per ulteriori informazioni sull’uso del telefonino fare
riferimento al manuale dell’utente dello stesso.
4 Avviare la riproduzione dal dispositivo audio.
E’possibile cambiare il volume e saltare brani, usando i tasti
Nota: posizionat i sul dispositiv o. (Fare riferiment o alla sezione ‘Lettore
◆ A seconda del telefonino la connessione vivavoce può essere interrotta MP3[WMA]/CD’)
quando si tenta di trasferire la chiamata.
5 Girare la manopola VOLUME per regolare il
volume del dispositivo.
6 Per arrestare la riproduzione della musica

premere il asto FINE [ ] e tenerlo premuto o
premere il tasto CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio o
BANDA [BAND] per selezionare un'altra
funzione.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
● In caso di selezione del COLLEGAMENTO
▶ Impostazione della modalità Bluetooth
◆ E’possibile controllare le modalità Bluetooth. 5 Eseguire le operazioni da 2 fino a 4 a pagina 17
page “Collegamento del telefonino e del
1 Premere il tasto IMPOSTA [SET] per entrare in sistema audio del veicolo” per completare il
modalità delle impostazioni. collegamento.
Sul display compariranno le seguenti voci: “EQ”,
● In caso di selezione della CANCELLAZIONE
“TONE” e “BT”.
2 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare il 5 5 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare
menù BT, dopodichè premere il tasto “YES” o “NO”, dopodichè premere il tasto
ALIMENTAZIONE [ ]. ALIMENTAZIONE [ ].
YES (SI): Questa opzione serve per cancellare il
3 Girare la manopola VOLUME per selezionare dispositivo Bluetooth selezionato dall’elenco.
l’impostazione Bluetooth desiderata, dopodichè NO: Annulla la cancellazione.
premere il tasto ALIMENTAZIONE [ ].
Italiano
● Ogni volta che si gira la manopola VOLUME è possibile

selezionare le seguenti impostazioni Bluetooth.
4 Girare la manopola TUNE per selezionare

l’impostazione Bluetooth desiderata, dopodichè
premere il tasto ALIMENTAZIONE [ ].
● PAIR: Serve per stabilire il collegamento (Password:
00xx).
● SELECT: Serve per selezionare uno dei 5 dispositivi
Bluetooth da connettere.
● PRIORITY: Serve per impostare la priorità delle
connessioni.
● DELETE: Serve per cancellare un dispositivo
Bluetooth dall’elenco.
● PREVIOUS (PRECEDENTE): Permettere di tornare
al menù BT.
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lettore USB/AUX
▶ Riproduzione da un dispositivo USB ▶ Precauzioni relative al dispositivo USB
Collegando un dispositivo USB tramite un cavo USB alla presa ● Quando usate il dispositivo USB esterno, ● Il tempo richiesto per riconoscere un
d’ingresso USB sul dispositivo è possibile riprodurre la musica assicuratevi di tenere il dispositivo dispositivo USB esterno varia a seconda del
dagli altoparlanti del veicolo, controllando il dispositivo USB disconnesso e di connetterlo solo qualche tipo, della capacità o dei formati dei file
dall’unità. momento dopo aver acceso il motore del salvati sul dispositivo USB. Tali differenze
1 Premere e tenere premuto il tasto veicolo. Il dispositivo USB può subire danni
se è già connesso, quando si accende il
non implicano un malfunzionamento.
Aspettate per il periodo di tempo richiesto
ALIMENTAZIONE [ ] per motore. (Il dispositivo USB non è un per riconoscere il dispositivo.
spegnere il dispositivo. componente elettronico del veicolo.) ● Il dispositivo supporta le unità USB usate per
● Certi dispositivi USB possono non funzionare riprodurre i file musicali.
2 Collegare il dispositivo USB correttamente per motivi d'incompatibilità.
● Il dispositivo riconosce solo i dispositivi USB
● Non usate l’USB I/F per caricare le batterie o
gli accessori USB che generano calore. Ciò
con dei MP3/WMA file da
formattati usando il sistema FAT 12/16/32. può comportare un deterioramento delle
riprodurre alla presa d’ingresso Quando formattate il dispositivo USB prestazioni o danneggiare il dispositivo.
USB tramite un cavo USB. esterno, esso può non riconoscere ● Nel caso dei dispositivi USB di elevata capacità
Sul display compare la voce correttamente una selezione dei byte/dei può succedere che le unità logiche verranno
Italiano
‘USB’ e la riproduzione inizia settori diversa da 512 Byte o 2,048 Byte. divise in partizioni per la convenienza
automaticamente dopo aver ● Prima di usare il dispositivo accertatevi che dell'utente. In questo caso al livello superiore
riconosciuto i dati salvati sul l'unità esterna sia supportata. dell'unità sarà possibile solo la riproduzione
dispositivo USB. ● Evitate il contatto del connettore USB con le della musica salvata sul dispositivo USB
parti del corpo o con dei corpi estranei. Quando usate le unità divise in partizioni,
salvate i brani che volete riprodurre sul
● Se il dispositivo USB viene
3 Quando il dispositivo USB è già connesso/disconnesso ripetutamente in un
dispositivo solo al livello superiore dell’unità
logica. Inoltre certi dispositivi USB sono
collegato, premere ripetutamente il breve periodo di tempo, ciò può danneggiarlo. configurati con un’unità separata usata per
tasto CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio fino a ● Durante la disconnessione del dispositivo installare delle applicazioni e può non essere
quando non verrà visualizzata la USB di tanto in tanto si può riscontrare un possibile riprodurre dei brani musicali usando
voce “USB”. suono anomalo. tali unità per i motivi di cui sopra.
La riproduzione USB inizia ● Se il dispositivo USB esterno viene ● Il dispositivo può non supportare il
automaticamente. disconnesso bruscamente, mentre funziona, funzionamento normale, quando si usano i
può essere danneggiato o possono verificarsi formati tipo HDD, CF o scheda di memoria SD.
E’possibile cambiare il volume, la modalità di riproduzione dei malfunzionamenti. Assicuratevi di ● Il dispositivo non supporta i file protetti da
e la selezione dei brani, usando i tasti sul pannello di disconnettere il dispositivo USB solo dopo aver DRM (Digital Rights Management).
controllo. (Fare riferimento alla sezione ‘Lettore MP3 spento l’alimentazione del dispositivo audio o
[WMA]/CD’) quando esso funziona in un’altra modalità.
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lettore USB/AUX
▶ Riproduzione della musica dai dispositivi audio ausiliari
Collegando un opzionale dispositivo audio portatile alla presa d’ingresso AUX
(stereo mini jack) sul dispositivo e selezionando la sorgente è possible
riprodurre la musica dagli altoparlanti del veicolo. Il volume può essere regolato
per compensare eventuali differenze fra l'unità ed il dispositivo audio portatile.
1 Abbassare il volume dell‘unità.
2 Spegnere il dispositivo audio esterno.

Collegar e l’uscita audio del dispositivo
audio esterno alla presa d’ingress o AUX sul
dispositivo.
Italiano
Prima di avviare la riproduzione

accertarsi di aver regolato il volume
di ciascun dispositivo audio
collegato.
3 Iniziare la riproduzione della musica dal
dispositivo audio esterno con un livello del
volume moderato.
4 Premere ripetutamente il tasto CD/USB/AUX/ BT

Audio fino a quando non verrà visualizzato il
messaggio “AUX IN”.
Se il dispositivo audio esterno è già collegato, saltare le
operazioni 1 ~ 3.
5 Impostare il solito livello del volume sull'unità.

22
GETtheMANUALS.org
Controlli audio sul volante
▶ L’uso dei controlli audio sul volante
Se il veicolo è dotato di questa funzione, certi controlli audio possono essere regolati direttamente sul volante.
Essi includono le seguenti opzioni:
▲ VOL ▼ MODE (MODALITA’)

Premere: Serve per alzare o abbassare il ● Premere: Serve per selezionare le funzioni (CD →
volume. USB → AUX → BT Audio → RADIO...)
● Premere e tenere premuto: Serve per selezionare
▲ SEEK (CERCA) ▼ la banda (FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW...)
Durante la ricezione di una stazione
● Premere: Serve per passare alla
MUTE (MUTO)
successiva/precedente stazione preimpostata. Durante una chiamata
● Premere e tenere premuto: Serve per passare Premere: Serve per attivare/disattivare il microfono.
alla stazione radio successiva/precedente. La funzione di DISATTIVAZIONE DELL'AUDIO.
(La radio cerca solo stazioni con segnale forte Durante una trasmissione radio o in modalità CD/
disponibili nella banda selezionata) USB/BT
Italiano
Premere: Serve per attivare/disattivare l’audio della
Durante la riproduzione di CD/USB/BT radio o interrompere la riproduzione di CD/USB.
● Premere: Serve per passare al brano
successivo/precedente. Phone (Telefono) [ ]
● Premere e tenere premuto: Serve per In modalità d’attesa
effettuare avanzamento veloce/riavvolgimento Premere e tenere premuto: Serve per effettuare
dei brani. (Solo durante la riproduzione di CD/ una chiamata all’ultimo numero.
USB) Durante una chiamata in arrivo
● Premere: Serve per ricevere una chiamata in
PWR (ALIMENTAZIONE) [ ] arrivo.
Premere: Serve per accendere/spegnere il ● Premere e tenere premuto: Serve per rifiutare una
sistema o per passare in modalità della
chiamata in arrivo.
chiamata privata e ricevere una chiamata in
arrivo. Durante una chiamata
● Premere: Serve per passare alla modalità privata o
alla chiamata in modalità Bluetooth.
● Premere e tenere premuto: Serve per terminare
una chiamata.
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Risoluzione dei problemi
▶ Problemi comuni
Sintomi Possibili cause Soluzioni
- Non viene riprodotto alcun - La funzione MUTE (DISATTIVAZIONE - Disattivare la funzione MUTE (DISATTIVAZIONE DELL’AUDIO).
suono. DELL’AUDIO) è attiva.
- Si verificano interferenze - Vicino all’unità ai suoi cavi elettrici si trova - Tenere i dispositivi che generano le onde elettromagnetiche, per
un dispositivo che genera le onde esempio i cellulari, lontano dall’unità e dai suoi cavi. Se non è
elettromagnetiche, per esempio un possibile eliminare le interferenze a causa del cablaggio del
cellulare. dispositivo, rivolgersi al rivenditore.
- Dagli altoparlanti non arriva - L’impostazione del bilanciamento/fader - Regolare il bilanciamento/fader.
alcun suono. non è corretta.
▶ Radio
Italiano

- La ricezione del segnale è - Le condizioni della trasmissione non sono - Ricevere e riprodurre i segnali della stazione in modalità
scarsa o si verificano soddisfacenti. analoga.
interferenze.
- La ricerca impiega troppo - Il numero delle stazioni ricevute è inferiore - Spostarsi in un’area dove è possibile ricevere il massimo numero
tempo. a 6. delle stazioni e provare a preimpostarle.
- Il numero delle stazioni - Il contatto del cavo della batteria non è - Accertarsi che il cavo della batteria sia collegato saldamente e
preimpostate automaticame- sufficiente o il cavo della batteria non è riprovare a preimpostare le stazioni.
nte è inferiore a 6. sempre collegato all’alimentazione.
- Le stazioni preimpostate non - La ricerca digitale può impiegare un po’ di - Passare alla modalità di ricerca automatica e riprendere la
possono essere tempo. ricerca.
memorizzate.
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Lettore MP3[WMA]/CD
- La riproduzione non parte o il - Il disco è inserito al contrario. - Inserire correttamente il disco.
disco viene espulso. - Il disco è difettoso o si è attaccato ad esso - Rimuovere i corpi estranei o usare un disco senza difetti.
un corpo estraneo.
- Il disco contiene i dati salvati in un formato - Fare riferimento alla descrizione della modalità MP3/WMA che
non supportato. riporta i dati audio supportati eccetto CD-DA (ovvero audio CD).
- L'unità riproduce un brano ROM da un CD - Saltare il brano ROM.
memorizzato in formato misto.
- I dischi CD-R/RW che - La possibilità di riprodurre certi dischi CD- - Masterizzare i dischi CD-R/RW in una combinazione diversa,
possono essere riprodotti su R/RW può dipendere dalla combinazione usando un altro software per la masterizzazione e un altro
altri dispositivi non vengono dei media, dal software usato per masterizzatore, facendo riferimento alla descrizione della
riprodotti dall’unità. masterizzarli e dal masterizzatore, anche modalità MP3/WMA.
se questi dischi CD-R/RW possono essere
Italiano
riprodotti su altri dispositivi, quali un PC.
- Il suono è intermittente o si - Il disco è difettoso o si è attaccato ad esso - Rimuovere i corpi estranei o usare un disco senza difetti. Per
verificano interferenze un corpo estraneo. quanto riguarda i dischi MP3/WMA, fare riferimento alla
descrizione della modalità MP3/WMA.
- Il suono è intermittente a - L’unità non è fissata saldamente. - Fissare l'unità al cruscotto, usando la fascetta del supporto
causa delle vibrazioni - L’inclinazione dell'unità in direzione fronte- posteriore ecc.
retro supera i 30°. - Inclinare l’unità di 30° o meno.
- Non è possibile espellere il - Si è staccata l'etichetta del CD inserito nel - Rivolgersi al rivenditore per la riparazione del dispositivo.
disco. lettore.
25
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Lettore USB MP3[WMA
- Il dispositivo USB non - La memoria USB è danneggiata. - Usare la memoria USB dopo la formattazione in formato FAT
funziona. 12/16/32.
- La memoria USB è stata contaminata. - Rimuovere i corpi estranei dalla superficie di contatto della
memoria USB e dal connettore multimediale.
- Si usa un CONCENTRATORE USB - Connettere la memoria USB direttamente al connettore
acquistato separatamente. multimediale del veicolo.
- Si usa una prolunga per USB. - Connettete la memoria USB direttamente al connettore
multimediale del veicolo.
- Si usa una memoria USB diversa dal tipo - Usare una memoria USB standard.
“Metal Cover”.
Italiano
- Si usa una memoria di tipo HDD, CF o SD. - Usare una memoria USB standard.
- Non ci sono dei file musicali da riprodurre. - Sono supportati solo i formati MP3 e WMA. Usare solo i file
musicali salvati nei formati supportati.
26
GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifiche
▶ Sezione generale ▶ Sezione dedicata a MP3[WMA]/CD
Alimentazione CC 14,4 V con massa negativa Frequenze di campionatura 8 x sovracampionatura
Impedenza dell’altoparlante 4 Ohm Convertitore DA Sistema 4 DAC
Potenza max. 45 W x 4 canali Tipo di lettura Astigma a 3 raggi
Peso 880 g (netto) Sorgente d’illuminazione Laser a semiconduttori
Dimensioni (L x A x P)) 178 x 52 x 155 mm Lunghezza d’onda 780 nm
Risposta di frequenza 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz (±3 dB)
Rapporto segnale-rumore ≥50 dB
▶ Sezione dedicate alla radio FM/MW/LW
Distorsione armonica totale ≤1 % (1 kHz)
Gamma di frequenza FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108 MHz Wow and flutter Al di sotto dei limiti misurabili
MM 522 kHz ~ 1,620 kHz Separazione dei canali ≥35 dB
LW 144 kHz ~ 290 kHz
Italiano
Sensibilità FM ≤18 dBu
MM ≤35 dBu ▶ Sezione Bluetooth
LW ≤35 dBu
FM ≥45 dB Specifiche di base Bluetooth V2.0 (compatibile con Bluetooth
Rapporto segnale-rumore MM ≥40 dB V1,2)
LW ≥40 dB Sensibilità - 60 dBm
Separazione stereo FM ≥20 dB Memoria interna 16 Mb di memoria flash
Funzione applicata Supporto dell’audio trasmesso attraverso
bande più larghe
▶ Sezione dedicata USB MP3[WMA] Profilo avanzato della distribuzione audio
Supporto del profilo vivavoce/Chiamata privata
Risposta di frequenza 20 Hz ~ 20 KHz
Distorsione armonica totale 0.1 % (a 1 KHz)
Gamma dinamica 85 dB (a 1 KHz)
Rapporto segnale-rumore 60 dB (a 1 KHz) Le specifiche e il progetto sono soggetti a modifiche senza preavviso,
Separazione dei canali 54 dB (a 1 KHz) finalizzare a migliorare il progetto.
27
GETtheMANUALS.org
● Lea las instrucciones detenidamente antes de utilizar este producto
Español
y guarde el manual como material de referencia.

● Per apportare miglioramenti al dispositivo, il progetto e le specifiche
dello stesso possono subire modifiche senza preavviso.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Índice
Precauciones Recibir Anuncios de Tránsito ............ 13 Escuchar música desde un
Información de seguridad .................... 2 Cambiar elementos de pantalla/función aparato de audio ............................... 19
Cómo considerar las precauciones de desplazamiento en pantalla ......... 13 Ajustar el modo de Bluetooth ............ 20
con fines de seguridad ......................... 3 Reproductor de MP3[WMA]/CD Reproductor USB/AUX
Ubicación de los controles Antes de reproducir el disco .............. 14 Reproducir un dispositivo USB ......... 21
Vista frontal ........................................... 4 Cargar un disco y comenzar Precauciones para manejar el USB .. 21
Ventana visor ........................................ 5 a reproducir ........................................ 14
Escuchar un equipo de
Vista posterior ....................................... 6 Controlar la reproducción .................. 14 sonido auxiliar ..................................... 22
Seleccionar los modos de reproducción .. 15
Cómo empezar Ricerca dei brani ................................ 15 Controles de sonido en el volante
Encender/apagar el aparato ................ 7 Mostrando la información Utilizar los controles de
Ajustar el volumen directamente ......... 7 de la carpeta ....................................... 15 sonido en el volante ........................... 23
Silenciar el sonido rápidamente .......... 7 Detener la reproducción y
Seleccionar el estilo de ecualizador .... 8 expulsar un disco ............................... 16 Localización y solución de problemas
Ajustar el sonido ................................... 8 Acerca de CD-R/CD-RW ................... 16 Comunes ............................................ 24
Radio Acerca de MP3/WMA ........................ 16 Radio ................................................... 24
Sintonizar una estación ........................ 9 Bluetooth Reproductor MP3[WMA] CD ............. 25
Almacenar una estación en forma manual .... 9 Funcionamiento del Bluetooth ........... 17 Reproductor USB MP3[WMA] .......... 26
Español
Almacenar estaciones Emparejar su teléfono con el
automáticamente ............................... 10
Especificaciones
sistema de sonido del coche ............. 17
Sección generall ................................. 27
Escuchar una estación predeterminada 10 Conectar un teléfono móvil ................ 17
Capítulo de radio FM/MW/LW ........... 27
Radio con RDS Hacer una llamada a través
de la última llamada ........................... 18 Capítulo de USB MP3[WMA] ............ 27
Limitar las estaciones a Capítulo de MP3[WMA]/CD .............. 27
programación regional ....................... 11 Recibir una llamada ........................... 18
Finalizar una llamada ......................... 18 Sección Bluetooth .............................. 27
Cómo utilizar las funciones
PTY (tipo de programa) ..................... 12 Ajustar el volumen de la llamada ...... 18
Seleccionar frecuencias alternativas 12 Silenciar el sonido de la llamada ....... 18
Recibir Programa de Tránsito ........... 13 Transferir una llamada ....................... 19
1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauciones
▶ Información de seguridad
ADVERTENCIA: Este equipo ha sido comprobado y se determinó que cumple
PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O DE con los límites establecidos para un producto de láser Clase 1,
DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA, NO EXPONGA EL PRODUCTO A conforme a la Parte 15 de las reglamentaciones FCC. Dichos
LA LLUVIA O LA HUMEDAD. límites se establecieron para proporcionar una protección
razonable contra interferencias perjudiciales en una instalación
PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O DESCARGA residencial. El equipo genera, utiliza y puede irradiar energía de
ELÉCTRICA Y DE INTERFERENCIAS MOLESTAS, UTILICE radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y utiliza conforme a las
ÚNICAMENTE LOS COMPONENTES QUE SE INCLUYEN instrucciones, es posible que provoque interferencias
CON EL PRODUCTO. perjudiciales para las comunicaciones de radio. No obstante, no
existe garantía alguna de que no se produzca interferencia en
PRECAUCIÓN: alguna instalación en particular. Si el equipo provoca
interferencia perjudicial para la recepción radiofónica, que se
ÉSTE ES UN PRODUCTO DE LÁSER CLASE 1.EL USO DE puede determinar encendiendo y apagando el equipo, se
CONTROLES O AJUSTES O LA APLICACIÓN DE recomienda al usuario consultar con el representante de ventas
PROCEDIMIENTOS QUE NO SEAN LOS QUE AQUÍ SE o con algún técnico de radio con experiencia para recibir
ESPECIFICAN PUEDE PRODUCIR EXPOSICIÓN A asistencia.
RADIACIÓN PELIGROSA.
Español
NO ABRA LAS TAPAS Y NO REPARE EL APARATO SOLO.

PÓNGASE EN CONTACTO CON PERSONAL DE SERVICIO
CALIFICADO PARA LAS REPARACIONES.
Parte 15 de las reglamentaciones FCC

Advertencia de FCC:
Todo cambio o modificación que se realice en el equipo
anulará la capacidad del usuario para operar este aparato.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauciones
▶ Información de seguridad ▶ Cómo considerar las precauciones con fines de seguridad
Mientras se conduce ◆ Este aparato está diseñado para usar únicamente en vehículos
Mantenga el nivel de volumen lo suficientemente bajo como para con una fuente de alimentación de 14 V CC con conexión a masa
estar atento a las condiciones de la carretera y el tránsito. negativa. No utilice con una fuente de suministro que no sea la
convencional.
Mientras se lava el coche
No exponga el producto, incluidos los altavoces y los CD, al agua
o la humedad excesiva. Esta condición podría causar
cortocircuitos, incendio u otros daños.
Mientras está estacionado
Si se aparca el vehículo en contacto directo con la luz solar, es
posible que haya temperaturas elevadas dentro del mismo.
Deje enfriar el interior del vehículo antes de encender el aparato.
◆ Noutilice gasolina, diluyente, benceno, disolvente orgánico y
Uso de una fuente de suministro correcta demás para limpiar el aparato.
El producto está diseñado para funcionar con un sistema de
batería de 14 V CC con conexión a masa negativa. ! No!
Mecanismo de disco
No introduzca monedas u otros objetos pequeños.
Mantenga destornilladores y otros objetos metálicos lejos de la
mecanismo reproductor de discos y de los discos.
Español
Dirigirse a centros de servicio autorizados
El producto está fabricado con piezas de precisión. No intente
desensamblar ni ajustar ninguna de las piezas. Consulte la lista
de Centros de servicio que incluye con este producto para
conocer detalles sobre la asistencia de servicio. ◆ No pulse los botones de función ejerciendo fuerza.
Evitará deterioro siempre que los pulse con delicadeza.
Para la instalación
El producto se debe instalar en posición horizontal con el extremo
delantero hacia arriba, en un ángulo conveniente, si bien no
mayor a los 30°.
!
Aviso: No
La memoria predeterminada se borra para volver a los ajustes originales de !
fábrica cuando se desconecta el conector de alimentación o la batería.
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Vista frontal
1. Finestra del display
2. Botón BAND/AS
Selecciona la función o la banda de radiofrecuencia
(pulse: FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....), para
almacenar las estaciones automáticamente (pulsar y
sostener)
3. Botón SCAN/INF
Busque en cada estación automáticamente, entre el modo
de búsqueda de archivo (pulsar); conmute entre los
elementos de visualización (pulsar y sostener).
4. Botón RDS
Busque un tipo de programa o una estación de programa
de tránsito determinado (pulsar), entre al menú de RDS
(Sistema de Datos de Radio) (pulsar y sostener)..
5. Botón SET
Entra al modo de ajuste (estilo de EQ [ecualizador], Tone
[tono] y Bluetooth).
6. Botón SINTONIZACIÓN
- Durante la recepción de radio
Español
Encuentre una estación manualmente (pulsar); busque Inserte el disco (etiqueta hacia arriba), comenzará la sostener); ajuste el volumen o seleccione el
una estación automáticamente (pulsar y sostener). reproducción elemento correspondiente a ajuste/búsqueda
- Durante la reproducción de CD/USB (girar).
Ignore una pista (pulsar; búsqueda de archivo arriba y 10. Botón de Sonido de CD/USB/AUX /BT Audio
abajo, avance rápido y retroceso en una pista (pulsar y Seleccione la reproducción de sonido por CD, USB, 13. Botones de Números [1 à 6 D+]
sostener).. AUX o Bluetooth. - Durante la recepción de radio
Reciba estaciones de radio almacenadas (pulsar);
7. Botón CALL [ ] 11. Botón EJECT [ ]
almacene la estación (pulsar y mantener).
Reciba una llamada entrante (pulsar); conectar el Expulsa el disco.
- Durante la reproducción de CD/USB
dispositivo Bluetooth (pulsar y sostener). 12. Botón de ENCENDIDO [ ] y SILENCIO 2 RPT : Repetir la reproducción
8. Botón END [ ] [MUTE] con cuadrante de VOLUMEN 3 INT : Introducir la reproducción
Finalizar una llamada (pulsar); liberar la conexión Encienda el aparato, active el silencio de radio o 4 RDM : Reproducción aleatoria
Bluetooth (pulsar y sostener). active o desactive la pausa de reproducción de 5 D- : Carpeta descendente
9. Ranura del disco CD/USB (pulsar), apague el aparato (pulsar y 6 D+ : Carpeta ascendente
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Ventana visor
[Función Radio] [Función CD/MP3/WMA]
1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00 : 01
4 5 5
1. Número de canales predeterminados 6. Indicador de Disco
2. Indicador RDS 7. Indicador de Medios
- TP se ilumina cuando se sintoniza una estación de TP (programa CD se ilumina cuando se carga un CD de sonido.
de tránsito). MP3 se ilumina cuando se carga un fichero MP3.
- TA se ilumina cuando se activa la función TA (Anuncio de tránsito WMA se ilumina cuando se carga un fichero WMA.
en espera).
8. Número de carpeta actual (directorio)
Español
- REG se ilumina cuando se sintoniza una estación REG
(REGional). 9. Número de fichero actual (pista)
- AF se ilumina cuando se activa la función AF (búsqueda de
frecuencias alternativas). 10. Indicador USB
11. Indicador de modo de selección de carpeta
3. Indicador Stereo
12. Indicadores de modo de reproducción
4. Indicador de Band RPT (Repetir), INT (Introducir), RDM (Reproducción aleatoria)
5. Zona de visualización multifunción 13. Indicador de función Bluetooth
14. Tiempo de reproducción
15. Indicador de EQ (ecualizador)
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Vista posterior
Español
1. Conector de antena
Para enchufar el cable de la antena de FM.
2. Puerto de entrada AUX
Para conectar un conector AUX para un aparato de sonido.
3. Puerto USB
Para conectar un conector USB correspondiente a la función del equipo USB (Bus de serie universal)
4. Conector de E/S (18 espigas)
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
Cómo empezar
▶ Encender/apagar el aparato ▶ Ajustar el volumen directamente
1 Gire la llave de encendido de su vehículo a la 1 Girare la manopola del VOLUMEN per alzare o
posición ACC u ON . abbassare il volume.
Sul display verrà visualizzato il livello del volume
2 Pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ] para encender (modalità audio: da 00 a 45 / Modalità di chiamata: da
06 a 32).
el aparato.
● Si la fuente está lista, también empieza la
reproducción.
● Si apaga la alimentación mientras escucha un disco/
USB, la reproducción del dispositivo CD/USB
empezará donde ésta se haya detenido anteriormente.
● Si apagase la alimentación mientras escucha la radio,
la misma estación de radio quedará seleccionada. ▶ Silenciar el sonido rápidamente
3 Pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ] para apagar el 1 Pulse el botón SILENCIO [MUTE] para
aparato. establecer silencio o pausa.
● Si apaga la alimentación mientras escucha un disco, la
"MUTE" o "PAUSE" parpadean en el visor.
reproducción del disco empezará desde donde ésta se
detuvo anteriormente, la próxima vez que encienda la Durante el modo CD/USB, ponga en pausa la
reproducción silenciando el sonido.
Español
alimentación.
Para restaurar el sonido o restablecer la reproducción
Para encender directamente de CD/USB, pulse el botón SILENCIO [MUTE] o gire el
◆ Al introducir un disco, conectar el dispositivo USB o pulsar el botón de cuadrante de VOLUMEN.
Audio BAND o CD/USB/AUX/BT (mientras el disco está dentro o el
dispositivo de sonido USB/AUX/BT está conectado), se puede también
encender la alimentación y entonces empezar la reproducción en el
aparato.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
Cómo empezar
▶ Seleccionar el estilo de ecualizador 2 Gire el cuadrante de sintonización VOLUMEN
para seleccionar el menú de tonos TONE, luego
Se puede seleccionar uno de los 6 estilos de EQ o desactivar el ecualizador pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ].
en EQ OFF.
1 Pulse el botón SET para entrar al modo de 3 Gire el cuadrante de sintonización VOLUMEN
ajuste. para seleccionar el elemento del Control de
“EQ”, “TONE” y “BT” aparecen en la pantalla. tonos deseado, luego pulse el botón
ENCENDER [ ].
2 Gire el cuadrante de sintonización VOLUMEN ● Cada vez que gire el cuadrante de sintonización
para seleccionar el menú de ecualizador EQ, VOLUMEN, se puede seleccionar uno de los
luego pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ]. siguientes elementos de Control de tonos.
3 Gire el cuadrante de sintonización VOLUMEN
para seleccionar el estilo de EQ deseado, luego 4 Gire el cuadrante de sintonización VOLUMEN
pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ]. para ajustar el nivel o el balance, luego pulse el
● Cada vez que gire el cuadrante de sintonización botón ENCENDER [ ].
VOLUMEN, se puede seleccionar uno de los ● BASS: ajusta el nivel de sonidos graves (-7 a +7).
siguientes estilo de EQ. ● MIDDLE: ajusta el nivel de sonidos medios (-7 a +7).
EQ OFF ↔ POP ↔ ROCK ↔ COUNTRY ↔ VOICE
↔ JAZZ ↔ CLASSIC ↔ EQ OFF ↔ .... ● TREBLE: ajusta el nivel de sonidos agudos (-7 a +7).
Español
● BALANCE: ajusta el balanceo de sonido entre los

altavoces de derecha e izquierda (IZQUIERDA 15 a
RIGHT 15).
● FADER: ajusta la mezcla de sonidos entre los
▶ Ajustar el sonido altavoces delanteros y traseros (FRONT 15 a REAR
15).
Se puede ajustar cada nivel de Graves, Medios, Agudos, Balance y ● PREVIOUS: vuelve al menú de tonos TONE.
Mezcladora.
1 Pulse el botón SET para entrar al modo de

ajuste.
“EQ”, “TONE” y “BT” aparecen en la pantalla.
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
Precaución
▶ Sintonizar una estación Cuando se sintonicen estaciones durante la conducción, utilice el botón de
números predeterminados para prevenir accidentes por distracción.
● Encienda la radio
1 Pulse el botón BAND repetidas veces para
seleccionar la banda.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
▶ Almacenar una estación en forma manual
Pueden predeterminar 6 estaciones por banda (FM1, FM2, MW y LW).
● Sintonizar una estación manualmente
2 Pulse los botones SINTONIZACIÓN
1 Siga los pasos del 1 al 4 en "Sintonizar una estación" para
sintonizar la frecuencia que desea predeterminar.
repetidamente para sintonizar a la frecuencia
deseada.
~ 2 Pulse y mantenga
[
los botones de números
]
● Sintonizar
Números 1 à 6 D+ más de dos segundos para
una estación automáticamente
seleccionar el número predeterminado.
3 Pulse los botones SINTONIZACIÓN La frecuencia se almacena en el número
más de 2 segundos y luego suelte. predeterminado que se seleccione y pitido.
De ese modo se inicia la búsqueda. Si desea predeterminar otra estación, repita estos
pasos.
La sintonización automática se detiene en las
estaciones, cuyas señales se pueden recibir y que se
reciba en la estación. Nota
Español
Si intenta almacenar otra estación en el mismo número predeterminado, le
● Para explorar rápidamente una estación estación almacenada previamente será reemplazada.
4 Pulse el botón SCAN/INF para iniciar la

sintonización de una estación.
La unidad irá a una estación, se reproducirá unos 5
segundos y luego pasará a la estación siguiente.
Cuando la unidad se sintoniza en la estación deseada,
pulse el botón SCAN/INF para detener la exploración.
Nota
Durante la recepción de las estaciones en estéreo, el indicador “ST” está
encendido.
9
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Almacenar estaciones automáticamente ▶ Escuchar una estación predeterminada
◆ El aparato selecciona las estaciones que posean las señales más potentes
dentro de la banda seleccionada y las almacena en el orden de su frecuencia. 1 Pulse el botón BAND/AS repetidas veces para
◆ Se pueden almacenar hasta 6 estaciones en la banda actual. seleccionar la banda.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
1 Pulse y mantenga el botón BAND/AS durante
más de dos segundos. ~ 2 Pulse el botón de números Números [1 à 6 D+]
“AST Scanning” aparece en el visor. en el que se almacena la estación deseada.
La unidad almacena estaciones en el orden de sus
frecuencias en los botones de números.
Notas
◆ Si sólo se pueden recibir algunas estaciones porque las señales son débiles,
algunos botones de números retienen sus ajustes anteriores.
◆ Cuando en el visor se indica un número, la unidad arranca con las estaciones
potentes a partir de la que se visualiza en el momento.
Español
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio con RDS
◆ Acerca de RDS
RDS (Sistema de datos de radio) es un servicio de radiodifusión que ahora
▶ Limitar las estaciones a programación regional
proporciona un creciente número de estaciones de FM. Permite que las Cuando se utiliza AF, la función regional limita la selección de estaciones
estaciones de FM envíen señales adicionales junto con sus señales de que transmiten programas regionales.
programación habituales. Por ejemplo, las estaciones envían sus nombres de
estación e información acerca del tipo de programa que transmiten, como
deportes o música, etc.
1 Pulse y sostenga el botón RDS repetidamente
Cuando se sintoniza una estación de FM que proporciona servicio RDS, el
para seleccionar “REG ON” o “REG OFF”.
indicador RDS se ilumina y se muestra la frecuencia de estación (y luego el ◆ Si no opera funciones antes de transcurridos 5 segundos,
nombre de estación si éste se envía). la pantalla vuelve automáticamente a la visualización
habitual.
No todas las estaciones de FM proporcionan servicio RDS, ni todas las
estaciones de RDS proporciona los mismos servicios. Si tiene alguna duda,
verifique con las estaciones de radio locales para obtener detalles sobre los
servicios RDS en su área de residencia. 2 Gire el dial de VOLUMEN para activar “REG ON”
Esta máquina sólo puede utilizar el servicio RDS siguiente. y luego pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ].
PS (nombre de Servicio de programa) / PTY (Tipo de programa) / TP ◆ Para desactivar la función regional, seleccione “REG
(Programa de tránsito) / TA (Anuncio de tránsito) / AF (Lista de frecuencias OFF”.
alternativas) / RT (Texto de radio)
De este modo se puede localizar el nombre del tipo específico de programa
que se está transmitiendo. Notas
◆ Los programas regionales y las redes regionales se organizan en forma
◆ RDS (Sistema de datos de radio) contiene información que no se puede diferente según el país (es decir, pueden cambiar de acuerdo con la hora,
oír y que ayuda a la búsqueda de las estaciones de radio. el estado o la zona de radiodifusión).
Español
- El servicio RDS puede que no todas las estaciones lo proporcionen. ◆ El número predeterminado puede que desaparezca de la pantalla si el
- Las funciones de RDS como AF y TA están sólo activas cuando se sintonizador sintoniza con una estación regional que difiera de la
sintoniza la radio en una estación con RDS. estación establecida originalmente.
◆ La función regional puede activar o desactivar en forma independiente
de cada banda de FM.
◆ La información de PTY y la frecuencia de la estación actual aparecen en
pantalla durante unos tres segundos.
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio con RDS
▶ Cómo utilizar las funciones PTY (tipo de programa) ▶ Seleccionar frecuencias alternativas
Puede sintonizar una estación utilizando la información de PTY (Tipo de Cuando el sintonizador no tiene una buena recepción, el aparato busca
programa). automáticamente una estación diferente en la misma red.
● Buscar una estación de RDS mediante información de PTY
1 Pulse y sostenga el botón RDS repetidamente
1 Pulse y sostenga el botón RDS repetidas veces para seleccionar “AF ON” o “AF OFF”.
para seleccionar el modo de búsqueda de PTY. ◆ Si no opera alguna función antes de transcurridos unos 5
“PTY None” o “PTY” aparece en la pantalla. segundos, la pantalla vuelve automáticamente a la pantalla
habitual.
◆ Si no opera alguna función antes de transcurridos unos 10
segundos, la pantalla vuelve automáticamente a la pantalla
habitual. 2 Gire el dial de VOLUMEN para seleccionar “AF
ON” y luego pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ].
2 Gire el dial VOLUMEN para seleccionar el tipo de ◆ Si no opera alguna función antes de transcurridos unos 5
programa como se muestra abajo, luego pulse el segundos, la pantalla vuelve automáticamente a la
botón ENCENDER [ ]; pantalla habitual.
◆ Para desactivar la función de frecuencias alternativas,
PTY NONE ↔ NEWS ↔ AFFAIRS ↔ INFO ↔ SPORT↔
EDUCATE ↔ DRAMA ↔ CULTURE ↔ SCIENCE ↔ seleccione “AF OFF”.
VARIED ↔ POP M ↔ ROCK M ↔ EASY M ↔ LIGHT M ↔
CLASSICS ↔ OTHER M ↔ WEATHER ↔ FINACE ↔
Nota
Español
◆ Sólo se sintonizan las estaciones con RDS durante la búsqueda o una

estación predeterminada cuando AF está activo.
3 Pulse el botón RDS para empezar la búsqueda. ◆ Cuando se llama una estación predeterminada, el sintonizador puede
actualizar la estación predeterminada con una frecuencia nueva de la
La unidad busca una estación que transmita ese tipo de lista de frecuencias alternativas AF de la estación. En la pantalla no
programa. Cuando se encuentra la estación, aparece aparece un número predeterminado si los datos de RDS correspondientes
en pantalla el nombre del servicio de programa. a la estación son distintos de los datos de la estación almacenada
◆ Para cancelar la búsqueda, vuelva a pulsar el botón RDS.
originalmente.
Notas ◆ El sonido puede interrumpirte temporalmente por otro programa durante
◆ El programa de algunas estaciones pueden diferir de las indicadas por el una búsqueda de frecuencia en AF.
PTY transmitido. ◆ AF se puede sintonizar o desactivar en forma independiente de cada
◆ Si no se transmite el tipo de programa que se busca, en pantalla aparece
"Not found" (No se encuentra) durante unos dos segundos y luego el banda de FM.
sintonizador vuelve a la estación original.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio with RDS
Sul display compare il messaggio “TA ON” o “TA OFF”.
▶ Recibir Programa de Tránsito
● Buscar una estación de TP (Programa de tránsito) 2 Gire el dial de VOLUMEN para seleccionar el
modo TA ON y luego pulse el botón
1 Pulse y sostenga el botón RDS repetidas ENCENDER [ ].
veces para seleccionar el modo de TP SEEK. TA en espera está activado. Si se recibe un anuncio de
Sul display compare il messaggio “TP ON” o “TP OFF”. tránsito, el aparato automáticamente cambia a la
estación de radiodifusión de anuncios de tránsito.
2 Gire el dial de VOLUMEN para seleccionar el ◆ Cuando finaliza el anuncio de tránsito, el aparato cambia automáticamente a
modo TP y luego pulse el botón ENCENDER la función anterior. No se puede restablecer la función de audio de
[ ]. Bluetooth. Reintente la conex Bluetooth)
◆ Para desactivar, seleccione “TA OFF” usando el cuadrante de sintonización
TP en espera está activado.
◆ Para desactivar, seleccione “TP OFF” usando el dial de VOLUMEN.
volumen VOLUME.
3 Pulse el botón RDS para empezar la búsqueda. ▶ Cambiar elementos de pantalla/función
El aparato busca la estación de radiodifusión del
programa de tránsito.
de desplazamiento en pantalla
◆ Cuando finaliza el anuncio de tránsito, el aparato cambia automáticamente a
la función anterior. (No se puede restablecer la función de audio de
1 Pulse y mantenga el botón INF repetidas veces
para seleccionar el elemento de pantalla o
Bluetooth. Reintente la conexión Bluetooth.) activar/desactivar la función de desplazamiento
◆ Para cancelar la búsqueda, vuelva a pulsar el botón RDS.
en pantalla según se detalla a continuación:
Español
● Texto de radio: Permite que la estación de RDS envíe mensajes de
▶ Recibir Anuncios de Tránsito texto que aparecen en la pantalla.
● Nombre de (tipo de programa) PTY : Identifica el tipo de programa
TA (Anuncio de tránsito en espera) la permite recibir anuncios de tránsito de RDS.
automáticamente, independientemente de la fuente que se esté escuchando. ● SCROLL ON/OFF : Activar/desactivar la función de desplazamiento
TA se puede activar tanto para una estación de TP (una estación que
transmite información relacionada con el tránsito) o ampliar otra estación en pantalla para visualizar la ejecución.
TP de la red (una estación que tenga información que establezca ● En caso de la activación o desactivación de SCROLL ON/OFF
referencias cruzadas con estaciones TP).
● Activar y desactivar la función en espera de TA
para conmutar a OFF u ON, luego pulse el botón
1 Pulse y sostenga el botón RDS repetidas ENCENDER [ ].
veces para seleccionar el menú TA.
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reproductor de MP3[WMA]/CD
▶ Antes de reproducir el disco ▶ Cargar un disco y comenzar a reproducir
◆
◆
Puede reproducir discos de CD-DA y MP3/WMA.
La unidad no puede reproducir los siguientes ficheros:
1 Inserte un disco en la ranura
con la etiqueta hacia arriba.
- Ficheros MP3 codificados con formato MP3i y MP3 PRO. ● La reproducción comenzará
- Ficheros MP3 codificados en un formato inapropiado. automáticamente después de
- Ficheros MP3 codificados con Layer 1/2. reconocer los datos del disco que se
- Ficheros WMA codificados con formato sin pérdidas, profesional y está cargando.
voz. ● Puede tardar unos momentos en comenzar a reproducir.
- Ficheros WMA que no se basen en Windows Media Audio. ● Todas las pistas se reproducirán hasta que cambie la fuente o expulse el
- Ficheros WMA con protección contra copia con DRM.
disco.
- Ficheros que tengan datos como WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
Nota : No inserte un disco cuando el indicador de disco está encendido, porque
Nota : Discos disponibles un disco ya ha sido cargado.
◆ CD-DA : CD-R/CD-RW ◆ Cuando el disco se encuentra en la unidad
◆ MP3/WMA : CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM Pulse el botón de sonido CD/USB/AUX/BT repetidamente para seleccionar
el CD y que empiece la reproducción.
Precaución
◆ El CD de 3 pulg. (8 cm) no está disponible para esta unidad, por lo
tanto, insértelo. ▶ Controlar la reproducción
◆ No utilice discos de formas irregulares.
◆ No utilice discos que tengan un sello o etiqueta estampado o pegada.
◆ Para prevenir daños en el panel frontal, no presione sobre el mismo o
1 Pulse los botones SINTONIZACIÓN
coloque objetos mientras está abierto.
repetidas veces para ir a la pista siguiente o a la
Español
◆ No introduzca un dedo o la mano en el panel frontal. anterior.

◆ No introduzca objetos extraños en la ranura del disco. ◆ Para un disco MP3 o WMA, se puede pasar por alto pistas
dentro de la misma carpeta.
Nota
◆La alimentación se activa automáticamente cuando se carga un disco. 2 Pulse y sostenga los botones SINTONIZACIÓ
Un disco que posea datos grabados de CD-DA y de MP3/WMA puede N para avanzar rápido o retroceder la pista y
que no se reproduzcan en forma normal. (Por ejemplo, es posible que se suéltelos para reanudar la reproducción.
reproduzca sin sonido.) ◆ La función de búsqueda funciona pero la velocidad de
búsqueda no es constante.
◆ Mientras está en avance rápido o en retroceso, únicamente
podrá oír sonidos intermitentes.
3 Pulse el botón 5 D- o 6 D+ repetidas veces para ir
a la carpeta anterior o la siguiente (únicamente
para disco en MP3 o WMA).
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Seleccionar los modos de reproducción ▶ Ricerca dei brani
1 Pulse el botón 2 RPT repetidas veces para 1 Pulse el botón SCAN/INF para entrar al Modo de
seleccionar el modo de reproducción de búsqueda.
repetición (Repeat). El número o nombre de la pista aparece en la pantalla
● FOLDER [
durante 5 segundos.
] INT (para MP3/WMA únicamente) : Reproduce
sucesivamente la introducción de la pista en la carpeta actual.
● INT : Reproduce sucesivamente la introducción de la pista en el disco. 2 Gire y mantenga el dial de volumen VOLUMEN
● Off : Cancela la reproducción de introducción. para ver el número de pista deseado o su
nombre, luego pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ]
2 Pulse el botón 3 INT repetidas veces para para empezar la reproducción de la pista
seleccionar el modo de reproducción de seleccionada.
exploración de la introducción (Intro).
● RPT : La pista actual se reproduce repetidamente.
● FOLDER [ ] RPT (para MP3/WMA únicamente): Todas las pistas
de la carpeta actual se reproducen repetidas veces. ▶ Mostrando la información de la carpeta
● Off : Cancela la reproducción de repetir la introducción.
1 Pulse y sostenga el botón SCAN/INF para
3 Pulse el botón 4 RDM repetidas veces para mostrar la información de la carpeta actual
seleccionar el modo de reproducción aleatoria durante 5 segundos.
Español
(Random).
● Activar/desactivar la función de desplazamiento en pantalla
● FOLDER [ ] RDM (para MP3/WMA únicamente) : Las pistas de la
carpeta actual se reproducen en orden aleatorio.
● RDM : Las pistas del disco se reproducen en orden aleatorio.
2 Mientras se muestra la información de la carpeta,
● Off : Cancela la reproducción aleatoria.
pulse el botón SCAN/INF para mostrar la
activación y desactivación del desplazamiento en
pantalla (SCROLL ON/OFF).
3 Gire el dial de VOLUMEN para conmutar entre

Nota : Cambiar la fuente OFF u ON, luego pulse el botón ENCENDER
Si se cambia la fuente, también se detiene la reproducción (sin expulsar el disco). La [ ].
próxima vez que se seleccione “CD” como fuente de reproducción, el disco
empieza desde donde se detuvo anteriormente.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Detener la reproducción y expulsar un disco ▶ Acerca de MP3/WMA
Esta unidad puede reproducir ficheros MP3/WMA con código de extensión
1 Pulse el botón <.mp3> o <.wma> (independientemente de si es mayúscula o minúscula).
EJECT [ ] y Esta unidad muestra los nombres de los álbumes, artistas (intérprete), e
tome el disco. Identificador (Versión 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, o 2.4) para ficheros MP3 y
Nota : Expulsar un disco WMA.
Si el disco expulsado no se toma dentro de 10 segundos, el disco Esta unidad puede mostrar solamente caracteres de un byte. Ningún otro
será insertado nuevamente de manera automática en la ranura de carga para carácter se puede visualizar correctamente.
protegerlo contra el polvo. (En esta ocasión, no se reproducirá el disco) Esta unidad puede reproducir ficheros MP3/WMA que cumplan con las
condiciones siguientes:
- Tasa en bits:
▶ Acerca de CD-R/CD-RW 8 kbps ~ 320 kbps para MP3 / 64 kbps ~ 161 kbps (VBR) para WMA
Utilice únicamente CD-R o CD-RW "finalizados". - Frecuencia de muestreo:
Esta unidad puede reproducir únicamente ficheros del mismo tipo de aquellos 48 kHz, 44,1 kHz, 32 kHz (para MPEG-1 Layer 2/3)
detectados la primera vez, siempre que un disco incluya tanto ficheros de CD 24 kHz, 22,05 kHz, 16 kHz (para MPEG-2 Layer 2/3)
(CD-DA) de audio y ficheros MP3/WMA. 12 kHz, 11,025 kHz, 8 kHz (para MPEG-2.5 Layer 3)
Esta unidad puede reproducir discos de secciones múltiples; sin embargo, las - Formato del disco: ISO/IEC 11172-3, ISO/IEC 13818-3
sesiones no cerradas se pasarán por alto durante la reproducción de los discos. El número máximo de caracteres para los nombres de fichero/carpeta
Algunos CD-R o CD-RW puede que no se reproduzcan en esta unidad, ya sea
varía entre los formatos de disco utilizados (se incluyen 4 caracteres de
por las características del disco o por las razones siguientes:
- Los discos están sucios o rayados. extensión - <.mp3> o <.wma>).
- Hay condensación de humedad en la lente interna de la unidad. - ISO 9660 Nivel 1: hasta 12 caracteres
Español
- La lente lectora dentro de la unidad está sucia. - ISO 9660 Nivel 2: hasta 31 caracteres
- CD-R/CD-RW en los que los ficheros están grabados con el método - Romeo: hasta 128 caracteres
"Packet Write" o de escritura por paquetes. - Joliet: hasta 64 caracteres
- Hay condiciones de grabación incorrectas (datos que faltan, etc.) o - Nombre largo de ficheros de Windows: hasta 128 caracteres
condiciones en los medios (manchas, rayaduras, alabeos, etc.). La unidad puede reproducir ficheros grabados en VBR (tasa de bits
Los CD-RW puede que requieran tiempo de lectura más prolongado puesto variable). Los ficheros grabados en VBR tienen discrepancia en la
que la reflactancia de los CD- RW es menor que la de los CD comunes. visualización del tiempo transcurrido de reproducción y no muestran el
No utilice los siguientes CD-R o CD-RW;
tiempo real. Después de ejecutar la función de búsqueda esta diferencia
- Discos con calcomanías, etiquetas o sellos de protección adheridos a la
superficie. se hace visible.
- Discos en los que las etiquetas se pueden imprimir directamente mediante La unidad puede reconocer un total de 512 ficheros, de 200 carpetas y de
una impresora de chorro de tinta. 8 jerarquías.
El uso de estos discos en condiciones de temperatura elevada o de alta Nota
humedad puede que provoque una funcionamiento incorrecto o deterioro de Microsoft y Windows Media son ambas marcas registradas o marcas comerciales de
la unidad. Microsoft Corporation en Estados Unidos de América o en otros países.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
- Si su telefono no encuentra“New Rexton” o “SSANGYONG”, repita los
▶ Funcionamiento del Bluetooth pasos del 1 al 2.
Para utilizar la función de Bluetooth, se necesita el procedimiento siguiente.
1. Emparejamiento
3 Si se requiere la introducción de *Contraseña (Pass key) en
el visor del dispositivo que se conecta, ingrese “00xx” (4
Cuando se conecten dispositivos con Bluetooth la primera vez se requiere
registro mutuo. Esto se conoce como "emparejamiento". Este registro dígitos).
(emparejamiento) se requiere únicamente para la primera vez puesto que Esta unidad y el dispositivo de Bluetooth memorizan recíprocamente
esta unidad y los demás dispositivos se reconocerán automáticamente la la información y, cuando se establece el emparejamiento, la unidad
vez siguiente. (Según el dispositivo, es posible que necesite introducir una está lista para la conexión al dispositivo.
contraseña para cada conexión.) "BT CONNECT" y "nombre de modelo del dispositivo de Bluetooth” o
2. Conexión “BT MOBILE” con indicador “ ” aparecen una vez finalizado el
A veces el emparejamiento permite la conexión automática. Para utilizar emparejamiento.
el dispositivo después de hacer el emparejamiento, inicie la conexión. - Algunos dispositivos de Bluetooth piden aceptar el enlace "BT link" o la
3. Conversación con manos libres y música en continuo conexión "Connect". Introduzca "Sí" o "Aceptar".
Se puede llamar a un teléfono móvil y escuchar música cuando se * La contraseña se puede llamar "código paso", "PIN", "número PIN" o
establece la conexión. "contraseña", etc., dependiendo del dispositivo.
◆ Es posible que algún dispositivo de Bluetooth no sea compatible con funciones
específicas. 4 Ponga el dispositivo de Bluetooth a buscar unidad.
Nota : El modo de emparejamiento en espera no se libera hasta que se
▶ Emparejar su teléfono con el sistema de sonido del coche realiza la conexión.
Primero, registre mutuamente ("empareje") el dispositivo de Bluetooth (teléfono
móvil, etc.) y esta unidad. Puede emparejar hasta 6 dispositivos. Una vez ▶ Conectar un teléfono móvil
establecido el emparejamiento, no hay necesidad de volver a repetir el
Español
procedimiento. Coloque el dispositivo de Bluetooth a una distancia de 3 metros - Los dispositivos se registran una vez que se emparejaron y conectaron con esta
(9 pies) de la unidad. unidad. Se puede seleccionar un dispositivo registrado y conectarlo.
- Si el emparejamiento ya se logró, inicie la operación desde aquí.
1 Pulse y mantenga el botón de llamada CALL - Según el dispositivo, la conexión puede iniciarse después del emparejamiento
[ ] durante más de tres segundos. automático.
La unidad entra en modo de espera de emparejamiento.
La palabra "PAIRING" (emparejar) aparece en el visor 1 Conecte a esta unidad utilizando el teléfono
con un pitido y luego parpadea "KEY 00xx". móvil y pulse el botón de llamada CALL [ ].
“BT CONNECT” con el icono “ ” aparece y se activa
2 Ponga el dispositivo de Bluetooth a buscar la unidad. la señal de Bluetooth.
En el visor del aparato que se conecta aparece una lista de
dispositivos detectados. Esta unidad aparece como “New Rexton” o Nota : Para mostrar la información del dispositivo de
“SSANGYONG” en el aparato conectado. Bluetooth conectado, pulse el botón SCAN/INF.
Confirme pulsando "Sí" o "Aceptar" (YES/OK) en su teléfono.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Hacer una llamada a través de la última llamada ▶ Finalizar una llamada
Puede hacer una llamada desde el teléfono móvil conectado poniendo en
funcionamiento esta unidad.
1 Pulse el botón de finalización END [ ].
1 Pulse y mantenga el botón de llamada CALL Nota :

◆ Aún cuando se termina la llamada, la conexión de Bluetooth
[ ] durante más de tres segundos para entrar
no se cancela.
el modo de marcado por la última llamada.
“REDIAL” (volver a marcar) aparece y se inicia el
nuevo marcado del teléfono.
▶ Recibir una llamada ▶ Ajustar el volumen de la llamada

Cuando reciba una llamada, el tono de llamado sale por los altavoces del
vehículo y el número de la persona que llama aparece en la pantalla. 1 Gire el cuadrante de VOLUMEN para aumentar
o disminuir el nivel de volumen de la llamada.
1 Cuando entra una llamada, “CALL IN” (llamada En el visor se verá el nivel de volumen del Bluetooth.
entrante) y “Telephone number” (número de (BT VOL 6 ~ 32)
teléfono) aparecen con un tono de llamado,
pulse el botón de llamada CALL [ ].
"BT TEL" (teléfono por Blootooth) aparece y se inicia la
Español
llamada por teléfono.

El micrófono incorporado de este sistema de audio
captará la voz. ▶ Silenciar el sonido de la llamada
Para rechazar la llamada entrante, pulse el botón 1 Pulse el botón de silencio MUTE en el control de
de finalización END [ ]. sonido del volante de dirección para activar la
“CALL REJECT” (rechazo de llamada) aparece y función de silencio del micrófono.
vuelve a la función anterior. En la pantalla aparece “MIC MUTE” (micrófono en
silencio).
Para cancelar la función de silencio de micrófono,
pulse el botón de silencio MUTE en el control de sonido
del volante de dirección. “MIC MUTE” desaparece.
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Transferir una llamada ▶ Escuchar música desde un aparato de audio
A fin de activar y desactivar el dispositivo apropiado (esta unidad/teléfono Puede escuchar música del teléfono móvil en esta unidad, si dicho teléfono es
móvil), compruebe lo siguiente. compatible con A2DP (Perfil de distribución de sonido avanzado) de la
tecnología Bluetooth.
1 Durante una llamada a través del manos de 1 Conmute a la señal Bluetooth en el teléfono móvil o el
libres de Bluetooth, pulse el botón de llamada
[ ]. aparato de audio.
La función de manos libres se desactiva y se “Stereo Headset” (cascos en estéreo) aparece cuando se establece
activan el micrófono y el altavoz del teléfono la conexión.
móvil.
“PRIVATE” (privado) aparece y se inicia el llamado por 2 Gire el cuadrante de VOLUMEN para bajar el
el teléfono móvil. nivel de volumen de la unidad.
Durante una llamada a través del teléfono móvil,

pulse el botón de llamada CALL [ ]. 3 Pulse el botón de Audio de CD/USB/AUX/BT
Se activa la función de manos libres de repetidas veces hasta que aparece “BT AUDIO”.
Bluetooth.
“BT TEL” (teléfono por Blootooth) aparece y se inicia la
llamada por manos libres.
4 Ponga en funcionamiento el aparato de audio para iniciar la
reproducción.
Para obtener más detalles sobre el funcionamiento del
teléfono móvil, consulte el manual de dicho teléfono. Se puede cambiar el volumen y pasar por alto una pista utilizando
Español
los botones de esta unidad. (Consulte el capítulo "Reproductor de
Nota : MP3[WMA]/CD")
◆ Según el teléfono móvil de que se trate, la conexión de manos libres
puede cortarse cuando se intenta hacer la transferencia de llamada. 5 Gire el cuadrante de VOLUMEN para ajustar el
nivel de volumen de la unidad.
6 Para apagar la música pulse y mantenga el

botón de finalización END [ ] o pulse el botón
CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio o BAND para
seleccionar otra función.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
● En caso de seleccionar PARING
▶ Ajustar el modo de Bluetooth
Se pueden controlar los modos de Bluetooth. 5 Siga los pasos 2 al 4 en la página 17 “Emparejar
su teléfono con el sistema de sonido del
1 Pulse el botón de ajuste SET para entrar al modo coche” para completar el emparejamiento.
de Ajuste.
“EQ”, “TONE” y “BT” aparecen en la pantalla. ● En caso de seleccionar BORRAR
2 Gire el cuadrante de sintonización VOLUMEN 5 Gire el cuadrante de sintonización VOLUMEN
para seleccionar el menú de BT, luego pulse el para seleccionar "YES" o "NO", luego pulse el
botón ENCENDER [ ]. botón ENCENDER [ ].
YES (SÍ): Borra la lista de dispositivos de Bluetooth
3 Gire el cuadrante de sintonización VOLUMEN seleccionada.
para seleccionar el elemento de ajuste de NO: Cancela la operación de Borrar.
Bluetooth deseado, luego pulse el botón
ENCENDER [ ].
● Cada vez que gire el cuadrante de sintonización TUNE,
se puede seleccionar uno de los siguientes elementos
de ajuste de Bluetooth.
PAIR (PAIRER) ↔ SELECT (SELECTIONNER) ↔
PRIORITY (PRIORITE) ↔ DELETE (SUUPRIMER) ↔
Español
PREVIOUS (PRECEDENT) ↔ PAIR (PAIRER) ↔ ...

para seleccionar la lista de dispositivos o ajustar
el valor, luego pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ].
● PAIR : introduce el emparejamiento (Clave: 00xx).
● SELECT : seleccione uno de los 5 dispositivos de
Bluetooth para conexión.
● PRIORITY : seleccione la prioridad de conexión.
● DELETE : borra un dispositivo de Bluetooth.
● PREVIOUS : vuelve al menú de BT.
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reproductor USB/AUX
▶ Reproducir un dispositivo USB ▶ Precauciones para manejar el USB
Al conectar un dispositivo USB al cable USB en el conector de ● Al utilizar el dispositivo USB externo, reconocer el dispositivo USB externo puede
entrada USB de la unidad, se pueden escuchar los altavoces del asegúrese de mantener desconectado el diferir dependiendo del tipo, tamaño o
coche, mientras que se controla el dispositivo USB desde la dispositivo y conéctelo sólo un tiempo formato de los archivos almacenados en el
unidad. después de encender el vehículo. El USB. Tales diferencias en el tiempo
dispositivo USB se puede dañar si se requerido no son indicaciones de un mal
1 Pulse el botón ENCENDER [ ] encuentra conectado al encender el funcionamiento. Espere el período de tiempo
para apagar el aparato. vehículo. (El dispositivo USB no es un requerido para reconocer el dispositivo.
componente automotriz electrónico.) ● El dispositivo admite solamente dispositivos
● Es posible que algunos dispositivos USB no USB utilizados para reproducir archivos de
funcionen adecuadamente debido a música.
2 Conecte el dispositivo de problemas de compatibilidad. ● No utilice el I/F del USB para cargar las
almacenamiento USB con ● El dispositivo sólo reconocerá los baterías o los accesorios del USB que
ficheros MP3/WMA que se van dispositivos USB formateados en FAT generan calor. Esto puede causar el
a reproducir en la terminal de 12/16/32. Al dar formato al dispositivo USB deterioro del rendimiento o daños al
externo, es posible que el dispositivo no dispositivo.
entrada USB mediante el cable reconozca adecuadamente una selección de ● En el caso de dispositivos USB de alta
USB. Byte/Sector distinta de 512Byte o 2,048Byte. capacidad, existen instancias en las cuales las
‘USB’ aparece y la reproducción ● Verifique que el dispositivo externo sea unidades lógicas se dividen para la comodidad
se inicia automáticamente compatible con el dispositivo antes de del usuario. En este caso, sólo será posible
después de reconocer los datos comenzar a usarlo. reproducir música del USB en la unidad del
del dispositivo de ● Evite el contacto de las partes del cuerpo y nivel superior. Al utilizar unidades divididas,
sustancias extrañas con el conector USB. guarde las canciones que desea reproducir en
Español
almacenamiento USB. el dispositivo sólo en la unidad lógica superior.
● El conectar/desconectar repetidamente el
3 Cuando ya se conectó el dispositivo USB durante un corto período de tiempo

puede dañar el dispositivo.
Además, algunos dispositivos USB están
configurados con una unidad independiente
de almacenamiento USB, pulse el utilizada para instalar los programas de
● Al desconectar el USB, escuchará
botón de sonido CD/USB/AUX/BT ocasionalmente un sonido anormal.
aplicación y es posible que no permita la
Audio repetidas veces hasta que reproducción de canciones desde dichas
● Si desconecta en forma abrupta el dispositivo
unidades por las razones descritas
aparezca ‘USB’. USB externo mientras el USB está anteriormente.
La reproducción USB se inicia funcionando, puede causar daños o el ● Es posible que el dispositivo no funcione de
automáticamente. funcionamiento anormal del dispositivo. manera normal al utilizar formatos tales como
Asegúrese de desconectar el dispositivo USB de tipo HDD, CF o memoria SD.
Puede cambiar el volumen, el modo de reproducción y sólo después de apagar el audio o cuando el
la selección de pistas mediante los botones que están audio esté funcionando en un modo distinto. ● El dispositivo no admitirá archivos bloqueados
en el panel de control. (Consulte el capítulo ● La cantidad de tiempo requerida para
con DRM (Administración de Derechos
"Reproductor de MP3[WMA]/CD") Digitales).
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reproductor USB/AUX
▶ Escuchar un equipo de sonido auxiliar
Cuando se conecta un dispositivo de audio portátil al conector de entrada AUX
(miniconector estéreo) en la unidad y luego se selecciona la fuente, se puede
escuchar en los altavoces del automóvil. El nivel de volumen es ajustable por
cualquier diferencia que pueda haber entre la unidad y el dispositivo de audio
portátil.
1 Baje el volumen en la unidad.
2 Apague el equipo de sonido externo.

Conecte la salida de audio del equipo de
sonido externo al terminal de entrada AUX
en la unidad.
Asegúrese de ajustar el volumen
para cada dispositivo de audio
conectado antes de la reproducción
de música.
3 Empiece la reproducción del equipo de audio

Español
externo a un volumen moderado.

4 Pulse el botón de Audio de CD/USB/AUX/BT
Audio repetidas veces hasta que aparece “AUX
IN”.
Cuando el equipo de audio externo ya está
conectado, pase por alto los pasos del 1 al 3.
5 Ajuste al volumen habitual en que escucha la

unidad.
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
Controles de sonido en el volante
▶ Utilizar los controles de sonido en el volante
Si el vehículo tiene estas características, algunos controles de sonido se pueden ajustar en el volante de dirección.
Entre los controles si incluyen:
▲ VOL ▼ MODE
Pulsar : sube y baja el volumen. ● Pulsar : selecciona las funciones (CD → USB
▲ SEEK ▼ ● Pulsar y mantener : selecciona la banda (FM1
Mientras se escucha una estación de radio → FM2 → MW → LW...)

● Pulsar : va a la siguiente/anterior estación
SOURDINE [MUTE]
predeterminada.
● Pulsar y mantener : busca la Durante una llamada
siguiente/anterior estación de radio. (La Pulsar : activa y desactiva el MIC. Función
radio busca estaciones únicamente cuando MUTE Durante modo de
existe una señal potente que esté en la radio o CD/USB/BT Audio
banda seleccionada) Pulsar : activa y desactiva el silencio de radio
Durante la reproducción de audio de o la reproducción en pausa de CD/USB
CD/USB/BT
● Pulsar: va a la siguiente/anterior pista. Phone [ ]
● Pulsar y mantener : avanza rápido/ Durante la espera
Español
retrocede por las pistas. (sólo para Pulsar y mantener : hace una llamada a
reproducción de CD/ USB) través de la función de marcado de última
llamada
PWR [ ] Mientras entra una llamada
Pulsar : enciende y apaga el sistema o ● Pulsar : recibe la llamada entrante
conmuta al modo de llamada privada para
una llamada entrante. ● Pulsar y mantener : recibe la llamada entrante
Durante una llamada

● Pulsar : conmuta a modo de llamada privada
o de Bluetooth
● Pulsar y mantener : finaliza una llamada
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Localización y solución de problemas
▶ Comunes
- No produce sonido - MUTE está en ON. - Colocar MUTE en OFF.
- Ruido - Hay un generador de ondas - Mantener los generadores de ondas electromagnéticas como
electromagnéticas como puede ser un teléfonos móviles lejos de la unidad y el cableado de la misma.
teléfono móvil cerca de la unidad o sus Si no se puede eliminar el ruido debido a que el mazo de cables
líneas eléctricas. del coche, consulte con el concesionario.
- No hay sonido de los - El ajuste de balance/mezcladora no es - Reajustar el balance/mezcladora.
altavoces correcto.
▶ Radio
- Mala calidad de recepción o - Condiciones de radiodifusión no - Recibir y escuchar las señales de la estación en cuestión en el
ruido satisfactorias. modo analógico.
- La búsqueda tarda mucho - El número de estaciones que se pueden - Moverse a una zona donde el número de estaciones
Español
tiempo. recibir es menor que 6. recepcionables sea máximo e intente establecerlas

previamente.
- El número de estaciones - El contacto del cable de batería es - Asegurarse de que el cable de la batería esté conectado con
predeterminadas deficiente o no siempre tiene corriente. firmeza y vuelva a predeterminar las estaciones.
automáticas es menor que 6.
- Las estaciones - La búsqueda digital puede que tarde algo - Cambiar a búsqueda automática y vuelva a proceder con la
predeterminadas no se de tiempo. búsqueda.
pueden almacenar.
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Reproductor de MP3[WMA]/CD
- No hay reproducción o se - El disco se introduce invertido. - Introducir el disco correctamente.
expulsa el disco - Hay un defecto con un objeto extraño en - Retirar los objetos extraños o utilice un disco sin defectos.
el disco.
- El disco tiene datos con formato que no se - Consultar la descripción acerca de MP3/WMA correspondiente a
puede reproducir. datos de sonidos reproducibles excepto CD-DA (es decir un CD
de música).
- La unidad reproduce la pista ROM de un - Pasar por alto la pista ROM.
CD de modos combinados.
- Los CD-R/RW que se - La capacidad de reproducción de algunos - Hacer los CD-R/RW en una combinación diferente de medios,
reproducen en otros CD-R/RW puede que dependa de la software de grabación y grabadora después de consultar la
dispositivos no se pueden combinación de medios, el software de descripción acerca de MP3/WMA.
reproducir en esta unidad. grabación y la grabadora que se va a
utilizar, aún cuando esos CD-R/RW se
pueden reproducir en otros dispositivos
como puede ser un ordenador.
- Salta el sonido o hay ruido - Hay un defecto con un objeto extraño en - Retirar los objetos extraños o utilizar un disco sin defectos. Para
Español
el disco. MP3/WMA, consultar la descripción acerca de MP3/WMA.
- Salto de sonido debido a - La unidad no está lo suficientemente - Asegurar la unidad a la caja de la consola con el fleje de soporte
vibraciones segura. trasero, etc.
- La unidad está inclinada en un ángulo de - Corregir para que el ángulo sea menor de 30°.
30° en la dirección del extremo delantero.
- No se puede expulsar el - Se despegó una etiqueta del CD dentro de - Consultar para reparar en el concesionario donde adquirió la
disco. la unidad. unidad.
25
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Reproductor USB MP3[WMA]
- No funciona el dispositivo - La memoria USB está dañada. - Utilizar después de dar formato a la unidad USB en formato FAT
USB 12/16/32.
- La memoria USB se contaminó. - Retirar toda sustancia extraña de la superficie de contacto de la
memoria USB y de la terminal multimedios.
- Se utiliza un HUB USB adquirido por - Conectar directamente la memoria USB con la terminal
separado. multimedios en el vehículo.
- Se utiliza un cable USB de extensión. - Conectar directamente la memoria USB con la terminal
multimedios en el vehículo.
- Se utiliza un USB que no es una memoria - Utilizar una memoria USB estándar.
USB de tipo cubierta metálica.
- Se está utilizando una memoria de tipo - Utilizar una memoria USB estándar.
HDD, CF, SD.
- No hay ficheros de música que se puedan - Solamente son compatibles los formatos de ficheros MP3,
reproducir. WMA. Usar solamente los formatos de fichero de música
Español
compatibles.
26
GETtheMANUALS.org
Especificaciones
▶ Sección general ▶ Capítulo de MP3[WMA]/CD
Suministro de alimentación Masa negativa CC 14,4 V Frecuencia de muestreo Sobre muestreo de 8 veces
Impedancia de altavoz 4 ohmios Convertidor D/A Sistema de 4 DAC
Alimentación máx. 45 Watts x 4 canales Tipo de captación 3 haces Astigma
Peso 880 g (neto) Fuente de luz Semiconductor láser
Dimensión (An x Al x P) 178 x 52 x 155 mm Longitud de onda 780 nm
Respuesta de frecuencia 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz (±3 dB)
Relación señal/ruido ≥50 dB
▶ Capítulo de radio FM/MW/LW
Distorsión armónica total ≤1 % (1 kHz)
Rango de frecuencias FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108 MHz Cambios de tono y volumen aleatorios Por debajo de los límites mensurables
MM 522 kHz ~ 1,620 kHz Separación de canales ≥35 dB
LW 144 kHz ~ 290 kHz
Sensibilidad utilizable FM ≤18 dBu
MM ≤35 dBu ▶ Sección Bluetooth
LW ≤35 dBu
Relación señal/ruido FM ≥45 dB Especificación de Bluetooth versión 2.0 (Bluetooth versión 1.2
MM ≥40 dB núcleo compatible)
Español
LW ≥40 dB Sensibilidad - 60 dBm
Separación estéreo FM ≥20 dB Memoria interna Tarjeta de memoria de 16 M bits
Función aplicada Soporte de audio para mayor ancho de banda
▶ Capítulo de USB MP3[WMA] Perfil de distribución de audio avanzado
Compatible con perfil de manos libres/llamada
privada
Respuesta de frecuencia 20 Hz ~ 20 KHz
Distorsión armónica total 0.1 % (a 1 KHz)
Rango dinámico 85 dB (a 1 KHz)
Las especificaciones y el diseño están sujetos a modificaciones sin aviso
Relación señal/ruido 60 dB (a 1 KHz) previo, como consecuencia de las mejoras que pudiesen introducirse al
Separación de canales 54 dB (a 1 KHz) producto.
27
GETtheMANUALS.org
● Lees deze instructies zorgvuldig door voordat u dit product gebruikt en
bewaar deze handleiding voor toekomstig gebruik.
● Het ontwerp en de specificaties van dit product kunnen zonder voorafgaande
kennisgeving betreffende productverbetering gewijzigd worden.
Dutch
GETtheMANUALS.org
Inhoud
Voorzorgsmaatregelen Verkeersberichten ontvangen ........... 13 vanaf een audioapparaat ................... 19
Veiligheidsinformatie ............................ 2 De functie displayitems/ De Bluetooth-modus instellen ........... 20
Voorzorgsmaatregelen schuifbalk wijzigen ............................. 13
voor veiligheid ....................................... 3 USB/AUX-speler
MP3[WMA]/CD-speler Een USB-apparaat afspelen ............. 21
Locatie van de bedieningen Vóór het afspelen van een disk ......... 14
Voorzorgsmaatregelen
Vooraanzicht ......................................... 4 Een disk laden en het
afspelen starten .................................. 14 gebruik USB ....................................... 21
Weergavescherm ................................. 5 Naar een extern
Steuerung der Wiedergabe ............... 14
Achteraanzicht ...................................... 6 audioapparaat luisteren ..................... 22
De afspeelmodus selecteren ............. 15
Aan de slag De muziek zoeken ............................. 15
De unit aan-/uitzetten ........................... 7
Audiobedieningen op het stuur
Toon de mapinformatie ...................... 15 De audiobedieningen op het stuur
Het volume direct aanpassen .............. 7 Het afspelen stoppen en gebruiken ............................................ 23
Het geluid snel dempen ....................... 7 een disk uitwerpen ............................. 16
De stijl van de equalizer instellen ........ 8 Over CD-R/CD-RW ........................... 16 Probleemoplossing
Het geluid instellen ............................... 8 Over MP3/WMA ................................. 16 Algemeen ........................................... 24
Radio Bluetooth Radio ................................................... 24
Een zender afstemmen ....................... 9 Bediening Bluetooth ........................... 17 MP3[WMA] CD-speler ....................... 25
Een zender handmatig opslaan .......... 9 Uw telefoon en audiossyteem USB MP3[WMA]-speler ..................... 26
Een zender automatisch opslaan ...... 10 voor in de auto koppelen ................... 17
Naar een vooraf ingestelde Een mobiele telefoon aansluiten ....... 17 Specificaties
zender luisteren .................................. 10 Bellen via laatste gesprek .................. 18 Algemene sectie ................................. 27
Beperking zenders voor Een gesprek ontvangen ..................... 18 FM/MW/LW-radiosectie ..................... 27
Het praatvolume direct aanpassen ... 18 MP3[WMA] USB-sectie ..................... 27
Radio met RDS MP3[WMA]/CD-sectie ........................ 27
regionale programmering .................. 11 Het praatgeluid dempen .................... 18
Dutch
Bluetooth-sectie .................................. 27
PTY-functies gebruiken ..................... 12 Een gesprek beëindigen .................... 18
Alternatieve frequenties selecteren ... 12 Een gesprek doorverbinden .............. 19
Verkeersprogramma ontvangen ....... 13 Naar muziek luisteren
1
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Veiligheidsinformatie
WAARSCHUWING: Deze apparatuur is getest en voldoet aan de limieten voor een
STEL OM RISICO OP BRAND OF ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK TE klasse 1 laserproduct conform deel 15 van de FCC-regels.
VOORKOMEN DIT PRODUCT NIET BLOOT AAN REGEN OF Deze limieten zijn ontworpen om redelijke bescherming te
VOCHT. bieden tegen schadelijke storingen in een residentiele installatie.
GEBRUIK OM RISICO OP BRAND, ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK Deze apparatuur genereert en gebruikt radiofrequentie-energie
EN VERVELENDE STORINGEN TE VERMINDEREN en kan dit uitstralen.
UITSLUITEND DE BIJGESLOTEN ONDERDELEN. Indien deze apparatuur niet geïnstalleerd en gebruikt wordt in
naleving van de instructies, kan dit leiden tot schadelijke storing
aan radiocommunicatie.
LET OP:
Er is echter geen garantie dat storingen niet zullen voorkomen in
DIT PRODUCT IS EEN KLASSE 1 LASERPRODUCT. een bepaalde installatie.
GEBRUIK VAN BEDIENINGEN, AANPASSINGEN OF
Indien deze apparatuur schadelijk storingen veroorzaakt in
PRESTATIE VAN PROCEDURES ANDERS DAN DIE radio-ontvangst, wat vastgesteld kan worden door de
GESPECIFICEERD IN DEZE HANDLEIDING KUNNEN apparatuur aan of uit te zetten, wordt de gebruiker aangeraden
LEIDEN TOT GEVAARLIJKE BLOOTSTELLING AAN contact op te nemen met de dealer of een ervaren
STRALING. radiotechnicus voor hulp.
MAAK AFSCHERMINGEN NIET OPEN EN VOER ZELF
GEEN REPARATIES UIT.
LAAT BEKWAAM PERSONEEL HET ONDERHOUD
UITVOEREN.
Dutch
Deel 15 van de FCC-regels

FCC-waarschuwing:
Ongeautoriseerde wijzigingen of aanpassingen maken de
bevoegdheid voor het gebruik van deze apparatuur door de
gebruiker ongeldig.
2
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Veiligheidsinformatie ▶ Voorzorgsmaatregelen voor veiligheid
Tijdens het rijden ◆ Deze unit is uitsluitend ontworpen voor DC 14V, negatief geaarde
Houd het volume laag genoeg zodat u de weg- en voertuigen. Gebruik geen niet-standaard stroomtoevoer.
verkeersomstandigheden in de gaten kunt houden.
Tijdens het wassen van uw auto
Stel het product, inclusief de luidsprekers en cd’s, niet bloot aan
water of overmatig vocht. Dit kan leiden tot elektrische kortsluiting,
brand of andere schade.
Wanneer de auto geparkeerd staat
Parkeren in direct zonlicht kan leiden tot zeer hoge temperaturen in
uw auto. Laat de binnenkant van uw auto eerst afkoelen voordat u
de unit aanzet. ◆ Gebruik geen benzine, thinner, benzeen, organische
oplosmiddelen, etc. om de unit schoon te maken.
Gebruik de juiste stroomtoevoer
Dit product is ontworpen om te werken met een 14 V DC, negatief !
geaard batterijsysteem. Nee
Cd-mechanisme
Steek geen munten of andere voorwerpen in de cd-lade.
Houd schroevendraaiers en andere metalen voorwerpen uit de
buurt van de cd-lade en van de disk.
Gebruik geautoriseerde servicecentra
Dit product bestaat uit precisieonderdelen. Probeer onderdelen niet
te demonteren of aan te passen.
Raadpleeg de lijst met servicecentra die bij het product geleverd ◆ Druk niet hard op de functieknoppen.
wordt voor onderhoudshulp. Door er zachtjes op te drukken kan schade voorkomen worden.
Dutch
Installatie
Dit product moet in een horizontale positie geïnstalleerd worden met
de voorkant in een goede hoek van maximaal 30°.
Opmerking: Nee
het vooraf ingestelde geheugen wordt wanneer de stroomaansluiting of batterij
ontkoppeld wordt gewist om terug te keren naar de fabrieksinstellingen.
!
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Locatie van de bedieningen
▶ Vooraanzicht
1. Weergavescherm
2. Knop BAND/AS
Selecteert de functie radio of band (druk op: FM1 → FM2
→ MW → LW → FM1 → ....) om de zenders
automatisch op te slaan (indrukken en ingedrukt houden).
3. Knop SCAN/INF
Scan elke zender automatisch in, voer de modus bestand
zoeken in (indrukken); schakel tussen de displayitems
(indrukken en ingedrukt houden).
4. Knop RDS
Zoek het gespecificeerde programmatype of
verkeersprogramma (indrukken), voer het menu RDS
(Radio Data System) in (indrukken en ingedrukt houden).
5. Knop SET button
Gaat naar de modus instelling (EQ-stijl, Tone en
Bluetooth).
6. TUNE button
- Tijdens radio-ontvangst
Handmatig een zender zoeken (indrukken); automatisch 9. Disklade (indrukken en ingedrukt houden); volume
een zender zoeken (indrukken en ingedrukt houden). Plaats een disk (met de label naar boven), aanpassen of item voor instellen/zoeken
- Tijdens het afspelen van CD/USB afspelen begint. selecteren (roteren).
Een nummer overslaan (indrukken); omhoog/omlaag voor 10. Audioknop CD/USB/AUX/BT 13. Numerieke [1 bis 6 D+] knoppen
het zoeken van bestanden, snel vooruit/achteruit spoelen Selecteer audio afspelen vanaf CD, USB, AUX of - Tijdens radio-ontvangst
van een nummer (indrukken en ingedrukt houden). Bluetooth. Opgeslagen zenders ontvangen (erop drukken); de
Dutch
7. Knop BELLEN [ ] zender opslaan (erop drukken en ingedrukt houden).

11. Knop disk EJECT [ ]
- Tijdens het afspelen van CD/USB
Een inkomend gesprek beantwoorden (indrukken); Werpt de disk uit.
verbinding maken met Bluetooth-apparaat (indrukken en 2 RPT : afspelen herhalen
ingedrukt houden). 12. Knop AAN/UIT [ ]/DEMPEN met 3 INT : intro afspelen
VOLUME- [VOL] schijf 4 RDM : willekeurig afspelen
8. Knop END [ ] De stroom aanzetten, het geluid van de radio 5 D- : map omlaag
Gesprek beëindigen (indrukken); de Bluetooth-verbinding dempen of afspelen CD/USB pauzeren/ 6 D+ : Map omhoog
verbreken (indrukken en ingedrukt houden). voortzetten (indrukken), stroom uitzetten
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Weergavescherm
[Radiofunctie] [CD/MP3/WMA-functie]
1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ch1 MP3 D035 F014 USB 00 : 01
4 5 5
1. Zendernummer vooraf instellen 6. Diskindicator
2. RDS-indicator 7. Media-indicator
- TP licht op wanneer een TP (verkeersprogramma) zender CDP licht op wanneer een audio-cd geladen is.
afgestemd is. MP3 licht op wanneer een MP3-bestand geladen is.
- TA licht op wanneer de functie TA (verkeersmeldingen stand-by) WMA licht op wanneer een WMA-bestand geladen is.
aanstaat.
- REG licht op wanneer een REG- (REGional) zender afgestemd is. 8. Nummer huidige map (directory)
- AF licht op wanneer de functie AF (alternatieve frequenties 9. Nummer huidig bestand (nummer)
zoeken) aanstaat.
10. USB-indicator
3. Stereo-indicator 11. Indicator modus map selecteren
4. Bandindicator 12. Indicatoren afspeelmodus
Dutch
RPT (herhalen), INT (intro), RDM (willekeurig)
5. Multifunctie schermgebied
13. Indicator Bluetooth-functie
14. Speeltijd
15. Indicator EQ (equalizer)
5
GETtheMANUALS.org
▶ Achteraanzicht
1. Aansluitpunt antenne
Om de FM-antennekabel in te steken.
2. AUX In-poort
Om een AUX-aansluiting voor audioapparaten aan te sluiten.
Dutch
3. USB-poort
Om een USB-aansluiting voor de functie USB-host aan te sluiten.
4. I/O-aansluiting (18 pin)
6
GETtheMANUALS.org
Aan de slag
▶ De unit aan-/uitzetten ▶ Het volume direct aanpassen
1 Draai de autosleutel in de positie ACC of ON. 1 Roteer de VOLUME- schijf om het volumeniveau
te verhogen of verlagen.
Het scherm zal het volumeniveau weergeven
(audiomodus: 00 tot 45/belmodus: 06 tot 32).
2 Druk op de knop POWER [ ] om de unit aan te
zetten.
● Wanneer de bron gereed is, zal het afspelen beginnen.
● Wanneer u de stroom uitzet tijdens het beluisteren van
een disk/ USB, zal het afspelen van de CD/USB weer
beginnen op de plaats waar het afspelen eerder is
gestopt.
● Wanneer u de stroom uitzet tijdens het luisteren naar
de radio, zal hetzelfde radiostation geselecteerd
worden.
▶ Het geluid snel dempen
3 Druk op de knop POWER [ ] en houd deze
ingedrukt om de unit uit te zetten. 1 Druk op de knop MUTE om dempen of pauzeren
● Wanneer u de stroom uitzet tijdens het luisteren naar
aan te zetten.
een disk, zal de disk de volgende keer dat u de stroom
aanzet afgespeeld worden vanaf het punt waarop het “MUTE” of “PAUSE” zal op het scherm knipperen.
afspelen eerder was gestopt. Tijdens de CD/USB zal het afspelen gepauzeerd
worden door het dempen van het geluid.
Druk om het geluid te herstellen of het afspelen van
CD/USB te hervatten op de knop MUTE of roteer de
De stroom direct aanzetten VOLUME- schijf.
Dutch
Door een disk te plaatsen, het USB-apparaat aan te sluiten of op knop
BAND/AS of CD/USB/AUX/BT audio te drukken (terwijl de cd in de
lade zit of het USB/AUX/BT-audioapparaat aangesloten is), kunt u ook de
stroom aanzetten en de unit zal beginnen met afspelen.
7
GETtheMANUALS.org
Aan de slag
▶ De stijl van de equalizer selecteren 3 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om het gewenste
toonbedieningsitem te selecteren en druk daarna
U kunt één van de zes EQ-stijlen of EQ OFF selecteren. op de knop POWER [ ].
1 Druk op de knop SET om naar de modus ● Elke keer dat u de VOLUME-schijf draait, kunt u één
van de volgende toonbedieningsitems selecteren.
instellingen te gaan.
“EQ”, “TONE” en “BT” verschijnen op het scherm.
2 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om het menu EQ te 4 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om elke waarde van
selecteren en druk daarna op de knop POWER het niveau of balans aan te knop POWER [ ].
[ ].
● BASS: pas het geluidsniveau van de bass aan (-7 tot
+7).
3 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om de gewenste EQ- ● MIDDLE: pas het geluidsniveau van de middentoon
aan (-7 tot +7).
stijl te selecteren en druk daarna op de knop
POWER [ ] . ● TREBLE: pas het geluidsniveau van de hoge tonen
● Elke keer dat u de VOLUME-schijf draait, kunt u één

aan (-7 tot +7).
van de volgende EQ-stijlen selecteren. ● BALANCE: pas het geluidsbalans tussen de linker- en
EQ OFF ↔ POP ↔ ROCK ↔ COUNTRY ↔ VOICE rechterluidspreker aan (LEFT15 tot RIGHT15).
↔ JAZZ ↔ CLASSIC ↔ EQ OFF ↔ .... ● FADER: pas de geluidfader tussen de voorste en
achterste luidsprekers aan (FRONT15 tot REAR15).
● PREVIOUS: ga terug naar het menu TONE.
▶ Het geluid instellen
U kunt elk niveau van de bass, middentoon, hoge tonen, balans en fader
aanpassen.
1 Druk op de knop SET om naar de modus

Dutch
“EQ”, “TONE” en “BT” verschijnen op het scherm.
2 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om het menu TONE

te selecteren en druk daarna op de knop
POWER [ ].
8
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
Let op
▶ Een zender afstemmen Wanneer u tijdens het rijden afstemt op zenders, gebruik dan de knop vooraf
ingestelde nummers om ongelukken te voorkomen.
● Zet de radio aan
1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop BAND/AS om de
band te selecteren. ▶ Een zender handmatig opslaan
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
◆ U kunt voor elke band (FM1, FM2, MW en LW) zes zenders opslaan.
● Een zender handmatig afstemmen 1 Volg de stappen 1 tot en met 4 onder “Een zender
2 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop TUNE om afstemmen” op om de frequentie die u vooraf wilt instellen af
de gewenste frequentie te zoeken. te stemmen.
~ 2 Druk op de knop Nummer [1 to 6 D+] en houd

● Een zender automatisch afstemmen dez dan twee seconden ingedrukt om het vooraf
ingesteld nu selecteren.
3 Druk langer dan 2 seconden op de knop De frequentie is opgeslagen in het geselecteerde
TUNE en laat deze dan los. vooraf ingestelde en u zult een piep horen.
Het zoeken zal beginnen. Herhaal deze stappen om een andere zender vooraf in
Het afstemmen stopt automatisch bij zenders waarvan te stellen.
signalen ontvangen kunnen worden en de zender Opmerking
wordt ontvangen. ◆Indien u een andere zender op hetzelfde vooraf ingestelde nummer wilt
opslaan, zal het eerder opgeslagen vervangen worden.
● Een zender snel scannen
4 Druk op de knop SCAN/INF om het afstemmen
van een zender te beginnen.
Dutch
De unit zal naar een zender gaan, deze vijf seconden
afspelen en daarna naar de volgende zender gaan.
Druk wanneer de unit afstemt op de gewenste zender
op de knop SCAN/INF om het scannen te stoppen.
Opmerking
Tijdens de ontvangst van stereozenders staat de “ST”-indicator aan.
9
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio
▶ Een zenders automatisch opslaan ▶ Naar een vooraf ingestelde zender luisteren
◆ De unit selecteert de zenders met de sterkste signalen binnen de geselecteerde
band en slaat deze in volgorde van hun frequentie op. 1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop BAND/AS om de
◆ Er kunnen maximaal zes zenders opgeslagen worden op de huidige band. band te selecteren.
FM1 → FM2 → MW → LW → FM1 → ....
1 Druk op de knop BAND/AS en houd deze langer
dan twee seconden ingedrukt.
“AST Scanning“ verschijnt op het scherm. ~ 2 Druk op de knop Nummer [1 to 6 D+] waarop de
gewenste zender opgeslangen is.
De unit slaat de zenders in volgorde van hun
frequenties onder de nummerknoppen op.
Hinweise
◆ Indien slechts een paar zenders ontvangen kunnen worden vanwege zwakke
signalen, zullen een aantal nummers hun voormalige instellingen behouden.
◆ Wanneer een nummer wordt aangegeven op het scherm, dan start de unit de
sterke zenders van de zender die op dat moment weergegeven wordt.
Dutch
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio met RDS
◆ Over RDS ▶ Beperking zenders voor regionale programmering
RDS (Radio Data System) is een uitzendservice die nu geleverd wordt op
een groeiend aantal FM-zenders. Het stelt de FM-zenders in staat samen met ◆ Wanneer AF gebruikt wordt, zal de regionale functie de selectie van
hun reguliere programmasignalen aanvullende signalen te versturen. Zo zenders die regionale programma°Øs uitzenden, beperken.
kunnen de zenders hun zendernamen en informatie over het soort
programma dat ze uitzenden, zoals sport, muziek, etc versturen. 1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop RDS en houd
Wanneer u afstemt op een FM-zender die de RDS-dienst levert, licht de deze ingedrukt om “REG ON” of “REG OFF” te
RDS-indicator op en wordt de zenderfrequentie (en daarna de naam van de
zender indien die verstuurd is) weergegeven. selecteren.
Niet alle FM-zenders leveren de RDS-dienst en niet alle RDS-zenders ◆ Indien u binnen ongeveer vijf seconden geen functies
leveren dezelfde diensten. Controleer indien u twijfelt bij plaatselijke uitvoert, zal het scherm automatisch teruggaan naar de
radiozenders voor details over de RDS-diensten in uw omgeving. oorspronkelijke display.
Dit apparaat gebruikt de volgende RDS-dienst.
PS (naam programmaservice) / PTY (programmatype) / TP
(verkeersprogramma) / TA (verkeersbericht) / AF (lijst met 2 Draai aan de schijf VOLUME om “REG ON” te
alternatieve frequenties) / RT (radiotekst) roteren en druk dan op de knop POWER [ ].
Hiermee kunt u een specifieke naam zoeken van een programma dat wordt ◆ Selecteer “REG OFF” om de regionale functie uit te
uitgezonden. zetten.
Opmerkingen
◆ Regionale programmering en regionale netwerken zijn afhankelijk van
◆ RDS (radiogegevenssysteem) bevat onhoorbare informatie die helpt met het land (ze kunnen bijvoorbeeld verschillen afhankelijk van de tijd, de
zoeken naar radiozenders. staat of het uitzendgebied) anders georganiseerd.
- Het kan zijn dat de RDS-service niet door alle zenders geleverd wordt.
◆ Het vooraf ingestelde nummer kan van het scherm verdwijnen indien de
- RDS-functies, zoals AF en TA, zijn alleen actief wanneer uw radio
afgestemd is op een RDS-zender. tuner afstemt op een regionale zender die afwijkt van de oorspronkelijk
ingestelde zender.
◆ De regionale functie voor elke FM-band kan onafhankelijk aan- of
uitgezet worden.
Dutch
◆ PTY informatie en de frequentie van de huidige zender verschijnt drie
seconden lang op het scherm.
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio met RDS
◆ Indien geen enkele zender het soort programma uitzendt waar u naar
▶ PTY-functies gebruiken zocht, dan wordt “Not found” ongeveer twee seconden lang
weergegeven. Daarna gaat de tuner weer terug naar de oorspronkelijke
◆ U kunt afstemmen op een zender door PTY- (programmatype) zender.
informatie te gebruiken.
● Naar een RDS-zender zoeken met PTY-informatie
▶ Alternatieve frequenties selecteren
1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop RDS en houd ◆ Wanneer de tuner geen goede ontvangst kan krijgen, zal de unit
deze ingedrukt om de modus PTY zoeken te automatisch naar een andere zender zoeken in hetzelfde netwerk.
selecteren.
“PTY None” of “PTY-naam” verschijnt op het scherm. 1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop RDS en houd
◆ Indien u binnen ongeveer tien seconden geen functies uitvoert, deze ingedrukt om “AF ON” of ”AF OFF” te
gaat het scherm automatisch naar gewone weergave. selecteren.
◆ Indien u binnen ongeveer vijf seconden geen functies
2 Roteer de schijf VOLUME om een uitvoert, dan gaat het scherm automatisch terug naar
gewone weergave.
programmatype te selecteren zoals hieronder en
druk dan op de knop POWER [ ] ;
PTY NONE ↔ NEWS ↔ AFFAIRS ↔ INFO ↔ SPORT↔ 2 Roteer de schijf VOLUME om de “AF ON” en
EDUCATE ↔ DRAMA ↔ CULTURE ↔ SCIENCE ↔ druk daarna op de knop POWER [ ].
VARIED ↔ POP M ↔ ROCK M ↔ EASY M ↔ LIGHT M ↔ ◆ Indien u binnen ongeveer vijf seconden geen functies
CLASSICS ↔ OTHER M ↔ WEATHER ↔ FINACE ↔ uitvoert, dan gaat het scherm automatisch terug naar
gewone weergave.
◆ Selecteer “AF OFF” om de functie alternatieve
frequenties uit te zetten.
Opmerkingen
3 Druk op de knop RDS om beginnen te zoeken. ◆ Wanneer AF aanstaat worden alleen RDS-zenders afgestemd tijdens het
afstemmen of vooraf instellen van een zender.
De unit zoekt naar een zenderuitzending van dat
◆ Wanneer u een vooraf ingestelde zender oproept kan de tuner de vooraf
programmatype. Wanneer een zender gevonden is, zal
Dutch
de servicenaam van het programma getoond worden. ingestelde zender bijwerken met een nieuw frequentie van de AF-lijst
◆ Druk om de zoekopdracht te annuleren nogmaals op de knop van de zender. Er zal geen vooraf ingesteld nummer verschijnen op het
RDS. scherm RDS-gegevens aangezien de ontvangen zender afwijkt van de
oorspronkelijk opgeslagen zender.
◆ Het geluid kan tijdens een andere AF-frequentie zoekopdracht tijdelijk
Hinweise
◆ Het programma van bepaalde zenders kan afwijken van het programma verstoord worden door een ander programma.
dat aangegeven wordt door de uitgezonden PTY. ◆ AF kan voor elke FM-band onafhankelijk aan- of uitgezet worden.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radio met RDS
▶ Verkeersprogramma ontvangen 2 Roteer de schijf VOLUME om de modus TA
ON te selecteren en druk dan op de knop
● Een TP (verkeersprogramma) zender zoeken POWER [ ].
1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop RDS en houd TA-stand-by staat aan.
deze ingedrukt in om de modus TP SEEK te Indien een verkeersbericht wordt ontvangen, schakelt
selecteren. de unit automatisch naar het uitzendstation
verkeersmelding.
“TP ON” of “TP OFF” verschijnt op het scherm.
◆ Wanneer de verkeersmelding eindigt, schakelt de unit automatisch naar de
2 Roteer de schijf VOLUME om de modus TP vorige functie. (De audiofunctie Bluetooth kan niet hervat worden. Probeer
ON te selecteren en druk daarna op de knop de Bluetooth-aansluiting opnieuw)
POWER[&&]. POWER [ ]. ◆ Om uit te zetten, selecteer “TA OFF” met behulp van de VOLUME-schijf.
TP-stand-by staat aan.

◆ Om uit te zetten, selecteer “TP OFF” door de schijf VOLUME te gebruiken.
3 Druk op de knop RDS om beginnen met zoeken. ▶ De functie displayitems/schuifbalk wijzigen
De eenheid zoekt naar een zender met
verkeersprogramma's.
◆ Wanneer het verkeersprogramma eindigt, zal de eenheid automatisch naar
1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop INF om de functie
de vorige functie schakelen. De audiofunctie van Bluetooth kan niet displayitem of schuifbalk, zoals hieronder, uit of
voortgezet worden. Probeer de Bluetoothverbinding opnieuw). aan te zetten;
◆ Om het zoeken te annuleren, druk nogmaals op de knop RDS. ● Radiotekst: Stelt de RDS-zender in staat
tekstberichten te versturen die verschijnen op het
▶ Verkeersberichten ontvangen scherm.
● PTY (programmatype) naam: identificeert het soort
◆ TA (verkeersmelding stand-by) laat u automatische verkeersberichten
ontvangen, ongeacht naar welke bron u luistert. TA kan geactiveerd RDS-programma’s.
worden voor zowel een TP-zender (een zender die verkeersinformatie ● SCROLL ON/OFF: de functie schuifbalk activeren/
Dutch
uitzendt) als een versterkte TP-zender van een ander netwerk (een deactiveren voor het weergeven van prestatie.
zender die informatie die verwijst naar TP-zenders).
● In het geval van de SCHUIFBALK AAN/UIT
● De functie TA-stand-by aan-/uitzetten
2 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om naar OFF of ON te
1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop RDS en houd schakelen en druk daarna op de knop POWER
deze ingedrukt om het TA-menu te selecteren. [ ].
“TA ON” of “TA OFF” verschijnt op het scherm.
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD-speler
▶ Vóór het afspelen van een disk ▶ Een disk laden en het afspelen starten
◆
◆
U kunt CD-DA en MP3/WMA-disks afspelen.
Deze unit kan de volgende bestanden niet afspelen;
1 Plaats een disk in de lade met
de label naar boven.
- MP3-bestanden gecodeerd met MP3i en MP3 PRO-formaat. ● Het afspelen zal automatisch starten
- MP3-bestanden gecodeerd in een ongeschikt formaat. nadat de data van de geladen disk
- MP3-bestanden gecodeerd met Laag 1/2. herkend is.
- WMA-bestanden gecodeerd met verliesloos, professioneel en ● Het kan even duren voordat het afspelen
stemformaat. begint.
- WMA-bestanden die niet gebaseerd zijn op Windows MediaAudio. ● Alle nummers zullen afgespeeld worden totdat u de bron of disk veranderd.
- WMA-bestanden die beschermd zijn tegen kopieren met DRM. Opmerking:
- Bestanden die gegevens bevatten zoals WAVE, ATRAC3, etc. Plaats geen disk in de lade wanneer de diskindicator op het schermvenster
opgelicht is want dat betekent dat er al een disk in de lade zit.
Opmerking: beschikbare disks Wanneer de disk in de lade zit
◆ CD-DA: CD-R/CD-RW Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop CD/USB/AUX/BT-audio om de CD- en
afspeelstatus te selecteren.
Let op
◆ 3” (8 cm) CD is niet beschikbaar voor deze unit, plaats deze dus niet in
de lade.
▶ Steuerung der Wiedergabe
◆ Gebruik geen vreemd gevormde disks.
◆ Gebruik geen disks die voorzien zijn een zegel of label. 1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop TUNE om
◆ Om schade aan het voorpaneel te voorkomen moet u er niet op drukken naar het volgende of vorige nummer te gaan.
en er geen voorwerpen op plaatsen wanneer deze openstaat. ◆ Voor MP3- of WMA-disks kunt u nummers in dezelfde map
◆ Plaats uw vinger of hand niet in het voorpaneel. overslaan.
◆ Plaats geen vreemde voorwerpen in de disklade.
Opmerking
2 Druk op de knop TUNE en houd deze
◆De stroom zal automatisch aangesloten worden wanneer een disk ingedrukt om het nummer vooruit of achteruit
geladen is. Een disk die zowel CD-DA-gegevens en MP3/WMA- te spelen en laat de knop los om het weer af te
Dutch
gegevens bevat kan niet op een normale manier gereproduceerd worden. spelen.
(Het kan bijvoorbeeld gereproduceerd worden zonder geluid.) ◆ De zoekfunctie werkt maar de zoeksnelheid is niet constant.
◆ Tijdens het vooruit- of achteruitspoelen kunt u alleen
onregelmatige geluiden horen.
2 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop 5 D- of 6 D+ om naar
de vorige of volgende mappen te gaan (alleen
voor MP3-of WMA-disk).
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD-speler
▶ De afspeelmodi selecteren ▶ De muziek zoeken
1 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop 2 RPT om de 1 Druk op de knop SCAN/INF om naar modus
modus herhaald afspelen te selecteren. Search.
● RPT: het huidige nummer wordt herhaaldelijk Het getal of de naam van het nummer verschijnt 5
afgespeeld. seconden lang op het scherm.
● FOLDER [ ] RPT (alleen voor MP3/WMA): alle
nummer in de huidige map herhaaldelijk afspelen. 2 Roteer de schijf VOLUME en selecteer het
● Uit: annuleert het herhaald afspelen. gewenste nummer of de naam, en druk op de
knop POWER [ ] om het geselecteerde
2 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop 3 INT om de nummer af te spelen.
modus introscan afspelen te selecteren.
● FOLDER [ ] INT (alleen voor MP3/WMA): speelt de
intro van het nummer in de huidige map snel af.
● INT: speelt de intro van het nummer op de disk snel af.
● Uit: annuleert het afspelen van de intro. ▶ Toon de mapinformatie
3 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop 4 RDM om de 1 Druk op de knop SCAN/INF en houd deze
modus willekeurig afspelen te selecteren. ingedrukt om de huidige map vijf seconden lang
● FOLDER [ ] RDM (alleen voor MP3/WMA): nummers te tonen.
in de huidige map afspelen in willekeurige volgorde.
● RDM: nummers op de disk afspelen in willekeurige
● Om de schuiffunctie aan/uit te zetten
volgorde.
● Uit: annuleert het willekeurig afspelen.
2 Druk terwijl de mapinformatie getoond wordt op
Opmerking: de bron veranderen de knop SCAN/INF om SCROLL ON of OFF te
Wanneer u de bron verandert, zal het afspelen ook stoppen (zonder de disk uit te tonen.
Dutch
werpen). De volgende keer dat u “CD” selecteert als afspeelbron, start het
afspelen van de disk vanaf het punt waarop het eerder is gestopt.
3 Roteer de schijf VOLUME om AAN of UIT te
zetten en druk daarna op de knop POWER [ ].
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
MP3[WMA]/CD-speler
▶ Het afspelen stoppen en een disk uitwerpen ▶ Over MP3/WMA
Deze unit kan MP3/WMA-bestanden afspelen met de extensiecode
1 Druk op de knop <.mp3> of <.wma> (zowel hoofdletters als kleine letters).
EJECT [ ] en Deze unit kan de namen van de albums, artiesten (zangers) en Tag
haal de disk eruit. (Versie 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 of 2.4) voor MP3-bestanden en voor WMA-
bestanden weergeven.
Opmerking: een disk uitwerpen
Deze unit kan alleen enkelvoudige bytetekens lezen. Andere tekens
Als de uitgeworpen disk niet binnen tien seconden uit de lade
gehaald wordt, zal de lade met de disk automatisch weer sluiten om de disk te kunnen niet correct weergegeven worden.
beschermen tegen stof. (De disk zal nu niet afgespeeld worden.) Deze unit kan MP3/WMA-bestanden afspelen die voldoen aan de
onderstaande voorwaarden;
- Bitsnelheid:
▶ Over CD-R/CD-RW 8 kbps ~ 320 kbps voor MP3/64 kbps ~ 161 kbps (VBR) voor WMA
- Bemonsteringsfrequentie:
Gebruik alleen “gefinaliseerde” CD-R’s of CD-RW’s. 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (voor MPEG-1 laag 2/3)
Deze unit kan alleen bestanden afspelen van hetzelfde type die het eerst 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (voor MPEG-2 laag 2/3)
gedetecteerd worden wanneer een disk zowel audio CD (CD-DA)- 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (voor MPEG-2.5 laag 3)
bestanden als MP3/WMA-bestanden bevat. - Diskformaat: ISO/IEC 11172-3, ISO/IEC 13818-3
Deze unit kan multisessie-disks afspelen, niet gefinaliseerde sessies Het maximale aantal tekens voor de bestand-/foldernamen kan variëren
zullen echter overgeslagen worden tijdens het afspelen. afhankelijk van de verschillende diskformaten (bevat 4 extensietekens -
Bepaalde CD-R°Øs of CD-RW°Øs kunnen niet afgespeeld worden op <.mp3> of <.wma>).
deze unit vanwege hun diskkenmerken of vanwege de volgende redenen; - ISO 9660 niveau 1: maximaal 12 tekens
- Disks zijn vies of er staan krassen op. - ISO 9660 niveau 2: maximaal 31 tekens
- Vochtcondensatie op de lens in de unit. - Romeo: maximaal 128 tekens
- De pick-uplens in de unit is vies. - Joliet: maximaal 64 tekens
- CD-R/CD-RW waarop de bestanden geschreven zijn, zijn geschreven - Windows lange bestandsnaam: maximaal 128 tekens
met de “pakket schrijven”-methode.
Deze unit kan bestanden die opgenomen zijn in VBR (variabele
- Opnamecondities zijn niet geschikt (ontbrekende gegevens, etc.) of
mediacondities (vlekken, krassen, fouten, etc.). bitsnelheid) afspelen. Bestanden die opgenomen zijn in VBR hebben een
afwijking in verstreken tijdsweergave en tonen niet de werkelijke
Dutch
CD-RW’s kunnen een langere readout tijd vereisen aangezien de verstreken tijd. Na het uitvoeren van de zoekfunctie wordt dit verschil
reflectie van CD- RW's lager is dan die van gewone CD’s. merkbaar.
Gebruik de volgende CD-R’s of CD-RW’s niet; De unit kan een totaal van 512 bestanden, of 200 mappen, en 8
- Disks met stickers, labels of beschermende zegels die op het oppervlak hiërarchieën erkennen.
zitten.
- Disks waar labels op geprint kunnen worden met een inkjetprinter. Opmerking
Het gebruik van deze disks onder hoge temperaturen of hoge vochtigheid
Microsoft en Windows Media zijn beide geregistreerde handelsmerken of
kan leiden tot storingen of schade aan de unit. handelsmerken van Microsoft Corporation in de Verenigde Staten en/of
16 andere landen.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
- Herhaal stappen 1~2 indien uw telefoon “New Rexton” of
▶ Bediening Bluetooth “SSANGYONG” niet kan vinden.
Om de Bluetooth-functie te gebruiken is de volgende procedure nodig.
1. Koppelen
3 Indien de invoer van een *wachtsleutel vereist is op het
scherm van een aangesloten apparaat, voer dan “00xx” (4
Wanneer u Bluetooth-apparaten voor de eerste keer aansluit, is
wederzijdse registratie vereist. Dit heet “koppelen”. Deze registratie cijfers) in.
(koppelen) is alleen de eerste keer vereist omdat deze unit en de De unit en het Bluetooth-apparaat onthouden de informatie van
andere apparaten elkaar de volgende keer automatisch zullen elkaar en wanneer het koppelen voltooid is, is de unit klaar om
herkennen. (Afhankelijk van het apparaat kan het zijn dat u voor elke aangesloten te worden op het apparaat.
aansluiting een wachtwoord moet invoeren). "BT CONNECT" en “Bluetooth modelnaam apparaat” of “BT
2. Aansluiting MOBILE” met de indicator “ ” verschijnen nadat het koppelen is
Soms staat het koppelen automatisch aansluiten toe. voltooid.
Start de aansluiting om het apparaat na het koppelen te gebruiken. - Bepaalde Bluetooth-apparaten vragen u “BT link” of “Aansluiten” te
3. Handsfree praten/muziek streamen accepteren. Druk op “Yes” of “OK”.
U kunt een mobiele telefoon bellen en luisteren naar muziek wanneer * Het kan zijn dat de wachtsleutel, afhankelijk van het apparaat, “wachtcode”,
de aansluiting is gemaakt. “PIN-code” of “wachtwoord,” etc., genoemd wordt.
Het kan zijn dat bepaalde Bluetooth-apparaten specifieke functies niet
ondersteunen. 4 Het Bluetooth-apparaat aansluiten op deze unit.
Opmerking: de modus koppelen stand-by wordt niet vrijgegeven totdat de
▶ Uw telefoon koppelen aan uw audiosyteem voor de auto aansluiting voltooid is.
Registreer (koppel) eerst een Bluetooth-apparaat (mobiele telefoon, etc.) en

deze unit bij elkaar. U kunt maximaal zes apparaten koppelen. Wanneer het ▶ Een mobiele telefoon aansluiten
koppelen opgezet is, hoeft het niet meer gekoppeld te worden.
Plaats het Bluetooth-apparaat binnen 3 m (9 ft) van deze unit. - Apparaten worden geregistreerd wanneer ze gekoppeld zijn aan en aangesloten
zijn op deze unit. U kunt het geregistreerde apparaat selecteren en aansluiten.
1 Druk op de knop CALL [ ] en houd deze drie - Indien het koppelen al voltooid is, kan de bediening beginnen.
seconden ingedrukt. - Afhankelijk van het apparaat kan het zijn dat de aansluiting automatisch aanvangt
De unit gaat naar de modus koppelen stand-by. De na het koppelen.
Dutch
"PAIRING" verschijnt op het scherm met een piep en
daarna knippert "KEY 00xx" op het scherm. 1 Sluit deze unit met behulp van uw mobiele
telefoon aan en druk op de knop CALL [ ].
2 Het Bluetooth-apparaat instellen om deze unit te zoeken. Het pictogram “BT CONNECT” met “ ” verschijnt en
Een lijst met gedetecteerde apparaten verschijnt op het scherm van
de aangesloten apparaten. Deze unit wordt weergegeven als “New het Bluetooth-signaal wordt aangezet.
Rexton” of “SSANYONG” op het aangesloten apparaat. Opmerking : Druk om de informatie van een aangesloten
Bevestig dit door op “YES” of “OK” te drukken op uw telefoon. Bluetooth-apparaat te tonen op de knop SCAN/INF.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Bellen via laatste gesprek ▶ Het praatvolume aanpassen
U kunt iemand bellen met de aangesloten mobiele telefoon door deze unit te
bedienen. 1 Roteer de VOLUME- schijf om het
volumeniveau van het gesprek te verhogen of
1 Druk op de knop CALL [ ] en houd deze meer verlagen.
dan drie seconden ingedrukt om naar de modus Het scherm zal ook het volumeniveau van de Bluetooth
laatste gesprek te gaan. tonen. (BT VOL 6 ~ 32)
“NUMMER OPNIEUW KIEZEN” verschijnt en de
telefoon begint opnieuw te bellen.
▶ Het praatgeluid dempen

1 Druk op de knop MUTE op de audiobediening op
▶ Een gesprek ontvangen het stuur om de functie microfoon dempen te
Wanneer er een gesprek binnenkomt, zal de beltoon over uw luidsprekers activeren.
afgespeeld worden en verschijnt het nummer van de beller op het scherm. Het scherm zal “MIC MUTE” weergeven.
Druk om de functie microfoon dempen te annuleren op
1 1 Druk wanneer een gesprek binnenkomt en de knop MUTE op de audiobediening op het stuur.
“CALL IN” en “telefoonnummer” verschijnen met “MIC MUTE” verdwijnt.
een beltoon op de knop CALL [ ] om het
gesprek te beantwoorden.
“BT TEL” verschijnt en het gesprek begint.
De ingebouwde microfoon van dit audiosysteem zal uw ▶ Een gesprek beëindigen.
stem verluiden.
1 Druk op de knop END [
Dutch
].
Druk om een inkomend gesprek af te wijzen op
de knop END [ ].
“CALL REJECT” verschijnt en gaat terug naar de Opmerking: Zelfs als het gesprek beëindigd is, wordt de
vorige functie. Bluetooth-aansluiting niet geannuleerd.
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
▶ Een gesprek doorverbinden ▶ Naar muziek luisteren vanaf een audioapparaat
Controleer om het geschikte apparaat (deze unit/mobiele telefoon) te U kunt naar muziek van de mobiele telefoon luisteren op deze unit indien de
activeren/deactiveren het volgende. mobiele telefoon A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) van Bluetooth-
technologie ondersteunt.
1 Druk tijdens een gesprek via Bluetooth handsfree
op de knop CALL [ ]. 1 Zet het Bluetooth-signaal van uw mobiele telefoon of
De functie handsfree is gedeactiveerd en de microfoon audioapparaat aan.
en luidspreker van de mobiele telefoon zijn geactiveerd. “Stereo hoofdtelefoon” verschijnt wanneer de aansluiting voltooid is.
“PRIVATE” verschijnt en de mobiele telefoon begint te
bellen. 2 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om het volumeniveau
op deze unit te verlagen.
Druk tijdens een gesprek via mobiele telefoon op
de knop CALL [ ]. De functie Bluetooth
handsfree wordt geactiveerd.
“BT TEL” verschijnt en het handsfree gesprek begint.
3 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop CD/USB/AUX/BT
audio totdat “BT AUDIO” verschijnt.
Raadpleeg voor details over uw mobiele telefoon de
handleiding van uw mobiele telefoon. 4 Bedien het audioapparaat om het afspelen te beginnen.
Opmerking: U kunt het volume aanpassen en een nummer overslaan door de
knoppen op deze unit te gebruiken. (Raadpleeg de sectie
Afhankelijk van de mobiele telefoon kan de handsfree aansluiting MP3[WMA]/CD-speler)
verbroken worden nadat u een gesprek probeert door te verbinden.
5 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om het volumeniveau
op deze unit aan te passen.
Dutch
6 Druk om het afspelen van muziek te stoppen op
de knop END [ ] en houd deze ingedrukt of
druk op CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio of BAND om
een andere functie te selecteren.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth
● Voor het selecteren van PAIR
▶ De Bluetooth-modus instellen
U kunt de Bluetooth-modi bedienen. 5 Volg de stappen 2 tot en met 4 op pagina 17 “Uw
telefoon en audiosysteem voor in de auto
1 Druk op de knop SET om naar de modus koppelen” om het koppelen te voltooien.
“EQ”, “TONE” en “BT” verschijnen. ● Voor het selecteren van DELETE
2 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om het menu BT te 5 5 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om “YES” of “NO”

selecteren en druk daarna op de knop SCAN te selecteren en druk daarna op de knop
[PUSH AST/SCAN]. POWER [ ].
YES: Verwijdert de geselecteerde Bluetooth-
apparaatlijst.
3 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om het gewenste NO: annuleert de handeling nerwijderen
Bluetooth-instellingitem te selecteren en druk
daarna op de knop POWER [ ].
● Elke keer dat u de VOLUME-schijf draait, kunt u één
van de volgende Bluetooth-instellingsitems selecteren.
4 Roteer de VOLUME-schijf om de apparaatlijst te

selecteren of de waarde aan te passen, en druk
daarna op de knop POWER [ ].
● PAIR: voer de koppeling in (sleutelcode: 00xx).
● SELECT: selecteert één van de vijf Bluetooth-
apparaten voor aansluiting.
Dutch
● PRIORITY: selecteert de prioriteit van de

aansluiting.
● DELETE: verwijdert een Bluetooth-apparaat.
● PREVIOUS: ga terug naar het menu BT.
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB/AUX-speler
▶ Een USB-apparaat afspelen ▶ Voorzorgsmaatregelen gebruik USB
Door een USB-apparaat aan te sluiten op de USB-kabel in de USB- ● Zorg ervoor dat bij het gebruik van het ● De benodigde tijd voor het herkennen van het
ingang op de unit kunt u geluid beluisteren op de luidsprekers van externe USB-apparaat het apparaat niet externe USB-apparaat kan verschillen
uw auto terwijl u het USB-apparaat vanaf de unit bedient. aangesloten is en sluit het pas een tijdje afhankelijk van het type, de grootte en
nadat u de motor van het voertuig hebt bestandformaten die opgeslagen zijn op de
1 Druk op de knop POWER [ ] en aangezet aan. Het USB-apparaat kan
beschadigd zijn als het USB-apparaat al
USB. Dergelijke verschillen in de vereiste tijd
zijn geen indicatie van storingen. Wacht de
houd deze ingedrukt om de unit uit te aangesloten is als de motor al aanstaat. (Het vereiste tijd om het apparaat te herkennen af.
zetten. USB-apparaat is geen elektronische ● Het apparaat ondersteunt allen USB-
zelfaandrijvend onderdeel.) apparaten die gebruikt worden om muziek af
● Sommige USB-apparaten werken niet goed te spelen.
2 Sluit het USB-opslagapparaat vanwege compatibiliteitsproblemen. ● Gebruik de USB I/F niet om batterijen op te
met MP3/WMA-bestanden aan ● Het apparaat zal alleen USB-apparaten laden en gebruikt geen USB-accessoires die
met een USB-kabel om deze af herkennen die geformatteerd zijn in FAT warmte genereren. Dit kan leiden tot
12/16/32. Wanneer het extern USB-apparaat verslechterde prestatie of schade aan het
te spelen op de USB- apparaat.
invoerterminal. geformatteerd wordt, zal het apparaat een
Byte/Sector selectie anders dan 512Byte of ● In het geval van hoge capaciteit USB-apparaten
De “USB” verschijnt en zal 2.048Byte misschien niet goed herkennen. zijn er gevallen waarin de logische schijven
automatisch beginnen met ● Controleer of het externe apparaat
verdeeld zijn voor gebruiksgemak. In dit geval zal
afspelen na het herkennen van het alleen mogelijk zijn de USB-muziek af te
ondersteund wordt door het apparaat voordat spleen in de hogere schijf. Sla bij het gebruik van
de gegevens van het USB- u het gebruikt. onderverdeelde schijven de nummers op die u af
opslagapparaat. ● Vermijdt contact van lichaamsdelen en wilt spelen op het apparaat alleen op de hoogste
vreemde substanties met de USB-aansluiting. logische schijf op. Daarnaast zijn bepaalde USB-
apparaten geconfigureerd met een afzonderlijke
3 Druk wanneer het USB- ● Het herhaaldelijk aansluiten/loskoppelen van
de USB in een korte tijd kan schade schijf die gebruikt wordt voor de installatie van
opslagapparaat al is aangesloten aanrichten aan het apparaat. applicatieprogramma’s en waardoor het kan zijn
herhaaldelijk op de knop ● Het loskoppelen van de USB kan een
dat het niet mogelijk is om nummers af te spelen
CD/USB/AUX/BT Audio totdat van dergelijke schijven om dezelfde redenen als
abnormaal geluid veroorzaken.
Dutch
hierboven beschreven.
“USB” verschijnt. ● Het abrupt loskoppelen van het externe USB- ● Het kan zijn dat het apparaat normale werking niet
Het afspelen van de USB zal automatisch apparaat terwijl de USB nog werkt, kan ondersteunt wanneer formaten zoals HDD Type,
starten. schade aanrichten aan het apparaat of CF of SD-geheugen gebruikt worden.
U kunt met behulp van de knoppen op het zorgen dat het niet goed werkt. Zorg ervoor ● Het apparaat zal bestanden die vergrendeld zijn
bedieningspaneel het volume aanpassen, de modus dat u het USB-apparaat alleen loskoppelt door DRM (Digital Rights Management) niet
afspelen en nummer selecteren. (Raadpleeg de sectie nadat de stroom van de audio uitstaat of ondersteunen.
MP3[WMA]/CD-speler) wanneer de audio in een andere modus staat.
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB/AUX-speler
▶ Naar extern audioapparatuur luisteren
Door een optioneel audioapparaat aan te sluiten op de AUX-ingang (stereo
mini-jack) op de unit en daarna de bron te selecteren kunt u naar geluid
luisteren op de luidsprekers van uw auto. Het volumeniveau is aanpasbaar voor
elk verschil tussen de unit en het externe audioapparaat.
1 Zet het volume van de unit lager.
2 Zet de externe audioapparatuur uit.

Sluit de audio-uitgang van het externe
audioapparaat aan op de AUX-
invoerteminal op de unit.
Zorg ervoor dat het volume van elk
aangesloten audioapparaat vóór het
afspelen aangepast wordt.
3 Het afspelen van het extern audioapparaat

starten op gemiddeld volume.
4 Druk herhaaldelijk op de knop CD/USB/AUX/BT

audio totdat “AUX IN” verschijnt.
Sla de stappen 1 ~ 3 over indien het externe
Dutch
audioapparatuur al aangesloten is.
5 Stel uw gewone luistervolume in op de unit.
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
Audiobedieningen op het stuur
▶ De audiobedieningen op het stuur gebruiken
Indien uw voertuig beschikt over deze functie kan het zijn dat bepaalde audiobedieningen op het stuur aangepast kunnen worden.
Hieronder vallen:
▲ VOL ▼ MODE
Druk erop: om het volume te verhogen/ ● Druk erop: om de functies (CD → USB → AUX →
verlagen. BT Audio → RADIO...)
● Druk erop en houd ingedrukt: om de band (FM1 →
▲ SEEK ▼ FM2 → MW → LW...)
Tijdens het beluisteren van een zender
● Druk erop: om naar de volgende/vorige vooraf
MUTE
ingestelde zender te gaan. Tijdens een gesprek
● Druk erop en houd ingedrukt: om de Druk erop: om de MIC aan of uit te zetten. Functie
volgende/vorige radiozender te zoeken. (De MUTE Tijdens de modus
radio zoekt alleen naar zenders met een sterk Tijdens het afspelen van radio of CD/USB/BT audio
signaal die op de geselecteerde band staan) Druk erop: om de radio dempen aan of uit te zetten of
Tijdens het afspelen van CD/USB/BT audio het afspelen van CD/USB te pauzeren
● Druk erop: om naar het volgende/vorige
nummer te gaan. Phone [ ]
● Druk erop en houd ingedrukt: door de Tijdens stand-by
nummers heen vooruit-/achteruitspoelen. Druk erop en houd ingedrukt: om iemand te bellen via
(alleen voor het afspelen van CD/USB) de functie laatste nummer bellen
PWR [ ] Tijdens een inkomend gesprek
● Druk erop: om het inkomende gesprek te ontvangen
Druk erop: om het systeem aan of uit te zetten
● Druk erop en houd ingedrukt: om het inkomende
of om naar de modus privé-gesprek te gaan
Dutch
voor een inkomend gesprek. gesprek te weigeren
Tijdens een gesprek
● Druk erop: om te schakelen naar het privé of
Bluetooth-gesprek
● Druk erop en houd ingedrukt: om een gesprek te
beëindigen.
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Probleemoplossing
▶ Algemeen
Symptomen Mogelijke oorzaken Mogelijke oplossingen
- Er is geen geluid. - MUTE staat op ON. - Zet MUTE op OFF.
- Ruis - Er is een generator van - Houd generators van elektromagnetische golven, zoals mobiele
elektromagnetische golven, zoals een telefoons, uit de buurt van de unit bedrading van de unit. Indien
mobiele telefoon, in de buurt van de unit of de ruis niet geëlimineerd kan worden vanwege de kabelset van
van de elektrische kabels. de auto, moet u contact opnemen met uw dealer.
- Er komt geen geluid uit - De instelling van de balans/fader is niet - Pas de balans/fader opnieuw aan.
luidspreker(s) geschikt.
▶ Radio
- Slechte ontvangst of ruis - Ontoereikende uitzendcondities. - Ontvang en luister naar de signalen van de betroffen zender in
de modus analoog.
- Het zoeken duurt te lang. - Het aantal te ontvangen zenders is minder - Ga naar een gebied waar het aantal te ontvangen zenders
dan zes. maximaal is en probeer ze opnieuw in te stellen.
- Het aantal vooraf ingestelde - Het contact van de batterijgeleiding is - Zorg ervoor dat de batterijgeleiding goed aangesloten wordt en
zenders is minder dan zes. slecht of de batterijgeleiding krijgt niet altijd stel de zenders opnieuw in.
Dutch
stroom.
- Vooraf ingestelde zenders - Digitaal zoeken kan even duren. - Ga over op automatisch zoeken en ga verder met zoeken.
kunnen niet opgeslagen
worden.
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Probleemoplossing
▶ MP3[WMA] CD-speler
- Speelt niet af of disk wordt - De disk is ondersteboven ingestoken. - Steek de disk correct in.
uitgeworpen - Er zit een fout of een vreemd voorwerp op - Verwijder vreemde voorwerpen of gebruik een disk zonder
de disk. fouten.
- De disk bevat niet-afspeelbare, - Raadpleeg de beschrijving over MP3/WMA voor afspeelbare
geformatteerde data. geluidsgegevens naast CD-DA (bijv. muziek CD).
- De unit speelt af vanaf het ROM-nummer - Sla het ROM-nummer over.
van een CD met gemengde modi.
- De CD-R/RW's die - De afspeelbaarheid van bepaalde CD- - Maak na de beschrijving over MP3/WMA te raadplegen CD-
afgespeeld kunnen worden R/RW’s kan afhangen van de combinatie R/RW’s in verschillende combinaties van media,
op andere apparaten zijn niet van media, opnamesoftware en recorder opnamesoftware en recorder.
afspeelbaar deze unit. die gebruikt worden, zelfs als deze CD-
R/RW’s afspeelbaar zijn op andere
apparaten, zoals een PC.
- Geluid overslaan of ruis - Er zit een fout of een vreemd voorwerp op - Verwijder het vreemde voorwerp of gebruik een disk zonder
de disk. fouten, raadpleeg de beschrijving van MP3/WMA.
- Geluid overslaan vanwege - De unit is niet voldoende beveiligd. - Maak de unit vast aan de console box met een band aan de
trilling - De unit is aan de voorzijde gekanteld op achterkant, etc.
een hoek van meer dan 30°. - Zorg ervoor dat de hoek 30° of minder is.
- Disk niet uitwerpbaar - Een label is in de unit van de CD - Ga naar de dealer waar u de unit hebt gekocht.
losgekomen.
Dutch
25
GETtheMANUALS.org
Probleemoplossing
▶ USB MP3[WMA]-speler
- De USB werkt niet. - USB-geheugen is beschadigd. - Gebruik nadat USB geformatteerd is naar FAT 12/16/32 formaat.
- USB-geheugen is vies. - Verwijder vreemde substanties van het oppervlak van het USB-
geheugen en multimedia-aansluitpunt.
- Een afzonderlijk gekochte USB HUB wordt - Sluit het USB-geheugen direct aan op het multimedia-
gebruikt. aansluitpunt van het voertuig.
- Een USB-verlengsnoer wordt gebruikt. - Sluit het USB-geheugen direct aan op het multimedia-
aansluitpunt van het voertuig.
- Een USB dat niet een USB-geheugen is - Gebruik een standaard USB-geheugen.
van het type metalen deksel wordt
gebruikt.
- Een HDD-type, CF, SD-geheugen wordt - Gebruik een standaard USB-geheugen.
gebruikt.
- Er zijn geen muziekbestanden die - Alleen MP3, WMA-bestandformaten worden ondersteund.
afgespeeld kunnen worden. Gebruik alleen ondersteunde muziekbestandformaten.
Dutch
26
GETtheMANUALS.org
Specificaties
▶ Algemene sectie ▶ MP3[WMA]/CD-sectie
Stroomtoevoer DC 14.4V negatieve aarding Bemonsteringsfrequentie 8 keer oversampling
Impedantie luidspreker 4 ohm DA converter 4 DAC-systeem
Max. vermogen 45 Watt x 4 zend. Pick-up type Astigma 3-beam
Gewicht 880 g (netto) Lichtbron Semiconductor laser
Afmetingen (WxHxD) 178 x 52 x 155 mm Golflengte 780 nm
Frequentiereactie 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz (±3 dB)
▶ FM/MW/LW radiosectie
Ratio signaal tot ruis ≥50 dB
FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108 MHz
Totale harmonische vervorming ≤1 % (1 kHz)
Frequentiebereik MM 522 kHz ~ 1,620 kHz
LW 144 kHz ~ 290 kHz Wow en flutter Onder meetbare limieten
FM ≤18 dBu Zenderafscheiding ≥35 dB
Bruikbare gevoeligheid MW ≤35 dBu
LW ≤35 dBu
FM ≥45 dB ▶ Bluetooth-sectie
Ratio signaal tot ruis MW ≥40 dB
LW ≥40 dB Bluetooth V2.0
Belangrijke spec.
Stereoseparatie FM ≥20 dB (Bluetooth V1,2 compatibel)
Gevoeligheid - 60 dBm
▶ USB MP3[WMA] sectie Intern geheugen 16 M bit Flash Memory
Dutch
Frequentiereactie 20 Hz ~ 20 KHz Hoger bandbreedte audio-ondersteuning
Totale harmonische vervorming 0.1 % (at 1 KHz) Toegepaste functie geavanceerde audio distributieprofiel
Hands-free profielondesteuning/privé-gesprek
Dynamisch bereik 85 dB (at 1 KHz)
Ratio signaal tot ruis 60 dB (at 1 KHz)
Specificaties en ontwerp zijn onderhevig aan wijzigingen vanwege
Zenderafscheiding 54 dB (at 1 KHz) verbeteringen zonder kennisgeving.
27
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
GETtheMANUALS.org
Memo
GETtheMANUALS.org
AGC-9145RY
GETtheMANUALS.org

2016 Ssang Yong Rexton Y295 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 Ssang Yong Rexton Y295 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Descriptions Capacity Specifications

1 Top View Front View

0-2 General Information

Descriptions D22DTR D20DTR D27DT D27DTP G32D

Overall length (mm) 4,755 ← ← ← ←

Descriptions D22DTR D20DTR D27DT D27DTP G32D

0-4 General Information

Descriptions D22DTR D20DTR D27DT D27DTP G32D

Model Electronic, 5-speed ← ← ← ←

Descriptions D22DTR D20DTR D27DT D27DTP G32D

Drive shaft type Ball joint type ← ← ← ←

0-6 General Information

1. Engine Number 2. Vin Label 3. Chassis Number

Gasoline Engine: The engine The chassis number is stamped

D22DTR D20DTR D27DT D27DTP

Room lamp switch

Rear fog Center switch

Door lock/unlock switch

0-8 General Information

diesel engine (d22dtR)

Brake and clutch

Coolant surge Power steering

Air cleaner Battery

Power steering Fuel filter

0-10 General Information

Engine oil dipstick 1. Priming pump

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir

Engine oil Engine oil cap

0-12 General Information

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir

Engine oil cap

0-14 General Information

1. Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Certificate in the user manual due to product size

EAC mark in the user manual due to product size.

0-16 General Information

Certificate in the user manual due to product size

Engine oil Coolant

Brake/clutch fluid Power steering fluid

1-2 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-3

yy Adjust the driver’s seat, headrest and steering wheel for

1-4 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-5

1-6 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-7

1-8 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-9

1-10 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-11

1-12 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-13

1-14 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-15

Driving On Hill Roads Caution

1-16 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-17

1-18 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-19

1-20 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-21

1-22 Safety Precautions